(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "A manual Greek lexicon of the New Testament"

1 




GIFT 
JANE KoSATHER 



i 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON 

OF THE 

NEW TESTAMENT 



A 

MANUAL 
GREEK LEXICON 

OF THE 

NEW TESTAMENT 



BY 



G. ABBOTT-SMITH, D.D., D.C.L. 

PROFESSOR OF NEW TESTAMENT LITERATURE IN THE MONTREAL DIOCESAN 

THEOLOGICAL COLLEGE AND ASSISTANT PROFESSOR IN THE 

ORIENTAL DEPARTMENT IN MCGILL UNIVERSITY 



NEW YORK 

CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS 

1922 



-■ • • • *• . 
• • » « * . 






Printed in the United States of America 







A "32^ 



^^ 



TO MY WIFE 



49Gl)t)3 



PREFACE 

The need of a new Greek-English Lexicon of the New 
Testament will hardly be questioned. Thayer's monumental 
work, deservedly the standard for more than thirty years 
past, and, supplemented by later literature, still likely to 
remain a standard of reference for some time to come, was 
rather too bulky to serve as a table companion to the New 
Testament for the average man. A smaller book, which 
would lend itself more readily to constant reference, has 
been a real and growing want for the student. 

This want has been enhanced by the progress of lexical 
study during the last quarter century. The study of verna- 
cular texts, which in recent years received a new impetus 
through the discovery of vast numbers of non-literary papyri, 
chiefly in Egypt, has removed all doubt as to tbe category to 
which the language of the New Testament belongs. It is 
now abundantly clear that the diction of the apostolic writers 
is not a peculiar isolated idiom, characteristic of Jewish Hel- 
lenists, but simply the common speech of the Greek-speaking 
world at the time when the New Testament books were 
written. 

While the statement just made has come to be a 
commonplace, it has not been so for long. There has arisen, 
therefore, the need not only of the collection and arrange- 
ment in convenient form (a need which is now being supplied 
for the advanced scholar in Moulton and Milligan's Voca- 
bulary of the Greek Testament) of the results of pioneer 
study in the papyri, but also of a systematic revision, in the 
light of recent research, of many of the views regarding the 
diction and vocabulary of the New Testament which were 
commonly accepted thirty or even twenty years ago. 

The considerations therefore — so well set forth by Dr. 
Moulton in his Prolegomena — \\ hich call for an entirely new 
grammar of the New Testament, apply also to the work of 
the Lexicographer. And the materials for his work — still 

vii 



Vlll PREFACE 

steadily accumulating — have been liberally furnished by the 
special studies of Deissmann and Thumb in Germany and 
Moulton and Milligan in Great Britain and have also found 
their way into the more recent commentaries. 

The new impulse given to the study of the Septuagint 
by the publication of the Oxford Concordance by Hatch and 
Eedpath, the Cambridge Manual Edition of the Septuagint 
and its accompanying Introduction by Dr. Swete, together with 
the Grammar of Mr. Thackeray, has also had its influence 
on New Testament studies. While Dr. Abbott's caution ^ as 
to the possibility of exaggerating the influence of the Septua- 
gint still holds good, the evidence of the papyri has brought 
about a growing sense of its value to the student of the New- 
Testament. More reference therefore has been made, it is 
believed, in this Lexicon to the usage of the Septuagint than 
in any previous work of the same kind, so that even where 
there may not appear to be any special significance in the Old 
Testament usage with respect to a particular word, the 
student will always have an idea of the extent and character 
of the use which was made of it in that version which was 
the most familiar form of the Old Testament to the writers 
of the New. 

The books mentioned in the Hst which follows are, out of 
a larger number to which I would register here a general 
acknowledgement of indebtedness, those which appeared to 
be, on the whole, the more accessible and useful to the 
average reader. Among the Lexicons, an almost equal debt 
is owed to Liddell and Scott and to Thayer. The classifica- 
tion of meanings in the latter, a characteristic excellence, 
often defies improvement, while Preuschen, though on the 
whole adding little to the work of his predecessors, is often 
helpful in this same particular. Not a few suggestions of 
fresh treatment have come from Fr. Zorell, S.J., whose 
scholarly work is quite modern and remarkably free from the 
ecclesiastical bias which one might have expected to find in it. 

Of the commentaries, besides those available to Thayer, 
the most helpful for lexical purposes have been those of Hort, 
Swete and Mayor in Macmillan's Series, also the Inter- 
national Critical Commentaries, especially the more recent 
issues. Some of Bishop Lightfoot's best lexical work is to 
be found in his posthumous Notes on Epistles of St. Paul, 
while Dr. Field's Notes on the Translation of the New 
Testament, contain a wealth of learning and sound judgment 

^Essays, 67 £f. 



PKBFAOB IX 

such as would be hard to parallel within the limits of a single 
volume. 

On points of grammar, references are mainly made to 
Dr. Moulton's Prolegomena and the English Translation of 
Blass, as the most recent and convenient of first-rate 
authorities. 

A brief treatment is given of the more important 
synonyms, in the belief that while classical distinctions 
cannot always be pressed in late and colloquial usage, it is 
an advantage to know something of the distinctive features 
of synonymous words as traceable in their etymology and 
literary history. 

For the text of the New Testament the standard adopted 
is that of Moulton and Geden's Concordance,'^ which, as the 
latest and best work of its kind, is likely to remain the re- 
cognised authority for many years to come. The Greek text 
followed therefore is that of Westcott and Hort, with which 
are compared the texts of the Eighth Edition of Tischendorf 
and of the English Revisers, the marginal readings of each 
being included. From the Textus Beceptus as such, no 
reading which modern editors have rejected is as a rule re- 
corded, except in cases where a word would otherwise be 
dropped from the vocabulary of the New Testament. Some- 
times, also, reference is made to a reading of the Beceptus 
to which some particular interest is attached. 

The asterisks and daggers in the margin follow, with the 
kind permission of the publishers and Mr. Geden, the notation 
of the Concordance. There is, however, the one difference, 
that whereas in Moulton and Geden the time limit marked 
by the dagger is the beginning of the Christian era, it seemed 
better for the purpose of the Lexicon to include in the 
category of " late Greek " all words found only in Greek 
writers after the time of Aristotle.^ 

It remains to express in general terms my grateful 
acknowledgement to colleagues and friends in McGill Uni- 
versity with its affiliated Theological Colleges and in my own 
Alma Mater, the University of Bishop's College, Lennoxville, 
as well as to many English friends, in Cambridge and else- 
where, who have given me valued advice and encouragement. 

All these will pardon me if I single out for special mention 
the one name of Dr. J. H. Moulton, the genial master-crafts- 

^ A Concordance to the Oreek Testament, by Rev. W. F. Moulton, M.A., 
D.D„ and Rev. A. S. Geden, M.A. Second Edition. T. & T. Clark, 1899. 
' See below, p. rvi. 



X PREFACE 

man of that science to which I have sought in a humble way 
to contribute what I could. At the beginning of my under- 
taking he took me in, a stranger, and gave me ungrudgingly 
of his counsel and direction, and also my first introduction to 
the publishers through whom the appearance of the work 
under the best possible auspices was assured. 

To the manifold assistance I have had from fellow- workers, 
both by word of mouth and through the printed page I would 
fain attribute most of the value which this modest effort may 
possess. For its deficiencies I am alone responsible, and I 
can only hope that in spite of them this book may sustain 
the note sounded in the last word in the alphabetical order 
of the New Testament Vocabulary — ax^eXi/Ao? — and may 
serve in a small way to the more faithful and intelligent 
study of the Book of the New Covenant of our Lord and 
Saviour in the language in which it was written. 

The foregoing paragraphs were written early in 1917, 
when, with the last sheets of the Lexicon, they were sent 
overseas for publication. The manuscript has thus been in- 
accessible for revision, whence the absence of any reference 
to much valuable material that has appeared, both in books 
and in periodicals, during the last four years, including the 
second volume of the Grammar of Dr. Moulton, whose tragic 
death as a victim of the ruthless warfare of the submarines 
was reported a few days after the earlier part of this Preface 
was written. The student is recommended to supplement 
the grammatical references in the body of the Lexicon by 
consulting the Index to Vol. II. of Dr. Moulton's Grammar. 

I take this opportunity of adding to the acknowledgements 
already made my thanks to Professors A. R. Gordon and 
S. B. Slack of McGill University and to the Rev. R. K. 
Naylor, sometime classical tutor at McGill, for their kind- 
ness in proof-reading, to the publishers for their generous 
enterprise at a time of unprecedented difficulty in the pro- 
duction of books, and to the compositors and readers of the 
Aberdeen University Press for their painstaking and accurate 
performance of a difficult task. 

G. ABBOTT-SMITH. 

MONTRHAT,, 

September, 1921. 



LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 



I. GENEEAL. 



absol. = 

ace. = 

act. = 

ad fin. = 

adj. = 

adv. = 

al. 

aor. = 

Apocr. = 

App. 

Aram. = 

Att. = 

bibl. 

bis = 

c. = 

of. 

cl. 

cogn. = 

compar. = 

contr. = 

dat. = 

e.g. 

eccl. = 

esp. = 

ex. = 

exc. = 
f. 
ff. 

fig- 

freq. 

fut. 

gen. 

Gk. 

Heb. 

i.e. 

Jb. 

id; 

impei's. 

impf. 



absolute. 

accusative. 

active. 

ad finem. 

adjective. 
■■ adverb. 

alibi (elsewhere). 

aorist. 

Apocrypha. 

Appendix. 

Aramaic. 

Attic. 
; biblical. 

twice. 

cum (ivith). 

confer [compare). 

classics, classical. 

cognate. 

comparative. 

contracted. 

dative. 

exempli gratia (for in- 
stance). 

ecclesiastical. 

especially. 

example. 

except. 

and following (verse). 
„ (verses). 

figurative. 

frequent. 

future. 

genitive. 

Greek. 

Hebrew. 
: id est. 

in the same place. 

the same. 

impersonal. 
; imperfect. 



impv. 

in 1. 

indie. 

inf. 

infr. 

Ion. 

I.e. 

m. 

metaph, 

meton. 

MGr. 

n. 

neg. 

nom. 

om. 

opp. 

optat. 

pass. 

pers. 

pf. 

plpf. 

prep. 

prop. 

ptcp. 

q.v. 

rei 

s. 

s.v. 

se. 

seq. 

subjc. 

subst. 

superl. 

supr. 

syu. 

Targ. 

V. 

vb. 
v.l. 
v.s. 



= imperative. 

= in loco. 

= indicative. 

= infinitive. 

= infra. 

= Ionic. 

= loco citato. 

= masculine, 

= metaphorically. 

= metonymj'. 

= Modern Greek. 

= note, neuter. 

= negative. 

= nominative. 

= omit, omits. 

= opposed to. 

= optative. 

= passive. 

= person. 

= perfect. 

= pluperfect. 

= preposition. 

= properly. 

= participle. 

= quod vide. 

= of the thing. 

= sub. 

= sub voce. 

= scilicet (that is). 

= sequente (followed by), 

— subjunctive. 

= substantive. 

= superlative. 

= supra. 

= synonym. 

= Targum. 

= vide. 

= verb. 

= variant reading. 

= vide sub. 



Equivalent to, equals, <^ Derived from or related to. 



XI 



zu 



LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 



11. BIBLICAL. 







(a) BO 


OKS. 








Septuagint. 




Ge 


= Genesis. 




Ez 


= Ezekiel. 


Ex 


= Exodus. 




Da 


= Daniel. 


Le 


= Leviticus. 




Ho 


= Hosea. 


Nu 


= Numbers. 




Jl 


= Joel. 


De 


= Deuteronomy. 




Am 


= Amos. 


Jos 


= Joshua. 




Ob 


= Obadiah. 


Jg 


= Judges. 




Jh 


= Jonah. 


Ru 


= Ruth. 




Mi 


= Micah. 


I, II Ki 


= I, II Kings 


(E.V., 


Na 


= Nahum. 




Samuel). 




Hb 


= Habakkuk. 


III, IV Ki 


= III, IV Kings 


(E.V., 


Ze 


= Zephaniah. 




I, II Kings 


). 


Hg 


= Haggai. 


I, II Ch 


= 1, II Chronicles. 


Za 


= Zachariah. 


iiEs 


= II Esdras 


(E.V., 


Ma 


= Malachi. 




Ezra). 




I Es 


= I Esdras. 


Ne 


= Nehemiah. 




To 


= Tobit. 


Es 


= Esther. 




Jth 


= Judith. 


Jb 


= Job. 




Wi 


= Wisdom. 


Ps 


= Psalms. 




Si 


= Sirach. 


Pr 


= Proverbs. 




Ba 


= Baruch. 


Ec 


= Ecclesiastes. 




DaSu 


= Susannah. 


Ca 


= Canticles. 




Da Bel 


= Bel and the Dragon 


Is 


= Isaiah. 




Pr Ma 


= Prayer of Manasseh 


Je 


= Jeremiah. 




i-iv Mac 


= I-IV Maccabees. 


La 


= Lamentations. 


New Te 


stament. 




Mt 


= St. Matthew. 




I, II Th 


= I, II Thessalonians. 


Mk 


= St. Mark. 




I, II Ti 


= I, II Timothy. 


T.k 


= St. Luke. 




Tit 


= Titus. 


Jo 


= St. John. 




Phm 


= Philemon. 


Ac 


= Acts. 




He 


= Hebrews. 


Ro 


= Romans. 




Ja 


= Jamea. 


I, II Co 


= I, n Corinthians 




I, II Pe 


= I, II Peter, 


Ga 


= Galatians. 




I-III Jo 


= I-III John. 


Eph 


= Ephesians. 




Ju 


= Jude. 


Phi 


= Philippians. 




Re 


= Revelation. 


Col 


= Colossians. 









(6) VERSIONS AND EDITIONS. 



Al. 


= anon, version quoted 


R (in LXX = Sixtine Ed. of LXX 




by Origen. 


refs.) (1587). 


Aq. 


= Aquila. 


Rec. = Received Text. 


AV 


= Authorized version. 


RV = Revised Veision. 


B 


= Beza. 


R, txt., mg. = R.V. text, margin. 


E 


= Elzevir. 


Sm. = Symmachus. 


EV 


= English version (A.V. 


T = Tischendorf. 




and R.V.). 


Th. = Theodotion. 


Or. Ven. 


= Grsecus Venetus. 


Tr. = Tregelles. 


L 


= Lachmann. 


Vg. = Vulgate. 


LXX 


= Septuagint. 


WH = Westcott and Hort. 



LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 



Xlll 



III. ANCIENT WEITEES. 

(i/, ill, etc. = 1st, 2nd century, etc.) 



Ael. = Aelian, ii/A.D. 

Msoh. = iEschylus, v/B.C. 
.ffischin. = ^schines, iv/B.C. 
Anth. = Anthology. 
Antonin. = M. Aurel. Antoninus, 

ii/A.D. 
Apoll. = Apollonius Khodius, 

Rhod. ii/B.C. 

Arist. = Aristotle, iv/B.C. 
Aristoph. = Aristophanes, v/B.C. 
Ath. = Athanasius, iv/A.D. 

GIG ■ = Corpus Inscriptionum 

Grsecarum. 
Dio Cass. = Dio Cassius, ii/A.D. 
Diod. = Diodorus Siculus, i/B.C. 
Diog. = Diogenes Laertius, 

Laert. ii/A.D. 

Dion. H. = Dionysius of Halicar- 

nassus, i/B.C. 
Diosc. = Dioscorides, i-ii/A.D. 
Eur. = Euripides, v/B.C. 

Eustath. = Eustathius, xii/A.D. 
FIJ = Flavius Josephus, i/A.D. 

Greg. = Gregory of Nazianzus, 

Naz. iv/A.D. 

Hdt. = Herodotus, v/B.C. 

Heliod. = Heliodorus, iv/A.D. 



Herm. = Hermas, ii/A.D. 
Has. =Hesiod, ix/B.C? 

Hipp. = Hippocrates, v/B.C. 
Horn. = Homer, ix/B.C. ? 
Inscr. = Inscriptions. 
Luc. = Lucian, ii/A.D. 

Lys. = Lysias, v/B.C. 

Menand. = Menander, iv/B.G. 
IT. = Papyri. 

Pans. = Pausanias, ii/A.D. 
Phalar. = Phalaris, Spurius Epp. ? 
Philo. = Philo Judseus, i/A.D. 
Pind. = Pindar, v/B.C. 
Plat. = Plato, v-iv/B.C. 
Plut. = Plutarch, ii/A.D. 
Polyb. = Polybius, ii/B.C. 
SocT.,nE= Socrates, Hist. Eccl., 

v/A.D. 
Soph. = Sophocles, v/B.O. 
Strab. = Strabo, i/B.C. 
Test. Zeb.= Testimony of Zebedee, 

ii/A.D. 
Theogn. = Theognis, vi/B.C. 
Theophr. = Theophrastus, iv/B.C. 
Thuc. = Thucydides, v/B.C. 
Xen. = Xenophon, v-iv/B.G. 



Abbott, Essays 

Abbott, JO 
Abbott, JV 
AB 

Blass, Gosp. 
Blass, Or, 

Boisacq 

Burton 

CQT 

Charles, APOT 

CR 

Cremer 

Dalman, Gt. 



IV. MODEEN WEITEES. 

= Essays chiefly on the Original Texts of the Old and 

New Testaments, by T. K. Abbott. Longmans, 1891. 
= Johannine Grammar, by E. A. Abbott. London, 1906. 
= Johannine Vocabulary, by the same. London, 1905. 
= St. Paul's Epistle to the Ephesians, by J. Armitage 

Robinson. Second Edition. Macmillan, 1909. 
= A Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament, 

by Brown, Driver, and Briggs. Oxford, 1906. 
= Philology of the Gospels, by F. Blass. Macmillan, 

1898. 
= Grammar of N.T. Greek, by F. Blass, tr. by H. St. J. 

Thackeray.^ Macmillan, 1898. 
= Dictionnaire Etymologique de la langue Grecque, par 

Emile Boisacq. Paris, 1907-1914. 
= New Testament Moods and Tenses, by E. de W. 

Burton. Third Edition. Univ. Chicago, 1898. 
= Cambridge Greek Testament for Schools and Colleges. 
= Apocrypha and Pseudepigrapha of the Old Testament, 

by R. H. Charles. Oxford, 1913. 
= Classical Review. London, 1887 fi. 
= Biblico-Theological Lexicon of N.T. Greek, by H. 

Cremer. Third English Edition, with Supplement. 

T. & T. Clark, 1886. 
■» Gramm&tiy des judish-palastinischen Aramaish, by 

G. Dalman. Leipzig, 189^ 



XIV 

Dal man, Words 

DAG 

DB 

DB 1-vol. 

DCQ 

Deiss., BS 

Deiss., LAE 

EB 
Edwards, Lex. 

EOT 
Ellic. 

Enc. Brit. 

Exp. Times 

Field, Notes 

Gifford, Inc. 
Grimm-Thayer 

Hatch, Essays 
Hort 



ICG 

Interp. Gomm. 
Jannaris 

JThS 

Kennedy, Sources 

Kiihner* 



Lft. 

Lft., Notes 

LS 

Mayor 



Light 



LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 

The Words of Jesus, by G. Dalman. English Edition. 

T. & T. Clark, 1902. 
Dictionary of the Apostolic Church, edited by J. 

Hastings. Vol. I. Scribners, 1915. 
Dictionary of the Bible, edited by J, Hastings. 5 vols. 

(i-iv, e^:t. = extra vol.). Scribners, 1898-1904. 
Dictionary of the Bible (in one volume), by J. Hastings. 

Poribiu'i-s, 1909. 
Dictionary of Christ and the Gospels, edited by J, 

Hastings. 2 vols. Scribnere, 1907-08. 
Bible Studies, by G. A. Deissmann. Second English 

Edition, including Bibelstudien and Neue Bibel- 

studien, tr. by A. Grieve. T. & T. Clark, 1909. 
from the Ancient East, by A. Deissmann, tr. by 

L. R. M. Strachau. Second Edition. Hodder, 1908. 
Encyclopaedia Biblica. 4 vols. London, 1899-1903. 
An English-Greek Lexicon, by G. M. Edwards. 

Camb., 1912. 
Expositor's Greek Testament. 
Commentary on St. Paul's Epistles, by 0. J. Ellicott. 

Andover, 1860-65. 
Encyclopaedia Britannica. Eleventh Edition. Camb. 

Univ. Press, 1910. 
The Expository Times, edited by J. Hastings. T. & T. 

Clark, 1890 ff. 
Notes on the Translation of the N.T., by F. Field, 

Camb., 1899. 
The Incarnation, by E. Gifford. Hodder, 1897. 
A Greek-English Lexicon of the N.T., being Grimm's 

Wilkes Clavis Novi Testamenti, tr. by J. H. Thayer. 

New York, 1897. 
Essays in Biblical Greek, by Edwin Hatch. Oxford. 

1889. 
Commentaries on the Greek Text of the Epistle of St. 

James (1^-4") ; The First Epistle of St. Peter (li-2''); 

and the Apocalypse of St. John (1-3), by F. J. A. 

Hort. Macmilian, 1898-1909. 
International Critical Commentary. Scribnei-s. 
Interpreter's Commentary. N.Y., Barnes & Co. 
A Historical Greek Grammar, by A. N. Jannaris. 

Macmilian, 1897. 
Journal of Theological Studies. London, 1899 ff. 
Sources of N.T. Greek, by H. A. A. Kennedy. T. & 

T. Clark, 1895. 
Ausfiihrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache, by 

R. Kiihner. Third Edition, by F. Blass and B. 

Gerth, 4 vols., 1890-1904. 
Commentaries on St. Paul's Epistles to the Galatians 

(1892) ; Philippians (Third Edition, 1873) ; and Colos- 

sians and Philemon (1892), by J. B. Lightfoot. 

Macmilian. Also Apostolic Fathers, by the same. 

5 vols. Macmilian, 1890. 
Notes on Epistles of St. Paul, by J. B. Lightfoot. 

Macmilian, 1895. 
A Greek-English Lexicon, by H. G. Liddell and 

R. Scott. Seventh Edition. Harper, 1889. 
Commentaries on the Epistle of St. James (Third 

Edition, 1910), and the Epistle of St. Jude and tha 

Second Epistle of St. Peter. Macmilian, 1907. 



LIST OF ABBEEVIATIONS 



XV 



Mayser 

M'Neile 

Meyer 

Milligan, Selections 

MM (xi-xxv) 

MM (s.v.) 

M.Pr. 

M, Th. 

Moffatt 

Mozley, Ps. 

NTD 

Page 

Backham 

Ramsay, St. Paul 

Kendall 

Rutherford, NPhr. 

Schmidt 

Simcox 

Soph., Lex. 

Swete 

Thackeray, Or. 

Thayer 
Thumb, Handh. 

Thumb, Hellen. 
Tdf., Pr. 

Tr„ Syn. 

Vau. 

Veitch 



Grammatik der gr. Papyri aus der Ptolemaerzeit, by 

E. Mayser. Leipzig, 1906. 
The Gospel according to St. Matthew, by A. H. 

M'Neile. Macmillan, 1915. 
Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the N.T., by 

H. A. W. Meyer. Eng. tr., T. & T. Clark, 1883. 
Selections from the Greek Papyri, by G. Milligan. 

Cambridge, 1910. 
: Lexical Notes from the Papyri, by J. H. Moulton and 

and G. Milligan. Expositor VII, vi, 567 fi. ; 

VIII, iv, 561 ff. 
: The Vocabulary of the Greek Testament, by J. H. 

Moulton and G. Milligan. Part I (a) ; Part II (j8-5). 

Hodder, 1914-15 (remaining parts in preparation). 
: A Grammar of N.T. Greek. Vol. I, Prolegomena, by 

J. H. Moulton. Third Edition. Scribners, 1908. 
: St. Paul's Epistles to the Thessalonians, by G. Milli- 
gan. Macmillan, 1908. 
: James Moffatt, An Introduction to the Literature of 

the N.T. Scribners, 1911. 
The Psalter of the Church, by P. W. Mozley, Cambridge, 

1905. 
: The New Testament Documents, by G. Milligan. 

Macmillan, 1913. 
: The Acts of the Apostles, by T. E. Page. Macmillan, 

1903. 
: The Acts of the Apostles, by R. B. Rackham. 

Methuen, 1901. 
St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen, by 

W. M. Ramsay. Hodder, 1895. 
: The Epistle to the Hebrews, by F. Rendall. Mac- 
millan, 1911. 
: The New Phrynichus, by W. G. Rutherford. Mac- 
millan, 1881. 
: J. H. Heinrich Schmidt, Synonymik der Griechischen 

Sprache. 4 vols. Leips., 1876-1886. 
= W. H. Simcox, the Language of the New Testament. 

Second Edition. Hodder, 1892. 
= Greek Lexicon of the Roman and Byzantine Periods, 

by E. A. Sophocles. Scribners, 1900. 
= Commentaries on the Gospel according to St. Mark 

(Third Edition, 1909) and the Apocalypse of St. John, 

by H. B. Swete. Macmillan, 1906. 
: A Grammar of the O.T. in Greek I, by H. St. J. 

Thackeray. Cambridge, 1909. 
Grimm-Thayer, q.v. 
Handbook of the Modern Greek Vernacular, by A. 

Thumb. Tr. from the Second German Edition by 

S. Angus. T. & T. Clark, 1912. 
Die Griechische Sprache im Zeitalter des Hellenismus, 

von A. Thumb. Strassburg, 1901. 
= Novum Testamentum Graece, C. Tischendorf. Editio 

octava critica maior. Vol III, Prolegomena, by 

C. R. Gregory. Leipzig, 1894. 
: Synonyms of the N. T. , by R. C. Trench. Ninth Edition. 

Macmillan, 1880. 
: St. Paul's Epistle to the Romans, by C. F. Vaughan. 

Sixth Edition. Macmillan, 1885. 
: Greek Verbs, Irregular and Defective, by W. Veitch, 

Oxford, 1887. 



XVI 

Viteau 

VD, MOr. 
Westo, 

WH 
WM 

ws 

Zorell 



LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 

= 6tude sur le grec du N,T., by J. Viteau. Vol. I, Le 
Verbe: Syntaxe des Propositions, Paris, 1893; 
Vol. II., Sujet: Complement et Attribut, 1896. 

= E. Vincent and T. G. Dickson, A Handbook to Modern 
Greek. Second Edition. Macmillan, 1904. 

= Commentaries on the Gospel according to St. John, by 
B. F. Westcott, 2 Vols., Murray, 1908 ; the Epistle 
to the Ephesians, Macmiilan, 1906; the Epistles 
of St. John, Third Edition, Macmillan, 1892. 

= The N.T. in the original Greek, by B. F. Westcott and 

F. J. A. Hort. Vol. II, Introduction and Appendix. 
Macmillan, 1881. 

= A Grammar of N.T. Greek, tr. from G. B. Winer's 7th 
Edition, with large additions, by W. P. Moulton. 
Third Edition. T. & T. Clark, 1882. 

= Grammatik des neutestamentlichen Sprachidioms, von 

G. B. Winer, 8te Aufl. von P. W. Schmiedel. 
Gottingen, 1894. 

= Novi Testamenti Lexicon Graecum (Cursus Scripturae 
Sacrae I, vii), auctore Fr, Zorell, S.J. Paris, 1911. 



* A single asterisk at the beginning of an article denotes (as in Moulton 
And Geden's Concordance) that the word to which it is attached is not found 
in the LXX or other Greek Versions of the O.T. and Apocrypha. 

** A double asterisk similarly afifixed denotes that the word occurs either 
in the Apocrypha or in the later Greek Versions of the O.T., but not in the 
LXX Version of the Hebrew Canonical books, and therefore either has, as 
a rule, no (known) Hebrew equivalent, or else was used in a translation not 
kiiown to the N.T. writers. The later Greek versions (Aq., etc.) are cited, as 
a rule, only when a word is not found in LXX. 

* A single asterisk placed after a list of passages from the LXX signifies 
tnat the word occurs nowhere else in that Version. 

t A dagger at the beginning of an article denotes that the word is not 
found in Greek writers of the classical period. 

t A dagger at the close of an article signifies that all the instances of the 
word's occurrence in the N.T. have been cited. 

An inferior numeral after a biblical book (e.g. in Macg) indicates the 
number of times a word occurs in that book. 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF 
THE NEW TESTAMENT 



A, a, SiK^a (q.v.), to, indecl., aljyha, the first letter of the Greek 
alphabet. As a numeral, a = 1, a^ = 1000. As a prefix, it appears 
to have at least two and perhaps three distinct senses : 1. d- (before 
a vowel, dv-) negative, as in a-yvwo-Tos, d-Sixos. 2. d-, d- copulative, 
indicating community and fellowship, as in d-TrAoCs, a-KoXovOeu), 
a-SiXcf)6s. 3. An intensive force (LS, s. a), as in a.-T€pit,o} is sometimes 
assumed (but v. Boisacq, s.v.). 

'AapolK (Heb. ]niN), indecl. (in FIJ, -wvos), Aaron (Ex 4", al.) : 

Lk 15, Ac 7*», He 5* 7^1 9*.+ 

'APaSSwv (Heb. ]niN , destruction ; LXX, dTrwXcia, only in 

Wisdom Lit., of the place of the ruined dead : Jb 26''' 2822 3112^ pg 8812, 
Pr 1511*), indecl. ; in NT, Abaddon, the angel of the Abyss : Ee 9^\f 
*dpapiis, -€s «;8dpos), without weight; metaph. (MM, VGT, s.v.) 
not burdensome : 11 Co ll^.t 

*t'Aj3pd (T, -a), indecl. (Aram, xnx, emphatic form of n^t = Heb. 

21< , father), used in the phrase 'A. 6 irarrjp, Abba, Father (v. Swete on 

Mk, I.e.) : Mk 1436, Eo 8^5, Ga d^.t 

'APeiXtjn] (T, Eec. 'AySt-), -^s, Tj (sc. x^^po), Abilene, a district in 
the Anti-Lebanon : Lk 3^t 

"ApeX (WH, "A-), 6, indecl. (Heb. ^3^1), Abel (Ge 42-10) : He 11* 

1224; af/.a-'A., Mt 2335, Lk lisi.t 

'Apid (Heb. njns? , in;n>?), 6, indecl. (in FIJ, 'A^Stas, -a), Abia, 

Abijah. 1. Son of Eehoboam (iii Ki 14^) : Mt 1^. 2. A priest of the 
line of Eleazar (i Ch 24^. lO) ; Lk l^.t 

'A(3id0ap, 6, indecl. (Heb. in^^5N), Abiathar (i Ki 21^) : Mk 226.t 

'APiXt]!/!!, V.8. 'A^eLXrjvrj. 

'ApiouS, 6, indecl. (Heb. inn-^nN), Abiicd, Abihud : Mt l".t 

'Appadfi (Heb. Dn^^X), 6, indecl. (in FIJ, 'A/Spafio's, -ov; MM, 

VGT, S.V.), Abraham (Ge 17^ al.) : Mt l^- 2 al. 

1 



*3 MANUAL 'i.REEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

a-Poaaos, -ov (<[Ion. /3v(ra-6<i = ^vdoi), 1. in cl., boundless, bottom- 
less (e.g. 5. TTcXayos, a. ttXoStos, ^sch.). 2. [In LXX (for Dinp , Ge l^, 
al. ; exc. Is 4427, Jb 41^2 for n^lS , nbisp , Jb 36i6 for nm) and] NT, 

as subst. (MM, VGT, s.v.), ^ a. (sc. x<^P«). ^^^ a&^ss; (a) of the sea 
(Ge 1^) ; (b) of the underworld, as the abode of the dead : Eo 10'^ 
(a paraphrase of De 30^^ LXX) ; as the abode of demons, Lk 8*^, 
Re 9i« 2, 11 117 178 201. 3 (Cremer, 2).t 

'AYapos, -ov, 6, Agabus : Ac ll^s 21io.+ 

*t dyaeoepY^w, -w, to do Qood, show kindness : 1 Ti 6^^ (Cremer, 8).t 

d,Ya0o-Troi^(i», -w ( = cl. ayadbv ttoulv, evepyeTetv) , [in LXX : Nu 10^^, 

Jg 171=^ A, Ze 112 (^j2i hi.), To 12i»B, i Mac lp3, n Mac 1^*;] to do 

good ; (a) univ. : i Pe 2i*' 20 36, 17^ m Jo ^i ; (b) for another's benefit : 

Mk 3* (T, S.ya06v TTOL^o-ai), Lk 69 ; (c) ace. pers., Lk 6^3. 35 (Cremer, 8).+ 

*t dYaOoTToua, -as, 17 (■< ayadoiroio?), well-doing : I Pe 4i9.t 
**t dYaOoTTOios, -01', = cl. ayaOovpyo^, [in LXX, of a woman who 
deals pleasantly in order to corrupt, Si 42^'^ * ;] doing well, acting rightly 
(Plut.) : I Pe 21* (Cremer, 8 ; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dYaeos, -■>?, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for niia ;] in general, good, in 
physical and in moral sense, used of persons, things, acts, conditions, 
etc., applied to that which is regarded as " perfect in its kind, so as to 
produce pleasure and satisfaction, . . . that which, in itself good, is also 
at once for the good and the advantage of him who comes in contact 
with it" (Cremer, 3): yi?, Lk 8^; 8ey8pov, Mt 7^^; /capSta, Lk 8^^; 
Sdo-is, Ja 117 . ^^p^^^ Lk 10*2 ; ^pyor (freq. in PL), Phi 1^ ; eXms, 11 Th 2i« ; 
er^<javp6<i, Mt 1235 ; fxvda, I Th 3« (cf. II Mac P^) ; as subst., t6 d., that 
which is morally good, beneficial, acceptable to God, Eo 122 . ^py<{^£o-. 
Oai TO a., Eo 210, Eph 428; Trpdaa-eiv, Eo 9^, II Co 5^^ ; 8lwk€lv, I Th S^^; 
IXLfjLeia-OaL, III Jo ^ ; KoWaa-Oai. T(Z d., Eo 12^ ; ipoirav Trepl tov a., Mt IQl^ ; 
Slolkovo's CIS TO a., Eo 13* ; TO d. crov, thy favour, benefit, Phm 1* ; 
pi., Ta a., of goods, possessions, Lk 12^^; of spiritual benefits, Eo IQi*, 
He 9" IQi. d. is opp. to ■n-ovr]p6s, Mt 5** 20^5 ; xa/cos, Eo 7^^ ; (f^aiXo?, 
Eo 911, II Co 510 (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.). 

Syn. : KttXo's, 8tKaios. K. properly refers to goodliness as mani- 
fested in form : d. to inner excellence (cf. the cl. KaX6<s Kaya66<5 and 
ev KapBta k. kol d., Lk 81^). In Eo 6^, where it is contrasted with 8., 
d. implies a kindliness and attractiveness not necessarily possessed 
by the SiKaios, who merely measures up to a high standard of rectitude 
(cf. dyadwcrvvr]). 

*f 6.yaQoupyi<o, -5, Contracted form (rare, v. WH, App., 145) of 
ayaOoep- (q.v.), to do good : Ac 14i''.t 

t ayaQiocTuvr] (on the termination, v.s. dytoTi;?, and cf . WH, App., 
152 ; MM, VGT, s.v.), -77s, v « dya^o's), [in LXX for nnil3 , niM , MM , 

only in Heb. bks. ;] goodness (representing " the kindlier, as St/<aiocrw7;, 
the sterner element in the ideal character," AE, Eph., 5^ ; on its rela- 
tion to ^prjaroT-q^, v. Tr., Syn., §lxiii) : Eo 151*, q^ 522^ „ Th in.t 

tdyaXXiaffis, -cws, rj {<^dyaXXia.ia), [in LXX (most freq. in Pss. and 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 3 

often coupled with €icf>poa-vvrj, as Ps 44 (45)^^) chiefly for b'^S ;] exulta- 
tion, exuberant joy : Lk 1*^ Ac 2^", He 1^ Ju "*; x^pa xal a., Lk 1^* 
(Cremer, 592). t 

t dyaXXido), -w, Hellenistic form of cl. aydWw, to glorify, mid. -o/tai, 
to exult in ; [in LXX (most freq. in Pss.) chiefly for b^3 , ]:i pi. ;] to 
exult, rejoice greatly : seq. i-n-L, c. dat., Lk 1*' ; c. dat. mod., i Pe 1^, 
Ee 19". Mid., with same sense : Mt 5^2, Lk lO-^, Ac 2^'« 16^4, i Pe 4^3 ; 
seq. 'va, Jo 8^" ; e'v, Jo 5^^ (1 aor. pass. perh. as mid. ; but v. Mozley, 
Psalter, 5), i Pe 1« (Cremer, 590).t 

** a-yajios, -ov, [in LXX : IV Mac 16^ * ;] unmarried : i Co 7^' ^^ ; 
fem. (= cl. avaiSpos), ib. i^'^^.t 

** dyai'aKTcw, -w (<] ayav, vmch, axpfxai, to grieve), [in LXX : Wi 5^2 
1227, Da TH Bel ^s, iv Mac 4^1 * ;] to be indignant : Mt 2V^ 26^ Mk 10^* 
144 . seq. TTcpi', Mt 2024, Mk lO^i ; seq. 6tl, Lk 13i4 (v. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

** dYakdKTTjo-is, -eojs, rj (<^ dyavaKTew), [in LXX : Es 18^ N^ * ;] indig- 
nation : II Co 711 (v. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dyaTTdoj, -w, [in LXX chiefly for ilX ;] to love, to feel and exhibit 
esteem and goodwill to a person, to prize and delight in a thing. 

1. Of human affection, to men : t. TrXrjalov, Mt 5^^ ; t. exOpovs, ib. 4* ; 
to Christ, Jo 842; to God, Mt 223"; ^ ^cc. rei, Lk 1143, Jq i^iz^ 
Eph 525, II Tim 48' 10, He 1^, i Pe 2i' 310, 11 Pe 2l^ i Jo 2^\ Ee 12ii. 

2. Of divine love; (a) God's love : to men, Eo 8^"; to Christ, Jo S^S; 
(&) Christ's love : to men, Mk 102^ ; to God, Jo 14^1 ; c. cogn. ace, 
Jo 172«, Eph 24. 

Syn. : (jitXeo). From its supposed etymology (Thayer, LS ; but 
V. also Boisacq) d. is commonly understood properly to denote love 
based on esteem (diligo), as distinct from that expressed by ^lAc'w 
(amo), spontaneous natural affection, emotional and unreasoning. If 
this distinction holds, d. is fitly used in NT of Christian love to God 
and man, the spiritual affection which follows the direction of the 
will, and which, therefore, unlike that feeling which is instinctive and 
unreasoned, can be commanded as a duty. (Cf. dydin}, and v. Tr., 
Syn.,%^n ; Cremer, 9, 592 ; and esp. MM, "VGT, s.v.) 

+ dydTrT), -775, t}, [in LXX for na,nN* , which is also rendered by 

dya.Tnf]crL<; and ^tXta ;] love, goodwill, esteem. Outside of bibl. and eccl. 
books, there is no clear instance (with Deiss., LAE, 18^ 7O2, cf. the 
same writer in Constr. Quar., ii, 4; and with MM, VGT, s.v., cf. 
Dr. Moulton in Exp. Times, xxvi, 3, 139). In NT, like dyaTrdw, 

1. Of men's love : (a) to one another, Jo 13^5 ; (6) to God, i Jo 2^. 

2. Of divine love; {a) God's love : to men, Eo 5^; to Christ, Jo 172"; 
{b) Christ's love to men : Eo S^^. 3. In pi., love feasts : Ju 12 (2)£, 
iii, 157). 

Syn.: cfiiXia. a., signifying properly (v.s. dyairdix)) love which 
chooses its object, is taken over from LXX, where its connotation is 
more general, into NT, and there used exclusively to express that 
spiritual bond of love between God and man and between man and 
man, in Christ, which is characteristic of Christianity. It is thus 



4 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

distinct from <^i\ta, friendship (Ja 4^ only), a-ropyq, natural affection 
(in NT only in compounds, v.s. acrropyos) and epws, sexual love, which 
is not used in NT, its place being taken by eVi^v/xta. (Cf. iya-waui ; 
and V. Abbott, Essays, 70 f . ; DB, vol. i., 555; Cremer, 13, 593; 
MM, VGT, s.v.) 

dyairTiTos, -rj, -6v (<< dyaTraw), [in LXX chiefly for TH^ , TTI;] 

beloved (v. M, Pr., 221) ; (a) by God : of Christ, Mt 3^" ; of men, Ko 1^ ; 
{h) by Christians, of one another : i Co 4^* ; freq. as form of address, 
ib. IQi* ; opp. to lx^p6';, Eo ll^s (v. AE, Eph., 229 ; Cremer, 17 ; MM, 
VGT, s.v.). 

"Ayap (Kec. "A-), rj, indecl. (in FIJ, 'Ayapa, -qs', Heb. "IJn), Hagar 

(Ge 16) : Ga 424. 25_t 

* dyYapeu'w (from the Persian ; cf. Vg. angiare, and the Heb, 
niaX; on the orthogr., v. Bl., §6, 1; M, Pr., 46), to impress into 

public service, employ a courier; hence, to compel to perform a 
service (prob. common in the vernac. ; cf. Deiss., BS, 86 f., MM, Exp., 
iv ; VGT, s.v.) : Mt 5*^ 27^2, Mk 152i.t 

dyYcioi', -ov, TO « ayyos), [in LXX chiefly for 1^3 ;] a vessel 

(v. MM, VGT, s.v.) : Mt 25*.t 

dyYcXi'a, -as, rj « ayycXos), [in LXX chiefly for nriaijr ;] a mes- 
sage: I Jo 15 311 (Cremer, 18; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dyyeXXw (ayycXos), [in LXX for IM hi. ;] to announce, report : 
Jo 451 (WHR omit), 2018 (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dyycXos, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for "SJk!?© ;] 1- <* messenger, one 

sent : Mt ll^*^, Ja 22^. 2. As in LXX, in the special sense of angel, 
a spiritual, heavenly being, attendant upon God and employed as his 
messenger to men, to make known his purposes, as Lk l^^, or to 
execute them, as Mt 4^. The a. in Ee l^" 2\ al., is variously under- 
stood as (1) a messenger or delegate, (2) a bishop or ruler, (3) a 
guardian angel, (4) the prevailing spirit of each church, i.e. the 
Church itself. (Cf. Swete, A2)., in 1.; DB, iv, 991; Thayer, s.v.; 
Cremer, 18 ; MM, VGT, s.v.) 

ayyos, -«os, to, [in LXX for 1^3 , mb? ;] a vessel : Mt 13*^t 

aye, prop, imperat. of ayw, come ! used as adv. and addressed, 
like </)epe, to one or more persons : Ja 41^ 5^.t 

dye'XTi, -7?9, -7 « aya>), [in LXX chiefly for -17?;] a herd: Mt S^o-^z, 

Mk5ii.i3^ Lk832.33.t 

*t dyck'caXoyrjTos, -ov {<C yeveoAoyco)), without genealogy, i.e. vathout 

recorded pedigree (cf. Ne 1^^) : He V (Cremer, 152 ; MM, VGT, s.v.). 

*dyet'Tis, -e's {^^y^vo-i), 1. unhorn (Plat.); 2. of no family, ignoble, 

base (opp. to dya^o's. Soph., Fr., 105) : opp. to euyevijs, I Co 1^^ (for 

exx. from v., v. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dyid^u), Hellenistic form of dyt^w (<^ dytos), to make holy, conse- 
crate, sanctify ; [in LXX chiefly for xoip pi., hi. ;] 1. to dedicate, separate^ 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 5 

set apart for God ; of things : Mt 23i''« ", ii Ti 22i ; of persons : Christ, 
Jo 10^' 17^^ 2. to purify, make conformable in character to such 
dedication : forensically, to free from guilt, i Co 6^^, Eph b^^, He 2^^ 
IQio, 14, 29 1312 ; internally, by actual sanctification of life, Jo 17^^' ", 
Ac 2032 2618, Eo 15i«, i Co I2 7^*, i Th 523, Ee 22ii; of a non- 
believer influenced by marriage with a Christian, i Co 7^*. 3. In the 
intermediate sense of ceremonial or levitical purification : (a) of things, 
II Ti 221 ; (6) of persons. He 9^3. 4. to treat as holy : Mt 6^, Lk II2, 
I Pe 316 (Cremer, 53, 602; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

t dyiaafi^s, -ov, 6 « dyia^o)), [in LXX : Bz 45^ (W7i7P), Si 7", 

etc. ;] as an active verbal noun in -fios, it signifies properly the pro- 
cess TO ayid^eiv, rather than the resultant state, dyiaxruvr/, hence, 
1. consecration; 2. sanctification: so strictly in Eo 6^^' 22 (but v. Meyer), 
I Co 130, I Th 43.7, II Th 2^3, He 12^*, i Pe 1«. Elsewhere it perhaps 
(Ellic. ; but v. Milligan, Th., 48) inclines to the resultant state : 
I Th 4*, I Ti 215 (Cremer, 55, 602).t 

ayios, -a, -ov (<Cto ay&s, religious awe ; a^w, to venerate), [in LXX 
chiefly for Vj^p ;] primarily, dedicated to the gods, sacred (Hdt. ; rare 

in Att., never in Hom., Hes. and Trag., who use dyvos), hence, holy, 
characteristic of God, separated to God, worthy of veneration. 1. Its 
highest application is to God himself, in his purity, majesty, and 
glory : Lk 1*^, Jo I711, Ee 4^. Hence (a) of things and places which 
have a claim to reverence as sacred to God, e.g. the Temple : Mt 24i*, 
He 91 ; (b) of persons employed by him, as angels : i Th S^^ ; 
prophets, Lk V^; apostles, Eph 3^. 2. Applied to persons as sepa- 
rated to God's service : (a) of Christ, Mk 12^ Jo 6«9, Ac 430 ; (6) of 
Christians, Ac 9^3, Eo 1^, He 6^\ Ee 58. 3. In the moral sense of 
sharing God's purity : Mk 620, Jo I711, Ac 31*, Ee 3^ 4. Of pure, 
clean sacrifices and offerings : i Co 71*, Eph 1*. 

Stn. : dyvos, pure, both in ceremonial and spiritual sense ; 
i£/)os (sacer), sacred, that which is inviolable because of its (external) 
relation to God; oo-ios {sanctus as opp. to nefas), that which is based 
on everlasting ordinances of right. (Cf . Tr., Syn., § Ixxxviii ; DB, ii, 
399 f. ; Cremer, 34, 594-601 ; MM, VGT, s.v.) 

**t dynJTTjs, -rfTo^, rj (•<dyios), [in LXX: n Mac 152*;] sanctity, 
holiness, regarded, properly, as an abstract quality (v. next word, and 
cf. lift.. Notes, 49; MM, VGT, s.v.) : n Co 1^2, He 12io.t 

t dYiuffu'Ktj (cf. dyaew<rvvr]), -rj^, rj « aytos), [in LXX : Ps 29 (30)* 
96(97)12 (nrij?), 95(96)« (ijr), 144 (145)^ (Tin), n Mac 312*;] holiness, 

the state in man resulting from dyiaa-fio^, q.v. : Ro 1*, n Co 7^, i Th 31^ 
(Cremer, 52 ; MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

dyKciXtj, -T/s, V « ayKos, a bend), [in LXX for b^^^ , p-'O;] the bent 

arm : Lk 228 (cf. ^ayKa\t^o/«u).t 

oyKiorpoi', -ov, to (-< dyjcos, a bend), [in LXX for n^D » etc.;] a fish- 
hook : Mt 17",t 



6 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

**aYKupa, -a?, rj « ayKo?, a bend), [in Sm, : Je 52^8*;] an anchor : 
Ac 2V^' =^<^' *« ; fig. (MM, VGT, s.v.), He G^^.t 

■*t aYka<})OS, -01' (= dyi'aTrTOS, 'C^yvdirrw, late form of KvaTrrco, to card 

wool), uncarded, undressed, i.e. new (MM, VGT, s.v.) : Mt 92«, Mk 22i.t 
dyfcia (WH, dyvia), [in LXX for nnnw , TT3 , "113 , etc.;] purity : 

I Ti 4^- 5'-' (Cremer, 58. For exx. of ceremonial use in tt., v. MM, 
Exf., iv).t 

a^vit^ui « ayvos), [in LXX always ceremonially, chiefly for l&lp;] 
to purify, cleanse from defile^nent ; (a) ceremonially : Jo 11^^, Ac 
2124, 26 2418 ; (b) morally : Ja 4^, i Pe V-, i Jo S^.t 

SVN. : Ka6apit,w, q.v. (and v.s. dyvo's). 
f&yyi<Tlu6s, -or, 6 «(£yvtCa)), [in LXX : Nu G^ (-173) 8^ IQi^ (riNian), 

etc. ;] purification : in ceremonial sense, Ac 212" (Lxx)_f 

dyi'oeu, -w, [in LXX for n^tZT , ZZtlf , DtZTX , etc. ;] 1. to be ignorant, 
not to know : absol., i Ti l^^, He 5'-^ ; c. ace, Ac IS^^ 1723, Eo 10», 

II Co 211; ^v ol?, II Pe 212 ; seq. on, Eo 2* 6^ 7^, i Co 1438; ^^ ^,';^^ 
{i/i,as dyvoeti/, a Pauline phrase: c. ace, Eo 11^^; seq. vwep, 11 Co 18; 
TTcpt, I Co 121, J rpi^ 413 . 2ti, Eo 113, I Co IQi (for similar usage in tt., 
V. MM, VGT, S.V.). Pass.: i Co 14^8, 11 Co 6\ Ga 1^2. 2. not to 
understand : c. ace, Mk 9^2, Lk 9*^.+ 

+ dyi-oTifia, -Tos, t6 « dyi'oea.), [in LXX : Ge 4312 (n|r?rD), To 33, 

Jth 520, Si 232 5119, I Mac IS^^*;] a sin of ignorance (so in tt. ; v. MM, 
VGT, s.v.) : He 9" .t 

dyk'oia, -a;, r) {<^ayvoeoi), [in LXX chiefly for DCTN , n^Jt!; ;] ig- 

norance : Ac 31" lY^o, Eph 418 (with sense of wilful blindness ; cf. MM, 
VGT, s.v.), I Pe li^.t 

dyi'os, -•>?, -oV « ayo9, V.S. dyios), [in LXX chiefly for "linM (Pss, 

and Pr. only), also 11 Mac 138, iv Mac 18'', al. ;] 1. free from ceremonial 
defilement, in a condition prepared for worship (for exx. of pagan 
usage, V. MM, VGT, s.v.). 2. holy, sacred, veiierable (11 Mac, I.e.). 
3. As in OT (cl.), pure, chaste, undefiled, guiltless; (a) of persons: 

II Co 711 1112, I Ti 522, Tit 25, I Jo 33; (b) of things: Phi 48, Ja 31^ 
I Pe 32. t 

Syjv. : dXiKpivrj'i {q.v.),jmre, primarily as winnowed, purged, 
first found in ethical sense in NT (sificere). On the equivalence of d. 
and Ka^apds (q.v.), v. DCG, ii, 459'\ though Westc. {Epp. Jo., 101) 
notes a distinction between them. 

^tdycoTYis, -TrjTO<;, 7) {<^ayv6<i), 2^urity, chastity (cf. dyio'Tiys) : II Co 

66 113.t 

*dY»'ws «dyvds), adv., piirely, with pure motives : Phi li'^.t 
dy^waia, -a?, f] «ya'wcrKO)), [in LXX : Jb 35l« (n^T^b^), Wi 131, 

III Mac 527*;] igno7-ance (opp. to yvwo-i?) : i Co 153^, i Pe 21^ (v. Hort 
in 1. ; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

** ayyio<TTos, -ov «yiv«o-K(o), [in LXX : Wi 1118 183, „ Mac li^ 2' 
(Cremer, 157)*;] unknown: Ac 1723 (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 7 

Ayopd, -as, r) (<:^ dyeipo), to bring together), [in LXX for ]nTy, p-lltf;] 

1. an assembly (Horn., Xen., al.). 2. a place of assembly, a public place 
or forum, a market-place (Horn., Thuc, al.; LXX) : Mt U}^ 20^ 237, 
Mk 6^6 (cf . MM, VGT, s.v., ayvi£) 7^ (Bl., § 46, 7) 1238, ^k 7^2 (Bl., I.e.) 
1143 2046, Ac 1619 17^7 (Cremer, 69; MM, FGT, s.v.).+ 

dyopd^u «[ dyopa), [in LXX chiefly for "QtZT , T\2p ;] 1. to frequent 
the dyo/od (Hdt., al.). 2. to buy in the market, purchase (Xen., al.; 
LXX ; in tt. very common in deeds of sale, v. MM, VGT, s.v.) : absol., 
Mt 21^2, Mk 11^5; c. ace. rei, Mt 13*4- 4", al.; seq. irapa, c. gen. pers., 
Ee 318 (LXX, Polyb.) ; Ik, Mt 27^ ; c. gen. pret., Mk 6^7, al. ; metaph., 
I Co 620 723, II Pe 21, Ee 5^ 143' *. 

*dYopatos, -ov (<^dyopd), 1. frequenting the ayopd, a loxmger in the 
dyopd (Xen., al.) : Ac 17^. 2. In late writers (Strab., al.), proper to 
the dyopd : dyopaiot (sc. i^fiepai) ayovrat (cf. Lat. conventus agere), court- 
days are kept, Ac 193^ (for exx. of both usages, v. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

^dypa, -as, 17 (■<]dyw), 1. the chase, a hunting or catching : Lk 5*. 

2. that which is taken, a catch : of fish, Lk 5^.f 

* dypd/jifiaTos, -ov (<^ypd(^co), without leamitig (ypafj-fxara), un- 
lettered (in TT. freq. in formula used by one who signs for an illiterate ; 
MM, VGT, s.v.) : Ac 4^3 (but cf. Thayer, 8.v.).t 

* aypavXio), -w (<^dypavXos, dwelling in the field; ■^dyp6<i, avXrj), 
to live in the fields : Lk 28.t 

dypeu'o, (dypa), [in LXX: Jb lO^*, Pr 522 625,26^ Ho 52 (np^ ni., 
tDniZT, etc.)*;] to catch or take by hunting or fishing; metaph., 
Mk 12i3.t 

* dypi- A.aio9, -ov, 1. of the wild olive (Anth.). 2. As subst., the 
wild olive : Eo ll^^. 24 (^qGT, in 1. ; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dypios, -a, -ov (<^uyp6s), [in LXX for HT^ , etc.;] 1. living in 

fields, wild : fxiXi. Mt 3^, Mk 1". 2. savage, fierce : Ju ". (Cf. usage 
in TT. of a malignant wound ; MM, VGT, s.v.)t 

'Aypiinras, -a (Bl., §7, 2), 6, Agrippa (II): Ac 25i3. 22, 23, 24, 2« 
261, 2, 19, 27, 28. 32, (For Agrippa I, v.s. 'UpwSrj^, 3.)t 

dypos, -oS, 6, [in LXX chiefly for nitr] ; 1. afield: Mt 628, al. 

2. the country : Mk I521, al. ; pi., country places, farms : Mk 5^* 636> 56^ 
Lk 83* 912. 3. = x'^P^oV' CL piece of ground : Mk 1029, Ac 427, al. (On 
the occurrence of this word as compared with x^P'^f X'^P'^"' ^- M^. 
VGT, s.v.) 

■ dypuircew, -w (•<^ dypu7ri/os, seeking sleep; <^dyp€v(o, vTrvo<;), [in 
LXX chiefly for ipw ;] to be sleejjless, wakeful (Theogn., Xen., al.) ; 
metaph. (LXX) = cl. iyprjyopa, to be watchful, vigilant : Mk 1333, 
Lk 2136, Eph 618, He 13i7.t 

SVN. : yp-qyopioi, q.v. ; vrj(f)<i>, associated with y. in i Pe 5^, ex- 
pressing a wariness which results from self-control, a condition of 
moral, not merely mental alertness (v. M, Th., I, 5®). 

** dypuiri'ia, -as, r/ (v. supr.), [in LXX: Si 9, II Mac 22« *; ] sleepless- 
ness, watching : u Co 6^ 1127. (Plat., Hdt. ; for exx. in tt., v. MM, 
VGT, s.v.)t 



8 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

dyuid, v.s. dyop({, [in LXX : in Mac l^o 4^ *]. 

ayw, [in LXX for NIS hi., Upb , 3n: , etc. ;] 1. to lead, bring, carry : 
c. ace, seq. tVi, ets, 2ws, xpos and simple dat. ; metaph,, to lead, guide, 
impel : Jo 10^^ Eo 2*, He Q^o, ii Ti 3^, al. 2. to spend or keep a day : 
Lk 2P^, Ac 19^8 3. Intrans., to go : subjunc, ayoyfuv, Mt 26*«, al. 
(Cramer, 61 ; MM, VGT, s.v.). 

dyajYVi, -^s, ^ « dya,), [in LXX : Es 220 103, II Mac 4i6 B^ 112*, 
III Mac 4^** * ;] 1. a carrying away. 2. a leading, guiding ; metaph., 
training ; hence, from the expression d. tov /3iov, absol., conduct, way 
of life : II Ti 3io (Cremer, 61 ; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dyci.', -wos, 6 «dya>), [in LXX: Is T^^ (nxb), Es 4^7, Wi 42 10^2, 
II Macg, IV Mac 5*;] 1. a gathering, esp. for games. 2. a place of 
assembly. 3. a contest, striiggle, trial; metaph. (MM, VGT, s.v.), 
(a) of the Christian life as a contest and struggle : Phi l^o, i Th 22, 
I Ti 612^ II Ti 4^ He 12^ ; (b) solicitude, anxiety : Col 2^.f 

** dywKia, -as, rj «dywv), [in LXX : II Mac 3^*' i« 151^ *;] 1. a contest, 
wrestling (Eur., Xen.). 2. Of the mind, great fear, agony, anguish 
(Dem., Arist.) : Lk 22*^ (cf . Field, Notes, 77 f . ; Abbott, Essays, 101 f . ; 
MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

dycji/iSofiai «dywv), [in LXX: Da TH 6^* (bs DW), Si 428, 

I, II, IV Mac 5*;] 1. to contend for a prize: i Co 92^, 2. to fight, 

striiggle, strive: Jo IS^" ; metaph. (MM, VGT, s.v.). Col 129 412^ 

I Ti 410 612, II Ti 47; c. inf. (Field, Notes, 66), Lk 132* (Cremer, 609).t 

'A8d^, 6, indecl. (Heb. DIX), Adam : Lk 338, Rq 514^ i Co 1522.«, 

I Ti 2^3, u^ ju u . Christ 6 ^crxaros 'A., i Co 15*5.t 

*d8dTTa»'os, -ov (<^8a7rdvi7), 2vithout expense, free of charge: 
I Co 9i8.t 

'aSSci (Eec. 'A881), 6, indecl., Addei : Lk 328.t 

d8eX(|)Vi, -^s, ^7 « d8£A</)os), [in LXX for ninx ;] a sister : Mt 192», 

al.; metaph. (MM, VGT, s.v.), of a member of the Christian com- 
munity : Eo 16^, I Co 7l^ Ja 21^, al. 

d8e\4»6s, -ov, 6 (<!d- copul., SeXcfim, womb), i,n cl., a brother, born 
of the same parent or parents. [In LXX (Hort, Ja., 102 f.), for n^ ;] 

1. lit. of a brother (Ge 42, al.). 2. Of a neighbour (Le 191^). 3. Of a 
member of the same nation (Ex 2^*, De 15^). In NT in each of these 
senses (1. Mt I2, al. ; 2. Mt V ; 3. Eo 9^) and also, 4. of a fellow- 
Christian: I Co 1\ Ac 930. This usage finds illustration in tt., where 
d. is used of members of a pagan religious community (M, Th., I, 1* ; 
MM, VGT, S.V.). The d86\<^ol r. Kvptov (Mt 12*6-49 1355 2310, Mk 331-34, 
Lk 819-21, Jo 212 73' 5, 10 2017, Ac li*, 1 Co 9^) may have been sons of 
Joseph and Mary (Mayor, Ja., Intr. vi ff. ; DB, i, 320 ff.) or of Joseph 
by a former marriage (Lft., Gal, 252 ff. ; DCG, i, 232 ff.), but the view 
of Jerome, which makes d. equivalent to dvei/^tds, is inconsistent with 
Greek usage. (Cremer, 66.) 

**t d8eX<t.<5TTis, -r?Tos, ^ « d8eX<^o's), [in LXX : i Mac 12i0'i7, iv Mac 5*;] 
1. abstract, brotherhood, brotherly affection (LXX). 2. Concrete, the 
brotherhood, the Christian community : i Pe 21^ 5^ (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 



MANUAL GEBEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 9 

a-8T)Xos, -ov « S^Aos), [in LXX : Ps 50 (51)6 (ninij^) ;] 1. unseen, 

unobserved, 7wt manifest (Ps, I.e.) : Lk 11**. 2. uncertain, indistinct : 

I Co 148.t 

*t d8TiX(5nis, -r]Tos, rj {<^ a.8r]Xo<;) , uncertainty : i Ti 6^''.t 

*d8ii\ws {<CaSriXos:), adv., uncertainly : of direction, i Co 9^^ _+ 
** dSTjfioi/cw, -to (on the derivation, v. MM, VGT, s.v.), [in Aq. : 
Jb 1820; Sm. : Ps 60(61)3 1152(116^1), Ec l^-^m^ Bz S^^*;] to he 
trotibled, distressed (MM, I.e.) : Mt 263", -^j;^ 1433^ -p^A 226.t 

aSTjs, -ov, 6, [in LXX ehiefly for blNljr , also for nipTT , niCi , etc. ;] 

1. in Horn., Hades (Pluto), the god of the underworld. 2. the abode 
of Hades, the underivorld ; in NT, the abode of departed spirits, 
Hades: iv t. a., Lk 1623; ^k a., Ac 22^.31; TrvXat dSov, Mt le^S; kXcU 
Tov a., Ee 118;' metaph., Iws a.', Mt 1123, Lk lO^^;' personified, Ee 6^ 
20i3.'i4 (Cremer, 67, 610; MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

d-8id-KpiTos, -ov «8taK/3tVw), [in LXX: Pr 25i*;] 1. not to be 
parted, mixed, undistinguishable (cf. Pr, I.e., and v. Lft., Ignat. Eph., 
§3). 2. without uncertainty (Hort, in 1., but v. MM, VGT, s.v.): 
Ja 3i^t 

*t dSidXeiTTTos, -ov (<[ SiaXetTToj), unremitting, incessant: Eo 92, 

II Ti 13. (For exx., v. MM, VGT, s.v.)t 

**t dSiaXeiTTTus (v. supr.), adv., [in LXX: i Mac 12^1, 11 Mae 4, 

III Mac 633 * -J unremittingly, incessantly : Eo 1^, i Th 13 2^3 51^.+ 

dSiKe'w, -w (<^a6iKo?), [in LXX for ptSV , TWS , etc.;] 1. intrans., 
to be iSiKos, do wrong, act wichedly or criminally : Ac 25^^, i Co 6^, 
II Co 712, Col 325, Ee 2211 . ^^ ^^ J^^^J.t, Ee 9i9. 2. Trans, (a) to do some 
wrong : o rjSLKrjcrev, Col 3"-^ ; to lorong some one, Mt 20i3, Ac 72*''2'' 251**, 
II Co 72, Ga 412, Phm is, 11 Pe 2i3 ; pass., Ac 72*, 11 Co 712 ; mid., 

I Co 6' {supr . . . to be ivronged ; WM, § 38, 3 ; but v. Bl., §54, 5; 
and cf. dTToo-Tcpeo)) ; {b) to injiire, hurt: Lk 10l^ Ee 2ii 6« 72' 3 9*' 10 ll^.t 

dSiKKifia, -Tos, TO (<^ dSi/ceoj), [in LXX for pjT , nj?g , etc.;] a wrong, 

injury, misdeed (MM, VGT, s.v.) : Ac I81* 2420, Ee IS^.t 

dSiKia, -as, T] « aSt/cos), [in LXX for Jir , yip^ , b}V , etc. ;] 

1. injustice : Lk 18", Eo 91*. 2. unricihteousness, iniquity : Jo 7^^, 

Ac 823, Ro 118' 29 28 613, II Ti 210, I Jo 1^ 51^ ; opp. to aX^Seia, 1 Co 136, 

II Th 212 ; to hiKaiocTvvr], Eo 3^ ; a-rraTTq Tri<; a., II Th 21* ; /itcr^os aSt/ci'as, 
Ac 118, II Pe 213.15; cpydrai t^s a., Lk 1327; ^^a/xovSs T^S d., Lk 16^; 
Koo'/xos T^s d., Ja 36; oiKovdyLios T^s d., Lk 168. 3. = ahiK-qfjia, an un- 
righteous act : ironically, a favour, 11 Co 12i3 ; pi., He 812 (Cremer, 
261 ; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dSiKos, -ov (•< SUr]), [in LXX for ipcr , b^y , etc. ;] 1. unjust : 
Eo 35, He 610. 2. unrighteous, wicked: Lk I611 I811, Ac 24i5, 
I Co 61' 9, I Pe 318 ; opp. to StKaios, Mt 5*^ ; to cuo-c/?»;s, II Pe 2^ ; to 
irio-Tos, Lk 1610 (Cremer, 200). t 

dSiKtos, adv. «a8tKos), [in LXX for IptS', b'W , etc.;] unjustly, 
undeservedly : 1 Pe 2i9.t 

'ASjiei./ (WH, mg., 'A8d/x), 6, indecl., Admin. : Lk 3'3.+ 



10 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

a-86Kifxos, -ov, [in LXX : Pr 25\ Is I22 (rp)* ;] 1. of things (prop. 

of metals : LXX, 11. c), not standing the test, rejected : yrj, He 6^. 
2. Of persons, rejected after testing, reprobate : Eo 1^^, i Co 9^'^, 

11 Co 135-7, II Ti 3% Tit li« (Cremer, 212). t 

*a-8oXos, -ov, 1. guileless (Find., Thuc). 2. Of liquids (^sch., 
Eur., and late prose writers), genuine, jnire (in tt. and in MGr. of wine, 
also of corn : MM, VGT, s.v. ; Milligan, NTD, 77) : of milk, metaph., 
I Pe 22.t 

/SJ'^V. .■ oiKepaioi (q.V.), a/<aKOS, airXov's. 

'A8pa/jiui/TT)f6s (T, Rec. 'ABpa/xvTrrjvos), -rj, -ov, of Adramyttium, 
a seaport of Mysia : Ac 272.t 

'ASptas (T, Eec. 'ASpias), -ov, 6, the Adriatic sea, in later Greek 
usage extended to take in all the waters between Greece and Italy : 
Ac 272'.t 

*d8p6TY]s, -TO?, rj (<^d8pd9, thick, well-grown), 1. thickness, vigour. 
2. abundance, bounty : 11 Co S^^^.t 

d8umTe'w, -i «d8i-m-ros), [in LXX: De 17^ Za 8^ (sbsni.), 
Jb 422 (-|2jri ni.), al. ;] to be miable (cl., Philo ; tt., v. MM, VGT, s.v.). 
2. In LXX and NT (Kennedy, Sources, 124; Hatch, Essays, 4; 
Field, Notes, 46 f.), to be impossible : Mt 1V\ Lk l^^.t 

d-SuVaros, -ov, [in LXX for 'Jl'^^N' , bl , etc. ;] 1. of persons, unable, 

jmverless: Ac 148; fig_^ Rq 15^ (MM, VGT, s.v.). 2. Of things, im- 
possible: Mt 192«, Mk 1027, Lk 1827, j^o g^, He 6*'i8 10* ll^.t 

a8w (Attic form of Ion. and poet. deiSo)), [in LXX chiefly for 
"VU ;] to sing, (a) intrans., c. dat. (MM, VGT, s.v.), of praise to God : 

Eph 519, Col 316 ; (b) trans., c. cogn. ace. : w8^v, Re 5^ 14^ IS^.t 

de{, adv., [in LXX : Is 42^* (Qbisrn) 511^ (Tpn), Ps 94 (95)io, al. ;] 

ever ; 1. of continuous time, unceasingly, perpetually : Ac 7^-^, 2 Co 4^^ 
6^**, Tit 1^2^ jje 310^ 2. Of successive occurrences, on every occasion 
(MM, VGT, s.v.) : i Pe S^^, n Pe li2.t 

dcTos, -ov, 6, [in LXX for 11273 ;] an eagle : Ee 4^ 8^^ (Eec. ayyeXov) 

12^*. Where carrion is referred to, a. is probably a vulture (cf. 
Jb 3930, Pr 3017) : Mt 2428, Lk 17^7 (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

d^ufj,09, -ov (<Ctvixri), [in LXX for riS'Q ; rd d. (sc Xayava, cakes) 

= DiSiQn;] unleavened: 17 kopTr] twv d. (ni-SDSn an), the jmschal feast 

(also called rd d., Mk 14^), Lk 22^; r^fxipa twv d., Mt 26i7, Mk 14^2, 
Lk 227 • r;/x,e/3at, Ac 12^ 20*'. Fig-, of Christians, free from corr^iption : 
I Co 57 ; exhorted to keep festival, e'v d^u/xois (sc. apToi<;, XdyavoLs, or, 
indefinitely, "unleavened elements"), ib. 8 (Cremer, 724), t 

'A^aip, 6, indecl., Azor : Mt l^^.i^.t 

"AI^cjTos, -ov, -f) (Heb., lilJS'K), Azotus, a PhiHstine city: Ac 8*^t 

dT)8ia, -as, yj « d- neg., -^Sos, pleasure), [in LXX : Pr 2329 (niiz;)*;] 

1. of things or persons, unpleasantru^ss, odiousncss (Hipp., Dem., al.); 

2. dislike (Plat.), disagreement (MM, VGT, s.v.) : Lk 23^2 D.+ 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 11 

di^p, d€>s, 5, [in LXX: ii Ki 22^2 (= Ps 17 {18y\ pnm), Wig;] 
in Horn., Hes., the lower air which surrounds the earth, as opp. to 
the purer aWrjp of the higher regions ; generally, air (MM, VGT, s.v.) : 
Ac 22^^ I Th 4^^ Ee 9'- IG^^ ; of the air as the realm of demons, 
Eph 22 ; d. Sepetv, of striving to no purpose, i Co Q^" ; cis d. XaXetr, of 
speaking without effect, not being understood, i Co 14®. t 

**d0acao-ia, -as, r] « d-^avaT09, undying; V. MM, VGT, S.V.), [in 
LXX : Wi 3* 4^ S^^. ^ 153^ ^y Mac 14^ 16^3 * ;] immortality : i Co IS^^, 5*^ 
iTi6i« (cf. Cremer, 285f.).+ 

**d-0€>iTos (late form of dOefjua-To?, LS, MM, VGT, s.v.), -ov 
«^e>ts, custom, right), [in LXX: 11 Mac 6^ 7^ 10^4, m Mac 520*;] 
(a) of persons, laxvless (iii Mac, I.e.) ; ih) of things, laivless, unlawful : 
Ac 1028, I Pe 43. t 

SYN. : V.S. d^€o-/xos. 
*a-6eos, -ov, 1. in cl. (a) slighting or denyiyig the gods (Plat.; cf. 
MM, VGT, s.v.) ; {h) godless, ungodly (Pind.) ; (c) abandoned by the 
gods (Soph.) 2. In the NT (cf. Lft. on Ign. ad Trail, § 3), of the 
heathen, without God, not knowing God (Cremer, 281) : Eph 2^2_t 

**t a-0ecT/ios, -ov « ^€o-/xos, lata, mstom), [in LXX : iii Mac 5^2 62^ * ;] 
lawless, esp. of those who violate the law of nature and conscience 
(cf. MM, VGT, s.v.) : 11 Pe 2" 3i7.t 

Sl'N. : d^€/i.tTos, avofxos, KaKos, irovr)p6<;, ^avA.os (v. Tr., Syn., 
§lxxiv; DCG,u, 821b). 

td0€Tcw, -tu {<^TL6r]fxL), [in LXX for seventeen different words, 
rtZTD , Tia , 133 , bra , etc., often meaning, as i Ki 13^ (Heb., al.), to 
revolt; properly, to viaJce dOerov, or do away with wJmt has been laid 
down (v. DCG, i, 453 f.)]. 1. to set aside, disregard (in Gramm., to 
reject as spurious) : hiaO-qKTqv, Ga 3^^; €VtoA.7;v, Mk 7®; vop-ov. He 102^; 
TTio-Tiv, I Ti 512. 2. to nullify, make void : Lk V^ (v. Field, Notes, 59), 

I Co 119, Ga 221. 3. to reject : Mk 62" (Field, op. cit., 30), Lk lO^^, 
Jo 12*8, I Th 48, Ju 8 (for exx. in tt., v. MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

t dQcTTjats, -€w?, yj {<^ dOeTew), [in LXX, usually of unfaithful, 
rebellious action: i Ki 24^2 (y^rg), Je 12^ (135), Da th 9" (bra), 

II Mac 1428* ;] a disannulling, setting asid^ : He 7^8 926^ (^qj. similar 
usage in tt., v. Deiss., BS, 228 f. ; MM, VGT, s.v.)t 

'AflriKai, -wv, al (plural because consisting of several parts), 
Athens: Ac W^'^^ 18S i Th S\f 

'ASrimios, -a, -ov, Athenian: Ac 172i'22,t 
* 6.6X4(1), -w (in cl. also dOXevw, <^d6Xo<;, a contest, in war or in 
sport), to contend in games, wrestle, combat : 11 Ti 2^.t 

*t aSXriais, -€ws, 17 (<! d^Xeco), a contest, combat, esp. of athletes ; 
fig., a struggle : He 10^2 (for exx., v. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dOpoi^w (<^ d6p6o<;, assembled in croivds, MM, VGT, s.v. ; <C dp6o<;, 
a 7ioise, tumult), [in LXX chiefly for V^p ;] to gather, assemble : 
Lk 2433.t 

dGufieu, -w (d-^v/xos, witlvout heart), [in LXX for mn , etc. ;] to &fi 
disheartened : Col 32i.t 



12 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

d6wos (Rec. wrongly, -wos ; LS, s.v. ; Mayser, 131), -ov (<^^cot^ 
a penalty), [in LXX chiefly for np2 ni., pi., "^j"?! ;] 1. unpunished (MM, 

VGT, S.V.). 2. innocejit : Mt 27^ (WH, R, mg., BCKmoiA 27^\f 

atycios (WH, -ytos), -a, -ov (<[ ai^, a goat), [in LXX for 7? ;] o/ a 

j?oai ; He 11^7 (MM, VOT, 8.v.).+ 

aiyiaXds, -ov, 6 (on the derivation, v. Boisacq, s.v.), [in LXX : 
Jg 51" (p)in), Si 241* * ;J the sea-shore, beach (cf. Field, Notes, 146 ; DCG, 
i, 175 f.; MM, VGT, s.v.) : Mt 132.« Jo 21*, Ac 2P 27^9. 40.t 

AiYUTTTios, -a, -ov, Egyptian: Ac 722.24,28 2138^ He il29,t 

Aiyu^Tos, -ov, T}, Egypt: Mt 2i3-i5. i9, Ac 2i" 7^-39, He S^e 1126,27. 
yi} A?., Ac 7*» 131^ He 89, Ju ^ (cf. Ex 5^2, al.) ; rj M., Ac 1^^; fig., 
of Jerusalem as hostile to God, Re 11^. t 

**dt8ios, -ov {<a€i), [in LXX: Wi 72^, iv Mac IQi^*;] everlasting 
(freq. in Inscr. ; MM, VGT, s.v.) : Ro I20, Ju ^.t 

STN. : atwvios, also freq. in Inscr. (Deiss., BS, 363 J. The ety- 
mological distinction between the meanings of the two words seems 
not to be retained in late Greek (v. Thayer, s.v,, aiwvios ; cf. Cremer, 
79, 611). 

** aiScSs (-o'os), -ovs, r), [in LXX : iii Mac 1^9 4^ * ;] a sense of shame, 
modesty : i Ti 29 (for exx., v. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

Syn.: ala-x^vt} (v. Thayer, 14; Tr., Syn., §xix; Cremer, 611 f.; 
CGToniTi, I.e.). 

Ai0io\|», -oTTos, 6 {<CaWi>i, to hum, wt/', face ; i.e. swarthy), [in LXX 
for iris ;] Ethiopian : Ac S'-^.t 

AiXa|xiTT)S, V.S. 'EAaju.etTr/s. 

at|ia, -Tos, TO, [in LXX for Dl ;] blood. 1. In the ordinary sense : 

Mk525, Lk 8^3, 44 22*4, Jo 19^^ Ac I520.29 2125, Ee 8^.8 ne i63,4,6 
191^. 2. In special senses : (a) of generation, origin, kinship (cl.) : 
Jo 1^3 (v. MM, VGT, S.V.); (b) as in OT (AR on Eph, I.e.), in the 
phrase adp^ koL at. (at. k. a.), to indicate human nature as opp. to God 
and created spirits: Mt 161^, i Co 15^0, Ga l^^, Eph 6^2, He 2^^; 

(c) of things in colour resembling blood : Ac 2i9> 20^ jje 6^2 1418-20 . 

(d) of bloodshed, a bloody death (cl.) : Mt 233o. 35 274. 6. s, 24, 25^ l^ 
1150, 51 131^ Ac 119 528 186 2026 2220, He 12*, Re 6io 17^ 182* I92 ; 
al. €Vx«tv (Deiss., LAE, 428; MM, VGT, s.v., at), Ro 3^5, Re 16^; 

(e) of sacrificial blood, as an expiation : He 9'^' 12, 13, 18-22, 25 iQi ]^228 
1311 ; of the blood of Christ, Mt 2628, Mk I42*, Lk 222o, Jo 6^3, 54, 56^ 
Ac 2028, Eo 325 59, I Co 1016 1125. 27^ Eph 1^ 21^, Col 120, He 912. 1* 
1019,29 1224 1320^ I pe 12.19^ i Jq 17 (cf. S^' «), Re 15 59 71* 1211. 
(Cremer, 69 f., 612 f.)t 

*t alfiarcKXUCTta, -as, 17 {"Calfxa, Ik, x^'w), shedding of blood (Eccl.; 
Cremer, 71) : He 922.t 

alfioppoe'w, {<Cialfia, pc'co), [in LXX : Le 15^3 (n.n)*;] to lose bloody 

suffer from a flow of blood (Hipp.) : Mt 92o.t 
Aii'^as, -OV, 6, jEneas : Ac 9^3, 34 + 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 13 

+ aiKco-is, -cojs, ^7 (■< alveo)), [in LXX chiefly for rryiri , n^np ;] 

praise (Eccl.) : Ova-ta atveVcws (Le 7^^, n^lH n5|), He IS^^.t 

aiK^u, -o) (<^aLvo'i), poet., Ion. and late prose (MM, FGT, s.v.) 
for cl. eTraivco), [in LXX chiefly for bbn , nT ;] to praise : c. ace, t. ^ew, 
Lk 2^3,20 1937 2463, Ac 2*7 S^'^, Eo IS^^ ; c. dat., t. ^e<3 (Je 20i3, al. for 
!? b^n ; V. Field, Notes, 245), Ee IQ^.t 

SYJV. : i^ofxoXoyeui, evXoyeo), ev^apicTTSw, /xaKapL^o) (v. DCG, i, 211). 

aii/iyfia, -T09, to (<^ alvLcra-ofjiaL, to speak ill riddles; <^ atvos = Seivos, 

dread, strange), [in LXX for nTn , Nu 12^ and always exc. De 28^'' 

in^W) ;] a dark saying, riddle : i Co 13^2 (cf_ ^^^ l.c.).t 

ati'os, -ov, 6, [in LXX for bbn pi, TJT ;] poet, and Ion., 1. = fiv6o<;, 
a tale (Horn., al.). 2. = Att. cTraivos, ^jraise (Horn., al.) : Mt 21i«'^^^', 
Lk 1843. 3, In ,r., a decree (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

AiciJi', 17, indecl. (cf. Heb. ]^r, a sjyring), Aenon : Jo S^^.t 

aipeais, -cws, 17 {<^aipew, -ofxai), [in LXX for H^IJ ,] 1. capture. 

2. choosing, choice (v. MM, FGT, s.v.). 3. ^/jai which is chosen, 
hence, opinio7i; esp. a peculiar opinion, heresy: i Co 11^^, Ga S^", 
II Pe 2\ E, txt. 4. In late writers (MM, VGT), of a set of persons 
professing particular principles or opinions, a school, sect, party, 
faction: Ac 6^^ 15^ 245.i* 26^ 2822, i Co, Ga, 11 Pe, I.e., E, mg. 
(Cremer, 614). t 

aiperi^w, [in LXX chiefly for in2 (v. Cremer, 615) ;] = alpeofxat 
(Hipp., Inscr.), to choose : Mt 12^^ (LXX, a.vTi\r]fxtf/ofx,ai).f 

*alpeTiK6s, -ij, -ot/ (<^ alpeofiaL), 1. capable of choosing (Plat.). 
2. causing division, heretical, factious (Cremer, 614) : as subst., Tit 3^*'.t 

atpc'w, [in LXX for HiDN hi., inn , etc. ;] to take ; Mid., -ofxai (M, 
Pr., 158 f. ; MM, VGT, s.v.), to choose : Phi I22, n Th 2^3^ He IP^. 
(Cf. av-, a.<f>-, OL-, i^-, KaO-, Trepi-, Trpo-aiplo}.)f 

aipw, [in LXX chiefly for NiZTJ , also for npb , etc. ;] 1. to raise, 
take up, lift or draw up : Jo 8^9 11*\ Ac 27^'^, al. 2, to bear, carry : 
Mt 4" 162*, al. 3. to bear or take aicay, carry off, remove : Mt 212\ 
Jo 1931, I Co 512 6^5 (y, Lft., Notes, 216), al. ; of the taking away sin 
by Christ, Jo l^^, I Jo 3^. (Cf. d7r-, e^-, l-n--, fier-, <rvv-, virep-aipu). For 
exx. from tt., v. MM, VGT, s.v.) 

aiaOdi/ofjiai, [in LXX for j^n , TDPI , JTT ;] to perceive: c.acc. rei 
(Bl., § 36, 5 ; MM, VGT, s.v.), Lk 9« (Cremer, 619 f.).t 

aio-0T|CTis, -ews, 17 « alo-BdvofjLaL), [in LXX chiefly for T)^ ;] per- 
ception (MM, VGT, s.v.) : Phi VA 

Syn. : cTriyvcDo-ts, q.v. (cf. Cremer, 620). 

aio-6T)Tiqpio»', -ov, to (<^ ala-6avop.ai), [in LXX : Je 4^® ^P)' 

IV Mac 222 * .-] sense, organ of perception : He 5^* (MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

* aioxpoKcpSiis, -es (<C aio-xpos, K€p8o<;), greedy of base gains : i Ti 3', 
Tit l^.t 



14 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

*t alaxpoKepSws, adv., from eagerness for base gain : i Pe 5^ (here 
only).t 

* aiaxpoXoyia, -as, r/ (<^at(TXpos, Aeyw), ahusive language, abuse 
(Lft., ICG, in 1. ; MM, VGT, s.v.) : Col S^.t 

aiaxpos> -»> -oy (<Catcrxos, shame, disgrace), [in LXX : Ge 4P* 
(yi , jn), Jth 1212, al. ;] fease, shameful : i Co ll^ Id^s^ Eph 5^2, Tit 1" 

(MM, VGT, s.v.).+ 

* aio-xpoTTjs, -y^ros, '^ (<[ ato-xpo's) , basetiess : Eph 5*.t 

aio-x">''n» -'>/?. I/ (<Ca-rcrxos, shavie, disgrace), [in LXX chiefly for 
n^rn ;] shame (MM, FGT, s.v.) : subjectively, Lk 14^9^ ii Co 4^ ; ob- 
jectively, Phi 3^^, He 12'^ ; as something to be ashamed of, Ee 3^^ ; 
pi. (Bl., § 32, 6), shameful deeds, Ju ^^.t 

Sl^V. ; aiook, q.V. 

aio-xuco) (<^aTo-xos, shame), [in LXX chiefly for IS'n;] 1. to dis- 
figure (Horn.). 2. to dishonozor (Pr 29^^). 3. to make ashamed 
(Si 13'^). Pass., to be put to shame, be ashamed: ii Co 10^; Phi l^**, 
I Pe 4l«, I Jo 228; c inf (M, Pr., 205), Lk IS^ (cf. iir- {-ofMai), Kar- 
ato^x wco) . t 

aiTEtj, -u), [in LXX chiefly for bnw ;] to ask, request : absol., 
Mt 7", Ja I*'; c. ace. pers., Mt 5^-, Lk 6^'*; c. ace. rei, seq. a-rro, 
Mt 2020, I Jo 516 . ia. seq. irapd, Ac 3^, Ja 1^ ; c. dupl. ace, Mt T^, 
Mk 622, Jo 1622. Mid. (on the distinction bet. mid. and act., v. M, 
Pr., 160) : absol., Mk 15^, Jo 1626, j^ 43 . ^ ^cc. rei, Mt 14^, Mk 62*, 
al.; c. ace. pers., Mt 272^, Lk 232^; c. ace. rei, seq. Trapd, Ac 92; 
c. ace. et inf., Lk 2323 . ^ i^f ^ Ac 7^^, Eph 3^3 (cf. d^r-, i$-, ctt-. Trap-, 
Trpoa-aLTew) . 

Syjv. : epwraw, q.V., TrvvOdvofiai. On the proper distinction 
between these words, v. Tr., Syn., % xl, Thayer, s.v. ai. In late Gk., 
however, al. and e. seem to have become practically synonymous (cf. 
Ac 32.3; V. Field, Notes, 101 f.; M, Tii., I, 4^ ; M, Pr., m^; MM, 
VGT, s.v.). 

aiTT))xa, -To<;, to (•< alreo)), [in LXX chiefly for nbxia' ;] that which 

has been asked for, a petition, reqtiest : Lk 232*, py 46^ j Jq 5i5_f 
Syn. : v.s. 8e>?o-is. 
alTia, -as, V, [^^ LXX : Ge 413 (|iy), Pr 28^' (ptzrV), and freq. in 

Wi, II, III Mac ;] 1. cause, reason, occasion, case : Mt 193, l]^ 347^ ^c 102^ 
2224 2820, II Ti 1"' 12^ Tit 1^3, He 2^ ; d o^tw<; ia-riv y ai. (cf. Lat. si ita 
res se habet, and v. MM. VGT, s.v.), Mt 19^0. 2. In forensic sense, 
(a) accusation : Ac 25^^' 2'' ; (b) cause for ptmishment, crime : Mt 273'', 
Mk 1526, Jo 1838 19*' 6, Ac 1328 2328 28i8.t 

Syn. : eXtyxos, a charge, whether moral or judicial, which has 
been proven, dt. is an accusation simply, false or true. 

aiTiafJia, -to<;, to, V.S. atrtw/xa. 

* aiTioc, -ov, TO, V.S. atVios. 

amos, -a, -ov « airt'a), [in LXX : I Ki 2222 (-^^q)^ Da LXX Bel «, 
TH ib. *2, Su 53, II Mac 4*'^ 13*, iv Mac 1^^ * ;] 1. causative of, responsible 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 15 

for ; as subst., 6 a?., tM cause, author : He 5^ ; to ai., the cause, Ac 19**'. 
2. blameworthy, culpable; as subst., 6 a*., the culprit, the accused 
(Lat. reus) ; to ai. (= atTia, 3), the crime, Lk 23^''^*''^'^.+ 

*+aiTiw|xa (Eec. oLTLa^a, the usual form; v. MM, VGT, s.v.), -to?, 
TO (<| aiTtrio/x,ai, aiTLa), a charge, accusation : Ac 25'. t 

** ai<t>v'i8ios (in Lk, I.e., ^<^v- WH ; v. M, Pr., 35), -ov {<ial^i'r]^ = 
a<^vws, suddenlji), [in LXX : Wi IT^^^ ii Mac 14^^ m Mac 32* * ;] sudden, 
unexjjected : Lk 21^*, i Th 5^.t 

t aixH'Oi^'»*o'i<*> "Ci?) 1? (-<^ ai;^;u.aAa)Tos), [in LXX chiefly for "'lit??, 

nbia ;] captivity (Diod., al.) : Ee IS^*' ; pi., abstr. for concr., = at'x/Aa- 

AcItoi, Eph48(I'XX)_t 

t aixfAaXwTeud) (<^ alxfj.dX(DTOs), [in LXX chiefly for rOtS ;] = a-'x^a- 
XcoTt^w, q.v., to lead caijtive : Eph 48(LXX)_f 

t aix|AoiXwTtl^a> (<^ atxAiciA.wTos), [in LXX chiefly for nsiS';] in late 
writers = cl. at^ptAtoTov ttoiw (ayw), to take or Zeaf? caj)tive : seq. eis, 
Lk 2124 (cf. To li«) ; metaph., Eo 723, n Co 10^, ii Ti 3^t 

aixfAtxXojTos, -ov (<] alxp.^, a Spear, oAtV/co^ai, to be taken), [in LXX 
chiefly for nnc;, nblS;] cajjtive : Lk 4i8(Lxx)_t 

alui', -coves", 6, [in LXX chiefly for abw , IV ;] 1. in cl., like Lat. 

aevum (LS, MM, VGT, s.v.), a space of time, as, a lifetime, generation, 
period of history, an indefinitely long period ; in NT of an indefinitely 
long period, an age, eternity, usually c. prep. (MM, VGT) ; (a) of the 
past : Sltt' al (cf. Heb. 0^127^), Lk I'O; (b) of the future : eh r. al. (cf. 

Db)V^), forever, Mt 21^^; id., c. neg., never, Jo 4^'*; more strongly, ets 

Tov al Tou al, He 18(LXX). ^[^ ^^^^ ^^^ jyf^ gl3 . ^i^ ^^^^ ^j^ ^j^j, ^j ^gf_ 

Is 4517, ny ^a!?iy-iy), Eo 16", LT; cf. also Eph 321, 11 Pe 3^^ Ju25, 

Ee 14^^. 2. 01 ai., tJie worlds, the universe, "the sum of the periods of 
time, including all that is manifested in them " : He I2 ll^ (cf. i Ti 1^'^, 
where twv at. are prob. "the ages or world-periods which when 
summed up make eternity ". 3. tlie present age (Heb. niH D^iirn) : 

6 al, Mt 1322 ; 6 al ovtos, Mt 12^2 ; 6 vvv aL, 1 Ti G^^ ; 6 €V€0-Ta)S al, Ga 1* ; 

similarly, of the time after Christ's second coming (N2n Dbiyn),6at. 

€Kcrvos, Lk 20^5 ; 6 aL /xe'XXw, Mt 12^2 ; 6 al 6 ipxofJievo^, Mk lO^O. 

STiV. .- Ko'o-/Ao?, i/ie ordered tcniverse, the scheme of material things ; 
olKovfxevT], the inhabited earth ; in contrast with both of which at. is the 
world under aspects of time (cf . Westc. on He I2 ; Tr., Syn., § lix ; 
Thayer, s.v., at.; Cremer, 74, 620; MM, VGT). 

a\(!ivio<i, -ov (as usual in Attic), also -a, -ov. 11 Th 2^®, He 9^2. 
(■< atwi'), [in LXX chiefly for cbir ;] age-long, eternal, (a) of that which 

is without either beginning or end : Eo 162^, He 9^* ; (b) of that 
which is without beginning : Eo 162^, 11 Ti 1^, Tit I2 ; (c) of that which 
is without end (MM, VGT, s.v.) : o-K7?vat', Lk 169 • ^i^^^^ „ Co 5^ ; 
BtaOyKT], He 132** ; evayye'Xtov, Ee 14*' ; 7ra/oa*cXr;o-is, II Th 2^® ; Xw/acoo-ts, 



16 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

He 9^2. K\r)povofjiia, ib. ^^; KoXao-ts, Mt 25*«; Kpifj.a, He 6^; Kpurts, 
Mk 329 ; ^XiBpov, II Th !» ; irdp, Mt IS^ ; freq. c. ^0)77, q.v. 

Syn. : di'Stos, q.v. 

dKaOapaia, -as, rj « aKu^apros), [in LXX chiefly for HNDtf , XD^ l] 

uncleanmss, impurity, (a) physical (MM, VGT, s.v.) : Mt 23-^ ; (b) 
moral : Bo V^^ 6'^, 11 Co 122\ Ga 5i9, Eph 4^9 5^, Col 3^, i Th 2^ 47.t 
*t dKa0dpTTjs, -Tos, 17, uncleanness : Ee 17*, Rec. (for t. dKu6'apTa).t 
dKdOapTos, -ov « d- neg., Kadatpw), [in LXX chiefly for NQ^ ;] mw- 

cZea?i, impure ; (a) physically (LS, MM, VGT, s.v.) ; (&) ceremonially : 
Ac IQi'*' ^8 118, 1 Co 714, II Co 617, Re 18^ ; (c) morally : Eph 5^ Re 17* ; 
c. TTv^ifxa, as always in Gosp., Mt 10^ 12*^, Mk 123,26,27 311,30 52,8,13 
67 725 925^ Lk 433,36 618 829 942 ii24_ Ac 516 8^ Re 16^3 (cf. Cremer, 
320). t 

*t dKaip€'o(i,ai, -ovfj.ai (<^ aKatpo?, unseasonable), to have no oppor- 
tunity (opp. to evKaLpiOi) : Phi A^'^.f 

** dKaipus, adv. (<;dKatpos, iiuseasouable) , [in LXX : Si 35 (32)**;] 
out of season, unseasonably : opp. to evKaLp(D<; (q.v.), 11 Ti 42 (cf. Cremer, 
740; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

d-KttKos, -ov, [in LXX for iJig , Dri , etc. ;] (a) as in cl. (-S^sch., 

Plat., al.), of persons, simple, guileless : Ro 16^^, He 72" (cf. Cremer, 
327) ; (&) of things, undamaged (? MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

aKttt'Ga, -T/s, r) (-<|d/c77, a point), [in LXX chiefly for |^ip , also for 
TD , n^l27 , etc. ;] a prickly jtlc^nt, thorn, brier ; in NT always pi. : 

Mt 716 137, 22 2729, Mk 4^' 18, Lk 6** 8"' ^\ Jo I92, He & (v. MM, VGT, 
s.v.).t 

dKd^'0i»'os, -ov « dKav^a), [in LXX : Is 34^3 (td) * ;] I. of thorns : 
Mk 151^ Jo 195. 2. of acantha-wood (Hdt. ; tt. ap. MM, VGT, 9.v.).t 

d-KapTTos, -ov, [in LXX: Je 26 (Dip^S), Wi 15*, iv Mac 16'*;] 

unfruitful, barren : fig., Mt I322, Mk 4^9, i Co 14^*, Eph 5^\ Tit 3^*, 
II Pe 18, Ju i2.t 

**t d-KaTd-YkwoTTOs, -ov (<^ Karayi Vwo-kw) , [in LXX : II Mac 4*''*;] not 
open to just rebtike, irrejyrehensible : Tit 2* (v. Cremer, 676 ; and for 
other exx., MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

t d-KaTa-KdXuTTTOs, -ov (<^ KaTa/caAvrrTw), [in LXX: Le 13** A 
lynp) *;] uncovered, unveiled: i Co 11^' ^^.t 

*t d-Kard-KpiTos, -ov (<| KaTaKpcvw), 1. imcondemned (EV) : Ac 16*^ 
2225. 2. = cl. aKpiTo<;, without trial, not yet tried (MM, VGT, s.v.) 
Ac, 11. cc.t 

**td-KaTd-\uTos, -ov (<;»caTaXi;w), [in LXX: IV Mac 10^1*;] iiidis- 
soluble : He l^^.f 

*t dKaTdirao-Tos (v. Mayor, 11 Pe, cxcvii; WH. App., 170; MM. 
VGT, S.V.), -ov, a form otherwise unknown, prob. colloq. for -irava-ros 
(q.v.) : II Pe 2^*, L., Tr. mg., WH.t 

*t dKardTraoo-Tos, -ov (<^ /caraTrai'w) , that cannot cease, not to be re- 
strained : c. gen. rei, 11 Pe 2^*, T, Tr. txt.t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 17 

t dKaraoracTia, -as, 17 (<^ d/caTacrTaTos) , [in LXX : Pr 26^^ (nniQ), 

To 4^^ * ;] instability (MM, VGT, s.v.) ; hence, confusion, tumult : 
I Co 1433, Ja 316 ; pi. (Bl., § 32, 6), Lk 21^, 11 Co 6^ I220 (Polyb, al. ; 
V. Cremer, 739). t 

d-KaT<i-(rraTos, -ov « Ka^t'cTTT/zAi), [in LXX: Is 54^^ (rnvb);] un- 
settled, unstable : Ja 1^ 3^.t 

t dKaT(i(7X€Tos, -OV «/caT€x<^), [in LXX: Jb 31ii, iiiMacGi^*;] 
that cannot be restrained : Ja 3^ Eec. (for -o-Taros, q.v.).t 

'AKeXSafxd, -ha^d-x, V.S. 'A;)(€A8a/Aax. 
** dKcpaios, -ov (<[ KepdvvvfjLi), [in LXX : Es 8^^ * ;] unmixed, jnire, 
hence, metaph. (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.), guileless, simple : Mt 10^", Eo 1&^^, 
Phi, 2i5.t 

SVN. : aSoXos, a/<a/cos, (iTrXovs (cf. Ellic. on Phi., I.e. ; Tr., Syn., 
§lvi). 

**dKXi.'iis, -es «Kktvoy), [in LXX: iv Mac 6^ 173*;] wibending, 
firm: metaph. (MM, VGT, s.v.). He l(fi^A 

** dKfjid^u (•< axixri), [in LXX : IV Mac 2^ * ;] to be at the prime ; of 
produce of the ground, to be ripe (Thuc.) : Ee 14^8 (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 
* dKfiriK, acc. of aKfxrj, a point, used as adv., at the present point of 
time, even now, even yet : Mt 15^*. t 

dKori, -^s, 17 «dK:ovco), [in LXX : Ex 152*, al. for ratZT, its parts 
and derivatives, exc. De ll^^ (^j^^T) ;] 1. hearing, the sense of hearing : 
I Co 12^^ II Pe 28; "Hebraic dative," dxofi h.Kovuv (freq. in LXX; 
V. M, Pr., 14, 75), Mt 13i*, Ac 2826. 2. organ of hearing, the ear 
(Arist., al. ; MM, VGT, s.v.) : 11 Ti 4"- '^ ; pi., Mk V\ Lk 1\ Ac VI'^^ 
He 5^^ 3. a thing heard, i.e., (a) a message, teaching : Jo 12^^ and 
Eo lOie.iULXx)^ Ga 32.5 E, mg. ; Aoyos dKoij^, i Th 2i3, He 4^; (b) a 
report, rumour : c. gen, pers., Mt 4"'* 14^ 24", Mk 1-^ 13'^ (Cremer, 82, 
623; MM, FGT, s.v.).t 

dKoXouGe'w, -w {<^dK6Kov6o<;, following ; <Cd.- cop., KeX€v6o<;, poet., 
away), [in LXX chiefly for "ijbn ;] to accomjiany, follow : Mt 4^^, al. 
Metaph., of discipleship : Mt 9^, Mk 9^8, Jo 12^6, al. Absol. : Mt 8^^ ; 
more freq., c. dat. (cl.), Mt 8^, al. ; seq. fierd, c. gen, (cl. ; Eutherford, 
KPhr., 458 f.), Lk 9*^ ; ^ttiVw, c. gen. (Heb. i-iqK Tibn), Mt 10^8 

(cf. i$-, €7r-, KttT-, Trap-, crw-d/coXov^ew). 

SVN. : (cl.) €7ro;Ltai, not in NT (v. Cremer, 80; MM, VGT, s.v.). 

dKou'o), [in LXX chiefly for yac; ;] to hear, listen, attend, perceive 
by hearing, comprehend by hearing. 1. Intrans. : Mk 4^ 7^^, Ja 2^, 
Ee2', al.; t. wmv, Mt IS^^CLxx); c. cogn. dat., d/cof) d. (v.s. dKor,), 

Mt W\ Ac 2826 (LXX). 5 1^^^ 5^a (0^5) SlKOV^LV, d/COVO-dTO), Mt lll^ 

Mk 423, Ee 2^, al. 2. Trans., prop. c. acc. rei, of thing heard, gen. 
pers., from whom heard (LS, s.V.) : Ac 1*; c. acc. rei, Mt 12^^, Jo 38 
(Abbott, JG, 76), Ac 22^, al.; c. dupl. acc, Jo 12^^, 1 Co 11^8; c. gen. 
rei, Jo 74« (Abbott, JV, 116) ; t. <^a)vijs (cf. Heb. bip? yg)^ , Ex 18^9), 

Jo 52^' 28^ Ac 9^^ (on the distinction bet. this and d. <f>o)vqv, ib. *, v. M, 
Pr., 66 ; Field, Notes, 117 ; Abbott, Essays, 93 f .) ; of God answering 

2 



18 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

prayer, Jo 9", i Jo 5^<« i* ; c. ace. rei, seq. vapd, Jo 82«. ^o^ Ac 10^2, 
n Ti 2- ; id. seq. airo, i Jo 1* ; c. gen. pars. seq. ptcp., Mk 14^^^ 
Lk 183«, al. (On NT usage generally, v. Bl., § 36, 5 ; Cremer, 82.) 

** dKpaaia, -as, 17 (<^ dxpaTT^s, q.v.), [in LXX : I Mac 6^" * ;] in Arist. 
and later writers = d/cparcia (Lft., Notes, 222 f.), want of power, hence 
want of self-control, incontinence : Mt 23^^, i Co 7*.+ 

dKpaTTJs, -e's (<C[ tpdros), [in LXX: Pr 27^"*;] (a) powerless, im- 
potent; (b) in moral sense, lacking self-control, incontinent : ii Ti 3^.t 

fiKparos, -ov « Kepduvv/xi), [in LXX : Ps 74 (75)8 (-iQp,)^ je 321 
(25^5) (nan), m Mac 5^ *] ; unmixed, pure : o'vos, Ee lA^^.f 

dKpipeia, -as, v « ^xp^/3v^), [in LXX : Da LXX th 71« (n^^^.), 

Wi 1221, Si 1625 42* *;] exactness, precision (for exx., v. MM, VGT, s.v.) : 
Ac 223.t 

dKpiPiis, -€s, [in LXX : Da LXX 2« 6^2 (n^yi.) 42^, Es 4^, Si 182» 

192* 34 (31)2* 35 (32)3 * .j exact, precise, careful, of things and persons : 
superl., Ac 26^t 

**dKpiP6a), -w (<^ oKptySi/s), [in Aq. : Is 30^ 49^'*;] to enquire with 
exactness, learn carefully : Mt 2''' ^^ (for similar ex., v. MM, VGT, 
s.v.).t 

dKpiPois, adv. « aKptpr,^), [in LXX : De 19^8 (ntt^), Da th 7" 
(n3fl), Ez 391*, Wi I918, Si 1829*;] with exactness, carefully: Mt 2«, 

Lk 13, Ac 1825, Eph 515, I Th 52 (M, Th., in 1.). Compar., d/cpiySco-Tcpov 
(Milligan, NTD, 111; MM, VGT, s.v.), Ac 1826 231^.20 2422.t 

dKpi9, -iSos, rj, [in LXX chiefly for n3")fct , also for 230 , etc. ;] 

a locust : Mt 3^ Mk 1«, Ee 93. 7.t 

*+ dKpoaTTJpioc, -ov, TO (<^ aLKpodo/xaL, to listen), a place of audience : 
Ac 2523 (Plut.).t 

dKpoa-rijs, ov, 6 (v. supr.), [in LXX : Is 33 (Ufub), Si 329*;] a hearer : 

Eo213, Ja 122,23,25,t 

t dKpoj3u(TTia, -as, rj (perh. an Alexandrian form of cl. aKpoTroa-OCa', 
cf. MM, VGT, s.v.), [in LXX for nb")y ;] the prepuce, foreskin (LXX), 
hence abstr., uncircumcision : Ac 113, jjq 22^-27 330 4.10-12^ j Qq 718, 19^ 
Ga 5" 6^*, Col 2^3 311^ gy meton., the uncircumcised : Eo 49, Ga 2^, 
Eph2ii.t 

t aKpo-ycoi'taios, -ata, -aiov (•<[ axpos, ytavia, an angle), [in LXX: 
Is 2816 (n|Q)*;] = Attic ywvLalos (freq. in Inscr. ; MM, VGT, s.v. d.), at 

the extreme angle : 6 d., the corner foundation stone, Eph 22'*, i Pe 26,t 
* dKpoOit'ioK, -ov, TO (<^ dxpos, ^ts, a heap), prop., the top of a heap, 
hence, in pi., 1. first-fruits (Xen. ; MM, VGT, s.v.). 2. In war, the 
choicest spoils (cf. Hdt., viii, 121 f.) : He 7*.t 

aKpoc, -ov, TO, V.S. aKpos. 

aKpo5, -a, -ov, [in LXX for nS(5 , jni , etc. ;] highest, extreme ; as 

subst., T^ d., ^/ifi toj9, extremity : Mk 1327, l^ 1524^ He II21 ; pi. (cf. 
MM, VGT, S.V.), Mt 2431.+ 



MANUAL GBEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 19 

'AKu'Xas, -ov (and -a; MM, VGT, s.v.), 6 (Lat.), Aquila: 
Ac 182.18.26^ Ro 163^ I Co 1619, II Ti 4i9.t 

**tdKup6«, -w « Kvpo<i, authority), [in LXX : i Es 6^^^ jy MaCg*;] 
to revoke, invalidate (MM, VGT, s.v.) : Mt 15^, Mk 1'^^, Ga S^^ (Plut.).t 
** dKuXoTws, adv. (<; KwXvcj), [in Sm. : Jb 34^^ * ;] without hindrance 
(so freq. in legal documents ; MM, VGT, s.v.) : Ac 283i.t 

aKwc (Attic contr. for de'/cwv), -ovcra, -ov (<^ d- neg., l/cwv, willing), 
[in LXX : Jb 14^7, iv Mac 11^2*;] unwilling : i Co Q^^.t 

dXdPaorpoK, -ot>, to (also -os, 6, 17 ; colloq. and koivij for dXdySao-Tos), 
[m LXX : iv Ki 21^3 (nn^)* ;] a box of alabaster (dXa/3ao-TtTr;s) for 

ointment : Mt 26^ Mk 14^, Lk 7^7 {y.DCG, i, 41b; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 
** dXaj^ofia (Eec. -€ia, the earlier form), -as, rj (■< dAa^wv), [in LXX : 
Wi 5^ 17'', u, IV Mac 5 * ;] the character of an aXa^wv, boastfulness, vain- 
glory, vaunting : Ja 4^^ (Mayor, in 1.), i Jo 2i*'.t 

dXaJcSi', -wos, 6, rj (<; dX?/, wandering), [in LXX : Jb 28^ (rDQ?), 
Hb 2* (Tnj), Pr 212* ^pi,,j*.j prop, a vagabond, hence, an impostor, 

a boaster : Eo l^o, 11 Ti 32.+ 

Syn. : vl3pL(TTrj<;, vTr€pyj(f>avo? (v. Tr., Syn., § xxix ; Lft., Notes, 256). 

dXaXd^w (onomat. from the battle-cry dXaXd), [in LXX chiefly 
for 3n*l hi., bb'' ;] prop, to raise a war-cry, shout with triumph or joy ; 
rarely of grief, to wail : Mk 5^^ (cf. Je 4^) ; of a cymbal, dXaXd^oi' 
(EV. clanging), i Co 13^ (cf. 6\o\vCw).f 

*t d-XdXT)Tos, -ov (■< XaXiw), inexpressible, not to be uttered : Eo 82«.t 

a-XaXos, -ov (< XdXos, talkative), [in LXX : Ps 30 (31)^8 (D^K ni.) 
37 (38)13 (D^x) * ;] dumb, speechless : Mk 7^7 Q^^. 25,t 

aXas (T, dXa), -aTo%, to, late form of cl. dXs, -o?, 6 (MM, FGT, s.v.), 
[in LXX chiefly for nblj ;] salt, lit. and fig. : Mt 5^3 9^0, Lk 143* ; like 

cl. aXes, wit, of wisdom and grace in speech : Col 4".+ 

dXccus (Eec. dXicus, the older form ; WH, Ajyp., 151), -cw?, 6 
«dXs, the sea), [in LXX for Jl, a;i;] a fisherman: Mt 4^8' is, 

Mk li«.i^ Lk 52.+ 

dX€i<t)w (cf. XiVos, oil), [in LXX : Ge 31", Ex 40i5, Nu 33 (ni2?a) 
Ez 1310 ff- (mM), Eu 33, II Ki 1220 142^ jy Ki 42, 11 Ch 281^, Mi 6^5, Da 
LXX TH 103 ("JJID), Es 212, Jth 168*;] i^ anoint, festally or in homage : 
c. ace. rei or pers., Mt 6^^ Jo 123, Mk 16^ ; seq. dat., ^Amw, Mk 6^3, 
Ja 51* ; fx^pi^, Lk 738. «, Jo ll^.t 

Syn. : xP^<a, fivpi^o) (against the distinction made bet. d. and y. 
in Tr., Syn., § xxxviii, v. MM, VGT, s.v., d.). 

*t dX€KTopo<|>cj>'ia, -as, •^ (<^ dXexTwp, (ftwvrj), cock-crowing, i.e. the 
third watch in the night : Mk 1335.t 

dX^KTwp, -opos, 6 (poet, form of dkcKTpvwv ; v. MM, VGT, s.v.), [in 
LXX : Pr 24«« (303i) (T7-|7 ; BDB, Lex., 267)* ;] a cock : Mt 263*' ^*' 7^, 

Mk 1430,68,72^ Lk 2234. «0, 61^ Jo 1338 i827.t 

'AXc^ai/Speus, -e'ws, 6, an Alexandrian : Ac 6^ 182*.t 



20 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

'AXe^acSpikos (Rec. -Bpivos] V. Kiihner 3, II, 296), -rj, -oV, Alexan- 
drian : Ac 27« 28ii.t 

'AXe'laj'Spos, -OV, 6, Alexander. 1. Son of Simon of Gyrene: 
Mk 15-1. 2. A kinsman of the High Priest : Ac 4". 3. A certain 
Jew : Ac IQ^^. 4. A coppersmith : 1 Ti l^o. 5. Perh. = 4 (v. Ellic. 
on iTi, I.e.): ii Ti 4i*.t 

aXeupoc, -OV, to (•< dXevw, to grind), [in LXX for riDj?. , Nu 5^^, 

al. ;] meal : Mt 1S^\ Lk IS'-'i.t 

dXriOeia, -a?, rj (■< aXr]6^<s), [in LXX chiefly for nOS (on which, 

V. Cremer, 627 f.), njlD^;] trnth (v. DB, iv, 818 f.). 1. Objectively, 

" the reality lying at the basis of an appearance ; the manifested, 
veritable essence of a matter" (Cremer, 86) : Eo 9^, al. ; of religious 
truth, Ro 1^^, al. ; esp. of Christian doctrine, Ga 2'^, al. ; d. Oeov, Ro 15^. 
2. Subjectively, truthfulness, truth, not merely verbal (cl.), but sin- 
cerity and integrity of character: Jo 8'**, iii Jo^. 3. In phrases (MM, 
VGT, S.V.) : ctt' dAT^^etas, Mk 121*, al. ; d. Xeyav (ctTTtu', XaXilv), Ro 9\ 

II Go 126, Eph 4-25^ ai_ . ^_ ^oielv, Jo 3^1, i Jo 1« (cf. DB, iv, 818 b, ff.). 
dXriGeJa) « d\7?^7?s), [in LXX : Ge 20^6 {UD'^) 42i« (n©^), Pr 21^ 

(iD^iyp), Is 4426 (Qijar), Si 31 (34)"*;] to sjyeak the truth (R, mg., deal 

truly; Field, Notes, 192) : Ga 41^, Eph 4i5.t 

dXT)6iis, -es (<C At/^w = Xavddvii), hence primarily, unconcealed, 
manijest ; hence, actual, real), [in LXX for nSiX, etc.;] (a) of things, 

<rwe, conforming to reality : Jo 4^^ 5^^' ^^ 6^^ ( = aX-q$iv6<i, q.v.) S^^* ^"» i'' 
10*1 19^5 2124, Ac 129, Phi 48^ Tit l^^, i Pe 5^2, n Pe 2^2, i Jo 2^, iii Jo 12 ; 
{h) of persons, truthful : Mt 221^, Mk 12i*, Jo 3^3 7^8 8^6, Eo 3*, 
II Go 68.t 

Syn. : aXrfOLvo^, real, genuine, ideal, as opp. to spurious or 
imperfect. aXr}$i]<;, true to fact, as opp. to false, lying, denotes the 
actuality of a thing : dXrjdivo^, its relation to the corresponding con- 
ception. (Gf. Tr., Syn., § viii ; Cremer, 84 f., 631 ; Abbott, JV, 234 f. ; 
DB, iv, 818 f. ; MM, VGT, s.vv.) 

dXtjOiKos, -rj, -6v (<^ a.Xr]6ri<;), [in LXX for JilpX ;] true, in the sense 

of real, ideal, genuine : Lk 16^1, Jo 1^ 423. 37 532 728 gie 151 173 1935^ 
I Th 19, He 82 92* 1022, I Jo 28 520, Re 3^. '^ 6i» 15^ 16^ I92 ; = AXr,6ijs, 
Re 199 215 226 (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

SVmY. : aXrjer)';, q.V. 
+ dXriflu (K01V17 form of the Attic dAew), [in LXX for 7ni3 ;] to grind : 
Mt 2441, Lk 1735.t 

dXr]0is, adv. «dX7;()»?s), [in LXX (Je 35(28)6, Ps 57 (58)^, al.) 
chiefly for |/^X and cogn. forms;] trzily, surely: Mt 1433 26''3 27^", 
Mk 1470 1539, Lk 927 12** 213, Jo i48 442 qh 726, 4o gsi 178^ Ac U^\ 
I Th 213, I Jo 25.t 

dXicus, V.S. dXecus. 
t dXie.5(o « dAieus), [in LXX : Je 16^6 pi)* ;] to fish : Jo 213 (^M, 

VGT, s.v.).t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 21 

dXi^u «; aAs), [in LXX for nba ;] to salt, season with salt : Mt 
6", Mk 9«.t 

*t dXioYTj/xa, -Tos, TO, (<^ late dXto-yew, to pollute), pollution : 
Ac 152«.t 

dXXd (dXA.' usually bef. a and v, often bef. e and rj, rarely bef. o 
and to, never bef. i; Tdf., Pr., 93 f. ; WH, ^j;)^., 146), adversative 
particle, stronger than 8e; prop, neuter pi. of aAAos, used adverbially, 
with changed accent ; hence prop, othenuise, on the other hand (cf. 
Eo 3^^); 1. opposing a previous negation, hiit : oi {/xr]) . . . d., Mt 
515, 17^ ]y[]j 539^ Jq 716^ q\ . rhetorically subordinating but not entirely 
negativing vrhat precedes, ov . . . d., not so much . . . as, Mk Q^*", 
Mt 1020, Jo 1244^ al. ; with ellipse of the negation, Mt 11^-^ Ac 19^, 
I Co S" 6^^ 7'^, II Co 7^^, Ga 2^, al. ; in opposition to a foregoing pos. 
sentence, d. oi, Mt 24«, i Co lO'^s ; oi fxovov . . . d. Kai, Jo 51^, Eo 1^2, 
al. ; elliptically, after a negation, d. Iva, Mk 14*^, Jo 1^ 9^, al. ; = el /Mrj 
(Bl., § 77, 13; M, Pr., 241; but cf. WM, § iii, 10), Mt 20^3, Mk 4^2. 
2. Without previous negation, to express opposition, interruption, 
transition, etc., but : Jo 16'^^ 122^^, Ga 2^* ; before commands or re- 
quests, Ac 102*^ 26^", Mt 9^*, Mk 922, al. ; to introduce an accessory 
idea, 11 Co 7^^ ; in the apodosis after a condition or concession with 
ei, idv, ctVcp, yet, still, at least, Mk 1429, i Co 92, 11 Co 4i«, Col 2^, al. ; 
after fxiv, Ac 4^", Eo 142*^, i Co 14^^" ; giving emphasis to the following 
clause, d\X' epx^Tai wpa, yea, etc., Jo 162; so with neg., dXA' oiBe, nay, 
nor yet, Lk 23^^. 3. Joined with other particles (a practice which 
increases in late writers ; Simcox, LNT, 166), d. ye, yet at least, Lk 242^, 
I Co 92 ; d. ^, save only, except, Lk 12^^ 11 Co 1^^ ; d. fj.h ovv. Phi 3^ (on 
this usage, v. MM, VGT, s.v.). 

dXXdaaw «dXAo?), [in LXX chiefly for p)bn , lia hi., etc. ;] 1. to 
change : Ac 6^*, Ga 42*^. 2. to transform : 1 Co 15"- ^\ He 1^2. 3. to 
exchange : c. ace, seq. eV (= 5, Ps 105 (106)2") instead of simple gen. 

(Bl., § 36, 8), Eo 123 ^gf ^^.^ gj.^ /car-, airo-Kar-, /xct-, crvv-aWdcrarw ; V. 

MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

**dXXaxo06»', adv. «dXXo9), [in LXX : iv Mac 1^*;] = dXXo^cv (v. 
MM, VGT, s.y.), from another place : Jo lO^.t 

*dXXaxou, adv. «dXAos), = dXXoo-e (MM, VGT, S.V.), elsewhere: 
Mk 138.+ 

*t dXXTjyope'd), -Oi (■< dXXos, dyopcvw), to speak allegorically (Cremer, 
96 ff.) : Ga 424.t 

t dXXT]Xouid (Eec. dXXrjXovia ; Heb. iTlbbn , p>fO''^^^ ^^ Lord), [in 

LXX in the titles of certain Pss (104 (105), al.), and at the end of Ps 
150; also To 131^, m Mac 1^^;] fiallelujah, alleluia: Ee 19i. 3, 4, sf 

dXXTJXcoi' (gen. pi.), dat. -015, -ais, ace. -ovs, -as, -a (no nom.), 
recipr. pron. (•< dXXos), of one another, mtctually : Mt 25^2, Mk 4*^, 
Jo 1322, al. 

t dXXoyenis, -« «dXAo9, yevos), [in LXX chiefly for "IT, 133 ;] of 

another race, a foreigner ( = dXXo<^iiXos; Cremer, 150; MM, VGT, s.v.): 
Lk 17i8.t 



22 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

aXXofiai, [in LXX for ubs , 3^1 pi., etc. ;] to leaj) : Ac 3^ W^ ; of 
water, to spring up, Jo 4^* (MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

aXXos, -t], -o, (cf. Lat. alius, Bng. else), [in LXX for TTIl^ , irn<, 

etc.;] other, another: absol., Mt 20^, al. ; a. 84, i Co 3i« 12«; pi., Mk 
61* ; attached to a noun, Mt 2^2 421, al. ; c. art., 6 a., tJie other, Mt S^a, 
Jo 19^-^ (Bl., § 47, 8) ; ol a., the others, the rest, Jo 202*, i Co 1429 • 5^ 
Trpos SXKov = TTpos dAXr/Xows (BL, § 48, 10), Ac 2^2 ; dW (i.e. dXko) rf 
(Bl, !< 77, 13), Lk 12*1 . geq. ^Xi?v, Mk 12^2 ; ^1^-^, Jo 622 ; 7rap({ c. ace, 
I Co 3". 

SVN. : erepos, q.v. a. denotes numerical, 1. qualitative difference 
(Cremer, 89). a. generally " denotes simply distinction of individuals, 
I. involves the secondary idea of difference in kind " (v. Lft., Meyer, 
Ramsay, on Ga 1«' ^ ; Tr., Syn., § xcv ; BL, §51,6; M, Pr., 79 f., 246 ; 
MM, VGT, s.vv.). As to whether the distinction can be maintained in 
I Co 12«' 10, v. ICC, in L, and on He lP*f-, v. Westc, in 1. 

* dXXoTpi-€iTi<TKoiTos (Eec. dXXoTpiocTT-) , -ov, 6, Ofie who meddles in 
thiiigs alien to his calling : i Pe 4^* (v. ICC, in 1. ; Deiss., BS, 224^ ; 
MM. VGT, s.v.).t 

dXXoTpios, -a, -ov «aAXos), [in LXX f or -|| , ip: , nnx ;] 1. be- 
longing to another, not one's own (opp. to iStos) : Lk 16^2^ Eo 14* 152*> 
(Field, Notes, 165 f.), ii Co lO^*' i«, i Ti 522, He 92*. 2. foreign, strange, 
alien (opp. to oiKcro?; v. MM, VGT, s.v.) : Mt 1725.26^ Jq iqs, Ac 7«, 
He 119' 34 1 

dXX6(|)uXos, -ov (aXAos, <^i;Aov, a tribe), [in LXX chiefly for TW^^ ;] 

foreign, of another race (MM, VGT, s.v.) ; as opp. to a Jew, a Gentile : 
Ac 1028.+ 

aXXws, adv. «aXXos), otherwise : i Ti 52*.t 

dXodu, -w « aXws, v.s. aXwv ; and cf. MM, VGT, s.v.), [in LXX 
chiefly for crn ;] to thresh : 1 Co 9"^' i«, i Ti 5^8. t 

d-XoYos, -ov, [in LXX : Ex 6^2 (Qinst^ bljr), Nu 6^2 (ba:), Jb 11^2, 

"Wi 111**!", IV Mac 3*;] 1. without reason, irrational: ^<2a, 11 Pe 2^2^ 
Ju^o. 2. contrary to reason: Ac 2527 (y, MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

t dXoTj, -7?s, :i7, [in LXX : Ca 4^* N (DibilN) * ;] the aloe, aloes (the 

powder of a fragrant wood) : Jo 19^^ A 

aXs, dAos, o, variant for aXas (q.v.) : Mk 9*9, Eec. WH, mg., E, 
mg.t 

dXuK^s, -7, -ov « aXs), [in LXX for nb© , n^-m ;] salt : Ja 3^2.+ 

*dXuiro9, -o^ {■<CXvTTrj), free from grief : Phi 228.t 
**aXucns, -£(1)5, -Jy, [in LXX: Wi 17^7*;] a clmin, bond: Mk S^. *, 
Lk 829, Ac 12«' 7 2133 2820, ^ph 620, 11 Ti l^^, Re 20i.+ 

* d-XuCTiTtXris, -e's (cf. Xvo-ireXcw), improfitable : He 13^71 

''AX<|>a, rcJ, indecl. (v.s. A), AlpJm : Ee 1^ 21« 22^3 (v. Swete, in 11.).+ 
'AX<|)aIos (WH, 'AX-), -ov, 6 (Aram. ""e^D), Aljihceus. 1. Father of 

Levi : Mk 21*. 2. Father of James : Mt 103, Mk 318, Lk 6^*, Ac l^s.t 
aXwj', -wvos (for Attic aXws, -o), v. MM, VGT, s.v.), •i^, [in LXX 



MANUAL GBEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 23 

chiefly for ]lil ;] a threshing-floor : Mt 3^^^ l^ 317 (here prob. by meton. 

= the grain on the threshing-floor). + 

dXtiTTTjl, -€Kos, i [in LXX for bv^\S;] a fox: Mt S^o, Lk 9^8; 
metaph., of Herod, Lk 13^2 f 

aX«(Tis, -cojs, T] « aAio-Ko/Aat), [in LXX : Je 27 (50)4" (izrsn ni.)* ;] 
a taking, capture : 11 Pe 2^^ f 

Sjia, adv., at once (Lat. simul) : Ac 24^6 27*'', Eo 3^^ (^^ ^^^ ^^^ 
= ITH^. , Ps 143), Col 43, I Ti 513, Phm 22 ; geq. o-i;V, i Th 4^7 51" ; as 

prep. c. dat., together with : Mt 1329 (v. MM, VGT, s.v.) ; also, c. adv., 
a. Trpwi (cL, a. lo), etc.), early in the morning : Mt 20^t 

**d|jiaeT)s, -cs « fiav^avw), [in Sm. : Ps 48 (49)^1 *;] unlearned, 
ignorant : 11 Pe 3^* (on the rareness of this word, v. MM, VGT, 
s.v.).t 

*t dfAapdrriKos, -ov (■<[ d/AapavTos), 0/ amaranth (Inscr.) ; hence un- 
fading : I Pe 5*.+ 

**t dfidpai'TOS, -ov (<^ /AapatVo/xat), [in LXX: Wi 6^2 (o-o^t'a)* ;] n7l- 
fading (whence 6 d., the amaranth, an unfading flower) : i Pe 1* (cf. 
MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

dfiaprdfo) (pres. formed from aor. afj.apTelv), [in LXX for SlOU, 
also for DCrX , ^1 , etc, ;] 1. to miss the mark (Horn., -^sch., al.), 
hence metaph. (Hom,, al.), to err, do wrong. 2. In LXX and NT, 
to violate God's law, to sin (for non-Christian exx., v. MM, VGT, 
8.V.): absol., Mt 1825 27*, Lk 173, Jo 5'* 8"" 92.3, Eo 2^2 323 5^2,14,16 
615, I Co 728.36 1534, Eph 426, I Ti 520, Tit S^\ He 3^7 102^, i Pe 22*, 
II Pe 2*, I Jo 110 21 3«« 8' 9 518 ; c. cogn. ace, d. a/xapriav (cf . Ex 323o, 
nXMO Niarj), i Jo 5i«; seq. cis, Mt I821, Lk 15i8'2i 17*, Ac 25^ 

(Kaiaapa), I Co 6I8 8^2 (Field, Notes, 173); cVwTriov, Lk 15i8«2i; ^rp^ 
^dvarov (cf. Nu 1822, rnajj N«3n), I Jo 5i« (Cremer, 98, 633).t 

dfAdpTrip,a, -tos, to (-< d/xaprciv, V. supr.), [in LXX for DNlSn , ]'\V , 

etc.;] an act of disobedience to divine law (Lft., Notes, 273), a sinful 
deed, a sin : Mk 32^- 29, Eo 32^, i Co 6^», 11 Pe 1^, WH, mg. ; al^viov d, 
{DOG, i, 788»), Mk 329 (for exx. from tt., v. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

SVN. : ayvorjfxa, a/xapria, dvofiia, d(re/3iia, TjTTrjfia, irapd/Sacri^, 
TrapaKorj, Trapavo/xi'a, TrapaTTTw/xa (v. Cremer, 100 ; Tr., Syn., § Ixvi ; DB, 
iv, 532 ; DCG, I.e. ; Westc, Eph., 165 f.). 

dfxapTia, -as, ^ (<C afiaprdvoi, q.v.), [in LXX chiefly for riNipn 

and cogn. forms, also for ]iy , yw^ , etc. ;] prop, a missing the mark; 

in cl. (v. reff. to CB in MM, VGT, s.v.) ; (a) guilt, sin (Plat., Arist., 
al.) ; (b) more freq., from ^Esch. down, a fault, failure. In NT (as 
LXX) always in ethical sense ; 1. as a principle and quality of 
action, = to d/xapTdveiv, a sinning, sin: Eo 5i2>'3, 20. {,^' dfiapnav cTvat, 
Eo 39 ; iinp.€V€iV TrJ d., Eo 6^ ; dTroOvrjCTKiiv, veKpov eivat t^ d., Eo 62» ^^ ; 
T^i' d. -yivwo-KCtv, Eo 77 ; (Tw/xa t^s d., Eo 6®; dirdrq t^s d.. He 3^3 j 
personified as a ruling principle, d. ftaa-iXemt, Kvpuvei, etc., Eo 521 



24 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

612, 14 717, 20 . 8ov\€veLv rfi 5.., Ro 6« ; ^ovXo<; tTj^ d., ib. ^^ ; v<5/aos t^9 d., Ro 
7'-^^ 82; Sv'mMis T^s a., i Co 15** (cf. Ge i'^). 2. As a generic term 
(disting. fr. the specific terms d/xapTyfia, q.v., etc.) for concrete wrong- 
doing, violation of the divine law, sin : Jo 8*'', Ja 1^*, al. ; Troietv 
(tV) (£., Jo 8^4, II Co 117, I Jo 38. ,-^,,^ ^.^ Jo 941 1522,24 1911^ I Jo 18; 

in pi, ajxapTLai, sin in the aggregate, i Th 2^" (v. Milligan, in 1.) ; ttokIv 

dfxapTia<;, Ja 5^* ; TrXrjdo? afxapTiwv, Ja 5'-", I Pe 4^ ; n<fieai<; ayxaprtwv, 

Mt 26'^^ Mk 1*, al.; iv d/xapTlai^ etvai, I Co 151^ collectively, 

atpetv Tr]v a. t. koct/xov, Jo 1'^^ ; aTroOvyjcrKeLV iv rrj d,, Jo 8^^. 3. = dfjidp- 

TTj/xa, a sinfid deed, a sin : Mt 12^\ A.c T*", i Jo 5^^. 

SYN. : V.S. dfjidpT-q^a. 

*dfidpTupos, -ov {<^fxdpTv<;), without witness : Ac 14^''. t 
djxapTwXos, -dv (■<[ afxapTavw), [in LXX chiefly for yizri ;] sinful, a 
sinner : of all men, i Ti 1^*; of those especially wicked, i Ti 1^, i Pe 
418 ; pi., Mt 91"' 11' 13 1119 26*5, al. (y. MM, VGT, s.v. ; Cremer, 102, 
634). 

*a/xaxos, -ov (<^ />ia;(r)) ; 1. invincible (freq. in cl.). 2. abstaining 
from fighting, non-comhatant (Xen.). Metaph. (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.), 
not contentious : i Ti 3^, Tit 32.+ 

*dfidw, -w (in cl. chiefly poet.), to reap: Ja 5*.+ 
d)jie'0uoTos, -ov, 17 (ace. to Plut., <[ d- fjieOvw, being regarded as an 
antidote against drunkenness), [in LXX : Ex 28i9 361^ (39i2) (n^bm), 

Ez 2813*;] amethyst, a purple quartz : Ee 21-**.t 

dfxeX^w, -w « fi^ei), [in LXX : Je 41^ (ma) 38 (31)^2 (byn), Wi 
31", II Mac 41**;] (a) absol., to he careless, not to care : Mt 22*; (b) c. 
gen., to be careless of, to neglect : i Ti 4l^ He 2^ 8^ (v. MM, VGT, 

8.V.).t 

a-ficfATTTos, -OV (<^ /u.€/A<^o/xat), [in LXX chiefly for DPi ;] blameless, 

free from fault (in tt. of a marriage-contract ; M, Th., I, 31^ ; cf. MM, 
VGT, s.v.) : Lk 1^, Phi 21^* 3*, i Th 31^ (WH, mg., -ws) He 87.t 

SYN. : dfjuo/xo^, dv€yK\r]TO<;, dviTv[\r][XTrTo<;, q.V. (Tr., Syn., § ciil). 

d-|jie|XTrTws, adv. (<^ d/me/xTrTos:), [in LXX : Es 31^ * ;] blamelessly 
(Lft., Notes, 28, 89 ; MM, VGT, s.v. -os) : i Th 21" 31^, WH, mg., 523.t 
** d)i€pi/xk'os, -ov {<^fi€ptp.va), [in LXX: Wi 61* 72^*;] free from 
anxiety or care : Mt 28l^ i Co 7^2 (for exx., v. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

**t d-|ieTcl0eTos, -ov {<^ ixeTariOrj/uLL), [in LXX: ill Mac 5i'i2*;] im- 
mutable: He &^; as subst., to d., ivimutability , ib.i^ (v. MM, VGT, 
8.v.).t 

*d-p,€Ta-KiVif]Tos, -ov « /x.€Ta/<tv€to), immovable, firm : i Co 15*8 1 

* d-|X€TafxeXT)Tos, -ov (<[ /Aera/xeAo/xat) , woi relented of, unregretted : 
Eo 1129, „ Co 7i".t 

*t dficrai'OTjTos, -ov (■<] /xcTavoew), 1. impenitent: Eo 2*. 2. = dfiera- 
fiiXrjTos (tt., Philo, al.; v. Deiss., BS, 257; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

* otfxeTpos, -ov « pirpov), without measure : adverbially, eis rd d., 
excessively, 11 Co IQi^'i^.t 

t dfiT]!/, indecl. (Heb. ]aK , verbal adj. fr. ^QN , to prop, ni., &e fi'i'm), 

[in LXX : i Ch 16^6, i Bs 9*6, Ne 51^ 8«, To 8^ 14l^ iii Mac 723, 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 25 

IV Mac 182* (elsewhere "N is rendered d\r;^ivos, Is 65^" ; a\r)6w<;, 
Je 35 (28)« ; yeVoiro, Nu 5^2, De 27^5 ff.^ „i Ki 1^\ Ps 40 (41)i3 71 (72)i» 
105 (106)*8, Je 115)* ] 1, As adj. (cf. Is, I.e.), 6 d., Ee S^\ 2. As adv., 
(a) in solemn assent to the statements or prayers of another (Nu, Ne, 
etc., 11. c.) : TO d., I Co 14^" ; (b) similarly, at the end of one's own 
prayer or ascription of praise : Eo 1^^ 15^^, Ga 1*, i Ti 1^'^ ; (c) in the 
Gospels, exclusively, introducing solemn statements of our Lord, trtily, 
verily : Mt 5^8.26^ Mk S^s (v. Swete, in 1.), Lk 4^*, al. ; d. d., always in 
Jo 1*2 33 519^ al. ; TO vai, Kai ... to d., 11 Co l^'' (on usage in tt., 
v. MM, VGT, S.V.). 

*djjii^Tup, -0/30S, 6, rj {<CfiriTr]p), without a mother (freq. in Gk. 
writers of the gods) : airdTwp a., of one without recorded genealogy, 
He 73 (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.). 

**d-,iiavTos, -ov «/xtaiVa)), [in LXX : Wi 313 42 820, „ Mac 1438 
153**;] undefiled, free from contamination (in tt., of alOrjp; MM, VGT, 
8.V.) : He 72« 13*, i Pe 1*, Ja l^\i 

Syn. : a.fx<jiixo<i, do-TTtAos (Cremer, 784). 

'AfitfaSdp, 6, indecl. (Heb. ni3''ay), Amminadah : Mt 1*, Lk 33' 

(WH om.).t 

a/ifios, -ov, 17, [in LXX chiefly for bin;] sand, sandy ground: 
Mt 72«, Eo 927, He 11^2, Ee 121^ 208.t 

djiK^s, -ov, b, [in LXX chiefly for 12^35 ;] a lamb : fig., of Christ 

{DCG, ii, 620b), Jo 129, se^ Ac 8^2 (Lxx), i Pe l^e (cf . dpvi'ov ; Cremer, 
102, 635).t 

** d|xoiPii, -^s, rj «; dyutt'/^o/Aai, to repay) ; [in Aq., Sm. : Pr 12^*, al. ;] 
requital, recompense : 1 Ti 5* (for illustration from tt., v. MM, VGT, 
8.v.).t 

dliTTcXos, -ov, y, [in LXX for ]p3 ;] vine : Mt 2629, Mk 142*, Lk 22^8, 

Ja 3^2; fig^ of Christ, Jo 15^'*'*; of his enemies (on the usage here, 
v. MM, VGT, s.v.) : Ee 14i8.i».t 

d/iircXoupYos, -ov, 6, yj, [in LXX for ma ;] a vine dresser : Lk IS'^.f 

d|xir€Xo5i', -wvos, 6 {<C a/xir€\o<;) , [in LXX for D13 ;] a vineyard: 

Mt 201 ff- 2128 ff-, Lk 136 209 ff-, i Co 9^. (^schin., 49, 13 ; Diod., al. ; 

V. MM, VGT, s.v. ; LS, s.v. aixir^XovpyEiov.) 

'AfiirXiaTOS (T, -taros ; EeC. 'AfJiTrXia'S ] V. MM, VGT, S.V.), -ov, o, 
Ampliatus : Eo l&^A 

djxuVo), [in LXX (mid.) : Jos lO^^ (op:), Ps 117 (118)i'»-i2 (bin hi.), 
Is 591" (rt:;^ hi.), Wi 11^, al. ;] to ward off, etc. Mid. (a) to defend 
oneself against; (b) to requite; (c) = act., to defend, assist (Is, I.e.): 
c. ace. pers., Ac 72* (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dfji<|>idi^(«» (<[ d/A0i, on both sides : v. M, Pr., 100), Hellenistic for 
&fx(f>ievvvfii (cf. MM, VGT, S.V.), [in LXX for irrnb , etc. ;] to clothe : 
Lk 1228 (T, .e'^«).t 

dfi<|>i-pdXXa) (v. supr.), [in LXX : Hb 1^^ * ;] = Trcpt/JdXXo), to throw 
around, as a garment : absol. (MM, VGT, s.v.), of casting a net : 
Mk 1^8 (liec. Pa.\kovra<i djx(j)Ll3\r]crTpov)A 



26 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Sni<^i^\r]arpov, -ov, to (<^ dfKfufSdXXu)), [in LXX chiefly tor D^n ;] 

something throum around, as a garment ; spec, a casting-net : Mt 4^*.+ 
Sy^. : Blktvov, a-ayrjvi]. a. is a casting-net, o". a drag-net, 8. is 
the more general term — a net of any kind (Tr., Syn., § Ixiv). 

d^<)>i6)^(u, V.S. d/x^ta^w. 

a\i^iivv»y.i {<^tvvvixi, to clothe), to clothe : Mt G^o ll^, Lk 7" 

(cf. dfji<f)Ld^(i))A 

'Ap.<|>iTroXis, -ew?, rj, AmphipoUs, in Macedonia, so called because 
the river Strymon flowed around it : Ac 17^t 

a|i<t>o8o»', -ov, t6 «d/x<Ai, 6So?), [in LXX for ni:»"lX (Je IV 

30^* (492''))*;] prop., a road around anything (EV, the open street) : 
Mk 114, Ac 19-8, WH, mg.t 

dfi<|)6T€pot, -at, -a (replaces n/xcfxi} in Koivrj, v. M, Pr., 57 ; used of 
more than two, ib. 80; MM, VGT, s.v.), both of two : Mt d^\ al. 
*d-ji(ij(XY)Tos, -OV {<^fi<j)/xdo/jiaL), blameless: ii Pe 3^*.t 

ol'iV. ; d/x€fi.irTO^ (q.V.), dv€yK\rjTo<;, dveTriXrjfjiirTO^. 
* afiuiiiov, -ov, TO, amonnim, a fragrant plant of India (EV, spice) : 
Ee 18i3.t 

a-fiw/jios, -ov (■< /xw/ios, q.V.), [in LXX chiefly for CDll] ; of sacri- 
ficial victims, without blemish: of Christ, He 9^*, i Pe 1^^; ethically, 
unblemished, faultless: Eph 1* 5-^, Phi 2^^, Col 1^2, Ju2*, Ee 14^ 
(Cremer, 425, 788 ; MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

Syn. : ajj.iavTO';, do-7rtA.os. 

'Afiwi', 6, indecl. (Heb. |iax), Amon, King of Judah : Mt l^" 
(Eec.).t 

'AftcSs, 6, indecl. (Heb. pON , Is 1^ ; DiDJr , Am 1^ ; jins , iv Ki 
2118 ff. ^y I a^g ijj jy g;i^ ]g B ^^ 'A/i/Aciv; Jos., 'A/x/iwv, "A/xwo-os), 
Amon : Mt l^o. 2. Amos : Lk S^^.t 

ac, conditional particle, which cannot usually be separately 
translated in English, its force depending on the constructions which 
contain it (see further, LS, s.v. ; WM, § xlii ; M, Pr., 165 ff. ; MM, 
VGT, s.v.). 1. In apodosis, (i) c. indie, impf. or aor., expressing what 
would be or would have been if (el c. impf., aor. or plpf.) some con- 
dition were or had been fulfilled : Lk 7^9 17«, Jo 5*\ Ga l^o, Mt 12' 
24*^, I Co 2^, Ac 18^*, I Jo 2^^, al. The protasis is sometimes undei'- 
stood (as also in cl.) : Mt 25^'', Lk 19^3. In hypothetical sentences, 
expressing unreality, dv (as often in late writers, more rarely in cl.) is 
omitted : Jo 8^9 15^^ 1911, Eo 7^ Ga 41^ ; (ii) c. opt., inf., ptcp. (cl. ; 
V. LS, s.v. ; M, Int., § 275 ; M, Pr., I674). 2. In combination with 
conditional, relative, temporal, and final words ; (i) as in cl., c. subj., 
(a) in protasis with el, in Attic contr. idv, q.v. ; (b) in conditional, 
relative, and temporal clauses (coalescing with ore, liru, etc. ; v.s. orav, 
eirdv, etc.), ever, soever; (a) c. pres., rfyUa dv, 11 Co 3^*; os dv, 
Eo 915 (LXX) 162, al.; 00-01 dv, Lk 9^; i? dv, Eo 152" (M, Pr., 167); 
(/3) c. aor., 8s dv, Mt 521. 22, 31 . 1^5 s.v, until, Mt 2i3, Mk e^o, al. ; is dv, 
as soon as (M, Pr., 167), i Co ll^", Phi 223. Qn the freq. use of idv 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 27 

for av with the foregoing words, v.s. idv; (ii) in late Gk., when some 
actual fact is spoken of, c. indie. : orav (q.v.) ; ottov av, Mk 6^* (M, Pr., 
168) ; KaOoTL av, Ac 2^5 435 . j,^ ^^^ j Co 122. 3, jn iterative construc- 
tion, c. impf. and aor. indie. (M, Pr., 167) : Ac 2*^ 435^ j Qq 122. 
4. c. optat., giving a potential sense to a question or wish : Ac 8^^ 
2629. 5. Elliptical constructions : cJ firj n av (M, Pr., 169), i Co 7* ; 
o)s av, c. inf., as it were (op. cit. 167), 11 Co 10^. 

Slv, contr. from eav, q.v. 

d»'(i, prep, (the rarest in NT; M, Pr., 98; MM, VGT, s.v.), 
prop., upwards, up, always c. ace. 1. In phrases : d. /xecrov, among, 
between, c. gen., Mt 132^, Mk 7", i Co 6^ (M, Pr., 99), Ee 7^^ [so in 
LXX for Ijins] ; d. /Ae'pos, in t^irn, i Co 14^' (both found in Polyb. ; 

cf. MGr. dvd/x€cra). 2. Distrib., apiece, by : Mt 209- 10, Lk 9^ (WH om.), 
ib. 1* 10\ Jo 26, Ee 48. 3. Adverbially (" a vulgarism," Bl., § 51, 5 ; 
cf. Deiss., BS, 139 f.), d. eis cKaa-ro^, Ee 2121. Ag prefix, d. signifies 
(a) up : ava^aiveiv ] (b) to : avayyiXXuv ; (c) anew : avayewav ] (d) back : 
avaKa/xTTTeiv. t 

dKa-paOfids, -ov, 6 « dva^ouvo)), [in LXX for H^^D : III Ki lO^^' 20, 

IV Ki 913 209 ff, II Ch 918.19, Is 388, Ez 406.«; wSr, tJ>v d., iiY. Pss 119 
(120)-133 (134) * ;] 1. a goiyig up, an ascent (Pss, 11. c. ?). 2. a step 
(LXX); -pi., a flight of stairs : Ac213^'**. (On the formation -Ofj-os, 
v. MM, VGT, s.v.)t 

dra-PaiVu, [in LXX chiefly for nbv ]] to go up, ascend, (a) of 
persons : irrl crvKO/jLwpeav, Lk 19^ ; cts T. TrXotov, Mk 6^1 ; €ts 'lepocroXvfia, 
Mt 201^ CIS T. [fpdv, c. inf. (M, Pr., 205), Lk I810; with mention of 
place of departure, Mt 3"^^ {a-n-o), Ac 8^9 (^^^ • (5^ of things, to rise, 
spring up, come uj) : a fish, Mt 17'"^ ; smoke, Ee 8* ; plants growing, 
Mt 13"; metaph., of things coming up in one's mind (as Heb. 
n^ % rhv; IV Ki 12*, al.), Lk 2438, i Co 2^; of prayers, Ac 10*; 

messages, Ac 21^1 (for late exx., v. MM, VGT, s.v.). 

dm-pdXXo), [in LXX: Ps 77 (78)2i 88(89)38 (-,3^)^ i Ki 28^*, 
Ps 103 (104)2 (niar) ;] to defer, put off (MM, VGT, s.v.) : mid., 
Ac 2422.t 

di'a-PiPdj^w (causal of dva/3atvw), [in LXX chiefly for rhv hi., also 
for 2D1 hi., etc. ;] to make go up, draw up, as a ship (Xen.) : (rayrjviqv, 
Mt 13*8 (metaph., MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dm-pX^TTu, [in LXX chiefly for KCSr:;] 1. to look up: Mk 82*, 
al. ; seq. ek, Mt 14^^^ ^1. (Xen., Plat.). 2. to recover sight (Plat., 
Aristoph. ; cf. MM, VGT, s.v.) : Mt 11^, Jo 9'\ al. 

dvd-pXciJ/is, -cws, ri « Avafikeirw), [in LXX : Is 61^ (nip-nj^Q)* ;] 

recovery of sight : Lk 4^8 (Lxx)_t 

dm-'podw, -w, [in LXX for prx , pjH , Nip, etc.;] to cry out: 
Mt 27*f' (WH, i/36r]a€v; v. MM, VGT, 8.v.).+ 

dfapoXii], -^?, 17 (<Cd aiaXXw), [in LXX for P]33 , etc.;] delay: 
Ac 25^'' (for exx. of other meanings, v. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

*di'dYaioi' (Eec. dvwyeov; on the form, v, Bntherford, NPhr., 



28 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

357 f . ; MM, VGT, s.v.), -ov, to « dva, yrj), an upper room : Mk Id^*, 
Lk 22i2.t 

SYN. : VTTtpWOV. 

&v-ayy{K\ii}, [in LXX chiefly for 133 hi. ;] 1. to bring back word, 
report (^sch., Thuc, al.) : Jo 5^5 (WH, cTttcv), Ac 1427 154^ „ Co V. 
2. Later, = dn-ayyeAXw (MM, VGT, s.v.), to announce, declare (LXX; 
Cremer, 24) : Mt 28ii (WH, dTr-), Jo 425 16i3-i5, Ac IQ^^ 2020. 27, Eo I521, 

I Pe 112, I Jo l*.t 

**i &.va-yivv6.w, -w, [in LXX: Si prol.i^ K* (ABN« Trapa-)*;] to beget 
again : metaph., of spiritual birth, i Pe 1^' 2^ (cf. Cremer, 147 ; MM, 
VGT, s.v.).t 

di'tt-yu'waKw (Attic dvayiyv-), [in LXX chiefly for X"Tp ;] 1. to know 
certainly, know again, recognize. 2. Of written characters, to read: 
Mt 2415, Mk 13l^ Ac 1531 2334, Eph 3^ ; c. ace. rei, Mt 223i, Mk 12io, 
Lk 63, Jo 1920, Ac 83«. 32, II Co l^^, Ee l^ ; c. ace. pers., 'Ho-aiW t. 
Trpo4>-qr7]v, Ac 828.30; seq. iv, Mt 12^ 21*2, Mk 122^ (sc. Iv t. vo/xw), 
Lk 1026 ; seq. 5ti, Mt 19* 21i« ; rt eVot7,o-€, Mt 123, Mk 22^ ; pass. 

II Co 32 ; of reading aloud (MM, VGT, s.v.), Lk 4^«, Ac 132^ 1521, 
II Co 3l^ Col 4i«, I Th 527 (M, Th., in l.).t 

dmyKdiu, «dvd7K7?), [in LXX : Pr 67 (itatzr), i Es 32*, i Mac 225, 
al. ;] to necessitate, compel by force or persuasion, constrain : c. ace, 
II Co 1211 . id. c. inf., Mt 1422, Mk 6**, Lk 1423, Ac 26ii (on the impf. 
here, v. Field, Notes, 141; M, Pr., 128 f., 247), Ga 2i* 6^2; pass., c. 
inf., Ac 2819, Ga 23 (for exx., v. MM, VGT, s.v.j.t 

** dmvKalos, -ala, -alov « dvdyKT)), [in LXX : Es 813, ^i 153^ Si 
prol.22, II Mac 423 921^ i^ Mac 1^*;] 1. necessary: Ac 13*6, i Co I222, 
II Co 95, Phi 225, Tit 314, He 83 ; comp. -atdrepov, Phi 12*. 2. Of 
persons connected by bonds of nature or friendship, near, intimate 
(Field, Notes, 118 ; MM, VGT, s.v.) : d. <t>iXoL, Ac 102''.t 

* dt-ayKaoTais, adv., necessarily or by constraint: opp. to e/covo-iws, 
1 Pe 52 (rare).t 

di'dyKT], -r]<;, r], [in LXX chiefly for piSCJ , "IS ;] 1. necessity : ex^tv 

d., 0. inf., to be compelled, Lk 141^ 23i7 (Eec, R, mg.), i Co 737, j^z^ 
He 727; ^^ ^^ ^„^' ^.^ of necessity, 11 Co 97, He 712, Phmi*; d. 
fioL eViKciT-at, 71. is laid on me, 1 Co 91* ; c. inf. (^avayKOLov Io-tl), Mt 18^, 
Eo 135, He 91"' 23. 2. force, violence, hence pain, distress (Diod., al. ; 
LXX ; V. M, TJi., 41 ; MM, VGT, s.v. ; cf. ^A/i/^is) : Lk 2123, j Co 72^, 
I Th 3" ; pi. (V. Bl., § 32, 6 ; Swete, Mk., 153), cV d., 11 Co 6* 12io.t 

dm-yfwpil^w, [in LXX : Ge 45i (JTT hith.)* ;] to recognize : Ac 7i3 
(WH, txt., eyvw/Dt 0-^17). t 

d»'d-y^wais, -co)s, ^, [in LXX: Ne 8^ (xnpp), i Es 9*^, Si 

prol. ^» 13 * ;] 1. recognition (Hdt.). 2. reading (Plat., al.) : of the public 
reading of Scripture (Milligan, NTD, 173„, 210 f.) : Ac 131^, 11 Co 31*, 
I Ti 413 (Cremer, 158 ; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

di'-dyw, [in LXX chiefly for nbjT hi.;] to lead or bring up: seq. cis, o. 
ace. loc, Mt 41, Lk 222 45 (WH om. d<i, k.t.X.), Ac 939 163*; of raising 
the dead (cl.), tK veKplhv, Eo 10'^, He I32''; to produce and set before, 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 29 

T. Aa(5, Ac 12* (MM, VGT, s.v.); in sacrificial sense (MM, I.e.), to 
offer, Ova-lav, Ac 7*^ Mid., in nautical sense (Horn., Hdt., Thuc, al.), 
to put to sea: Lk 8^2, Ac 13i3 IG^i im 203. i3 211.2 272.4.12,21 2810.11 
(cf. £7r-avayw).t 

dm-SeiK^u^i, [in LXX : Hb 32 (rT), Da LXX i" (n:a), 120 (xsa), 

I Es g, II, III Mac 9* ;] 1. to lift up and show, show forth, declare (cf. 

II Mac 2^, V. MM, VGT, s.v.) : Ac I2*. 2. to consecrate, set apart, 
(Strab., Plut., Anth.) : Lk lO^t 

**t di't£-86i|is, -€w?, ^ « draSet/cvv/xt), [in LXX : Si iS** * ;] a shewing 
forth, announcement : Lk l^*'.t 

** dKa-Se'xofiai, [in LXX : ii Mac 6^^ S^^ * ;] 1. to assume, undertake 
(in TT. freq. as legal term : MM, VGT, s.v.) : iirayyeXia^, He 11^^. 
2. = cl. vTToSixofjiaL, to receive : of guests, Ac 28''. t 

**di'a-8i8(ufiii, [in LXX : Si I22, 11 Mac IS^^ * ;] 1. to give forth, send 
up, as of plants (Hdt., al.). 2. to give up, yield, hand over (MM, 
VGT, s.v.) : Ac 2333. t 

**t &ya-ld(a, -w, [in Al. : Ge 45^^ *'^ to live again, regain life (cf. cl. 
ava^Low; Cremer, 722; and tor other exx., v. MM, VGT, s.v.): 
metaph. of moral revival, Lk IS^* (WH, mg., e^rjatv) ; of sin, Eo 7^.t 
dm-£T)Te'u, -S, [in LXX : Jb 3* (tzr-n), 10« (tsrpa pi.), 11 Mac I321 * ;] 
to look fur or seek careftilly (" specially of searching for human beings, 
with an imphcation of difficulty": MM, VGT, s.v.): Lk 2**.*^, 

Ac 1125.t 

t diva-t,I>vyviii, [in LXX : Jg IS^^, Pr 2935 (3117) (^^U)* ;] to gird up : 

fig., T. oo-^uas T. Stavotas, I Pe 1^3 f 

** di'a-^uTTupY^w, -w (< ^coos, nip), [in LXX : I Mac 13^ * ;] to kindle 
afresh: metaph., 11 Ti 1^ (for vernac. exx., v. MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

dm-0dXXu> « edXX<o, to flourish), [in LXX : Ps 27 (28)" {nbv), 
Ez 172* (n-IQ hi.). Ho 89, Wi 4^ Si 5*;] to revive: Phi d^" (cf. MM, 
VGT, s.v.j.t 

t dvd9£p.a, -Tos, TO (■< avaTi6r]fii), Hellenistic for Attic dvd6r]fx.a (Bl., 
§ 27, 2) ; 1. prop. = t6 dvaTi^e/xtVov, tJiat whicJi is laid by to be kept, 
a votive offering (as dvdOrjfxa in 11 Mac 2^3^ l^ 21^ — where LT read 
-defia, V. M, Pr., 46). 2. [As equiv. in LXX for Wyri ,] devoted, a thing 

devoted to God (v. Driver, De., 98 f., and cf. Le 272^.29), hence; (a) of 
the sentence pronounced (De 13^5), a curse : Ac 23^* ; (b) of the object 
on which the curse is laid, accursed (De 72'') : Eo 93, i Co 123 I622, 
Ga 18' 9 (v. ICG on Bo. ; Lft., Ga., 11. c. ; Cremer, 547 ; Tr., Syn., § v ; 
MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

t dm-eejittTiiw « avdOefxa), [in LXX chiefly for WTi hi. (Nu 212, 
I Ki 153, al.), I Mac 5^ ;] to devote to destruction, declare or invoke ana- 
thema: absol, Mk 14''^; kavTov, to bind oneself under a curse: Ac 
2312, 14, 2i_ (Qf naTavadeixaTild), and on the occurrence of the word in tt., 
V. Deiss., LAE, 92 f . ; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

*t dca-Oewpe'w, -w, to observe carefully, consider well : Ac 1723, He 13' 
(Diod., al.).t 

♦♦di/derjfia, -TOS, TO (cf. AvdOefia, and V. MM, VGT, S.V.), [in LXX 



30 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

often as v.l. for avddefia (D^n), and in Nu 21', Jg 1^'' for mpHn , but prop, 
in III Mac 3^^^, al. ;] a gift set tip in a tenaple, a votive offering : Lk 21^ 

(LT, -e€fia).f 

** dmiSia (Eec. -eta, as in cl.), -as, ^ « aiSws), [in LXX : Si 25^^ * .] 
slmmelessness, importunity : Lk 11^ (for exx. from tt., v. MM, VGT, 
8.v.).t 

dk-aipeais, -€ws, rj « dmipeco), [in LXX: Nu ll^^ (jin), Jg 15^7 
(riDl), Jth 15*, II Mac 5^^*;] 1. a takmg up or away (Thuc). 2. a 
destroying, slaying, murder (Field, Notes, 116 ; MM, VGT, s.v.) : Ac 8^t 

av-aif>i(a, -w, [in LXX for 2in hi., HP hi., nD2 hi., etc. ;] 1. to take 

up : mid., Ac 7-^ 2. to take away, make an end of, destroy (for late 
exx. of various senses, v. MM, VGT, s.v.) ; (a) of things (as freq. in cl. 
of laws, etc.) : He 10^ ; (b) of persons, to kill : Mt 2i«, Lk 22^ 23^2, 

Ac 2-3 533,36 728 923, 24, -29 IQ39 l^'i 13'^8 1627 2220 2315,21,27 25' 26^^ 

II Th 28, WH, txt., E, txt.t 

dk'-amos, -ov (<atTi'a), [in LXX : De IQi"' 13 216, 9 (,-,3)^ Da LXX 

TH Su®2^ always of aiyua (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.)*;] guiltless, innocent: 
Mt 125. 7,t 

* 6.va-KaQ-ilu) (v.s. Ka6t^io) ; 1. trans., to set up. 2. Intrans., to sit 
up : Lk 7^5 (WH, mg., iKaOicrev), Ac 9'^^ (freq. in medical writings : MM, 
VGT, s.v.).t 

dm-Kai^'iV «/caivos), [in LXX: II Ch 158, pg 102 (103)^ 103 
(104)30, La 5^1 {mm pi., hith)., Ps 38 (39)^ (-|Dy ni.), i Mac 6^*;] to 
renetv : He 6^ (Isocr., Plut.).t 

*t di'a-Kaii'oa), -ui = avaKaivi^w (cf. MM, VGT, S.V.), to make new : 
II Co 416, Col 310 (v. Cremer, 323).+ 

*+ dcaKaivwo-is, -ews, r] {<C avaKaivow), renewal : Eo 12^, Tit 3* (Cremer, 
324 ; MM, VGT, s.v.).+ 

Syn. : iraXivyevcaia, in NT, new birth, of which d. is the conse- 
quent renewal or renovation, in which man as well as God takes part 
(v. Tr., Syn., § xviii). 

dm-KaXuirra), [in LXX chiefly for nbn ni,, pi. ;] to unveil : metaph. 
of removing hindrance to perception of spiritual things, 11 Co 3^*' ^^.f 
dm-KdH-Trro), [in LXX: I Ch 19^, Je 3^, al. (mtT), Je 15^ (-no);] 
1. trans., to bend or turn back. 2. Intrans., to return : Mt 2^^, Ac IB'^^^, 
He 1116 ; metaph. (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.), Lk 10^.+ 

** d.v6.-Kei\>.ai, [in LXX: i Es 4^0, To 9« N*;] 1. in cL, as pass, of 
avaTiOrjfii, to be laid tip, laid : Mk 5*o Eec. 2. In late writers (cf. MM, 
VGT, s.v.) = KilaOaL, KaraKelaOai, to recline at table : Mt 26-o ; part, 
iyaK€i/x(yos, Mt 9i« 2210' ^ 26", Mk 62« 1418 16fi«, Lk 22^^ Jo e" 12^ 

x323' 28.+ 

Syn. : avaKXipw, avaTriTTTw, the latter denoting an act rather than 
a state and thus in Jo 13^* differing from dvaKeifiai (v.^*) by indicating 
a change Of position. 

** d»'a-K€<t>a\ai<5a), G> (v.S. Kecj>aXaL6w), [in Th., Al. : Ps 71 (72)20*;] to 
sum up, gather up, present as a whole : mid., Eo 13^, Eph l^o (on wh, 
v. Lft., Notes, 321 f. ; AE, in 1. ; Cremer, 354, 748),+ 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 31 

** dca-K\iVw, [in LXX : iii Mac 5^^ * ;] to lay u-pon, lean against, 
hence, (a) to lay doxvn : Lk T ; {h) to make to recline : Mk 6^^, WH, 
mg., Lk 1237. Pass., to lie hack, recline : Mt S^i U^\ Lk IS^^.t 

SYN. : dva.K€LjxaL (q.V.), aVaTTLTTTU). 

di/o-Kpdi^w, [in LXX for Sip , etc. ;] to cry out, shout : Mk l^s 6^9, 
Lk 433 828 23i8.t 

d^'a-Kp^Va), [in LXX: I Ki 20^2 (npn), Da LXX Su ^3, ib. LXX, 
TH *8» ^^ * ;] to examine, investigate, question (Lft., Notes, 181 f.) : Ac 
n^\ I Co 2^4. 15 43, 4 93 1025. 27 1424 . in forensic sense (MM, VGT, s.v. ; 
esp. of examination by torture; v. Field, Notes, 120 f.), Lk 23^*, Ac 4^ 
12^9 248 28i8.t 

SyN. : V.S. iicrdCoi. 
** dfd-Kpi<Tis, -eo)?, 17, [in LXX : iii Mac 7* * ;] an examination : spec, 
of legal preliminary investigation, Ac 252^ (v. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

* di/a-KoXioj, (a) to roll up ; (b) to roll back : Mk 16* (Eec, dn-o*c-).t 
dm-Ku'iTTw [in LXX : Jb lO^^ (crxn s^2), Da LXX, Su 35* ;] to lift 

oneself up ; (a) bodily ; Lk 13^^ Jo 8^7, 10] . ^j^ mentally, to be elated : 
Lk 2128 (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dKa-XafAJBdew, [in LXX chiefly for KOJZ , also for T\pb , etc. ;] 1. to 
take up, raise : Mk 16"9i, Ac I2. 11. 22 iqi^, i Ti 3i«. 2. to take up, take to 
oneself: Ac 7" 2013.1* 233i, Eph 6i3. le, 11 Ti 411 (for late exx., v. MM, 
FGT, s.v.).t 

* di'd-\T]|ji,\|/is, -€w?, 17, {kolvti form of avd\r]il/Ls ; V. Th., Gr,, 108 f.), a 
taking up : Lk 9^1 (MM, VGT, s.v.).+ 

di'd-X'»]»|/is, -((OS, r), Rec. for avaXrjfMif/is, qv. 

dk'-aXiCTKw (on the etymology, v. MM, VGT, s.v.), [in LXX chiefly 
for b^a , also for rh3 , etc. ;] 1. to expend. 2. to consume, destroy : Lk 
95*, Ga 515, II Th 28, Rec. WH, mg.t 

**dcaXoYia, -as, rj (<[ Aoyos), [in Al. : Le 2718*;] proportion (MM, 
VGT, s.v.) : Ro 12« (cf. Cremer, 397).t 

** dm-XoYiiofiai, [in LXX : Wi 17i3 N, n Mac 12" A, iii Mac 7^ * ;] 
to consider : He 123 (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

** dmXos, -ov « aXs), [in Aq. : Ez 13i«» H' i^ 2228 * ;] saltless, insipid : 
Mk 95o.t 

■^d^d-Xuais, -cws, r) (<; dvaXvw), a loosing, e.g. of a vessel from its 
moorings, hence, departure : from life, 11 Ti 4^.t 

**dm-X.5w, [in LXX: i Es 33, To 29, Jth I31, Si 3i5, Wig, 
II, III Mac 10 * ;] 1. to unloose. 2. to unloose for departure, depart (MM, 
VGT, s.v.) : from life. Phi 123. 3^ ^q return, Lk 1236.t 

di'afxdpTTiTos, -ov « afxaprdv), [in LXX : Dt 29i«<i8) (SDS), II Mac 
8* 12*2*;] I, without missing, unerring (Xen.). 2. In moral sense, 
faultless (Plat.), without sin : Jo 8^7] (v. Cremer, 102, 634 ; MM, VGT, 
s.v.).t 

&va-\Liv(a, [in LXX for mp pi. ;] to await " one v^ho33 coming is 
expected, perhaps with the added idea of patience and confidence " : 
c. ace, I Th 110 (v. M, Th., in 1. ; MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 



32 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

diva-fimvriaKb), [in LXX for IDT hi. ;] to remind, call to one's 
remembrance : c. ace. rei, i Co 4^'^; c. inf., ii Ti 1*. Pass., to remem- 
ber, call to mind : Mk ll^^ 14^2, n Co 7l^ He 1032.t 

di'(ifii'T|ais, -ecus, r] {<C avanifj-vrja-Ku)), [in LXX : Ps 37 (38), 69 (70) 

tit. (nST hi.), Le 24^ (ni^TX), Nu W^ (fil?!), Wi 16" *;] remembrance : 
fi's T. ifx^v d., Lk 2219 (WH om.), i Co 1124,25. ^^ d^apnwv, He 10^ 
(v. Abbott, Essays, 122 ff. ; DCG, ii, 74*).t 
SvN. : vTr6fjLvr](Tis (v. Tr., Syn., § cvii). 

&ya-y€6i^, -w « I'c'os), [in LXX: Jb 332*, Es 313, I, IV Mac 8*;] 
to renew: pass., Eph 42^ (v. Cremer, 428; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

* &va-vr]^u, to return to soberness: metaph., 11 Ti 2^^ (cf. e/<v77<^(o).+ 
'Ami-ias (WH, 'Avav-), -a, 6 (Heb. 11^330), Ananias; 1. of Jerusa- 
lem : Ac 51- 3. 5. 2. Of Damascus : Ac Q^*' 12, 13, 17 2212. 3. High Priest : 
Ac 232 24i.t 

**t dc-arrt'-pTiTos (T, -pprjro^), -ov {<^p7)r6<;, spoken), [in Sm. : Jb IP 
3313 * ;] not to be contradicted, undeniable : Ac 19^6 (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 
* df-at'Ti-priTws (T, -pprp-ta'i), adv., without contradiction: Ac 1029.t 
dk'-dCtos, -ov (d- neg., d^io?), [in LXX: Je 15^9x2 (b^T), Es Bi^, 
Si 258*;] unworthy: c. gen., i Co 62 (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

** dca^iu? (v. supr.), adv., [in LXX : 11 Mac 14*2 * ;] in an unworthy 
manner : i Co 112''.t 

dcd-Trauo-is, -cws, rj {avairavu)) , [in LXX chiefly for rn3 and its 

derivatives, n2tS and its cognates (Ex, Le) ;] cessation, rest, refresh- 
ment: Mt 1129 1243^ Lk 1124, Ee 48 14ii.t 

Syn. : dv€o-i5 (lit. the relaxation of the strings of a lyre), prop. 
signifies the rest or ease which comes from the relaxation of unfavour- 
able conditions, as, e.g. affliction : avdir., the rest which comes from 
the temporary cessation of labour (v. Tr., Syn., § xl ; Cremer, 827 ; 
MM, VGT, S.V.). 

di'tt-irauw, [in LXX for fourteen different words, chiefly rn3 , also 

Yy\ , ]512^ , etc. ;] to give intermission from labour, to give rest, refresh : 

Mt 1128, I Co 1618, Phm2o ; pass., Phm \ 11 Co V^. Mid., to take rest, 
enjoy rest : Mt 2Q^\ Mk 6^1 14*i, Lk 12i9, Ee 611 14^3 ; as in Heb. of 
Is 112 ^ijy ^[^2), TO 7rv€v/xa €^' v/iSs d., I Pe 41*. (In IT. this word is 

used as a technical agricultural term ; v. MM, VGT, s.v. ; and cf. 
Le263*'-; Cremer, 826. )t 

dm-irciOo), [in LXX: Je 36 (29)^ (NIZy3 hi.), i Mac 1"*;] to per- 
suade, incite: Ac IS^^ (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

* dk'direipos, V.S. avdTrr]po<;. 

* dca-TT^Ixiru, 1. to send up, (a) to a higher place (^sch., Plat., al.) ; 
(b) to a higher authority (Deiss., BS, 229; MM, VGT, s.v.; cf. also 
Field, Notes, 140) : Lk 23^. i^ Ac 252i. 2. to send back (Pind.) : 
Lk 2311, Phm ii.t 

dm--irri8dw, -w « TTTySdo), to leap), [in LXX: i Ki 20^4 (Dip) 25i«, 
Es 51, To 4*;] to leap up : Mk 10^« (Eec. dvao-Tds).t 



MANUAL QBEBK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 33 

** di/d-TTTjpos (WH, -ctpos; V. Field, Notes, 67), -ov (irr;pos, maimed), 
[in LXX : To 14^ x , ii Mac S^* * ;] maimed, crippled : Lk 14i3. 2i.t 

d.'a-iriTrru, [in LXX : Ge 49^ (iHS) To 2^ 78, Jth 12^\ Si 25i8 
35 (32)2, Da th Su ^7 * ;] l. (d.) to fall back. 2. In late writers = ava- 
KXivofjiaL, to recline for a repast (MM, VGT, s.v.) : at table, Lk 11^^ 
1410 177 221*, Jo 1312 2120 . on the ground, Mt IS^^, Mk 6*« 8«, Jo 6i« ; 
to lean back, Jo 13^^ (T, eTrnrea-wv; V.S. dva/cct//ai, ad fin.).t 

SYN. : avaKei/xai (q.V.), avaKXivofiai. 

dca-iTXT)pow, -u), [in LXX chiefly for K^D , Le 12^, al. ; also obizr 
(Ge 15i«, III Ki 7*1, Is 6O20), etc. ;] 1. to fill up, make full (in tt. of com- 
pleting contracts and making up rent ; cf. MM, VGT, s.v.) : tottov, 
take one's place (cf. Heb. DipQ N^P), i Co 14}^; dfiapria^, complete the 

number, i Th 2^^ ; t. vo/hov, observe perfectly, Ga 6^ ; pass., Trpn(f>r]Tua, 
fulfilled, Mt 131*. 2. to SWppZ^; to va-reprjfia, I Co 1617, Phi 2^0 
(Cremer, 838). t 

*t dvairoXoyiiTos, -ov (<^ aTroXoyeo/xai) , without excuse, inexcusable (in 
Polyb., al., as a forensic term ; v. Lft., Notes, 252) : Eo l^o 2i.+ 

dm-TTToaaw, [in LXX for t&IB , etc. ;] to unroll : t. ^t(3\ioy, Lk 41^ 
(WH, E, ivoifas).t 

d^-dTTTw, [in LXX chiefly for nS"";] to kindle: Lk 12*^, Ja 3* 
(MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

d»'-api0p.ir)Tos, -ov, {<^api6/ji€(x)), [Jb 312s,al.], wmwieraJZe .• He lli^.t 

**dva-(T€i«, [in Aq. : I Ki 26io, Jb 23; Aq., Sm. : Is 36i8*;] 1. to 

s/jaA;e ow^, s/wiA;e 6acA;, move to and fro (Thuc, al.). 2. In late writers 

(Diod., al. ; v. MM, VGT, s.v.), to stir up; metaph., to excite : t. o^Xov, 

Mk 1511 ; T. AaoV, Lk 23^t 

* dm-aKcodiu (<^o-kc{)os, a vessel), prop, to ^jac^ w^ baggage, 
hence, to dismantle, ravage, destroy; metaph., to unsettle, subvert 
(MM, FGT, s.v.) : V'vxas, Ac 152*.t 

dm-CTirdw, -w, [in LXX for npb , nbjT hi. ;] to rfraw ?tp ; Lk 14^ 
Ac 1110 (in TT. of pulling up barley ; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

6.vd-<rra<ji<i, -ews, 17 {<!^ dvLo-Trjfu) , [in LXX: Ze 3^ (Dip), La 3*^^ 
(nn^(7), Ps 65 (66) tit., Da LXX II20, n Mac 71* 12*^*;] 1. a raisitig 

up, awakening, rising (in Inscr. of the erection of a monument, v. 
MM, VGT, s.v.) : Lk 2=**. 2. a rising from the dead (v. DCG, ii, 
605b) ; (a) of Christ : Ac I22 2^1 433, j^ 55^ p^i 310^ i Pe 321 . ^^ ^^ 
v^Kpwv, Eo 1* [ICC, in 1.) ; U vcKpw, i Pe 13 ; {b) of persons in OT hist. 
(e.g. Ill Ki 17i''^) : He 1135 • (g) of the general resurrection : Mt 2223. 28, 30^ 
Mk 1218. 23, Lk 2027. 33, 36^ Jo 1124^ Ac I718 238 2415, II Ti 218 ; d. U 
v€Kpwv, Lk 2035, Ac 42 ; tSv v«pwv, Mt 223i, Ac 1732 23«, 2421 2623, 
I Co 1512. 13. 21, 42^ He 62 ; d. ^w^s, resurrection to life (cf. 11 Mac 71*, 
d. €15 ^utTQv) and d. T. KpLcreoi^, r. to judgment, Jo 52^ ; d. t. Stfcaiwi/, 
Lk 141* ; KpcLTTOiv d., He 113* ; on 17 d. 17 irpwrr], Ee 205. ^, v. Swete, in 
1., Westc. on Jo 5, but v. also Thayer, s.v. ; by meton, of Christ as 
Author of d., Jo 1125 (y, DB, iv, 231 ; Cremer, 307).t 

t dva-OTaT<5(i), w (<^ avdo-Taros, driven from home; ■<C.avLaTrjfiL), [in 

3 



34 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

LXX: Da V^ {mn;* also in Aq., and in n. (v. Deiss., LAE, 80 f.; 
MM, VGT, 8.V.),] to stir up, excite, unsettle : c. ace. ; (a) to tumult and 
sedition: Ac 17*' 2P8. (j) by false teaching: Ga 5^2 (v. Milligan, 
NTD, 73 f.).t 

* dm-oraupoo) ; 1. to impale (Hdt.). 2. to raise on a cross, crucify 
(Polyb., al.). 3. to crucify again: He 6® (v. Waste, in l.).t 

dm-aT€vdta,, [in LXX: La 1* (mx ni.), Si 25^8 d?)^ Da th Su22, 
II Mac 630 * .] tQ sigh deeply : Mk S^^.t 

d»'a-(rrpe(|)u, [in LXX chiefly for mis^;] 1. to overturn: Jo 2^^. 
2. to turn back, return : Ac 5^^ 15^^. 3. to turn hither and thither; 
pass., to t^irn oneself about, sojo^irn, divell : Mt 17^" Eec. ; metaph. 
(like Heb. "^ybn , in Koivr] writers and in tt. ; v. Deiss., LAE, 315 ; BS, 
88, 194 ; MM, VGT, s.v.), to conduct oneself, behave, live : ii Co 1^^ 
Eph 2\ I Ti 3l^ He lO^^ 1318, i Pe l^", 11 Pe 2^\f 

SVN. : TrepiTTaTtw (Hellenistic), TroAtTcJw. 
** di'a-cnrpo(t>ri, -77s, r/ {<^ava(TTpi(f>ofjLai), [in LXX: To 4^*, II Mac 5^ 
6-^* ;] 1. a turning doivn or back, a wheeling about (Soph., Thuc, al.). 
2. In late writers (Polyb., al. ; v.s. dvaa-Tpeffxa, and cf. Hort on Ja 3^^ ; 
MM, VGT, 8.V.), manner of life, belmviour, conduct : Ga 1^^, Eph 4^^^ 
I Ti 412, He 137, Ja 3^3, i Pe li^.is 212 31.2,16^ „ Pe 2^ 3ii.t 

*t dca-rdaaofiai, [in LXX only as v.l. (Aid.) in Ec 2'-'*' ;] to arrange in 
order, bring together from memory (Blass., Phil. Gosp., 14 ff. ; MM, 
VGT, s.v.) : Lk l^.t 

di'a-Te'XXu, [in LXX for riDS , UIB , UH , etc. ;] 1. trans., to cause 
to rise : Mt 5^^. 2. Intrans., to rise : ^ws, Mt 4i« ( = Is 9^) ; 6 ^Xios, 
Mt 13«, Mk 4« 162, Ja 111 ; v£<^£'X7;, Lk 12^*; ^w(r<f>6po^, 11 Pe T^; 
6 Kvptos, prob. with ref. to metaph. of sun or star. He 7^* (cf. 
e^-avaT£AXw).+ 

ava-TiQi]iLi, [in LXX chiefly for D^n (Cremer, 546) ;] to lay upon, 
set up, etc. Mid. -e/xat, in late writers (Plut., al. ; v. also MM, VGT, 
S.V.), to set forth, declare : Ac 25^*, Ga 22, t 

di/aroXii, -ijs, 17 « dvaTeAAo)), [in LXX chiefly for mip , D"""!!? ;] 1. 

a rising : of light, Lk 1'^. 2. the sun-rising, the east (MM, VGT, 
s.v.) : Mt 22. 9, Ee 21^3 ; d. ^XtW, Re 72 I612 (WH, pi.) ; pi., Mt 2^ S^^ 
2427, Lk 1329.t 

di/a-xpcTTw, [in LXX for nm , p)Tn , etc. ;] to overturn, destroy : 
Jo 215 WH, txt.; metaph., to subvert (MM, VGT, s.v.): 11 Ti 2^8, 
Tit lii.t 

** dm-Tp€'<t>u, [in LXX : Wi 7^ B, iv Mac IO2 ll^s x * ;] to nurse up, 
nourish, educate, bring up: Lk 4^^, WH, mg., Ac 720' 21, 223.t 

di'a-<|>ai»'o)jiai, [in LXX for pT£ hi., "Ojh^ ;] to bring to light, make to 
appear : dva<^dvavT€s t. Kvirpov, i.e. having sighted C. : Ac 21^ WH ; 
pass., to appear, be made manifest : Lk 19^^. 

dm-<|>6'pw, [in LXX chiefly for Tlhv hi., also for 113p hi., etc. ;] 1. 
to carry or lead up : c. ace. pers., Mt 17\ Mk 92 ; pass., Lk 24^^ (WH, 
reject, R, mg. omits) ; d. t. d/xapTias iirl t. ivXov (v. Deiss., BS, 88 f. ; 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 35 

ICG, in 1. ; MM, VGT, s.v.) : i Pe 22*. 2. In LXX and NT, to bring 
to the altar, to offer (v. Hort on i Pe, I.e.) : ^uo-ia?, etc., He 7^7 IS^^, 
I Pe 2^ ; eVi T. Bva-iaa-TTjpiov, Ja 2^1 (v. Mayor, in 1.). 3. to bear, sustain 
(cf. Nu 1433, Is 5312): He 928. t 

dm-<|>wi'€'w, -oi, [in LXX for racrhi., "IDT hi. ;] to cry out, exclaim: 
Lk 1*2 (Arist., al.).t 

*t dcd-xuo-is, -€0)5, 1? (<^dvax€to, to poiir 02it), a pouring out, over- 
flowing, excess: metaph., i Pe 4* (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dca-x^pew, -w, [in LXX for n"12 , D13 , etc. ;] 1. to go back. 2. to 
withdraw : Mt 92* ; freq. in sense of avoiding danger (MM, VGT, s.v.), 
Mt 212 (but V. Thayer), i3, u, 22 412 1215 1413 1521 27*, Mk 3^ Jo 6^5^ 
Ac 2319 263i.t 

d>'<£-<|/u^s, -tm rj «aVa./ri;xw), [in LXX: Ex S^^^ii) (nrj]"))*;] 

a refreshing : Ac S^^.t 

dca-tj/uxw, [in LXX for B7D3 ni., n^n , etc. (freq. in sense of revive, 
refresh oneself) ;] to refresh : c. ace. pers., 11 Ti 1^* (MM, VGT, s.v. ; 
Cremer, 588).t 

* dt'SpairoSiCTTT^s, -ov, 6 (<^ dv8pdiro8ov, a slave, captured in war), a 
slave-dealer, kidnapper: i Ti l^" (v. MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

'A^Spe'as, -ov, 6, Andrew, the Apostle : Mt 41^ IO2, Mk li«. 29 318 
133, Lk 61*, Jo 1*1' *5 68 1222, Ac li3.t 

di'SptV, [in LXX for pm , f aX (Jos l^''-, i Ch 22^^, al; in 11 Ki IO12, 
Ps 271* 312^, combined with KpaTLovaOai, as in i Co, I.e.) ;] to make a man 
of. Mid., to flay the man (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.) : i Co 16i3.t 
'Ac8p6>'iKos, -ov, 6, Andronicus : Eo 16''.t 
** d»'8po-<}>6.'os, -ov, 6, [in LXX : 11 Mac 928 * ;] a man-slayer : i Ti I** 
(cf. 0ov€i;s, and v. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

** dk-eYK\r]TOS, -ov « a-, iyxakew), [in LXX : III Mac 531 * .j ^^^ ^q jg 
called to account, unreprovabU : i Co 1^, Col I22, i Ti 310, Tit 1«' ^.t 

Syn. : dfieixTTTo^, av€irL\r]fjiTrTos (v. Tr., Syn., § ciii ; Cremer, 742; 
MM, VGT, S.V.). 

*t dj'-cKSiriYTjTos, -ov (■< a-, cVStT/ye'o/iai), inexpressible : 11 Co 91* (MM, 
VGT, s.v.).t 

*t dK-cK-XdXTjTos, -OV «!»-, c/cXaXew), unspeakable: i Pe 18.tj 

* di/c'KXenrros, -ov (< a-, eKXeiVw), unfailing : Lk 1233 (MM, FGT, 

8.V.).t 

*dc-€KT6s, -OV (also in late Gk. -^, -ov; -^aVexoAiai), tolerable: 
compar., -drepos, Mt IQi^ II22, 24^ Lk IO12. i*.t 

df-eXeii}i(DK, -ov (■< a-, cXcij/xwv), [in LXX for ipx ;] without mercy : 

Eo li3.t 

*t di'-cXeos, -ov (Attic avr;Xe^9, aVcXtiy/Awv ; MM, VGT, 8.V.), merciUss : 
Ja 2i3.t 

*t dfefii^w = Attic dve/j.6w (<[ avc/xos) ; pass., to &e driven by the wind : 
Ja l«.t 

fii'e^os, -ov, 6, [in LXX for nn ;] -w^i^d ; Mt 11^ I42*. so, 32^ Mk 
437, 39. 41 648, 51^ Lk 724^ 823. 24^ Jq 518, Ac 27^' 1*' 1*, Ja 3*, Ee 6i3 71 ; pi., 



36 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THB NEW TESTAMENT 

Mt 725. 27 826. 27^ Lk 825, Ac 27S Ju 12 ; oJ TcVo-ape? &. r^s y^s, Ee 7^ ; hence 
the four quarters of the heavens (v. Deiss., BS, 248 ; MM, VGT, 8.V.), 
Mt 2431, Mjj 1327. metaph., of variable teaching, Bph 4i*.t 
SYN. : TTPevfjia, TTvor] (and cf. OviWa, XalXaij/). 

*tdf-eV86KTos, -ov {<C.d- neg., evScKTos; <!^ivS€xoiJ^a.t), impossible, in- 
admissible : Lk 17^t 

** dce^cpauVtjTos (Eec. -cvvt/to?, as in Attic; M, Pr., 46), -ov (•< 
ii-€p€vvd(o), [in Sm. {-ev-) : Pr., 25^*;] unsearcJiable : Eo IP^.t 

*t di'€^i-KaKos, -ov (^fut., aVc^o/Aat, KaK6<;), patiently forbearing (cf. 
dve^tKa/cta, Wi 2i» ; and v. MM, VGT, s.v.) : 11 Ti 224.t 

t di'€^iX>'iao-Tos, -ov (<Ca- neg., €^t;i(via^w, to track out; ■<^ixvos), [in 
LXX : Jb 59 910 3424 (ipxj ]">^)* ;] i/iai canwoi be traced out : Eo ll^a, 

Eph 38 (MM, F(9r, s.v.).t 

*+ di'-eir-aiaxui'Tos, -ov (<^ £7rato-;(wo/i,ai), no^ to &e ^wi to shame : II Ti 
2i6.t 

* di'-eTTi-XT]fnrTos (Eec. -Ar^Trros; Bl., § 6,8), -ov (-^a-, iiriXa/JL^avw), 
without reproach : i Ti 32 5'^ S^^.t 

Syn. : a/xe/xTTTos, dveyKXrjTo^. It is stronger than these, for it 
implies not only that the man is of good report, but that he is 
deservedly so (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.j. 

d./-6'pxofiai, [in LXX : iii Ki 13^2 (^bn)* ;] to go up : Jo 6^, Ga 

117, 18 (gf iTravipx-; and on its use of "going up" to the capital, MM, 
VGT, s.v.).t 

ct^cais, -€0)9, ^ «aviVO. \}^ LXX: II Es 422 (,t,2^)^ „ Ch 2316, 
I Es 4«2, Wi 1313, Si 1520 2610 * ;] a loosenhig, relaxation : Ac 242^ (EV, 
indulgence ; cf. MM, VGT, s.v.) ; by St. Paul, opp. to ^A-i'i/^is, expressed or 
understood, relief: 11 Co 2^2 7^ Q^\ 11 Th l^.t 

SyN. : ctvaTravo-is (q.V.). 

t df-erdj^w (<; dvd, ird^w, to examine ; V. MM, VGT, s.v.), [in LXX : 
Jg 629 (taf-]i), Es 223 (tZTj-^n), Da th Su^^*;] to examine judicially: Ac 

dceu, prep. c. gen. (rarer than x'^P'?. Q-v. ; cf. Ellic. on Eph 2^2; 
MM, VGT, 42), without : Mt 1029, ^ Pe 31 49 1 

*t diz-eu'-ecTos, -ov (v. MM, VGT, S.V.), no^ weZi placed, not fit : Ac 
27i2.t 

** di'-€upiaKw {dvd, evpiarKU}), [in LXX : IV Mac 3^* * ;] to find out by 
search, discover (v. Field, Notes, 47 f.) : Lk 2'^, Ac 214.t 

di'-e'xw, [in LXX chiefly for pDN hithp. ;] to hold up ; in NT always 
mid., to &ear ivith, e^id^ire : in cl. most freq. c. ace, but in NT c. gen. 
pers., Mt 171^ Mk 9^9, Lk 9*i, 11 Co ll^' ^\ Eph 42, Col 3^3 ; seq. p.LKp6v 
Tt, c. gen. pers. and c. gen. rei, 11 Co ll^ ; c. dat. rei, 11 Th 1* (v M, 
Th., in 1.) ; seq. d rt?, 11 Co II20 ; absol., i Co 4^2, n Co 11* ; to bear 
ivith = to listen to, c. gen. pers., Ac 18^* ; c. gen. rei, 11 Ti 4^, He I322 
(cf. Trpoo-ave'xto and MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dv6v|»i6s, -oC, 6 (cf. Lat. nepos), [in LXX : Nu Se^i (Tn ]5), To 7=* 

9" X*;] a cousin: Col 410 (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 37 

*S.vr]Qov, -ov, TO, anise : Mt 2323.t 
d^-ilKw (wa, 7^Ku>), [in LXX : Jos 231^ (xia), i Ki 278, Si. prol.i", 
I, II Mac 6 * ;] prop., to have come up to ; in later writers, impers. it is 
due, it is befitting : in ethical sense (MM, VGT, s.v.), Eph 5*, Col S^^; 
TO dvrJKov, Phm 8.t 

* ay-riii.epos, -ov (a-, rjixcpoi), not tame, savage (MM, VGT, s.v.) : 
II Ti 33.t 

dfiip, aVSpo's, 0, [in LXX chiefly for VTii , freq. lZ;^3^^ , also n"lX , 

etc. ;] a man, Lat. vir. 1. As opp. to a woman, Ac 8^'\ i Ti 2^- ; as a 
husband, Mt l^^, Jo 4i«, Eo 7^, Tit 1«. 2. As opp. to a boy or infant, 
I Co 13^\ Eph 4}^, Ja 3^. 3. In appos. with a noun or adj., as 
a. d/i,apTwXos, Lk 6^; a. Trpocfyrj-nj^, 24^^; freq. in terms of address, as 
a. a'SeX^oi, Ac 1^" ; and esp. with gentilic names, as a. 'lovSatos, 
Ac 22^ ; a. 'E^eVtoi, 19^^. 4. In general, a man, a male person : 
= Tis, Lk 8^1, Ac 6^\ 

Syn. : dv6p(oTTos, q.v. (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.). 

di'e-iaTT||xi (avTt, LarrjfjLi), [in LXX for IQJT , 13?^ , etc. ;] 1. in pres., 
impf., fut. and 1 aor. act., causal, to set against. 2. In mid. and pass., 
also pf. and 2 aor. act., to withstand, resist, opjjose : c. dat., Mt 5^^ 
Lk 2115, Ac 610 138, j^q 919 132^ Ga 2ii, Eph 6^\ 11 Ti 3^ 4l^ Ja 47, 
1 Pe 59.t 

d»'0-ofio\oYcop.ai, -oi)/i,at {avri, ofioXoyeofj-ai), [in LXX : Ps 78 (79) ^ 
(nT), Da LXX 434 (nnn?), i Es 8»i, Si 202, III Mac 6^3 *;] 1. to make a 

mutual agreement (Dem., Polyb.). 2. to acknowledge fully, confess 
(Diod., Polyb., cf. i Es, I.e.). 3. C. dat. pers., to declare ones praises, 
speak fully in prayer or thanksgiving, give thanks to (cf. Ps, I.e.) : 
Lk 238 (Cremer, 771 ; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

ac9os, -COS, TO, [in LXX for -p^ , etc. ;] a flower : Ja li". i\ 

I Pe 1'^ (Lxx).t 

**d..epaKi(l, -as, ^ {<:ivOpa^), [in LXX: Si 11^2, iv Mac 920*;] a 
heap) of burning coals : Jo I8I8 21^.t 

avQpai, -a/cos, 6, [in LXX chiefly for n^na;] coal, charcoal: 

a. TTvpos, a burning coal, Eo 1220.t 

+ d>'0pwn--tip€CTKos, -ov (dv^pwTTos, apea-Ko?, pleasing), [in LXX : Ps 52 
(53) 5 * ;] studying to please men : Eph 6^, Col 3^2 (Cremer, 642 ; MM, 
VGT, s.v.).t 

di-OpcJirivos, -17, ov (•< avOpiOTTos), [in LXX for UIH , ^2ij{ ;] human, 

belonging to man : x*^P^'» -^^ 1"^^* » cro(f)ia, 1 Co 2i3 ; ^uVis, Ja 3^^ ; 
KTio-15, I Pe 213 (MM, VGT, s.v.) ; i f^y^ipa, opp. to ^ w- (3^^ God's 
Judgment-Day), human judgme7it, 1 Co 43 (v. Lft., Notes, 198) ; 
Tretpacr/xos a., temptation such as man can bear (AV, S'Mc/i as is common 
to man, v. Field, Notes, 175), i Co 10i3 ; av^pwTrtvov Xcyw, I speak in 
human fashion, with words not properly weighed, Eo 61® (v. Field, 
Notes, 156). t 



38 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

* &y6p(3)TroKT6vo(;, -ov (■< ktciVo), to kill), a murderer, manslayer 
(Eur. ; V. MM, VGT, s.v.) : Jo 8", i Jo 3".t 

Stn. : <f>ov€vs, dvSpo4>6vo<; (v. Tr., Syn. § Ixxxiii). 

acOpwiros, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for DIX , IZTN , also for Vh2il{ , 

etc. ;] man : 1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. 
homo): Jo IG^i; c. art., Mt 4^ 1235, Mk 2^', Jo 225, Rq 7\ al; 
disting. from God, Mt 19", Jo 10=^^ Col 3^3, al. ; from animals, etc., 
Mt 4^^, Lk 5^", Ee 9*, al. ; implying human frailty and imperfection, 

I Co 3* ; cro0ia dvOpoiTTtDV, I Co 2^ ; avOpuiirtav eVi^D/xiai, I Pe 4^ ; Kara 
avOpiDTTov -TrepiiraTeLv, I Co 3^ ; Kara a. Xeyeiv (XaXeiv), Ro 3^, I Co 9^ ; 
Kara a- Ae'yetv, Ga 3^* (cf. I Co 15^2, Ga 1^^) ; by meton., of man's 
nature or condition, 6 eo-w (e^o)) a., Ro 7^\ Eph S^\ ii Co 4i« (cf. 

I Pe 3*) ; 6 -n-aXatos, /caivo?, veos a., Ro 6^, Eph 2^5 422. 24, Col 3^' 10 ; 
joined with another subst., a. e/ATropos, a merclmnt, Mt 13*^ (WH, 
txt. om. a.) ; oi*co8eo-7roTr;s, Mt 13^2 ; ftacTLXevs, 182^ ; ^a'yos, 11^^ ; with 
name of nation, Kvprjvalo<;, Mt 27^2; 'lovSalos, Ac 21^9; 'Fw/xatos, 
Ac 16^7; pi. ot a., men, jJeople : Mt 5">i«, Mk 82*, Jo 428; ov8ek 
dvOpdiTTOiv, Mk 112, I Ti 6^". 2. Indef., a. = tis, some one, a man: 
Mt 171*, Mk 12\ al.; rts a., Mt 18^2, Jo 5^, al. ; indef. one (Fr. on), 
Ro 328, Ga 2l^ al. ; opp. to women, servants, etc., Mt lO^" 1910^ 
Jo 722, 23_ 3^ Definitely, c. art., of some particular person; Mt 12^3^ 
Mk 35, al. ; oIto% 6 a.,'Lk 1430; 6 5. ovto?, cKeTvos, Mk 14^1, Mt 12*^; 
6 a. T. dvo^ta^, II Th 23 ; d. t. deov (of Heb. Q-^nb^ tZPX), I Ti 6^\ 

II Ti Si'^, II Pe 121 ; 6 vi6<s tov d., v.s. vlos. 

SVN. : dvrjp, q.v. (and cf. MM, VGT, 44 ; Cremer, 103, 635). 
*t dkO-uiraTeu'u (see next word), to be proconsul: Ac 18^2 ^qq 
(v.s. ai'^iJTraTos).'^" 

* dk'0-uiraTos, -ov, 6 (avn', vTraro?, alter n. for viripraToi), supreme, a 
consul, one acting in place of a consul, a proconsul, the administrator 
of a senatorial province (cf. rj-ye/xiav, and v. MM, VGT, 44) : Ac 13^' ^> ^^ 
1812 1938.t 

&v-ir\\i.i {dvd, Irjixi), [in LXX for HDI, XtZTS, etc. ;] 1. to send up, 
produce, to send hack. 2. to let go, leave without support : He 13^ 
(cf. De 31" ; Horn., II., ii, 71). 3. to relax, loosen (v. Field, Notes, 
124 f.) : Ac 162" 27*0 ; hence, metaph., to give up, desist from : Eph 6^.f 

dK-iXews, -wv, V.S. av€A.€09. 
*ak'nrTos, -ov (a. neg., vLirTui), unwashed : Mt I520, Mk 72(5Rec.) t 

d>'-i<TTT]juii {dvd, la-TTqfxi), [in LXX chiefly for Dip ;] 1. causal, in fut. 
and 1 aor. act., c. ace, to raise up: Ac 9*^ ; from death, Jo 63^, 
Ac 232 ; to raise up, cause to he horn or ajypear : Mt 222*, Ac 3221 2«. 
2. Intrans., in mid. and 2 aor act. ; (a) to rise : from lying, Mk 135 . 
from sitting, Lk 4^" ; to leave a place, Mt 9^ ; pleonastically, as Heb, 
Dip , before verbs of going, Mk 10^, al. (v. Dalman, Words, 23 ; 
M, Pr., 14); of the dead, Mt 1723, Mk 83i; seq. « v€Kpwv, Mt 179, 
Mk 9^ ; (h) to arise, appear : Ac 53", Ro 15^2 (cf. ctt-, ef- dvia-Trjfu, and 
V. Cremer, 306, 738 ; MM, VGT, s.v.). 

Syn. : iyetpo). 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 39 

"Akm, -as, fj (Heb. n0), Anna, a prophetess : Lk 23«.t 

"Ai'ms, -a (FIJ, 'Avavos, -ov), 6 (Heb. jari), ^wwas, the high priest: 

Lk 32, Jo 1813. 2*, Ac 4«.t 

d-f^TjTos, -OV (a- neg., vorjTo^; <^voetj}), [in LXX: Pr l?^^ (b^lj?), 

Si 42^, al. ;] 1. not thought on, not understood (Horn., Plat.). 2. not 
understanding, foolish (Hdt., al., LXX) : Lk 2425, jjo ju^ q^ S^' 3, i Ti 
6», Tit 33 (Gremer, 438, 790 ; MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

Syn. : dcrvvcTO's (v. Tr., Syn., § Ixxv). 

ai/ota, -as, rj (■< a-voos, without understanding), [in LXX : Pr 14^ 
22^5 (n^-iN), Wi 15^8, al. ;] folly, foolishness : 11 Ti 3^ ; expressed in 

violent rage (cf. Plat., Tim., 86b) : Lk S^^.t 

dc-oiyo) (ava', otyto = oiyw/it), [in LXX chiefly for nns ;] to open; 

1. trans., c. ace. ; a door or gate, Ac 5^^ 12^*, Ee 4^ ; pass., Ac 12^" 
]^g26,27. metaph. of opportunity or welcome, Ac 142'', Col 4^, Ee 32"; 
pass., I Co 169, II Co 212, Ee 38; absol. (sc. dvpav), Ac 523 1216. c. dat. 
pers., Lk 123«, Jo 103; metaph., Mt T^'^ 25^\ Lk ll^. 10 1325, Re 3^; 
e-qcravpo^^ (Si 43^^), Mt 2^1; T. fiv-nixCia, Mt 27^2. ^a'0os, Eo 313. 
T. .^pcap, Ee 92; of heaven, Mt 31^, Lk 321, Ac lO^i, Ee ll^^ 155 19^1; 
o-<^/DayZ8a, Ee 5^ 6^ «• 8^ ; fBifikiov, fti/3\ap[8iov, Lk 417, Ee 52-5 102.8 20^2; 
T. (TT6fia, Mt 172^ id. Hebraistically (Nu 2228, jb 31^ ig sqs^ al), of 
beginning to speak, Mt 52, Ac 832. 36 io34 IS^* ; seq. eis y8Xao-</)77/it'as, 
Ee 13" ; ^ irapa/SoXah (Ps 77 (78)2), Mt 1335 ; of recovering speech, Lk 
1"* ; of the earth opening, Ee 12^** ; t. 6<fi6a\fjLov^, Ac 98. *<> ; id. c. gen. 
pers., of restoring sight, Mt 93« 2033, Jq 910 ir. 2021 1137 • metaph., Ac 26^8. 
a/coa's, c. gen. pers., of restoring hearing, Mk 735. 2. Intrans. in 2 pf., 
aVewya (M, Pr., 154) ; heaven, Jo 15^ ; t. a-TOfxa, seq. Trpos, of speaking 
freely, n Co 6^^ (cf. St-avoiyo) and v. MM, VGT, 45).t 

diz-oiKo-Soii^u, -w, [in LXX for nS2, , "MSi ;] to build^-again, rebuild 
(MM, VGT, 8. v.) : Ac 15i«.t 

*ai'oi^is, -cws, 17 (<; dvotyw), an opening (in MGr., springtime): 
iv a., as often as I open, Eph Q^^.f 

di'0|jLia, -as, 17 (■< avoyxos), [in LXX for jiy , jTBTp , niiyin , yori , 

etc. ;] lawlessness, iniquity : Mt 723 13*1 2328 24^2, Ro 6^9, n Co 6^*, 
II Th 23. 7, Tit 21*, He 1^, i Jo 3* ; in pi. (as LXX, Ps 31\ al. ; v. Bl., 
§ 32, 6; Swete, MJc., 153), of acts or manifestations of lawlessness: 
Eo47(Lxx)^Hel0i7.t 

Syn. : V.S. afidpTrj/xOy avofio^. 

a-vofios, -ov (a. neg., vo/ios), [in LXX for "py , ytp^ , VXS^ , etc. ;] 1. 

lawless, wicked : Mk 1528, l^ 2237, Ac 223, i t^ 19^ „ pe 28; 6 5., 11 Th 

28 ( = 6 a.vdp(j)7ro<i T^s dvo/xtas, ib. 23), 2. without law ( = ol /x^ VTTO 

.'Vov, Eo 21*) : I Co 921 (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

>SriV^. ; V.S. a.dia-p.o<i. 

^^di/oiius, adv., [in LXX: 11 Mac 8^7*;] 1. lawlessly (11 Mac, I.e.). 

2. aa x*"P''5 vo/Mov, without law : Eo 2^2. t 

df-opdou, -to (avd, opOoio, to set straight, set up), [in LXX chiefly for 



40 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

713 hi. ;] to set wpright or straight again, restore : of persons, Lk 13^^, 
He 121- . of things, (TKy^v-qv, Ac 15i« (MM, VGT, s.v. ; Cremer, 807).t 
diz-ddios, -ov (d- neg., oo-io?), [in LXX : Ez 229 (-^,^7)^ ^i 12", 

II Mac 7^* 8^^ III Mac 2- 5P, iv Mac 12^^ * ;] unholy, profane (Cremer, 
464) : I Ti 19, II Ti 3^ (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

** 6.V0X-1], -^?, y] « ave'xw, -o/iai), [in LXX : i Mac 12^5 (RV, respite)* ;] 

1. in cl,, a holding hack, delaying (MM, VGT, s.v.). 2. forbearance, 
delay of punishment : Eo 2^ S^^.t 

Syn. : jMiKpoOvixia, vTToixopT]. a., forbearance, is the result and 
expression of yu.., which involves the idea of tolerance, long-suffering, as 
God with sinners, v. expresses patience with respect to things, as /a. 
with persons; it is active as well as passive, denotes not merely endurance 
but p'erseverance (v. Tr., Syn., § liii ; Lft., Notes, 259, 273 ; DB, ii, 47). 
** dcT-aywciioixai, depon., [in LXX: IV Mac 17^**;] to struggle 
against : seq. Trpds, c. ace. He 12*. t 

di/T-dlXXaYfJia, -T05, to (dvTt, dWay/xa ; <^ aWaa-aoi) , [in LXX chiefly 
for TinOj] *^ exchange, the price received as an equivalent for an 

article of commerce : Mt 162«, Mk B^^ (of. Si 26^*; and v. Swete, Mk., 
I.e.; Cremer, 90). t 

* dn--am-irXY]p6u, -w {avri, avaTrXrjpooy), to fill Up in turn : Col 1^* 
(v. Lft., in 1. ; MM, VGT, s.v.j.t 

drr-aTTo-8i8wfii (dvTi, dTroSiSw/xi), [in LXX for DbtZT pi., boS , miT hi., 
etc. ;] to give back as an equivalent, recompense, requital (the avri ex- 
pressing the idea of full, complete return ; v. Lft., Notes, 46) ; (a) in 
favourable sense: Lk 1^^\ Ro 11=^^^ i Th 39; {b) in unfavourable 
sense : Ro W\ 11 Th 1^, He lO^o.t 

t di'T-aTTO-Sop.a, -tos, to (<^ dvraTToScSw/Ai), [in LXX chiefly for bllQil ;] 

( = cl. -Soo-is, q.v.), requital; (a) in favourable sense: Lk 14^^; (6) in 
unfavourable sense : Ro 11^.+ 

arr-airo-Soo-is, -€ws, 17 (v. supr.), [in LXX chiefly for bna3, Dll^tt;;] 

recompense : Col 3^* (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

t dn-aTTo-Kpi^ofiai (dvn', ArroKpi'vw), [in LXX :^ Jg 529, Jb 169(8) 3212 
(nay)* ;] to answer again, reply against : seq. Trpds, c. ace. rei, Lk 14* ; 
e. dat. pers., Ro 92».t 

^LVT-ii-nov {avTL, ciTTov), [in LXX for mizr hi., im pi., nay etc. ;] 2 

aor., without present in use, to speak against, gainsay : Lk 21^^, Ac 4^*.t 
dfT-^X*^ {avTL, e^w), [in LXX for pTfl hi., etc. ;] 1. trans., to Jiold against. 

2. Intrans., to withstand. Mid. 1. in el., to hold out against. 2. (cf. 
MM, VGT, s.v.), to hold firmly to, cleave to : e. gen. (v. Bl., § 36, 2), Mt 
52*, Lk 1613, I Th 514 (v. M, Th., in 1.), Tit l^.t 

6.vtI (the t is elided only in avff wv), prep. c. gen. (cf. MM, VGT, 
8 V.) ; 1. prop, in local sense, over against, opposite, hence ; 2. instead 
of, in place of, for (Horn., etc.) : Mt 5^8 172^, Lk lli\ i Co ll^*. 
He 12^; c. artic. inf. (cl.), Ja 4^^ ; of succession, Mt 2^2; -^^apiv d. 
vdptros, Jo 1^" (M, Pr., 100) ; of price in exchange. He 12^* ; Xvrpov d. 
iroWCiv, Mt 20"-«, Mk 10^5 (M, Pr., 105) ; of requital, Ro 121^, 1 Th 5^*, 



MANUAL GEBEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 41 

I Pe 39 (cf. Wi 1115) ; dvff w, because, Lk l^o 19**, Ac 1223, ^ tj^ gio 
(cl., LXX for -i«rh? nnn); id. therefore (cl., LXX), Lk 12^; L tovtov 
(LXX for ]3"^y), Eph 5^^. As a prefix, dvrt- (before vowels dvr-, 

ctv^'-), denotes (a) over against, dvTLirepav; (b) co-operation, dvTijfidXXctv ; 
(c) requital, avTi^ia-Oia ; (d) opposition, dvTi'xpicrTo? ; (e) substitution, 
dv^uTTttTos. Compounds of d. usually govern dat. (Bl., § 37, 7).t 

** din-i-pdXXci), [in LXX : 11 Mac ll^^ * jj ^^ throw in ttirn, excJmnge : 
metaph., \6yovs (cf . Lat. conferre serviones ; v. Field, A'b^es, 81), Lk 24i'^.t 

*t di'Ti-8ia-Ti0T]p,i, in mid. to j^^^^ce oneself in opposition, oppose: 

II Ti 225 (EV; but v. Field, Notes, 215 f.; cf. MM, VGT, s.v.). 

di-TiSiKos, -ov {<^ 8tKT]), [in LXX for i^T ;] as subst., an opponent 

in a lawsuit, adversary : Mt b^^, Lk 12^8 IS^, i Pe 5^ (Cremer, 696 ; 
MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

* dKTi-Oeo-is, -ews, 17 (<^ Ti^r;/i.i), opposition: I Ti 62**.t 
dt'Ti-Kae-icTTTi^i, [in LXX: De 31^1 (njr), Jos b\ Mi 2^ (mp)*;] 
1. causal in pres. impf. fut. and 1 aor. ; to replace, oppose. 2. Intrans. 
in pass, and 2 aor. act. ; (a) to supersede ; {b) to resist : He 12'*. t 
*drTi-KaX€'w, -w, to invite in turn : Lk li^^.t 
di-Ti-Kcifiai, [in LXX for n^N , ms , pjzr , etc. ;] 1. to lie opjMsite 
to. 2. to oppose, withstand, resist: c. dat., Lk 13^'' 21^5^ q^ 517^ 

I Ti 110; as participial subst. (6) di/rtK€i>cvo?, i Co 16^ Phi 128, 

II Th 2*, I Ti 51* (Cremer, 746).t 

**d^TiKpus (Tr. -vs, Eec. ivTLKpv), adv. «dvTt'), [in LXX: Ne 128 
(^3^!?), III Mac 51"*;] in cl., oiitrirjht ; in kolvyj (= cl. KaTavTtKpv),over 

against: Ac 20^5 (v. Bl., §5, 4; 40, 7; Eutherford, M'/ir., 500 f.; 
MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

drrt-XafiPdi'U), [freq. in LXX for p7n hi., TjjQn , etc. ;] to take instead 
of or in turn. Mid., c. gen., to take hold of ; (a) of persons, to help 
(v. MM, VGT, 8.V.): Lk l^*, Ac 20^5; (b) of things, to partake of: 
1 Ti 62 (v. Field, Notes, 210 ; Cremer, 386 ; and cf. avv-avTLXa/xjSdvJj.f 

dm-Xe'Y«, [in LXX : Ho 4* (nn hi.), l8 505(aiD ni.) 2222 552^ gi 42*, 

III Mac 228, ly ]\ja,c 4^" 82 * ;] contradict, oppose, resist (v. Field, Notes, 
106; MM, VGT, s.v.); absol. : Ac 28i«, Eo IO21, Tit 1^ 2^; c. dat., 
Jo 1912, Ac 13*5; c ace. et inf., Lk 202' T; pass., Lk 23*, Ac 2822.t 

di-Ti-Xrifiil/is, (Eec. -Xr]il,L?; v. MM, VGT s.v.; M, Pr., 56), 
-ew;, rj {<C, avTi\afx/3(ii ofxai) , [in LXX for 7 JT , y'tlj , etc., freq. in Pss 

and II, III Mac. ; freq. also in tt. in petitions to the Ptolemies in sense 
of (So^Oeia (v. Deiss., LAE, 107 ; BS, 92, 223) ;J 1. cl. a laying hold 
of, an exchange. 2. Hellenistic (LXX, tt.) help : pi. of ministrations 
of deacons ; i Co 1228 (DB, ii, 347 f. ; Cremer, 386).t 

drri-Xtjij/is, V.S. dvTtXi^yLn^is. 

dmXoYia, -as, 17 (•< dvTtXeyw), [in LXX chiefly for 3^1 ;] gain- 
saying, strife (the latter sense being found in tt. ; v. MM, VGT s.v. ; 
cf. Field, Notes, 106) : He 6i« 7' 123, Ju ^^.t 



42 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

* dm-XoiSopeo), -w, to revile in turn : i Pe 2^^.+ 

**t d»'Ti-XuTpo^, -ov, TO, [in Al. : Ps 48 (49)»*;] a ransom: i Ti 2« 
(v. CGT, in 1. ; and cf. XvTpov)A 

*t dkTi-ficTpe'w, -5), to measure in return: Lk 6^^ (WH, mg., 

/A«Tp€a)),+ 

*t dk'T6fiia0ia, -as, 17 (<^ dvTLfjLL(TOo<;, for a retvard), a reivard, requital : 
in good sense, 11 Go G^^ ; in bad sense, Ro l^^ (MM, VGT, s.v.).+ 

'AcTi^xeia, -as, ^, Antioch ; 1. in Syria : Ac ll^^' 20. 22, 26, 27 131 1426 
1522,23,30,36 1822^ Q^ c^ii ^ 2. In Pisidla : Ac IS^* 1419.21, n Ti S^^t 
'AfTiox€us, -€0)s, 6, a citizen of Antioch, an Antiocliian : Ae 6^,t 
**t di'Ti-irap-^pxofiai, [in LXX : Wi 16^** * ;] to pass by opposite to : 
Lk 1031. 32 (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

'Ai/Tiiras (T, 'AvTeiVas), -a (in some MSS. it appears to be indecl. ; 
but V. M, Pr., 12 ; it is abbrev. from 'AvriTrarpos), 6, Antipas : Ee 2^^ + 
'AvTiiraTpts, -t'Sos, rj, Antipatris, bet. Joppa and Caesarea : 
Ac 233i.t 

*t dt'Ti-ircpa (Rec. avTiirepav, LTr. avrnripa), adv., = cl. dvTiTrepas 
(MM, VGT, 49), on the opposite side : 0. gen., Lk S^'.t 

dKri-iriTTTa), [in LXX : Ex 26^ (bnp), ib.i^ (nl^ur), Nu 27i* (nz^np), 

Jb 23^3 (2ni2r hi.) * ;] 1. to fall against or upon (Arist., Polyb.). 2. to 
strive against, resist (Arist.) : c. dat., Ac 7^^.t 

* dt'Ti-CTTpareuofiai, to make war against : c. dat., Ro T^^.t 
dn-i-Tcio-CTw (Att., -TTw), [in LXX for ]«ib hi., ams , etc. ;] to range 

in battle against ; mid., to set oneself against, resist : absol., Ac IS*' ; 
c. dat., Ro 132, Ja 46 5^, i Pe 5^ (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

** dm-TUTTos, -ov (v.s. TUTTos), [in LXX: Bs 3^^ a*;] 1. act. striking 
back ; metaph., resisting, adverse. 2. Pass, struck back ; metaph., corres- 
ponding to (MM, VGT, s.v.) ; (a) as impression of a seal or copy of 
an archetype (rrVos) (RV, like in pattern). He 9^*; (&) as the reality (of 
which TUTTos is the copy or adumbration) (RV, after a true likeness), 
I Pe 321 (Cremer, 357) .t 

*t Qnnl-yupiaTo^, -ov, 6, Antichrist, " one who assuming the guise of 
Christ opposes Christ" (Westc, Epp. Jo., 70) : i Jo 2^8.22 43^ n JqT; 
pi. I Jo 218 (cf. i/^£vSoxpi(TTos, and v. MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dcxXeu, -w (<^avTXos, bilge-water in a hold), [in LXX for aNB7, 
etc. ;] 1. prop., to bale out. 2. Generally, to draw water : absol., Jo 2^ 
41^ ; vSmp, Jo 2^ 4:"^ (on its use of the water made wine, v. DOG, ii, 
815* ; MM, VGT, s.v. ; Field, Notes, 84 f.).t 

*+ ai'TXT)fia, -Tos, TO (<[ avrXew), (a) prop., what is drawn (Diosc.) ; 
(b) a vessel to draw with, a bucket (Plut. ; v. Abbott, Essays, 88) : 
Jo 4}Kf 

**f d»n-o<t)0aX,jie'«, -w {dvTi, 6</)^aX/xos), [in LXX : Wi 12^* * ;] to look in 
the face, look straight at (Polyb.). Metaph., to face, withstand (Wi, 
I.e., Polyb.) : c. dat., d. t. dvefjuo, as nautical term, to beat up agai^ist 
the wind (v. DB, ext., 366 f.; MM, VGT, s.v.) : Ac 27^5.+ 

a^uSpos, -ov «d- neg., v8wp), [in LXX for TVpl , ^to^ar"! (yJj a.), 



MANUAL GBEBK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 43 

etc.;] waterless: tottoi, Mt 12*3, ljj 1124. Trrjycu, 11 Pe 2^^; ve^e'Aai, 
Ju 12 (MM, FGT, s.v.).t 

** dj'-uiroKpiTos, -ov (<^ d- neg., vTroKpLvo/xai), [in LXX : Wi 51^ 18^"*;] 
unfeigned : Eo 129, 11 Co 6«, i Ti 1^, 11 Ti 1^, Ja 3^', i Pe I22 (Cremer, 
380 ; MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

**t dkuiroTaKTOS, -ov {<^ a- neg., VTrorda-a-o}) , [in Sm, : I Ki 2^^ IQiT (for 
LXX, A.ot/Aos, birbn ^32)* ;] of things, not subject to rule : He 2^ ; of 
persons, unruly : i Ti 1^, Tit l^^o (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

avu, adv. (•< dva), (a) up, upwards : Jo 11*\ He 12^^ . (j) afto-ye 
(opp. to Kdrw) : Ac 219 ; with art. ^, Ga 426, p^i 314 . ^^^ Jq 82s, 
Col 3I' 2 ; Icos ^. (wp to the brim), Jo 2^ (Cremer, 106 ; MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

6.vuyaiov, dvwyeoc, V.8. dvdyaiov. 

&vuQet', adv. « 5va)), (a) from above : dno &., Mt 27", Mk 15^8; 
^K Twv a., Jo 1923; meaning, from heaven : Jo 3^1 W\ Ja l^' S^^.H; 
(&) from the first, from the beginning : Lk 1^, Ac 26^ ; whence (c) anew, 
again : Jo 33» '^, (so most, but v. Meyer, in 1. ; cf. Field, Notes, 86 f.) ; 
ird\Lv i., Ga 49 (MM, VGT, 8.v.).+ 

* dkuxepiKos, --7, -oV (<; dvwTcpo?), w^er .' Ac I91.+ 

di-tircpos, a, -ov, [in LXX : Ne 32^ (p^^y), Ez 41^ (bvQ), To 8S*;] 

only in neut., as adv. (cf. c^turtpos), (a) of motion, higher : Lk 141" . 
{b) of rest, above, before : He 10^.+ 

d>'-w<|.€Xiis, -€'s (d- neg., o^eXos), [in LXX : Is 4410 (b^iyin ""nb?), 

Je 28 (b^jrin kb), Pr 283, Wi 111*. J unprofitable: Tit 3^; neut. as 

subst., unprofitableness : He T^^.t 

dgi'n, -'75, v> [in LXX for ]).-ia , Di-ip. ;] aw arre ; Mt 3i«, Lk 39.t 
a|ios, -a, -ov « ayw, in sense, to weigh), [in LXX for p (De 25^), 

ab^ , njCJ' ; freq. in Wi, 11 Mac ;] (a) of weight, worth (often c. gen., 

cf. Pr 315 811), geq. ^rpo's : Eo 8I8 (v. Field, Notes, 157) ; [b) befitting, 
meet : c. gen., Mt 3^, Lk 38 23", Ac 262o, i Co 16* (v. M, Pr., 216) ; 
absol., II Th 1^ ; (c) of persons, worthy ; (a) in good sense : c. gen. rei, 
Mt IQio, Lk 7* 10', Ac 13*«, i Ti lis 49 518 61 ; c. aor. inf. (v. M, Pr., 
203) : Lk 15i9. 21, Ac 1325, j^ 411 52. ". 9. 12 ; seq. Iva : Jo 127 ; ^9, Lk 7* ; 
absol., but of what understood : Mt lOH* i^ 228, Ee 3* ; c. gen. pers., 
Mt 1037. 38^ He 1138 ; (^) in bad sense ; c. gen. rei, Lk 12*8 2315, 
Ac 2329 25ii'25 2631, Ro 132; absol., Ee 16« (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

dCiow, -Ci « d^ios), [in LXX chiefly for K71 , mp^ ; freq. in Wi, 
I, II Mac;] (a) to deem worthy : c. ace. et inf. (v. MM, VGT, s.v., and 
cf. Kar-afiow), Lk V ) id. et gen. rei, 11 Th 1" ; pass. c. gen. rei, i Ti 
517, He 33 1029; {b) to think fit : c. inf. (v. M, Pr., 205), Ac 1538 2822.+ 
**d|ia)s, adv., [in LXX: Wi 71^ I61, Si I411*;] worthily: Eo 162, 
Eph 41, Phi 127; c. gen. (freq. in Inscr. ; Deiss., BS, 248; MM, VGT, 
51), d. T. Kvpiov, Col li« ; T. e^ov, I Th 212, III Jo«.t 

diSparos, -ov « opdw), [in LXX : Ge I2 (inh), Is 453 pijga), 

II Mac 95*;] unseen, invisible : Eo 120, Col li5'i«, i Ti li7, He IP^.t 



44 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

dir-ayYeXXw, [in LXX chiefly for 122 hi. ;] of a messenger, speaker, 
or writer, to report, announce, declare: c. ace. rei, Ac 4'^^, al.; c. dat. 
pers., Mt 28, al. ; seq. on, Lk IS^^ ; ttws, Lk 8=^« ; Trcpi', Lk V^ 13\ Ac 
28-1, I Th 19 ; Ae'yojv, Ac 22-" ; c. ace. et inf., Ac 12^4 . g^q. eJs, Mk S^*, 
Lk 83-^ (MM, VGT, s.v. ; Cremer, 25). 

otTT dyxw (<C «7X*^> io press, strangle), [in LXX : ii Ki 17-^ (p3n), 
To 31***;] to strangle; mid., to hang oneself (or, to choke; v. M, Pr., 
155) : Mt 27^t 

diT-dY«, [in LXX for 3113 , Tjbn hi., etc. ;] to lead away : Lk 13^*, 
Ac 23^''' 24" (E, mg.), i Co 12^ ; esp. of leading to trial (so as law term 
in Attic), prison and death (MM, VGT, s.v.) : Mt 26" 272. ^\ Mk 14**. 53 
1516, Lk 2112 22«6 23-6, Ac 12i9; of the direction of a way: Mt 712. i4 

(cf. OT;i/-a7r-ayw).t 

d-iraiSeuTos, -ov (■< TratSevw), [in LXX for b'^D? , etc., chiefly in 

Wi. lit. ;] uninstructed, ignorant : 11 Ti 2^3.1 

dir-atpo), [in LXX chiefly for yD3 ;] to lift off, hence, to take away ; 
pass. : Mt 91^, Mk Q^o, Lk b^K^ 

dTr-aiWa>, -Ji, [in LXX: De 152-3, al. (izr33), Si 20i5, Wi 15^, al.;] 
to ask back, demand back : Lk 6^0 I220 (MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

* diT-aXy^w, -<o, 1. prop., to cease to feel pain for (Thuc, ii, 61). 
2. In late Gk. (a) to desjjair (Polyb., i, 35, 5) ; (b) to become callous, 
reckless (Polyb., xvi, 12, 7 ; MM, VGT, s.v.) : Eph 4i9.t 

dir-aXXdao-w, [in LXX for TlD hi., etc. ;] to remove, release : He 2i* ; 
pass., to depart: Ac I912 ; in legal sense (MM, VGT, s.v.), seq. awo, 
c. gen. pers., to be quit of : Lk 12^^ (Cremer, 90, 632).+ 

diT-aXXoTpiow, -w, [in LXX for ^1T , 173 , etc. ;] to alieiiate, estrange; 
pass.: Eph 2i-' 41^, Col l^i (MM, VGT, s.v.; Ciemer, 95, 633).+ 

diraX<59, -V, -ov, [in LXX for ^"1 ;] tender : Mt 24^2, Mk I328.+ 

diracTda), -w, [in LXX chiefly for yjQ ;] 1. to go to meet. 2. to 
meet; c. dat. : Mk 14i3, Lk I712 (WH, mg., iw- ; in Eec. freq. as v.l. 
for vTT-, q.v.).+ 

dirdn-Tjats, -ecus, 17 (<^ dTravrdw), [in LXX chiefly for flNlpb ;] usually 

with v.l., VTT-; a meeting; ek d., c. gen. or dat., to meet: Mt 25^ 27^2 
(WH, txt., omits), Ac 28l^ i Th 4i7 (v. M, Th., in 1. ; M, Pr., 14, 242; 
MM, VGT, s.v. ; Lft., Notes, 69).+ 

Siirai, adv., [in LXX for in^ , DVB ;] (a) once: 11 Co 1125, He 926, 27 . 

hi a.. He 1226. 27 . 5, ^. iycavTod, He 9^ ; koI a. k. S15, twice : Phi 416, 11 Th 
218; (6) once for all: He 6* 928 192, i pg 318, j^ 3, 5 (mM, VGT, s.v.).+ 
*+ d-irapd-Paros, -ov (<^ 7rapa/?atvw), inviolable, and SO unchangeable : 
He 724 (v. Westc, in 1. ; Cremer, 653 ; MM, VGT, s.v.).+ 

* d-Trapa-CTKCuaoTOS, -ov (<^ irapaa-Kevdlw), unprepared : II Co 9*.+ 
dir-api/eofiai {-ovfjuai), depon., [in LXX: Is 31''' (DND)*;] to deny, 

i.e. to refuse to recognize, to ignore : c. ace, of oneself {DCG, ii, 
598 f.), Mt 1624, Mk 834 (mM, VGT, s.v.), Lk 923 (WH, mg., txt., ipv-) ; 
of Peter's denials of Christ, Mt 2634. 35, 75^ y^^ 1430, 31, 72^ Lk 223*. «i ; 
pass., Lk 12» (Cremer, 111).+ 



MANUAL GEBEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 45 

* dTTcipTi (WH, (xtt' apTL ] cl., oLTTapTL, V. MM, VGT, 8.V.) ) adv., [not in 
LXX, where nijiy© is rendered by diro tov vvv ;] from now, henceforth : 

Jo 1319 14^ Ee 14i3.t 

*t dirapTiCTfios, -ov, 6 (<^ d7ra/3Tt{o), to finish), completion : Lk 14^^ 
(cf. MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

dir-apxii, ->7s, 17 {<^airdpxofJi.ai, to make a beginning in sacrifice, o^er 
first fruits), [in LXX chiefly for n?pnp , TT^CTXT;] 1. the beginning of a 

sacrifice. 2. first fruits : tov cf)vpdfjiaTo<s (cf. Nu 15^**), Eo 11^*'. Metaph,, 
d. ToO 7rv€v>aTos : Eo 823 ; of Christians : Eo IG^, i Co 16l^ 11 Th 21^ 
(WH, mg., E, mg., txt., oltt' dpxns ; v. Lft., Notes, 119 f .), Ja V-\ Ee 14* ; 
of Christ: i Co IS^o. 23 (Cremer, 117; MM, VGT, 8.v.).t 

fiiras, -ao-a, -av (strengthened form of ira?, v.s. a-), all, the whole, 
altogether: bef. subst. with art., as Lk 3^^ ; or after, as Mk IGC^^J; 
absol., in masc, as Lk 5'^ ; in neut., as Ac 2** ; d. ovtoi, Ac 2^ (LT) ; 
d. ifjiu^, Ga 328 (TTr.). Most freq. in Lk, Ac (v. MM, VGT, s.v.). 

**t dTT-aCTird^ofjiai, depon., [in LXX : To 10^^ x * ;] to take leave of: c. 
ace: Ac 2P.t 

diraTdw, -w (<^ dTrar?;), [in LXX for riDD , HtSZ hi., etc. ;] to deceive : 
c. ace, Ja 12"; c. ace. pers., dat. rei, Eph 5''; pass., i Ti 2^* (on its 
infrequency in late writers, v. MM, VGT, s.v.; cf. iiairaTd(o)A 

dirdTT], -r??, ri, [in LXX : Ec 9« N (no Heb. equiv.), Jth G^. 10. is 168, 
IV Mac 188 * ;] deceit, deceitfulness : Col 2^ ; tov itXovtov, Mt I322, Mk 
419 (MM, VGT, s.v.) ; t^s dSiKias, 11 Th 2i« ; t^s dixapria^, He 3^3 ; al 
i^iOvfjiiaL T^s d., Eph 422. PI., dWrai (v. M, Th., I.e. ; NTD, 75 ; MM, 
I.e.) : II Pe 2^3 (WH, mg., E., txt., iv dyd7rats).t 

*dTrdTup, -opo^, 6, rj (<C d- neg., Trarr^p) ; 1. fatherless. 2. witlwut 
fatlur (MM, FGT, s.v.), i.e., with no recorded genealogy : He 73.t 

**t dTT-auyaCTfJia, -T09, to (<^ a^y'?, brightness, whence dTrairyd^w, to 
radiate or reflect), [in LXX : Wi 72" * ;] of light beaming from a luminous 
body, radiance, effulgence : He 13. t 

diT-eiSok' (WH, d<^-, v. Bl., § 4, 3), 2 aor. without present in use 
(cf. etSov), serving as aor. to d</)opdw, q.v. 

**dTTe{06ia (WH, -Bia, exc. He, 11. c.), -as, ^ « dneiO^^), [in LXX: 
IV Mae 89. is 12^ * ;] disobedience (MM, FGT, s.v.) : Eo IP". 32^ He 4*'' 11 ; 
viot T^s d. (gen. of definition, v. M, Pr., 73 f.), Eph 22 5«, Col 3^ (T, WH, 
E, mg., omit).t 

dirciOc'w, -to (<^ ttTrei^?;?), [in LXX for ma , IID , etc. ;] as in cl. 
(MM, VGT, s.v.) ; to disobey, be disobedient : absol, Ac I42 19^, Eo 
1021 1131 1531^ He 318 1131, I Pe 320 . c, ^^t., Jo 336, Rq 28 113o, i Pe 28 
31 417 (Cremer, 475). t 

dTrei0Ti9, -es (•< veiOofiai), [in LXX for ma , ^^D , ^D ',] disobedient : 

absol., Lk li^. Tit lie 33 ; e. dat., Ac 26i9, Eo 130 11 Ti 32.t 

direiOia, -as, 17, V.S. direidcLa. 

direiXe'o), -w (dTrctXr^), [in LXX : Na 14 (-ira), Is 661* (Din), Si 19", 
al. ;] to threaten : 1 Pe 223 . ^^^^ ^c 4i7 (v. MM, VGT, s.v., and cf. 
TrpocraTT €t Aew) . t 



46 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

dTreiXri, -^9, rj, [in LXX for H^yj , etc.;] threatening, threat: Ao 

429 9\ Eph 69.t 

aiT-eifAi (ci/At', swm), [in LXX for ins ni., ni2 ni. ;] to be absent: 
I Co 53, II Co IQi' 11 132. i», Phi 127, Col 2^t 



♦ X 



aTr-€ 



ijxi (et/xi, i&o), to dejyart : Ac 17^'*.+ 



dir-eiiroi', 2 aor. without present in use, [in LXX for DNQ , IQN , 
etc. ;] 1. to tell oitt. 2. to forbid (iii Ki ll^), 3. to renounce : 1 aor. 
mid. (WH, App., 164 ; MM, VGT, s.v.), 11 Co 42.t 

*+ aircipaoTos, -ov (<^ rreipd^uj ', for cl. aTrcipT/Tos, <^ irctpato), untempted, 
untried, without experience : Ja 1^^ (v. Hort, in 1. ; MM, VGT, s.v.).+ 

aircipos, -ov (<[ d- neg., Treipa, iriaZ), [in LXX : Nu 142^, Za 11^* 
(^b''1J<), Je 2" (nS'^y) * ;] without experience of : c. gen. rei, He 5^^ 

(MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

*+ dTT-cK-Scxofiai, depon., to await or expect eagerly (Lit, Notes, 149; 
MM, VGT, s.v.) : absol., i Pe 320 ; c. ace. rei, Eo 8^^' 23. 25^ i Co 1^, 
Ga 5» ; c. ace. pers.. Phi 320, He 928.t 

*+ dir-^K-Suo-is, -cws, Tj (dTTCKSuw), a putting or stripping off: Col 2^^ 
(MM, VGT, s.v.).t 

*t dir-cK-Suo), to strip off clothes or arms; mid., to strip off from 
oneself: Col 3*; to strip, despoil (mid. for act., ICC, in 1.; but cf. Lft., 
EUic), Col 2i5.t 

dir-cXaui'u), [in LXX for b'S2 , ubtS]] to drive aiuay : Ac 18^' 
(MM, s.v.).t 

*t dir-eXeyixos, -ov, b (<^ aTrcXeyxw, to convict, refute), refutation, dis- 
repute: iXOeiv €ts d., Ac 1927 (not elsewhere; v. MM, s.v.).t 

* dir-eX€o06pos, -ov, 6, r), a freedmau : t. Kvplov (MM, s.v.), i Co 722.t 

'AttcXXtjs, -ov, ace. -riv (MM, S.V.), 6, Apelles : Eo l&^^.f 
tdTT-eXTritto, [in LXX : Is 29i9 (jr^N), Jth 911, Es 41^, Si 22^1 2721, 

II Mac 9^8*;] 1. to give up in despair, despair of (Polyb., Diod., LXX). 
2. to hope to receive from or in return (Field, Notes, 59 ; Cremer, 712 ; 
Soph., Lex., S.V.) : c. ace. (M, Pr., 65 ; MM, s.v.), Lk e^^.t 

+ dw-eVai'Ti, adv. c. gen. (Hellenistic, common in LXX); 1. over 

against (MM, s.v.): Mt 27", Mk 12*i, WH, mg. 2. before, in the 

presence of: Mt 272* (WH, mg.), Ac S^\ Eo 3^8. 3. against : Ac 177.t 

dire'pai'Tos, -ov (<[ TrcpatW, to complete, finish), [in LXX: Jb 362' 

("jpO ]^|S), III Mac 2^*;] endless, interminable: 1 Ti l*.t 

*t dircpwnrdtrTus, adv. (<^ Tr£pto-7rdo) ; the adj. occurs in Wi 16^^ 
Si 41^) ; without distraction : 1 Co 7^5.1 

+ d-TTcpi-T/itjTos, -OV (<[ TrepiTe/xvo}) , [in LXX chiefly for b"!;P ;] uncir- 

cumcised; metaph. (t.) KapSiais (cf. Je 92", al.) : Ac 7^^. {aarjfjLos, 
found in tt., appears to have been the word used by Greek-speaking 
Egyptians : v. Deiss., BS, 153 ; cf . also Cremer, 885 ; MM, s.v.)t 

d-n-^PXOfiai, [in LXX chiefly for "^bn ;] 1. togo away, depart (also, 
in late writers, with "perfective" force, to arrive at a destination, the 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 47 

thought being carried on to the goal ; M, Pr., Ill f., 247 ; MM, s.v.) ; 
(a) absol. : Mt 13^^, al. ; ptcp., dTreX^wv, used pleonastically with other 
verbs as in Heb. (Dalman, Words, 21), Mt 13^*, al. ; (6) with mention 
of place or person : cts, Mt 14^5 ; IttI, Lk 242* • ^p^^^ j^e 10^ ; aird, 
Lk 138; {^^^ p^Q 415. ^^j-^ Mt 222. 2. As in LXX, seq. ottio-w, c. gen. 
(Heb. nns "^bn), to go after, follow: Mk l^o, Jo 12^^; metaph., 
Mk 1*2^ Re 211. 

dir-exw, [in LXX chiefly for pm ;] 1. trans., {a) to hold bach, keep 
off ; (b) to Imve in full, to have received (on the "punctiliar" force of 
the compound, v. M, Pr., 109, 247): c. ace, Mt 62.5,i6, Lk 62*, 
Phi 4^^^, Phm^^ (for illustr. from ir., where it is used in receipts, 
V. Deiss., BS, 229; LAE, 110 f.; MM, s.v.); impers., a7r€x« (I'ield, 
Notes, 39), it is enough : Mk 14*\ 2. Intrans., to be away, distant : 
absol., Lk 1520 ; seq. d7r6, Mt I42* 158, j^ 76^ Lk 7« 152« 24^3. Mid., to 
abstain : c. gen., Ac 1529, i Ti 4^, i Pe 2ii ; seq. d7r6, Ac I520, i Th 4» 

622.t 

**dm«rr£'a), -S « aTrto-ros), [in LXX: Wi 12 10^ IQi^ IS^s, Si 1", 
II Mac 8^3 * ;] to disbelieve, be faithless : Mk W^' i«, Lk 24ii' *\ Ac 282*. 

I Pe 27 ; so prob. also Eo 3^, 11 Ti 2^^ {ICC, CGT, in 11. ; MM, s.v.). 
2. = dveiOew (Hdt. ; on this sense in Eo, 11 Ti, 11. c, v, Vaughan on 
Eo, I.e.; Lft., Notes, 265; Thayer, s.v.).t 

**dm<rTia, -as, -7 « ^ttio-tos), [in LXX: Wi 1425, IV Mac 12**;] 
want of faith, unbelief: Mt 1358, Mk 6« 92* 16^*, Eo 3^ (but v.s. airKxriw) 
420 1120,23^ I T- 5^13^ He 312,19 ^i,cG, n, 775^ Cremer, 492).t 

a-maros, -ov (< d- neg., ttio-tos), [in LXX : Pr 17" 282^, Is n^<^ * ;] 
(a) of things, incredible : Ac 268 • Qj^ qI persons, xvithout faith or trust, 
unbeliemng : Mt 17l^ Mk 9^^, Lk 9*^ 12*«, Jo 202^, Tit l^*, Ee 218 • 
specif., of unbelievers as opp. to Christians : i Co 6" 7^2-15 ^02'' 1422-24^ 

II Co 4* 6i*»i5, 1 Ti 58 (cf. Lft., Notes, 265; Cremer, 491).t 

dTrX(5TTis, -TTTos, V « aTXoCs), [in LXX : 11 Ki 15^^ (on), i Ch 29^7 
(an^ lOr , d. r^s KapSias, cf. Col 322, where v. Lft.), Wi 1^ al. ;] simplicity, 

sincerity : Eo 128, 11 Co 11^, Eph 6^, Col. 322 ; as manifested in 
generous, unselfish giving, liberality, graciousness : 11 Co 82 Q^^' i' 
(v. ICC, Bo., 128; Hort, Ja., 1*, and v.s. d7rA.is).t 

dirXoos, V.S. dTrXovs. 

dirXoOs, -Tj, -ovv (contr. fr. -6o<i ; <^ d- cop., ttXoos), [in LXX : 
Pr 1125 *;] simple, single : in a moral sense {DCG, ii, 628 f.), 6^^aX/xos, 
Mt 622, Lk ii34_ (In 7r. of a marriage dowry, v. MM, s.v.).t 

SVN. : dSoXos, dxa/cos, oKcpatos (Tr., Syn., § Ivi ; Cremer, 107, 
639). 

dirXdis, adv. «d7rXoes), [in LXX: Pr 10^ (QPS), Wi 1627, 

II Mac 6" * ;] simply, sincerely, graciously : Ja 1*. (" Later writers 
comprehend under the one word the whole magnanimous and honour- 
able type of character in which . . . singleness of mind is the central 
feature " — Hort, Ja., l.c.)t 

diro (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, 



48 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

WH, App., 146), prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to Ik, 
Tj-apa, vTTo, ib. 456 f.), [in LXX for ]p , 3 , b ;] from (i.e. from the ex- 
terior). 1. Of separation and cessation; (1) of motion from a place: 
Mt 52»' 30 723^ Lk 52 22'i\ al. ; (2) in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 
245; MM, s.v.; Bl., §40, 2), Mt Qi" 2721, Jo 21i«, Ac 52, al.; also 
after verbs of eating, etc. ; (3) of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after 
such verbs as Xoi'w (Deiss., BS, 227), Xi'w, o-w^w, Trau'w, etc. ; avdO^ixa d., 

Ro 93 ; aTrodvrj(TKHV a., Col 22^; craAev^^vai, II Th 22, Ka6ap6<i, -i^eiv, d. 

(Deiss., BS, 196, 216), Ac 202", 11 Co 7\ He 91*; (4) of position, 
Mt 23^* 24^^ al. ; after yaa/cpdv, Mt 8^** ; transposed before measures of 
distance, Jo lO^^ 21^, Ee I420 (Abbott, JG, 227) ; (5) of time, d7r6 t. 
(Spas, ^/Acpas, etc., Mt 922, Jo 1927, Ac 20^^, Phi 1^, al. ; dn alSyvo^, 
Lk 17«, al. ; dw dpx^?, etc., Mt 19^ Eo 12"; dTro ^pe^ovs, 11 Ti S^^; d</>' 
^s, since, Lk 7*^ al. ; dTro r. vw, Lk 1*^ al. ; dTro toVc, Mt 4^^ al. ; dTro 
nripvai, a year ago, 11 Co 8^" §2 ; dTro Trpwt, Ac 282^ ; (6) of order or 
rank, dTro SieroOs, Mt 2^^ ; aTro 'A/Spadp., Mt 1^'^ ; €(38opo<; diro 'ASd/x, 
Ju 1"* ; dTTo fiLKpov ecus /xeydAov, Ac 8^", He 8^^ ; dpxio-Oai dm, Mt 20**, 
Jo 8^, Ac 8^^, al. 2. Of origin ; (1) of birth, extraction, and hence, 
in late writers, (a) of local extraction (cl. i$; Abbott, JG, 227 ff.), 
Mt 2111, Mk 15*3, Jo 145^ Ac 103«, al. ; ol dn6 'IraXias (WM, § 66, 6 ; M, 
Pr., 237 ; Westc, Eendall, in 1.), He 1324 . (5) of membership in a 
community'or society (BL, §40, 2), Ac 12^, al. ; (c) of material (= cl. 
gen.; Bl. I.e.; M, Pr., 102), Mt 3* 2721 ; (d) after verbs of asking, 
seeking, etc., Lk ll^o. ^\ i Th 2" (Milligan, in 1.) ; (2) of the cause, 
instrument, means or occasion (freq. = iitto, Trapd, and after verbs of 
learning, hearing, knowing, etc.; Bl., §40, 3), Mt 71" 112^, Lk 22*^ 
Ac 222 430 913 1214, I Co 1123, Ga 32, al.; dTro t. oxXov, Lk 19^ (cf. 
Jo 216, Ac 2211); ^^v ^_ ^^^^v, Mt 1426, al. (cf. Mt 102^ 13*4). 

3. Noteworthy Hellenistic phrases : (fiofSuaOai d-n-o (M, Pr., 102, 107) ; 
7rpoo-€X€iv dTTo (M, Pr., 11. c. ; Milligan, NTD, 50) ; dTro voVoi; (Heb. 

ngga), Ee 2113 ; dTr.^ Trpoo-WTrov (■«35P), II Th 19 (Bl., §40, 9); dTro T. 

Kap8iCyv (nba), Mt 1835; dTr^ 6 oSv (WM, § 10, 2; M, Pr., 9), Ee 1*. 

4. In composition, dTro denotes separation, departure, origin, etc. 
(dn-oAuw, direpxop.ai, divoypd^iui) ; it also has a perfective force (M, Pr., 

112, 247), as in dcjuKveLaSaL, dTToXoveaOat, q.V. 

diro-paicw, [in LXX for iTH , etc. ;] to step off, disembark : Lk 5^, 
Jo 21^ ; metaph., of events, to issue, turn out (Field, Notes, 74) : Lk 21i3, 
Phi 119 (MM, s.v.).t 

d-n-o-PdXXw, [in LXX : Is l^" (bn:) and elsew. without Heb. 
equiv. ;] to throiv off: Mk lO^^j metaph., to lose, let go (Field, Notes, 
231 f. ; MM, s.v.) : He 1035.t 

diro-pX^iro), [in LXX for n3B , etc. ;] to look atvay from all else at 
one object; hence, to look steadfastly : He 112^ (cf. d<^opdw).t 

** diro-pXriTos, -ov « dTro/?dXXw), [in Aq. : Le 7l^ al.; Sm. : Ho 9^ 
(xaiD) ;] to be throivn atvay, rejected : i Ti 4* (Hom., Plut.).t 

* diro-poXri, -rj^, rj (<^ dTro/3dXXw) ; 1. a throwing away, rejection: 
opp. to irpocrXrj/juj/ii, Eo lli^. 2. a losing, loss : Ac 2722.t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 49 

** dTro-yii'Ofiai (cl. -ytyv-) [in LXX : Da th 2^ * ;] 1. to be away, 
removed from. 2. to depart life, to die (MM, s.v.) : t. d/xaprtais, i.e. 
with ref. to sins, i Pe 2^* (Cremer, 149, 668).+ 

a.-no-ypa.^r\, -^s, rj (d7roypa<^(o), [in LXX : Da LXX 10^^ (SDj), 

I Es 830, AB, II Mac 2\ iii Mac 2^2 41^, i7 722 * .j i_ ^ written copy. 
2. As law term, a deposition (Demos.). 3. In late writers, a register, 
enrolment, census (MM, s.v. ; Deiss., LAE, 160, 268 f.) : Lk 2^, Ac b'^'.f 
dTTo-Ypci<|)w, [in LXX : Jg 8l^ Pr 222" (nns) , i Es m, iii Mac 229 
414 Q34, 38*.j \ iq iDrit^ out, copy. 2. to enrol; mid., to enrol oneself: 
Lk 21 (M, Pr., 162 ; but. v. ICG, in 1.), ib. ^' ^ ; pass., He 12^3 (v. refif., 
s.v. d.Troypa(f)i]).f 

diro-SeiKi'u/ii, [in LXX : Es 2^ (HXl), al. ;] 1. to bring out, show 
forth, exhibit (Lit., Notes, 200; ICG, in 1.): i Co 4^. 2. to declare, 
show : Ac 2^2. 3. to prove : Ac 25^. 4. As freq. in late Gk., to 
proclaim to an office : seq. on, 11 Th 2* (Milligan, in 1. ; MM, s.v. ; 
Lft., Notes. 113.)+ 

** dTr6-8ei|is, -ecDS, rj (<^ aTroSiLKyvfii), [in LXX : III Mac 42", IV Mac 
319^ 1310*;] 1. a showing off. 2. As used by Gk. philosophers, 
demonstration, certain proof: i Co 2* (v. ICG, in 1.; MM, s.v.; Lft., 
Notes, 173).+ 

*+ diro-ScKaTcuo) = aTroSc/caTo'to, q.v., to tithe, pay a tenth of: Lk 18^^ f 

+ diro-ScKaTow, [in LXX for *li2?y, in both senses foil., e.g. (1) 

Ge 2822 (2) I Ki 81^;] l. c. ace. rei, to tithe, pay a tenth of: Mt 2323, 

Lk 11*2. 2. C. ace. pers., to exact tithes from : He 7^. 3. to decimate 

(Socr., HE, 573 A; v. Kennedy, Sources, 117).+ 

*+ diTo-ScKTos, -ov (•<] d7ro8e;i(o/Aai), acceptable: I Ti 23 5*.+ 

** dTTo-Se'xofAai, [in LXX : To 7^\ Jth 13^3, i-iv MaCjo*;] to accept 
gladly, welcome, receive : Lk 8**^ 9^^ Ac 182"" 21^" 283**; metaph., c. acc. 
rei, Ac 2*1 243 (mM, s.v. ; Cremer, 688).+ 

dTro-8T)|X€(o, -u) (■<[ d7ro8r;/i,o?), [in LXX : Ez 193 A*;] to be or go 
abroad (M, Pr., 130 2) : Mt 2133 25l^.l^ Mk 12^, Lk 15^3 20^.+ 

* dir6-8T)p,os, -ov, gone abroad (RV, sojourning in another country) : 
Mk 133*.+ 

dTro-8i8u|ii, [in LXX for IDIQ , mCT hi., ]n: , D^tT pi., etc. ;] to give 
up or bach, restore, return: Mt 27^^, Lk 420 9*2 xgs. ggp of wages, 
debts, oaths, etc. (MM, s.v.), to render what is due, to 'pay (Deiss., 
LAE, 334 f.) : absol., Mt 1825.28^ Lk 7*2; c. acc, Mt 52« 1829-30,34 2O8 
21*1 2221, Mk 12'", Lk 1035 1259 202^, Eo 13", He 12^, Ee 222; ^^^^^^^ 
Mt 533 (cf . Nu 303, De 232i al.) ; of conjugal duty, t. oc^ciXt^v, i Co 73 ; 
d/u.oiy8ds, I Ti 5* ; /jLaprvpLov, to give (as in duty bound) testimony, 
Ac 433 ; Xoyov, to render account, Mt 123«, Lk 162, Ac 19*o, He I31", 
I Pe 45 ; hence of requital, recompense, both in good and bad sense, 
Mt 6*- 6' 18 1627, Eo 26, II Ti 48-1*, Ee 18« 2212 ; KaKov avrX kukov, 
Eo 121^^, I Th 515, I Pe 3^. Mid., to give up of one's own, hence to sell 
(fr. Hdt. on) : c. acc. rei, Ac 5^, He 121^ ; c. acc. pers., Ac79 (cf. ovt- 
a7ro8tSa)/Ai).+ 

* diro-8i-opil^(i) (■<] Siopt^o), ■<[ opo?, a limit), to ma/rk off, hence 
metaph. to make separations : Ju i^ (Cremer, 806).+ 

4 



50 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

AiTo-SoKifAclia), [in LXX: Ps 117 (118)'''^ al. (DXa) ;] to reject: 
Mt 21^-(i-^H Mk 8^1 1210 (Lxx)^ Lk 9^^ 1725 20^7 (Lxx)^ He 12^^ 

I Pe 2*' 7 (LXX) (Cremer, 701 ; MM, s.v.).+ 

*diTo-8oxT), -r/s, 17 (<^ d7roS€xo/.(at), acceptance, approbation (Field, 
Notes, 203) : i Ti 1^^ 4» (Cremer, 686; MM, s.v.).t 

* dir6-0eais, -ew5, 17 (<^ d7roTi^?//At), a putting away: i Pe 3^^, 

II Pe li*.t 

diro-eiiKT], -7]^, ri « aTTOTiO-qixi), [in LXX for ly'iK , N3S) , etc. ;] a 

storehouse, granary: Mt 3^2 B^e IS^o, Lk S^' 12i«'24.t 

**t d-n-o-Grjo-aopi^w, [in LXX : Si 3* * ;] to treasure up, store away : 
I Ti 6i^t 

dTTo-eXipo,, [in LXX for yrh , Nu 22^5 * ;] to press hard : Lu 8«.t 

6.TTo-Qvr]<TK<,), [in LXX chiefly for TVID ',] to die : of natural death, 
Mk 5^^, al. ; of violent death (pass, of dTroKTetvw), esp. of Christ, Mt 26^*, 
Jo 12^^ He 10'-^«, al. ; of spiritual death, Jo 6^0, Eo 8^3, al. ; c. dat. 
ref., Ko 62' 10 U''», Ga 2^9; ace, 6, Ko 610; seq. iy, Mt 8^2, Jo S'-^L ^\ 
I Co 15-2, He 1137, Ee U^^; seq. ^Wp, Trepi', Jo ll^o- " 18l^ Eo S^-s 
1415, I Co 153, II Co 515, I Th 5i«, 1 Pe 318 ; dTrd, Col 220 ; cV, Ee 8" ; 
fig., I Co 1531 (cf. (Tvu-aTToevrjcrKio, and V. Milligan, NTD, 258 f. ; DCG, 
i, 791b; Cremer, 286; MM, s.v. ; on the perfective force of this verb, 
M, Pr., 112, 114 ; and on the distinction bet. pres. and aor,, ib. 113 f.). 

dTTO-KaG-ioTdcu, aTTOKaOia-rdo}, see next MTOrd. 

dTro-KaO-iCTTTjfii (aTTOKa^to-Taw, Mk 9^^^ Eec, -lo-rdvo), LTTr. ; cf. Ac 
1**; -KUTLcrTdvw, WH), [in LXX chiefly for miZT;] 1. to restore, i.e. to a 
former condition : of health, Mt 121^, Mk 3^ 82^, Lk B^o ; of social or 
jjolitical affairs, Mt 17^^, Mk 9^2, Ac 1^. 2. to give back, bring back : 
He 1319 (so in rr., MM, s.v.; cf. also Cremer, 312).t 

d-iro-KaXuTTTw, [in LXX chiefly for 11^3;] 1. in general sense (cl.), 
to reveal, uncover, disclose, (a) of things : Mt 102^, Lk 2^^ 12^, i Co 
313 ; (b) of persons : pass., Christ, Lk 173o ; Antichrist, 11 Th 23. «. 8. 
2. In LXX and NT, in special sense of divine revelation : Mt 112* (on 
the tense, v. M, Pr., 136), ib.27 16i7, Lk 1021.22^ Jq 1238_ Ro P^. is^ 8'^, 

I Co 21" 143", Ga 116 32^ Eph 3^ Phi 3l^ i Pe l^- 12 51 (Westc, Eph., 
178 f.; M, Th., 149 f.).t 

SVN.: (ftavepou) (v. Thayer, 62; Cremer, 342). 
t diro-KdXuiJ/is, -ecos, ^ « dTroKaXuVTw) , [in LXX: I Ki 2030 (miy). 

Si 1127 2222 421 * .j (-^^ imcovering, laying bare (Plut.). Metaph., a reveal- 
ing, revelation : a disclosure of divine truth, or a manifestion from God : 
Lk 232, p,o 2^, 819 1625, I Co V 146' 2«, n Co 12i' \ Ga I12. 22, Eph li7 3^, 

II Th r, I Pe 17. 13 413, Eeli.t 

STN. : iTTicfxiveia, Tvanova-La, (f)av€p(D<TL<; (v. Tr., Syn., xciv ; Lft., 

Notes, 102, 178 ; Westc, Eph., 178 f. ; M, Th., 145 ff. ; Cremer, 343). 
*t dTTO-KapaSoKi'a, -a?, -q (<[ aTro/capaSo/cew, used by Aq. in Ps 36 (37)" for 
bbinnn ; <^a7r6, Kdpa, the head, SoKew, in Ion., to watch), to tvatch with 
outstretched head, tvatch anxiously (Polyb., n. ; v. Deiss., LAE, 3745, 
377 f.), Eo 819, Phi 120 (Lft., in 1.; Cremer, 177).t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 51 

*t airo-Kar-aXXdo-au (cf . AcaraAAao-o-o) : aTro here signifies completely, 
V. Lft., Col., I.e. ; Ellic, Eph., I.e. ; but also May., Eph., I.e.), to reconcile 
completely : Eph 2i«, Col P^' ^^.t 

* diro-icaT(£-(rra<ns, -fcus, v (<^ aTroKadia-T-qfii), restoration : Ac 3^^ (in 
TT. of repairs and restorations of temples, v. MM, s.v.).t 
diro-KaT-iordi'a), v. aTroKaOicrTrjfiL. 
dTr(5-Kei|ioi, [in LXX : Ge IQ^o (nb''B7), Jb 3823 (^j^n), n Mac 12«, 

IV Mae 8^^ * ;] to be laid up, in store, laid away : Lk IQ^". Metaph., c. 
dat. pers., to be reserved (Dem., Plat. ; and v. MM, s.v.) : Col 1^, n Ti 
48, He 927.t 

t d7ro-K€<|)aXi^w (<; diro, xec^aXT^), [in LXX : Ps 151^ * ',] to behead : 
Mt 1410, MkeiS'^s, Lk99.t 

diro-KXeiu, [in LXX chiefly for -13D;] to shut fast: Lk IS^^.t 
d-iro-K^TTTu, [in LXX for y^p , ms , etc. ;] to cut off: Mk 9*^' *^ Jo 
]^3io, 26^ Ac 11^^. Mid., to mutilate oneself, have oneself mutilated : Ga 
512 (cf. De 231 LXX ; and v. Cremer, 751 ; MM, s.v.).t 

*t diro-Kpifia, -To^, to (■<[ aTro/cptVco) ; 1. prop., a judicial sentence: 
II Co 1^, E, mg. 2. an answer (v. Thayer, s.v.) : 11 Co, I.e., E, txt. (In 
FIJ, Ant., xiv, 10, 6, of a rescript of the Senate ; in Inscr. of an official 
decision, Deiss., BS, 257 ; a reply to a deputation, MM, s.v. : ef . also 
Cremer, 375). t 

diro-Kpii'u, [in LXX chiefly for njJT;] in el., 1. to separate, dis- 
tinguish. 2. to choose. Mid., to answer : Mt 27^2, Mk 14«\ Lk 3i« 23^, 
Jo 51"' 1**, Ac 312. In late Gk. the pass, also is used in this sense, and 
pass, forms are the more freq. in NT (M, Pr., 39, 161 ; MM, s.v.) ; (a) 
in general sense : absol., Mk 12^* ; c. ace. rei, Mt 22*® ; c. dat. pers., 
Mt 12^8 ; seq. Trpos, Ac 251" ; (b) Hebraistically (i) like nay , to begin 
to speak, take up the conversation (Kennedy, Sources, 124 f.) : Mt 112^^ 
al., (ii) redundant, as in the Heb. phrase IDX'l JJPI (Dalman, Words, 

24 f., 38 ; M, Pr., 14 ; Bl., § 58, 4 ; 74, 2 ; Cremer, 374) : dTroKpieiis 
cTttc, Mt 4* ; €>77, 88 ; Xc'yti, Mk 3^3 ; in Jo most freq. (Ittck. k. cTttc, 1*». 

dir<5-Kpioris, -ecDs, r] (<^ aTro/cptVo/Aat), [in LXX for HST , etc.;] an 
answering, an answer : Lk 2*''' 20-'®, Jo I22 19^.t 

diro-KpoTTTu, [in LXX chiefly for ^JiD ;] to hide, conceal, keep secret : 
c. ace., Lk IO21; pass., i Co 2^, Eph 2>\ Col F® (MM, s.v.).t 

dir6Kpu<|)os, -ov (<^ dTTOKpwTTTO)), [lu LXX chlefly for IfID;] hidden: 

Mk 422, Lk 817, Col 23 (v. Lft., in 1. ; MM, 8.v.).t 

dTro-KT€ii'w (also in late forms -Kreww, Mt 1028, al., LTTr., -ktcvvvw, 
Mk 125, WH), [in LXX for ain , ma ;] to kill : Mt 14^, al. ; seq. instr. 
iv (q.v.), Eph 216, Ee 223, ^1. Metaph.: Eo 711 ; t. Ix^pav, Eph 2i«; 
TO ypdfifjLa aTTOKTuvcL, II Co 3® (on the perfective force of this verb, v. 
M, Pr., 114). 

** airo-Kuiut (Eec. -kvw), -w (<[ aTro, Kveo) OV kvw, to be pregnant), [in 
LXX : IV Mae I5I'' * ;] prop., " the medical word for birth as the close 
of pregnancy" (Hort, Ja., 26 f.). In kolvtj, "an ordinary syn. of 
TiKTw, but definitely ' perfectivised ' (M, Pr., lllff. ; MM, s.v.) by the 



52 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

oLTTo, and so implying safe delivery," to bring forth, give birth to : Ja 

115, 18 t 

tdiro-KoXio) (v.s. KvXcw), [in LXX : Ge293.8.io (bbs;, Jth 13^*;] to 
roll away : Mt 28^, Mk IG^, Lk 242.t 

divo-Xafjipd^w, [in LXX : Nu U^^ (npb (De, 26^ A, Is b^\ ii Mac 4^« 
6^^ 8', IV Mac 18'^*;] 1. to receive from another; absol,, to receive 
as one's due : Lk 162^ IS^o (v.l. XdjSrj) 2S^\ Eo P^, Ga 4^ Col 3^^ 

II Jo^. 2. to receive back : Lk G^'* 15'^''. 3. to take apart or aside : 
Mk 7^^ (cf. use in tt. of the recluses of the Serapeum ; MM, 8.v.).t 

** d-n-oXauo-is, -€ws, r} (<^ aTroXavo), to take of, enjoy a thing), [in LXX : 

III Mac 7^^ * ;] enjoyment : i Ti 6^^ He ll^^ (for late exx., v. MM, s.v.).t 

airo-XeiTTw, [in LXX for bin , ID"^ , etc. ;] 1. to leave, leave behind 
(in TT. a term, techn. in wills; v. MM, s.v.) : ii Ti 4^^'-*', Tit 1*; pass., 
to be reserved, remain : He 4^' ^ lO^". 2. to desert, abandon : Ju *.t 
t diro-Xeixw (for cViX-, q.v.), to lick up : Lk 16^^, Eec.t 

dTT-6XXu|jit and airoXXvw, [in LXX for laX , etc. (38 words in all)]. 
1. Act., (1) to destroy utterly, destroy, kill : Mk 1"* 9^^, al. ; t. ^l/vxyjv, 
Mt 1028, al. ; (2) to lose utterly: Mt 10''2, al.; metaph., of failing to 
save, Jo 6^9 18». 2. Mid., (1) to perish; (a) of things : Mt 529, Jq 612, 
He 111 (LXX)^ al. ; (b) of persons : Mt 82^, al. Metaph., of loss of eternal 
life, Jo 315. 16, 1028 1712, Eo 212, I Co 8^ 15^^ 11 Pe 39. In ol d-n-oXXv- 
^tvoi, the perishing, contrasted in i Co 1^8^ al., with 01 o-w^o/xcvot, the 
"perfective" force of the verb, wh. "implies the completion of the 
process of destruction," is illustrated (v. M, Pr., 114 f. ; M, Th., ii, 1^^) ; 
(2) to be lost : Lk 15* 21^8. Metaph., on the basis of the relation 
between shepherd and flock, of spiritual destitution and alienation 
from God : Mt 10" 152", Lk 19i» (MM, s.v. ; DCG, i, 191 f., ii, 76, 554 ; 
Cremer, 451). 

'AttoXXuui', -ovtos, 6 (pres. ptcp. of aTroXXvw), Apollyon, i.e. the 
Destroyer : Ee 9^^ (cf. 'Af3dS8u>v). (Cremer, 453 ; DB, i, 125, 172.) t 

'AiroXXwk'ia, -as, 17, Ajwilonia, a city of Macedonia : Ac 17i.t 

'AttoXXoSs, -w, 6 (perh. contr. from 'AttoAXwj/ios, Ac 182* j)^^ 
Apollos : Ac 18'-'4 19^, 1 Co 1^2 34-«.22 4^ I612, Tit 3i3.+ 

diroXoycofjiai, -ovfJLaL (<[ oltto, Xoyos), [in LXX : Je 12^ (S""!) 38 (31)", 
II Mac 1326*;] 1. to defend: c. ace, Eo 2^^ 2. to defend one's self: 
absol., Lk 21i*, Ac 26^ ; seq. on, Ac 258 . ^;_ tg adduce something in 
one's defence, Lk 12^^, Ac 262* (ravra) 24^^ {to. irepl i/xavTov) ; irfpi, 
c. gen. rei, and cVt, c. gen. pers., Ac 262 • g ^at. pers., Ac 19^^, 
II Co 12i9.t 

** diroXoyia, -as, rj (•< aTroXoyiofjiai), [in LXX : Wi 6^'* * ',] a speech in 
defence : Ac 25l^ 11 Co 7^1, Phi 1". i«, 11 Ti 4^6 ; c. dat. pers., i Co 93, 
I Pe 315 ; seq. Trpo's, Ac 22i.t 

diTo-Xouw, in [LXX : Jb 9^'' (^m) * ;] to tuash off, wash away ; 
mid., metaph., c. ace. rei, to loash off oneself: d/xapnas, Ac 221"; 
absol., aTreXowcrao-^e, ye washed yourselves clean (cf. Cremer, 406), 
I Co 6ii.t 

t diro-XvTpwCTis, -ews, 17 (<C d.TroXvTp6w, to release on payment of 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 53 

ransom, cf. Xvrpov), [in LXX : Da (LXX) 4^*'*= * ;] release effected by pay- 
ment of ransom, redemption, deliverance; metaph., He 11^*; of 
deliverance thr. Christ from evil and the consequences of sin : Lk 
2128, Ro 324 (Yau., in 1.) 8^\ i Co V\ Eph l^.i* 430^ Col l^^, He 9^\ 
(On the extent to w^h. the word retains the sense of ransom, v. ICC, 
Bo., 32*, Westc, He., 297 ff.; v. also ICC, Eph., 11; DCG, ii, 605; 
Cremer, 410; Deiss., LAE, 331; Lft., Notes, 271, 316; Tr., Syn., 
§ lxxvii,)t 

a-TTo-Xu'w, [in LXX for yim , etc., freq. in i-iv Mac;] 1. to set free, 
release: Lk 13^2, Jo 19^0, al. ; a debtor, Mt 182^; metaph., of forgive- 
ness, Lk 6=^7, 2. to let go, dismiss (Field, Notes, 9 f.) : Mt 1523, Lk 229 
912, Ac 19*1, al.; of divorce, t. ywaiKa: Mt l^^ 531.32 193,8,9^ Mk 
lQ2,i,n^ Lk 16^8; with ref. to Gk. and Eom. (not Jev^ish) custom, 
T. avSpa: Mk 1012. Mid., to depart: Ac 282^ (MM, s.v.). 

** dTro-fid<r<7w {<^ fxd(r(rw, Att. -ttw, to toucJi, handle), [in LXX: 
To 7^^*;] to wi])e off, wipe clea7i : mid., Lk lO^.t 

iivo-viiio} (-< ve/xo), to distribute), [in LXX : De 4^^ (pbu), m Mac 
27 316 * .j fQ assign, aj)portion : 1 Pe 3^. (In tt. of a Prefect who renders 
to all their dues ; v. MM, s.v.)t 

diro-i/iirTw, [in LXX for niDtZT , Tm , nriD ;] to wash off: mid. 
(reflex.), t. xe^pas, Mt 272^t 

dTro-mTTTu, [in LXX for b^Q , bs3 , etc.;] to fall off: Ac 9i8.t 

diro-irXafdo), -w, [in LXX for m3 hi., ,1123 hi., miz; pil. ;] to cause to 
go astray ; metaph., of leading into error: Mk 1322; pass., to be led 
astray : i Ti e^o.t 

*dTro-Tr\e'a>, -w, to sail away: Ac 134 142(5 201^ 27^ (Burton, 159).t 

diro-irXucoj, [in LXX chiefly for DS3 pi. ;] to wash off: v.l. for 
ttXvvw, Lk 52, Eec.t 

dTTo-wiYo,, [in LXX : Na 2^2 (i3) (pjn pi.), To 38*;] to choke : Mt 
13''', Lk 8''; pass., of drowning (= KaTa-rrovrL^o/xaL) , Lk 833.t 

oirope'w, -5) {<^ a.iropo<;, a- neg., ir6po<i, a way, resource), [in LXX 
for "lis, ^na, etc.;] to be at a loss, be perplexed: absol., Mk 62" 
{i-TToiei, E, mg.) ; mid., be in doubt : absol., 11 Co 4^; c. ace, Ac 252**; 
seq. Trept, Lk 24^ ; iv, Ga 420 ; Trepl tu os Ae'yei, Jo 1322.t 

SVN. : StaTTopeu}, SiaKpLVo/xaL, Sto-Ta^w, /tiCTcwpi^o/tai (v. DCG, i, 491). 

diropia, -as, ■^ {-^ airopcui), [in LXX for nbn|l , etc. ;] perplexity : 
Lk 2125 (MM, s.v. ; on the construction, v. Field, Notes, 74f.).t 

diro-piTTTa) (Eec. -ppC-wTiD, cl.), [in LXX for IJ^OT hi., etc. ;] to throw 
away, cast forth : reflexively, Ac 27*3 (EV, cast themselves overboard ; 
V. MM, s.v.).t 

* dir-op4>ai'ii^w (■<[ airo, 6p<^avos), to be bereaved (prop,, of a parent, 
Lft., Notes, 36) ; metaph., i Th 21'' (where Field thinks it = vwpio-- 
^eWcs, Notes, 199).t 

diro-o-Keod^cj, [in LXX : Le 143^ (n32 pi.) * ;] to pack and carry off ; 
mid., to pack and remove one's goods : Ac 2P^, Eec. (v. €Vio--).t 

*t diro-orKiao-fia, -tos, to (<^ airoaKid^w, to cast a shadow ; V.S. ctkio), 
a shadow : Ja 1^^ (MM, s.v.l.t 



54 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

diro-oTrdo), -w, [in LXX for pr\2 ni., hi., etc. ;] to draw off or away, 
tear away (MM, s.v.) : Ac 20^" ; ixaxaipav, draw a sword, Mt 26*^ ; 
pass., to be parted or withdraxvn (Field, Notes, 134; but v. Thayer, 
S.V.), Lk 22^', Ac 21i.t 

t dTToarao-ia, -as, v/ (-<[ a<fii(rTr]fj.i), [in LXX for blT© , etc. ;] defection, 

apostasy, revolt ; in late Gk. (MM, Exp., viii ; Lft., Notes, 111 ; Cremer, 
308) for cl. dTTo'crracris, freq. in sense of political revolt, in LXX (e.g. 
Jos 22^2^ II Ch 29^9, Je 21^) and NT always of religious apostasy : 
Ac 21-1, ij Tj^ 2\f 

dTrotrrdaioK, -ov, to « icf>t(TTr),j.i), [in LXX : De 24i' ^, Je 38, Is 501 
(nri'^n? , mrr'^S) *;] l. in cl., only in phrase dTroo-Tao-tou BUrj, an action 

against a freedman for forsaking his Trpoo-TaTT^s (Dem.). 2. In LXX, 
jSi^Xiop oLTToaTaaLov, a bill of divorce : Mt 19", Mk 10* ; in same sense 
d. alone (MM, s.v.), Mt 5»i (for other late exx., v. MM, I.e. ; Kennedy, 
Sources, 121). t 

** airo-(neydloj « o-rey^;), [in Sm. : Je 4910 (2911)*;] f^ unroof: 
Mk 2\f 

dTTo-o-TcXXo), [in LXX very freq., almost always for nblSr ;] prop., 
to send away, to dispatch on service ; 1. to send with a commission, or 
on service ; (a) of persons : Christ, Mt 10*" ; the apostles, IQi" ; 
servants, Mk 12^; angels, 13'-^; {b) of things: o^o?, Mt 21^; to 8pe- 
iravov, Mk 4^^ ; T. Xo'yov, Ac 10^^ ; t. cVayyeAtav (i.e. the promised Holy 
Spirit), Lk 24*9, Rec. ; seq. ds, Mt 20^, Lk 11*^, Jo 31^ ; ^ttio-o), Lk I91* ; 
tfiTTpoaOev, Jo 3'"^; TTpo TTpoaMTTov, Mt 111*^; TTpos, Mt 21^*; with ref. to 
sender or place of departure : dTrd, Lk 1^^ (Eec. vTr6) ; Trapd, Jo 1* ; 
€K, ib. 119 ; ivro, Ac 1017 (Eec. dTrd) ; seq. inf., Mk 31*, al. ; Iva, Mk 12^, 
al. ; eh (of purpose), He li*; without direct obj. : seq. tt/do's, Jo 5^^; 
Xc'ywv, Jo 113 . .iTToo-retAas, c. indic, Mt 21^ Ac 7^\ Ee 11. 2. to send 
aivay, dismiss : Lk 41^, Mk 51** 8'^^ 12^ (cf. i$-, crvv-aTroa-TiXXu)). 

SVN.: Tre'/ATTw, the general term. d. " suggests official or authori- 
tative sending" (v. Thayer, s.v. Tre/xTrw ; Westc, Jo., 298; Ejyp. Jo., 
125 ; Cremer, 529 ; MM, s.v.). 

dTro-arcpe'w, -w « a-Tepew, to rob), [in LXX : Ex 211" (y-|a). De24i* 
(piry), Ma 3^ Si 41 29"' ' 31 (SAf^' '-^ *;] to defraud, dep-ive of, despoil 
(in cl. chiefly of the misappropriation of trust funds. Field, Notes, 33 ; 
cf. MM, s.v.) : absol., Mk lOi^, i Co G^ ; c. ace. pers., i Co 7^ Mid., 
endure deprivation : i Co 6" (WM, § 38, 3 ; but v. Bl., § 54, 5 ; M, Pr., 
162); pass., d-n-ea-Teprjfjievoi, bereft of: I Ti 6^.t 

d-rro-aToXi^, -^s, r] « dTroo-TcAAo)), [in LXX : De 22^, m Ki 4^* 9i«, 
Ps77(78)*9, Ec 88, Ca 4i3 (for nbc? and its cognates), i Es 951.5*, 
Je 39 (32)36, Ba 225, i Mac 21^, 11 Mac 3^ *.] 1. In cl., a sending away 
(MM, s.v.), as, an expedition (Hdt.). 2. In LXX (a) discJiarge, dis- 
missal (Ec 88) ; (b) a gift (iii Ki 91^, i Mac 2^^). 3. In NT, the office 
of an Apostle of Christ, apostleship : Ac 1^5, Eo 15, i Co 9'-, Ga 2* 
(Cremer, 530). t 

dirdo-ToXos, -ov, 6 (■< dTroo-TcXXw), [in LXX : III Ki 14^ A (jyhv) * ',] 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 55 

1. a fleet, an expedition (Dem.). 2. a messenger, one sent on a mission 
(Hdt., LXX, I.e., and tt. ; v. M, Pr., 37 f. ; MM, s.v. ; M, Th., i, T 
and refif.) : Jo IS^^, ii Co 823, phi 225. 3_ j^ nt^ ^^ Apostle of Christ 

(a) with special ref. to the Twelve : Mt 102, Mk 3l^ Lk 11*9, gph S^, 
Ee 182", al., equality with whom is claimed by St. Paul, Ga 1^' ^^^-j 

I Ti 2^^, al. ; (&) in a wider sense of prominent Christian teachers, as 
Barnabas, Ac 14^*, apparently also Silvanus and Timothy, i Th 2^, and 
perhips Andronicus and Junias (Junia?), Eo 16'' (v. ICG, in 1.); of 
false teachers, claiming apostleship : ii Co ll^'^^^ jje 22. (On the 
different uses of the term in NT, v. Lft., Gal., 92-101; Cremer, 530; 
DB, i, 126 ; DCG, i, 105 ; Enc. Br., ii, 196 ff.) 

* dTToaTOfjiaTt^w (•<; o-ro/xa), 1. In cl., to speak from memory, to dic- 
tate to a pupil (Plat.). 2. In late Gk., to catechize, question: Lk 11^^ 
(MM, s.v.).t 

a.Tto-(npi^fi), [in LXX chiefly for HtZT;] trans., c. ace, [a) to turn 
away, remove : Eo 112", j^ ipj 44 . metaph., to turn away from 
allegiance, pervert : Lk 23^* ; {h) to turn hack, return : fidxaipav, 
Mt 26^2. Pass., reflex., to turn oneself away from : c. ace, Mt 5*^^ 

II Ti 115, Tit 11*, He 1225 • go act., absol., Ac 32" (cf. Si 8^ ; Bl., § 53, 1 ; 
Cremer, 880). t 

* dTro-CTTuyew, -^ (<C a-rvyiw, to hate), to abhor : Eo 12^.+ 

*+ dTToaui/dYwyos, -ov {<Ci crvvayuiyrj) , expelled from the congregation 

(Field, Notes, 96), excommunicated : Jo 9^2 12*2 152 (Cremer, 64, 607).t 

dTTo-Tdaau, [in LXX : Ec 22o (^s'' pi.), i Es 62^, Je 202, i Mac 4 * ;] 

to set apart. Mid., in late Gk. (Bl., § 37, 1 ; Swete, Mk., 136 f. ; MM, 

8.V.), c. dat., (a) to take leave of: Mk 6*^ Lk 9^1, Ac 18^^'^\ 11 Co 2^3; 

(b) to forsake : Lk 1433. t 

**d-iro-T€Xe'w, -w, [in LXX : i Es-5"3, 11 Mac 1539*;] to bring to an 
end, complete, accomplish (cf. MM, s.v.) : Lk 1332, Ja l^^.t 

diro-Ti6if)fxi, in [LXX chiefly for niD hi. ;] to pu,t off or aside ; in NT 

always mid., {a) to put off from oneself as a garment : t. IfxaTia, Ac 7^^ ; 
metaph., in ethical sense, to ptit off, lay aside: Eo 13^2, Eph 422>25^ 
Col 3^, He 12\ Ja P^, i Pe 2^ ; (b) to stoiu away, put : cv t. <f>v\aKfj 
(MM, S.V.), Mt 143.t 

dTTo-Ttm<T(T(j, [in LXX : Jg 162« A (ly: ni.), i Ki IO2 (2^123), La 2^ 
("IN3 pi.) * ;] to slmke off: Lk 9^, Ac 285.t 

diro-TiVo) (or -Ti'w), [in LXX chiefly for D^tZT pi. ;] to pay off, repay : 
Phm 19 (MM, s.v.).t 

* d-iro-ToXfxdcj, -w, to be quite bold, make a bold venture : Eo 102". t 
**t diTOTOfiia, -a?, 17 (<^ d7roT€/xvco, to ciit off), [in Sm. : Je 51 (28)35, 

Na 31*;] steepness, sharpness ; metaph., severity (MM, s.v.): Eo 1122.t 
** dTTOTofiws, adv., [in LXX: Wi 522*;] abruptly, curtly, hence 

sharply, severely : 11 Co 13i", Ti li3 (MM, s.v.).+ 

** diro-Tp^Trw, [in LXX : Si 2029 48is, in Mac 123, ly ^ac l^^ I612 * ;] 

to turn away ; mid., to turn oneself a^cay from : c. ace, 11 Ti 3^.+ 

*diTou<ria, -as, 17 (<[ an-ct/Ai) ; 1. absence (-^sch., Thuc.) : Phi 2i2. 

2. deficiency, waste (MM, s.v).t 



56 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

d-iTo-(j>6pu, [in LXX for "^bn , etc. ;] to carry off, bear, or lead away : 
c. ace, Mk 151, I Co 163, Ee IT^ 2V<^. Pass., Lk I622, Ac Id^Ki 

** dTro-<j>£UYo>, [in LXX : Si 22^2 * -j to flee from, escape : c, ace, 11 Pe 
218,20. c. gen., II Pel*.t 

t dTro-<J)0£YYOfAai, [in LXX for Nn3 , etc.;] to speak forth, give 
utterance: Ac 24.14 26" (MM, s.v.).t 

*t diro-<|)opTL^o|jiai {<!^(f)opTi^w, to load), to discharge a cargo (Field, 
Notes, 134), to unlade : c. ace, t. yd/^ov, Ac 213.t 

*t dTTo-xpTjo-is, -eo)s, 7) {<^aTroxpa-ofxai, to usc to the full, abuse), abusc, 
misiise: Col 22^ (MM, s.v.).t 

dTro-x<op€'a>, -«, [in LXX : Je 26 (46) ^ {y[U), 11 Mac 433, „i Mac 233* ;] 
to go aroay, depart, withdraw : seq. airo, Mt 7"3, Lk 9^^, Ac 13^3 (absol., 
Lk 2020, Tr., mg.).t 

diTo-xwpi^w, [in LXX : Ez 432i (ij^sa)* ;] to separate, part asunder : 

pass., Ee 6^'^; reflexively, to separate oneself: Ac 15^^.t 

** dTro-»|/oxw, [in LXX : iv Mac 15^^*;] 1. to breathe out life, expire 
(Thuc. ; LXX, I.e.). 2. to leave off breathing, faint (Horn., Od., xxiv, 
348) : seq. dTrd, Lk 2126.t 

"Ainrios, -ov, 6, Appius ; 'Attttiov ^opov, Appii Forum (Market of 
Appius), a town in Italy : Ac 28i^.t 

*t d-irpoa-iTos, -ov (<[ Trpdcrei/Ai, to go to), imapproacliable : ^ws, i Ti 
6i«.t 

**+ dTrp(5(TKOTros, -ov (< Trpoo-KOTrro)), [in LXX : Si 35 (32)2i, iii Mac 
3^*;] 1. act., 7iot causing to stumble: metaph., of not leading others 
into sin, i Co 1032. 2. Pass., not stumbling, without offence, blameless : 
Ac 24i«, Phi 110 (for exx., v. MM, s.v.).t 

*t dirpoaa)TroXi](nrTa)S (Eec. -At/tttws, cl.), adv. (■<[«■- neg., Trpoa-ui- 
TroXr]piTTrrj<;), without respect of persons, impartially : i Pe V^^.i 

** d-irraioTos, -ov (-< Trratw), [in LXX: III Mac 6^^*;] without 
stumbling, sure-footed : metaph. (MM, s.v.), Ju24.t 

aiTTw, [in LXX chiefly for r33 ;] prop., to fasten to ; hence, of fire, 
to kindle, light : Lk S^^ 1133 15^, Ac 282. Mid., c. gen., to fasten oneself 
to, cling to, lay hold of (so in ir. ; MM, s.v.) : Mt 83- 1^ Jo 20^^ al. ; 
of carnal intercourse, i Co 7^ ; with reference to levitical and ceremonial 
prohibitions, 11 Co 6i^, Col 22^ ; of hostile action, i Jo 5^^ (cf. dv, KaO-, 

TV€pi- aiTTtai). 

Syn. : diyyavia, tj/rjXaffidoi. d. is the stronger, $., to touch, the 
lighter term. ij/. is to feel, as in search of something (Tr., Syn., § xvii; 
Lft., Col, 201 f.). 

'AiT^ia, -a?, ri, Apphia : Phm 2 (MM, s.v.).t 

dir-wGe'w, -w, [in LXX for n3T , DNQ , etc. ;] to thrust away. Mid., 
to thrust away from oneself, refuse, reject : c. ace. pers. (MM, s.v.), 
Ac 727.39 1346^ Ro 111.2, I Ti 11^+ 

dircSXcia, -as, 17 « aTroXXv/xi), [in LXX (Cremer, 797) for mK , T^i , 

etc. ;] destruction, waste, loss, perishing (in tt., of money, v. MM, s.v.) : 
Mt 268, Mk 144, Ac 820, ^ 922^ j Ti 6^, 11 Pe 2^ ; in special sense of 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 57 

the loss of eternal life, perdition, the antithesis of a-iOT-qpia: Mt 7^^, 
Jo 1712, Phi 128 319, II Th 23, He 1039, 11 Pe 2^ 3^. ^e, Ee 178' ^^ (DB, 
iii, 744).t 

'Ap, indecl., Ee 16^", v.s., 'ApfiayeSwv. 

apa, illative particle, expressing a more subjective or informal 
inference than ovv, then : prop, (as in cl.), the second word in the 
sentence, Eo 7^^ 8\ Ga 3^; iml dpa, 1 Co 7^* (with another word 
between) 5^^; as the first word, Lk 11*8, Ac ll^^, Eo lO^^, i Co 15^\ 
II Co 5^^ 7^^, He 49 ; so prop, in apodosis after protasis with el, Mt 1228^ 
Lk 1120, Ga 221 329 6^\ He 128 {k€v6v dpa), i Co 15^^ often in interro- 
gations, direct and indirect, t/s (ti) apa, Mt IS^ 1925.27 24*^ Mk 4", 
Lk 166 825 1242 2223, Ac 1218 ; d dpa, Mk 1113, Ac 822 . ^i^^p s.pa, I Co 
1515 ; ovK dpa, Ac 21^8 ; ^-qri dpa, II Co 1^'^ ; in strengthened forms, 
dpa ye, dpaye, Mt 720 1726, Ac 172^, and more freq. dpa ovv (Epp. Paul.), 
so then, Eo 5^8 72. 25 312 9i«' ^s 14^2. i9, Ga G^o, Eph 2^9, i Th 56, 11 Th 21* 
(Bl., § 77, 2 ; 78, 5 ; MM, s.v.).+ 

Spa, interrog. particle, implying anxiety or impatience, " quite 
rare and only in Luke and Paul, therefore a literary word" (Bl., § 77, 
2). 1. {num igitur) expecting a neg. reply, Lk 188; ^p^ y^^ ^.c 83*^. 
2. {ergone) in apodosis, expecting an affirm, reply, Ga 2^'^ (Bl., I.e. ; 
Lft., Ga., in 1. ; MM, 8.v.).t 

dpd, -Ss, rj, [in LXX chiefly for nbn] ; 1. a prayer (MM, s.v.). 2. 
(as in Homer) a curse, malediction : Eo 3^* (i-^xx) + 

'Apap^a, -as, 7^. Arabia : Ga l^^ 425.t 

dpa^cuc, V.S. dppa/3wv. 

apaye, V.S. apa. 

S,pdye, V.S. dpa. 

'Apdfi, indie. (Heb. Dn) , Aram: Mt l^.*, Lk S^' (E, txt., WH, 

*ApveC).f 

* apa<|)os, -ov (Eec. dppa<po<s, <^ pdiTTOi, to sew) without seam : 
Jo 1923.t 

"Apatl*, -aySos, o, an Arabian: Ac 2ii.t 

dpye'w, -Qy « d/Dyo's), [in LXX : II Es 42*, Ec 12^ (bian) , i Es 23o, 
Si 3036 (3327), II Mac 52^*;] to be idle; to Kpt>a . . . d., lingers (cf. 
MGr. dpyd, late : MM, s.v.) : 11 Pe 23.t 

dpyos, -ov (in late Gk., incl. NT, -7, -ov; <^d- neg., epyov), [in 
LXX: III Ki 67 (yoD?), Wi 14^ 15^5, Si S7^^ 3828*;] inactive, idle: 

Mt 203' 6, I Ti 513, Tit 1^2, n Pe is, Metaph., of things, inactive, in- 
effective, worthless : p^p.a, Mt 1236 ; Trto-rts, Ja 229 (v. Cremer, 259 f.).t 

Syn.: /3pa8v?, slow; vw^po?, sluggish (Tr., Syn., §civ). 

dpyupcos (v. MM, S.V.), -ov?, -a, -ovv (<^ dpyvpo?), [in LXX for 
jripS;] of silver: Ac 192* (WH, br.), 11 Ti 22o, Ee 92o.t 

dpyu'pioK, -ov, TO (<; dpyvpos), [in LXX for p]p3 (Ge 132, al.), exe. 

La 41 (D)n3) ;] prop., a piece of silver (Lft., Notes, 191) ; in NT, 

(a) silver: Ac S* 7^6 19^9 2033, i Co 3^2, i Pe l^S; (&) money: 



58 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Mt25i8'27^ Mk 1411, Lk 93 1915.23 225, Ac 820 ; (c) a silver coin: pi., 
Mt 2615 273. 5, 6. 9 2812. 15, where the value is that of a shekel or 
tetradrachm ; apyvpiov fivpidSes irevre (prob. drachmas; MM, s.v.), 
Ac 19i9.t 

t dpYopoK^TTos, -ov, 6 (■<[ apyvpo<;, kotttw, to heat), [in LXX : Jg 17*, 
Je 62» (f]li2)*;] a silversmith: Ac I92* (Plut.; tt., v. MM, s.v.).t 

apyupos, -ov, o « upyo9, shining), [in LXX for p|D3 ;] silver (on its 

relation to apy{,piov, v. MM, s.v.) : Mt 10^, Ac 1729, Ja 5^, Re 18i2.t 
"Apcios ndyos (T, "Apios 11.), -ov, 6, Hill of Ares or Mars, 

Areopagus; also, the Court of Areopa us, the highest tribunal of 

Athens: Ac 17i9.22.t 

'ApcoirayiTTjs (T, -etri/s), -ov, 6 (v. supr.), a judge of the Court of 

Areopagus : Ac 173*.t 

dpECTKia (Rec. -€ta), -as, r] (<^ apeaKa)), [in LXX (-eta) : Pr 31"*" 

(tTI) * ;] pleasing, desire to please : Col l^**. In Gk. writers (Arist., 

Polyb.), most freq. in bad sense, but in tt., Inscr., and in Philo, as 
above (v. Deiss., BS, 224 ; MM, s.v. ; Cremer, 642).t 

dp^CTKw, [in LXX chiefly for SiM ;] 1. to please (Horn., Hdt., al.) : 
c. dat. pers., Mt 14^, Mk 622, Rq 8^ 152, i tj^ ^'^ 4^, i Co 732.33,3*^ 

Gal 110, II Ti 2*; seq. evwTriov (= Heb. •'jrs, Bl., §37, 1; 40, 7), 

Ac 65. 2. In late Gk., esp. in Inscr., to render service to (v. M, TJi., 
ICC, I Co., 11. c; Cremer, 640 f.) ; Ro 15i'3, i Co lO^^, i Th 2\f 

dpeoTos, -t;, -ov « apeaKw), [in LXX for ICT , etc. ;] pleasing, 
agreeable (Hdt., Xen., and later writers ; v. Cremer, 641 f. ; MM, 
s.v.) : c. dat. pers., Jo 82^, Ac 12^ ; seq. iyw-n-iov, c. gen. (Bl., § 37, 1 ; 40, 
7), I Jo 322; ip^^rov icTTtv, c. acc. et inf (Bl, §69, 5; 72, 5), Ac 62.t 

'Ape'ras (WH, 'Ap. ; Intr., 313), -a, 6, Aretas, an Arabian king: 
II Co 1132 (Deiss., BS, 183 f., thinks the proper spelling 'Ap^das was 
changed, as Schiirer suggests, " by desire to Hellenise a barbaric 
name by assimilation to dp€TT;").t 

dpexT], -^s, r), [in LXX, in sing. : Hb 33, Za 6i3 ("tin) , in pi. : 
Is 42«'i2 4321 637 (n^nri), Es 14i«, Wi 41 5i3 8^, ii-iv Mac 22*;] prop., 

whatever procures pre-eminent estimation for a person or thing, in 
Hom. any kind of conspicuous advantage. Later confined by philos. 
writers to intrinsic eminence — moral goodness, virtue ; (a) of God : 
II Pe 13 ; ih) of men : Phi 4^, 11 Pe 15 ; pi. (Is, Es, 11. c), excellencies : 
I Pe 2^ (the usage appears to be a survival of an early comprehensive 
sense in which the original idea is blended with the impression which 
it makes on others, i.e. praise, renown ; v. Hort, / Pe., 129. Deiss., 
BS, 95 f., thinks it means manifestations of divine power, as in 
current Gk. speech ; cf . also MM, s.v.)t 

dpi^f, dpvos, 6 (nom. not in use, exc. in early times : v. MM, 
s.v.), [in LXX for xnp , 12^33 , etc. ;] a lamb : Lk 103.t 

dpiOfAe'w, -w, [in LXX for IDD pi., IpD pi., etc.;] to number 
(esp. for payment, MM, s.v.) : Mt 103o, Lk 12^, Re 7Kf 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 59 

dpiO|ui()$, -or, o, [in LXX chiefly for 1B5P ;] number, a number : 

Lk 223, Jo 610, Ac 4^ 5^6 6' ll^i IB^, Eo 92", Ee b^^ 7* 9i« IS^^-is 152 
20^ (for exx. of mystical use in tt., v. MM, s.v.).t 

'ApifiaSeia (WH, 'Ap.), -as, rf, [in LXX : 'Apfj.a$difi, I Ki 1^, al. 
(D-jnp-l) ;] Arimathcsa : Mt 27", Mk 15«, Lk 2S^\ Jo IQ^s.t 

"Apios, V.S. "Apcios. 

'Api'crrapxos, -ov, 6 (<^ apioTos, apxo*" J i-®* best-ruling) , Aristarchus : 
Ac 1929 20* 272, Col 410, Phm 2*.+ 

dpi<rr<£a), -w « ^pio-rov), [in LXX : Ge 4325 (Qo^ b^s), I Ki I42* 

(anb), III Ki 137 (lyo). To 21*;] 1. prop., to breakfast: Jo21i2.i5. 
2. In late Gk., to take a meal, dine : Lk ll^'^.t 

dpi(rrcp6s, -a, -oV, [in LXX for bxDij? ;] left, on the left : oirka, 

II Co 6^ ; ^ d. (sc. x"p), Mt 6^ ; ii dpto-repwv, on ^/le left (MM, s.v.) : 
Mk 1037, Lk 2333.t 

'ApioT^PouXos, -ov, 6 (<^ apLo-Tos, ^ovXrj, i.e. best-counselling), 
Aristobulus, a Christian : Ko 161". t 

apiCTTOK, -ou, TO, [in LXX : in Ki 31 (DH^), To 2i' *, al. ;] 1. prop., 

breakfast. 2. In late Gk. = cl. SerTrvov, dinner : Mt 22*, Lk ll^s 14i2.t 
**t dpKCTiSs, -rj, -ov « dp»<eo>), [in Aq. : De 252 * ;] sufficient : Mt G^* 
(on the neut., v. BL, § 31, 2) ; seq. tva (M, Pr., 210), Mt 10-^ c. inf., 
I Pe 43 (for exx., v. Deiss., BS, 257; MM, 8.v.).t 

dpKc'w, -w, [in LXX for |in , etc. ;] 1. to keej) off ; c. dat., to assist. 
2. to suffice: c. dat. pers,, Jo 6'', 11 Co 12^; impers., Mt 25^, Jo 14^ 
(MM, 8.V.). Pass., to be satisfied : c. dat. rei, Lk 31*, i Ti 6^, He 13^ ; 
seq. €7rt, III Jo lo.t 

dpKos (Eec. (cl.) apKTos), [in LXX for ni ;] -ov, 6, rj, a bear : Ee I32. 
(This form is also found in late Inscr. ; MM, s.v.)+ 

apfia, -Tos, TO (<[ dpapib-KO), to join), [in LXX for SDT;] a chariot: 

Ac 828. 29, 38^ Re 99.t 

'App.aycSwi' (WH, "Ap MaycSwv ; Eec. 'Ap/xaycSSwv, prop. = in 
1130), cf. LXX, MaycSwi/, II Ch 3522, MaycSw, Jg 127; Har-Magedon 

(AV, Armageddon) : Ee 16i^ (v. Swete, in 1., but also Thayer, 8.v.).t 

dpfiol^w (-< dp/uo's), [in LXX for ]DX , etc. ;] 1. to fit, join. 2. of 
marriage, to betroth. Mid., (a) to join to oneself, marry, take to wife; 
(b) to give in marriage : 11 Co II2 (for this there is no direct parallel. 
But V. M, Pr., 160; MM, s.v.).t 

** dpp.6s, -ov, 6, [in LXX : Si 272, iv Mac 10^ *;] a joining, joint : 
He 4i2.t 

dpi/as, V.S. api^v. 

'Apvei (Eec. 'Apa/x), 6, indecl., Arnei: Lk 333. t 

dpi/€op.ai, -ovfjiat, depon., [in LXX : Ge ISi^ (ts^ns pi.), Wi 1227 1516 
17^0^ IV Mac 87 1015 * .j i i^ g^^^y^ g^y ^^^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^.^^-^ . absol., Mt 2670, 
Lk 8« ; seq. oTi, I Jo 222 ; c. inf., He 112*. 2. In late Gk. (MM, s.v.), 
c. ace. pers., to deny, refuse to acknowledge, disown : Ac 3^* 73* ; 



60 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

'Ir^croOr, Mt lO^^, n Ti 2^2, i Jo 222, Ju * ; iavrov, Lk 923, II T- 213 (^prove 
false to). 3. C. ace. rei (in cl. to refiise), to deny, abjure: i Ti 5^, 

Tit 212, II Ti 35 (cf 6.Trapvioti.ai). 

i.pv'\.ov, -ov, TO (dimin. of dpi/v ; v. MM, s.v.), [in LXX : Ps 113 
(114)4-6 (pi., ]Ny ^35), Je 1119 (12^55)^ 27 (50)^^ (Tjr^)*;] a little lamb, 

a lamb : Jo 21^^, Re 27.+ 

tdpoTpidco, -w «5poTpov), [in LXX: De 22io, al. (izrin), Is V^^ 
(lljr) ;] later form of ap6ui, to plough (MM, s.v.) : Lk 17^ i Co 9^0.+ 

apoTpoK, -ov, TO « dpoo), to plough), [in LXX chiefly for TIK;] a 

plough : Lk g^^.t 

dpirayq, -^5, r] (<^ ctpTra^w), [in LXX (as also apirayfia) for 773 , 

etc. ;] pillage, plundering, robbery : Mt 232^, Lk 11^9, He lO^^.t 

*t dpir-ayfios, ov, 6 (•<[ dpTra^to) ; 1. prop., acc. to the rule of its 
formation (Bl., § 27, 2), actively, the act of seizing, robbery (Plut., de 
Puer. Educ, p. 12a), Phi 2«, AV (Waterland, Works, II, 108 ; Cremer, 
649 f. ; Meyer, in 1. ; cf. also JThS, July, 1909, April, 1911 ; MM, s.v.). 
2. Passively = dp;rayyu,a (Ez 2225, Qf a, lion's prey, VQ^), a thing seized, 

hence, a prize : Phi, I.e., EV (Lft., Ellic, ICC, in 1,; Donaldson, 
NCrat., 450 ff. ; and esp. Gilford, The Incarnation, 59-71, and reff. in DB, 
ii, 835 b). The lexical data favour the active meaning, but as they 
also admit the possibility of the alternative, most modern expositors 
have accepted the latter as seeming to suit the logic of the passage 
better. The lexical difficulty, however, remains (MM, s.v., esp. the 
last ref.). As to the usage of St. Paul, he seems inclined to adopt the 
-/Aa form where it is appropriate (e.g. Eo 11^, where cf. LXX ; i Co 
139, II Co 1^), and there is certainly a presumption in favour of the 
active meaning here from the fact that he does not use the LXX 
apirayp.a. Suggestions looking to a fresh exegesis are given in JThS, 
11. c.t 

dpirdj^w, [in LXX chiefly for ^73 , 5)113 ;] to seize, catch up, snatch 
away, carry off by force : c. acc. rei, Mt 122^ 13^9, Jo 1012- 28, 29 • ^_ j^aa-ikiCav 
T. deov, Mt 1112 . c. acc. pers., Jo 61^, Ac 8^9 23io, Ju23 ; pass., seq. Icus, 
II Co 122 . ^i^^ ib. 12", I Th 41T ; Trpo's, Ee 12^^ (cf . 81-, aw-apiral^w, and 
V. MM, s.v.).t 

dpTral, -ayo9, 6, ^ « dpTrdCo;), [in LXX: Ge 492^ (pilta) * ;] 
rapacious : Mt 71^, Lk IBn ; as subst., a swindler, an extortioner (MM, 
s.v.), iCo5i«'ii6i*».t 

dppapci^ (T, dpa/?- : II Co, 11. c), -wvos, 6, [in LXX : Ge 381^. is, 20 
(7i2"T.y) * ;] an earnest, part payment in advance for security, a first in- 
stalment : II Co 122 55^ gph 114. ^The word is found in cl. and was 
prob. brought to Greece by the Phoenicians (AE, Eph., I.e.). It is 
found in tt. with both spellings (v. Milligan, NTD, 73). In MGr. 
appa(3u)va is an engagement ring ; v. MM, s.v.)+ 

dppa<()OS, V.S. dpac^os, 
dppT]!', V.S. apa-rjv. 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 61 

** appT)Tos, -ov «a- neg., pr^ros, pew), [in Sm. : Le 1823 * ;] 1. unspoken 
(Horn., al.). 2. U7ispeakable (Hdt., al.; freq. in Inscr. ; MM, s.v.) : 
II Co 12*.t 

appw(rro9, -ov (•< d- neg., pwwv/jLL), [in LXX : iii Ki 14*A, Ma 1* 

(nbn), Si 735*;] feeble, sickly: Mt U^\ Mk G^.i^ letis]^ j_ Co ll^o.t 

*t dpo-et-oKotTT]?, -ov, 6 « apa-qv, KoiTrj), a sodomite : I Co 6^, I Ti 1^''.+ 

ap(rt\v {apprjv, T, in Eo 1^^ ; Rec. in Re 12^' ^^), -evo?, 6, 17, apa-ev, to 

(old Attic for app-qv, V. supr, ; both forms are found in tt. ; MM, s.v.), 

[in LXX chiefly for -|37 ;] male : Mt 19*, Mk 10^ Lk 2^3, Ro 1^\ Ga S^s, 

Rel25.i3.t 

'ApTcfias, -a, 6, Artemas : Tit 3^^^ 

"ApTCfiis, -tSo?, 17, Artemis, an Asiatic goddess, to be disting. from 
the Gk. goddess of the same name : Ac 1924127,28,34, 35 f 

*t dpTc'fAw*', -tovos (Rec. -ovos), 6 (<^ttpTaw, to fasten to), a fore-sail or 
top-sail: Ac 27*o (v. i)jB, ea;i., 366b, 399a. MM, s.v.).t 

fipri, adv., [in LXX : Da LXX 922 W^ (nnr), al. ;] adv., of coinci- 
dence, denoting strictly present time, as contrasted w^ith past or future, 
just, just now, this moment : Mt 31* 9^^ 26^\ Jo 13^, Ga 420, i Th 3« (v. 
Lft., Notes, 44; Milligan, in 1.), Re 12i«; opp. to past time, Jo 9^^'^^ 
1333, I Co 16^ Ga 19. 10 ; to future, Jo 133" 1512, 31^ j Co 13^2, n Th 2^, 
I Pe 1«>8; SixP^ T^s a. (Upas, I Co 4^^ Im a., Mt 11^2, Jo 2^^ S^^ 162*, 
I Co 413 87 15« I Jo 29; Aw 3.., v.s. dTraprt (v. Rutherford, NPhr., 70 f; 
MM, s.v.).t 

Syn. : vvv, now, " the objective, immediate present ; rjhiq, now, 
already, " the subjective present, w^ith a suggested reference to some 
other time or to some expectation ". (Thayer, 75.) 

*t dpTi-Y€Vt'T]Tos, -ov (<^ dprt, yevvdo)), new-born : i Pe 22 (Luc.).+ 
*apTios, -a, -ov, fitted, complete : 11 Ti 3^" (MM, s.v.).t 

apTos, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for DH^;] bread, a loaf: Mt 43»*, 

Mk 320, al.; dproi t. Trpo^eVews, bread of the setting forth, i.e. the 
shewbread. Metaph., 6 a. t. Oeov, t. ^wiJs, ref . to Christ, Jo 633. 35 . 
in general, food: Mt 6^^ al.; d. ^ayetv (Heb. DT]^ bDii), to eat (MM, 

8.V.), Lu 14^, al. 

** dpTow, [in Sm, : Ca 82 * ;] 1. to arrange, make ready (Hom.). 2. Of 
food (as in comic writers), to season (MM, s.v.) : Mk 9'**, Lk 143*, Qq\ ^.ef 
'Ap<j)a|d8, 6 (Heb. "mr^SIN), Arphaxad : Lk 33«.t 

*t dpx-dyyeXos, -ov, 6 (-<[ dp;^i-, dyycXos), archangel, a chief angel: 
I Th 4i«, Ju9 (Cremer, 24; MM, s.v.).t 

dpxaios, -ata, -alov « oLpxy), [in LXX chiefly for Dlj? ;] original, 

ancient: Mt 521.33, Lk 9^>^^, Ac 15^.21 21i6, 11 Co 5^7, n Pe 2^, 
Re 129 202.t 

Syn. : TraXatd?, old, without the reference to beginning and origin 
contained in d. The distinction is observed in tt. (MM, s.v.). d. is the 
antithesis to Kaivos : TraX. to vcos (v. Westc, He., 223 ; Cremer, 116). 



62 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

'Apxe'Xaos, -ov, 6, Archelaus, son of Herod the Great, King of 
Judaea, Samaria and Idumaea : Mt 2^^.t 

dpx^, -rjs, r), [iJ^ LXX for Dl(7. , CTNl , IT'tZ^KI , etc. ;] 1. beginning, 

origin; (a) absol., of the beginning of all things: of God as the 
Eternal, the First Cause, Ee 216 (gf. l^) ; similarly, of Christ, Ee 22^3; 
of Christ as the uncreated principle, the active cause of creation, Ee 
3^*; in his relation to the Church, Col 1^^; iv d., Jo l^'^; dir' d. (and 
Air d. KTio-£(os), Mt 194'8 24^1, Mk 10^ IS^^, Jo 8**, ii Th 2l^ ii Pe 3*, 

I Jo 11 213. 1* 38 ; Kar dpxas, He li« ; (6) relatively : He 7^ ; d. <L8{vwv, 
Mt 248, Mk 139 . ^, o-r?/i€tW, Jo 211 ; t. wroo-rdo-cws, He 31* ; T. A.oyiW, 
51- ; 6 T. apxq'i T. Xpia-Tov Xoyos, the account of the beginning, the 
elementary vievs^ of Christ, He 6^ ; apxw Aa/xySdveiv, to begin, He 2^ ; 
i^ d., Jo 6"* 164; ^^' ^.^ Lk 12, Jo 1527, I Jo 27.24 311^ II Jo 5, 6. i^ s.., 
Ac 1115 26*, Phi 415 ; Trjv apxrjv, adverbially, at all (Hdt., al. ; v. MM, 
s.v.) : Jo 825. 2. an extremity, a corner : Ac 10^ 11^. 3. sovereignty, 
principality, rule (cf. DB, i, 616 f.) : Lk 12^ 202o, Eo m, i Co I52*, 
Eph 121 310 612, Col 11" 210' 15, Tit 31, Ju« (Cremer, 113).t 

dpxiiYos, -ov, [in LXX for IS'Sl , K^'CJZ , etc. ;] beginning, originat- 
ing : more freq., as subst. ; 1. founder, author (Lat. auctor ; so some- 
times in TT., v. MM, s.v. ; Milligan, NTD, 75) : Ac 3i5 (E, mg.). He 2i« 
(E, txt. ; but V. Westc, in 1., and Page, Ac, I.e.). 2. prince, leader (so 
in MGr., v. Kennedy, So^crces, 153) : Ac 31^ (E, txt.) S^i, He 2io (cf. 
E, mg.) 122 (Cremer, 117).t 

apxi- « oipx"}), insep. prefix, denoting high office and dignity, 
freq. in Alex, and Byzant. Gk. (MM, s.v.). 

*t dpx-iepariKos, -rj, -ov « dpxiepti^'s), high-priestly : Ac 4*' (MM, 
8.v).+ 

dpx-icpcu's, -e'ws, 6, [in LXX for ]n3 , bnan "3 , main '3 ;] 1. high- 
priest : Mk 226 14*7, al. ; of Christ : He 21^ 31, al. 2. In pi., chief 
priests, including ex-high-priests and members of high-priestly 
families : Mt 2\ Mk 8^1, al. (Cremer, 294 ; DCG, i, 297 f. ; MM, s.v.). 
**tdpxi-n-oifjiT]>', -evo5, 6, [in Sm. : iv Ki 3**;] found on an Egyptian 
mummy label (Deiss., LAE, 97 ff. ; cf. MM, s.v.) ; used by modern 
Greeks of tribal chiefs ; chief shepherd . of Christ, i Pe 5*.t 

"ApxiTTTTos, -ov, 6, Archippus : Col 41^, Phm 2.t 
*t apxiffumywYoSj -ov, 6 (•<^ crwaycoyi;), ruler of a synagogue, an 
administrative officer, supervising the worship (nD.33n IZTN*!) : Mk 
522,35,36,38^ L]j Qio 1314^ Ac 131^ IS^' 1^ (Inscr., v. MM, s.v.; cf. also 
DB, ext., 101).t 

dpxt-T£KTwv, -ovo<:, 6 « TeKTwv), [in LXX : Is 3^ (mnn), Si 3827, 

II Mac 2^^ * ;] a master-builder, architect : i Co 31" (in tt. of building 
contractors, MM, s.v.).t 

*t dpxi-TeXwfTis, -ov, 6, a chief tax-collector, chief publican : Lk 192.t 
*t dpxt-TpiKXii'os, -ov, 6 (<^ Tpt-<cXii'os or -ov, a room with three couches) 

the superintendent of a banquet, whose duty it was to arrange tha 

tables and food {DB, ii, 253) : Jo 2^. ^.t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 63 

apxw, [in LXX for bbu , bCHS , etc. ;] 1. to begin. 2. to rule (v. 
DCG, ii, 538 b.) : c. gen., Mk lO''^, Eo IS^^. Mid., to begin : seq. a-n-o, 
Mt 1621 208, Lk 14^8 235 2427, i\ Jo 8\ Ac 122 8^5 lO^^, i Pe 4^7 ; c. 
inf., an Aramaic pleonasm, Mk 1** 223 517^ j^^ 38^ ^1. (v. M, Pr., 14 f . ; 
Dalman, Words, 27 ; MM, s.v.). 

apxwj', -ovros, 6 (pres. ptcp. of apx'»), [in LXX for Ni273 ., BTX*! , 
itZT , etc. ;] a ruler, chief : Jesus, Ee 1* ; rulers of nations, Mt 202^, 

Ac 42« 735 ; magistrates, Ac 23^, Eo 13^ ; judges, Lk 12^8, Ac 72^' 35 
1619 ; members of the Sanhedrin, Lk 14^ 23i3. 35 2420, Jo 3^ 726. ^^ 12*2, 
Ac 317 45' 8 132" 145 ; rulers of synagogues, Mt 9^^' 23, Lk 8*1 I8I8 ; oi 
d. T. aiwvos TcvTov, I Co 2^> 8 ; of the devil : a. twv Saifioviwv, Mt 93* 122*, 
Mk 322, Lk 1115 ; 6 Sl. toC K6cTfjiov, Jo 123i 143« I611 ; 5. t. c^oWas t. 
depos, Eph 22 (MM, 8.V.; DB, iii, 838; Ext., 99 f; DCG, ii, 419; 
DCB, s.v. Archon).t 

apwfia, -Tos, TO, [in LXX for Digrs ;] spice : Mk I6I, Lk 235« 24i, 

Jo 19*«.t 

'A<T(i, v.S. Acrdcf). 
aaaivb), V.S. o-atVo). 

d-(T(i\60Tos, -ov « (TaXivw), [ixi LXX ! Ex 13i«, De 68 lli* 
(niBMlM)* ;] unmoved, immovable: Ac 27*i ; metaph., He 1228.t 

'Ao-d^, o, indecl. (Heb. P)DN), Asajyh, an obvious error for 'Aad, 

found in the best texts, and adopted by LTTr. and WH, E, mg. : 
Mt l^' 8.t 

a-apeoTos, -ov ( <o-y3£Wv/it), [in LXX for nD3 sb , Jb 202^ ^3 A 
(oLKavo-Tov, a 2 B)* ;] unquenched, unquenchable : irvp, Mt 312, Mk 9**, 
Lk 3i7.t 

da^Pcia, -as, 17 «1 do-€y8i?s), [in LXX for VW^ , JTBT), etc.;] un- 
godliness, impiety: Eo lis 1126, n Ti 2i«, Tit 2i2; Ipya do-f/Jcia?, 
ungodly deeds, Ju i^ ; cTri^v/xtai t. da-ffttiwv, desires for ungodly things 
or fiee^^s, Jui8 (DB, iv, 532; Cremer, 523; MM, s.v.).t 

do-ePe'u, -w « do-cySj^s), [in LXX for JTCTQ , nzyi ;] to 6e ungodly, 
act profanely : 11 Pe 2*'; c. cogn. ace. (MM, s.v.), Jui^.t 

dacPiis, -€s (o-cySo), to rewrence), [in LXX chiefly for JTt&l ;] ww- 
godly, impious : Eo 4^ 5^ i Ti 1^, i Pe 418, 11 Pe 25. « 3^, Ju''' i5.t 

** daeXyeia, -as, 17 (<C do-cXyT/s, licentious ; V. MM, 8.V.), [in LXX : 
Wi 142", III Mac 226*;] licentiousness, wantonness, excess: Mk 722, 
Eo 1313, II Co 1221, Ga 51^ (Lft., in 1.), Eph 41^, i Pe 43, 11 Pe 22.7,i8^ 
Ju*.t 

Syn. : do-toTta, profligacy, prodigality (v. Tr., Syn., § xvi ; DB, 
iii, 46). 

a<7T],ios, -ov (< o-^/Aa, a mark), [in LXX : Ge 30*2 (CjtDjr), Jb 42ii, 
III Mac P*;] witJiout mark (in ir. of an uncircumcised boy: Deiss., 
BS, 153; MM, s.v.). Metaph. (MM, s.v.), unknown, obscure: 
litotes, ovK d. (Eur., al.), ttoAis, Ac 2139.t 

*A<Tiip, 6, indecl. (Heb. -|«;n), Asher : Lk 236, j^e 76.t 



64 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

&cr6ivei.a, -a?, 17 {<C, aaOiv-qs) , [in LXX for bt273 , etc.;] weakness, 
frailty, sickness : Lk 13"' i'-^, Jo ll^ Ac 28^, Eo G^^ 8^6^ 11 Co Ipo 13*, 
Ga 413 (MM, 9.V.), He 5^ 7^8 IP* ; iv d., Jo 5^, i Co 2^ 15*3, „ Co 12^; 
pi., Mt 817, Lk 51s 82, II Co 125. 9, 10^ i Ti 523, He d^^.t 

SVN. : fxaXaKia, voaos (v. DB, iii, 323^). 

daGece'w, -tu (<:^ a(rdevrj<;), [in LXX chiefly for bu^3 ;] to &e weak, 
feeble : Ac 20^5, Ro 83, 11 Co II21 12i« 13*- » ; c. dat., Trto-ret (Cremer, 
527), Eo 419 141 ; same implied, Eo I42.21, i Co 8ii'i2^ 11 Co ll^^; eU, 
II Co 133. Specif., of bodily debility, to be sick : Mt 2536- 39, Lk 4*o, 
Jo 4*<5 53. 7, 13 111-3. 6^ Ac 937, Phi 22". 27, „ Ti 42», Ja 514 ; ol do-^cvowres, 
i/ie sick : Mt 10^ (MM, s.v.j, Mk 6*6, Lk 92, Ac 19i2.t 

*dCT0eVT]fia, -ros, to (<^ aa-Oevy?), an infirmity (MM, s.v.) : Eo 15i.t 

a(TQevris, -€S « «" neg., cr^e'vos, strength), [in LXX for ""^y , etc. ;] 

m"^/io?ti strength, weak, feeble : i Co 12^ 4}<> W^\ u Co lO^o, Ga 49, 

I Th 51*, He 718, 1 Pe 3^. Ehetorically, t6 d. t. Oeoi, God's action of 
apparent weakness : i Co 12*^ ; of bodily debility, sick, sickly : Mt 253^ 
(Eec.) *3,44^ Lk 92 (Eec.) 10^ Ac 4» 515- 1«. In moral and spiritual 
sense (MM, s.v. ; Cremer, 526), Mt 26*S Mk 1438, Rq 50^ i Qq q7, 9, 10 
922 113o.t 

'Aaia, -as, >;, ^sm, the Eoman province : Ac 2^6^ 16^ 191,10,22,28 
(M, Pr., 73), ib.27 20*'i«>i8 2127 24i8 272, Eo IG^, i Co IG^^, 11 Co l^, 

II Ti 115, I Pe 1\ Ee l*.t 

^AiTiavos, -7], -6v, Asia7i, of Asia, Asiatic; as subst., 6 (01) 'A.: 
Ac 20*.t 

*t 'Ao-idpxris, -ov, 6, an Asiarch, one of ten officers elected by the 
various cities in the province of Asia whose duty it was to celebrate 
at their own charges the public games and festivals : Ac 193i (Strab., 
Inscr. ; DB, s.v.).t 



dCTiTia, -as, rj {<^a(TLTOi), fasting, abstinence from food : Ac 2721. + 



*d 
Syn. : vr](TT(La (MM, ut infr.) 



*aaiTos, -ov (<^ d- neg., ctlto';) , fasting , withoiit eating (cf. MM, s.v.) : 
Ac 2733.t 

**do-Kecj, -w, [in LXX: 11 Mac 15**;] 1. to adorn (poet.). 2. to 
practise, exercise (Hdt., Xen.). 3. to endeavour (Xen., al.) : c. inf., 
Ac 24i«.t 

daKos, -ov, 6, [in LXX for ri©ri , 1N3 , ^33 ;] a leather bottle, tuine- 

skin : Mt 9^^ Mk 222, Lk 53^. 38,t 

** da^eVws, adv. « riSofiai, to be glad), [in LXX : 11 Mac 4^2 1033, 

III Mac 315 521*;] gladly : Ac 2V^A 

a-ao4)os, -ov, [in LXX: Pr 9^x2 A*;] unwise, foolish : Eph 5^\f 
dcnrdtofjiai, depon., [in LXX : Ex 18^ Jg 18^5 (Dibizrb bsp), Es 52, 

I Mac 729, al. ;] to welcome, greet, salute : c. ace. pers., Mt 5*'^, Mk 9^^, 
Ac 21' , al. ; id. seq. iv <f>i\-Q,jLaTt, Eo 16i«, i Co I620, n Co 13^2, i Th 526, 
iPe5i*; T. iKKXrjcrlav (Deiss., BS, 257), Ac 1822; ^s term. tech. for 
conveying greetings at the end of a letter (MM, s.v.), used by an 
amanuensis (Milligan, NTD, 23), Eo I622 (on the aoristic pres., here 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 65 

and elsewhere, v. M, Pr., 119 ; Bl., § 56, 4) ; Ka-r^vrqa-av . . . dairaa-d- 
lx€voL (on this constr., v. Bl., § 58, 4 ; M, Pr., 132, 238), Ac 251^ (cf. 
d;r-acr7ra^o/Liai) . t 

* doTTacTfios, -ov, 6 (<; do-Trd^o/iat) , a salutation (so always in EV), 
greeting: oral, Mt 23", Mk 12^8, Lk 129,4i,44 ii43 20*«; written, i Co 
1621, Col 4^8, II Th 3i7.t 

**t a-oTTiXos, -ov « d- neg., o-TTiXos), [in Sm.: Jb 15^^ (LXX, Kadapos)* ;] 
spotless, unstained : i Pe 1^^ ; metaph., 1 Ti 6^*, Ja 1'^^, ii Pe S^^^ (for 
exx., V. MM, s.v.).t 

SV-N. : dfjiiavTos, d/Mo>/tos. 

d<nris, -i8os, rj, [in LXX for ]31Q , etc. ;] an asp : Eo S^^.t 

*aaTroi'8os, -ov (<[ o-TrovSiy, a libation); 1. without truce (Thuc). 
2. admitting of no truce, imjdacable (Dem., al.) : ii Ti 3^.t 

*f dcradpiov, -ov, to (dim. of Lat. as), an assarion, a farthing, one- 
tenth of a drachma : Mt lO^^, Lk 12'' (MM, s.v. ; DB, iii, 428 ; DCG, 
ii, 200).t 

* daaov (Eec, after Vg., "Ao-o-ov), adv. (compar. of dy;^t, near), 
nearer : Ac 27^^ (EV, close in shore; v. Bl., § 11, 3; 44, 3; poets. 
Ion. and late prose). t 

"Ao-o-os, -ov (also 'Ao-o-o'?, -ov), rj, Assos, a city on the E. coast of 
Asia Minor: Ac 20^3,14 (y g ^a-(Tov)A 

**+ doTareoj, -w (-^ dcrTaros, unstable), [in Aq. : Is 58'' (LXX, da-re- 
yos) * ;] to be unsettled, be homeless, lead a vagabond life (Cremer, 738 
MM, s.v.) : I Co 4ii.t 

dcrrelos, -ov « dtrrv, a city), [in LXX : Ex 22 (nita), Nu 2232 (^^^ 
d. tST), Jg 31' (Xnn), Jth 1123, Da LXX, Su^, ii Mac 623*;] 1. of the 

town. 2. (Like Lat. urbanus), (a) courteous, (b) elegant (in tt., of 
clothing, MM, s.v.), comely, fair (as in Ex, l.c). He 1123, Ac 72o.t 

danip, -€>os, 6, [in LXX chiefly for nSiS ;] a star : Mt 22. 7, 9, lo 
2429, Mk 1325, I Co 1541, Re qis 8i«. 11.12 91 121,4; metaph., 6 d. 6 
TrpwiVds, Ee 22s 221*' . ^ TrXavrjrai, Ju 13 ; a. iirrd, symbolizing the angels 
of the seven churches, Ee li«. 20 21 31 (cf . darpov, and v. DCG, ii, 674 f . ; 
MM, s.v.).t 

*t d-(TTT)piKTos, -OV {<:^(TTr]pLi^(i)), uustabU, unsettUd : 11 Pe 2i* 31^. t 
*do-TopYos, -ov {<C(TTopyr), family affection, love of kindred, v.s. 
dyd-Trri), ivithout natural affection : Eo 13i, 11 Ti 3^ (MM, s.v.).+ 

**tdaTox€w, -w (o-Toxos, a mark), [in LXX: Si 71^ 8^*;] to miss the 
mark, fail: c. gen., i Ti 1* (so in tt., MM, s.v.); seq, -n-epL, 1 Ti 621, 
II Ti 2i8.t 

dcrrpaTTi^, -^s, V, [in LXX for pia ;] lightning: Mt 242^283, Lk 

1018 172*; pi., Ee 4* 8^ 1119 1618; of a lamp, shining brightness, 
Lk Ips.t' 

dorpdTTTw, [in LXX for pia;] to lighten, flash forth : Lk 172" 24* 
(MM, s.v.).t 

d<rrpo»', -ov, to, [in LXX chiefly for apiS ;] (a) mostly in pi. (as 

5 



66 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

in cl.), the stars: Lk 2p5, Ac 2720, He ll^^; (b) in sing. (Xen., al.), 
only of some noted star : the symbol or image of a star, Ac 7*^ (of. 
aa-T-^p, and V. MM, s.v.).t 

'AauyKpiTOS, V.S. 'Acrui/zcpiTov. 

** d-ai5^(t.wKos, -ov, [in LXX : Wi 181", Da, LXX, Bel 1** ;] dissonant, 
discordant ; metaph., at variance : irpb^ aXX-^Xov<;, Ac 28^5. t 

d-<ruV£Tos, -ov [in LXX: De 32^1 (bns), Jb I32 (bS3), Ps 91 (92)« 

(b''p5), Ps 75(76)'', Wig, Sig*;] tvithout understanding or discernment: 

Mt I516, Mk 718 (Swete, in 1.), Ro l^L 3i 1019 (for an ex. of its use in the 
moral sense, v. MM, s.v.).t 

d-auc-GeTOS, -ov « cruvri^€yu,ai ; V. M, Pr., 222; MM, 8.V.), [in 
LXX : Je 3"' ^' ^'^» ^^ (133)* ;] false to engagements, not keeping covenant, 
faithless (MM, s.v.) : Eo l^i.t 

'Ao-u'cKpiTos (Eec. 'Aa-vyKp.), -ov, 6, Asyncritus : Ro 16^*.+ 

dCT<|)dX€ia, -as, 17 « dcre/jaXT^s), [in LXX for T1X2^ , etc.;] 1. firm- 
ness. 2. certainty : Lu 1*. 3. security : Ac 5^^, i Th 5^. (In tt. it is 
used as a law-term, proof, secicrity ; v. MM, s.v. ; M, TJi., l.c.)+ 

da<(>aXTJs, -e's « a- neg., o-(/)aAA.w, to trif lip), [in LXX for ItZTNpu., 

etc. ;] certain, secure, safe : Ac 213* 22^0 25^6, Phi S\ He 6i9 (MM, s.v.).t 

+ d(T4)aXii;w « d(7<^aAr?s), [in LXX : Ne 31* (pm hi.), Is 41io (TJDn), 

Wi 417 1012 1315*;] to make firm, secure: mid., Mt 27''5•<'^ Ac 16^*; 

pass., Mt 27«* (MM, s.v.).t 

d(7<|)aXa)s, adv., [in LXX : Ge 342^ (nt33), To 6*, Wi IS^, Ba 5\ 

I Mac 6*0, III Mac 76*;] (a) sa/eZy ; Mk 14**, Ac 1623; (j) assuredly: 
Ac 236.+ 

dcrxTifiot/eo), -w « aa-xw^v), [in LXX : Ez 16^. 22, 3923 29 (n,-|y) . De 

253 (nbp ni.)*;] to act mibecomingly, beJiave dishonourably : i Co 13*; 
seq. cm, ib. V^ (MM, s.v.).+ 

daxTjiiOCTuKT], -7s, ^ (<^dcrx^'yu,wv), [in LXX chiefly for njlJT ;] un- 
seemliness : Ro 127 (MM, s.v.) ; euphemism for rj ala-xyvy], as freq. in 
LXX, shame, nakedness : Re 16i*.+ 

doxTiixojv, -ov « d- neg., a-xvi^o), [in LXX : Ge 34^ (nbn?), De 24^ 

(nviir), Wi 22", Da th Su^s, h Mac 92*;] 1, shajyeless. 2, uncomely, 

unseemly : i Co 1223. + 

dawTia, -as, rj « d- neg., a^tu,), [in LXX : Pr 28^ (b^T), II Mac 6**;] 
prodigality, ivastefulness, profligacy : Eph 5^^, Tit 1", i Pe 4* (MM, s.v.).+ 

SYN. : dcreAyeta, q.V. 

*do-oSTa>s, adv. (<^ do-toTos, prodigal, toasteful), [in LXX for mo, 
Pr 711 * ;] wastefully : Lk 15^3 (EV, in riotous living ; but not necessarily 
dissolute; cf. MM, ut supr. ; Milligan, NTD, 79).+ 

*dTaKTe'w, -w (<[ draKTos), primarily, of soldiers marching, to be 
out of order, to quit the ranks ; hence, metaph., to be remiss, fail in the 
performance of duty (in tt., of truancy on the part of an apprentice) : 

II Th 37 (on d. and its cognates, v. M, Tli., 152 fif. ; MM, 8.vv.).+ 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 67 

**a-TaKTos, -ov (<< rao-crw), [in LXX : III Mac 1^^*;] out of order, 
out of place (Lat. inordinattis), freq. of soldiers not keeping the ranks, 
or an army in disarray (cf . iii Mac, I.e.) ; hence, metaph., irregular, 
disorderly (v. previous word) : i Th 5^*.t 

**d-T<iKTus, adv., [in Sm. : iv Ki 9^°*;] disorderly, irregularly: 

II Th 36. ii.t 

SreKvos, -ov « tc/cvov), [in LXX: Ge 152, Le 2020.21 (iT-jy), Is 
4921, Je 1821 (ij-jjj;)^ Si 163 * .-j childless : Lk 2028. 29,t 

**dTei'i^a> (-^dTcvT/s, strained, intent; -^reiVw), [in LXX: i Es 628, 

III Mac 226 * .-1 f^Q IqqJ^ fixedly, gaze (MM, s.v.) : c. dat. pers., gaze upon : 
Lk 420 225«, Ac 312 10* 149 231 ; seq. €«, c. ace. pers., Ac 3* 6^^ 139; 
metaph., Ac l^o 7" ll^, 11 Co 37.i3.t 

**aT€p, prep., [in LXX: 11 Mac 12^^*;] in cl. most freq. in poets; 

without, apart from : c. gen., Lk 22^>^^ (for exx. from tt., v. MM, 8.v.).t 

dTifxdl^a) (<^ ari/xos), [in LXX for 71S , rop , etc. ;] to dishono2ir, 

insult : Mk 12\ TTr., mg., WH, Lk 20^\ Jo 8«, Eo 223, jg, 2^; pass. : 

Ac 541, RO 124 (cf dri/ldw).t 

*d-Ti/xda>, -uj (-e^Ti/xT/), to dishonour, despise: c. ace. pers., Mk 12*, 

LTr., txt. (cf. drifjid^w) A 

dri/iia, -as, 17 {a.TLfj.o'i), [in LXX for Hisbj , ]ib(? , etc. ;] dishonour, 

disgrace : 1 Co 11^*, 11 Co Q^ ; cis d., Ro 921, 11 Ti 220 ; ^ a., i Co 15" ; 
KUT a., II Co 1121 . 7rd^i7 aTL/xias, base passions, Eo 126.t 

dri^os, -ov {<Tifji^), [in LXX : Is 3^ (nbp ni.), 53^ (.173), Jb 30*. » 
(DCr^b^), Wig, Si^*;] without honour, dishonoured, despised : Mt 13", 

Mk 6*, I Co 410 ; comp., i Co 1223.t 

dTtjiou, -w (<; ttTi/i-os), [in LXX chiefly for n73;] = dri/ia^w, to 

dishonour, treat with indignity : Mk 12*, Eec.t 

dT|xis, -tSos, 17, [in LXX for Jjy , H^a^II , etc. ;] vapour : Ja 4^* ; 

d. Kanvov, Ac 2i9(i'^^).t 

**a-TO|xos, -01' (•< TtyMvo)), [in Sm. : Is 54^ (MM, s.v.) *;] indivisible; 
of time, aTOfxov, a moment : iv d., i Co 15^2 f 

a-TOTTos, -ov «Td7ros), [in LXX: Jb 48 ll^i, Pr 302o (24"), al., 
for I^X , etc. ;] 1. out of place, not befitting. 2. marvellous, strange 

(of symptoms, Hipp.) : Ac 28^ ; hence, in late Greek, with ethical 
sense, 3. improper, imrighteous (so in LXX, and for exx. from tt. 
V. M, Th., I.e. ; MM, s.v.) : Lk 23*i, Ac 25^ 11 Th 32.t 

'ArraXia (Eee. -dAeta), -as, rj, Attalia, a city of Pamphylia : 
Ac 1425.t 

aoydSo) « avyr;), [in LXX: Le 1324-28.28,38 1456 (n^n^) 1339 

(nn3)*;] 1. Trans, (cl.), to irradiate. 2. Intrans. {a) (poet.), to see 
clearly (so perh. 11 Co, I.e. ; MM, s.v.) ; {b) as in LXX, to shine forth : 

II Co 4* (cf. 8t-, KaT-avyd^a)).t 

aflYn, -^s, ^, [in LXX : Is 59^ (nnj;), 11 Mac 12^*;] 1. brightness. 



68 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

2. Later (as in MGr. ; MM, s.v.), daylight, dawn : Ac 20^^ (Cremer, 
118).t 

SVN. : <^£yyos (V. Thayer, s. 4>. ; DB, iii, 44* ; Tr., Syn., § xlvi). 
AuyouCTTos, -ov, 6 (Lat.), Augustus, the Roman Emperor: Lk 2^ 
(of. 2€/5ao-Tds; and v. MM, 8.v.).t 

aOedSris, -ts {<:avT6^, ^Sofxac), [in LXX : Ge 493' ^ (75^)^ Pr 2124 

(TH;)* ;] self-pleasing, arrogant : Tit I'', 11 Pe 2^** (Cremer, 654).+ 

Syn. : 4>LkavTo<s (v. Tr., Syn., § xciii). 

** aO0aip€TOS, -ov (<avTos, aipeofiai), [in Sm. : Ex 35*»22*.] l ggij-. 
clwsen. 2. of one's oivn accord : 11 Co 8^' ^'^.t 

*+ auOerre'w, -oi (<[ av9ivTrj<;, i.e. ahro- lvTiq<i, one who acts On his OWn 
authority, in it., an autocrat; cf. Wi 12^; cf. -la, iii Mac 2'^^; -ikos is 
freq. in vernacular, MM, s.v.), to govern, exercise authority over : 
I Ti 212.+ 

**auX€w, -w « avXo'9), [in Al. : iii Ki l^o*;] to play on a flute, to 
pipe: mid., Mt ll^^, Lk 7^2, i Co 14'.+ 

auXi], -r}s, 17, [in LXX chiefly for isn ;] 1. in Hom., an open 

courtyard before a house, hence, an enclosure in the open, a sheepfold : 
Jo 10^'^^. 2. the court, courtyard, round which a house is built: 
Mt 263. 58, 69^ Mk 145-1. 66 1516^ Lk 1121 2255, Jo 1815 ; T. vaoC, Re II2. 

3. a dwelling, a palace (so, ace. to Grimm-Th., s.v.) : Mt 26^' ^^, Mk 14^* 
15i«, Lk 1121, Jo 1815 (but V. MM, s.v. ; cf. also DB, ii, 25, 287).+ 

*auXT)Wi9, -ov, 6 «ai;A.£a)), a flute-player : Mt 92^, Re I822 (MM, 
s.v.).+ 

auXij^ofiai «auX77), [in LXX chiefly for Jib, fb;] 1. prop., to 
lodge in a courtyard. 2. to lodge in the open. 3. to pass the night, 
lodge (LXX; MM, s.v.) : Mt 21i', Lk 2137.t 

auXos, -ov, 6 (<[ aw, to blow), [in LXX chiefly for b'^bn ;] a pipe: 

I Co 14'.+ 

aold^u (and the earlier form av^u>, Eph 22i, Col 2i» ; MM, s.v.), 
[in LXX chiefly for ms ;] 1. trans., to make to grow : i Co 3". \ 

II Co 91**. Pass., to grow, increase, become greater : Mt 13^2^ '^•^ 48^ 
II Co 10^5, Col 1" ; TTj l-myviliCTiL T. 6€ov, Col 11^ ; CIS a-oiTTjpLav, I Pe 22. 
2. In later Gk. (but nowhere in LXX), intrans., to groio, increase : of 
plants, Mt 62«, Lk 1227 131^ ; of infants, Lk l^o 24« ; of a multitude, 
Ac V^ ; of the increase of the Gospel : 6 Xdyos rjviavi, Ac 6" 122* 192<' ; 
of Christ as a leader, Jo 3^* ; of Christian character : ets XpLarov, 
Eph 415 ; els vaov, Eph 221 . '^ xap^^t. " P© ^i^ ; T^v av^rja-LV t. Oeov, 
Col 21^ (cf. crvv-, vTr€p-av$di'u)) .f 

**au^T]o-is, -ews, r) (-< av^w), [in LXX: II Mac 51**;] increase, 
growth : Eph 416, Col 2i9.+ 

au^w, V.S. av^dvio. 

aupa, a breeze : t. irveovar-i^ (sc. avpa), Ac 27**'.+ 
aopio^ adv., [in LXX for inn ;] to-morrow : Mt 6^\ Lk 1228, 
Ac 2320 2522, I Co 1532, Lk 1332. 33^ ja 413 ; ^ a{5. (sc. ^fx^pa, MM, s.v.), 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 69 

Mt 634, Ac 43; i^l rijv ai., Lk 1035, Ac i^; rh (WH om.) t«? ai., 
Ja 4i*.t 

** auarrjpos, -a, -ov (■< auw, to dry up), [in LXX : II Mac 143" ♦;] 
prop., stringent, harsh to the taste. Metaph., in Inscr., of a rough 
country; of disposition and manners, strict, severe (as in tt., of an 
inspector; MM, s.v.) : Lk 192i.22_t 

SYN. : a-KXrjpo'S (Tr., § xiv). 
*auTapKeia, -as, 17 {<^avTapKr)<;, q.V.), [o) sufficiency (Mil, S.V.) : 
in subjective sense (v. Milligan, NTD, 57), 11 Co 9^; (6) contentment: 
I Ti 66.t 

aOxcipKTjs, -€s « a^Tos, (ipKc'o.)), [in LXX : Pr 243i (308) (p^)^ gj 51 
112* 34.(31)28 40^8, IV Mac 9^*;] as in cl., in philosophical sense, self- 
sufficient, independent; subjectively, contented: Phi 4^^ (in non-lit. tt., 
the word means simply enough, sufficient; MM, s.v.).t 

*t auTo-Kard-KpiTos, -ov (<^ avTO's, /cara/cptvo)) , self -condemned : Tit 3^^ 
(Eccl., Cremer, 377; MM, s.v.).t 

auTofiaros, -ov, and -rj, -ov (etym. doubtful ; v. Boisacq, Prellwitz, 
s.v.), [in LXX, Le 255- 11, iv Ki 1929 (n^DD), Jos 6^ Jb 242*, Wi 17«*;] 

1. of persons, acting of one's own will. 2. Of inanimate things and 
n'atural agencies, of itself, of its own accord : yrj, Mk 42^ (MM, s.v.) ; 
TTu'^r?, Ac 12i».t 

* auToimrjs, -ov, 6, an eye-witness : Lk 12.t 
auTos, -rj, -6, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more 
freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f. ; Jannaris, HGG, § 1399). 1. Emphatic 
(so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii) ; (1) 
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., av. 
iK)(y6-qa-€Tai, Lk 5^'' ; av. €ytv(uo-K€v, Jo 22^ ; av. vfJieL<;, Jo 32^ ; kol av. cyw, 
Eo 15^4; av. 'Irja-ovs, Jo 2^*; av. /cat ol /xer avTod, Mk 225; ^^^-^ 
au., Mk 631 . ggp (as freq j^ ^^ ^^_ ^^ j^j. 34^ j^^ 61^, Jo 1627, 

I Th 311, al. ; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ev airfj t. <5pa, in that 
hour, Lk IO21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, s.v.); (2) emphatic, he, she, it 
(M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mt I21 12^0, Lk 63^, al.; pointing to 
some one as master (cl.), Mt 82*, Mk 43^, al. ; av., koL av. = oOtos, 6 Se 
(BL, § 48, 1), Mt 142, Mk 1415.44^ Lk I22 228, al. 2. In oblique cases 
(cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd pers., he, she, it, Mt V 10^2 26**, al. ; 
with ptcp. in gen. absol., Mt 9^8, Mk 13^, al. (for irreg. constructions, 
V. Bl., § 74, 5) ; pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. ib ni?N; 

WM, 184 ff. ; Bl., § 50, 4 ; MM, s.v.), Mk 72^, Ee 38 72, al. ; in constr. 
ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mt 423, ^q 35^ 

II Co 213, al.; gen. airoi = iKeivov, Eo lin, i Th 21^, Tit 35, He 2*. 
3. 6, rj, TO av., the same : He I12 138 ; t6 av., Trotetv, Mt 5*^' *7, al. ; 4>povfiv, 
Eo 1216 155, Phi 22, al. ; t^ av., Ac 152^, Eo 2i, al. ; Karh rh (ra) av. (MM, 
8.V.), Ac 141, Lk 623, al . ^Vi to ai., together (MM, s.v.), Mt 223*, Ac 1^\ 
al.; iv K. TO av., I Co 115 1211; c. dat. (cl.), i Co 115; ^itij ^ noun, 
Xdyos, Mk 1439; ^,Vpo9, Phi 130; TrveO/xa, I Co 12*. 

auToo, adv., prop. neut. gen. of avTo's, [in LXX for nb, HT^;] 



70 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

there : Mt 2636, Mk 633, ^h, mg., Lk 9^7, Ac 153*, WH, tag., E, mg., 
1819 21*.t 

a6ToO, -^s, -oi, =eavTov (q.v.), Mt 634, Lk 12^7, al. (MM, S.V.). 
** auTd<j)wpos, -ov «aiiTos, (f>wp, a thief), [in Sm. : Jb 34^^*;] prop, 
with ref. to theft, then generally, in the very act : as freq., neut. dat. 
after (ttl, Jo 8* (Eec, €7ravTo0a)p(x)).t 

*auT6-x€ip, -pos, 6, 17 (-^auTo?, x"p)' ^^^^ <^'^^'^ ^^^ hand: 
Ac 2719.+ 

* auxe'w, -w (■< a^x^?, boasting), to boast : c. ace. (MM, s.v.), ficydXa 
av)(^el (Rec. yucyaXavx", q-V.), Ja 3^.+ 

* auxpipos, -a, -oi' (< aux/"o'?, drought) ; 1. drt/. 2. squalid, 
dismal: 11 Pe l^^ (MM, s.v.).t 

d<j)-aipew, -w, [in LXX (Cremer, 615 f .) for 110 , "QV , DT) , ms , 
etc. (35 words in all);] to take from, take aivay, take off: c. ace, to 
wTiov, Mt 26^^!, Mk 14*- {fLrdpiov, WH), Lk 22^^^ (oSs) ; wctSos, Lk pS; 
seq. ttTTo, Ee 22^^, Lk 163 (mid.) ; pass., c. gen., Lk 10*'^ ; a. ajxapTLos, 
He 10*, Eo 1127 (mid.) (MM, s.v.j.t 

H^vf]S, -65 «<^ruVo)), [in LXX: Ne 48<2), Jb 2420, Si 203o 41^*, 
II Mac 33* * ;] unseen, hidden : He 4^3 f 

d4)ai'ii;a), (< a^av);?), [in LXX for CDCr ni., "DQIZT hi., etc. ;] 1. to 
make iinseen, hide from sight (Xen., al.). 2. Later (MM, s.v.), (a) to 
destroy: Mt 6i9'20; [b) to disfigure: Mt 6^^. Pass., to vanish: 
Ja 41* ; to perish : Ac 13*^ (i'XX).t 

d4)ai'io-jji6s, -ov, 6 « dcftavL^w), [in LXX chiefly for nJSffl', nipptZT;] 

vanishing : He 8i3_t 

*a<|)aia-os, -ov (<:^ <^at'vo/xat), poet, and late prose (MM, s.v.), 
invisible, hidden : Lk 243i.t 

*t d4)c8poJ.', -wvos, 6 (cf . ae^cSpos, Le 125) =, ci_ 5<^o8os (MM, s.v.), 
ajyrwy, drain: Mt 15^', Mk 7^^ (oxerdv, WH, mg.).t 

*d<f)ei8ia (L, -£ia), -a?, rj « ctc^eiSrjs, unsparing); 1. extravagance. 
2. tmsjyarmg treatment, severity : Col 2'-3.t 
d^JCiSoc, V.S. aTreiSov. 
*t d(})€X6TT)9, -t;tos, 17 = cl. dcjieXeia (v. MM, S.V.), simplicity: 
Ac 2«.t 

d<j)€(ns, -ecos, 17 « d<^i-qfxi), [in LXX for ^31'^ , lilT , etc. (v. Deiss., 

BS, 98 ff. ; MM, s.v.) ;] 1. dismissal, release : Lk 41^. 2. Metaph., 
of sins (never in LXX), pardoji, remission of penalty : dfiapnwv, 
Mt 2628, Mk 1*, Lk 1"' 33 24*' , Ac 238 531 1043 1338 26I8, Col l^* ; 
TrapaTTTto/xarwv, Eph 1^ ; absol., Mk 329, He 922 1018 (cf. DB, ii, 56; 
DCG, i, 437, ii, 605 ; Cremer, 297 f.).t 

Syn. : Trapecris, q.v. (and cf. Tr., § xxxiii). 

d<f>T), -^s, 17 (<^ ttTrro), to fasten, fit), [in LXX for V22 , freq. in Le ;] 

a joint (MM, s.v.) : Eph 4^6, Col 2^^ (Lft., in l.).t 

**t d<|.0apaia, -as, r) « .Jc^^apTos), [in LXX: Wi 223 510^ ly Mac 922 
1712 * ;] incorruptibility, immortality : Eo 2'', i Co 15*2> 5o> 53, 54^ jj fj 
110; dyaTTiavTwv . . . iv a., Eph 62* (v. AE, in l.).t 



MANUAL GBBEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 71 

**a-<})0apTos, -ov (< i>9e{pw), [in LXX : Wi 12i 18**;] imperishable, 
immortal ; (a) of things : i Co 9^^, i Pe 1*' 23 34 j (p^ of persons : of 
men, i Co 15^2; of God, Eo l^^, i Ti l^^ (MM, s.v.).t 

td-4)eopia, -as, ^ «</.^€tpa)), [in LXX: Hg 2^8 <i7) (|i,3^)*.-] ^„, 

corruptness : Tit 1'' (Eec. d(f>6ap(TLa).f 

d«|)-iVt. [ill LXX for am, m: hi., ]n:, nbo ni., STjr, etc.;] 
1. to send forth, send away, let go : of divorce {DB, iii, 274*), t. 
yvvalKa (Hdt.), I Co l^^''^^ ; of death, t. TrveS/xa (Ge 3518, Hdt., al.), 
Mt 27*'' ; (faaviqv, to utter a cry, Mk 15^'^ ; of debts, to remit, forgive 
(cl.), T. Savuov, Mt 18^'^ ; T. 6(p€iXi]v, Mt 18^^ j ggp_ of sins (Cremer 
296 f.), T. dfiapTLa's, dfxapTrj/xaTa, dvoiJiLas, Mt 9^, Ro 4^(LXX)^ j Jo 19^ al. ; 
punctiliar and iterative pres. (M, Pr., 119), Mk 2*, Lk 11* ; Ion. pf., 
d<t>€(i)VTai (M, Pr., 38), Lk 5^^. 2. to Zeave aZowe, leave, neglect : Mt 4^^ 
52* 151*, Mk 120.31, Jo 43,28^ al.; r. ^vtoX^ t- &^oi, Mk 7^; t^v t. apx^s 
T. Xpio-Tou Aoyoi', He 6^ ; t. dydTrrjv t. TrptaTrjv, Re 2* ; ptcp., a<^€ts, 
pleonastic (as in Aram.; M, Pr., 14; Dalman, TTords, 21 f.), Mt IS^' 
2222, Mk 813, al. 3. to Zei, suffer, permit: Mt 3^5; c. ace, Mt 3^5, 
19^*, al. ; c. ace. rei et dat. pers., Mt 5*o ; c. inf. pres., Mt 23^*, al. ; aor., 
Mk 53', al.; in late Gk. (M, Pr., 175 f.), seq. 'ua, Mk ll^^, Jo 12^; c. 
subjunct. (M, Pr., I.e.; Bl., § 64, 2), Mt 7* 27*^, Mk 15^6, Lk 6*2 (see 
further MM, s.v.). 

d<}>-iKi'€'ofji,ai, -ovp.ai, [in LXX for Ni2 , etc. ;] perfective of iKveofiai, 
to come (M, Pr., 247), to arrive at, come to, reach : metaph. (MM, s.v.), 
Eo 16i9.t 

*t d-<t>tX-(lYa0os, -ov, without love of good : 11 Ti 3* (not elsewhere in 
Gk. lit., but V. MM, 8.v.).t 

*t d-4)i\-dpYwpos, -oy, without love of money, not avaricious ; i Ti 3', 
He 135. (For other instances, v. MM, s.v.)t 

**a<|>-i|is, -€cos, ^ «tt^i/cveVa'). [i'^ LXX: III Mac 7^^*;] in cl. 
usually, arrival; rarely, departure: Ac 202^ (so in tt., cf. MM, s.v.; 
M, Pr., 26, n.).t 

d<j>-iaTt)p,i, [in LXX for 1TD , b^D , etc. (41 V70rds in all) ;] 1. trans, 
in pres., impf., fut., 1 aor., to put aivay, lead away ; metaph., to move 
to revolt : Ac 5^". 2. Intrans. in pf., plpf., 2 aor., to stand off, depart 
from, withdraw from : c. gen., Lk 2^^ ; seq. diro, Lk 4^3 1327^ ^.c 5^8 
1210, 1538 199 2229, II Co 128; metaph., cItt^ aSi/ct'as, 11 Ti 2^9; divh Otov, 
(fall away, apostatize), He 3^2^ Mid. (exc. 1 aor., wh. is trans.), to 
withdraw oneself from, absent oneself from : Lk 23" ; metaph., fall 
away, apostatize : absol., Lk 8^^ • q gen., i Ti 4^ (MM, s.v. ; Cremer, 
308). t 

fi4)»'w, adv., [in LXX for DXnQ;] suddenly: Ac 22 162« 28^.+ 

d4)6pais, adv. «.^o/3os), [in LXX: Pr ps (TriBp), Wi 17**;] 

without fear: Lk V\ Phi l^*, i Co 16^0, Jui2.t 

** d(t)-ofioi(}a), -C>, [in LXX : Wi I31*, Ep. Je *. 63, 71 * jj to make like : 
pass., He 73.t 

d<|)-opd<a, -w, [in LXX : iv Mac 17^° (eis 6f6v)* ;] (a) to look away 



72 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

from all else at, fix one's gaze ufon: metaph, (MM, s.v.), He 12^; {h) 
simply, to see : d<fii8w (v.s. aTrctSoi', and Lft., Phi., in 1, ; MM, s.v.), 
Phi 2'-^« (v. Ellic, in l.).t 

d<j)-opiiw, [in LXX (Cremer, 805 £.) for blS hi., "130 hi., FJ13 hi., 
wn hi., etc. ;] (a) to mark off by boundaries from, separate from : c. ace, 
Ac 19^, Ga 212; id. seq. iK {diro), Mt 13^3 25^2 (MM, s.v.); of excom- 
munication, Lk 6^2. Pass., absol., ii Co 6^^ ; (b) to set apart, devote to 
a special purpose (seq. eis) : c. ace, Ga 1^*. Mid., Ac IS^, Eo 1^ 
{DB, iii, 588).t 

d<|,-op,iVi, -^s, ^, [in LXX: Ez 5' (pn?), Pr 9^ iii Mac 32*;] 

prop., a starting-point; in war, a base of operations; metaph., an 
occasion, incentive, opportunity (MM, s.v.) : ii Go 11^2^ Qg, 513 • ^f^^ 
Xafji^dveiv, Lk 1124, wH, mg., Eo 7^' ^^ ; a>. 8i86vai, 11 Co 5^2, i Ti S^^.t 
*A<j)pi!;w «a^pds), to foam at the mouth: Mk 9^^'^^.f 
*d<|)p(5s, -ov, 6, foam: Lk Q^" (MM, s.v.).t 
d<})poau»/T), -17s, rj « d^pwv), [in LXX for T\bpi, nbnj.etc.;] 
foolishness: Mk 722, 11 Co lli'i'.2i.t 

a4>pwi', -ov, gen. -ovo? (-< (^/or^v), [in LXX for b""?? , b^3 , etc. ;] with- 
out reason, senseless, foolish, expressing " want of mental sanity and 
sobriety, a reckless and inconsiderate habit of mind " (Hort ; cf . MM, 
s.v.) : Lk 11*0 1220^ Eo 220, i Co 15^'', 11 Co ll^^ 126-", i Pe 2^5 ; opp. 
to <^povi/xos, II Co 11^^ ; to (TWievTes, Eph 2i^.t 

**t d4>-uiri'6w, -w «v7rvo<D, to put to sleep), [in Al. : Ge 28^^*;] 1. to 
awake from sleep (Anth.). 2. = cl. KaOvirvoay (MM, s.v.), to fall asleep: 
Lk 823.t 

t d<|)-uaT€pew, -w, [in LXX: Ne 920 (yaa), Si 14^**;] 1. as in cl., to 
he late (Polyb., Si, I.e.). 2. Trans., to keep hack (Ne, I.e. ; v. Mayor, 
Ja., 157 f.) : pass., Ja 5* (MM, s.v.).t 

a<j>a)^os, -ov {i>wv^), [in LXX : Is 53^ (d^JX ni.), Wi 41^, 11 Mac 32»*;] 
dumb, speechless : Ac 8^2 (lxx) • of idols (MM, s.v.), i Co 122 . Qf beasts, 
II Pe 2^^ ; Toa-avTa yhrj <^(dvcov koI ov8ev a. — SO many kinds of voices and 
none voiceless, i.e. without signification, unintelligible : 1 Co 14io_f 
"Axai; (WH, "Axas), 5 (Heb. ms), Ahaz : Mt l^.t 

'Axaia (T, 'A;^aia), -as, rj (Bl., § 46, 11), Achaia, the Eoman 
province: Ac 18^2.27 1921 Rq 152^, i Co 1&^\ 11 Co 1^ 92 llio, 
iTh 17. 8.+ 

'AxatKos, -ov, 6, Achaicus : 1 Co 16^^.+ 
**dxdpi(rros, -ov « xapito/^at) , [in LXX: Wi 1629, Si 2917.25^ IV 
Mac 910*;] (^a) ungracious, ^mpleasing ; {h) ungrateful, thankless: 
Lk 635, „ Ti 32.t 

"Axas, v.s. "Axa^. 

'Axeifi, 6, Achim : Mt l^^.t 
*t d-xcipo-iroiTjTos, -ov {<^xeipo7rQLr]Tos), not made by hands: Mk 
14'8, II Co 51 ; metaph., irtpLToixr] d. (i.e. spiritual), Col 2^^ (MM, 
s.v.).t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 73 

'AxcXSafidx (T, 'A^- ; Rec. 'A/ceX8a/Aa, WH, ' AKeXSa/xax) , indecl. 
(Aram. NJ^l b^)T}, field of blood), Akeldama (AV, Aceldama) : Ac l^^.t 

**dxXu's, -ws, rj, [in Aq. : Ez 12^; Sm. : Jb S^*;] a mist, esp. a 
dimness of the eyes : Ac 13^^ (v. Tr., Syn., § c).t 

d-xpcios, -ov «; xpeios, useful), [in LXX : ii Ki 6^2 (^^CT), Ep. 

Jei7»;] ^^sg^ess, unprofitable: Mt 253o, Lk IT^" (MM, s.v.).t 

tdxpeoo) (Eec. -eidw, Polyb., LXX), -(0 (■<[ a;(pcos = a;(p€ros), [in 
LXX (-€iow) for n^N ni., etc. ;] to make useless, unprofitable : pass., Eo 

312 (LXX),t 

a-XPTi<rTos, -ov, [in LXX : Ho 8^ {^W T^), Wi 2^1, Si 16\ al. ;] 

useless, tmserviceable : opp. to evxprja-ros, Phm ^^t 

Sxpi (and Epic axpis, bef. vowel (v. MM, s.v.), Eo ll^s T, Ga 3^^ 
T, WH, mg., He S^^); 1. adv., utterly (Horn.). 2. Prep. c. gen., 
until, unto, as far as; (a) of time: Ac 321 222^, Eo l^^ 5^3, i Co 411, 
II Co 31*, Ga 42, Phi 16; d. Kaipov, Lk 413, Ac 13^^; L ^s ^/xe'pa?, 

Mt 2438, Lk 120 1727, Ac 12 (t^s n- V^), ib.22; 5. tuutt/s t. ^/xe>as (t. ^. 
TavTT}^), Ac 229 231 2622; i. ijixip^v TrevTf, Ac 20"; a. av-py?, Ac 201^; o[. 
ToC vOv, Eo 822, Phi 15; L rikovi. He G^i, Ee 226; (b) of space : Ac 11* 
13« 20* (E, txt., WH, mg.) 28l^ 11 Co lO^^. i*. He 4^2, Ee I420 18^ ; 
(c) of measure or degree : a. davarov, Ac 22^, Ee 2^** 12^^ 3. As conj., 
until; (a) axpi alone: c. subj. aor., Ga 3^^ ^5 ^j t, WH, mg.) ; id. 
without 3iv (Bl., § 65, 10), Ee 7^ IS^ 203. 5 • c. indie, fut., Ee W^ ; 
(b) a. ov (i.e. a. Tovrov to) : c. indic. aor., Ac 7^^; impf., 27^3; c. subj. 
aor. (Bl., ut supr.), Lk 212*, Eo 1125, i Co 112^ I525, Ga 3^9, T, WH, 
mg. ; id. with av, Ee 225; q in(jic. pres., while. He 3^3 (gf fi€xpt)A 

Six^poy, -ov, TO, [in LXX chiefly for p:^) ;] chaff: Mt 3^2, Lk S^'^.f 

** d-i|/€u8iis, -€9 Ki^evSo?), [in LXX: Wi 7^'^ *;] free from false- 
hood, trtithful: Tit 12.t 

*t av|/ii'9os, -ov, T] (also dxpivdLov, to] dif/LvOia, rj), wormwood : as a 
proper name, Ee 8^^t 

**d4ruxos, -ov {<il/vxv), [in LXX: Wi 13^7 1429*;] inanimate, 
lifeless : 1 Co 14^.+ 

B 

B, P, pTJTa, TO, indecl., beta, b, the second letter. As a numeral, 
/r = 2; /?, = 2000. 

BdaX (Eec. BaaA), 6, 17, indecl. (Heb. byn, lord), Baal: Eo 

114 (LXX) i'}^g iem. art. here agrees with the usage of LXX, where, 

following a similar Hebrew practice {TXDI for bv'2), ala-^^yrq appears 

to have been substituted in reading for the written BaaX (cf. iii Ki 
18^9), and to account for the freq. use of the fem. art. bef. B. The 
usage, however, is not general, and in the passage cited in Eo (iii Ki 
I918), LXX reads tw B.t 



74 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

BaPuXwc, -wvos, 17 (^515, Heb. form of Assyr. Bab-ili, Gate of 
God), Babylon: Mt I".i2,i7^ Ac 7*3 (Lxx); symbolically, of Borne: 
Ee 14s 1619 17* 182.10.21, and prob. also i Pe S^^.t 

PaG^wS, V.S. /Sa^us. 
t pa0jui(5s, -ov, 6, Ion. form of /3ao-/>tos (■< ^atVw, to siep), [in LXX 
I Ki 55 (]ri5P), IV Ki 20^.10.11 (nbyo), Si 636*;] a step (iv Ki, I.e., of 
degrees of a dial) ; metapb., a degree, standing : i Ti S^^.t 

Pa0os, -€os (-ous), TO, [in LXX for "innn , nbisp, etc.;] depth: 

Mt 135, Mk 45, Ro 83'\ Eph S^^ ; t6 yS., i/ie deep sea : Lk 5* ; metapb., 
(3. ttXovtov . . . ®eov, Ro 11^3 ; to. /3. t. @eov (tbe Divine counsels), 
I Co 210 ; 17 Kara /3<j.0ov<; irTwxtia, deej) poverty, 11 Co B^.t 

M""" {<M^^), [in LXX for pay: Ps 91 (92)* Je 29 (49)8 
30(49)30*;] to deepen: Lk e-'s.t 

PaStis (gen. -£cos, vernac, Lk, I.e.; Bl., §8, 5), -tia, -v, [in LXX 
chiefly for pay ;] deep ; Jo 411 ; metapb., opOpov /SaOew; (v. supr.), 
early dawn, Lk 24i ; vttvos, Ac 20^ ; ra /?. tou Sarava, Ee 22*. t 

**tpatoi', ov, TO (also /?aioi', another form of fSaU, from the 
Egyptian), [in LXX: i Mae IS^i * ;] (freq. in Egyptian tt., v. MM, 
Exp., x); a palm-branch : Jo 12i3 {DB, i, 314).t 

BaXad/i, 6, indecl. (Heb. DJripn), as in LXX (FIJ has 6 

BaXa/Aos) ; Balaam (Nu 22-24) : 11 Pe 2i5, Ju n, Ee 2^\f 

Ba\dK, 6, indecl. (Heb. p^a), J5aZaA; (Nu 222) . -^q gi^.t 

PaXXd.'Tio*' (Eec. /3aXd-), -ov, TO, [in LXX: Jb 141^ ("lilV), 
Pr 11* (D^3), To 11* 82, Si 1833 ^2*.^ ^ ^^^^^^ . l^ 10* 1233 2235, 36,t 

pdXXcj, [in LXX for bS3 , DltZ? , TT , etc. ;] prop., of a weapon or 
missile ; then generally, of things and persons, lit. and metapb., to throw, 
cast, put, place : c. ace, seq. ek, Mt 41^, and freq. im, Mt 103*; koltu), 
Mt 4«; l^w, Mt 513; „v^^ Mt 5^9; Ik, Mk 12**; SpeVavov, Ee 14i9; 
fxdxaipav, Mt 103* . ^x^pov, Mt 2735 ; of fluids, to pour : Mt 91^, Jo 135 . 
pass., to be laid, to lie ill : Mt 92 ; e(3\i]0r] (timeless aor., M, Pr., 134), 
Jo 15«; intrans., to rush (Bl., §53, 1): Ac 2?!*. Metaph., yS. ets t. 
KapUav, Jo 132 (cf. usage in ir., without idea of violence ; also of 
liquids ; MM, Exp., x ; v. also Cremer, 120, 657 ; cf. d^f^i-, dva-, 

dvTi-, diro-, 8ia-, €k-, ifx-, rrap-e/J.-, iiri-, Kara-, fxira-, irapa-, irepi-, Trpo-, 
uvfi-, VTrep-, u7ro-/3aXXw) . 

PaTTTi^o. «y8ci7rTO)), [in LXX: iv Ki 51* (bnta). Is 21*, Jth 12^, 
Si 31 (34)30*;] to dip, hnmerse, sink; 1. generally (in Polyb., iii, 72, 
of soldiers wading breast-deep; in i, 51, of tbe sinking of ships); 
metapb,, to overwhelm (Is, I.e. ; cf. MM, Exp., x) ; c. eogn. ace, 
pdTTTKTtxa /?., Mk 1038.39, Lk 1250. Mid., 2. to perform ablutions, wash 
oneself, bathe (Ki, Jth, Si, 11. c.) : Mk 7* ; aor. pass, in same sense, 
Lk 1138. 3. Of ablution, immersion, as a religious rite, to baptize; 
(a) absol.; Mk 1*. Jo 125,2^,28 322,23,26 42 io4o_ i Co li^; 6 /SatrriCwv 
(= 6 fia-n-TLarrj^, M, Pr., 127), Mk 61*. 2*; c. acc, Jo 41, Ac 83*, i Co 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 75 

114,16. Q cogn. ace, to /3a.7rTiafji.a, Ac 19* (cf. Mk 10^^, supr.); pass., 
to be baptized, receive baptism : Mt 3^3. i*. is, Mk 16i«, Lk 3^' ^2. 21 729 

(r. ySaTTTio-yLta) ib. 30, Ac 2*1 812. 13, 36 9I8 10*7 1615, 33 IgS • mid., 2216 (M, 

Pr., 163) ; (b) with prepositions : iv, of the element, Mt 3''' ^^ Mk 
1*.5.8^ Lk 316, Jo 126,31,33 323^ Ac 1^ 238 1048 iii6_ i Co 102; cJs, of the 
element, purpose or result (Lft., Notes, 155), Mt 3" 28i9, Mk 1^, Ac 
816 193, 5^ Ro 63, I Co 113. 15 1(^2 i2i3_ Qa 32- ; c. dat., {ISan, Lk 3i«, 
Ac 1* 11^" ; virip Twv veKpwv, perh. to fulfil the wish of a dead friend, 
I Co 1529 (v. ICC, in 1.; cf. DB, i, 238 flf.; DCG, i, 169 ^ ii, 605 b; 
Cremer, 126).t 

*t pdirriCTfjia, -tos, to «; ySaTrri^o)) , prop., the result of the act, TO 
fiaTTTL^eLv, as distinct from ^aTTTtcr/ios, the act itself, immersion, 
baptism; 1. metaph., of affliction: Mk 103^.39, Lk 125o. 2. Of the 
religious rite of baptism ; (a) of John's baptism : Mt 3^ 212^, Mk Ipo, 
Lk 729 20*, Ac 122 103' 1825 193 . ^ ^eravot'as, Mk 1*, Lk 33, Ac 132* 
19*; (b) of Christian baptism; Eo 6*, Eph 4^, Col 2i2 (Tr., -/x(3, q.v.), 
I Pe 321 (cf. Cremer, 130 ; Tr., Syn. § xcix).t 

*t PaTmap.6s, -ov, 6 (•<[ ySaTTTt'^w) , prop., the act of which ^dirTicTfx.a 
is the result ; 1. a dipping, washing, lustration : Mk 7* ; of Jewish 
ceremonial. He 91''; in He 62, ySaTTTtcr/Awv 8i8ax??v (-^s), "the pi. and 
the peculiar form seem to be used to include Christian baptism with 
other lustral rites" (Westc, in 1.). 2. baptism: FIJ, Ant., 18, 5, 2 
(of John's baptism), and some Fathers (v. Soph., s.v.). Not so in NT, 
unless iv T. /SaTTTLo-fiS, in the act of baptism, Col 2^2, be read with Tr. 
(Rec, WH, E, -/xart).t 

*f ^aTm<TTr\s, -ov, 6 (<< ^aTrrt'^w) , a baptizer : of John the Baptist, 
Mt 31 1111-12 142.8 I6U 1713^ Mk 625 828^ Lk 72«.33 9i9,t 

pdiTTw, [in LXX chiefly for bnifl ;] (a) to dip : Lk 162*, Jo 132« 
(c'/xyS-, L) ; (b) to dip in dye, to dye : Ee 19i3 (Eec. ; pepavTLo-fievov, WH; 
vepipepa/x/j-evov, T; pepap.p.ivov, Swete, in 1., q.v.).t 

Pdp (Aram. : 13 , son), indecl. : fi. 'Icjva, son of Jonah, Mt 161'^, 

Rec. (L, T, WH, BapiwvS, q.v.).t 

BapaPPas, -a, 6 (Aram. X1N"13 , lit., son of a father, i.e. ace. to 
Jerome, filius magistri), Barabbas : Mt 27i^'i^'2o. 21, 26^ M]j 157,11,15^ 
Lk 2318, Jo 18*0. (In Mt 271^, some MSS. read 'Ir/o-oCv B. ; v. WH, 
App., 19f.)t 

BapdK, 6, indecl. (Heb. pia), Barak (Jg 4«) : He 1132.t 

Bapaxias, -ov, 6 (Heb. iT313i), Barachiah : Mt 233^, v.s. Zaxapia^.f 

p(ip3apo9, -ov (prob. onomatop., descriptive of unintelligible 
sounds), [in LXX: Ps 113 (114)i {ivb), Ez 213i (36) (-,yri), n Mac 22i 
425 10*, III Mac 32* * ;] barbarous, barbarian, strange to Greek language 
and culture (and also, after the Persian war, with the added sense of 
brutal, rude) : Ac 282. 4^ jj^ lu^ j Co I411, Col 311 (v. Lft., in 1., and 
Notes, 249). t 

Pap^u, -w (later form of papvvw, q.v.), [in LXX: Ex 71* (133), 



76 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

II Mac 13^ * ;J to depress, weigh down. In NT, in pass, only : Mt 26*^, 
Lk 93'-! 2134, 11 Co V 5\ I Ti 5i«.t 

3ap^a)9, adv. «/3apvs), [in LXX : /3. (^c'peiv, Ge Sl^^ (ijiyi nin) ; 
/3. dKov€iv, Is 61*^ (123 hi.)*;] heavily, luith difficulty: Mt 13^*, Ac 28^7 
(LXX).t 

BapGoXofxaios, -ov, 6 (Aram. "lobl^'^S , son of Tolmai), Bartholomew, 

the Apostle (v.s. Na^avar^X) : Mt 103, Mk 318, Lk 61*, Ac l^^.t 

Bap-iT]aous, -ov, 6 (Aram. jnUT?"!! , son of Joshua), Bar- Jesus : Ac 

136 (v.s. 'EA,;>as).t 

Bapiwk'as, -a, 6 (Aram. nJ^'lS , so7i of Jonah), Bar- Jonah, a sur- 
name of Peter : Mt W'.f 

Bap-fdPas, -a, 6 (Aram. 12 , son, as prefix to another word in- 
terpreted in Ac 43^, T^? 7rapa/cX7/o-€o)s, perh. nX123 , wh., hov^ever, should 

be rendered by TrpocftrjTeta as in 11 Es 6^'*, LXX. Deiss., BS, 309 f., 
thinks B. may be a variant of the name Bapvefiovs, son of Nebo, found 
in a Syrian Inscr., altered with a view to disguising its origin ; v. also 
Milligan, NTD, iii ; Dalman, Gr., 142), Barnabas: Ac 43« 9^^ II22.30 
12^5 13.15^ I Co 96, Ga 21.9' 13, Col 4io.t 

Pdpos, -€o?, TO, [in LXX : Jg IS'-^i (123), Jth 7*, Si I32, 11 Mac 910, 

III Mac b"^"' * ;] loeight ; (a) a iveight, burden, lit. and metaph. : Mt 201^, 
Aci 15-^, II Co 4I'', Ee 2-* ; aXAryAwv to, /3., one another's fa^dts, Ga 6^; 
€v p., burdensome : 1 Th 2^, E, txt., but v. infr. ; {b) in late Gk. (Soph., 
Lex., S.V.), dignity, authority : iv /3iipei, i Th 2^ (E, mg. ; v. Milligan, 
ICG, in l.).t 

SVN. : oy/cos, an encumbrance ; t^opriov, a burden, that which is 
borne. 

BapcraPPds (Eec. -a/Ja?), -a (Aram., son of Sabba), Barsabbas: 1. 
the surname of one Joseph: Ac 1-3. 2. The surname of one Judas: 
Ac 1522.t 

Baprifiaios, -ov, o {-pLolo';, T ; perh. Aram. ""NO^'IS , v. DB, iv, 

p. 762), Bartimmis : Mk lO^'^.t 

Paput'w, to iveigh down = ^apetn (q.v.) : Lk 213^, Eec.t 

Papos, -ela, v, [in LXX chiefly for 12.^ ;] heavy: Mt 23*. Metaph., 

burdensome : IvToXrj, i Jo 53 ; severe (perh. impressive) : cTrio-ToXi;, 11 Co 
IQi^ ; weighty : ra ^apvrepa T. vofjbov, Mt 23'^3 J amw/xara, Ac 25" ; violent, 
cruel (EV, grievous) : Xv'kos, Ac 20''^'*. t 

* PapuTifAos, -ov (-< ySapus, TLfxy), of great value, very costly : Mt 26^ 

(T, TToXvTLpOv) .'\' 

paaai'i^o, « ^acravos), [in LXX : I Ki 53, Si 4^^ and freq. in Wi, 
II, IV Mac;] 1. prop., to rub on the touchstone, put to the test. 2. to 
examine by torture, hence, generally, to torture, torment, distress : Mt 
Q6,-iQ 1424^ Mk 57 6*8, Lk 828, II Pe 2^, Ee 9^ llio 12'-^ 14i« 20i".t 

**pa(ra.'iafi6s, -ov, n {<^ fiaaavl^w), [in LXX: IV Mac 9^ 112*;] 
torture, torment : Ee 9^ 14^ 18^' i"' ^Kf 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 77 

* Pa<rafi<mis, -ov, o (<^ fiaa-avL^w) , prop., a torturer; used of a 
gaoler, Mt 18=**.t 

fid<Tavo(i, -ov, 6 (of Oriental origin), [in LXX chiefly for D^?< , rn^bj , 

and freq. in iv Mac ;] 1. prop., touchstone, a dark stone used in testing 
metals. 2. examination by torture. 3. torment, torture : Mt 4^*, Lk 

1523, 28_t 

PaCTiXeia, -as, rj (■< /SaariXevw), [in LXX chiefly for rWD^O , 
npbpo;] 1. prop, abstract, so'uemg'n^^/. royal power, dominion: Lk 1^* 
2229, Jo 1836, Ac 16, He l^, i Co IS^^; \a/3uv p., Lk 1^^^^^\ Ee IT^^; 

hovvcLi rr]v /?., ib. ^^ ; |^«v /8., ib. ^^ • Ip^^^^ai iv t. {els Trjv) /?., Mt 1628, 
Lk 23*2 . ^ ^ 0^^-^ Re 1210. 2. By meton., concrete (MM, Exp., x), 
(a) a kingdom, the territory or people over whom the king rules 
(Es 53, al.) : Mt 4* 1225. 26 24^, Mk 32* 623, l^ 4^, He 1133, al. ; (b) the 
royal majesty (cf. our phrase His Majesty), the king himself (t. a-rrip/xa 
T^s (3., IV Ki 111). 3. In LXX (Wi 6^ To 13^, al.), Targ. and NT, of 
the Messianic rule and kingdom, 17 ^. t. Oeov, t. ovpavCyv (Heb. 
D^.O^ma^O, Aram. N^OBTl KniD^O; v. Dalman, Words, 91-147; 

Cremer, 132, 658), the kingdom of God (on the equivalence of the two 
phrases, v. Dalman, op. cit., 93, 218 f.); t. dtoi, Mt 6^^ 1228, al.; t. 
oupavwv, Mt 32 41^ al. ; T. Xpto-ToG (xn'^tZTpl nobn , Targ. Jon. on 

Is 5310), Eph 55; T. Kvpi'ov, II Pe 1", Ee lli*; t. AavctS, Mk ll^O; 
absol., Tj /3., Mt 423, Ja 2\ al. The kingdom is regarded as present : 
Mt 1112, Lk 1721, Eo I41", al. ; as that which is to be consummated in 
the future, Mt 610, Mk 91, Jo 3^, 11 Pe in, al. Noteworthy phrases 
are : ^-qrelv tyjv /3., Mt 633 . Six^a-daL, Mk IQis ; KXr/povo/xelv, Mt 253* ; 
StSovai, Lk 1232 • irapaXafx/Sdveiv, He 1228 ; avTS)V {toiovt<dv) icrrlv rj (3., 
Mt 53.10 191*, Mk IQi*. Lk ISiS; Sih t^v /3., Mt 19i2; "ey^K^ t^s /?., 
Lk 1829; €vayy€At^€(T^ai, K-qpvcrauv, StayycUctv -n^v p., Lk 4*3 92,60. 
^yyiKcv rj /S., Mt 32, Mk li* ; kXcZs t^s /3., Mt I6IO; kX^ulv t'tjv fi., 
Mt 231*; vloX T^s p., Mt 812 1338 (cf. Cremer, 132, 658). 

PttCTiXcioj', -ov, TO « jSaaiKiios, q.v.), [in LXX for bs"*:! (Na 2*, 
Da 618*), ns^pn (ill Ki 31 148, IV Ki 15i9*), etc.;] 1. a capital city. 

2. Freq. in pi., to. (3., a palace : Lk 725.t 

PaaiXcios, -ov (also -a, -ov ; <C. /SacriXevs), [in LXX; Ex 19", 
De 310 (nabpn), Ex 2322, Wi 1815, m Mac 328, jy Mac 38*;] royal: 
I Pe 29 (LXX) (v. Hort, inl.).+ 

paaiXeu's, -e'ws, 6, [in LXX chiefly for "jj^p ;] a king : Mt 1« 2i ; 

used by courtesy of Herod the Tetrarch, Mt 14^; of the Eoman 
Emperor, as freq. in Koivrj (Deiss., LAE, p. 367), i Pe 2i3. i^; of the 
Christ, in the phrase 6 /8. t. 'lovSmW, Mt 22, al. ; tov 'Io-pai7X, Mk 1532, 
Jo 1*0 1213 ; of God, Mt 535, I Ti li", Ee 153 . ^, ^ao-iXe'tov, Ee I71* 
191® ; )8. T. /Sao-tXcuovTtov, I Ti 615 (on the associations of the word to 
Jewish Hellenists, v. CI. Bev., i, 7).t 



78 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

PaaiXeo'w, (■< ySao-tXcvs) , [in LXX for 1jb)D , its parts and deri- 
vatives, exc. IV Ki 15* (SUT) ;] to be king, to reign, rule : i Ti 6^* ; c. 
gen. (cl.), Mt 22^; seq. eVt', c. ace. (= Heb. bv TJ^D; Bl., § 36, 8), Lk 
133 1914,27^ Eo 514 . ^Vi T. y^?, on earth, Ee 5^0 ; of God, Ee lli*- ^^ 196; 
of Christ, Lk 1^3, i Co IS'-^*, Ee ll^* ; of Christians, Ee 5^0 20* (con- 
stative aor., M, Pr., 130), ib.« 22*. Metaph., Christians, Eo b^\ 
I Co 4^; 6avaTo<;, Eo 5^*'^^; d/Aapria, Eo 5^'^ 6^2. Ingressive aor. 
(M, Pr., 109), to begin to reign: i Co 48, Ee ll^^ 19« (Cremer, 137).t 

PaaiXiKos, -rj, -ov « /Sao-iXcv's) , [in LXX for IJ^p and its cog- 
nates ;] royal, belonging to a king : x*^P°-' ^^ -^2^*^ > icrOrj^, Ac 12^^ ; vo/x,os 
j3., a sjqireme law, " a law which governs other laws and so has a 
specially regal character" (Hort), or because made by a king {LAE, 
p. 367 3), Ja 2^; ns, one in the service of a king, a cotirtier, Jo 4*^1 *» 

(WH, mg., ^acri\(0-KOs).t 

t Pao-iXiaKos, -ov, 6 (dim. of /?ao-iX«vs), [in LXX a basilisk : Ps 90 
(91)13 (jj^g)^ ig 595 (-,y^j^)*.j pj-op^ a petty king: Jo 4*6,49^ WH, 

mg. (v.s. /3ao-iXiKos).t 

PaaiXiaaa, -77s, r) (in Attic, ySacrtXcia, /?acrtXis), [in LXX chiefly fof 
n3!?D ;] a queen : Mt 12*2, l^ ll^i, Ac 82^, Ee 18".t 

pdais, -ccos, 17 (•<;3atv(u), [in LXX chiefly for ]1N;] 1. a si«p 

(iEsch., al.). 2. Hence, a /oof (Plat. ; Wi 13^8) : Ac S^.t 

PaaKaiVo), [in LXX: De 285*. ^^ (yy-,)_ gj 146,8*.] 1. ^0 slander 
(Dem.). 2. to &%/ii by the evil eye, to fascinate, bewitch: Ga 3^t 

pa<rT<it(u, [in LXX : Jg 163o (nw:), Eu 2i«, 11 Ki 23^ iv Ki 18^* 
and Jb 21^ (xiZTJ), Si 62*, Da th Bel ^^ * ;] 1. to take up with the hands, 
to lift : Xt'^ovs, Jo lO^K 2. to bear, to carry, as a burden, and metaph., 
to enrf;^re; Mt 3^1 20^2, Mk U^\ Lk 71* 10' 1127 1427 22io, Jo I612 
19l^ Ac 32 915 1510 2P5, Eo 1118 151, Ga S^o 62. ». i7, Re 22. 3 177. 3. In 
late writers (MM, Exp., ii, iii, x), (a) to to^'e awajr ; Mt Q^'' (Is 53*, 
Heb.) ; {b) to carry off, steal : Jo 12** 20i5.t 

PttTos, -OV, 6, 17, [in LXX (always masc, as in Attic) : Ex 32"*, 
De 3316 (n?q), Jb 31*0 (ntzrya)*;] a bramble-bush: Lk 6**, Ac 730.35. 

cTTi Tov (t^?) y8., in the ])lace concerning the bush : Mk 122^, Lk 2037. t 
tpdros -ov, 6 (Heb. na), [in LXX (also ^aid, /3d8o^) : 11 Es 722*;] 

bath, a Jewish liquid measure, = /icrpT^TrJs (q.v,), or about 8f gals. : 
Lk 166.t 

Pdrpaxos, -ov, 6, [in LXX: Ex 8, Ps 77 (78)** 104 (105)30 
(yi-lSy), Wi 1910*;] a frog: Ee 16i3.t 

*t paTTaXoyeu, -w (Eec. fiarTok-, D, pXarr- = /SaTTapL^w, prob. 
onomatop. ; v. MM, s.v. ; DCG, ii, 499 b, 790^); to stammer, repeat 
idly : Mt 6^ (Cremer, 765). t 

t pScXuyiJia, -Tos, TO (<^ ySScXvaa-o)), [in LXX chiefly for n^iyiDj 
yp^ ;] aw abomination, a detestable thing : Lk I61*, Ee 17*. •'' 2127 ; to 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 79 

p. T. iprjfxioaem (Da LXX U^\ cf . I Mac 1^* ; DB, i, 12 f . ; DCG, i, 
6 f.), Mk 131*. Mt 2415 (Cremer, 138).t 

t p8e\uKT(5s, V, -oy « ySStA-vVo-o)), [in LXX : Pr IT^^ (nnrin), Si 
41*, II Mac 127*;] abominable, detestable: Tit V^ (Cremer, 137).t 

pSeXuVau {<^/3Se(j), to stink), [in LXX chiefly for mm, Vp^'] ^^ 
cl., mid. only (Attic, -TTOfxai); to mahe foul; pass., Ee 21^; mid., to 
turn away in disgust from , to detest : Eo 2^^ (Cremer, 137). t 

**P£'3aios, -ov (also -a, -ov; <i^a&w), [in LXX: Es 3^3, Wi 723, 
III Mac 5^1 T^, IV Mac 17* * ;] firm, secure : ayKvpa, He 6^^ ; metaph., 
sure (esp. "in the sense of legally guaranteed security," Deiss., BS, 
109 ; cf . two foil, words) : i-n-ayycKia, Eo 4^^ ; cXttis, ii Co 1® ; \dyos. 
He 22 ; irapprja-La, He 3" ; apxrj (t. viroa-rda-ewi) , He 3^* ; hiadrfKT], He Q^^ ; 
KA^(ris K. eKkoyrj, II Pe 1^*^ ', COmp. (-orepo-;), irpoffirjTiKos A.oyos, II Pe l^^.t 
Pcj3ai<5a., -w « /?e7^aio9), [in LXX: Ps 40 (41)12 (nsj hi.), 118 
(119)2^ (mp pi.), Ill Mac 5*2*;] to confirm, establish, secure, of things 
(cl.) : X6yov, Mk 16 [20]; cVayyeXt'a?, Eo IS^ ; of persons (DCG, ii, 605): 

I Co 18, II Co 121. Pass., I Co 16, Col 2^, He 2^ 13^ (as an Attic legal 
term, to guarantee the validity of a purchase, establish or confirm a 
title; V. next word, Cremer, 139; cf. 8ta-^.).t 

pepaiuffis, -£0)5, V « yScySatow, q.v.), [in LXX : Le 2523 (nrT'ay), 

Wi 61^* ;] confirmation : t. evayyeXtbv, Phi 1^; ets ft.. He 6i®, a phrase 
freq. in tt. of guarantee in a business transaction (Deiss., BS, 104 fif. ; 
Cremer, 140).t 

Pe'3T)Xos, -ov {<C ySatVw, whence /3rj\6^, a threshold), [in LXX chiefly 
for bh ;] 1. permitted to be trodden, accessible (v. DCG, ii, 422^); 
hence, 2. (opp. to lepo's) unhallowed, profane : of things, I Ti 4J &^^, 

II Ti 21"; of men, i Ti P, He 12i« (cf. Kotvos; Cremer, 140).t 

t PePtjXow, -to « ySc'^T/Xos), [in LXX chiefly for bbn ;] io profane : 
T. (rd/3(3aTov, Mt 12^ T. Upw, Ac 24« (Cremer, 141).t 
SVN. : Koivow, q.v. 

Be^cpou'X (WH, App., 159, Eec, y3«X^y8ov'X), 6, indecl. (Heb. 
b:?3 , lord, and the Talmudic bl27 , from ^3? , dung (Dalman, O., 137n), 
or perh. by} , habitation, but, v. DB, iv, 409 f. ; DCG, i, 181). The 
AV, EV, Beelzebub, comes through Vg. from iv Ki 1^, 3117 bv2. , lord 

of flies (LXX, Bct'aX p,ma, Sm., fieeXleftov/S), Beelzebul, Beelzebub, a 
name of Satan: Mt 102^ 122*.27^ Mk 322, Lk Ili5,i8,i9_t 

BeXiaX, o, indecl. (Heb. bv^^b'^, worthlessness, but v. DB, i, 268), 

Belial, a name of Satan : 11 Co 61^, Eec. See next word.t 

BeXiap, 6, indecl. (another form of previous word, " due to harsh 
Syriac pronunciation," or else <C Heb. nr^ b^ , lord of the forest), 

Beliar, a name of Satan : 11 Co 61* (v. DB, i, 269). t 

*PcX6i'i(], -rj<;, r) (<; ySe'Aos), 1. a sharp point, as of a spear. 2. a 
needle : Lk 182^ (Eec. pa</)is, q.v.).t 



80 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

P^Xos, -€os, TO «| fidWo)), [in LXX chiefly for yu >] o, missile, 

a dart : Eph G^^.t 

PcXticjc, -ov (gen. -ovos), comp. of aya^os, [in LXX chiefly for 
a"llD ;] neut. as adv., better, very well : ii Ti 1^^ (also Ac lO^^ D). On 
elative use in these passages, v. M, Pr., 78, 236. t 

BeKta/ieii', (Rec. -/xtv), 6, indecl. (Heb. ]''a^53), Benjamin : Ac 13^^, 

Ro 11\ Phi 3*, Re 7^t 

BepciKT) (elsewhere BepevLKr), Macedonian form of ^epevLKt], cf. 
Veronica, Victoria), -r;?, 17, Bernice, Berenice, dau. of Herod Agrippa I : 
Ac 2513. 23 263o.t 

Be'poia, -as, r], Bero&a, a city of Macedonia : Ac 17^°' ^'.t 

Bepoialos, -a, -ov, BeroRan : Ac 20*. t 

Becip, 6, indecl. (Heb. 11^51) , Beor, father of Balaam : 11 Pe 2*' 

(Rec. Boo-op).+ 

BT]Oapap(i, -as (Rec. -pa, indecl. ; Heb. TTay 11!^^, place of crossing; 

-apa/Sa, R, mg.), Bethabara : Jo l^s, Rec. (WH, R, Br]6avLa.).f 

BriBavia, -as (also -ta, indecl., Lk 19^*^ and in B*, Mk 11^), r], 
(Heb. tV2S[ JT'Sl , house of affliction, ace. to Jerome, or perh., house of 

dates, cf. Bethphage), Bethany; 1. a village fifteen furlongs from 
Jerusalem, the modern El Azertyeh : Mt 211^ 26^, Mk S^'^ (WH, 
mg.) IV' 11' 12 143^ Lk 1929 2450, Jo 111' 18 121. 2. A place on E. 
bank of Jordan : Jo 1^^ (R, mg., BrjOafSapd, q.v.).t 

BTjOeaSd, rj, indecl. (deriv. uncertain, v. Westc. on Jo 5^, and 
DB, i, 279), Bethesda, a pool in Jerusalem : Jo 5^, Rec. (BT^e^a^a, WH, 
B77^o-ai8a, WH, mg.).t 

BT]0ta0(£, 7}, indecl. (perh. Aram. SJV\ IT'S, house of olives) 
Bethzatha : Jo 5^, WH (Rec. Br/^eo-Sa, q.v.).t 

BTjOXe^fi, 17, indecl. (Heb. DFI^ TT^. , house of bread), Bethlehem, a 

town 6 m. S. of Jerusalem : Mt 2^' ^' «• s. i^ Lk 2*' ^^, Jo 7*2.t 

BTj0(rai8(£ (Rec. -craiSa), and -Sdv (Mt, Mk, 11. c), 17, indecl. 
(Syr., hoiise of fish), Bethsaida, a town on NE. shore of the Sea of 
Galilee : Lk 9^*^. It is generally supposed that a second B. on the W. 
shore is referred to in Mt ll^i, Mk 6** 822, Lk lO^^, Jo 1*^ 1221 {DB, i, 
282 f. ; but v. Swete on IVIk 6**). 2. v.l. for B-qO^aed, BrjOca-Sd, Jo 52.t 
BT]0<l>aYT] (L, -yrj), rj, indecl. (Aram. '^SSITI^^ , house of unripe figs; 
Dalman, Gr., 191), Bethphage : Mt 21^, Mk 11^, Lk 1929.t 

pTJfia, -Tos, TO «y8atVa>), [in LXX: De 2^ (^nip), Ne 8* (blJO), 
I Es 9*2, Si 193*> 459, II Mac 1326 * .] i_ ^ ^^^^^ g^^i^g^ p^ce : Ac 7^. 2. a 
raised place, a platform reached by steps, originally that in the Pnyx at 
Athens from which orations were made ; freq. of the tribune or tribunal 
of a Roman magistrate or ruler: Mt ^V^, Jo 19^3, Ac 122\ 18i2,i«,i7 
256,10, 17; y3. .rov Oeov, Ro 1410 ; r. XpLCTTov, II Co 5io.t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 81 

♦♦t pi^poXXos, -ov, 6, ^, [in LXX: To 13^^ (-vAXiov in Ex 282», 
DiTJiS')* ;] beryl, a jewel of sea-green colour : Be 2V^.f 

fiia, -as, 17, [in LXX for "SJISI , etc.;] strength, force, violence : Ac 
526 2135 247 274i.t 

^idlu (•< ySia), and depon. -o/xai, [in LXX for ^^IQ , lYQ , etc. ;] to 
force, constrain, rare in act. (poet, and late prose), but found in cl. in 
pass., and so perh. /Jia^erat, siiffereth violence, Mt 11^^, EV (but v. infr.), 
whether (a) in good sense, of disciples (Thayer, al.), or {h) in bad 
sense, of the enemies of the kingdom (Meyer, in 1. ; Dalman, Words, 
139 ff. ; Cremer, 141 ff.). Mid., advanceth violently, Mt, I.e. (Deiss., BS., 
258 ; Banks, v. ref . in DCG, ii, 803 f .) ; seq. cis, to press violently, or 
force one's way into, Lk 16^^ (v. ICC, in 1., and in Mt, I.e. ; cf. irapa- 
/3id^oixaL and v. MM, s.v.).t 

pi'aios, -a, -ov «y3ta), [in LXX for Brj^, 7;?, ly , etc.;] 

violent : Ac 2^.f 

*tpia<mfis, -ov, 6 {<C/3i(iCio), late form of /Staras; 1. strong, forceful. 
2. violent (Philo) : Mt II12 (see /3ia^a)).t 

*t PipXapiSiow, -ov, TO (dim. of fii^Xdpiov, dim. of /JiySXos), a little 
book: Ee lO^-s (WH, ySiySXiW, T2.7 /3tJ3Ai8a/>iov)9. 10. Not hitherto 
found elsewhere. t 

^i^XiStipioi', -ov, TO, V.S. /SifiXapihiOV. 

PipXi'of, -or, TO (dim. of ySiySXos, q.v.), [in LXX also in the 
alternat. form ftv/^-, chiefly for Igp and the most freq. of the cognate 

forms;] 1. a paper, letter, writteyi document: /3. dwoa-Taariov, bill of 
divorce, Mt 19^, Mk 10*. 2. a book, a roll : Lk 4I'. 20, Jo 20^0 2125, 
Ga 310, II Ti 413, He 9^9 10", Ee l^^ 5i-» 6^* lO^ 20^2 227-i»; p. t. ^u,^s., 
Ee 138 178 2012 2127.t 

Pi'pXos, -ov, 17 (variant form of ySu^Xos, the Egyptian papyrus, 
paper made from its fibrous coat), [in LXX for ipQ , the form /8v/8- 

being sometimes used;] a book, a roll, used much less freq. than 
fii^Xiov, and with a "connotation of sacredness and veneration" 
(MM, Exj)., x), Mt 1\ Mk 122^, Lk 3* 20*2 Ac I20 7*2 igi^; p. r. (;u>^s. 
Phi 43, Ee 3* 20i5.t 

PiPpolaKu, poet, and late prose, [in LXX for bDH ;] to eat : Jo 
6i3.t 

BiQuvia, -as, Bithynia, a province in Asia Minor : Ac 16^, i Pe 1^.+ 
^ios, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for D'^p^;] 1. period or course of life, 

life : Lk 8^*, i Ti 22, 11 Ti 2*, i Jo 2^^. 2. living, livelihood, means (in 
Pr 311* for Di^^; v. DCG, ii, 39^): Mk 12**, Lk 8*3 I512.30 2I*, 

I Jo 3i7.t 

SvN. : C'^-q, is life intensive, "vita qu§, vivimus," the vital 
principle; ySios, life extensive, "vita quam vivimus," (1) the period of 
life, (2) the means by which it is sustained. Hence, in cl., ^., being 
confined to the physical life common to men and animals, is the 

6 



82 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

inferior word (cf. zoology, biography). In NT, ^wi^ is elevated into the 
ethical and spiritual sphere (cf. Tr., Syn., § xxvii). 

pi6cu, -w «/86os), [in LXX: Pr 7^ 9^ (n^n), Jb 29^8, Wi 4* i<\ 
1223, Si 40^8, IV Mac 5^2 n^«*;] to spend life, to live : r. xpovov fiiwa-at 
(cl., more freq. 2 aor,, -vat), i Pe 4^ (cf. Jb, l.c.).t 

Syn. : ^(iw (q.v.). 
**tpiWis, -6W9, 17 (<y8idco), [in LXX: Siprol}^*-^ manner of life: 
Ac 26^t 

* PiwTiKos, -1], -o'v (■< /3ios), pertaining to life, hence, worldly (Field, 
Notes, 171) : Lk 2P^ i Co G^.^.t 

3\ap6p6s, -a, -dv «y8\a7rTO)), [in LXX: Pr 1026*;] hurtful: 

I Ti 69.t 

pXdTTTo,, [in LXX : Pr 252o, To 122, wi lO^ IS^, 11 Mac I222, 
IV Mac 9^ * ;] to hurt, injure : c. ace, Mk IG^^^]^ Lk 4^5. t 

pXaordi/u, [in LXX for HDS , etc.;] 1. to sp-out: Mt 1326, 
Mk 42'', He 9*. 2. In late Gk., causal, to make to grow, produce: 
c. ace, Ja 5i8_f 

BXciaTos, -ov, 6, Blastus, chamberlain of Agrippa : Ac 122<'.t 

p\aor<j)Tifji^w, -w «/SAao-<^r;/>ios), [in LXX: IV Ki 19* (HD"' hi.) 
ib.«'22 (p|ia pi.), Is 525 (|,j^3 hith.), Da LXX 329<96) (-,brzr nnx). To 118, 

Da TH Bel ^, 11 Mac 2 * ;] 1. to spteak lightly or profanely of sacred things 
(in cl., opp. of €vcf)7]ixioi), esp. to speak impiously of God, to blaspheme, 
speak blasphemously : absol., Mt 9^ 26^5, Mk 2\ Jo lO^", Ac 26^\ 1 Ti I20, 

II Pe 212; T. e€6v, Ac 1937, Ee I611.21; r^ Svofjia T. 6€oZ, Ee IS" 16^; 
86^a^, Ju 8, II Pe 210 ; ek t6 nvei/xa to 5ytov, Mk 329, Lk 12i». 2. to 
revile, rail at, slander : absol., Lk 22*^*, Ac 13*^5 18^, i Pe 4* ; c. ace, 
Mt 2739, Mk 328 1529, Lk 2339, Tit 32, Ja 2^, Ju^o. Pass. : Eo 22* 38 
I416, I Co 1030, I Ti 61, Tit 2^, 11 Pe 22 (Cremer, 570).t 

p\a(T4)Ti|xia, -a?, -7 {<C/3Xd(T(f>rj,jLo<;), [in LXX: Ez 3512 (nsKj), Da 

TH 329 (96) (nbizr) , To 118, J Mac 26, II Mac 8* 103^ 152* * ;] (a) railing 
slander : Mt 123i 15i9, Mk 328 722, Eph 43i, Col 38, i Ti 6*, Ju9, Ee 29 
(b) spec, impious speech against God, blasphemy : Mt 26^*, Mk 14^* 
Lk 521, Jo 1033, Ee 13^ ovofxa y8Aaa</)7;^tas, Ee 131 173; c. gen. obj. 
Mt 1231; Trpds T. 6(01', Ee 13« (Cremer, 570; DB, i, 305; DCG 
ii, 423).t 

p\da<j>T)|jios, -ov (<^ /SAacr-, of uncertain deriv., v. Thayer, 
Boisacq ; + <^7//Ar?, speech), [in LXX : Is 663 (|^j< '•[12.'0) , Wi 1^, Si 3i« 

II Mac 928 10*' 36 * ;] (a) evil-speaking, slanderous, blasphemous : Ac 611 
II Ti 32, II Pe 211 (cf. Ju 9) ; {b) as subst. a blasphemer : i Ti li^ 
(Cremer, 570). t 

* PXe'fjLp.a, -Tos, TO {<C /3Xe7r<ji) , a look, a glance: /SXe/xfiarL koI aKofj, 
II Pe 28, sight and hearing, a sense not found for yS. in Gk. lit., but 
perh. recognized in the vernacular {ICC, in l.)t 

pXe'tro), [in LXX chiefly for nXT , also for TOG, etc.;] 1. of 
bodily sight; (a) to see, have sight (opp. to Tv<^Xds ctvat) : Mt 1222, 
Jo 9^ Ac 99, Eo 118, jje 318^ ^1. ; (b) to perceive, look (at), see : absol., 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 83 

Ac 1»; c. ace, Mt 7^, Mk 5^\ Lk 6*1, Jo 129, ^j . ^^^^^^ Ac 129; 
yvvalKa, Mt 528 • ^^|3\{ov, Ee 53. * ; t. /Skewo/xeva, II Co d^s. 2. Metaph., 
of mental vision; (a) to see, perceive, discern: absol., Mt 13^^, Lk 8^**; 
Bi i(r67rTpov, 1 Co 1312; c. acc, He 2^ 1025; geq. 5„^ He 3^^, Ja 222; (jj 
to consider, look to, take heed : absol., Mk 132^' ^3 ; c. acc, i Co l^^, al. ; 
seq. TTtus, c. indie, Lk S^^, i Co 3^^ Eph 5^^ ; ggq. „', c. indie, Mk 42* ; 
seq. tis TT/joo-wTTov, of partiality, Mt 22l^ Mk 121*. Colloq. (for ex. 
from TT., V. Deiss., LAE, 122; M, Pr., 107; MM, Exp., x; Milligan, 
NTD, 50), ft. iavT6v : Mk 13^; seq. Iva fi^, 11 Jo^; ft. AttS, Mk S^s 12*8; 
seq. yu.17 (cl. opav fjirj), c. fut. indie, Col 2*, He 3^2- i,j_ q ^or. subj., 
Mt 24*, Mk 13*. 3. Of situation and direction (Lat. specto), to look, 
face (towards), places, etc. (seq. Trpd?, Xen, Hell., vii, 1, 17; Ez 

4023,24^. ggq na_Ta, C. aCC, Ac 27^2 (cf. dva-, ttTTO-, 8ta-, €/*-, CTTt-, TTCp-, 

Trpo-ftKiww), V. DCG, i, 446; ii, 596. 

*tpXT]Teos, -a, -ov (gerundive of ySaAAw), (that which) one must put: 
Lk 538.f 

Bodl, v.s. Boos. 

Boa»'T)pY^s, indecl. (on the derivation, v. Dalman, Gr., 144; 
Words, 42; Swete, M;., I.e.; DCG, i, 216), Boanerges: Mk 3^7.+ 

podu, -w « ySoT;), [in LXX chiefly for pyi , pys , Nip ;] 1. absol., 
to cry, call out : Mt 3^, 27*^, Mk 1^ 15=^*, Lk 3* 9^8 IS^s, Jo 123, Ac 8^ 
17« 252^ Ga 427. 2. C. dat., to call on for help (Heb. by pyr , Ho 7^*, 
al.), Lk 187.t 

SVN.: Ka\i(i}, to call, invite, summon; Kpd^io, to cry, harshly or 
inarticulately, as animals; Kpauya^w, intensive of Kpa^w. ftodta ex- 
presses emotion, whether joy, fear, etc. 

Bo^s, 6, v.s. Boos. 

PoT], ^s, 17, [in LXX for npVl , etc. ;] a cry : Ja 5*.t 

poi^ecia, -as, ri (v.s. ftorjOeoy), [in LXX for 1}^ , etc.;] help: 

He 41* ; pi., helps, ^'/rapping," a technical nautical term (MM, Exp., 
x; DB, ext., 367): kcTI^''.^ 

PoTjO^w, -w {<^ftori + Bed), to run), [in LXX chiefly for 17^;] to 
come to aid, to help, siiccour : absol., Ac 2128 . q ^^t., Mt 152^, Mk 922. 24 
Ac 169, II Co 62 (LXX), He 2i8, Ee 12i«.t 

por]0os, -ov (v.s. ftorjOew), [in LXX chiefly for 17^;] 1. (poet. -00s), 
hasting to the war-cry (Hom.). 2. helping, auxiliary ; as subst. (Hdt.), 
a helper: He 136(i'XX).t 

poOocos, -ov, 6 (= ftoOpos, more freq. in cl.), [in LXX chiefly for 
rne;] a pit: Mt 12^1 15^\ Lk 639 (cf. DB, iii, 885; JDCG, ii, 367).t 

poXt^, -^s, 17 «;8(£Ua>), [in LXX: Ge 21^6 (nnto), 11 Mac 5^, m 
Mac 52« *;]a throw ; XWov ft. (Thue, v, 65, 2), a stone's throw : Lk 22".t 
*tpoXi^w (^[ySoA/s, in sense of sounding -lead), to heave the lead, take 
soundings : Ac 2728.t 

tpoXis, iSos, r) {<CftaiXXw), [in LXX for yri , n'T, etc.;] a dart, 
javelin : He 122°, Eee (LXX).t 



84 MANUAL GBEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Boos and Boe's (RV, Bod^ Rec Boot,), o, indecl. (Heb. 7^3), Boaz 
(Ru 21) : Mt 16, Lk S^^f 

P6pPopos, -ov, 6, [in LXX: Je 45 (38)« (la-^M)*;] mud, filth: ii Pe 

222 + 

Poppas, -a (Attic contr. of Bopc'as, the North wind personified), [in 
LXX for ]iB^;] 1. Boreas, the North wind. 2. the north: Lk IS^^, 

Re 21i3.t 

^oaKw, [in LXX for nv^;] prop., of a herdsman, to feed: Mt 8^^, 
Mk 51*, Lk 33* 15^5; metaph., of Christian pastoral care, Jo 21^5, 17, 
Pass., of cattle, to feed, graze : Mt B^o, Mk 5^\ Lk B^'-^.t^ 

SVN. : TToifiaiveiv, to tend, shepherd, a wider term, including over- 
sight as well as feeding (v. Tr., Syn., § xxv). 

Boaop, V. Bcwp. 

Poxdi^, -r;s, 7] «/?oV»ca)), [in LXX for n^y, Nizr^, Txn;] 1. 

grass, fodder. 2. green herb: He 6^.t 

Syn. : Xaxavov, a garden herb, a vegetable. 

Porpos, -uos, 6, [in LXX for bstjr^ ;] a cluster of grapes : Re 14^' 

(of. a-Ta<^v\rj) .^ 

pooXcurVis, -ov, 6 {<:/3ov\€vw), [in LXX: Jb 3" 12i7 (|^y^)*;] a 
councillor, a senator ; of a member of the Sanhedrin : Mk 15*^, Lk 
235o.t 

PouXcuw {<^PovXrj), [in LXX chiefly for |^jr;] to take counsel, 
deliberate, resolve. In mid., 1. to take counsel with oneself, consider : 
seq. tl, Lk 14^i. 2. to determine with oneself, resolve : c. inf., Ac 5^" 
273^ C. ace, II Co V' ; seq. cva, Jo IV^ 12^^ (cf. -rrapa-, <rv^-).f 

PouXii, -rj^, rj (<^ y8ov\o/xai), [in LXX freq. for nxy ;] counsel, 
purpose (in cl., esp. of the gods) : Lk 23*1, Ac 428 538 191 2712, 42 . 
pi., I Co 45 ; of the Divine purpose, He 6^'' ; t. ^ovXrjv t. OiXrjfj.aTO'; 
airov, Eph 111 . ^, ^. o^oC, Lk T^o, Ac 2^3 1336 2027.t 

pouXtjixa, -T05, TO «y8ovA.o/Aai), [in LXX: Pr 910 (nri), II Mac 
155, IV Mac 818 * ;] purpose, will : Ac 27*3^ Ro d^^, i Pe 43.t 

SVJV.: BiX-qfia. 

PouXo/iai, [in LXX for |^Bn , niN , |^3r , etc. ;] to will, wish, desire, 
purpose, be minded, implying more strongly than diXat (q.v.), the 
deliberate exercise of volition (v. Hort on Ja li^) : c. inf. (M, Pr., 205 ; 
Bl., § 69, 4), Mk 1515, Ac 528.33 12* 1537 1720 IB15.27 1930 2230 2328 27« 
2818, II Co 115, I Ti 69, He 61^, 11 Jo 12, m Jo 10, Ju * ; c. ace, 11 Co l^^ ; 
c. ace. et inf.. Phi I12, i Ti 28 51^, Tit 38, 11 Pe 3^; of the will making 
choice between alternatives, Mt li9 1127, Lk IO22, Ac 2520, i Co 12ii, 
Ja 3* 4* ; d /SovXn (cl., a courteous phrase = 6iXei^, colloq. ; Bl., § 21, 
8; LS, S.V.), Lk 22*2 • q gubjc, adding force to a question of delibera- 
tion (Bl., § 64, 6), Jo 183'' . povXiqOii'i, of set purpose (v. Hort, in 1.), 
Ja 118 ; impf., efiovXofjirjv ( = cl. ^ovXc'/jL-qv av ] Bl., § 63, 5 ; Lft., Phm. ^^), 
Ac 2522, Phm 13 (v. also Cremer, 143).t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 85 

PoukcJs, -ov, 6 (a Cyrenaic word, Hdt., iv, 199), [in LXX chiefly for 
nyaa;] a hill: Lk 35(lxx) 233o.t 

Pous, (3o6<i, 6, -q, [in LXX chiefly for ij?^ ;] an ox, a cow : Lk 13" 

146. 19^ Jo 214. IS, I Co 99 (^^^\ I Ti 5i8.t 

* PpaPciok, -ov, TO («< /SpayScvs, an Umpire), a prize in the games : 
I Co 924 ; metaph., of the Christian's reward. Phi 3i*.t 

** ppaPco'u (<;3pa/?ev?, aw Umpire), [in LXX : Wi 10^2 * ;] (a) prop., 
to act as umpire; hence, {b) generally, to arbitrate, decide (Isocr., 
Dem.; Lft., Col., I.e.; MM, s.v.) : Col 3^*; (c) in some late writers, 
to direct, rule, control (so in Col., I.e., ace. to Thayer, s.v., Meyer, 
in 1.), (cf. Kara- /3 pa 13 evo)).f 

ppaSuVu «;8pa8vs), [in LXX: Ge 43io (ma hith.), De T^", 
Is 46^3 (-inN pi.), Si 32 (35)i8*;] 1. trans., to retard (Soph., Is, I.e.). 
2. More freq. intrans., to be slow, to tarry : i Ti 3", 11 Pe 3^.t 

*t ppaSuirXoc'u, -w {<C /3pa8v<:, ttAovs), to sail slowly : Ac 27''.t 

* ppaSus, -cia, -V, slow : €is to Xakija-ai, Ja 1^^ ; metaph., of the 
understanding : ft. t. KapSia, assoc. with dvoT/ro?, Lk 24^*. t 

*Ppa8oTiis, -»}tos, rj, slowness : 11 Pe 3^.t 
fipaxiiav, -ovos, 6, [in LXX, ft. KvpCov, freq. for njiT. y^lT ;] the 

arm ; as in OT, ft. Kvpiov, metaph., for the Divine power : Lk 1*^, 
Jo 1238 (LXX)^ Ac 13i7.t 

Ppaxus, -eta, -V, [in LXX chiefly for layp ;] short ; (a) of time ; 

short, little: ftpa-xy, Ac 5^*; /actci ft., Lk 22*®; ft. n, a short time, 
He 2'^. ^, EV, mg. ; (6) of distance : Ac 27^® ; (c) of quantity or value, 
little, few: Jo 6^, He 2''»^, EV, txt. ; pi., hia ftpaxeav, in few words. 
He 1322.t 

**Pp^4.os, -ovs, to, [in LXX: Si 19ii, i Mac le^, 11 Mac 6^0, 
III Mac 5*^, IV Mac 4^**;] 1. an unborn child : Lk l^i. •**. 2. a new- 
born child, a babe: Lk 2^2, le igis^ Ac 7l^ i Pe 2^; 6.-Kh ftpe<f>ov<;, from 
infancy, 11 Ti 3".t 

pp^X«, [in LXX chiefly for 1130;] 1. <o wet: Lk 738.**. 2. In 
late Gk. writers and vernac. = vctv, to send rain, to rain (Kennedy, 
Sources, 39, 155) : Mt 5" ; trop., ft. Tzvp k. Bilov, Lk 17^^ ; impers., 
ftp^X^i, it rains : Ja 5^"^ ; with vctos as subj., Ee ll^.t 

PpofTT), -^s, V, [in LXX for Dm;] thunder: Mk 3^^ Jo 1229, 

Ee 45 61 85 103. " 1119 142 1618 19«.t 

tppoxVi, -^s, V «/8/)£», [in LXX: Ps 67 (68)», 104 (105)32 
(DTS^a)*;] 1. = ftpoxiT6<i, a wetting (in tt., of irrigation in Egypt; 

Deiss., LAE, 77). 2. As in MGr. (Kennedy, Sources, 153), = wcto's, 
rain: Mt 725.27.t 

pp<5xos, -ov, 6, [in LXX: Pr 6* (Tj 721 (p^D) 2225 (tzrpto), 

III Mac 48 * ;] a noose, a slip-knot, a halter : metaph., a restraint (not, 
as AV, E, txt., a snare) : i Co l^^.f 



86 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

ppuYHiiJs, -ov, 6 KySpv'xo)), [in LXX : Pr 19^2 (nnj), Si 51**;] a 

biting, a gnashing of teeth : Mt 8^^ 13*2. so 22i3 24^1 25^\ Lk 1328.t 

Pp6x<o (Attic, /SpvKco), [in LXX : Jb le^ow, Ps 34 (35)'^ 36 (37)^2 

111 (112)1", La 2^6 (pin)*;] 1. to bite or eat greedily. 2. to gnash, 

grind, with the teeth : Ac 7**.t 

*j3pua>, poet., late prose and vernac, to be full to bursting; 1. of 

the earth producing vegetation. 2. Of plants putting forth buds. 

3. Of springs, to gtish with water : Ja 3i^t 

Ppa)|jia, -Tos, TO (cf. /Sifipwa-Kw), [in LXX chiefly for b^X;] food: 

Ro 1415.20, I Co 88.13 103; pi., Mt 1415, Mk Ti^, Lk 311 9i3, i Co 6i3, 
I Ti 43, He 910 139; trop., of spiritual food, Jo 43*, i Co 32 (cf. /?pio-is).+ 
PpoJai^ios, -ov «^p«o-i?), [in LXX: Le 1923, Ne 92^, Ez 4712 
(bDhfa)*;] eatable: Lk 24".t 

Ppwais, -ews, rj (cf. jSi^pwaKU)), [in LXX chiefly for parts and 
derivatives of bax ;] 1. eating : ji. koI ir6a-i<;, Ro I41", Col 2^*^ (v. Lft., 
ICC, in 1.); c. gen. obj., i Co 8* ; metaph., corrosion, rust: Mt 61^.20. 
2. As also in cl. (Horn., al.) = /3pQyfxa, food : Jo 62^^, n Co 910, 
Col 31^ (EV, but V. supr.). He 12i^ ; metaph., of spiritual nourishment, 

Jo 432 62'1" 55.t 

**^ueil<^ «y8i'^o?), [in LXX: 11 Mac 12**;] trans., to cause to 
sink, to sink: metaph., cis oXedpov, i Ti 6^; pass., to sink, intrans. : 
Lk 5'.t 

M^s, -ov, 6, [in LXX : Ex 15^, Ne 9" (nbiSO), Ps 67 (68)22 

68 (69)2.15 106 (107)2* (n^isp)*;] 1. the bottom. 2. the depth of the 

sea, the deep sea : 11 Co 1125.t 

*+ Pupo-eu's, -e'oDs, 6 « /Svpara, a hide), late form for ySvpo-oSei/^i^s, a 
tanner : Ac 9*3 10"- 32.t 

Puo-cricos, -T], -ov (<^ 0vcrcro<;), [in LXX chiefly for Uhp , yi3 , etc. ;] 
made of /Jt'o-o-os, fine linen : Re I812. i** 19*' 1*.+ 

Pu'acros, -ov, rj (cf. Heb. "J^Q), [in LXX chiefly for WW, |^n;] 
byssus, a fine species of flax, also the linen made from it : Lk 16i^.t 

Pwfios, -oO, 6 «/3aiVw), [in LXX (Hex.) for n^Tp , in Proph., 
chiefly for nps;] 1. any raised place, a platform. 2. an altar: 
Ac 1723 (cf. BvaLaarrjpiov and V. DB, i, 75). t 



TappaGd (Rec. -^5), rj, indecl., Gabbatha, the Greek trans- 
literation of an uncertain Aramaic word {DB, s.v. ; Dalman, Words, 
7), used as the equivalent of XlOoo-tpihtov, stone pavement : Jo 19i3.t 

raPpn^X, 6, indecl. (Heb. bN*"'15a, hero of God), the archangel 

Gabriel : Lk li^. 26.t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 87 

*t ydyYpaiKa, •r}<;, rj, a gangrene, an eating sore, which leads to 
mortification : ii Ti 2^^.t 

rdZ, 6, indecl. (Heb. 13), Gad (Ge 30^' 49^3, al.) : Ee T^.t 

raSaptji'os, -^, -6v {<C. TaSapd, Gadara, the capital of Peraea), 
Gadarene, of Gadara : Mt S^s (Rec. Ttpyea-rjvwv), Mk 5\ Eec. (Edd., 
Vepaa-qvwv), Lk 8^"' 3^, Rec. (Edd., T€paa-rjvuiv)A 

rdla -rjs, 7} (Heb. njy), Gaza, in OT, one of the five chief cities of 

the Philistines : Ac 826.+ 

+ Y<i|;a, -i;s, rj (a Persian word), [in LXX for j^T^a, ii Es 5^"^ 6^ 
720, 21^ Es 47 ; 1:^73 , II Es 721 ; Is 39^ * ;] treasure : Ac S^^.t 

+ Ya^o-(J)uXdKioi', -ov, to (■<[ y^t^ct, <f)vXaKrj), [in LXX chiefly for 
n3«?b , n3V2 (iv Ki 2311, al.), once for 0^33 (Es 3^) ; t6 y., ra y., of a 

temple treasury, Ne 10^^, 11 Mac 3^, al. ;] treasury : also, apparently, 
the trumpet-shaped chests into which the peoples' temple-offerings 
were thrown {DB, iv, 96 ; DCG, ii, 748) : Mk 12". *\ Lk 21i, Jo 820.+ 

faios, -ov, 6 (Faios, Rec), Gains, the name of a Christian ; 1. of 
Macedonia : Ac 1929. 2. Of Derbe : Ac 20*. 3. Of Corinth : Ro 1623, 
I Co 1^*. 4. The one to whom in Ep. Jo is addressed : in Jo ^+ 

ydXa, -aKTos, to, [in LXX for Q^n ;] milk: i Co 9". Metaph., of 
elementary Christian teaching : i Co 32, He 5^2, 13 . ^^ AoyiKoi/ ahoXov y., 
the rational (spiritual) genuine milk (v. Hort, in 1.), i Pe 22 (in support 
of AV, milk of the word, v. ICC, in 1.).+ 

ra\dTT)s, -ov, 6 (originally syn. with cl. KcAt?;?; cf. i Mac 82, and 
V. next word), a Galatian : Ga 3^.t 

TaXaTia, -as, 17, Golatia ; 1. a gentilic region in Asia Minor, 
settled by Gauls (iii/B.c). 2. A Roman Province which included this 
region {DB, ii, 85 ff.) : i Co 16^, Ga I2, 11 Ti 410 (T, Tr., mg., VaXXiav), 
I Pe 11.+ 

ra\aTiK<5s, -ri> "o'v (v. previous word), Galatian, belonging to 
Galatia : Ac 16« 1823.+ 

*ya\-l^vr\, -rjs, 17, a calm : Mt 826, Mk 439, Lk 82*.+ 

TaXiXaia, -as, rj (Heb. b''!?an , the circle, district), Galilee, the name 

of the northern region of Palestine in NT times : F. twv i6vwv, Mt 

415 (LXX). O^Xaaaa t^s T., Mt 1529 (cf. Jo 6^). 

raXiXatos, -am, -alov, Galilcean : Mt 2669, Mk 14"o, Lk W^ 2 2259, 

236, Jo 4«, Ac 111 27 537.+ 

raXXi'a, -as, rj, Gaul : T., Tr., mg., for TaAaTta, II Ti 410.+ 
TaXXiwi', -tovos, 6, Gallic, proconsul of Achaia : Ac I812. 1*. i7 f 
rafittXiiiX, o (Heb. ^^^b03), Gamaliel the elder, a Pharisee and 

Doctor of the Law : Ac 53* 223.+ 

*Ya|Jiea), -w, [in LXX: Es 103, 11 Mac 1425, jy Mac 169*;] ^q 
marry ; 1. of the man, to marry, take to wife (ducere) : absol., Mt 
1910 2225, 30 2438, Mk 1225, Lk 1727, 2034. 35^ I Co 728. 33 ; c. ace. : Mt 532 
199, Mk 617 IQii, Lk 1420 1618. 2. Of the woman, (a) mid. (and in late 



88 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

writers, pass.), to give oneself in marriage, marry {nuhere) : i Co 7'®; 
(b) in Hellenistic (M, Pr., 159), act. (as of the man), to marry : absol., 
1 Co 728.84, J Tj 511,14. c ace, Mk lO^^. (3) Of both sexes: absol., 
iTi43, iCo79'iO'38.t 

*t yafii^o) (<^ ya/Aos), to give in marriage, a daughter : i Co 7^®. Pass., 
Mt 2230 2438, Mk 12''*, Lk 17^7 20^^ (WH, mg., ya/xLo-KovTu; cf. «- 

ya fXL^u)) .f 

*YOfiiaKw, = yafi'i^uy, q.v. : Lk 203*. 35, WH, mg. (Arist.).+ 
ydfios, -ov, 6, [in LXX for nporp ;] 1. a wedding, esp. a wedding- 
feast: Mt 228. 10. ".12^ Jo 21-3, Ee 19^.9; pi. (Field, Notes, 16), Mt 
222-*. » 2510, Lk 1236 148. 2. marriage : He 13'' (Cremer, 666).t 

ydp, co-ordinating particle, contr. of ye apa, verily then, hence, in 
truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, 
for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl. ; 1. expli- 
cative and epexegetic : Mt 4^8 1912, Mk l^^ 512 154^ Lk 113o, Ko 71, 

I Co 16*, al. 2. Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations : 
Mt 9* 2723, Lk 925 2227, Jo 930, Ac 83i 163^ 193*, Ko 15^6, i Co 910, 
Phi 118 (Bllic, in 1.), i Th 220, al. 3. Causal: Mt I21 22.5.6, 323^ 
Mk 122 96, Lk 115' 18^ Jo 225, Ac 225, Ro 19. 11, I Co 115, Re 13, al. ; 
giving the reason for a command or prohibition, Mt 22'^ 3^, Eo 13", 
Col 33, I Th 43, al. ; where the cause is contained in an interrog. 
statement, Lk 222^, Eo 33 43, i Co 102^ ; Kal ydp, for also, Mk 10**^ 
Lk 632, I Qq 57^ al . i(j as in cl. = etenim, where the koi loses its 
connective force (Bl., § 78, 6; Kuhner3, ii, 854 f.), Mk U^\ Lk l«c 
2237, II Co 13*. The proper place of ydp is after the first word in a 
clause, but in poets it often comes third or fourth, and so in late prose : 

II Co 119. Yet "not the number but the nature of the word after 
which it stands is the point to be noticed" (v. Thayer, s.v.). 

yao-Ti^p, -Tpo9, rj, [in LXX for ]y5 , iv y. £;^£tv for i^in , iv y. 

Xafiftdveiv for mn ;] 1. the belly : metaph., a glutton, Tit I12. 2. the 
womb: iv y. Hx^iv, to be with child, Mt 118,23(lxx) 2419, Mk 13i7, Lk 
2123, I Th 53, Ee 122 . ^v y. (7wX\a/x/3., to conceive, Lk isi.t 

ye, enclitic postpositive particle, rarer in kolvt) than in cl., giving 
special prominence to the word to which it is attached, distinguishing 
it as the least or the most important (Thayer, s.v.), indeed, at least, even 
(but not always translatable into English) ; 1. used alone : Lk 118 185 
Eo 832. 2. More freq. with other particles : aXkd yc, Lk 242i, i Co 92 ; 
Sipa y£, Mt 720 1726, Ac 1727; S.pd y€, Ac 830; ,;; y^ (Rec. ct'yc), II Co 53, 
Ga 3*, Eph 32 421, Col 123 (y. Meyer, Ellic, on Ga, Eph, 11. c. ; Lft., 
on Ga, Col, 11. c.) ; d 8e fx-qyi, following an affirmation, Mt 61, Lk 10' 
139; a negation, Mt 91^, Lk 536.37 14^2^ „ Co III6; Kat' ye (Eec. Kai'y«, 
cl. KoX . . . ye), Lk 19*2 (WH om.), Ac 218 1727; /caiVotye (L KaiToi ye, 
Tr. /cai Toi yc), Jo 42; /xevowye (v. S.V.) ; ft^Tt ye, V.S. /jh^tl; o<^eXdv ye, 

I Co 48.t 

rcSecik', 6, indecl. in LXX and NT, in FIJ, Ant., v. 6, 3 and 
4 -Svos (Heb. fiyis), Gideon (Jg 6-8) : He 1132.t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 89 

iyi^vva (yt'eva, Mk 9*^, Eec), ->;s, 17 (perh. through Aram. DJTPS, 

from Heb. DJn ■'3 , Ne ll^o ; DTT]^ ""^ , Jo IS^^ ; DSn-";?! 13 , iv Ki 

23^'* ; valley of {the son, sons of) lamentation) ; [in LXX the nearest 
approach to y. is yatcvva, Jos 18^^ (Fat 'Owofx, A), elsewhere <f>a.pay$ 
'Ovofx (Jos 15^, al.), V. Swete on Mk 9*^;] Gehenna, a valley W. and S. 
of Jerusalem, which as the site of fire-worship from the time of Ahaz, 
was desecrated by Josiah and became a dumping-place for the offal of 
the city. Later, the name was used as a symbol of the place of future 
punishment, as in NT : Mt 529- 3o 1028, Mk 9*3. «, 47^ Lk 12^, Ja 3^ ; 
y. T. -TTvpos, Mt 522 1819, prob. with ref. to fires of Moloch {DB, ii, 
119 b) ; vl6s y€^vr}^, Mt 2315; ^^^Vis yceVvr;?, 2333.t 

rcOoTjtiacei (Eec. -vrj, LTr. -vet) indecl. (Heb. "^Zl^tp T)5 , oil-'press), 

Gethsemane : called in Jo 18^ a ktjttos, but named only in Mt 26^^, 
Mk 1432.t 

yiiruv, -ovos, 6, 17 (-<y^), [in LXX chiefly for po?;] a neighbour: 

Lkl4i2 156.9, Jo 98.t 

ycXdw, -w, [in LXX chiefly for pWS , pum ;] to latigh : Lk 62^ ; 
fut., yeXao-o) (M, Pr., 154), ib. 21 (cf. KaTa-y€\a<j).t 

yikus, -wTos, 6, [in LXX chiefly for p'lnv ;] laughter : Ja 49.t 

Y6fiilt« «ye/t(o), [in LXX: Ge 45^7 (|yD), iii Mac 5*^, iv Mao 
31**;] to fill; 1. properly, of a ship (Thuc, al.) : Mk 4^7 (pass.). 
2. In late writers, generally (MGr., v. Kennedy, Sources, 155), c. ace, 
seq. gen., Mk 1536, Jo T 6^\ Ee 158 ; AttS, Lk I516, Eec. WH, mg. ; 
iK, Lk 15i«, WH, Ee 8^ Pass., absol. : Lk 1423.t 

yifiui (used only in pres. and impf.), [in LXX for N^Q , HiffZ',] to 
hef^dl ; 1. properly, of a ship (Xen.). 2. Generally (Plat., al.), (a) c. 
gen. rei: Mt 232^, Lk 1V^\ Eo 3i*(lxx)^ Ee 4''.8 58 15' 173<«-»i 2P; 
{b) seq. iK : Mt 232^ ; (c) c. ace. rei (called a solecism in WM, 
251 ; Bl., § 36, 4), as in later Gk. from Byz. to Mod. times (Jannaris, 
Gr,, 1319) : Ee IT^.t 

ycced, -as, 17 (<^ ytyKo/tcu) , [in LXX chiefly for 111, 11 (Cremer, 
148);] 1. race, stock, family (in NT, yivviqfm, q.v.). 2. generation; 
{a) of the contemporary members of a family : pi., Mt 1^''^ (cf. Ge 31^, 
m^ia) ; metaph., of those alike in character, in bad sense, Mt IT^^, 

Mk 919, Lk 9" 168, Ac 2*^ ; (b) of all the people of a given period : 
Mt 243^ Mk 1330, Lk 21^2, Phi 21*; pi., Lk 1*8; esp. of the Jewish 
people, Mt 1116 1239. 4i, 42, 45 i^i 2336^ Mk 812. 38^ Lk V^ 1129. 30-32. 50, 51 
1726, Ac 1336, He 3io(i^xx); ^^^ ^. ^vtoS tis 8i>7y^o-£Tat, Ac 833 (LXX); 
(c) the period covered by the life-time of a generation, used loosely in 
pi. of successive ages : Ac 14^6 I521, Eph 3*, Col 126; cJ? ytj/cas koX y, 
(= "lin "trh i Is 341'^, al.), Lk l^*'; ets Trao-as ras y. tov aiwvos twv 

mcivwv, Eph 321 (Ellic, in 1.; DCG, i, 639f.).t 

Yct'caXoy^o), -w (< ycvca, Acyw), [in LXX: I Ch 5^ (izrn'')*;] to 
trace ancestry, reckon genealogy ; pass., seq. Ik : He 76.t 



90 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

* yeveaXoyia, -as, r] (v. previous word) ; 1. the making of a pedigree. 
2. a genealogy : pi., i Ti 1*, Tit S"^ (v. CGT, in 1., and ib. hitr., xlix ff. ; 
DB, ii, p. 141).t 

*yevdcna, -oiy, to., neut. pi. of adj. -los, -ov, relating to birth 
{<C yeVto-is) ; 1. in Attic Gk., a commemoration of the dead. 2. In late 
Gk., a birthday feast (= cl. yevedXia; so in tt., v. MM, Exp., x; cf. 
also Eutherford, NPhr., 184) : Mt 14«, Mk B^i.t 

yiveai.^, -ctos, r} « yCyvo/xai), [in LXX chiefly for nibw ;] 1. origin, 

lineage: ySt'ySXos yeveVews (as in Ge 2^^ 5i), Mt l^. 2. 6jri/i ; Mt l^^, 
Lk 1^* (Rec. yiuvrjo-L's) ; irpoawTTov t^s y., face of his birth ("what God 
made him to be," Hort., in 1.), Ja 1^3; 6 rpo^os t^s y., the wheel 
(course) of birth or creation ("the wheel of man's nature according to 
'ts original Divine purpose," Hort), Ja 3^.t 

YeceTTJ, -^s, ^ = ycverj, lon. for yei/ea, [in LXX : Le 25*^ (lj:5.37 

instzra), Es 4}''*;] birth: « y., Jo 9\t 

t Ye>'r]fAa, -tos, to (<; yiyvofiaL), [in LXX chiefly for nSlip ;] a form 

not found in cl., but used in LXX, NT and tt. (Bl., § 3, 10 ; M, 
Pr., 45; Deiss., BS, 184), as distinct from yewrj/jia, q.v., of fruit, 
woduce of the earth : Mt 2629, Mk 142*, Lk 12^^ 22i8, ii Co Q^o (Rec. 

y£vrij/ta).t 

y^vv&m, -co (<^ yeWa, poet. for yevoii), [in LXX chiefly for ib^ ;] 1. 
of the father, to beget: c. ace, Mt l^-^^, Ac T^'^^; seq. «, Mt l^.s.s. 
2. Of the mother, to bring forth, bear : Lk l^^. 57 2329, Jo I621 ; cts 
SovXetav, Ga 424. Pass. (1) to be begotten: Mt l^O; (2) to be born: Mt 
21, 4 1912 2624, Mk 1421, Lij i35_ Jo 34^ Ac 720, Ro 9^\ He 1123 . geq. ^j^, 
Jo 1621 1837, II Pe 212 ; iy, Ac 28 223, (d^a/DTtais), Jo 934 ; iTr6, He 11^2 
(WH, mg., ^y£v-) ; €K, Jo 1^3 3^ 8*1 ; c. adj., ti;<^A6s y., Jo 92 ; ['Pw/xalos], 
Ac 2228 . ^„^^ ^^p^^ . ^_ TTvcr./Aa : Ga 429. Metaph. ; /iax«5. " Ti 223 . 
V5s eyevv-qtra, I Co 4i\ (ov), Phm !<*; in quotation, Ps 2" (LXX), Ac 
1333, He 1* 5^ ; of Christians as begotten of God, born again : Jo l^* 
33.5-8^ I Jo 229 39 47 51,4,18 (cf. dva-ycvmo)) ; (Cremer, 146). t 

yivvr\\La, -tos, to' (■< yevvaw), [in LXX chiefly for riKinp;] off- 
spring of men or animals : cxtSvwv, Mt 3^ 1234 2333^ lJj 37 (q^t^^ else- 
where in Rec. for yevrjfxa, q.v.).t 

rccTiaape'T (Rec. Tevrja-, Mk, I.e.; Targ. -1P^3|), [in LXX: 

Tevvr}(rdp (as in some MSS. Mt, Mk), i Mac 11®''*;] Gennesaret, a 
fertile plain on W. shore of the Sea of Galilee ; rj y^ T., Mt 1434, j^^ 
6*3 ; -fj Xi^vrj r. [rnZZ D; , Nu 34^1, elsewhere i? ddXaacra t. TaA-iXatas, 

Mk li« ; 7i6.T. Tt/3epia8os, Jo 6^), Lk S^.t 

yivvt\ai<i, -ews, rj « ycvvaw), [in LXX: I Ch 4^ (nnS^Tp), Ec V 

(ib^ ni.; yeVeo-ts, AX), Wi 313 Ni (yeVeo-ts, ABn2), Si 223*;] 1^ ^ 
begetting. 2. birth : Mt l^^, Lk l^^, Rec.t 

y^vvr^T6%, -i -6v «y€vvaa>), [in LXX: Jb IP.^^ 141 1514 25* 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 91 

(^V')*;] begotten, born: pi., y. yvvaLKwv (cf. H^X Th"], Jb 14^), peri- 
phrasis for mankind, Mt ll^^ Lk 728 (Cremer, 147). t 

yeVos, -ovs, to (< yiyvofMCLi), [in LXX for UV , ]^p , nj , etc. ;] 1. 

family: Ac 4^ 7^3 IS^s. 2. offspring: Ac 1728.29^ Re 22^6^ 3. race, 
wa^iow ; Mk 728, Ac 436 719 182. 24^ n Co 1126, py 35^ q^ lu^ 1 Pe 2^ 
4. yfcznd, sort, class : Mt 13*' I721, Eec, Mk 92^, i Co 12io. 28, l4io.t 

TcpaoTjt'os, -v> "ov, Gerasene, of Gerasa, not the G. of Decapolis, 
30 m. S.E. of the Lake, but a Gerasa or Gergesa (perh. the mod. 
Kersa) on E. shore; as subst., pi. ol P., Mk 5\ Lk 826i37 (Yepyea-qvwv, 
EV, mg. 1 ; TaSaprjvwv, EV, mg. 2).t 

r€pY€<ni>'6s, -i -ov, Gergesene: Lk 826.37^ tE, mg. 1 (LTr., WH, 
E, txt., Tepacrrjvitiv ', E, mg. 2, ra8ap77i/a)v).+ 

yepouo-ia, -a?, 17 « yipoiv), [in LXX (Hex. only in OT) for ]p\ ;] a 

council of elders, senate ; in NT, of the Sanhedrin {CI. Bev., i, 43 f . ; 
DB, ext., 99) : Ac 5^\i 

ycpui', -ovTo<s, 6, [in LXX for ]p7 ;] an old man : Jo 3*.t 

yeo'w, [in LXX chiefly for Dina ;] to make to taste. Mid., to taste 
eat: absol., Ac lO^o 20^\ Col 221 ; c. gen., Mt 273^ Lk I42*, Ac 23^* 
c. ace. (not cl., but v. Westc, Heb., I.e. ; M, Pr., 66, 245), Jo 2^. Metaph, 
He 6* ; p^/xa Oeoi, He 6^ (on case, v. supr., and cf. Milligan, NTD, 68) 
Bavdrov (cf. Talmudic nn^Q DTia), Mt 1628, Mk 9^, Lk 92^, Jo 8*2, He 29 

seq. oTi, I Pe 2^ (Cremer, 148). t 

yewpy^w, -w «yca)pyds), [in LXX : I Ch 2726 (nTcrn njx^o niry), 

I Es 46, I Mac 148 * ;] to till the ground : pass.. He 6'. 

tyecipyioc, -ov, to « yccupyos), [in LXX, freq. in Pr., for ITW, etc.;] 

1. a field (Pr 24:^'^^^, Strabo). 2. cultivation, husbandry, tillage (Pr 6^ 
912, Je 2823, Si 276) : i Co 3^.+ 

ycupyos, -ov, 6 (<Cy^, «pyw = €p8w, to do), [in LXX for 13X, etc.;] 

1. a husbandman : 11 Ti 2*, Ja 5''. 2. a vine-dresser (cf. a/i,7re\ovpyos, 
Lk 13') : Mt 2133-35.38,40,41^ Mk 12i'2,7,9_ Lk 209'io«i*«i6, Jo 15i.t 

yrj, y^s, rf, [in LXX for I'lN, naiX, etc.;] 1. the earth, world: 

Lk 2135, Ac 18, He ll^^, Ee 3i«, al. ; opp. to oipavo's, Mt 5^8 11^5^ Mk 
1327, al. 2. land ; (a) opp. to sea or water : Mk 4\ Lk 53, Jo 621, al. ; 
(6) as subject to cultivation : Mt 13^, Mk 48, Lk 13", He 6' , al. ; (c) the 
ground : Mt 102^, Mk 8®, Lk 24^ Jo 86, al. ; (d) a region, country : 
Lk 425, Eo 928, Ja 517 ; y^ 'lo-paT^A., Mt 220. 21 ; Xa\8atW, Ac 7* ; rj 'lovSata 
y^, Jo 322 ; c. gen. pers., Ac 7^. 

yfjpas, Attic, gen. (-aos) -ws, dat, a; Ion. and Koivrj, -cos (-ovs), dat. 
-«, TO, [in LXX for n'^'^V , etc. ;] old age : iv y^pet, Lk 136.t 

yTjpdCTKO) (also yr^pao) ; < y^Jpas), [in LXX chiefly for jpT ;] to grow 
old : Jo 2118, He 81^.+ 

SVN. : TraXaLovfiai. 



92 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

yiyi'Ofiai, V.S. ytVo/xai. 

YiVo|jiat, Ion. and Koivq for Att. yi'yv" (M. -P^-. 47; Bl., § 6, 8 
Mayser, 166 f.), [in LXX chiefly for rrn;] 1. of persons, things 
occurrences, to come into being, be born, arise, come on : Jo 1^* 8*^ 

I Co 15^'^ ; a first appearance in pubHc, Mk 1*, Jo 1^, al. ; seq. e/< (of 
birth), Ko 13, Ga 4^ Std, Jo 1^; /Spovr^ Jo 12^9; o-cicr/xtJ?, Ee 6^2 
yoyyucr/xo's, Ac 6^ ; x"P"' ^^ ^*' ^^^ many other similar exx. ; rj/j-epa 
Lk 22<'«, al. ; ovj/i, Mk ll^^ ; irpwia, Mt 27' ; vv^, Ac 27^7. 2. Of events 
to come to jyass, take place, Imppen : Mt 5^^ Mk 5^*, Lk I20 2^5, Ac 4^1 

II Ti 2^8, al. ; ,x.r, yevotro [LXX for nb-bn , Jo 2229, al.], far be it, God 

forbid : Ro 3* {ICG, in 1.), i Go 61^ and freq. in PI. ; koX iyivero, cyc'vcro 
Sc ([in LXX for ^n^T ;] v. Burton, 142 f. ; M, Pr., 16 f . ; Dalman, 

Words, 32 f.; Eobertson, Gr., 1042 f.), c. indie, Mt 728, Lk is, al.; 
seq. Kai et indie, Lk 8^ Ac 5^ al. ; c. ace. et inf., Mk 2^^, Lk d^\ al.; 
<l)s 8c iylvero, seq. tov c. inf., Ac 10^^ ; c. dat. pers., to befall one : c. 
inf., Ac 20^"; c. ace. et inf., Ac 22^; c. adv., cv, Eph 6^ ; tl iyevero 
avToI (Field, Notes, 115), Ac 7*0 (lxx). geq. cis, Ac 28«. 3. to be made, 
done, 2)erformed, observed, enacted, ordained, etc. : Mt 6^** 19^, Mk 2^^ 
1123, Ac 192«, al. ; seq. 8td c. gen., Mk 6^, Ac 2« ; hr6, Lk 13^7 ; ek, 
Lk 423; i^^ I Co 9^5; SiTroypa(f>rj, Lk 22; di/a/cpiai?, Ac 2526; 5^^0-15, 
He 922 ; 6 vofio'i, Ga S^' ; to Trda-xa, Mt 262. 4 iQ become, be made, 
come to be : c. pred., Mt 43, Lk 43, Jo 2^, i Co 13^^, al. ; seq. cbs, wo-ci, 
Mt 1025, Mk 92«; ek (M, Pr., 71 f.), Mk 12io, al. ; c. gen.. Re ll^*; id., 
of age, Lk 2*2 • c. dat., y. dv8pi ([LXX for trrx"^ n^n , Ru V\ al. ;] v. 

Field, Notes, 156), Ro 73.*; seq. iv, Ac 22'7, Re l^o, al. ; iirdvo,, Lk 
19i»; fierd, c. gen., Mk 16[io^, Ac 9^^; seq. ek, cVt' (Field, Notes, 135), 
Kara (ib., 62), c. acc. of place, Ac 201^ 213^ 27^, al.; seq. «, Mk 9^, 
Lk 322, II Th 2^ al. Aoristic pf. yeyom (M, Pr., 52, 145 f. ; Field, 
Notes, 1 f.), Mt 25«, Lk 1036, al. Aor. iyev-jOrj (for eyeVero, M, Pr., 139 f. ; 
Mayser, 379), Mt 1123, ^1. (Cf. aTro-, 8ia-, em-, irapa-, avp.- irapa-, irpo-.) 

yii'cjCTKa) ( = yiyv- : V. previous word. So also vulgar Attic, in 
Inscr., V. Thumb, MGV, 207), [in LXX chiefly for TV ;] to be taking in 
knowledge, come to knoio, recognize, perceive, understand ; in past tenses 
to knoiv, realize ; pass., to become knozvn : c. acc, Mt 22'^, Mk 5*3, 
Col 48, I Th 3*, al. Pass., Mt 102^, Phi 4^, al. ; seq. 5ti, Mt 21**, Jo 
41, al.; Tt', Mt 63; d-^6, Mk 15**; 6, Ro 7^^; r. Xcydyueva, Lk 183*; t. 
6eX.rjiJia, Lk 12*^ ; T. KapS/as, Lk 161* . Q acc. pers., of recognition by 
God, I Co 83, Ga 4^; by Christ, neg., Mt 723; f^eq. of the knowledge 
of divine things, of God and Christ; t. 6e6v, Ro 12\ Ga 4^; t. iraTipa, 
Jo 8"; T. Kvpiov, He 8ii(lxx); voCv KvpCov, Ro 113*; Xpio-roV, Jo 173, 
I Jo 36 ; TO TOV 7rv€Vfji.aT0S, I Co 2^* ; t. Trvev/ta, I Jo 4^ ; t. dXrjOeiav, Jo 
832; of Christ's knowledge of the Father (cTriy.), Mt 1127 (Dalman, 
Words, 282 ff.). In Hellenistic writers [LXX for Heb. TV , Ga 4\ al.], 
of sexual intercourse, to know carnally : Mt 1^*, Lk 13* (Cremer, 153). 

Stn, : y., to know by observation and experience is thus prop, 
disting. from olSa, to know by reflection (a mental process, based on 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 93 

intuition or information) ; of. also e<f)iaT7}iJ.i, (rvvir}/j.i. (Cf . dva-, Sia-, 
tTTi; Kara-, Trpo-yivuiCTKw,) 

yXeuKos (-«os), -ous, to, [in LXX for ]^^., Jb 32^^*;] must, sweet 

new wine (Arist.) : Ac 2^^.t 

yXukus, -«a, -V, [in LXX chiefly for pinp ; ] Ja S^^' 12 ; opp. to 

iriKpov, aXvKov, Ee 10^» ^*^.t 

yXuaaa, -77s, 17, [in LXX chiefly for ]il2;^;] 1. the tongue, as the 
organ of speech: Mk T^s.^s, Lk l^^ 162*, Ac 226 (lxx)^ Rq 3^3 (LXX) 
1411 (Lxx)^ I Co 14», Phi 2^\ Ja 126 35, a, s^ j Pe 310 (lxx)^ i Jq 318, Re IG^o ; 
of a tongue-like object, Ac 2^. 2. a tongue, language : Ac 2^^ ; joined 
with i>vX^, Xao's, Wvo^, freq. in pi, Ee 5^ T^ lO^i ll^ 13^ 14^ IT^s ; XaAcrv 
€TepaL<i y, Ac 2*; y. XaXelv /caivals, WH, txt. (EV, mg, omit Katvai?), 
Mk 1617; XoXcTv yXwo-o-ais, yXciroTJ (v. ICC, 11. c. ; DB, iv, 793 ff.), 
Mk 16^7, WH, txt., E, mg., Ac 10*^ IQ^, i Co 123o 13^ 142. 4-6, 13, is, 23, 27. 39 . 
yXtoo-aat (= Xdyot eV yXuxrcrrj, I Co 14'^), I Co 13^ 1422; y^^ yXwo-crwv, 
I Co 12l<>» 28 ; Trpoo-cvxtcr^ai yXtucroT/, I Co 14^* ; yXCJaa-av Ixeic, I Co 1426 
(Cremer, 163, 679).t 

+ yXwaoroKOfioi', -ov, to, vernac. form of cl. y\a)oro-OKoyu.erov (<^ yXaiao-a, 
Ko/x^w), [in LXX for ]nN, 11 Ki 6^\ 11 Ch 248.i0'ii*;] 1. = cl. -eZov 

(v. supr.), a case for holding the reeds or tongues of musical instru- 
ments. 2. As in LXX, tt. (MM, s.v.), a box, chest: Jo 12« 1329.t 
Y>'a(t>eus, -ews, o, Ion. and Koivrj form of Att. Kva<^cvs (<C KvairTOJ, 

to card wool), [in LXX for D5^, iv Ki IS^^, Is 7^ 362*;] ^ fuller, 
cloth-dresser : Mk Q^.t 

♦♦y^^-'ios. -«. -o*' Ky^'y^A^^O. [in LXX: Si 7^8, iii Mac 3^9*;] 
1. prop., laxofully begotten, born in wedlock (in tt., ywrj y., a lawful 
wife; MM, s.v.). 2. irwe, genuine, sincere: Phi 4^,1 Ti I2, Tit 
1* ; as subst., to y. = ^ yvTjo-io'TT/s, sincerity, 11 Co 8^.t 

**Y»'Tiaiws, adv., [in LXX: 11 Mac 14*, in Mac 32^*;] sincerely, 
honourably : Phi 22" (for a parallel in tr., v. MM, s.v.).t 

yv&^o%, -ov, 6 (later form of Sv-), [in LXX for ^g)^ , ^P"^? , etc. ;] 

darkness, gloom (including "an element of tempest," Tr., Syn., 
§ c) : He 12i8.t 

Syn. : dxXv's, ^o</>os, o-Kdros (Tr., I.e. ; DB, i, 457'^). 

yviiiit], -77s, r, « yiyt/wo-zcw), [in LXX: Da TH 2^5 (ni), Ps 82 

(83)3 (TiD), elsewhere, chiefly 11 Es, for Dytp ;] 1. « means of knoiving, 

a token (Theogn.). 2. In Attic writers, the mind, its operations and 
results (v. Edwards, Lex., App., A); (a) mind, understanding; (6) 
purpose, intention : Ac 20^ ; (c) judgment, opinion : i Co V^, Ee 17^^ ; 
(d) counsel, advice : i Co 72^. *o, n Co 8^^ Phm ^^ ; (e) royal purpose, 
decree (as in Da, i and 11 Es) : Ee 17^'^ (Cremer, 671).+ 

yviapllia (-< yiyvwo-Kto), [in LXX chiefly for TT hi.;] 1. as most 
commonly in cl., to come to know, discover, know : Phi I22 (but cf. E, 



94 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

mg.). 2. to make known: c. ace, Eo 922,23- q q^qq j.q[ ^q^^^^ pers., 
Lk 21*, Jo 151^ 17-^«, Ac 2'^Hhx\)^ I Co 151, 11 Co 8\ Ga V\ Eph F e^^-ai, 
Col 4".«, II Pe 11"; c. dat., seq. on, i Co 12=^; seq. rt, Col 1^' ; rrepi, 
Lk 217. Pass., Ac 7^\ Ro 16^«, Eph 3^- »• i", Phi 4« (Cremer, 677 ; cf. 

(ij'u-, 6tu-yi'a)^(.'^a)).t 

yvuxTis, -ews, 17 (<^ yiyj/wcrKw), [in LXX chiefly for nyi;] 1. d 

seeking to knotv, inquiry, investigation. 2. knowledge, in NT, specially 
of the kn. of spiritual truth : absol., Lk ll^^^ Eo 22*^ ISi", i Co 1* (Lft., 
Notes, 147) 81. ".10' 11 13- « U^, 11 Co 6« 8" 11«, Eph 3i9, Col 2^, i Pe 3", 
II Pe 1*.*^; c. gen. obj., o-wTT^pias, Lk l" ; t. Sofvys t. Oeov, ii Co 4"; t. 
6€oi}, II Co 214 105; Xpi(TToi) 'Iryo-oO, Phi 38 (v. Deiss., L^^, 3833), 11 Pe 
31**; C. gen. subjc, deov, Eo IP^; Aoyos yvwo-ews, I Co 12^; t/^€i;8ujvv/xou 
yi/too-eo)?, I Ti 62**.t 

SriV. ; cro<f)ia, <f)p6vr](TL<; (cf. eTrt-yvwcris and V. Lft. on Col 2^ ; 
Cremer, 156). 

t yccScTTr]?, -ov, 6 (<[ ytyi ojcTKw), [in LXX chiefly for ""JirT;] onewlio 

knoios, an expert : Ac 26^. t 

yi/waros, -v?, -6v, later form of yvwros {<^ yiyvioa-Kw), [in LXX for 
various parts of W ;J kjiojvn : Ac 9*'^ ; c. dat., Jo 18i'5. i« ''*'''=•', Ac li^ 2i* 
410 1338 1518 1917 2822. 2S; y_ arjfxelov, a notable (EV) sign, one that is 
matter of knowledge, Ac 41*^ ; yvwo-rov iroulv, Ac 151". i^ ; to yvwo-rov t. 
^eov, Eo 11^; in pi., as subst., yvoiaroi, acquaintances, Lk 2** 23*'-'; so 
in sing., Jo 18i«'^«'.t 

t yoyyuj^d), [in LXX chiefly for ]ib ;] to mutter, murmur : i Co 
IQlO; seq. Kard, Mt 2011 ; 7rp6^, Lk 5^0 ; Trept', Jo 6*1. «l ; /xcT aAXT?\w, Jo 
6*^; c. ace, seq. irepc, Jo 7^- (cf. 8(.a-yoyyi;^w).t 

t yoyyu(T^<5s, -o€, o « yoyyt'^w), [in LXX: Is 58^ (px), Ex 16 7-9, 

Nu 175.1" (njlbp), Wi 110.11, Si 46-"*;] a murmuriyig, muttering: 

Jo 71-, Ac 61 ; dv€v y., I Pe 4^ pi., xV? y-, Phi 2i4.t 

**t yoyyuaTi^s, -ov, 6 « yoyy.^C^) ; [in Sm. : Pr 2622, jg 292* ; Th. : Pr 
262*^ * ;] a murmurer : Ju i^.t 

*y6if|9, -rjTos, o (yoao), to wail) ; 1. a%vailer. 2. a wizard. 3. an 
impostor (cf. yorjTcia, trickery, 11 Mac 1224) ; u Ti 31^. t 

roXyoGd (Eec. -Oa; WH, mg., ToXyo^, Jo, I.e., Aram. Nnbili'il 
= Heb. rhhb?, LXX, Kpavcov, Jg 9", n Ki 9^5) ; indecl. (exc. Mkl522, 
-a.'), Golgotlm, the place of the crucifixion : Mt 27^3, Mk I522, Jo igi^.t 

Tojioppa, -a5, rj, and -lov, rd (Heb. iTlby), Gomorrah, one of the 
cities of the plain (Ge 19) : Mt lOi^, Eo 9'^n^^x)^ u Pe 2\ Ju^.t 

Y^^os, -ov, 6 (< y£>w), [in LXX : Ex 235, jy Ki 51^ (N^D) *;] a 
sJiip s freight, cargo : Ac 21^, Ee 18". i2.t 

yoceu's, -€(us, 6 (<^ ytyvo/i,at), [in LXX for 2X , DX ;] a begetter, a 
father ; mostly in pi., ol y., parents : Lk 2"' "3 856 21i<', Jo 92. «. 20, 22, n^ 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 95 

Ro 130, II Co 12l^ Eph 61, Col 320, 11 Ti 3^ ; ace. pi. (Hellenistic, v. 
Thackeray, Gr., i, 148), yovcts, Mt lO^i, Mk 13^2, Lk 2^7 1829, Jo g^^.t 
yoyu, -aros, to, [in LXX chiefly for ^^3 ;] the knee : He 12^2 j of 

a suppliant, Trpoo-TrtVrctv Tots y., Lk 5^; so also nOevaL TO. y., to kneel: 
Lk 22*1, Ac 7«o 9*o 20^6 21*; in mockery, Mk IS^^; KdfjLTrTecv rh v., to 
bend the knee : Eo 11*(lxx) 1411 (lxx)^ Eph 3^\ Phi 2io.t 

*t YocoTTCTeoj, -u) {■'C^yovv, ttitttw) ; 1. to fall on the knees: seq. 
Ifxirpoa-dev, Mt 272^. 2. to fall down before one : c. ace, Mt IT^*, 
Mk 1*0, R, txt., 10i7.t 

Ypajxfia, -Tos, to (<^ ypdcfxD), [in LXX for "igD , etc. ;] 1. that 

ivhich is traced or drawn, a picture. 2. that which is written; (!) a 
character, letter : Ga Q^^ ; (2) a tvriting, a written document ; (a) a 
bill or account: Lk IG'''"; (6) a letter: Ac 282^; (c) Ta Upa y., the 
sacred writings, i.e. the OT : 11 Ti 3^^ (so in Philo, Vit. Mos., iii, 39) ; 
(d) TO y., the letter, the written word as an external authority in con- 
trast with the direct influence of the Spirit as manifested in the new 
Covenant : Ro 22"> 2^ 7^ 11 Co 3"' ^ ; (3) Ta y., letters, i.e. learning : Jo 7^^ 
x\c 262*. ^in ^_ an iHiterate person is veiy frequently referred to as 
ypd/j-ixaTa fX7] eiSoTos, and this " never means anything else than inability 
to write " : MM, Exp., x ; but v. also Cremer, 166 ; DCG, i, 202 ; ii, 
584.) t 

Ypcififiareus, -ews (acc. pi., -cis, V. Bl., § 8, 2), 6 (<^ ypd.fji.fia), [in 
LXX always for liaiZT in Hex., elsewhere chiefly for IDD;] 1. a 
secretary ; y. t. TroAeois, a state-clerk : Ac 19^^. 2. In tt., of a military 
officer (Deiss., BS, 110 f.). So Jg 5^*, iv Ki 25i9 (-|DD), al. 3. a 
scribe, a biblical scholar, teacher of the law (so first in i Es 8^, 11 Es 
7<'; in Lk 5^', vo/zoSiSao-zcaAos ; in Lk 102^, vofx-LKos) : Mt 72^, Mk I22, and 
freq. in Gosp. y. koI dpx^LepeU, Mt 2*, et al. ; y. k. ^apia-aloi, Mt 52", et 
al. ; y. fxa6r]T€v6et<: rrj /SacriXcta t. ovp., Mt 13*2 • t^ov (ro<f>6<i', ttoS y., 1 Co 
120 (Cremer, 167; DB, iv, 420, 800). 

Ypa-rrros, -q, -6v « ypd<fiw), [in LXX for STI^p ;] 1. painted. 2. 
written : Ro 2i*.t 

Ypa<}>ii, -^s, rj (<[ ypdffxj)), [in LXX chiefly for :iri3 ;] 1. a drawing, 

painting. 2. (a) writing ; (6) that which is written, a writing : iraa-a y., 
II Ti 31^ ; y. ayiai, Ro 12 ; 7rpo<f>r]TLKaL, Ro 162" ; al y. t. Trpo(f>r]T(i}v, Mt 
26^"; 17 y., ai y., the sacred writings, the Scriptures (i.e. the OT; v. 
Milligan, NTD, 205) ; in pi., when the sacred writings as a whole are 
meant, e.g. Mt 21*2 26**, Jo 5^^, Ro 15* ; in sing., when a particular 
passage is referred to, as in Lk 421, Jo 192*, Ro 4^ Q^^ lO^^ II2, Ja 223 
(Cremer, 165; DCG, ii, 584). 

YP^<1>«, [in LXX chiefly for 2113] ; 1. to scrape, graze (Horn.), and 
later (Hdt.) to sketch, draw. 2. to write ; (a) of forming or tracing 
letters on writing material : Jo 8^"^ Ga 6^1, 11 Th 3^' ; {b) to express in 
writing, commit to writing, record: Lk 1^^, Jo 192i'22^ Re l^^'i^, al.; 
of scripture as a standing authority (Deiss., BS, 112 ff.), yiypanTai, it 



96 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

stands written (Luther), Mt 4*, Mk 7«, Lk 48, Eo l^^ i Co 1^\ al. ; id. 
seq. tV, Mk 1^, Ac l^o, al. ; c. ace, to write of: Jo 1*^, Ko 10*; seq. 
TTcpi, Mt 262*, Mk 1421, Jo 546^ al. ; c. dat. (WM, § 31, 4), Lk IS^i ; id. 
seq. Iva (M, Pr., 207 f.), Mk 12^^ Lk 2028 ; Kara t. yeypa/x/^teVov, II Co 
4^^ ; yeypa/x/jiivov iari, Jo 2^" ; iypdijyr) 8t r]fi3.<;, Ro 42* ; iir aurw yeypafx- 

fieva, Jo 12^*' ; (c) of writing directions or information, c. dat. pers. : 
Ro 15^5, II Co 7^2^ al. ; (d) of that which contains the record or 
message: /3i/3\ioy, Mk 10*, Jo 2125, ^ 51. r^rXov, Jo 19^^ cttio-toX^i', 
Ac 2325; ivToXT]v, Mk 105 (cf. OLTTO-, iy-, im.-, Kara-, wpo-). 

^typawStjs, -cs {ypa-v<;, an old woman, c'Sos), anile, old-womanish: 
I Ti 47.t 

YPTjyope'oj, -w, = Attic eyprjyopa, pf. of iycLpw, q.v., [in LXX (later 
bks. only) chiefly for HplZ?;] 1. to he awake ; metaph., of being alive, 
I Th 510. 2. to watch: Mt 24*^ 2638.40, Mk 13^* 143*.37^ Lk 1237,39; 
metaph., Mt 24*2 2513 26*\ Mk 1335. 37 1438^ Ac 203i, i Co 1613, i Th 5«, 

I Pe 58, Re 32. 3 1615 . geq. ^v, Col 42. (Cf. hia-ypTfyopiii>.)\ 

SYN. : V.S. aypvirviiii. 

** yxs^v&lia {<iyvp-v6<i), [in LXX: 11 Mac 10^5 *;] 1. properly, to 
exercise naked. 2. Generally, to exercise, train the body or mind : i Ti 
A\ He 51* 1211, II Pe 2i*.t 

** y^lLvcxala, -as, -7 « yv/ivaC<«), [in LXX: IV Mac 1120*;] 
exercise : i Ti 48.t 

*t yufii'iTeuo) (Rec. yvfivrjr-, V. Tdf ., Pr., 81), to be naked or scantily 
clad : I Co 411 (cf. cV i/'v'x" '^- yvtivoTrjTi, u Co II2"; yw/x.vot, Ja 2i5. In 
KoivTJ writers, y. also means to go light-armed. )f 

yufju'os, -^, -oV, [in LXX chiefly for Di*iy ;] naked, without clothing, 

and sometimes (as freq. in cl.) scantily or poorly clad (Is 202 ^^ To li^, 

II Mac 1112) : Mt 253«. ss. *3, 44^ Mk 14*2, Jo 21^, Ac IQi^, Ja 2i5, Re 31^ 
1615, 171^ ; as subst., to y., the naked body, Mk 145i. Metaph., of things 
exposed, He 4i3 ; of the soul without a body (Plat., Crat., c, 20, and 
cf. Deiss., LAE, 293), 11 Co 53; of seed, bare, 1 Co 1537 (Cremer, 168).+ 

tyup.t'OTTjs, -7T0S, rj (<^ yu/Avos), [in LXX for DTy, De 28*8 *;] 

nakedness: Ro 835, n Co 1127, Re 3i8.t 

* yucaiKapioc, -ov, to (dim. of ywrj), a little woman ; contemptuously, 
a silly woman (EV) : 11 Ti 3''.t 

yui'aiKcios, -a, -ov (<^ yi^i"?), [in LXX chiefly for n^K ;] female : 

I Pe 37.t 

yuj'^, -aiKos, 7}, [in LXX for niJ^N;] 1. a woman, married or un- 
married: Mt ll" 1421, al. ; vVavSpos y., Ro 72; y. xw«. Lk 42"; in 
vocat., yvvai implies neither reproof nor severity, but is used freq. as a 
term of respect and endearment, Mt 1528, Jq 2*, 421 192^. 2. a toife : 
Mt 120, I Co 73.*, al.; y. ^TroXveLv, Mk 102, al.; y. Ix"". Mk 6I8; y. 
ka^elu, Mk 1219 ; y. yafidv, Lk 1420. 3. a deaconess, i Ti 3" {CGT, 
in 1.). 

TcSy, 6 (Heb. aia), indecl., Gcg, assoc. with Magog (q.v) : Re 20^.+ 



manuaij greek lexicon op the new testament 97 

y^yloy -o?, ^ (■< yow), [in LXX chiefly for njB ;] an angle, a 

corner: Mt 6^, Ac 26^'; t. reWapas y. t. yjjs, Ke 7^, 20^; KC(f)a\r] 
yoivias (njp BrNh, Ps 117 (118)22, LXX), Mt 21*2, Mk 12io, Lk 20^ 

Ac 4", I Pe 27.t 



A, 8, SAto, to, indecl., the fourth letter. As a numeral, S* — 4, 
8, = 4000. 

Aa^iS, V.S. AauctS. 
** Saifioki^ofiai (in cl. also Sat/xovao) ; -^ Saifiwv), [in Aq. : Ps 90 

(91)"*;] to be under the power of a Sai/xwv (Sai/xoviov, q.v.), to be 
possessed : Mt 15-2 • elsewhere always ptcp., -t^d/xevos, -icrdiU : Mt 42* 
816,28,33 932 1222^ Mk 132 515,1(5,18^ Lk S^^, Jo 10'-^ (Cremer, 171).t 

Saip.oi'ioi', -ov, TO (neut. of SaifiovLos, -a, -ov, divine), [in LXX (so 
also in tt. ; v. MM, Exp., x) for "Ttp, b'biji. (freq. in To) ;] 1. as in cl. ; 

(a) the Divine power, Deity (Hdt., Plat., al.) ; (b) an inferior divinity, 
deity or demon (as in magical tt., Deiss., BS, 281 ; MM, Exp., x) : 
iiva 8., Ac 17^^. 2. (a) In OT, heathen deities, false gods (e.g. De 
32^', Ps 95 (96)^) ; (b) in NT, evil spirits, demons : dvova-iv 8aifxovioi<i, 
I Co 102^* ; 8iSao-KaXi'ai Bai/xovLwv, I Ti 4^ ; irpoa-KWfiv to. 8,, Re 92** ; 
apx'^v Twv 8., Mt 93* ; especially (syn. with Trvevfi-a aKadaprov) as 
operating upon and "possessing" (cf. 8at/xovt^o/iat) men: Mt 11^^, et 
al. ; (laepx^creat 8. cts . . ., Lk 8^^ ; 8. Ix"". Lk 4^3 ; 8. iKpdXXctv, Mt 
722. In the phrase 7rv€v/x.a Sai/xoviov dKaOdprov, Lk 433, the wider cl. 
usage (1. b) is recognised, olk. being elsewhere in NT, the epithet of 
vrv., and 8. = ttv. olk. (v. 7CC, in 1; Cremer, 168). 

**t 8aiiio^nS8T)s, -€s « 8at/xo'viov, (TSo^), [in Sm.: Ps 90 (91)6*;] 
demon-like : Ja 3** (Cremer, 171). t 

ialiiuv, -ovos, 6, rj, [in LXX for 13, Is 65^^ (X; 8ai/i,ovta>, AB)*;] 

in cl. and NT = Sai/ioViov ; a demon: Mt 83^.+ 

Ukvu,, [in LXX for ^, Ge 491^, al., exc. De B^* (qitzr);] <o 
Jite ; metaph., Ga 5^^.f 

SciKpuoi' (poet, form SaKpv), -ov, to, [in LXX for n^l ;] a tear : 

Mk 924 (WH, txt., R, txt. omit), Ac 20i9. 3i^ „ Co 2*, 11 Ti 1*, He 5^ 
12", Re 717 21*; metaph., dat. pi., 8a^pvo-i (La 2^\ Thuc, vii, 75; 
Bl., §9, 3), Lk738.4^t 

8aKpuu, [in LXX for nps , etc. ;] to weep, shed tears : Jo ll^^.t 

Syn. : KXaita, of audible weeping, to cry ; 68vpofiai, of grief ex- 
pressed verbally, to lament ; Op-qviin, of formal lamentation, to sing a 
dirge ; dXaXu^w, to tvail in Oriental fashion ; o-rcva^w, of grief expressed 
by inarticulate sounds, to groan. 

SaKTuXios, -ov, o «8aKTvXos), [in LXX chiefly for nySM;] a 

ring : Lk 1522.t 

7 



98 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

SdKTuXos, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for yny^ ;] a finger : Mt 23*, 
Mk 7=^^ Lk 11*6 1624, Jo ye, 8 20^.27; metaph., 8. deov (cf. Ex 8^% 
Lk 112o.t 

AaXfiai'ouOd, rj, indecl., Dalmanutha, an unidentified place near 
the Sea of Galilee : Mk S^" (cf. Maya8dv)A 

AaXfxaTia (L, Af A-), -as, rj, Dalmatia, a part of Illyria on E. coast 
of the Adriatic : ii Ti 4io.t 

Safidl^a), [in LXX: Da 2*^^ {bwu)*;] to tame, s^ibdue: Mk 5*, 

Ja 3" ; metaph,, t. yXda-a-av, Ja 3^ (Field, Notes, 237f.).+ 

SdjiaXis, -eojs, r] (fem. of 8afxdXr]s, a hullock), [in LXX chiefly for 
niQ , rhy? ;] a heifer. He Qi^.t 

Adfjiapis, -i8os, 17 (<C 8dfxap, poet., a wife), Damaris : Ac 17^*. t 
AajxaaKTjvos, -rj, -6v, of Damascus, Damascene: 11 Co 11^2_f 
AaniaaK^s, -oC, ^ (Heb. piyJSl), Damascus: Ac 92 ff- 22*ff- 26i2.20^ 

II Co 1132, Ga 11'.+ 

8ai'6i^(i), V. Sav/^o). 
Sdi'eioc, V. Saviov. 
8at'£io-Tr)s, V. 8avto-T7;s. 

Saci^w (late form of cl. -ci'^w, Eec, Bl., § 3 ; Thackeray, Gr.y 
85 f .), [in LXX chiefly for TXb (Pr IQi") ;] to lend money on interest : 
Lk 634' 35 . mid., to borrow : Mt 542.t 

/SliV. : KLXprj/^i- (v.s. XP*^*")) tio lend in a friendly way. 

Aai'iriX, 6, indecl. (Heb. bx^J'T, God is my Judge), Daniel, the 

prophet : Mt 24^^+ 

Sdi'ioi', -ov, TO (late form of Sdveiov, Eec. ; v.s. Savt'^w), [in LXX : 
De 2411 (ncr:) 15^' 10 (tanr hi.), iv Mac 28*;] a Zoaw; Mt 1827.+ 

Sai'iaxris, -ov, 6 (late form of -cio-tt^s, Eec. ; v.s, Savci'^w), [in LXX : 
IV Ki 4S Ps 108(109)11 (ntZTJ), Pr 291^ (rzr-j), Si 292s*;] a money-lender : 

Lk 7",t 

** Sairavdu, -w, [in LXX : To 1", I Mac 14^2, al. ;] 1. to spend, expend : 
c. ace, Mk 528 ; seq. eVi, c. dat. pers., Ac 212* ; iwep, 11 Co 12i5. 2. to 
consume, squander : Lk IS^* ; e,/ t, rj8oval<; (on the constr. with iv, v. 
Hort, Mayor, in 1,), Ja 4^ (cf. ex-, irpoa-- 8.).+ 

Saird^, -rys, ^, [in LXX : 11 Es S*. » (n,"??3), Da LXX Bel 21, al. ;] 
expense, cost : Lk 142^,+ 

AaueiS (Eec. Aaj8t8), 6, indecl. (Heb. in). David, King of Israel : 

Mt 1^ 123, et al. ; a-Krjv^i A., Ac 15i« ; /cXcl? A., Ee 3^ ; dpovo^ A., Lk 1^2 ; 
pit,a A., Ee 55; fSaatXeia A., Mk 1110; v':6s A., the Messiah (Ps. Sol., 
1723 ; for other reff. in Jewish lit., v. Dalman, Words, 317), Mt li 92^, 
et al. ; ev A., i.e. the Psalter, He 4^ 

8^ (before vowels 8' ; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, 
V. WH, Ajyp., 146 ; Tdf ,, Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle ; 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 99 

1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104) : 
Mt 12 «■, II Co 615. IS, II Pe l*-7; in repetition for emphasis, Eo 321. 22 
930, I Co 2«, Ga 22, Phi 28 ; in transition to something new, Mt l^^ 2^^ 
Lk 131, Jo 71*, Ac 6\ Eo 828, i Co 7^ S^, al. ; in explanatory parenthesis 
or addition, Jo 3^9, Eo b^, i Co 1^2, Eph 2* 5=^2^ al.; <I)s U, Jo 2^; koL 
. . . Se, but also, Mt 10^8, Lk I'S, Jo 6", Eo 1123, al.; Kal iav 8i, yea 
even if, Jo 8^^. 2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering 
to a foregoing fiiv (q.v.), and distinguishing a word or clause from one 
preceding (in NT most freq. without yiteV; Bl., § 77, 12) : eav 8c, Mt 
614,23^ al.; cyw (o^, etc.) 8e, Mt 522 6^, Mk 82^, al.; b 8c, auros 8e', Mk 
1«, Lk 4^0, al.; after a negation, Mt 6^9. 20^ Rq 3*, i Th 521, al. 

S^Tjo-is, -cfc)s, 7} {<Chioixai), [in LXX for nsnp , nST, n^Sl?, etc.;] 

1. a wanting, need (so Ps 21 (22)2^). 2, aw asking, entreaty, supplica- 
tion ; in NT always addressed to God : Lk l^^, n Co l^^. Phi l^^, n Ti 
13, Ja 516, I Pe 312 (LXX); with vvyo-Tcrat, Lk 23^; Trpoo-cvx*?, -ai, Eph 6^8, 
Phi 4^, I Ti 2^ 5* ; LKerrjpiai, He 5^^ ; Trpo(TKapTipri<ri<i, Eph 618 ; cvTcvfcis, 

I Ti 21 ; 8. TTotcro-^at (Deiss., 5S, 250), Lk 533, pj^i i* (pij^ j Ti 2^ ; 
seq. irrc'p, 11 Co Qi*, Phi 1* ; Trcpi', Eph 618 ; tt^os, Eo lOi.t 

Syn. : Trpoa-ivxv, used of prayer in general, while 8. gives promi- 
nence to the sense of need ; on the other hand, 8. is used as well of 
requests from man to man, while ir. is limited to prayer to God. 
ci'Tcu^ts, in the papyri, is the regular word for petition to a superior 
(Deiss., BS, 250; cf. the Pauline hTvyxdveiv, to entreat). Cf. also 
€ixv (Ja 515), atrrjiia, iK^T-qpia (Tr., Syn., %\\; Cremer, 73, 174, 684). 

8ei, impersonal (8ca)), [in LXX chiefly for infin. with ^;] one 

must, it is necessary : c. inf., Mt 26**, Mk 13'', Ac 52^, al. ; c. ace. et 
inf., Mt 1621, Mk 831, Jq 37^ Ac 25io, al. ; with ellipse of ace, Mt 2323; 
of ace. and inf., Mk I31*, Eo 12" S^*" ; oi (yu^) 8€t {non licet), ought not, nnist 
not : Ac 252*, ^ "pi 22* ; impf., £8ci, of necessity or obligation in past 
time regarding a past event (Bl., § 63, 4), Mt 1833, Lk 1532, Jo 4*, 
Ac 2721, al. ; periphr., hiov ia-riv (as in Attic, XP^^^ ^^'^'- = XPVt v.s. 
Seov), Ac 193"; id., with ellipse of icrrLV, 1 Pe 1^; to. p.ri Scovra (= a ou 

8cr), I Ti 513. 

Syn. : o^ciXct, expressing moral obligation, as distinct from 8£r, 
denoting logical necessity and XPV^ a need which results from the fitness 
of things (v. Tr., Stju., § cvii, 10; Westc. on He 2i, i Jo 2<'; Hort on 
Ja 310). 

*8eiYfia, -TO?, TO (^Sct/cvv/xt); 1. (cl.) a thing shown, a specimen. 

2. = cl. TrapdS- (cf. v7ro8-, II Pe 2^), an example (a warning) : Ju^.t 

*t Seiy/xaTiioj « Scty/xa), a rare word {ICG, 11. c), to make a show 
of, to expose : Mt V^ (Eec. 7rapa8-, q.v.). Col 2i*.t 

SeiK^ufii, 8€tKvvw (v. BL, § 23, 1 ; Veitch, s.v.), [in LXX chiefly 
for ^^('^ hi. ;] to show, c. ace. rei (pers.), dat. pers. ; (a) to show, exhibit : 
Mt 48 8*, Mk 1** 1415, Lk 4* 51* 202* 2212 24*o, Jo 2i8 520 1032 2020, 
Ac 73>Lxx)^ I Ti 615, Ee I71 2P'io 221-8, pass., He 85(i'XX); (j) to make 
knoion: Mt I621, Jo 148.9, Ac IO28, i Co 123i, Ee li 41, 22^; (c) to 
prove : Ja 2i8 3i3.t 



100 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

SeiXio, -as, rj « SeiXo's), [in LXX for np-ili, n^np, etc.;] 

cowardice, timidity (never in good sense) : ii Ti I'^.t 

Syn.: <f>6/3o'i, fear, in general, good or bad; evkdfSeia (q.v.), 
apprehension generally, but chiefly pious fear, " that careful and 
watchful reverence v^^hich pays regard to every circumstance in that 
with which it has to deal " (cf. Tr., Sy7i., § x). 

tSeiXidu, -w «8«Aia), [in LXX for nnn ni. , IHE, etc.;] = the 
more freq. dnoS-, to be cowardly, timid, fearful : Jo 142'.+ 

SetXos, -rj, 6v (<[ 8€o<;), [in LXX for 1J1 , etc. ;] cowardly, fearful : 

Mt 826, Mk 4*0, Re 218.+ 

**8€ij'o, 6, f), TO (gen. -vos, dat. -vi, ace. -va), [in Aq. : Eu 4}, i Ki 
212(3) (Sm. also), iv Ki 6*^*;] stich an one, a certain one, whom one 
cannot or will not name : Mt 26*^.+ 

SeiKois, adv. « Sc'os), [in LXX : Jb lO^^, Wi l?^, al. ;] 1. terribly : 
Mt 86. 2. vehemently : Lk 11*3. t 

SeiTT^c'u), -w «8£r7r^ov, q.v.), [in LXX: Pr 23^ {nub), To 7^ 8\ 
Da LXX 1127*;] to take the chief meal of the day, to dine, to sup: 
Lk 178 2220 (WH, br., E, mg. omits), i Co 1125; metaph., Ee 320.+ 

SeiTTi'oi', -ov, TO, [in LXX chiefly for 35"n5) (Da) ;] the chief meal 

of the day, dinfier, supper : Mt 23^, Mk 12^9, Lk 14^7. 24 20«, Jo 132' * 
2120, I Co 1121 . 3 ^ouZv, Mk 621, lij 1412,16^ Jo 122; ^yp^aKov (q.v.) 8., 
I Co 1120; metaph. (Dalman, Words, 118), S. r. ydjxov r. dpviov, Ee 19^; 

8. T. fxeya r. 0£o9, Ee IQl^t 

*+ Seio-iSaifiofia, -as, rj (•<[ ScicriSatyLicov, q.v.) ; 1. fear of the gods; 
(a) piety, religion; (b) superstition. 2. Objectively, a religion: Ac 
2519 (Cremer, 72, 682).t 

* SeiCTi-Saip.wi', -Of {<C, Sci'Sw, to fear ; Saifjuav, deity), reverent to the 
deity, religious; compar. -fMovearepovi (AV, too superstitious, E, txt., 
somewhat superstitious, a sense in wh. the word is sometimes used ; 
cf. Field, Notes, 125), more religious. God-fearing, than others, quite 
religious (Abbott, Essays, 105 ff. ; Deiss., LAE, 285) : Ac I722.+ 

Syn.: eva-efirj'i (q.v.), dtoa-€Jirj<i, 6prja-Ko^ (Cremer, 681; DB, ext., 
142 a). 

S^Ka, 01, ai, TO, ten : Mt 202*, q\ . ^Xu/^ts rjfxepwv 8., i.e. of brief 
duration : Ee 2io. 

+ 8eKa-8u'u, Eec. for SwSe/ca: Ac 19^ 2411.+ 

+ 8cKa-^$, = £K»cat8cKa, sixteen (Jannaris, Gr., § 645) : Ee 18^^, 
L, mg. (for c^T^KovTa €$; v. Swete, in 1.).+ 

fScKa-oKTci, T for ScKa 6/cTw, eighteen: Lk 13*.+ 
+ SeKa-TT^rre, [in LXX: Ex 271*, I Mac 10*°, al.;] late form of 
Tr€VT€Ka8eKa, fifteen : Jo IV^ Ac 27*, WH, mg., ib.28, Ga V^f 

AcKd-TToXis, -£(os, n, Decafolis, a region east of the Jordan con- 
taining ten cities : Mt 42*, Mk 520 7^1.+ 

+ ScKareWapes, -wv, 01, al, -a. to, [in LXX : Ge 31*1, T^ gig^ ^j .j 
= cl. TecrcrapecTKai'ScKa, more freq. in later Gk. than the older form and 
in MGr. (for thirteen and upwards) universal, fourteen: Mt li'^, u Co 
122, Ga 21 (cf. Teo-o-ap£o-Kat8£KaTos).+ 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THP. NEW TB37AMB1IT 101 

8eK(i-n), -17s, 1^, prop. fern. (sc. fx-ipoi) of ScVaTo?, -rj, -ov, [in LXX 
for TtJ^yo : Ge li^o, Ne 12", et al. ;] a tenth part, a tithe : He T^.*.*.' 

(for a curious inversion of the Biblical use, v. MM, s.v.).t 

S^Karos, -77, -ov (<:^ SeKo), [in LXX for lt?r^ and cognate forms;] 

tenth : Jo 1*^, Ac 19^ (WH, txt., EV omit), Ee U^^ 212o.t 

tScKOT^U, -W, = Cl. -TCV'O «8€KaT77), [iu LXX I Nb 10" (38) 

("IBTjr pi.)*;] io take tithe of: c. acc. pers., He 7^; pass, to pay tithe : 
He 79.t 

tScKTiJs, ->7, -OV, verbal adj. of Sexo^ai, [in LXX chiefly for 
]1S^: Pr 111, al.;] acceptable: Lk 419(lxx)24^ Ac lO^s, u Co 62 (lxx)^ 

Phi 4I8 (cf. dJ7rpoo-8-).t 

*8eXe(iJu (<^8eA€a/3, a 6aii), to allure by a bait : metaph., to allure, 
entice : c. acc, 11 Pe 2^*' ^^ ; pass., Ja 1^*.+ 
AcXfJiaria, V. AaX/xaria. 
S^MSpoK, -ov, TO, [in LXX for ]^y , etc. ;] a tree : Mt S^", al. ; 

8. iyaOov, Mt 7ir,n. 8, Ka\6v, Mt 1233, Lt 6*3; 8. aawpov, Mt 717. 18 
1233, Lk 6«; yiv€o-^ai 8.. Mt 1332; y. £^5 8., Lk 1319. 

■""t Sc^io-^oXos, -ov, o {<^ ^€^to?, ySaAAw), owe w/w throws with the right 
hand : L for Sc^ioXaySos, Ac 2323.t 

* SclioXd^os, -ov, 6 (<; Sc^ios, \afx/3dvo)), a kind of soldier, prob. a 
spearman (Vg., lancearius) or slinger : Ac 2323. t 

8c|i<5s, -a, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for ]->p; ;] the right : Mt 529, Jq 

IBi**, al. ; oTrXa 8., weapons carried in the right hand, i.e. for offence, ii Co 
67; ^ 8. xctp, Mt 53", Lk 68, al.; ^ 8. (sc. x«», Mt 63, al.; i-n-l t^v 8., 
w the right hand (E, txt., on E, mg.), Ee 5i ; SiSovai rrjv 8., in friend- 
ship (Deiss., BS, 251), Ga 2^ ; metaph. of power, rfj 8. airov, Ac 233 
531 ; Ta 8., i/ie right side, Mk 16*; ck 8e$iwv, on the right hand, c. gen., 
Mt 2533' 34^ Mk 1527^ L]j 111^ al. ; of a place of honour in the Messianic 
Kingdom (cf. iii Ki 2^^, Ps 44 (45)io), Ka^tVat « Se^iJiv, Mt 2021, Mk 
1037; of the heavenly session of Christ, Mt 26«*, Mk 1±^\ He 1" 
(Cremer, 172). 

Seofiai (mid. of Sew, II, q.v., as depon.), [in LXX for fin , etc. ;] 

to want for oneself; 1. to want, need: (a) absol. ; (b) c. gen. 2. to 
beg, request, beseech, pray ; (i) in general: absol., Ac 263, WH; c. gen. 
pers., Lk 5^2 828- 38 (iS.lro ; T, iSi.ro, cf . Veitch, s.v. Sew) 938, Ac 83* 
2139, II Co 520, Ga 412 ; seq. Tva, Lk 9*o ; seq. to, c. inf., 11 Co IO2 ; c. 
gen. pers. et rei, 11 Co 8* ; (ii) of prayer to God : absol., Ac 43i ; seq. 
€t TTws, Eo 11"; .Va, Lk 213« 2232; d<: r6, I Th 310 ; i^kp ifioi Trp6s t. 
Kvpiov, 07ra)9, Ac 82* ; c. gen., tov Kvpiov, OTTCDS, Mt 938, Lk IO2 ; rov ®€ov, 
Ac 102 ; seq. d ^pa, Ac 822.t 

SYN. : airidi, and cf. SerjaLi. 

hiov, -ovTos, TO (neut. part, of 8e2, used as subst.), [in LXX • Si 
prol.^*, I Mac 12^, 11 Mac P^*; pi. t^i S., for oob, Ex I622, m Ki 
422 (52)^ Pr 2431 (308) ; -lK«r , Ex 21io ; 33-715 , Da th 112« ; To 51*, 



102 mjmtual geesk lexicon of the new testament 

II Mac 1320 * ;] that which is needful, due, proper : 8. ia-riv (periphr. 
for 8(1, q.v.), Ac 193«, with ellipse of eo-rtV, i Pe 1« ; ra fj^rj 8., i Ti 5^^A 
**8^os, -0V9, to' «S£t'8<o), [in LXX: 11 Mac Si^.so 1322 1316 1523*.-] 
fear, awe, reverence : /icra ciXa^ttas koL S., He 122^.t 

SFi\^. ; SeiXi'a, </>d/3os. 

AcpPaios, -a, -ov, of Derbe : Ac 20*.t 

Aip^i], -17s, ^, Derbe, a city of Lycaonia : Ac 14^' ^o 16^,t 

S^Pfia, -Tos, TO «;8e/3w), [in LXX for IliT;] i/^e sA;m, /lide of 
beasts : cv aiytbts 8., He 11^''', t 

ScpfKiTifos, -rj, -ov (<[ 8ep/xa), [in LXX for lijr ;] 0/ sA;m, leathern : 
Mt 3\ Mk 1« (cf. IV Ki 18).t 

S^ppis, -CO)?, -7 « 8e>os = SepyLta), [in LXX: Ex 26'"'- (nv^'T), 

Za 13* (ri::ilK), etc. ;] a skin : Mk 1« (D, from Za, I.e. ; Swete, in 

1,; Eec, Edd. Tpix"?; cf- M^:, ^a;^)., x).t 

Se'po), [in LXX: Le 1«, 11 Ch 293* 35^ (IDITS hi.)*;] 1. to shin, 

flay. 2. (cf. Eng. slang, hide) to heat, thrash : c. ace, Mt 21^*, Mk 
12=*. *, Lk 20io> 11 22<'3, Jo IS^^, Ac 5*o 16" 22^9 ; is d^pa Sepwv, i Co 
92«; £is Trpdo-wTTOi; 8., II Co 1120. Pass., Mk 13^, Lk 12*'' *» {Saprjaerai 
TToXAcis, oXi'yas, SC. ■jrXrjyd'i) .f 

8c(7fjieu'w « 8€o-/>ids), [in LXX for -|DX (Jg 16^\ al.), D^K pi. (Ge 
37^ al.), etc. ;] 1. to put in chains : Lk 8^^, Ac 22*. 2. to hind, tie 
together : ^opTia, Mt 23*. t 

SeCTfi^w, -w, Eec. for 8co-)u.ei;a), q.v. : Lk S^^.t 

S^apLTj (Eec. Sea-p.^), -7?s, 17 « 8€a)), [in LXX for ni^Jf , Ex I222 * ;] 

a hundle : S-^aare aira cis Secrp.a'i (D, Orig., omit eis, and Blass thinks 
original reading, 8€cr/xas Sia-p-as; v. Deiss., Zr^J5, 125^), Mt IB^^A 

8^cr|jiios, -ov (also -a, -ov ; <^ 8((rp.6^), [in LXX for IDK ;] 1. hinding. 
2. hound, captive; 6 8., as subst., a prisoner: Mt 27^^'^", Mk 15'', 
Ac 1625. 27 2318 251*' 2' 28i« («''^' 1^ He 10^* 13=* ; 6 8. rod Xpia-roi, Eph 3^ 
II Ti 1\ Phmi.9; 6 8. eV Kvpiw, Eph 4i.t 

SeCTfAos, -ov, 6 « 860)), [in LXX chiefly for 1DN ;] a band, hond : 
metaph., Lk 13^** ; 6 8€a-po^ t. yXwo-o-r/s, Mk P'' (for this expression in 
TT., V. Deiss., LAE, 306 ff. ; of actual bonds, v. Euth., Gr., 9). PI., 
8€o-yLiot, Phi 113 ; 8e(riJi<i (as also in cl.), Lk 829, Ac 162" 202^ ; gen., dat., 
Ac 2329 2629. 31, Phi 1". 1*. 1^ Col 4:^^, II Ti 29, Phm 10, He 1136, Ju « ; 
iv Tots 8. ToC evayyeXiov, Phm ^^A 

*t 8c<Tp.o-<j>uXa5, -Kos, 6 (Seo-ytAos, <^vXa|), a prison-keeper, gaoler : Ac 
1623.27,36 (cf. dpxi8-, Ge 3921).+ 

Seo-fiwrripioi', -ov, to, [in LXX for 'TjiQn JT'U (Ge), TD^ ;] a prison : 

Mt 112, Ac 521.23 I626.t 

8ea(iwTT)s, -ov, 6, [in LXX for 1DN , 1300 ;] a prisoner : Ac 271- *2.t 

8e<nr6Ttis, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for ]nN, "^pi^; in Jth 91^, 8. t. 

ovpavwv K. t. y^s] ; a master, lord, correlative of 8ov\os, ot»c«'T»;s : i Ti 
61. 2, II Ti 221, Tit 29, 1 Pe 21^ ; as title of God, voc, 8£WoTa (so usually in 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 103 

LXX), Lk 229, Ac 424; ^ 8. = voc. Se'oTroTa (cf. Bl, § 33, 4), Ee 6^0; of 
Christ, II Pe 2\ Ju *, E, txt. (but cf. mg.).t 

Syn. : Kvptos (q.v.), implying limitation of authority and a more 
general relation than 8., which "denoted absolute ownership and un- 
controlled power" (Thayer). 

Seupo, adv., [in LXX chiefly for "Sj^, np^;] 1. of place; (a) 

hither, with verbs of motion ; (b) (in cl. chiefly poet.) as an imperat., 
here! camel: Mt 19^\ Mk lO^i, Lk I822, Jo 11« Ac 7^ d-^x), 34 (lxx)^ 
Re 171 219. 2. Of time, hitherto, now : Eo l^^.t 

8eoT€, adv., as pi. of Scvpo, 1. {b), q.v., [in LXX chiefly for 13^;] 

come on ! come here I come ! : c. imperat., Mt 25^* 28®, Jo d^^ 21^2^ 
Re 1917; c. subjc, Mt 2138, Mk 127 ; geq. ottlo-w, Mt 4^9, Mk 1^7; Trpds, 
Mt 1128; ds, Mt 22*, Mk 63i.t 

*8€OT6paios, -a, -ov (<^ 8f urcpos), adj. with adverbial sense; on the 
second day : SevrtpaioL ^XOofiev, Ac 28^3 J 

*t ScuTcpo-TTpajTos, -ov, second-first (in what sense, there is no satis- 
factory explanation. The reading is prob. not original, v. ICC, in 1. ; 
DCG, i, 411 ; ii, 541, 724) : Lk 6^, WH, mg., R, mg.t 

SeuTcpos, -a, -ov, second in order, with or without idea of time : 
Mt 2226.39, al.; edvaro^, Re 2" 201* 218; ^^p,^^ n Co l^s. In neut. as 
adv., secondly, a second time ; opp. to Trpwrov : Jo 3* 21^^, i Co 1228, 
Re 193 ; TO 8., 11 Co I32, Ju ^ ; eV t. 8., at the second time : Ac 7^3 ; in 
later usage (as i Mac 9^), « 8., Mk 14-2, Jo 92*, Ac 119, He 928. 

Se'xo/iai, depon. mid., [in LXX chiefly for Upb ;] to receive, accept ; 
1. c. ace. rei, of taking or accepting what is offered : ypdfifjLara, Lk 
16"' 7 ; id. in different sense, Ac 282^ ; iroTrjpiov, Lk 22^7 ; TratSiw (cis t. 

dy/caAas), Lk 228 • Trept,Ke<f)aXatav, fxd-)^aipav, Eph S^^ ; iiriCTToXd^, Ac 22^ \ 
T. /Sao-tXctav T. ©eoS, Mk lO^*, Lk 18^7 ; Xoyia ^wvra, Ac 738 ; evayyeXiov, 
II Co 11*; T. x°-P'-^ '"• ®«ov, II Co 6^ ; metaph., of mental acceptance, 
Mt 111*; ^^ x6yo,^, Lk 813, Ac 81* lli I711, i Th 1^ 2i3, Ja I21 ; ri t. 
TTvev/u-aTos, I Co 21* ; t. irapdKXrjcnv, II Co 81^ ; t. dydTnjv t. d\r}6eia<;, 
II Th 21**. 2. C. ace. pers., of receiving kindly or hospitably, Mt 
1014. 40, « Mk 611, Lk 95,53 108.10, Jo 4*5, 11 Co 71^ Ipe^ Ga 41*, 
Col 419, He 1131; ^aiStW, Mt 18^, Mk 93^, Lk 9*8; civ oTkov^, o-Kr/va?, 
Lk 16*. 9 ; Se^at t. Trvevfxd fjLov, Ac 7^9 • g^ 8eL ovpavov 8e$aa6ai, Ac 32^ 
(cf. dva-, d-rro-, 8ia-, elcr-, ck-, dir-eK-, iv-, iiri-, irapa-, irpocr-, VTro-8€)(Ofxai ', 
Cremer, 174).t 

Sew (I), [in LXX chiefly for IDH ;] to tie, bind, fasten ; (1) c. ace. 
rei, seq. d<i 8£o-/t(is,_ Mt 1330; of an ass, Mt 212, Mk II2.*, Lk 193o. (2) 
c. ace. pers., of swathing a dead body, o^ovtots, Jo 19*^ ; ScSo/acvos t. 
TToSas . . . Kiipiais (Bl., § 34, 6 ; Kiihner3, iii, 125), Jo 11**; of binding 
with chains, dyyiXovs, Re 9i* ; a demoniac, TrcSais k. akvo-^cn, Mk 5^. * ; 
captives, Mt 1229 143 22^3 272, Mk 327 gir 151,7^ Jq 1812,24^ Ac 92.14.21 
2111.13 225.29 2427, Col 43, Re 202; dXiatm, Ac 12^ 2133. Metaph., 
o Xoyos T. Ocov, II Ti 29; of Satan binding by disease (MM, s.v.), 
Lk I316; of constraint or obligation, Ac 2022; of the marriage bond, 



104 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

I Co 73" ; id. c. dat. pers., dvSpt, Eo 7^ ; yvvaiKL, i Co V^ ; in Eabbinic 
lang. (Dalman, Words, 213 f.), to forbid, declare forbidden, Mt IB^^ IS^^ 
(cf. Kara-, frepi-, aw-, v7ro-8ecj ; Cremer, 82). t 

S^w (II), Attic, to want, miss ; mid., Se'o^uai, q.v. 

Si], consecutive co-ordinating particle with no exact equiv. in 
Eng., giving greater exactness and emphasis to the word or words to 
which it is attached; sometimes translatable as now therefore, then, 
verily, certainly. 1. With verbs : imperat., Ac 6^ (WH, mg.) 13^, 
I Co 620 . ijort. subjc, Lk 2^^, Ac IS^e ; indie, St; vov (T, BrJTrov, q.v.). He 
2^*. 2. With pronouns : o St?, now this is he who, Mt IS^^.t 

*t 8T,XaoY(is, adv. « S^Aos, avyT^), clearly : Mk 8^\ T, WH, mg. (for 

T7]kavyu)^, q.V.).t 

SfjXos, -7], -ov, [in LXX for ns , etc. ;] 1. visible. 2. clear to the 
mind, evident : Mt 26" ; S. (sc. €o-TtV), seq. on, i Co 1527, Qa 311. t 

SvN. : <f)avep6<s, with ref. to outward appearance, manifest as opp. 
to concealed ; S. with ref. to inner perception, evident, known, under- 
stood. 

StjXow, -w, [in LXX chiefly for rr ;] to make plain, declare : c. 
ace, I Co 313, Col 18, He 9^ 12^7; c. dat. pers., 11 Pe 1^*; c. dat. pers., 
seq. Trepi (pass.), i Co 1^^ ; seq. cts, i Pe l^^t 

SVN. : iix(f>avLt,oi, to make manifest, render visible to the sight ; S. 
to render evident to the mind. 

AT)/xds, o (perh. contracted from Arj/xT^pio<:), Demas, a companion 
of St. Paul : Col 4^*, Phm ^\ 11 Ti i^^.f 

SrjfiTjyop^a), -w {<^Brjfxo<;, ayoptvw, to speak in the assembly), [in 
LXX : Pr 24«'' (30^^), iv Mac 5^'-'*;] to deliver an oration: Ac 122i.t 

AT]|jir]Tpios, -ov, 6, Demetrius; 1. a silversmith, Ac 19-*' ^s. 2, A 
Christian disciple, iii Jo^'^f 

**8r]fiioupY<5s, -oZ, 6 «S^;l.os, ipyov), [in LXX: II Mac 4^*;] 1. 
one who works for the people. 2. Univ., an author, builder, maker ; 
the maker of the world (Xen., Mem., i, 4, 9, al.). He 11^**.+ 

Syn. : KTL(TTr]<;, creator, tcxviVj;?, craftsman, designer. In He, 
I.e., T. has reference to the plan, S. to its execution. 

Srjfios, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for nnB^rp;] 1. a district, country. 

2. the common people, the people generally; esp. the people assembled : 
Ac 1222 I7si93»'33.t 

SvN. : Xao's, the people at large : 8., the people as a body politic ; 
opp. to S. is oxXos, the unorganized multitude. eOvo's, in sing., means 
in NT as in Gk. writers generally, a nation, but in pi. denotes the rest 
of mankind apart from the Jews : Gentiles. X. also, rare in cl. (Att. 
Xeo'is), is freq. in LXX and NT, and usually limited to the chosen 
people, Israel (cf. Cl. Bev., i, 42 f. ; Cremer, 689). 

** 8T,fi6aios, -a, -ov « S^/tos), [in LXX : 11 Mac B^o, iii Mac 2^7 47 * ;] 
belonging to the people, public : Ac 5^® ; dat. fem. used adverbially 
(cl.); (a) at the public expense, by public consent; (b) publicly: Ac 
1637 1828 2020.+ 

*t8r]»'(lpio»', -ov, TO, the Lat. denarius, a Roman coin, nearly equal 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 105 

to the hpaxfi-n, q.v.: Mt 1828 QO^.^.is 22i9, Mk 6^7 12i5 145, Lk 7*^ lO^* 
202*, Jo 67 126, Ee g*. ^^ ^l^^, g^ Mt 20".t 

8ii-iroT6, indef. adv. (also written hrj Trore), with generalizing 
force; 1. absol., sometime. 2. With adv. or relat., -soever : w 8., Jo 5C*] 
(L, ouaSrjTTOTOvv) A 

*8i]-irou (WH, 87; TTov), indef. adv., mostly in sense of surely, 
of course, we know : He 2^^ T (WH, 877 Trov).f 

Aio, ace. of Zcvs, q.v. 

8i(£ (before a vowel 8l, exc. Eo 8^^, 11 Co 5^, and in pr. names ; 
Tdf., Pr., 94), prep. c. gen., ace, as in cl.; 1. c. gen., through; (i) of 
Place, after verbs of motion or action : Mt 2^2 12«, Mk 2^3, Lk 43«, 
Jo 4*, II Co 1133, al. ; aioCea-Oat (Stao-) 8. Trvpo's, vSaros, I Co 3^5, I Pe 320; 
^KfTreiv 8. iaoTTTpov, I Co 13^2 j metaph., of a state or condition : Eo 
1420, II Co 2* 57. 10 ; 8. ypdfjLfjiaTos, d/cpo^vo-r/as (Lft., Notes, 263, 279), 
Eo 227 411 . g^' i^o/xonjs, Eo 825. (ii) Of Time ; (a) during which : Mt 
26«\ Mk 1458, Lk 55 . S. TravTOS ToC ^ijv, He 2^5 ; 8. Travros (StaTravros in 
Mk 55, Lk 24^3), always, continually, Mt IS^", Ac 225 (Lxx) iq2 2416, Eo 
1110 (Lxx)^ 11 Th 316, He 9« 13^5. (j) ^jthin which: Ac 13; 8. vukto's, 
Ac 519 169 1710 2331 ; (c) after which (Field, Notes, 20; Abbott, /G, 
255 f.) : Mk 2^, Ac 24^7, Ga 2\ (iii) Of the Means or Instrument ; 
(1) of the efficient cause (regarded also as the instrument) : of God, 
Eo 113", I Co 19, Ga 47, He 2io 721 ; of Christ, Eo 1^ SL ^\ i Co I521, 
I Pe 411, al. ; 8. t. vfiwv Sci/o-ews, Eo 1^2, n Co l^ Ga 42», al. ; (2) of the 
agent, instrument or means; (a) c. gen. pers., Mt II2, Lk V^, Jo 1^7^ 
Ac li«, Eo 2i«, I Co 121, Eph 1*, He 2^*, Ee 1^, al ; iirb t. Kvpiov 8. r. 
7rpo<prJTov (8. T. Kvptov, I Th 42 (M, Th., in 1.) ; Lft., Bev., 121 f.), Mt I22 
2^5, Eo 12 ; 8. cTTto-ToX^s <I)s 8. rnxwv (Field, iVotes, 202), 11 Th 22 ; 8. 2. 
{NTD, 22), I Pe 5^2- j-j^ ^ ggn. rei (where often the simple dat. is 
used in cl.; Jannaris, Gr., 375), Jo 11*, Ac 5^2- ^ ^ Trto-rcws, Eo 33**; 
8. Adyov Oeov, I Pe 123 . g irapa^oXrjs, Lk 8* ; 8ov\€V€iv 8. r. ayatrq^, Ga 
5^3 ; g. cTrayycAias, Ga 3^^, 2. C. acc. ; (i) rarely, as c. gen., through 
(Horn), 8. p-ia-ov 2a/u,apias {ICG, in 1. ; Bl., § 42, 1 ; Eobertson, Gr 
581), Lk 17^^ (ii) by reason of, because of, for the sake of; (a) c. acc 
pers. (M, Pr., 105), Mk 227, Jo 6*7 11*2^ Eo 82«; (b) c. acc. rei, 8 
<l>e6vov, Mt 2718, Mk 1510 ; 8. cp6/3ov, Jo 7^3 20i9 ; 8. dy<{7r7;v, Eph 2* ; 8 
TovTo, freq., /or ^/^^s cause, therefore, Mt 625, ^jj 514^ j^^ 1149^ Jq ges 
al.; id. seq. on, Jo 5^^ 10^7, al.; 8. ti, why, Mt 9^1' 1*, Mk 2^8, Jo 7*5 
al. ; 8. TO, c. inf., Mk 5*, Lk 97, Ja 42. 3. In composition, (1) through. 
as in 8ia^aivo} ; (2) of separation, asunder, as in 8iao-7raa) ; (3) of distri- 
bution, abroad, as in StayyeAAo) ; (4) of transition, as 8taAAao-o-(o ; (5) of 
"perfective" action (M, Pr., 112 f., 115 f.), as 8ia<f>vy(D, 8ta/ca^apt^w. 

Sia-PaiVw, [in LXX chiefly for IIT ;] 1. fo make a stride. 2. to 
step across, cross over ; (a) trans. : t. ^aXao-o-av, He 112^ ; (6) intrans. : 
seq. eis, Ac 169 . ^p^^ ljj i626.t 

8io-pd\X«, [in LXX : Da LXX 38, th 38 62* <25' (pj^ bjjf), 11 Mac 

3^^, IV Mac 4^ * ;] 1. to throw across. 2. To slander, defame, accuse 
falsely or maliciously : Lk 16^ (Cremer, 120). t 



106 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

* 8ia-PePat(5ofiai, -ov/xai, to affirm confidently : Tit 3^ ; seq. -n-tpt, 

I Ti 17 (Cremer, 140).t 

* Sia-pX^TTu ; 1, to look straight before one. 2. to see clearly: Mt 
7^ Mk 8'-^^ Lk 612 (of. Sia'ygXei/^ts, Aq., Is 61i, for LXX Sn'd{3-).f 

SidpoXos, -ov «8ia^dXAw, q.v.), [in LXX for Jl^jp (as Jb 1»), 
exc. Es 7"* 8^ (iy, "11^);] slanderous, accusing falsely . As subst., 6, rj, 

8. ; (a) generally (cf. Es, 11. c), a slanderer, false accuser : i Ti 3^' ^ 
(CGT, in 1., but v. infr.) S^\ ii Ti S\ Tit 2^ ; (b) as chiefly in LXX, of 
Satan, the Accuser, the Devil : Mt 4^' »' ». n 13^9 25^1, Lk 42. 3. e, i3 312, 
Jo 132, Ac 1038, Bph 427 611, I xj 30, 7 (but V. supr.), n Ti 226, He 21*, 
Ja 47, I Pe 58, Ju9, Ke 21" 12^. 12 202.10; cTi/ai « toS 8., Jo 8**, i Jo 38; 
T€Kva Tov 8., I Jo 31'' ; V109, Ac 131*^ ; metaph., of Judas, Jo 6"^^ (Cremer, 
121 ; DGG, ii, 605).t 

Si-ayyeWa), [in LXX for HSD pi., etc. ;] to ptcblish abroad, pro- 
claim : c. ace, Lk 9^^, Ac 2126, Rq 9^U^^^).f 

hid-ye (WH, 8id ye), V.S. ye. 
** Sia-yiVofxai (Ion. and late Gk. for Staytyv-), [in LXX, 11 Mac 
1126*;] I to go through, to pass, e.g. t. vvKra] absol., to live. 2. Of 
time, to intervene, elapse : ptcp., c. rj/xcpwv tivwv, Ac 25^3 ; iKavov xpovov, 
ib. 279; t. o-a/J^arou, Mk 16i.t 

Sia-yikwaKu (v. previous word), [in LXX chiefly for JTT , and cf. 

II Mac 91* ;] 1. to distinguish, ascertain exactly : Ac 23^^. 2. As 
Athen. law-term, to determine : to. Kaff v/aS?, your case, Ac 2422 
(Cremer, 673).t 

*t Sia-yi'wpij^a), to publish abroad : Lk 2^", Eec. [lyvtapia-iv, Edd.).t 
**8i(l-yt'wais, -ews, r] (-<[ Stayiyfwo-Kw), [in LXX: Wi 318*;] 1. a 
distinguishing, also as medical term. 2. As law-term (Lat. cognitio), 
determination, decision : Ac 252i (Cremer, 674). t 

1 8ia-yoyyu£w, [in LXX chiefly for ]'^'b , 71b , as Ex 162, and cf . Si 
34 (31)2* .] Qf a number, to murmur or mutter among themselves : Lk 
152 197.t 

*t Sia-yprjyope'w, -w, (a) prop., to remain awake (E, mg.) ; (b) to be 
fully awake (R, txt.) : Lk 932.t 

8i-(iy(D, [in LXX for I^JT hi., etc. ;] 1. to carry over. 2. Of time, 
to pass : pCov, i Ti 22 ; absol., to live, seq. eV, Tit 33. t 

%i.(x-%ix'^\iai, [in LXX for njl^a (Deiss., BS, 115), nni© ;] tc 

receive through another, receive in tiirn : Ac 7** (RV, in their turn ; 
V. Field, Notes, 116).t 

8i(i8Tifia, -To<;, TO (<i StaSe'w, to bind round), [in LXX for iri3 (as 

Es 1"), etc.;] the band round the Tidpa of a Persian king; a diadem, 
the badge of royalty : Re 123 131 191-2^ 

Syn. : o-Tc'^avos, the badge of "victory, of valour, of nuptial joy, 
of festal gladness" (but v. M, Th., i, 21^; cf. DB, i, 530, 604). 

8ia-8i8(0)j,i, [in LXX for pbn pi., etc. ;] 1. tc hand over, deliver : 
Ee 1713, Rec. 2. to distribute : Lk 11^2 18^2, Jo 611, Ac 435.t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 107 

8id-8oxos, -ov, 6, ^ « SiaSe'xo/xai), [in LXX : i Ch IS^^ (t^^), n Ch 

2611 (^^^ 28^ (nivn), Si 461 438, 11 Mac 429 1426*.] ^ s^iccessor : Ac 

24^'^ (for usage in LXX and ir. in sense of court o£&cial, v. Deiss., BS, 
115).t 

Sia-Jwf kufAi, (also -wvo}), [in LXX for lijn, Ez 23^^ A * ;] to gird 

round : eawov, Jo 13* ; pass., ib. 13^ ; mid., to gird oneself with : c. ace, 
Jo 217.t 

SiaOiiKT], -77s, rj {<C.8taTi0r]fji.(.), [freq. in LXX, and nearly always for 
n^l^l;] 1. as usually in cl., a disposition, testament, will (Plat., al.) : 

Ga 315 (R, mg., but v. Lft., in 1.), He 9^<^, " (R, txt. ; MM, Exp., xi, ; 
Milligan, NTD, 75 ; Abbott, Essays, 107 ; Deiss., LAE, 341 ; but v. 
infr.). 2. As in LXX (for IT^IS) = cl. a-vvd^Kr], a convention, arrange- 
ment, covenant (exc. in the disputed cases mentioned above, always 
bet. God and man, " perhaps with the feeling that the 8ta- compound 
was more suitable than the o-vv- for a covenant with God — crvv6. might 
suggest equal terms," MM, Exp., I.e.) : Ga 3^^ (E, txt., but v. supr., 
and cf . Thayer, s.v.). He 9^^' i' (R, mg., Westc, in 1. ; Hatch, Essays, 
47; but V. supr.), Mt 2628, Mk U^\ Lk 1^2, Ac 32^ 78, Ro 1127(lxx)^ 
II Co 31*, Ga 3I', He 722 8«, ib. ^' 10 (i^^^) 9*» i^-n^ ib. 20 (lxx) iqu (lxx), 29 
1224 1320, Re 1119; ^^^^^ s., Mt 2628, ^^^g^ ^k I421 (R, mg.), Lk 222o, 

I Co 1125, „ Co 3«, He 88 (lxx) 915 . pi_^ j^ 9^ Ga 42*, Eph 2i2.t 

8i-atpeais, -cws, v (<; Siat/ocw), [in LXX chiefly for riiT^nO ;] 1. a 

distinction, difference. 2. a division, distribution\: i Co 12**" (cf. 
Siaipew; Cremer, 616). t 

8i-aip^a>, -w, [in LXX for nn2 (as Ge 15io), pbn (as Jos 18^), etc. ;] 
1. to divide into parts, cttt asunder. 2. to distribute : c. ace. rei, dat. 
pers., Lk I512, i Co 12ii.t 

*8ia-ica0aipw, to cleanse thoroughly : Lk 3^''.t 
*t8ia-Kaeapitw = -OaCpw : Mt 3i2.t 
*+8ia-KaT-eX€YxoH'ai, io confute completely : Ac 1828.t 
*8iaKo»'ea>, w (-<; Sia/covos) ; 1. generally, to minister, serve, wait 
upon, especially at table, to do one a service, care for one's needs: 
absol., Mt 2028, Mk 10**, Lk 10*" 222«i. ^\ Jo 122, i Pe 411 ; Saa ht-qKSvr^a^v, 

II Ti 118; c. dat. pers., Mt 411 81* 25** 27", Mk li^.ai I5*i, Lk 4^9 8^ 
12" 178, Jo 1226, Ac 62 1922, Ro 1525, Phm i^. He 6i9. 2. to serve as 
deacon: i Ti 3i*''i^. 3. C. ace. rei, to minister, stipyply, stipply by minis- 
tration: I Pe 112 410 ; pass., 11 Co 3^ 8i9.2o.t 

SVN. : XtiTovpye'co, q.v. (Cremer, 179). 

8iaKo^ia, -as, ^ « Sicikovos), [in LXX for T^J , mCT pi. : Es 68. » A ; 

I Mac 11*8 * jj ijig office and work of a Staxovos, service, ministry ; (a) 
of domestic duties (Field, Notes, 63) : Lk 10*° ; (b) spec, of religious 
ministration, and the exercise of ministerial functions in the Church : 
Ac 117.25 61.* 1129 1225 2024 2119, Rq 1113 127 1531^ j Co 1615, II Co 41 6» 
8* 91. 13, Eph 412, Col 417, I Ti 112, II Ti 45. n, He li*, Re 2i9 ; 8. r. 



108 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

davdrov, II Co 3'^ ; t. irvevfjt.aTO'i, ib. ® ; T. KaraKpiaew^, t. 8iKaLo<rvvr]<;, ib. • J 
T. KaraWayrj^, ib. 5^^; t. AciTovpytas, ib. 9^^; C. obj. gen., Ttjv VfJLWv 8., ib. 
118; pi.^ I Co 12*.t 

SidKoi-os, -ov, 6, 7j (derivation unknown), [in LXX for 1^3 , m^ pi- • 

Es 63.5, j^B 110^ 22, Pr 10*, 4 Mac 9^7 *;] 1. in general, a servant, 
attendant, minister : Mt 20-^« 22^3 23^i, Mk 93^ 10«, Jo 2*. 9, i Co 3^ 
Ga 2l^ Eph 621, Col 4" ; 8. ^eoi), Eo 13*, ii Co 6*, i Th 32 ; 8. Xpio-roC, 
II Co 1123, Col 1^ I Ti 4«; cf. 6 8. 6 c/xos, Jo 1226; 8. tc/dito/i^s, Eo 15^; 
8. Kaiv^s 8i.aOrJKr]s, II Co 3® ; 8. 8(/caioo-uv»;s, II Co 11^^ ; 8. [cvayycXtov], 
Eph 3', Col 123 . s [e'KKA.77o-ttts], Col 125. 2. As technical term for 
Church officer (so in pre-Christian times, v. M, Th., 1, 32), a deacon : 
Phi 1\ I Ti 38' 12 ; fern. (cf. Bccl. 8ia/covto-<Ta), Eo 16^ (cf. i Ti 3", and 
CGT, in 1., also M, Th., l.c.).t 

Syjv. : 8ov\o<;, bondman ; Oepdirwv, servant acting voluntarily ; 
\nrr}p€Tr]s, servant, attendant, by etymol. suggesting subordination. AH 
these imply relation to a person, in distinction from which 8. repre- 
sents rather the servant in relation to his work. Cf. also Acirovpyds, a 
public servant, in which the idea of service to the community is promi- 
nent ; olKeTr)<;, a hotise servant. 

SiaKoo-ioi, -ai, -a, two hundred : Mk 6^"^, et al. 

Si-aKodc, [in LXX: De l^^ (yaizr), Jb 9^3 (t D^ET hi.)*;] to hear 

through, hear ftilly ; technically, to hear judicially (as De, I.e. ; cf . 
Deiss., BS, 230) : Ac 2335.t 

8ia-KpiV(i), [in LXX for MDtZT, y^, etc.;] 1. to separate, hence, to 

distinguish, disci'iminate, discern : /xrjBkv 8., Ac 11^2 ; oiSkv 8. /lera^, 
Ac 159 ; o-€, I Co 4^^; t6 (r!hfia, i Co 112^. 2. to settle, decide, judge, 
arbitrate : Mt 163, j_ Co 65 II29 (ICC, in 1.), ib. 3i 142s. Mid. and pass. ; 
1. to get a decision, contend, disjmte : seq. Trpd?, Ac II2 ; c. dat. (but v. 
ICG, in 1.), Ju9; absol., Ju 22(R.mg.)^ 2. Hellenistic (NT and Eccl., 
but not LXX), to be divided in ones mind, to hesitate, doubt : Mt 212^, 
Eo 1423, Ja 1« ; ev cavT(3, Ja 2* ; iv t. KapBla, Mk 1123 . ^^3^^ g,^ Ac IO20 ; 
8. T. dTTio-Tm, Eo 420, Ju 22 (B. txt.) t 

Sid-Kpicris, -€a>s, v « 8ta»cptVa)), [in LXX for irb^P , Jb 3718 * ;] 

the act of judgment, discernment : Eo 14\ i Co 12^*', He S^^.t 

** Sia-KwXcuo), [in LXX: Jth 4" 12''*;] to hinder, prevent : c. ace, 

Mt 3i*.t 

** Sia-XaXe'u, -w, [in Sm. : Ps 50 (51)^^, et al. ;] 1. to talk with : Trpds, 

Lk 611. 2. to talk over: pass., Lk l«5.t 

8ia-X^Y°H-**'- i^^- of BiaXiyw, to pick out, distinguish, as depon.), 

[in LXX : Ex 62-, Is 63^ (-Q1 pi.), Jg 8' (nn), i Es 8*^ Es 52, Si I420, 

II Mac 1120 * jj fQ converse with, discourse (v. CI. Bev., i, 45), discuss, 

argue : Ac 18* 19«' ^ 20^ ; c. dat. pers., Ac IT^^ Igis 20^, He 12* ; seq. 

Trpds, Mk 934, Ac 1717 2412; TTcpt, Ac 2425, juO- ^^^ ^. ypa4>C>y, Ac I72.+ 
8ia-Xeiiru, [in LXX for bfl"' (as i Ki 10^), etc. ;] to intermit, leave 

off for a time : Lk 7*5.t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 109 

8ici-Xekto$, -ov, ^ (<^ SioXeyoynai), [in LXX : Da LXX 1* (ftsn), 

Es 926*;] 1. conversation, discourse, speech (Plat., Dem., al.). 2. As 
in Polyb. and later writers, the language or dialect of a particular 
country or district: Ac 1^^ 2«'8 21*o 22^ 26i*.t 

**t 8io-Xtfnrd^«, [in LXX: To 10^*]; to intermit, cease: Ac 8^*, 
WH, mg.t 

Si-aXXdaau), [in LXX: I Ki 29* (nS"5 hithp.), i Es A^\ al.;] 1. to 

change, exchange. 2. to change enmity for friendship, to reconcile : 
pass., c. dat. pers., Mt 5^*. "The word denotes mutual concession 
after mutual hostility, an idea absent from KaraW-," q.v. (Lft., Notes, 
288; cf. Deiss., LAE, ITS^g; Cremer, 91, 632).t 

Sia-Xoyijonai, depon., [in LXX chiefly for aOTI , freq. in Pss. ;] 
1. to balance accounts (Dem.). 2. to consider, reason (Isocr.) : Lk 1^^ 
521 ; iv T. Kap8ia, Mk 26' 8, Lk 5^2 ; Trcpt, Lk 315 ; iv iavT<5 {-oh), Mt 16^. 8, 
Mk 28, Lk 1217; Trpos I., Mk 933 usi^ l^ 20^*; Trap L, Mt 2125 (,v L, 
T, WH, mg.) ; Trpos aXXrjkov^, Mk 8^^ ; on, Mk 8^^ Jo ll*o, Eec. {DB, i, 
611 ; Cremer, 400).t 

8ia-XoYi7|i.6s, -ov, 6 (<^ 8taXoyt^o/iai), [in LXX chiefly for 
n^ttrno ;] a thought, reasoning, inward questioning : Mt 15^^, Mk 72\ 
Lk 23» 522 68 9*6. *7 2438, Eo 121 141, I Co 320 (lxx)^ Phi 21*; /cptralS. 
irovrjptav, gen. of qual. (cf. Pr 12^), Ja 2*; x'^P'^ o/ayij? koX S. (where 
perh. S., like rr|)7p , in Ps 138 (139)2o, al., implies evil intention), i Ti 28 

(v. Hort, in 1.; cf. Cremer, 400).t 

8ia-Xuu, [in LXX for nnx , b^n , etc. ;] to part asunder, 
dissolve ; of an assembly, pass., to disperse : Ac 536.t 

8ia-fi,apTupofxai, depon., of Ionic origin, intensive of the simple 
fxapTvpo/xai, q.v., [in LXX chiefly for Tir hi., usually c. dat. pers., De 
428 8^9, I Ki 89, al. ;] solemnly to protest : Lk 1628, Ac 2*0 82* 10*2 IS^ 
2021.23,24 2311 2823, i ^^^ 46^ He 2« ; in adjuration, seq. ivwmov t. Oeov, 
I Ti 521, II Ti 21* 41 (Cremer, 415).t 

8ia-}i(lxofjiai, [in LXX for Dnb ni.. Da LXX IO20 ; Si 8^' 3 3828 
5119*. J I to struggle against. 2. In argument, to contend: Ac 23^.+ 

8io-fx.^»'a), [in LXX for TOJT , etc. ;] to remain, continue : Lk I22 
2228, Ga 25, He l^^ (^xx), „ Pe 3*.t 

8ia-|iepitu, [in LXX chiefly for pbn pi. ;] 1. to distr^b^^te : c. dat. 
pers., Ac 2**; seq. cts, Lk 22^"^, pass., Ac 23. Mid. to distribute 
among themselves : Mt 2735, Mk I52*, Lk 233* ; with redundant iavroh, 
Jo 1924 (LXX) (v_ M, Pr., 157). 2. to divide, separate: pass., seq. cVi, 
c. ace, Lk 1117.18. ,vi', c. dat., Lk 1252. ss.t 

8ia-fi€pi<7^os, -ov, 6 « Siajxept^io), [in LXX : Ez 4829 (n|T*3nS), Mi 
712*;] a division: opp. to dpT^vrj, Lk 125i.t 

hia-vifiw, [in LXX for pbu, De 2926 <25)*;] ^q distribute, divide: 
pass., to be spread about, Ac 4i7.t 

t8ia-.'e.5G,, [in LXX: Ps 34 (35)i9 (pp), Si 2722*;] to wink at, 
nod to, beckon to : Lk I22.+ 



110 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Sia-KOTifia, -Tos, TO (<^ Siavoeo/Atti, to think), [in LXX . for 
n^ljl'na , etc., Is 55^ al, freq. in Si ;] a thought : Lk ll^^.t 

Sidfoia, -a<;, ^, [in LXX chiefly for n^ , a^^ ;] the understanding, 

mind : Lk l^^, Eph 4:^% Col 1^\ i Pe V\ ii Pe S\ i Jo 520 ; pi., Eph 
23 ; in quotations from LXX, Mt 22^\ Mk 123o, Lk 102^, He S^o lO^^ 
(Cremer, 79, 438).t 

81-aK-oiYw, [in LXX for -|I3D (Ex, Nu), npD , nns , etc. ;] to open 
up completely, to open : Lk 2^3 (lxx) ; pass., Mk 7^*, Ac 7^^. Metaph., 
8. T. vovv, Lk 24**, T. KapSiav, Ac 16^*, pass., 01 o^OaXfioi, Lk 24^^ ; of 
explaining, t. ypa^a?, Lk 24^2^ Ac 173.t 

8ia-»'UKT£p€uu (cf . SL7]fji.€p€vw, to 2}ass the day), [in LXX : Jb 2^ * ;] 
to pass the night : seq. iv t. Trpoo-evxfj, Lk 6^2_t 

**8i-a>'uw, [in LXX: 11 Mac 12^^*;] 1. to accomjilish fully, finish, 
comjylete : Ac ^V (EV). 2. In late writers (Xen., al., Clem., I ad 
Cor., XXV, 3), to continue : Ac, I.e. (Field, Notes, 134 f.).t 

Sia-irai'TOs, V. 8id, c. gen. 
*+8ia-jrapa-Tpipii, -rj^, 17 {^irapaTpi/Sr], friction, irritation), mutual 
irritation (Field, Notes, 211), wrangling : 1 Ti 6^ (Eec. •7rapa8iaTpi^i?).t 

8io-ir6ptia), -w, [in LXX : De dO^\ Is 232 (^2^1 i Mac ^ * ;] to pass 
over, cross over : Mt 9^ ; seq. cVl t. y^v, Mt 14^*, Mk 6*3 ■ ^i^^ Mk 521, 
Ac 212 . ^p^^ ^^ss, Lk 1626.t 

* 8ia-irX^<i), -to, to sail across : Ac 27*. t 

8ia-iro^^a>, -S, [in LXX : Ec lO^ (nsr ni.), 11 Mac 228 ; in Aq. : 
Ge 6*, I Ki 20^*;] to work out with labour. Pass., to be worn out, 
sore troubled : Mk 14* (WH, mg.), Ac 42 l&^M 

8ia-'irop€ua), [in LXX for iny , Ijbn , etc. ;] to carry over. Pass., 
to pass across, journey through : absol., Lk IS^^, Eo 152* . geq. ^a.Ta 
ir6\,Ls K. K^p.a<;, Lk 1322; g,^^ c. gen., Mk 22^, Lk 61 (cf. Pr 9^2 0, 
Wi 31) ; c. ace, Ac 16*.t 

** 8i-aiTopew, -w, [in Sm. : Ps 76 (77)*, Da 2^ * ;] to be quite at a loss, 
be in great perplexity : absol., Ac 2^2; seq. 8ta to, c. inf., Lk 9'''; TrepC, 
Ac 52* ; iv eavTw, Ac lO^^.t 

* Sia-irpayfiaTcuofiai, "perfective compound " (v. M, Pr., 118) ; 1. to 
examine tJwroughly (Plat.). 2. In late writers (Dion. Hal.), to gain by 
trading : Lk 19i*.t 

8ia-jrpiw, [in LXX : I Ch 20^ ("ntzr) * ;] to saw asunder. Pass., 
metaph. (vernacular?), EV, cut to the heart: Ac 5^3; seq. t. KapSiais 
avTwv, Ac 7**.t 

Si-apirdio), [in LXX for 772 , ^73 , DDtZ? , etc. ;] to plunder : Mt 

1229, Mk 327.t 

8La-priiTaw (so WH, exc. Ac, I.e.), Sia-ppT^o-o-w (poetic and late 
form of Stapprjyvw/ii), [in LXX chiefly for yip ;] to break asunder, burst, 
rend : Sea-fj-d, Lk 32^ ; pass,, StK-rua, Lk 5^ ; tftarta, xtTwvas, in grief or 
anger (as Ge 372^, al.), Mt 26«*, Ac ll^*, Mk 14<53.t 

8ia-aa<J)€w, -w (< o-a^7?s, clear), [in LXX : De 1* (isa pi.), Da 
LXX, 2« (mn aph.), i-iii Mac 9*;] to make clear, explain f telly : 
c. ace. rei, dat pers., Mt 132« IB^i.t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 111 

8ia-(7€i'u, [in LXX: Jb 4^* (ins hi.), iii Mac 7^^*;] to shake 
violently ; metaph., to intimidate : Lk 3^*.t 

t|8ia-aKopm'!t<D, [in LXX for ym, 7111, etc.;] to scatter abroad^ 
disperse : of sheep, Mt 26^1 = Mk 142'' (i-^^) ; of persons, Lk 1", 
Ac 5^^, opp. to auvdyw, Jo 11*^; of winnowing grain, Mt 252*' 2«; 
metaph., of property, to squander, ivaste : Lk 15^^ 16^t 

8ia-<nrciw, -w, [in LXX chiefly for pn: , as Jg 16^ ;] to break or 
tear asunder : pass., aXvo-eis, Mk 5* ; naCAos, Ac 23^*^. t 

Sia-oTTcipw, [freq, in LXX for riQ , etc. ;] to scatter abroad, dis- 
perse: AcS^'^lli^.t 

Sta-oTTopd, -a?, rj (<^ Siacnrctpco), [in LXX of Israelites dispersed 
and exiled in foreign lands, as De 28^5 (rnjrr) 30* (m: ni.), Is 49« (1^3) ; 

by meton., of the exiles themselves (as Ps 146 (147)2, ii Mac 1^^) ;] a 
dispersion: 8. twv 'FikXrjvwv, Jo 7^^; metaph., of Christians {DB, iii, 
782 f.), Ja 11, I Pe 1^ (v. Hort, in il.).t 

8ia-<rrAXa), [in LXX for bia hi. (De lO^, al.), -liTT hi. (Ez 3^^' ^^, al.), 
and 19 other words] ; 1. to divide, distinguish, define. 2. to oommand, 
charge expressly : pass., to SiaorTeXXd/tevov, He 12^^. Mid. in late Gk. 
with same sense (so Ez, I.e.; et al. in LXX; MM, s.v.); c. dat. 
pers., Mk 8^5, Ac 15^* ; seq. Iva, Mt 162o, Mk 5*^ 7^6 g^.t 

8i(laTT]|ia, -Tos, TO (<^ Bua-Trjfjii), [in LXX for niT , etc. ;] an interval, 
space : of time (Si, prol. 2*), Ac 5'^.t 

8ia-crroXVi, -^s, rj « SiacrTcAAo)), [in LXX for nnp : Ex 823 (iw 

etc.;] 1. a separation. 2. a distinction, difference: Eo 322 lO^*^ 
I Co 147.t 

8ia-o-Tp^<j)a>, [in LXX for '^'ESn , tDpV , etc.;] to distort, twist; 
metaph., to distort, pervert : Lk 232, ^q 238, 10 . Sua-rpa/Mfievo^, per- 
verse : Mt 17l^ Lk 9", Ac 20^\ Phi 2".t 

8ia-(Tut<«>. [in LXX for taba , yOT , etc. ;] to bring safely through a 
danger : Lk 7^, Ac 27*^ ; seq. tt/dos, Ac 232*. Pass., to come safe 
through: Ac 28^; €;rt t. y?jv, Ac 27**; €k t. OaUa-ar]^, Ac 28*; Si' 
vBaros, I Pe 32**; of sickness, to recover : Mt 143*. t 

tSia-TayTJ, -^s, rj « StaTao-o-w), [in LXX: II Es 4^^ (]3Kr"l5)*;] 

in late writers (Deiss., LAE, 86 ff.) for cl. 8iaTa|^ts (wh., however, is 
found in LXX, Ps 118 (119)^^, al.) ; (a) disposition (cf. Siara^ts for 
N^y; Sm., IV Ki 23*, Je 82 19^3); ek Siaraya^ dyyeXwv, AV, by the 

disposition of angels (Alf., in 1., Field, Notes, 116; but v. infr.): Ac 7**; 
(6) ordi7iance (C. I. 3465) : Eo I32, Ac 7", E, txt. (and v. mg. ; Page 
and EGT, in 1.; but also v. 8upr,).t 

1 8id-TaYfia, -tos, to « SiaTcio-o-w), [in LXX : II Es 711 (liniyj), Es 

313, Wi IV*;] an edict, mandate: He 1123.+ 

** 8ta-Tap(l<rcra), [in Sm. : III Ki 20 (21)*3 *;] to agitate greatly (Lat. 
perturbare) : Lk 129.t 



112 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

8ia-T(i<ro-w, [in LXX for U^io , "TatZT , etc. ;] to charge, give orders 
to, appoint, arrange, ordain : c. dat., Mt 11\ I Co 9^* 16^ ; seq. inf., 
Lk 855, Ac 182. Mid., i Co T^^, Ac 20^3 ; c. ace, i Co ll^* ; c. dat., 
Tit 15; seq. inf., Ac 7" 2423. Pass., to Siarcray/xeVov, Lk S^*, Ac 23^^; 
tA StaTaxOipTa, Lk 17^' ^^ ; Siarayd^, Ga S^^.t 

Sio-TcX^o,, -Q>, [in LXX: De 9^ (nM), Je 20'. ^^ (nbs), Es S^^, 
II Mac 52^^*;] prop, trans., to accomplish; used with ellipse of obj. as 
intrans. (Bl., § 81, 1), and joined to participles (in Ac, I.e., to adj. ; 
V. Bl., § 73, 4) with adverbial sense {= continuously), to continue: 
Ac 2733.t 

Sia-TTjp^u, -w, [in LXX for naCT , 1X3 , etc. ; seq. airo (for ]p), as in 

Ps 11 (12)8 .] to jceep carefully : Lk 2^1 ; seq. «, Ac 1529.t 
8ia-Tt, T, Eec. for 81a. rt, v.s. 8id. 
8ia-Ti0T]jjii, [in LXX chiefly for ms , freq. 8. ZiaO^Krjv (nnj m^) ;] 

to place separately, arrange, dispose. Mid. only in NT; 1. (a) in 
general, to dispose of; c. dat. pers., to assign to one, Lk 222^; (b) to 
dispose of by a will, make a testament (in cl., 8. haOrjKTqv also in this 
sense) : He 9^^' ^^ (but cf. E, mg., and v.s. hiaOrjKrj). 2. 8. hiaOrjKiqv, 
to make a covenant (Aristoph.) : c. dat. pers.. He S^^^^^^^); seq. Trpos, 
c. ace. pers., Ac 32*, He 10^'' (i^^^) (cf. di'Tt-SiaTt^-7/xi).t 

Sia-Tpi'Po), [in LXX Le 14^ (nizr), Je 42 (35)^ (ma). To ll^- ^\ Jth 
102, ij Mac 1423*;] to rub Jiard, rub away, consume; 8. xp^yov, 
^/x€>a9, to spend time : Ac 14^. 28 I612, 20« 256. u. Intransitively with 
ellipse of object (Bl., § 81, 1), to spend time, stay : Jo 322 ll^i is^s, 
Ac 12i9.t 

**8ia-Tpo4)ii, IJ?, r) {<^ 8iaTpe4>w, to support, sustain), [in LXX: 
I Mac 6*^* ;] food, nourishment : i Ti 6*.t 

**t 81-auYil^w, [in Aq. : Jb 25* * ;] to shine through, to daivn : 11 Pe V^ 

(cf. ?ws ov 8LaTrv€v(Tr] rj rjfj.epa, Ca 2^^).t 

**8iaoYVis, -« (<aib'^), [in Aq.: Prl62*;] transparent: Re 212i.t 

8ia<()ai'TJs, -£s (<^ 8La<j>aii'(o to show through, shine through), [in 

LXX: Ex 303-^ (^J, Is 321(23) (j^^a), Es 16*;] transparent: Re 212i 

(Eec. ; v. 8iauy7;s).t 

8ia-<|)€'pu, [in LXX for SZlff (Da 7 only) ; i Ki 17^9, Es 3", al. ;] 

1. trans., (a) to carry throiigh: seq. 8id, Mk ll^*^; {b) to carry about, 
spread abroad : pass., Ac 13*^ 272''. 2. Intrans., (a) to differ : to. 
Siat^epovra, Ro 2^^, Phi l^** (R, mg., but v. infr.) ; impers., Sia^epct, it 
makes a difference, it matters : Ga 2" ; (b) to excel : c. gen. Mt 62" lO^^ 
1212, Lk 127. 24^ I Co 15", Ga 4^ ; rk 8ia<^€povTa, Eo 2i8, Phi V^ (R, 
txt. ; for discussion and retf. v. ICC on Eo, Phi, 11. c.).t 

8io-<t.eoY<^. [ill I^XX • Jos 822 (M^b^), ib. IO28 (TIV^), etc. ;] to flee 
through, escape : Ac 27^2.+ 

*t 8ia-<}>T)/xi^a), in late writers only, to spread abroad: t. Xoyov 
(= ISTTJ, the matter), Mk I'**, Mt 281^; c. ace. pers., to spread abroad 
one's fame: Mt 93i.t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 113 

8ia-(|>0eipu, [in LXX chiejly for nuv hi. ;] 1. to destroy utterly: 
Lk 1233, Re 11^8 ; pass., to be destroyed, disabled : Ee 8^, ii Co 4^«. 
2. In moral sense, to corrupt, deprave : t. yTjv, Ee 11^^ ; pass., 8u<f>6ap- 

fiiVOl T. VOVV, I Ti 6^.t 

8ia-4>0opd, -as, T] (■< 8ia<f>deipw), [in LXX chiefly for nnV , and 

cogn. forms;] 1. destruction. 2. corruption (physical or moral): 
of the grave, Ac 227(i'XX),3i 1334-37^1 

8id-<|>opos, -ov « Biacfyipw), [in LXX for S2V (Da T' ^^) ; also as 

in Polyb., iv, IS^, al., to 8., ra 8., money : Si 27^ A2% 11 Mac S^ ;] 
1, different : Eo 12*', He 9^^. 2. excellent : compar., -dn-fpos, He 
1* 86.t 

8io-<|>uXoi<rau, [in LXX chiefly for IDW (as Ps 90 (91)") ;] to 
guard carefully (M, Pr., 116), defend: c. ace, Lk 4io(LXX)_t 

*8ia-x€ipi^u (<;X"P)> ^^ have in hand, conduct, manage. Mid. 
(a) = act.; (b) in late writers (Polyb., FIJ, al.), to lay hands on, 
kill : c. ace, Ac 5^^ 2621.+ 

* 8ia-xXcu<ii^<i>, intensive of ^^cva^w, to scoff, mock : (a) c. ace. ; (6) 
absol., Ac 2^3_f 

8ia-x«pi|;«, [in LXX: Ge 1** (bl3 hi.), IS^''- (TID ni.), etc.;] 
to separate entirely. Mid., to separate oneself, depart: seq. dTro, 
Lk 933.t 

*t 8i8aKTiKos, -rj, -6v (= cl. SiSoo-KaAiKo's), apt at teaching: i Ti 3^, 
II Ti 22*.t 

8i8aKT6s, -rj, -6v «8t8a(rKw), [in LXX: Is 54" (TlJa^), i Mac 

4'^*;] 1. that can be taught. 2. taught; c. gen., of source of teaching 
(in cl., poet, only) ; (a) of persons : 8. Oeov, Jo 6**<i'XX); (fe) of things, 
Aoyois 8. TTVfvfx.aTO'i, I Co 2^^.f 

8i8aaica\ia, -as, v « 8i8<^<rKo,), [in LXX : Pr 2^7 (p)1^N), Is 29^3 

("Tab pu.), Si 2433 39^*;] teaching, instruction, in both active and 
objective senses, most freq. the latter: Eo 12^ 15*, Eph 4^*, i Ti 
46, 13, 18 517 61, 3^ n Ti 310' ^«, Tit 27. 10 ; iyiaLvoiaa 8., I Ti l^o, 11 Ti 43, 
Tit 1» 21 ; pi, 8. T. avOpi^iroiv, Col 222 ; 8. 8ai/xovtW, I Ti 41 ; 8. 8i8ao-Kctv, 
Mt 159, Mk 7^(1^^) (Cremer, 182).t 
SyN. : 8t8a;^7^. 
**8i8(i(7KaXos, -ov, 6 «8t8do-K(u), [in LXX: Es 6\ iiMacpo*;] 
given as rendering of Heb. "•ai, pm (NT, 'PayS^et, 'Pa/3/3ovm, q.v.); 

a teacher: Jo 139 201"; ^f Jewish teachers, Lk 2*<5, Jo 310, cf. Eo 
220,21. of John Baptist, Lk 3^2; of Jesus, Jo 32.10 8^^ II28 1313.1*, and 
often in Syn., most freq. in voc, as title of address, as Mt 81^, Mk 43^ ; 
of Jesus by himself, Mt 238 • of an apostle, 1 Ti T, 11 Ti 1" ; of 
Christians, i Co 1228.29, Eph 4", Ac 13i, Ja 31 ; of false teachers, 11 Ti 
43 (Cremer, 181 ; DB, i, 609, iii, 294, iv, 691). 

Syn. : 7rat8«vn^s, q.v. 

8i8(iaKw ;in LXX chiefly for mb pi., also for W hi., HT hi., 
etc. ;] to teach (i.e. instruct) a person, teach a thing ; 1. trans. : c. ace. 

8 



114 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

pers., Mt 52, Mk l^^ al. ; seq. Sn, Mk 8^'; ir^pC, 1 Jo 2^7; c. inf., Lk 
11^; c. ace. rei, Mk G^o 121"; ^ c^gn ace, Mt IS^d-xx). q^ ^^^\_ ace, 
Mk 42, Jo 142« ; pass., Ga 1^2^ 11 Th 2i* ; c. dat. pers. (like Heb., of. 
Jb 212", Qut prob. a vernac. usage, v. Swete, in 1.), Re 2^*. 2. Absol., 
tfO teach, give mstruction : Mt 4'"^, Mk I'^i, and often in Gosp., Eo 12^, 
I Co 417, I Ti 2^2^ al. 

Syn. : TratSeL-w (cf. Westc, Heh., 402 ;' Cremer, 180). 

SiSaxV), -^s, rj (< StSao-Kco), [in LXX : Ps 59 (60) tit. {yb pi.) ; Sm. : 
De 33^*;] 1. objectively, teaching, doctrine, that which is taught : Mk 
127, Jo ?!«, Ac 1719, Ro 67 1617, II Jo 10, Ee 22" ; c. gen. poss., Mt 728 
1612 2233, Mk 122 1118, Lk 432, Jo 1819, Ac 528, Ee 2i'».i5; ^ 8., of 
Christ, Jo 717, Ac 1312, II Jo 9; cf. -njv 8., Tit 1^; c. gen. obj., ^a-n- 
TLcr/jiutv 8., He 62 ; pi., He 13^. 2. Actively, teaching : Ac 2*2^ n Ti 42 . 
£1/ T. 8., in the course of his teaching : Mk 42 12^8 ; XaAeiv ev 8., i Co 14*' ; 
€x«v 8., ib. 26 (DCG, i, 485 ; Cremer, 181). t 

SVN. : 8i8acrKa\La. 
t Si'Spaxfios, -01' (•<[ 8is, Spa^/ar;), worth two drachmae ; to 8. (sc. 
v6fj.i<rfjia, coin), [in LXX chiefly for bpW (Ge 28i*, al.), also for P)p3 : 

Ge 201^, De 222^ ;] a double drachma, nearly equal to the Jewish Jialf- 
shekel, the amount of the Temple tax : Mt I72* {DB, iii, 428).t. 

AtSufios, -ov, o (prop, name from 8i8i>/aos, -r;, -ov, double, sc. Trai?, 
tivin), Didymus, surname of the apostle Thomas : Jo lli^ 202* 212. t 

8i8wfxi, [in LXX chiefly for ]n3 (53 words in all) ;] to give — in 
various senses, ace. to context — bestow, grant, siipply, deliver, commit, 
yield : absol., Ac 20^^ ; c. ace. rei et dat. pers., Mt 4^ 5^1, Jo I12, al. 
mult. ; e. dat. pers., seq. Ik, Mu 25^ ; id. c. gen. part.. Re 21" ; c. ace. 
pers., Jo 31^ Re 20i3, al. ; 8€^tas, Ga 2^; cf>LXr]fxa, Lk 7**; yvio-iv, 
Lk 177 ■ Kpi(TLv, Jo 522 ; of seed yielding fruit, Mk 4"' ^ ; ipyacriav (Deiss., 
LAE, 117 f.), Lk 12^8 . c inf_ fi^^ Mt 27^^ Mk 5*3^ Lk 8^5, Jo 6*2, al. ; 
c. dat. pers. et inf., Lk 17*, al.; e. ace. et inf., Ac 227, Ee 3^; e. dupl. 
ace., Mt 2028, Mk 10^^ Eph I22 411, 11 Th 3^, i Ti 2«, al. ; iavroy 8. 
CIS (Polyb., al.), Ac 193i ; e. dat. pers., seq. Kara (MM, Exp., xi). Re 

228 (LXX) • 8. Lva, Re 39 ; 8e8wKa evwTrtdv aov Ovpav aveoyy fxivrjv, Re 3^. 

Syn. : 8(o/jeo/Aai. 
**8i-6Y€i>, [in LXX: Jth 1*, Es li, ii Mac 721 IS" iii Mac 5"*;] 
to aroiise completely, arouse as from rest or sleep : Lk 82* ; pass., 
Mk 439, Lk 82* ; of the sea, Jo 6I8. Metaph., of the mind : iv mrop.- 
vrjo-€i, II Pe 113 3i.t 

*t Si-ci/Ou|uL^o|xai, -ov/xai, depon., to consider, reflect : seq. Trtpi, Ac 
IQi^.t 

8i-^|-o8os, -ov, rj, [in LXX chiefly for n'lKl^in , as Nu 34* ^-^ and 

freq. in Jos ;] in tt. of the conclusion of a trial (MM, Exp., xi) ; a way 
out through, an outlet ; pi., 8, twi/ 68a)v, RV, the partings of the high- 
ways : Mt 22^.+ 

*t 8i-€pfiT)>'cuTiis, -OV, 6 (<^ 8L€pp.r]V€v(o), an interpreter : 1 Co 1428. + 
*t8i-€pjAr]j'€ta, as, 17, interpretation: 1 Co 12i<', L, txt. (not else- 
where), t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 115 

**t 8t-€p/xr]v'cuw, [in LXX : ii Mac 1^^*;] intensive of ep/xr]V€V(o, to 
interpret ; (a) to explain, expound : c. ace, Lk 24^'^ ; absol., i Co 12^° 
145,13,27; (5) to translate: Ac 93«.+ 

Si-^PX°f^<^^ [^^ LXX for 12H, ^^n, N'I2, etc.;] 1. to go through, 
pass through; (a) of things: Mt 19^*, Mk lO^s, Lk 2^5, al.; (b) of 
persons: Lk 19*; c. ace. loc, Lk 19^ He 4}\ Ac 12^*^; seq. 8ia, c. 
gen. loc, Mt 12", i Co 10^ ; seq. ds, Mk d^s . i^^^ l^ 2^5. 2. to go 
about: Lk 9^, Ac 20^*; of a report, to spread, go abroad (Thuc), 
Lk 515. 

* 8i-€pwT(iw, -w, to find by inquiry : c. ace, Ac lO^^.t 

**8ien7s, -£s «8i5, £Tos), [in LXX: ii Mac 10^*;] 1. lasting two 
years. 2. two years old: a-n-o 8. (sc. TratSoV, or neuter; cf. i Ch 27^', 
diro ctKOcracToCs), Mt 2^^.f 

1 8i€Tia, -as, rj « Sterols), [in LXX {Grac. Ven.) : Ge 41' 45* * ;] the 
space of two years : Ac 24'^^ 28^*^.t 

Si-Tjye'ofiai, -ov/agi, [in LXX chiefly for i£3D pi. ;] to set out in 
detail, recount, describe : absol., He 11^^ ; q q^qq j-ei, Ac 8^^ ; c. dat. 
pers., seq. ttSs, Mk 5l«, Ac 9^^ 12^7 ; a cTSov, Mk 9^ ; oo-a cTrotr/o-c, -av, 
Lk 839 9io.t 

8i-iiYTj<Tis, -ews, 17 « SiT^yeoyxaO. [^^ ^XX : Jg 7^5 (l^Qa), Hb 28 
(n-JTl), freq. in Si (636, al.), ii Mac 232 qit .^ ^ narrative: Lk 1^ (cf. 

MUligan, NTD, 130).t 

**8i-T|i'6KTis, -is «8ir?i'£yKa, aor. of Sia^tpco), [in Sm. : Ps 47(48)1* 
88 (89)30 ;] unbroken, continuous : adverbially, ci? to 8., continually (for 
exx., V. Deiss., BS, 251), He 73 IQi* 12, u.f 

*t 8i0(iXaao-os, -ov (8ts, ^uXacrcra) ; 1. divided into two seas (as the 
Euxine, Strab., ii, 5^2). 2. dividing the sea : tottov S., a tongue of 
land, or reef, running out into the sea : Ac 27*i.t 

8i-iKi'^o|iai (Rec. SiiK-), -oifiai, [in LXX for ma hi., Ex 2628*;] to 
go through, penetrate : He 4^2. t 

8i.i(rn,^i (Rec. ht<T-), [in LXX : Ez 5^ (pbn pi.), Pr 17» (TIB hi.), 
etc.;] to set apart, separate ; of time (or space), to make an interval, 
intervene : Siao-rao-Tjs dlpas /iias, Lk 22*^ ; jSpayy Siao-riJo-ai'Tcs, Ac 27^8. 
In pass., mid. and 2 aor., pf. and plpf. act., to part, withdraw: 
Lk 24".t 

* 8i-i<rxupiio(jiat (T, Eec. Stio--), depon. ; 1. to lean upon. 2. to 
affirm confidently : c. ptcp., Lk 22^9 ; c. ace. et inf. (Bl., § 70, 3), 
Ac 12i5.t 

8iK<£t«, to judge: Lk 63^ (Tr., mg.; v.s. xaraS-; Cremer, 199),t 
*t 8iKoioKpiaio, -as, rj, righteous judgment: Eo 2^ (cf. t. 8i/cat'as 
Kpto-cws, II Th 1" ; t\jv 8. K., Jo 72^ For use in tt., v. Deiss., LAE, 89 f .).t 
8iKaios, -a, -ov (<^ hUrj), [in LXX chiefly for p'*'V$ (for rendering 
of (Tl? in sense of correct, v. Deiss., JSS, 115 f.) ; sometimes for 
^j55 , as Pr 111, a,l. ;] in early Gk. writers, {a) of persons, observant of 
81K17, custom, rule, right, righteous in performing duties to gods and 



116 MANUAL GBEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

men ; {b) of things, righteous, in accordance with right. In NT : 1. 
righteous, chiefly in the broad sense, as above, of the person or thing 
corresponding to the Divine standard of right ; (a) of persons : of God, 
Eo 326, I Jo 229 37 ; of Christ, Ac 3^* 7*2 22i*, i Pe 3^\ i Jo 2^ ; of men, 
Mt 119 (Abbott, Essays, 75 f .) 10" 13^7' «. 49^ Lk 1«. ^^ Eo 5^, i Ti 1^, 
Ja 56, I Pe 312, I Jo 3^ Ee 22", al. ; 8. Ka\ eiXafS^^, Lk 22* ; 5yios, 
Mk 620 ; dya^os, Lk 23*0 ; <f>ol3ovfji€vos r. 6e6v, Ac IO22 ; opp. to d/xap- 
TwXoi Kal dcTcyScIs, I Pe 4I8; ahiKoi, Mt 5*^ Ac 2415 ; 8. Ik Trto-rew?, Ro l^^ 
Ga 311, He lO^s d-xx); g. ^^pa t. 6^(0, Eo 2i3; (6) of things: Ipya 8., 
opp. to TTovrjpd, I Jo 312 J ^vtoXt;, Eo 7^2 j metaph., alfia, Mt 23^* ; TO 8., 
Lk 12*7; g. i^^,^^ Ac 419, Eph 6\ Phi 1^; 6, Mt 20*; oo-a, Phi 48. 2. 
In narrower sense ; (a) of persons, as in later cl. writers, jiist, rendering 
to each his due : Tit 1"^, i Jo I'' ; 8. Kpirrj?, 11 Ti 4^ ; (b) of things : to 8., 
Col 41 ; 8., sc. i<TTtv, II Th l" ; Kpcats 8., Jo 5^0 ; 68oi, Ee 153. 

SVN. : dya^o's (q.v.), KaXos, XRW"^"^ (Gremer, 183, 690). 

SiKaioaui'T], -17s, 17 (•<8t/<aio?), [in LXX chiefly for pl^, and 

cognates, Ge 15^, al., rarely for IDTTi , Ge 19^^;] the character of 

6 8tKaios (q.v.) ; 1. in broad sense, righteousness, conformity to the 
Divine will in purpose, thought and action : Mt 5^, Jo 16^, Ac 13^0^ 
Eo 43 ; Aoyos ,8tKaiocrvV7;9, teaching of r., He 5^^ ; /Jao-tXeiJs 8. (cf. FIJ, 
BJ, vi, 10, y8. SiKatos), He 72 ; SirXa 8., Eo 6^3 ; 6Sos 8., Mt 21^2 ; $^pa^ 
T^s 8., Eph 6^*; 8tdKo.'oi 8., 11 Co 11^*; 6o-toT7?s Kal 8., Lk 1^5, cf. Eph 

42* ; aya6(i)(Tvvr) Kal 8., Eph 5^ ; 8. k. elprjvrj k. x^/^S -^O 14^^ ; 8. k. 
dyiao-p-df, I Co l^" ; Opp. to ajxaprCa, Eo 8^" ; avofxia, II Co 6^* ; d8tKta, 
Eo 3* ; TToietv T^v 8., I Jo 229 3^^ ; id. as an inclusive term for the active 
duties of the religious life {ICG, in 1. ; Abbott, Essays, 73 -'), Mt 6^ ; 
ipyd^€a-eai 8., Ac lO^* ; StwKeiv 8., I Ti 611 . TrXrjpoiv 7r5o-av 8., Mt 31* ; 
^7]v ry 8., I Pe 22* ; 8. ^eov, a righteousness divine in its character and 
origin, Mt 6^^, Ja I'^o, Eo (where it also includes the idea of God's 
personal r.; v. ICC, on li^) 1^ 3*. 21-26 iQs, n Co 521, Phi 3^; ^8. t. 
TTio-rtws, Eo 411 ; rj tK IT. 8., Eo 936 ; 1^ (caTct tt. 8., He 11'^ ; opp. to this 
is r, iK v6fiov 8., Eo 10*; rj 8. iy v., Phi 36; 71 iSia 8., Eo 103, cf. Phi S^. 
2. In narrower sense (cf. 8i»catos), justice : Ac 17^1, 11 Pe li, Ee 19" 
{DCG, ii, 529 ff. ; Cremer, 190, 690). 

SiKaiow, -w « 8tKaios), [in LXX chiefly for piS pi., hi., (1) as Ez 
16*1, je 311 (cf . NT usage) ; (2) as De 25i, Ex 23^ Is 508 .j i_ Jq cl., 
(a) c. ace. rei, to deem right ; (b) c. ace. pers., to do one justice ; pass., 
tiKaiovfrOai, to be treated rightly, opp. to d8i«€tcr^ai. 2. In NT, as in 
LXX, and as usual with verbs in -ow from adjectives of moral mean- 
ing; (1) to show to be righteous : Mt lli", Lk 73*, Eo S^d-xx), i Ti 316; 
(2) to declare, 'pronounce righteous: Lk 72^ 1029 I61* I81*, Eo 2i3 
324,26,28 46 830,33^ Tit 3^ ; seq. dTro, Mt lli^, Lk 73*, Ac 1339, Eo 6^; 
U 7ri'o-T£co9, Eo 330 51^ Ga 2i6 38-2* ; l^ lpyu>v, Eo 320 (LXX) 42^ Ga 2i«, Ja 
221.24,26. i^ ^^ x6yiav, Mt 1237; 8td T. ttiVtco,?, Eo 330 ; c. dat., Eo 32*. 28^ 
Tit 37; seq. h, Ac 1339, Eo 3* 59, i Co 4* 6", Ga2i7 3" 5*, i Ti 3i« 
(v. Cremer, 193, 693; DB, ii, 826 ff.).t 



MANUAL GKEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 117 

SiKoiufio, -T09, TO (<^ St/catou), [ill LXX most freq. for ph , in Ez, 
chiefly for l^tffp, in Pss, ra 8., freq. for D^TlpD;] a concrete ex- 
pression of righteousness, the expression and result of the act of 
SiKatwo-is, " a declaration that a thing is SUcuov, or that a person is 
SiKaios," hence, (a) an ordinance : B. t. Oeov, Eo 1^^; t. Kvptov, Lk 1^; r. 
vo/xov, Eo 2^^ 8* ; Aarpctas, He 9^ ; aapKo^, He 9^° ; {h) a sentence : of 
acquittal, Eo 5^^ (also 5^^; ICC, in 1.), or of condemnation; (c) a 
righteous act : Eo 5^8 (rv), Ee 15* 198 (on the usage of tt., v. MM, 
Exp., iii, xi).t 

SiKttius, adv. « 8tKato9, q.v.), [in LXX for pTlf , etc. ;] 1. 

righteously : i Co lb^\ i Th 2io, Tit 2^2. 2. justly : Lk 23", 
I Pe 223.t 

SiKaiuais, -€(os, fj (<[ Si/catow), [in LXX for t25?!Ti , Le 24^2 * ;] 

the act of pronouncing righteoiis, justification, acquittal : Eo 42^ 5^^ 
(Cremer, 199).t 

SiKoon^s, -ov, 6 (<[ Stfca^w), [in LXX for taglB' ;] a judge : Ac 

727, 35 (LXX) f 

Syn. : KpLTri% wh. " gives prominence to the mental process " 
(Thayer). 8. is the forensic term. In Attic law, the StKao-rcu were 
jurors, with a Kptri^s as presiding ofl&cer (LS, s.v. ; Enc. Brit. ^^, xii, 
504 f.). 

SiKT], -T?s, T], [in LXX for np2, 3^1, etc.;] 1. custom. 2, right. 
3. a judicial hearing ; hence its result, the execution of a sentence, 
-punishment: 8. riveiv, 11 Th 1*; 8. {iTre'xctv, Ju^. 4. Personified (cf. 
Lat. Justitia), justice, vengeance : Ac 28'*.t 

SiKTuof, -ov, TO, [in LXX chiefly for n^ , npsijT ;] general term 

for a net : Mt 420. 21^ Mk l^s- ^^, Lk 52. *-«, Jo 216. 8, u.t 
Syn. : d/Ji<f>i/3\r]aTpov (q.v.), a-ayrjvr]. 
*t8iXoYos, -oy « 8ts, Ae'yw), 1. in sense of SiXoyciv, -la (Xen.), given 
to repetition. 2. In NT, prob. (cf. SiyXcoo-o-os, Pr 11^^, Si 5*) double- 
tongued : I Ti S^.t 

810, conjunct, for 81' o, wherefore, on which account : Mt 27^, Lk 
77, Ac 1519, Eo 124, al. ; 8. koC, Lk l^s, Ac 1029 2426, Eo 422 1522, n Co 
120 413 59^ Phi 29, He 1112 1312 (v. Ellic. on Ga 4^1). 

1 8i-o8eow, [in LXX chiefly for nair ;] 1. to travel through : c. ace, 
Ac 17^ 2. to travel along (Ba 42, i Mac 1232, 33) . Lk S^.t 
Aioi'uaios, -ov, 6, Dionysius, an Athenian : Ac 173*.t 
**8i6-ir6p, conjunct. (810, q.v., strengthened by Trep), [in LXX: 
Jth 8^'^, II Mac 5 * ;] for which very reason : i Co 8^3 lO^^.t 

*8ioir6Tils (written also 8a7r-), -e's «;8ros, ttlwto}, v. Page on Ac, 
I.e.; DB, i, 605, n., ext., 112*; Field, Notes, 130 f.), fallen from 
heaven (E, mg.) : to 8. (sc. ayoA/ta, statue, image), Ac 1935,t 

*8i6p6w(Aa, -Tos, to {<^8iop06w, to make straight, set right), a 
correction, reform : Ac 243. t 



118 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

*8i(5p0w<ns, -€w?, r] (v. supr.), 1. a making straight. 2. a reforming^ 
reforviation (used in late writers of laws, etc.) : He Q^** (Cremer, 
807).t 

8i-opuWu), [in LXX: Jb 1A}\ Ez 125-7.12, (inn)*;] to dig 
through : c. ace, of hous ^-breaking (as in tt. ; MM, Exp., xi), Mt 24*^, 
Lk 1239; absol., Mt6i3'2o.t 

Ai^cr-Koupoi, -tov, ol (lon. and Koivrj form of Att., Aioo-zcopot; 
<; Aio's, gen. of Zer9 + Kopos, a son), the Dioscuri (Castor and Pollux), 
twin sons of Zeus and Leda (EV, The Twin Brothers) : Ac 28i^t 

8i-<5ti, conjunct., for Bta tovto, on (Lat. profterea qtiod), because : 
Lk 113 2^ 2128, Ac 1335 1810 2026 22^8, Eo l^^. ^1 320 8^.21, i Co 159, 
Phi 22«, I Th 28. 18 (Lft., Notes, 37) 4^, He 11^. 23, Ja 43, i Pe l^^. 24 26. 
It is usually stronger than on, but sometimes, as in Lk li3, Eo 1^^ 
I Th 218, approximates to MGr. sense, /or; cf. Milligan, Th., l.e.t 

AioTp€'4)T)s (Eec. -Tp€cf>7]<;), -€S (<! Aios, gen. of Ztvs + rp€(f><a I 
cherished by Zeus), as pr. name, Diotre/phes : iii Jo ^.t 

8117X009 (poet., 8t7rAo9, whence comp. -orepov), -or], -oov (-ous, -^, 
-ovv), [in LXX for bD3 , TOtJi^p , and cognates ;] twofold, double : i Ti 

51", Ee 18^ ; SiTrXo'repov, in twofold meastire : Mt 23^^. t 

* 8iTrX6<o, -w {<^ SiTrXo'r.s), to double : 8. to. SiirXa, Ee 186.t 
8is, adv., tivice: Mk 143o.'2; g, r. (rafifidrov, Lk 18^2. ^^^ 5^^^ 
K. S., Phi 416, I Th 218 ; 8. airoeavovTa, Ju ^2 (y. Mayor, ICC, in 1.) ; 
S. iJi.vpid8e<;, Ee 9^6. t 

Ais, old nom. for Zev<s (q.v.), whence gen. Aids, ace. Ai'a: 
Acl4i2.i3.t 

**t 8io-fiupids, -a8o5, r), [in LXX : 11 Mac g * ;] twice ten thousand : 
Ee 916 (LT; 815 /xuptaSes, WH; 8i'o /^i., Eec.).t 

*8iaT(itw «8ts), to dow6^, hesitate: Mt 143i 28i^t 

SYN. : diropio), Sia-n-opew, BiaKpivofxai, fi€Teo}pL^ofxat (v. DCG, i, 491). 

8iVto^os, -OF « Sis, ard/xa), [in LXX : Jg 316, Ps 1496, Pr 54 (ri,,^)^ 

Si 213*;] 2_ Qf rivers and roads, double-motUhed, double branching. 
2. Of swords (Eur. ; LXX, 11. c), two-edged : He 4^2, Ee li« 2i2.t 

8io--xiXioi, -at, -a, two tJiousand : Mk 5i3.t 

8i-uXiJ^w (<8ia, vXi^ia, to strain), [in LXX: Am 6«*;] 1. to 
strain thoro2ighly (Archytas ; Am., I.e.). 2. Later, to strain out : fig., 
Mt 2324.t 

** Sixdtw {8i'xa, apart), [in Aq. : Le 1^^ De 14^ * ;] to ctd apart, 
divide in two ; metaph., to set at variance : Mt 103^.t 

** 8ixoo-Taaia, -as, rj {<^8ixo(TTaT€w, to stand apart), [in LXX: 
I Mac 329 * ;] standing apart, dissension : Eo IG^^^, Ga 52**. t 

SixoTOfx^u, -Q> (<^ 8t;^OTd^os, <^ 8t;(a, rifivw), [in LXX: Ex 29^^ 
{nr\2 pi.) ;] to cut in two, cut asunder : perh. metaph. of severe 
scourging (but v. Meyer on Mt, I.e., and cf. I Ki 1533, n Ki 123i, 
He 113'), Mt 2451, Lk 12*6.t 

84<io>,-w « Sill/a, thirst), [in LXX chiefly for NOS ;] to thirst : 
absol., Mt 2535.37.42,44^ Jo 413,15 1928^ Ro 1220 (Lxx)^ i Co 411 ; fig., 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 119 

Jo 41* 6^* 7^\ Ee 7^^ 21« 22^7; c. ace. (= cl. c. gen.), t. 8iKaL0(Tvvr)v, 
Mt 5«.t 

Si+os, -cov (-ow), TO, (late form of SitJ/a), [in LXX chiefly for K©^ 

and cognates;] thirst: ii Co ll^'.t 

*t8i»|»uxos, -ov (-<8i.s, iffvxv), of two minds, wavering: Ja 1^ 4^ 
(Cremer, 588; DB, iv, 528). t 

Siwy^^s, -oO, 6 (< StwKco), [in LXX : Pr ll^^ {^m pi.). La 3^^ (li-lij), 
II Mac 1223 * .] persecution : Mt iS^\ Mk 4^7 iqso^ Ac 8^ 13^0, Eo 8^\ 
II Co 1210, II Th 1\ II Ti 3ii.t 

*+ StuKTTjs, -OV, 6 « Stw/co)), a persecutor : i Ti 1^^ f 

SiwKu, [in LXX chiefly for ^11;] 1. to^jwi to flight, drive away: 
Mt 233*. 2. to pursue; (a) of persons; c. ace, without hostility, to 
follow after : Lk 17^3 ; with hostile purpose : Ac 26^^, Ee 12i3. Hence, 
to persecute: Mt 5^0-12, u 10-23^ Lk 11*^ 2112^ jo 51" I520, Ac 7*2 g*-* 
224,7,8 26". 15, Eo 121*, I Co 4^2 159, 11 Co 4^, Ga li3'23 429 511 612, 
Phi S\ II Ti 312; (b) metaph., o. ace. rei, of seeking eagerly after: 
Eo 930, I Ti 611, II T' 222. i,(;^o,, 8tKatoa-vvrj<i, Eo 931 ; t. 0t\o^€itav, 
Eo 1213; dp^vrju, He 1214, I Pe 311 ; ra T^^ il, Eo 141^; t. aydirrjv, 
I Co 141 ; TO ayaOoy, I Th 51* ; absol., to follow on, drive, or s2Jeed on 
(Msch.), Phl3i2.i*.f 

Uy\t.a, -Tos, TO «8oK€w), [in LXX chiefly for T)"^, DyW l] 1- '^^ 

opinion. 2. A public decree, ordinance : of Eoman rulers, Lk 2i, 
Ac 17^ ; of the Jewish law, Bph 21*, Col 2i* ; of the Apostles, Ac 16* 
(Cremer, 205). t 

fhoyiuarlloi, [in LXX : Es 39 (ana ni.). Da LXX, 2i3.i5 {ani, ni), 

I Es 63*, II Mac 108 1536^ m Mac 411 * ;] to decree. Mid., to subject 
oneself to an ordinance : Col 22o.t 

SoK^w, -u) (<[SoKos, opinion, <:^8eK0fxai, lon. form of Se^-), [in LXX 
for mia, ai3, etc.;] 1. to be of ojnnion, suppose: Mt 24**, Lk 12*^, 
He 1029 . c. inf., Mt 39, Lk 8I8 2437, Jo 539 162, Ac 129, 2713, i Co 3i« 
7*0 82 1012 1437, Ga 63, Phi 3*, Ja 12« ; c. ace. et inf., i Co 1223, „ Co 
lli«; seq. 6ti, Mt 6^ 26*3, Mk 6*9, Lk 12*i I32.* I911, Jo 5** lli3.3i 
1329 20l^ I Co 49, II Co 1219, Ja 4*. 2. to seem, be reputed: Ac 252^; 
c. inf., Mk 10*2, Lk 1036 222*, Ac 171^ 269, i Co llie 1222, n Co 109, 
Ga 2^' 9, He 41 12ii ; 01 Sokowt*?, those of repute, Ga 22. Impers., it 
seems, c. dat. pers. ; (a) to think: Mt 172^, I812 2128 22i7.*2 26««, 
Jo 11*", He 1219 ; (&) to please, seem good to : e. inf., Lk 13, Ac 

2522, 25, 28, 34_f 

Syn. (SoKcii) 1.) : rjyiojxai^, vofx.i^u)'^ , olofjiai ; 17. and v. properly 
express belief resting on external proof, 77. denoting the more careful 
judgment ; 8. and 01. imply a subjective judgment which in the case of 
01. is based on feeling, in 8. on thought (v. Schmidt, c. 17). 

{^oK€w 2.) : <)!>atvo/xai ; </>., from the standpoint of the object, 
*' expresses how a matter phenomenally shows and presents itself " ; 
8., from the standpoint of the observer, expresses one's subjective 
judgment about a matter (v. Tr., Syn., § Ixxx ; Cremer, 204). 



120 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

SoKifjidiw «8o'Ki/i,os), [in LXX chiefly for ]n3;] 1. primarily of 
metals (Pr 8^^ 17^ Si 2^ Wi 3"), to test, try, jyrove (in the hope and 
expectation that the test will prove successful, v. reff. s. Syn.) : 
Xpvatoi', I Pe 17; other things, Lk 12^« 14i«, ii Co S^ Ga 6*, i Th 2* 
521 ; Ta 8ia<^€po^Ta, Eo 2^», Phi l^" (R, mg., but v. infr.) ; irvevfjiara. 

I Jo 41 ; of men, i Ti S^^ (pass.) ; iavroy, i Co ll^s, 11 Co 13* ; seq. subst. 
clause, Ro 12% i Co 3^^, Eph 5^*^. 2. As the result of trial, to approve, 
think fit : Ro l^s I422, i Co IG^, 11 Co 822, i Th 2^ (8£8oKi/xao-//€^a) ; 
Ta hia4>ipovTa, Eo 2^^ Phi l^o, R, txt. (but V. supr. ; cf. 8ia<^€pw).t 

Syn. : ntipdCw (V. Tr., Syn., Ixxiv; Cremer, 494 ff., 699 ff.). 
** 8oKifj.aaia, -as, rj « 8o/ct/AaCa)) , [in LXX: Si 62^*;] a testing, 
proving: He 3''(^^^).t 

**t hoKUL^, -^s, ^ « 86KLfios), [in Sm. : Ps 67 {68f^ * ;] 1. the process 

of trial, proving, test : 11 Co 82 9^^. 2. The result of trial, approval, 

approvedness, proof : Ro 5*, 11 Co 2» IS^, Phi 222 (Cremer, 212, 701).t 

SoKiViof, -ov, TO, [in LXX : Pr 17^ 2721 (qiyo) * ;] usually regarded 

as a variant form of BoKifitlov, a test, and so perh. Ja 1^ (v. Mayor, 
in 1.), but see next word (cf. Cremer, 212, 702).t 

+ 8oKifiios, -a, -ov (<^8o/ct/A7j), [in LXX: dpyvpiov 8. (T?y), Ps 

II (12)^ and as v.l. for 8o'Ki/ios (B), dpyvptou 8. (pp7 pu.), i Ch 29* 
(Bab); ct 8. 60-Tiv (n,T), Za ll^^ s'^''^ Q *)* = ^oKifios, tested, 

approved : to 8. v/awv t. Trto-Tcws, i/wi^ which is approved in your faith, 

I Pe l'^ (where Hort suggests the v.l. Soki/xos, found in some cursives), 
Ja 1^ (but v. Mayor, in 1. For full discussion of this word, not hitherto 
found in a Gk. Lexicon, and for exx. of its use in tt., v. Deiss. (to 
whom is due the credit of its discovery), BS, 259 fif. ; MM, Exp., xi; 
cf. also Milligan, NTD, 76).t 

SoKifios, -ov « SeKOfiai = Sexo/xai), [in LXX for ppi pu., etc. ;] 
primarily of metals, tested, accepted, approved : of persons, Ro 14^*, 
16^0, I Co 1119, II Co 10^8 137, II Ti 215, Ja 1^2 (Cremer, 212, 697).+ 

SoKos, -ov, 7j (Sixofiai), [in LXX for nip, etc.;] a beam of 

timber : Mt V'^ Lk 6". "2 (DCG, i, 176).+ 

86X10S, -a, -ov «8d\os), [in LXX — chiefly in Pss, Pr, Si — for 
njpna , etc. ;] deceitful : 11 Co 111^.+ 

+ 8o\i6a> «8o'\tos), [in LXX : Nu 25i8, Ps 104 (105)25 (^33), Ps 5« 
(pbn hi.) * ;] to deceive : IhoXiovcrav (-o-av, freq. in Koivq Gk. for impf. 
3rd pers. pi.), Ro S^^ ^^^W 

86\os, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for n)pia;] 1. in Horn., a bait. 

2. a snare. 3. In the abstract, craft, deceit : Mt 26*, Mk 722 14\ Jo I''', 
Ac 1310, Ro 129, II Co 12i«, I Th 2^, i Pe 2i'22 310 (lxx) (XaX^o-ai 8.).+ 

8oX«5w, -^ (8o\os), [in LXX : Ps 14 (15)3 (i,^-,)^ 35 (36)2 (p^r\ hi.)* ;] 
1. to ensnare. 2. As of wine, to adulterate, corrupt : t. koyov t. 6€ov, 

II Co 42.+ 

Syn. .* KaTrrjXevo), q.V. 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 121 

8<5|Ao, -TO?, TO « hiSiofxi), [in LXX for njn© , etc. ;] a gift : Mt 
7^\ Lk 1118, Eph 48(Lxx)^ Phi 4i7.t 

STN. : Soo-is, SCjpov, Swped, Swp-qfia. 

8<5Ca, -7]^, 17 (-< SoKe'co), [in LXX very freq. for T*I^, also for 

nifttpri, Tin, etc., 25 words in all;] in cl., 1. expectation, judgment, 

opinion (iv Mac 5^^). 2. opinion, estimation in which one is held, repute ; 
in NT, always good opinion, hence reputation, praise, honour, glory : Lk 
1410, Jo 12^3^ He 33 ; opp. to aicTXVvn, Phi 319 ; to (XTi/xta, II Co G^ ; 8. K. 
Tt/xrJ, Eo 2^.10, I Pe V, II Pe l^^; ^yjrf.v 8., Jo 54* 718 850, i Th 2«; 
Xaixpavuv, Jo 5", II Pe 1^^ Ee 5^2 ; hihovai 8. t. ^€<S (cf. rnrpb» TQ3 jCl? , 

Je I316, al.), Lk 17^8, Jo 92*, Ac 1223, Rq 420^ jje 4^; cis (t.) 8. ^coC, Eo 
37 157, Phi 111, al. ; in doxologies, t. ^£(3 (tS) ^ 8., Lk 2i*, Eo ll^e 162^ 
Ga 15, Eph 321, al. 3. Later also (not cl.) as in LXX (= Tin, Jb 
3920, 1 Ch 2925 ; Tins , Jb 199, Es 5", al.), visible brightness, splendour, 

glory : of light, Ac 22ii ; of heavenly bodies, i Co 15*° ^ ; esp. that 
wh. radiates from God's presence, as manifested in the pillar of cloud 
and in the Holy of Holies (= Tins, Ex I610 2522 40^*, al.; and new 
Heb. nz'^^'0 , II Mac 2^ ; v. DB, iv, 489b), Eo 9\ Ja 2i (v. Hort, Mayor, 

in 1.); hence of the manifested glory of God, Eo 123, Qq\ ^n^ jjph 
2(5,12,17 316. of the same as communicated to man through Christ, 
II Co 318 4' ; and of the glorious condition into which Christians shall 
enter hereafter, Eo Si^-^i 92^, 11 Ti 2io, al. 

Syn. : £7rau/os, TL/xr] (v. Hort on I Pe 1''). 

8o|<£|;o> (< 8d^a), [in LXX chiefly for Tns ni., pi., also for TXB , 
etc. ;] 1. to think, siqypose, hold an opinion (^sch., Plat., al.). 2. To 
bestow 86$a (q.v.) on, to magnify, extol, praise (Thuc, iii, 45; Plut., 
al.) : c. ace, Mt 5i«, Mk 212, Jo 8^*, Eo 15^, i Pe 2i2, al. ; id. seq. im, 
Lk 220 ; iv, Ga 12*, i Pe 4i«. 3. In LXX and NT (v.s. 8o^a, 3), to clothe 
icith splendour, glorify (Ex 3429. 3o, Ps 36 (37)2o, Is 4423, Es 31, al.) : 
Eo 830, II Co 310, II Th 31, I Pe l^, al. ; of Christ, Jo 739 g^*, al. (on the 
Johannine use, v. Cremer, 211 ; Westc, Jo., Intr.) ; of the Father, Jo 
1331.32^ I Pe 411, al. (cf. *V-, cTvv-ho^at,i,i). 

AopKds, -a8os, rj (8opKas, a gazelle), Dorcas, also called TafieiOd, 
q.v. : Ac 93«. 39.t 

Soais, -co)5, v (8t8a)/zi), [in LXX for ph (Ge 4722), ]r)Q, npo 

(Pr 211* 251*), freq. in Si. ;] 1. properly, the act of giving : Phi 41*. 
2. Objectively, a gift : Ja li^.t 
Syn. : v.s. Sof^a. 

tS^TTis, -01;, o « 8180/^1), [in LXX: Pr 22^*;] = Sor^p, a giver: 
II Co 9'''<i'XX) (not else where). + 

*i %o\}\aybiyi(a, -co (<^ 8ovXos, ayw), to make a slave, bring into 
bondage : i Co 92^ (Cremer, 703).t 

SooXcia (T, -Xta), -as, ^ «8ovXei;a,), [in LXX, as Ex 133, for 
Tn:? and cognates ;] slavery, bondage : Eo 8^^' 21, Ga 42* 51, He 2i*.+ 



122 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

BouXcu'u (kC^SouXos), [in LXX for laJT^ as Ge 14*, exc. Da th 
714,27 (n^p)j Is 56^ (mC7 pi.)* 5] ^0 be a slave, be subject to, serve: 

absol., Eo 7«, Ga 426, i Ti 62; c. dat pers., Mt 62*, Lk 1529 iqu^ 
Eo 912 (LXX); of nations, Jo S^a, Ac 7Ui^^^); Sew, t. Kvptw, Mt 62^ 
Lk 1613, Ac 20ie, Eo 12ii (R, mg., Katp^) 16i< Eph 6^, Col 32*, 
I Th 19; T. Xpi(TT,S, Ro W^, Col 32*; vo>a, $eoi, Eo V^; r. ^cols, 
Ga 4^; t. Acatpw, Eo 12^^ (E, mg. for Kvptw) ; dAXr^Xots, Ga 5^^ ; o-rv i/xot, 
Phi 222 . ^_ afiapTia, Eo 6" ; vo/xw afjLapTia<;, Eo 72^ ; cVt^r/Atats »c. i78ovats, 
Tit 33 ; T. koiXlo., Eo 16^^ ; fia/xoiva, Mt 62*, Lk 16^^ ; t. o-toix^lois t. 
Koa/iov, Ga 49 (Cremer, 217). t 

SouXt), 17, V.8. 8ouA,os. 

SouXos, -r], -ov, [in LXX, 6. S. nearly always for Tjy ; 17 8. chiefly 

for nipX, nnptt? ;] 1. in bondage to, subject to: Eo 6^^^ 2. As subst., 

o, rj 8., a slave; (a) fern., rj 8., a female slave, bondmaid (Cremer, 702; 
DB, iii, 215): Lk ps-^s, Ac 2^»i^^^); (6) masc, 6 8., a sZaw, 6ond- 
man : Mt S^ 1823, ^1. ; opp. to iXevdepos, i Co 722 12^3^ q^ 328^ gph 6^, 
Col S^S Ee 6^5 131« 19^8; opp. to Kvptos, Sea-n-orrjs, oiKohiaTTOTri'i, Mt 102* 
1327. 28^ Lk 12**5, Jo 15", Eph 65, Col 322 41, al. ; metaph., 8. Xpiaroi, 
Tov Xp., IrjcToi Xp., Eo 1\ I Co 722, Ga l^o, Eph 6«, Phi 1^, Col 4^2, 
Ja 1\ II Pe 1\ Ju 1 ; 8. t. ^€oS, t. Kuptov, Ac 16^7, n Ti 22*, Tit 1^, 
I Pe 216, Ee 73 153; §_ ^ovr,p6^, Axpelo^, »caKos, Mt 1832 24*8 2526.30^ 
Lk 1710 1922 ; 8. (iyaa/jTi'as, Jo 83*, Eo 617. 20 ; t. <^^op5s, 11 Pe 2i9. 

SYN. : 8taK-ovos (q.V.), OepairoiV, vTrqptTrp (v. 1)5, iii, 377; iv, 461, 
469; DCG, i, 221 ; ii, 613; Cremer, 215, 702). 

SouXow, -co (•<; SovXos), [in LXX for TUT ;] to enslave, bring into 
bondage : Ac 7" (^xx)^ jj pg <^\<i j metaph., i Co 9i9 ; pass., seq. h', ib. 
715 ; T. ^€({5, Eo 622 . ^_ StKaioori'Kr;, Eo 618 ; oim. Tit 23 ; vn-o to. aroixela 
T. *co'cr;u.ou, Ga 43 (Cremer, 217).t 

Soxn, -^?, ^ « Se'xo^tat), [in LXX : Ge 21^, Es 1», al. (nj?5ro), Da 
LXX 51 (DO^);] a feast, banquet: Lk 52^ 14i3.t 

%p&Kiav, -(WTos, o, [in LXX chiefly for ]^3C1 ;] a dragon, a mythical 

monster : fig., of Satan, Ee 123-17 132. *. n i6i3 202.+ 

8p(£|xu, obsol., to run, v.s. Tpex<o. 

8pdaoro|xai, [in LXX for pizr3 pi., Ps 2i2 ; elsewhere ]^0p , as Le 22 ;] 
to grasp with the hand, to lay hold of: metaph., c. ace. (M, Pr., 65), 
iCo3i9(i'X^).+ 

8paxf''n) "'J?) V ("^C 8pda-(rofxai), [in LXX : in Hex. for yj^Sl > ^i?Jp » 
in II Es for fiSllX , ]iQ511 ;] o, drachma, nearly equal to the Roman 

denarius (v.s. ^vdpiov) : Lk 158. 9 {pCG, ii, 200).t 

Zpittavov, -ov, TO (later form of Attic Bpeirdvrj, <!^ SpcTrw, to pluck), 
[in LXX for ni079 > 87010 > etc. ;] a sickle, pruning-hooh : Mk 42*, 
Re 14i*-i9.t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 123 

8p<$fios, -ov, 6 (<^ Spa/xdv, V.8. Tpe)(u}), [in LXX chiefly for nymp j] 

a course : fig., of life or ministry, Ac 13^^ 20^*, ii Ti 4''.t 

ApouaiXXa (Rec. ApovcrikXa), rjt, rj, Drusilla, wife of Felix : Ao 

242*.t 

Sui'a/Aai, depon., ^in LXX chiefly for bij ;] to be able, have power, 

whether by personal ability, permission, or opportunity : c. inf. (M, 
Pr., 205; WM, § 44, 3) pres., Mt 62*, Mk 2\ Jo 32, i Co 102\ al.; c. 
inf. aor., Mt 3^, Mk 1**, Jo 3=5. *, Eo 8^^, al. ; c. ace, to be able to do 
something: Mk 92", Lk 122<', n Co 13^; absol., to be able, capable, 
powerful : i Co 32 lO^s. 

SuVafxis, -cws, 17 « Swa/Atti), [in LXX for b^n (b^U) , NS^ , nnn3 , 

7Jr , etc.; 35 words in all;] power, might, strength; relatively, ability, 
power to perform: Mt 25^5, Ac 3^2, He ll^i; Kara 8., 11 Co S^; TrapV 
8., ib. ; vTrlp 8., 11 Co 1^ ; of pecuniary ability, 11 Co 8^, Ee 18^ ; absol., 
power, might : Lk 24*^, Ac 1* ; opp. to do-^eVcta, i Co 15*^ ; r) 8. t. 
afiaprla's, I Co 15^6 ; of power in action, Ro 1^^' 20, i Co l^^, Phi 3^0, al. ; 
ri 8. T. Oeov, Mt 2229, Mk 122*, Rq 120^ ^i . opp ^ fi6p4>o,(Tt^, 11 Ti 3^; 
in doxologies, Re 4^1 7^2, al. ; €v 8., Mk 9\ Lk 43«, Ro 1*, al. ; of the 
power of performing miracles, Ac 6^ 11 Th 2^ ; pi., Mt 13^*, Mk 6^*, 
Ga 3^, al. ; of the force or meaning of a word (Plat., al.), i Co 14^^ By 
meton., of persons or things; (a) of God, Mt 26^*, Mi 14''2 (Dalman, 
Words, 200 ff.) ; (b) of angels, Ro 838, Eph I21, i Pe 322 ; (c) of armies, 
pi. [LXX for niN^y], metaph., of the stars, Mt 2429, Mk 1325, Lk 212« ; 

(d) of that wh. manifests God's power : Christ, i Co I2* ; t. eiayyikLov, 
Eo 1^*; rj 8. T. Kvpiov, I Co 5*; (e) of mighty works (Tr., Syn., § xci), 
8. TToicrv, Mk 65 939; pi., Mt 722, Mk 62, Lk lO^^, al.; o-T^/xcra k. 8... 

Ac 8^^ ; 8. K. repara k. (rr]p.€La, Ac 222, n Co 12^2 

Syn.: ^la, cvcpyeia, i^ovcria, l<T)(vs, /cpa'ros (v. Tr., I.e.; Cremer, 
218, 236; DB, i, 616; iv, 29; DCG, i, 607; ii, 188). 

t8ump6a,, -w «8wa/xts), [in LXX for 77^, Ps 51 (52)^ 67 (68)28; 
"laapi., hi., Ec 10^^ Da th 92"*;] to make strong, strengthen: Eph 6^'' 
(WH, mg. ; €v8w-, WH, txt., RV), Col V\ He ll^^.t 

Sut'doTtis, -ov, 6 (•< 8vvaii.aL), [in LXX for liaa , piy , n^a , etc. ;] 

a pritice, ruler, potentate : Lk 1^2 ; of God (Si 465' ^^, 11 Mac 15^), 
I Ti 6^5; of a high ofiicial (cf. Su^^ao-rai <l>apaw, Ge 50*), Ac 82'' (Cremer, 
221).t 

*t SumWw, -a> (<[ 8waTos), to be able, be powerful, mighty : c. inf., 
Eo 14*, II Co 98 ; absol., opp. to a(Td€v<ii, 11 Co 133.t 

Suvaros, -77, -ov (<^ SuVa/xat), [in LXX for 1123, TO) etc.;] 1. 

strong, mighty, powerful: absol., Lk 1*9, i Co I2*; 01 8., the chief 
men, Ac 255; of spiritual strength, Ro 15\ u Co 12^*' 139; seq. ev, 
Lk 2419, Ac 722 182* . ^p^5^ II Co 10*. 2. C. inf., able to do ; Lk 143^, 
Ac 111^ Ro 421 1123, II Ti 112, Tit 19, He 11^9, Ja 32. 3. Neut., 8waTdv, 
possible : Mt 192«, Mk 923 1027 143(5^ jj^ iqii^ Ac 22* 20i« ; d 8. {icrrC), 



124 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Mt 242* 2639, Mk 1322 1435, Eo 1218, Ga 4^5; t6 S. {= -fj SoVaut?) airov, 
Eo 922.t 

Soco), Ion. and trag. form of 8uw, [in LXX chiefly for Nia ;] to 
enter, sink into ; of the sun (sc. ttovtov), set : Mk 1^2^ j^ 440 ^gf^ i^.^ 
air-€K-, €v-, eTT-cv-, irap-eLcr-, e7ri-Sw(o).t 

8uo, numeral, indecl. exc. in dat., Sucri, Suo-iV (Attic Suoiv), two : 
Mt 19«, Mk 108, Jo 2«, al. ; with pi. noun, Mt 92^ 10", al. ; ol, twv, 
To{;s 8., Mt 195 202*, Mk 108, Eph 2^5, al.; 8. i$, Lk 24^3; distrib., 
dm, Kara 8., two and two, two apiece : Lk 10^ (WH, dva 8. [8i;o]), Jo 
2«, I Co 1427; s^'o g„'o (,= ^y^ 8,^ as LXX, Ge 6^9 for ^'2^' D^:?r, but 

not merely "Hebraism," cf. fivpia fxvpia, j^Esch., Pers., 981, and for 
usage in tt. and MGr., v. M, Pr., 21, 97), Mk 6^ ; cis 8. {two and two, 
Xen., Cyr., 7, 5, 17), into two parts, Mt 27", Mk 1538. 

8o(T-, inseparable prefix, opp. to €v, like un-, mis- (in unrest, 

mischance), giving the idea of difficulty, opposition, injuriousness, etc. 

t Sua-pdcrraKTOs, -ov «/8ao-TdCw), [in LXX for b^., Pr 27^*;] 

hard to be borne : Mt 23* (om. WH, txt., E, mg.), Lk ll*«.t 

* Suo-errepia, -a9, rj, Eec. for Svo-evTcpiof (q.V.), Ac 28^.f 

*t Soo-ccWptoc, -ov, TO (evTepov, intestine), late form of 8i>o-evTcpta 
(Eec, I.e.), dysentery : Ac 288.t 

*t8uacpfiiiv€UTos, -ov (<^ ep/xT/vcvw), hard of interpretation : He 5ii.t 
Su'ais, -cw?, 17 «8vVa>), [in LXX : Ps 103 (104)^9 (xnp) *;] 1. a 

sinking, setting, as of the sun (.^sch.) : Mk 16 ^*"- ending). 2. the sun- 
setting, the west (Thuc.).t 

SJaKoXos, -ov « Kokov, food), [in LXX for Tl!< , Je 29^ (498) (cf. 

Sva-KoXia, Jb 343'' ; €VKoXos, II Ki 153) * ;] 1. properly, of persons, hard 
to satisfy with food, hence, generally, hard to please (Eur., Plat.). 
2. Of things, difficult, hard (Arist.) : Mk 102*.t 

*8o(tk6X«s, adv., with difficulty: Mt 19^3, Mk 1023, Lk 182*.t 
8uajArj, -^s, 17 ( = 8t;o-i5, <; 8wo)), [in LXX for Ni2 , nn^y , etc. ;] 

mostly in pi., opp. to dvaroXat'; 1. a setting, as of the sun (ace. to 
Thayer, s.v., so perhaps in Lk 12^*). 2. the quarter of sunset, the 
west : anarth., Mt S^i 2427, Lk 125* 1329^ ^ 21^3.+ 

* Soaj'OTiTos, -ov (<^vo£w), hard to understand : 11 Pe Z^^.\ 

** 8ua(|)Tj/i€(i), -w (<; 8vcr(f>r]fj.o<;, slanderous), [in LXX : i Mac 7*^ * ;] 
1. intrans., to use evil words (^sch.). 2. Trans., to speak ill of, 
defame (Soph.) : pass., i Co 4^3^ 

** 8uo-4>T)(iia, -as, 17 « 8v(r<f>rjfji.os, slanderous), [in LXX : i Mac 738, 
III Mac 22^ * ;] evil-speaking, defamation : opp. to ev(f>r]/jiLa, 11 Co 68, t 

8oO>, V.S. 8tV(ri. 

SciSeKa, ol, at, rd, indecl. numeral, twelve : Mt 92*' 10\ al. ; 01 
8., the apostles, Mt 10*, Mk 410, al. ; in Ac 19^ 24i\ for Eec. 8£Ka8wo. 

8w8e'KaTos, -r;, -ov, twelfth : Ee 2120,t 
*t 8(»8EKd-<t>uXos, -ov (<; SwBeKa, 0uX^), of twelve tribes : as subst. 
neut., TO 8. (cf. Xaos 6 8., Sibyll. Orac), the twelve tribes, Ac 267.t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 125 

8u)i,a, -Tos, TO (<C^ Sefjiw, to build), [in LXX for 3^ ;] chiefly in 

poets and late (not Attic) prose; 1. a house, hall. 2. In LXX (and 
Horn., Od., X, 554 ; cf . MGr., terrace), house-top : eVl t. Sw^a, Lk 5^^, 
Ac 109; ItvI t. 8(;iyMaT05, -aroiv, Mt 10^7 241^, Mk 13^5^ Lk 12^ IT^i.t 

Swped, -as, r] (<^ SiScoynt), [in LXX chiefly (-av) for D^n, as Ge 

2916;] a gift: Ac ll^^, Eo 5", He 6*; 8. t. O^ov, Jo ^^\ Ac 820; 
T. X/310-T0V, Eph 4^ ; T. 7rv€v/AaT09, Ac 2^^ 10*^ ; T. StKttiocrvvT;?, Eo 517 ; 
T. ^aptTos, Eph 37 ; dv€/c8iT;y?^Tw 8., II Co Q^'. Acc, Swpedv, adverbially 
(as freq. in LXX), (a) freely, as a gift : Mt lO^, Eo 32*, ii Co 11^ ii Th 
38, Be 21« 2217; (6) in vain, uselessly: Jo 1525(lxx)^ Qa 22i.t 
iSriv. : V.8. SofjLa. 

Supcdi', V.S. Swpcd. 

8a>p^«, -<^, [in LXX: Ge 302o (-qt), Es S^, Pr 42 (|n:), 
Le 7^* <!*' (]n-)(5) , I Es 17 81*' ", Si 72^ * ;] to p-esent, bestow. As 

depon. (with same sense), -iofxai, -ov/xai : Mk 15**, 11 Pe l^* *.t 

SvN. : BiSwfii, q.v. 
**8cSpTi/xa, -TOS, TO «8a>p€a)), [in LXX: Si 31 (34)i8*;] a gift, 
boon : Eo 5ie, Ja li^.t 

Syn. : V.S. 80/Aa. 

Swpoi', -ov, TO (<^ 8t8<D/Ai), [in LXX chiefly for J^lf?, also for 

nnja, etc.;] a gift, present : Mt 2ii, Ee lli*^; of gifts and sacrifices to 

God, Mt 523.2* 8* 155 2318.19, Mk 711, Lk 21i.*, He 5^ 83.* 9^ 11*; 
8. eeoi, Eph 28.+ 

Svjv. : s.v. 80/ta. 
* 8wpo(t>opio, -as, 17, a bringing of presents : LTr., mg., for Siaxovia, 
Eo I531.+ 



E 

E, e, t i^ik6v {ii(/lXov), to, indecl., epsilon, 6, the fifth letter. As a 
numeral, c' = 5, c^ = 5000. 

ca, interj., expressing surprise, indignation, fear (in cl. chiefly in 
poet.), ah! ha ! : Lk 43*.+ 

i&v, contr. fr. €i av, conditional particle, representing something 
as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not 
so definitely expected as in the case of ci c. ind. (Bl., § 65, 4 ; cf. Jo 
1317, 1 Co 73"), if haply, if; 1. c. subjc. (cl.) ; (a) pres. : Mt 622, Lk 10«, 
Jo 717, Eo 225.26, al.; {b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.) : Mt 4^ 1626 (cf. ptcp. 
in Lk 925 ; M, Pr., 230), Mk 32*, Lk 143*, Jo 5*3, Eo 72, al. ; = cl. 
Cl, c. opt., Jo 922 1157^ Ac 92 ; as Heb. DN = ^Tav, Jo 1232 143^ j Jq 228 

32, He 37 (^xx)^ 2. C. indie, (as in late vnriters, fr. Arist. on; v. WH, 
App., 171; VD, MGr.'^, App., § 77; Deiss., BS, 201 f., LAE, 155, 
254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., § 65, 4); (a) fut.: Mt 18i9 T, Lk 19*^ 



126 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Ac 7" ; (b) pres. : i Th S^ (v. Milligan, in 1.). 3. With other particles : 
i. Kai (Bl., § 65, 6), Ga 6' ; i. ftrj (M, Pr., 185, 187 ; Bl., I.e.), c subjc. 
pres., Mt 1013, i Co 8^ Ja 2^\ i Jo S'^i; aor., Mt 6^^, Mk 3^7, Jo 3^, 
Eo 10", Ga 18 216 (v. Lft., Ellic., in 11.) ; e. re . . . i. «, [in LXX for 
DX . . . DX, Es 19^3, al.,] Eo 148. 4 _ ^ ^^ (^ ^j^ after relat. 

pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96 ; WH, App., 173 ; M, Pr., 42 f. ; 
Bl., § 26, 4; Mayser, 152 f . ; Deiss., BS, 202 ff.) : Ss i., Mt 51^, Mk 
622,23^ Lk 173», I Co 618, al.; ^ttov i., Mt S^^; 6o-cik/s e., Ee 11«; oC c., 
I Co 16« ; Ka66 £., II Co 812 ; ^o-ns €., Ga 51". 

lauTou, -^?, -ov, dat. -<p, etc., ace. -6v, etc., pi. -oiv, etc. (Att. contr. 
avTov, etc); reflex pron.; 1. prop, of 3rd person (Lat. sui, sibi, se), of 
himself, herself, itself, etc. : Mt 27-^^ Mk 15^\ Lk 23^5, al. ; added to a 
middle verb, Sie/^epto-ai/To eavrols, Jo 19-'* ; to an active verb, Ac 14i* 
(M, Pr., 157); d./.' lavroi, Lk 12^" 21^0, Jo 5^^, al. (v.s. a-n-6); 81' 
iavTod, Eo 141*; iv £., Mt 39, Mk 5»0, al.; ct? c., Lk 15"; ^aO' kavTOV, 
Ac 281^, Ja 21'^ ; irap kavrQ, at his onm liouse, i Co 16^ ; xpos c., with, to 
himself, Lk 18^ ; as poss. pron. (with emphasis weakened ; v. M, Pr., 
87 f.), T. kavTOiv v€Kpoos, Lk 9^*^. 2. As reflexive 1st and 2nd pers. (so 
also freq. in cl., chiefly poetry), Mt 23^1, Mk 9^o, Eo 823, ^ tj^ qs, al. 
3. In pi., for reciprocal pron., dAXv/Awv, -ois, -ors, of one another, etc. : 
Mt 2138, Mk 163, Eph 519, al. 

edo), -w, [in LXX for HD"! hi., etc. ;] 1. to let, permit : c. ace, c. 
inf., c. ace. et inf. (M, Pr., 205) : Mt 24*3, l^ 4*i 22^1, Ac U^<^ 16^ 193o 
2332 2732 28*, I Co 1013. 2. to let alone, leave : ijKvpas, Ac 27*^ (cf . 
7rpocr-eaw).t 

i^hofx-qKOvTa, ol, al, to., indecl. (<^ eTrrd), seventy: Lk 101' I'', 
Ac 71* 2323 2737.t 

tlpSofiTjKocTciKis, adv., [in LXX for Wif^tV , Ge 4^**;] seventy 

times: i. k-ma., seventy times seven, Mt 18^^ (E, txt., ICG, in 1.), or 
seventy-seven times (E, mg. ; cf. M, Pr., 98; WM, 314; Meyer, in l.).t 

ipSojjios, -rj, -ov {<C tTTTtt), [in LXX chiefly for ^jr^Hjr ;] seventh : 

Jo 452, He 4MLXX)^ ju 14^ Re 81 10^ lli^ 161^ 212o.t 

"Epep (Eec. 'EySep), o, indecl. (Heb. -l^JT, Ge IO2*), Eber (OT, 

Heher) : Lk 335.t 

*t 'EppaiKcJs, -V, -6v, Hebrew : Lk 2338, Eec.t 
t 'EPpalos (WH, 'E/?-), -a, -ov (Aram, n^^), as subst., o 'E., [in LXX 
for 133;, ^l^JT;] a Hebrew. 1. In OT, of Israelites in contrast with 

those of another race (Ge 14", Ex V\ De I512, al.). 2. In NT as the 
correlative of 'EWt^vio-t^s, a Jew who had adopted, in greater or less 
degree, Greek culture and Greek language. The distinction was not 
merely linguistic (DB, ii, 325) ; as far as it was so, Suptori/s would be 
a more correct Greek term for the Jew of Semitic speech (v.s. 'Ey3pais, 
and cf. Dalman, Words, 7) : Ac 61, 11 Co II22, Phi 3^.f 

**t'EPpats (WH, 'E^-), -tSos (Aram. ^HpJ), peculiar form of *E)8pai/cos, 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 127 

[in LXX, ^ *E. <i>oiv^, IV Mac 12^ IG^^*;] in NT, ^ "E. SL,iXeKTo<:, 
Hebrew, i.e. the Aramaic vernacular of Palestine : Ac 21*° 22^ 26^*.t 

♦*fEPpoi<n-i (WH, *Ey3-), adv., [in LXX: Si jaroZ. i3 * ;] in Hebrew: 
Be 9^ ; elsewhere, in Aramaic (v. supr.) : Jo 5^ 19". i^, 20 20i«, Ee 16i«.+ 

iyyilu (<C«77i^s). [ii^ LXX for W23 , ^ip , etc. ;] 1. trans., to bring 
near : Ge 48^°, Is 5^. 2. Intrans., to come near : absol., Mt 26*^, 
Mk 14*2, Lk 18*0 1941 2120, 28 2415, Ac 2133 2315 ; c. adv., Sttov, Lk 1233 ; 
c. dat., Lk 712 151. 25 22*7, Ac 93 10^ 22« ; t. Otw, He 7^9, Ja 48 ; seq. 
cJs, Mt 21\ Mk 111, Lk 1835 1929 2428 ; Trpo's, c' dat., Lk 193^ ; ^e'^pi 
OavoiTov, Phi 230; ^f time, wpa, Mt 26*5; ^^^pa^ Ro 1312^ He 10^^; 
jcatpo's, Mt 213*, Llj 218 . ^po'vo?, Ac 717 ; ioprrj, Lk 22^ ; irapova-ia, Ja 5^ ; 
TeA.09, I Pe 47 ; iprj/xw(n<i, Lk 2120 . airoXvTpwcns, Lk 2128 • ^yyi,(£y -fj 
^aa-ikua (for similar expressions in Targ., v. Dalman, 106), Mt 32 4^^ 
10^ Mk 115, Lk 109 (^^' ^^S5) iQii (cf.Trpoo-cyyiCo), and v. Cremer, 224). t 

cYyioTos, V.S. iyyv<s. 

iy-ypd^Q), V.S. ivypdcfid}. 

**eYYuos, -ov, 6, rj, [in LXX: Si 29^^' ^\ 11 Mac IO28*;] a surety: 
He 722 (exx. from tt., v. MM, Exp., xi; cf. Cremer, 222).t 

^yyus, adv., [in LXX chiefly for Si*1j^;] near; 1. of place : Jo 
1920. *2; as prep. c. gen. (M, Pr., 99), Lk I911, Jo 323 619,23 nis, 54^ 
Ac 1^2; c. dat., Ac 938 278; superl., lyyto-ra, Mk 63e, WH, mg.; 
metaph., ol «., opp. to ol p.aKpdv, Eph 2^'' \ i. yUea-Oai, Bph 2^3; t, crov 
TO pTitxa, Eo 108 (LXX). 2. Of time : Mt 2432 26I8, Mk 1328. 29^ Lk 2130. ^\ 
Jo 213 6* 72 1155, Re 13 2210 ; J Kvpio^ i., Phi 4* ; seq. tVi Ovpais, Mt 
2433 ; compar., iyyvrepov (neut. of adj. -09, used adverbially), Eo IS" 
(cf. E, txt.); as prep. c. gen., i. Karapa?, He 68; a<f>avL(r/jLov, He 8i3 (cf. 
Cremer, 223). t 

iyyoTcpos, V.S. eyyvs. 

eyeipu, [in LXX for Dip , etc. ;] trans, (imperat. lyeipc used in- 
transitively, Mt 95, Mk 211, al.) ; 1. to awaken, arouse from sleep : Mk 
438, Ac 12'^ ; metaph., of spiritual awakening, Eo I311 (pass.), Eph 51* ; 
pass., to be aroused, wake up : Mt 25'', Mk 42^ ; otto t. vttvov, Mt I2*. 
2. Freq. in NT, to raise from the dead : vcKpov^, Jo 521, Ac 268, u Qq 
l^ ; €K v€Kpu)v, Jo 121, Ac 315, Eo Sn, al. ; pass., rise from death : Mt 
115, Lk 722, Jo 222, Eo 69, al. ; dTro t. v€KpS>v, Mt I42, al. 3. In late 
Gk., (a) to raise, from sitting, lying, sickness ; mid. and pass., to rise : 
Mt 95.7, Mk 131 927 1049^ al.; redundant, like Heb. Dip, Mt 2i5 9i9, 
Ee 111 ^y. Dalman, 23 f.) ; (6) to raise up, cause to appear : Ac I322 
(cf. Jg 218); TiKva, Mt 39; pass., to appear: Mt 11", Mk I322, al. 
4. to rouse, stir up; pass., to rise against: Mt 24^, Mk 138. 5. Of 
buildings, to raise : t. va6v, Jo 2i9. 20 (cf . De I622, Si 49i3) ; (cf . 81-, 
e^-, eV-, (rw-eyeipo), and V. Cremer, 224). 

lycpffiS, -«a)?, V «ey€t'pa), -OfJ^ai), [in LXX: Jg 719, Ps 138 (139)8 
(Dip), I Es 5^2 *-j I d rousing (Plat.). 2. a rising (Ps, I.e.): from 
death, Mt 2753.+ 

iyKdQsro^, V.S. ivK-. 
^yKaicia, V.S. ivK-. 



128 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

iyKaivil^fa, V.8. ivK-. 
^yKaK^w, V.8. ivK-. 

iyKa\4<a, -w, [in LXX for TOX , etc.; o. dat., Za 1* {bi^ N^f?), Wi 

12^2, Si 46^^;] 1. to call in, demand. 2. to bring a charge against, 
accuse: o. dat. pers. (as in cl.), Ac 19^^ 23^^^; seq. Kara, c. gen. pers., 
Eo 8^^. Pass., to be accused: c. gen. rei; a-Tda-ews, Ac IQ*''; wv (perh. 
by attraction = a), Ac 26^ ; seq. -n-epi, c. gen. rei, Ac 23^^ 26^ (Cremer, 
743).t 

SYN. '. alridofiaL (q.V.), 8ia;8aXAa>, ciriKaXco), Kai-qyopita. 

^y-KaTa-XciTTO), [in LXX chiefly for 173?;] 1. to leave behind: 
■^filv aTrepfia, Eo 9^^ (LXX)^ 2. to abandon, desert, forsake : c. ace. 
pers., Mt 27*MLXX)^ Mk 153* (ib.), Ac 227 (lxx) (wH, ivK-), ii Ti 410. le, 
He 135 (LXX); T. i7n<Tvvaywyrjv (cf. MM, Exp., xl), He lO^^. Pass., Ac 
231 (^H, cV/c-), II Co 49.t 

ly-KaT-oiKeu, V.S. evK-. 

^Y'Kaux(io)xai, V.S. cvk-. 

^y-Kcrrpt^w, V.S. cvk-. 
*cyKXTj(ia, -Tos, TO (-< eyKaXeo)), an accusation, charge: Ac 23^^ 
25i» (Cremer, 743).t 

*t ^y-KO|xP6o|j,ai, -ovfiai (<^ KOfxfto^, a knot, whence eyKO/xfSoifia, a 
garment tied on over others, used especially of a frock or apron worn 
by slaves), to put on oneself, as a garment, gird on: dXXr;Xois t. 
TaTr€Lvo<f>po(rvvrjv (as for service, KV, cf. Thayer, s.v., but cf . also JCC, 
in 1.), I Pe 5*.t 

^y-Koin^, V.S. evK-. 

^y-K(5irrw, V.S. ivK-, 
**^yKpdTcm, -as, ^ (-< cy/cpaTiys), [in LXX: Si IS^"^''", IV Mac 
52* * ;] 1. prop., mastery, control. 2. (sc. iavrov) self-control : Ac 24^^, 
Ga 52», n Pe 1« (v. DB, iv, 558b 695^; Page on Ac, l.c.).t 

^yKpareu'ofiai, depon., [in LXX for pBN , Ge 4331, j Ki I312, Es 
51° N^*;] ^0 exercise self-control: i Co 7^; c. ace, Travra (v. Bl., 91), 
I Co 925.t 

**4yKpaTVjs, -c's «/cpdTos), [in LXX: Wi 820, Si 627 IS^ 26i5 273o, 
al. ;] 1. strong, powerful. 2. C. gen. rei, master of, hence, 3. (sc. 
cauTov), self -controlled, exercising self-control : Tit l^.t 

SYN. : (Tuxfipwv (v. raff. S. iyKpaxfia). 

iy-Kpivu, V.S. CVK-. 

cy-KpoTTTw, [in LXX for TDM , etc. ;] to conceal in : o. ace, seq. 
€h, Mt I333.+ 

cyKuos, V.S. CVK-. 

^y-xpi«, [in LXX: Je 43o (np). To 2io 6' 11^*;] to rub in, 
anoint : mid., c. dupl. ace, Ee S^^.t 

iyd, gen., etc., i/iov, ifxoi, ifi€ (enclitic fiov, fiot, /ne), pi., ^/xeis, -wi/, 
-iv, -as, pers. pron. J. (a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when ex- 
pressed as subjc, as in Mt 3^, Mk 1^, Lk 31', al. But often there is 
no apparent emphasis, as Mt IQi^, Jo IQi^; iSov i. (= Heb. '>2Sr], cf. 
I Ki 3«), Ac 910 ; L (like Heb. ^2^$), I am, Jo 123(lxx)^ Ac 732 (lxx). 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 129 

(b) The enclitic forms (v. supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, 
adverbs, where there is no emphasis : iv t. TrarpC /xov, Jo lA^^ ; fiov t. 
Ao'you9, Mt 7^* ; OTTia-w fiov, Mt 3^^ ; l<T)(yp6T€p6<i /xov, ib. ; Xe'yti fxoL, Re 
5^; also with the prep. Trpo's, as Mk 9^^, al. The full forms {ifiov, etc.) 
are used with the other prepositions, as 8t ifjbov, ev t/ioi', ei's e'/xe, etc., 
also for emphasis, as Lk 10^^, Jo 7^^, Mk 14'', al. (c) The gen. fiov 
and rjfjiwv are often used for the poss. pronouns c/aos, i7U€Tepos : t. XaoV 
fjiov, Mt 2" ; fiov TTj aTTLo-TLa, Mk 9^*. (d) Tt' ifiol Kol (Toi ( = Heb. 

"Sjbl "h'TV^ , Jg 11^2, al.), i.e. what have we in common : Mt 8"^, Mk 

124 57, Lk 828, Jo 2*; ti ydp fioi, i Co 52. (e) The interchange of eyai 
and 17/xets, common in tt., appears in Pauline Epp. (v. M, Pr., 86 f., 
M, Th., 131 f.). (/) Kdyoi (= Kol iyw), and I, even I, I also : Mt 2% 
Lk 2^8, Jo 6^^, Eo 3^ i Co 7*^ al. ; Kdyw . . . Kai, both . . . and, 
Jo 728. 

e8a<|>i|;u «€8a(^o5) [in LXX chiefly for OTMI pu. ;] 1. to beat 
level like a threshing floor (Theophr.). 2. to dash to the ground 
(Field, Notes, 74) : Lk 19** (cf. Ps 136 (137)», Ho 14i).t 

cSacJios, -cos (-ovs), TO, [in LXX for nsjr , yplp , etc. ;] bottom, 

pavement, ground : Ac 22". t 

**^8palos, -ov {<l8pa, a seat), [in Sm. : Ps 32 (33)i*, al.;] 1. 
sitting, seated. 2. steadfast, firm; metaph., of moral fixity: i Co 7^^ 
15*8^ Col 123.+ 

*t|8paiwfia, -Tos, TO {<::^k8palo<i), a support, bulwark, stay (Vg. 
fermamentum) : i Ti 3^* (eccl.).t 

'E^cKi'as (Rec. *£{-), -ov, 6 (Heb. iTpTn, strength of Jehovah), 

Hezekiah, King of Judah : Mt l^- ^^.t 

*t eOcXo-OpTjCTKia (Rec. -€ia), -as, 17, self-iiiiposed worship: Col 223 
(eccl.; cf. DB, iv, 923=»; Cremer, 733).t 

cOeXw, V.S. ^cXw. 

** ^e^^w « l^os), [in LXX : Si 23^' ^^, 11 Mac 143o ;] to accustom : 
pass. pf. ptcp., TO (WuTfievov, the established custom, Lk 22'^. t 

**f ievdpxt]^, -ov, 6 (<£^vos, apxw), [in LXX: i Mac 14*^ 151.2*;] 
an ethnarch, a provincial governor (cf. i Mac, 11. c. ; FIJ, Ant., xiii, 
6, 6 ; Dalman,. 332) : 11 Co 1132.t 

**te'0^iK6s, -i -ov «l^»'os), [in Al. : Le 21^*;] 1. national (Polyb.). 
2. foreign (gramm.); in NT, as subst., 6 e., the Gentile (the adj. 
"describes character rather than mere position"; cf. I^vos, and v. 
Cremer, 228) : Mt 5*^ 6^ 1Q^\ in Jo^.t 

*\iQviKm, 9udiv., in Geyitile fashion: Ga 2^*.t 

c0>'os, -ous, TO, [in LXX chiefly for ^ia, Djr;] 1. a multitude, a 

company, whether of beasts or men (Hom.). 2. a nation, people : 
Mt 21*3 247, Mk 138, Lk 2225, Ac lO^^, al. ; in sing., of the Jewish 
people, Lk 7* 282, Jq ii48, 50-53 jgas^ Ac IO22 243. 10 26* 28i9. 3. In pi., 

as in OT, to I. (like Heb. Q";!!!!!!), the nations, as distinct from Israel, 

9 



130 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Geyitiles : Mt 4^5 632, Ac 261^, Eo S^^ ll^i 15io, Ga 28, al. ; of Gentile 
Christians, Eo ll^^ 1527 154^ Qa 2i2. i*, Eph S\ 

SVN. : Aads (v. DCG, ii, 229; Cremer, 226). 
**e9os, -«os i-ovs), t6 «€H. [ill LXX: Wi 14i«, Da th BeU^, 

I Mac 10«^ II Mac 11'" 13^ iv Mac 18^ xE* ;] /laftii, cws^om ; Lk 2239, 
Jo 19^», Ac 1621 2516, He 10^5 ; in Lk P 2*^ Ac 6^^ 15^ 21^1 26^ 281^, 
almost in the narrower sense of law (Deiss., BS, 251 f.).t 

leu, pf. with pres. sense eiw^a, [in LXX : Nu 24^ (Dy53"D:?53), 

Da LXX Su 13, Si 37i*, iv Mac I12 * ;] to be accustomed, wont : Mt 27i5, 
Mk IQi ; ptcp., TO €1(0009, custom : Kara to ct. (Nu, I.e.), Lk 4l^ Ac IV.f 
61, conjunctive particle, used in conditions and in indirect 
questions. I. Conditional, if ; 1. c. indie, expressing a general assump- 
tion ; (a) pres. : seq. indie, pres., Mt lli*, Eo 8^^, al. ; seq. imperat., Mk 
423 922, Jo I518, I Co 79, al.; seq. fut. indie, Lk 163i, Eo S", al.; seq. 
pf. or aor., with negation in apodosis, Mt 122", j^q 414^ ^j^ • similarly, seq. 
impf., Lk 17«, Jo 839; geq. quaest., Mt 623, Jq 547 723 g^^ i Pe 220 ; (b) 
fut. : Mt 2633, I Pe 220 ; (c) pf . : Jo II12, Eo 6^, al. ; {d) aor. : Lk I611 
198, Jo 1332, 1823, Ee 20l^ al. 2. Where the assumption is certain 
= iirec: Mt 1228, Jo 7* , Eo 517, al. 3. Of an unfulfilled condition, c. 
indie, impf., aor. or plpf., seq. av, c. imp. or aor. (v.s. av, I, i). 4. C. 
indie, after verbs denoting wonder, etc., sometimes, but not always, 
coupled with an element of doubt : Mk 15**, i Jo 3i3, al. 5. C. indie, 
as in LXX (Nu 143o, i Ki 14", al. = Heb. QX), in oaths, with the 

formula of imprecation understood in a suppressed apodosis (WM, 
627; Burton, § 272) : Mk 812, He 3ii(i'XX) 43(lxx). 6. Earely (cl.) e 
optat., to express a merely possible condition : Ac 24i® 273^, i Co I41'' 
1537, iPe3i*>i7. 

II. Interrogative, if, whether. 1. As in cl., in indir. questions 
after verbs of seeing, asking, knowing, saying, etc : c. indie pres., 
Mt 26^3^ Mk 1536, Ac I92, 11 Co 13^, al. ; fut., Mk 32, Ac 822, al. ; aor., 
Mk 15**, I Co li«, al. ; c. subje aor. (M, Pr., 194), Phi 312. 2. As in 
LXX (=Heb. DN and interrog. q, Ge 171^, al. ; v. WM, 639 f.; 

Viteau, i, 22), in direct questions : Mk 823 (Tr., WH, txt.), Lk 1323, 
22*9, Ac 192, al. 

III. With other particles. 1. el apa, etyc, d 8e iJ.rjye, v.s. apa, ye. 

2. €1 8e Kac, but if also : Lk III8; but even if, i Co 4^, 11 Co 43 11«. 

3. Cl 8£ /AT?, but if not, but if otherwise: Mk 221.22^ Jo 142, Ee 2^ al. 

4. el Kai', if even, if also, although: Mk 1429, l^ hs^ i Co 721, 

II Co 41", Phi 217, al. 5. KOI el, even if, v.s. KaL 6. el /it;, if not, 
unless, except, but only : Mt 2422, Mk 226 e^, Jo 933, i Co 71^ {only), 
Ga 119 (cf. €av pLTj, 216; v. Hort,, Ja., xvi); cktos el prj, pleonastic 
(Bl., § 65, 6), I Co 145 152, I Ti 519. 7. el ^-qv = cl. ^ p.-qv (M, Pr., 46), 
in oaths, surely (Ez 3327, al.) : He 61*. 8. el tto,?, if haply : Ac 2712, 
Eo 110. 9. elre . . . ehe, whether ... or ; Eo 126-8, i Co 322 138, al. 

€i8^a (Eec. iS-, as in cl. ; v. Tdf ., Pr., 81), -as, ^ « cTSov), [in 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 131 

LXX (v.l. IS-) : Ge 53 {nin% Da th l^^. ^^ (n^t-lO), Ep. Je ^\ ii Mac 

318 * .J jQfni, appearance, look : Mt 283,t 

€i8oi', V.8. opdw. 

C180S, -ous, TO, [in LXX for nSHO , HNH , etc. ;] 1. that ivhich is 

seen, appearance, external form : Lk 3^^ 9^^, Jo 5^'', 11 Co 5'^ {ICG in 1.). 
2. form, sort, kind : i Th 5^'\f 

t elSeiXioi' (Eec. -cro»'), -ov, to « eiSwXov), [in LXX : Da LXX 1^ 

(D''ni'fc^ -lyiN rrt), BeP, i Es 2^", i Mac 1*^ 10^2*;] an idol's temple: 

I Co 810 (cf. 'Ao-TaprcZov, I Ki 3110; v. ICC, in i Co, l.c.).t 

**t€i8a>X60uTos, -ov (<€i8a)Xov, 6vw), [in LXX: iv Mac 52*;] sacri- 
ficed to idols: t6, t^ d., Ac IS^^ 212^, i Co BL^'^.io iqi9^ Rq 2i4,2o.t 

*t eiSuXo-Xarpia (-ei'a, Eec), -as, r] (<C etSwAov, AaTpeta), idolatry : 
I Co IQi*, Ga 5^^ Col 3^ pi. (Bl, § 32, 6), i Pe 4^ (Cremer, 390).t 

*t eiSuXoXdrpTjs, -ov, 6 (<^ eiSjjXov + Aarpis, a hireling), an idolator : 
I Co 5io> 11 69 10^ Eph 5^ Ee 21« 221^ (Cremer, 709).t 

ciSuXoi', -ov, TO «eiSos), [in LXX for nibx, CT^^b^, etc.;] 

1, in cl. (a) a phantom, image, likeness; (b) an image in the mind, 
an idea, fancy. 2. In LXX and NT, (a) an image of a god, an idol 
(cf. Polyb., xxxi, 3, 13) : Ac 7", i Co 12^, Ee 9^0; (h) the false god or 
idol worshipped in an image {ICC, on i Th, I.e.) : Ac IS^o, Eo 2^2, 
I Co 84' 7 IQi^ II Co 618, I Th P, I Jo 52i.t 

eiKTj (-^, Eec, as in cl.), adv., [in LXX : Pr 28^* {tUfj* ;] 1. without 
cause or reason : Mt 5^2 (E, mg.). Col 2^^ {ICC). 2. vainly, fruitlessly, 
to no purjjose : Eo 13*, i Co I52, Ga 3* 411, Col 2i8.t 

ciKoo-i (never -iv in WH, cf. Bl., § 5, 3, and note), indecl., 01, at, 
Ta, twenty : Lk U^\ Jo 6^^ Ac 1^^ 2728, i Co 10^, Ee 4*. 10 5^ lli« 19*.t 

€tKw, [in LXX : 11 Ki 12^ (.13^), Wi 1825, iv Mac l" * ;] to yield : 

Ga 25 (cf. V7r-€LKw).t 

€iKca (obsolete pres.), v.s. loiKa. 

iiKuv, -ovos (cf. eoiKo), [in LXX chiefly for D^S;] an image, 

likeness: Mt 222o, Mk 12i«, Lk 202S Eo 123, i Co 15^^, Ee 13i*'i5 
149, 11 152 162 1920 20* ; opp. to (TKid, He 10^ ; of man, ci. dioi, 1 Co 
IV ; of the regenerate, cl. t. dcov. Col 310 (v. Lft., in 1.) ; d. t. vlov r. 
Btov, Eo 829, n Co 318; of Christ, d. r. Oco'v, 11 Co 4*, Col l^^.t 

Syn. : 6/xoL(D/j.a, denoting resemblance, which may however be 
merely accidental, ci. is a derived likeness and like the head on a coin 
or the parental likeness in a child, implies an archetype. 

Cf . also cTSos, appearance, not necessarily based on reality ; aKid, 
a shadowed resemblance ; x^-paKT-qp, the impress of a stamp ; p.6p<f>T] 
(q.v.), the form as indicative of the inner being. 

** elXiKpn'iis, -es, [in LXX : Wi 72^ kB * ;] unalloyed, pure (Lat. 
sincerus ; v. DCG, ii, 635*) ; {a) of unmixed substances ; {b) of abstract 
ideas; (c) of ethical purity : Phi l^o, 11 Pe 3i.t 

Syn.: dyvos (q.v.), KaOapo^, cf. Tr., Syn., §lxxxv; DB, iv, 176*; 
Cremer, 378 ; Westc. on i Jo 3*. 



132 MANUAL QEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

** eiXiKpiKia (Rec, cl., -Kptveia), -as, 17 (<^ eiAi/cptvjys), [in LXX : Wi 
725 A.*;] sincerity, purity : i Co 5^, 11 Co 1^^ 2^".+ 

elXiacrw, V.8. eAccrcrw. 

ei|jLi, with various uses and significations, like the English verb 
to be. I. As substantive verb. 1. Of persons and things, to be, 
exist : Ac IT^s, Jo 1^ S^^ 175^ ^1; 6 tov /cat o Tjv (for past ptcp.), Ee 1*>8 
48 1117 165 (y s^ete, Ap., 5 ; M, Pr., 228) ; ra (fih) ovra, Eo d^^, i Co 
1^^. 2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place : Mt 24^, Mk 
142 1542^ L]j 2123^ Jo 4^' '^2 5^^, al. 3. to be present, be in a place, have 
come: Mt 2i3,i^ Mk l^^ 521 1540^ l^ iso 529^ Jq 730^ ^1.; seq. ci?, Mk 
21 ; seq. ck (c^), Mt l^o 2125, Mk ll^o, Jo S^\ al. 4. Impers., lo-n, ^v, 
etc. ; (a) i/iere is (Fr. il y a), was, etc. : Mt 1Q"\ Lk IG^^, Jo 3^ 52, Eo 
310, al.; c. dat. (of the possessor; Bl., § 37, 3), Mt I622, Lk 1^, Jo IS^o, 
Eo 92, al.; eVriv 2s, oo-Tts (chiefly in pL), Mt 1628 192^ Mk 91, al.; (6) 
c. inf., = ^$€ariv (q.v.), it is possible : He 9^, i Co II20, EV (but v. 
ICC, in 1.). II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. 1. Ex- 
pressing simply identity or equivalence : Mt 5^^ 14^^, Lk l^*, 19^ Jq 11 
4}^, Ee 3^, al. mult. 2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc. : 
Mt 1319^-, I Co 92 10* 1125, Ga 42*, Ee IT^^, al.; roCr eVnv, Mt 27*«, 
Mk 72, Eo 7^^ al. ; 5 ia-Tcv, Mk 31^, Col 12*. He 72, al. ; akin to this is 
the sacramental usage: Mt 2626-28, Mk I422.24, Lk 22^^, i Co II2* (v. 
ICC on Mk, I Co, 11. c. ; DB, iii, 148 f.). 3. C. gen. : qual., etc., Mk 5«, 
Lk 323, I Co 1433, He 12i\ al. ; part., i Ti I20, n Ti l^^ ; poss., Mt 53. 10, 
Mk 12^ Lk 47 ; of service or partisanship, Eo 8^, i Co 1^2, 11 Co 10^, 
II Ti 219. 4. C. dat. (BL, § 37, 3) : Ac 1^ 9^\ Eo 4^2, i Co l^s 21*, Ee 
21'^, al. 5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., § 62, 
1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.) ; (a) c. ptcp. pf. (cl.) : Mt 103o, Lk 932, Jo 32*, Ac 
2135, I Qq 1519^ al; (b) c. ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and 
Aram. ; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mt 72^, Mk I22, Lk 43i I41, Ac l^o, 
al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180 f., 182 f.), vsdth ellipsis of €t/i,t, Eo 
129. 10^ He 135, al. ; (c) c. ptcp. aor. (cl), Lk 23^. 6. Seq. a's (cf. Heb. 
b ryn), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71) : Mt 195, Mk lO^, He 8^^, al. 

7. C. adv.: Mt I920, Mk 42«, Lk I811, al. 8. Ellipses; (a) of the 
copula (Bl., § 30, 3): Mt 829 2432, Jo 2122,23^ He 6*, al.; (b) of the 
predicate: cyoi el/jn, Mt 142^, Mk 6*0, al.; absol. (cf. De 3239; 
Kin i:X), Mk IB^, Jo 426, al. (cf. an-, Iv, Trap-, (Tu/i-Trap-, <rvV-€t/«). 

ilviKCV, V.S. £V€*ca. 
ci-irep, V.S. £1. 

ciTToi', 2 aor. of obsol. pres. cttw (cf. Veitch), used as aor. of 
Xt'yo), q.v. 

Cl-TTOJS, V.S. Cl. 

cipTjkeoo) (•< eip7?v77), [in LXX chiefly for cblB', lUpW;] 1. to bring 
to peace, reconcile (so i Mac 6""). 2. to keep peace, be at peace : Mk 
950, Eo 1218, II Co 1311, I Th 513 (cf. Si 289; Cremer, 246).t 

eipTjnf], -7JS, 17, [in LXX chiefly for ubp;] peace; 1. of public 
peace, freedom from war : Lk 1432, Ac 122*' 242 ; of the church, Ac 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAAfENT 133 

9^^. 2. Of peace between persons, concord, agreement : Mt 10^*, Lk 
12", Eo W, I Co 715, Ga 5^^ Ja S^S; Cvr^lv d., i Pe 3^^; Sicokciv, ii Ti 
2^2; ib. seq. fiera irdvT<Dv, He 12^*; by meton., of him who brings 
peace, Eph 2^*. 3. As in LXX (= Heb. Dibor , Aram. Dbl|7), of a 

state of security and safety : Jo IG^^, Eo 2^°, i Th 6^ ; whence the 
formulae, wayc (Tropevov) th el, Mk 53*, Lk 750 (cf. I Ki 1", al.; 

nbmb ^d^) ; d. ipiv (osb nibcr), Jo 20i9' 21. 26 ; ^.irokviiv iv d., Lk 229, 

cf. I Co 1611; ^ el ipLwv, Mt 1013 Lk 10"; vi6^ elp^vr]^, ib. 4. Of 
spiritual peace, the peace of Christ's kingdom {DCG, ii, 330 f .) : Lk 
V^ 2l^ Jo 1633, Eo 210 51 8«, al. ; o Kvpio^ t^s eu, 11 Th 3i«; o Oeh^ t^s 
€t., Eo 1533 1620, jj QiQ 1311^ al. ; in epistolary salutations, Eo 1^, i Co 
13, Ga 13, I Th 11, I Pe I2, 11 Jo 3, Ee 1*, al. (v. Cremer, 244). 

ciprji'iicos, -rj, -6v {<Celp-jvrj), [in LXX for uhw and cognates;] 

peaceful : He 12ii, Ja Si^.t 

+ eipT)i'o-iroie'u, -w, [in LXX: Pr 101°*;] to make peace: Col 12°. t 
*cipTji'oiroi6s, -6v, peace-making, a peacemaker : Mt S^.t 
cipu (fut. epw), V.S. Xeyoi, p. 496. 

6is, prep. c. ace, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, 
to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. ace). I. Of place. 1. After 
verbs of motion ; (a) of entrance into : Mt 823 97^ ^k 1*^, Lk 21^ 83i, 
al.; (b) of approach, to or towards: Mk lli, Lk 68 1928, Jo Ipi 21«, 
al. ; (c) before pi. and collective nouns, among : Mk 47 8^^> 20, Lk 11*^, 
Jo 2123, al . ^^^ Qf a limit reached, unto, on, upon : Mt 81^ 21^, 
Mk 111 1316^ Lk 1410, Jo 63 1132, al. ; c. ace. pers. (as in Ep. and Ion.), 
Ac 2315, Eo 512 1619, II Co 101* ; (e) elliptical : cTrto-ToXat cts AafiacrKov, 
Ac 92 ; rj SiaKovia fiov fj eis 'I., Eo 1531 ; metaph., of entrance into 
a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards 
some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), ets t. ovofia, M, Pr., 200. 2. Of 
direction; (a) after verbs of seeing: Mt 6'^^, Mk 6*1, Lk 9i''«<'2, 
Jo 1322, al.; metaph., of the mind, He 1126 122, al.; (6) after verbs 
of speaking: Mt 13io 14^, i Th 29, al. 3. After verbs of rest; 
(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; v. 
WM, 516; Bl., § 39, 3; M, Pr., 234 f.) : Mt 223 413^ ^ Th 2\ 
II Ti 111, ge 11^^ al. ; (b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (v. 
Bl., M, Pr., 11. c.) = £v : Lk 1** 423, Ac 20i« 211^, Jo V^ (but v. Westc, 
in 1.), al. II. Of time, /or, unto; 1. accentuating the duration ex- 
pressed by the ace. : cis t. alZva, Mt 2119 ; ct? ycveas ^at y., Lk 1^° ; 
£ts T. 8tr;veKes, He 73, al. 2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, 
iintil : Mt 63*, Ac 43, 252i, py 110 216^ i Th 41^, 11 Ti I12 ; of entrance 
into a future period, eis to fieWov (v.s. fxeXXo}), next (year), Lk 13^ (but 
V. ICC, in 1.) ; cis t. fiera^ o-a/SySaroi/, on the next Sabbath, Ac 13*2 . ^i^ ^^ 
TTctXiv (v.s. 7raA.1v), II Co 132. III. Of result, after verbs of changing, 
joining, dividing, etc. : crrpec^civ cis, Ee 11® ; fMerao--, Ac 22o, Ja 4* ; /xeraX- 
Xda-creiv, Eo 12*' ; crxi^tiv cts 8vo, Mt 27^1, al. ; predicatively with elvai, 
Ac 823. ly Qf relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but 
more freq. in late Gk., eis encroaching on the simple dat., which it 



134 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

has wholly displaced in MGr. ; Jannaris, Gr., § 1541 ; Robertson 
Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117 f.) : Lk T^o, Ro 4'^o 152.26, i Co 16\ Eph S^^ 
al. ; dyd-n-r] ets, Eo 5^, al. ; XP^o-Tos, Eph 4^2 . ,^pov€tv eis, Ro 121* 
Oappfiv, II Co 10^ V. Of the end or object : €u^€tos c(s, Lk 143* 
o-d</>os, Ro 1619; lo-x^civ, Mt 5^3; d'i toDto, Mk l^s, al.; dc^opi'Cciv ets 
Ro 1^; indicating purpose, cts <f)6^ov, Ro 8^^ ; eis tvSti^iv, Ro 32^- 
€ts T(5, c. inf. (= Tm or dlo-re; Bl., § 71, 5; M, Pr., 218 ff.) : Mt 20i« 
Ro 111, J Qq gi8^ a,l. VI. Adverbial phrases : £ts tc'Aos, eis to 7rdA.1v, etc 
(v.s. TfAos, TrdXiv, etc.). 

els, /Aid, h, gen. eids, fiia?, evo's, cardinal numeral, one; 1. one, aa 
opp. to many : Mt 25l^ Ro 512, i Co 10^, al. ; as subst., Ro 51^, Eph 
21''; id. c. gen. partit., Mt 51^, al.; seq. fV (i^), Mk I418, Jo 6\ al.; 
metaph., of union and concord, Jo lO^o I711, Ro 12*' 6, Phi 127; dTro 
/iias (Bl., § 44, 1). Lk 141^; c. neg., ets . . . ov (fxyj), more emphatic 
than oi'Sct?, no one, none (cl.), Mt 51^ 1029, Lk ll^e 12«. 2. Emphati- 
cally, to the exclusion of others ; (a) a single {one) : Mt 212*, jyu^ 3*4 . 
absol., I Co 92*, al. ; oiSk els, Mt 27i*, Jo 1^, Ro 310, al. ; (b) one, alone : 
Mk 27 10i«, Lk 1819; (c) one and the same: Ro 3^0, i Co 3^ 11^ 12ii, 
I Jo 5*. 3. In late Gk., with weakened force, = ns or indef. art. (cf. 
Heb. in?< , Ge 22i3, al. ; v. Bl., § 45, 2 ; M, Pr., 96 f.) : Mt 8i9, 19«, 

Re 813, al. ; els rts (Bl., I.e.), Lk 22^0, Jo ll*^. 4. Distributively : ets 
exao-Tos (cl.), Lk 4**^, Ac 2'"', al.; els . . . koX ets (cl., eis fxiv ... ets hi), 
Mt 17*, Mk 9^ Jo 2012, al. (cf. LXX and use of Heb. in^, Ex I712, 

al.) ; o eis . . . o €T€po<; (dAXos) = cl. o fxev (ercpos) . . . 6 Be (erepos), 
Mt 62*, Lk 7*1, Re I710 ; KaO' ets, els k. ets (in which Ka6' is adverbial, 
or the expression formed from the analogy of ev KaB' Iv ; M, Pr., 105), 
one by one, severally : Mk 141^, Ro 12*, al. ; ets tov cva = dXXT^Xovs (Bl., 
§ 45, 2 ; M, Pr., 246), i Th 511. 5. As ordinal = Trpwros (like Heb. 
^^^^ ; Bl., § 45, l ; M, Pr., 95 f.), first : Mt 28i, Mk 162, al. 

eiCT-dviD, [in LXX chiefly for NIS hi. ;] to bring in : c. ace, Lk 227, 
Jo 1816, Ac 7*5 ; seq. ets, Lk 22**, Ac 9^ 2128. 29, 37 222*, He 1" ; <SSe, 
Lk 142i.t 

eia-aKou'o), [in LXX chiefly for yatZT , also for niV , etc. ;] to listen 
to, in two senses ; (a) to obey : i Co I421 (cf . De 1*^, Si 3") ; (b) to 
listen, assent to ; pass., to be heard : of persons praying, Mt 67, He 57 ; 
of the prayer offered, Lk li^, Ac lO^i (cf. Ps 42, Si 31(34)29(26); 
V. Cremer, 624). t 

el(T-8^X0fAat, [in LXX for |^np ;] to admit, receive : 11 Co 6i7 (lxx) 
(Cremer, 687).t 

eia-ci|jii, [in LXX for KIS ;] to go in, enter : seq. ets, Ac 3^ 212«, 
He 9« ; xpos 'Uko^^ov, Ac 21i8.t 

ei(T-e'pxofjiai, [in LXX chiefly for NiS ;] to go in or iyito, enter : Mt 
925, Lk 7*^ al. ; seq. ets, Mt IO12, Mk 2i, al. ; seq. 8td (7n;Ar;s, ^upas, etc.), 
Mt 7l^ Jo 101, al. ; iirb t. (rriy-qv, Mt 8^ ; c. adv. : oirov, Mk I41*, He 620 ; 
«JiSe, Mt 2212 . i^^^^ Mt 26*8; seq. ^rpos, c ace. pers., Mk 15*^, Lk 128, ^c 
10^ 113 1640 172 288, Ue 320 . of demons taking possession, Mk 925, Lk 8*0 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 135 

223, Jo 1327. of food, Mt 15", Ac ll^. Metaph., of thoughts, Lk 9*»; 
£ts KOTTov, Jo 438; CIS TTetpacT/Aoi', Mt 26*^ Lk 22*<''*<'; of hope as an 
anchor, He 6^^ ; ySoat', Ja 5* ; iryev/jia ^wijs, Re 11^^ ; eh t. Koa-fiov (cf. 
Wi 22'' 141*, Jo 1837), Ro 512, He lO^; in counterparts of Jewish Aram, 
phrases relating to the theocracy (cf. Dalman, Words, 116 ff.) : cis t. 
ya/xovs, Mt 2510 ; £is T, xapav t. Kvptov, Mt 2521.23. ^j^ ^^ ^^^^^^ ])^t JS^.^ 
1917, Mk 9*3.45; J.5 ^, ^ao-jX. T. ovpavSv (t. ^coG), Mt 520 721^ ^1. (v.s. 
/3ao-tXcta) ; €ts T. KaraTrauo-tv, He 3"> ^^ 4^ *• ; cts r. So^av, Lk 242« ; eto". Kal 
c^cpx-. ^0 go in and out (like Heb. HKyi N13 , De 28^, etc.), of familiar 
intercourse, Ac 12^; fig., of moral freedom, Jo 10^ (cf. iv-, Trap-, crw- 

* cia-KaXcu, -a>, to call in: mid., c. ace. pers,, Ac 1023. t 

6i<T-o8os, -ov, 6 (•<[ 6So?), [in LXX chiefly for NIS ;] 1. a means of 
entering, place of entrance : He 10^^, 11 Pe 1^^ (cf. Westc, He., I.e. ; MM, 
Exp., xii; but v. infr,). 2. a going in, entrance : Ac 132*; ^ gen_ Iqc, 
He 10^^ (Thayer, s.v. ; but v. supr.) ; seq. eis, 11 Pe 1" (Mayor, in 1. ; 
Thayer; but v. supr.); Trp6%, 11 Th 1^ 2i.t 

cia-injSdw, -w, [in LXX : Am 5^9 (XIS), Da th Su 26 * ;] to spring 
in, rush in : Ac 141* (Reo^ 162y (for exx. from tt., v. MM, Exp., xii).t 

€iCT-Tropeuo|jiai, [in LXX chiefly for XiS ;] to go into, enter : Lk 8^* 
1133 1930. seq. cJs, Mk 121 656 112, Lk 22io, Ac 32; Trpo's, c. ace. pers., 
Ac 2830 ; oTTov, Mk 5*0 ; Kara t. oIkovs, house after house, Ac 83 ; of 
things (food), Mt 15^^ Mk 7^5, is, 19. Metaph. (cf. tiWpxo/xai, 2), Mk 
4}^, Lk 182* ; eio-. Kol iKTTop., to associate with, seq. ficra (cf . eto-epvo/Aai), 
Ac 928.t 

** 6icr-Tp^x"' [^^ LXX : II Mae 52« * ;] to run in : Ac 12i*.t 

6io--<|>€pu, [in LXX chiefly for XlSl hi. ;] to bring in, into : c. ace. 
pers., Lk S^^'i^; seq. eis, Mt 6^3^ Lk 11*; eVt, Lk 12^^; c. ace. rei, seq. 
(k, iTi67; pass., He 13ii.t 

etra, adv., denoting sequence; 1. of time; then, next : Mk 82^, 
Lk 812, Jo 135 1927 2027, I Ti 310, Ja l^^; seq. gen. abs., Mk 4^7; in 
enumerations, i Co 15*' 7. 2*, i Ti 2^3. 2. In argument; (a) therefore, 
then; (b) furthermore : He 12^ (cf. eiTcj').t 

etT€, V.s. €1. 

*elr€v, Ion. and Hellenistic for elra (q.v.), then: Mk 428.t 
ci(i>0a, V.s. Ww. 
iK {i$), prep. c. gen., from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). 

Iicacrros, -r], -ov, [in LXX chiefly for BTK;] each, every (Lat. 

quisque) ; (a) with a noun : Lk 6**, Jo 1923 ; seq. Kara, He 3^3, Re 
222; J5 1.^ Eph 416; (b) without a noun: Ac 435, Rq 2«, al.; (c) 
partit. gen., Ro 14^2, i Co 1^2, al. ; in sing, with pi. verb, Lk 23, Ac 
1129, 3,1, ; in apposition with pi. noun or pron., Lk 23, Jo 1632, Ac 2^ 
326, al. ; eh €. (Lat. unusquisque), Ac 2^ 2126, Col 4^, al; I. t. dSeX^cp 
(- Heb. vry^b nrsi, Ge 263i), Mt 1836 (cf. He 8"); I. /icri toS TrXi^aiW 
(= =inn-b» BTN, Jg 629, al.), Eph 425. 

* iKdaroT€, adv., each time, always : u Pe l^^.t 



136 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

iKaT6v, ol, a'l, Ta, indecl., a hundred: Mt IS^.^s^ Lk 15*, al.; 
Kar'a £., Mk 6*0 ; ets, cV L, Mk 4^. 20. 

^KaTOkxae-nis (Rec. -tTijs), -e's (<^ cKarov, txT^s), [in LXX for 
nzm nSO 73 , Ge 17^" *;] a hundred years old : Ro 4^'^.t 

^KaTorrdpxTis (-apxo?. ^^ 8^.8 275*, Lk 7^, Ac 2225 28^^; cf. 
M, Pr., 48); -ou «eKaTov, apx^,), [in LXX for niNQ itjy;] a cen- 
turion : Mt 8^\ Lk 7<' 23*^ Ac IQi- 22 21^2 2226 231^. 23 2423 27^' «• "> ^i' *3 
(cf. /cevTvpicjv).t 

cK-paiV«, [in LXX for nby ;] to go out : He ll^^ t 
^K-pdXXw, [in LXX chiefly for W'\Z pi., also for ^bttir hi., NS"' hi., 
BTT hi., etc. ;] 1. to drive, cast or se7id 02ct, to exjiel : c. ace. rei, mid. 
(o-Itov), seq. €is, Ac 2V^; pass., Mt IS^^; c. ace. pers., Mt 21^2, Mk ll^s, 
al. ; Satyadvia, Mt 722, Mk 13*, al. ; id. seq. Ik, Mk 72^ ; -^apd, Mk 16C9] ; iv, 
Mk 322 ; (^v) T. 6vo>aTt, Mt 722, Mk 938 ; Adyu), Mt 816 ; seq. Uw, Jo 
63''; id. c. gen., Mk 12^, al.; of expulsion from home, Ga430; from 
the Church, in Jo '^^. 2. In LXX and NT (like Heb. K'^Sin and Aram. 
p93n), to command or caiise to depart : Mt 9^^, Mk 1^2 (y^ Swete, 

in 1.), ib. *2 5*^ Lk IO2, Ja 22^; t. KpCaiv ets vikos (to cause to proceed to 
its goal), Mt 1220 (LXX). 3 f^Q reject (cl.) : r. ovo^a v/xCyv <Ls irovrjpov (cf. 
De 251*), Lk 622 . iq ig^ve out, Re II2. 4. to take, draw or pluck 
out ; (a) with violence : Mt 7^, Mk 9*^, Lk 6*2 ; (6) to bring forth or 
out of: Mt 1235, Lk lO^^. 

**?K-Paais, -€0,?, ^ «£V/3atVo>), [in LXX: Wi 2^7 8^ ll^**;] 1. a 
way oiit (Hom., Xen.) : i Co lO^^. 2. the issue (Menand.) ; He 13^t 
cK-poXVi, -^s « iK^aWoi), [in LXX : Ex 11^ (lZ7"ia), Jos 1^ (iK^oXrjv 
■trouLdOai, ^ita hi.), Ez 478 (XS"')*;] 1. a throwing out. 2. a jettison, a 
throwing overboard of cargo : Ac 27^^ (cf. Jos, I.e. ; and v. Field, Notes, 
144f.).t 

*f iK-yaiiliw, Rec. for ya/xt'^co, q.v. : Mt 223o 2438, Lk 172^, i Co 7^^ 
Not elsewhere. t 

*t eK-yafiiaKu, Rec. for yafiLo-Kw, q.v. : Lk 20^*> 35. Not elsewhere.t 

CK-yovos, -ov (<[ e(cyiyj/o/xai, to be bom of), [in LXX for ■'^5 

(neut.), ]5, etc.;] 1. c. gen., born of. 2. As subst., 6, rj e., a child, 

son or daughter; in pi., descendajits : rc/cva rj 1., children or grand- 
children, I Ti 5*.t 

*t eK-SairaKdo), -w, strengthened form of SaTravaw, to spend tvholly ; 
pass., with reflexive force, to spend oneself wholly : seq. i-n-ep, 11 Co 
12i5.t 

^K-8^X0H'<*^» \}^ LXX for miT , 'pnp , etc. ;] 1. to take or receive 
from (Hom., Hdt„ al.). 2. (Rare in cl.), to expect, await : c. ace. rei, 
Jo 513], He 1110, Ja 5^; e. ace. pers., Ac 17i«, i Co Ipa I61I; seq. Iws, 
He 1013 (Cremer, 687).t 

**Ik-8tiXos, -ov «8^\os), [in LXX : in Mac 3i» 6**;] strengthened 
form of S^Xos, q.v., quite clear, evident : 11 Ti 3^.+ 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 137 

*^K-8Tifi^<», -w (-< IacSt^/xos, /rom home; cf. -la, iii Mac 4^^)*; to be 
from home, absent: ii Go 5"; seq. oltto, ib.^; seq. Ik, ib. ^ (cf. Sltto-, ev- 

^K-8i8wp, [in LXX for jru, etc.;] 1. to surrender, give v/p, give 
out. 2. to let out for hire (Hdt.) ; mid. (as freq. in tt. ; v. MM, Exp., 
xii) ; to let out to one's advantage, Mt 2133. 41^ i^j^ 121, Lk 20».t 

cK-8i-iiY^o|jiai, -ovfjiai, depon., [in LXX chiefly for 1BD , pi. ;] to 
tell in detail, relate, declare : Ac 13*^ (lxx) i53_f 

tcK8iK^«, -oi «Iac8i»cos), [in LXX for IpB, Dp2, DBtZT, etc.;] 
1. to vindicate: c. ace. pers., Lk 183>5. 2. to avenge: c. ace. pers., 
cavTous, Eo 12^9; c. ace. rei, irapaKo^v, II Co 10^; alfjia, Ee 6^^ 19^ 
(Cremer, 203; for exx. from tt. in both senses, v. MM, Exp., xii).t 

t |ic-8iKTjcris, -ews, 17 (-^ exSiKeoj), [in LXX chiefly for Dp3;] ven- 
geance, vindication: Lk 21^2, Eo 12^^ (v. MM, Exp., xii). He 
1030 (Lxx)^ II Co 711 ; of the injured person, c. gen., Lk 18^' 8; c. dat., 
Ac 72*; of the offender, c. gen. obj., i Pe 2^*; c. dat., 11 Th 1^ (of. 
Si 12«).t 

**Ik8ikos, -ov «BLKrj), [in LXX: Wi 12^2, Si 30«, iv Mac 1529*;] 
1. without law, unjust. 2. exacting penalty from,; as subst., an 
avenger: Eo 13*; seq. irepC, 1 Th 4" (in n., a legal representative; 
Milhgan, Th., l.c.).t 

eK-8iuKw, [in LXX for ma hi., niOY , PTl , etc. ;] to chase away, 
drive out : i Th 2^5 (cf. De %^\ Jl 220).t 

** CK-80TOS, -ov (■<] iKSiSuifjLi), [in LXX : Da th Bel 22*1] given up, 
delivered over : Ac 2^3 (for construction, v. Field, Notes, 111 f.).t 

^cK-SoxT -^s, 17 (<^ £KS£'xo/-iai) ; 1. in cl., (a) a receiving from, 
succession; (b) an inter jyretation. 2. In NT, = Trpoa-SoKta, ex- 
pectation: He 1027 (of. Field, Notes, 231; Cremer, 688).t 

^K-8u'u, [in LXX chiefly for lacTQ ;] to take off, strip off, strip : c. 
ace. pers. (sc. clothing), Mt 27^8; c. ace. pers. et rei, Mt 273^, Mk I520, 
Lk 103<>; mid., to put off: fig., of the body, 11 Co 5*.t 

^Kci, adv., [in LXX chiefly for nCT;] 1. properly, of place, there : 
Mt 213 52*, al. ; ol i., Mt 26'i ; oC . . . €., Mt 621 I820 2428, Mk G^o, Lk 
123*; pleonastic, ottov . . . e. (= DOT 11^^, De 4^, al.), Ee 12"' 1* (cf. 

Bl., §50, 4). 2. As often in cl. (Hdt., Thuc, al.), with verbs of 
motion, for iKelae, thither : Mt 222 1720 2428 2636, Mk 633, Lk 12^8 1737 
212, Jo IP 182.3, Eo 152*. 

CK61061', adv., [in LXX chiefly for D^hi;] 1. of place, thence : Mt 
421, Mk 6^, al. 2. Of time, thereafter (v.s. KaKeWcv). 

iKtivo^, -rj, -o (^e/cei), [in LXX chiefly for Nin, WnTI, and cogn. 

forms;] demonstr. pron., that person or thing (ille), implying remote- 
ness as compared with oiVos (hie) ; 1. absol., emphatic he, she, it : 
opp. to 0VT09, Lk 18^*, Ja 415 ; rifiel^, He 1225 . ^^^-^^ j^t 13^1, Mk 4^1 ; 
iWoi, Jo 99; iyw, Jo 330 ; to persons named, Mk 16tio. is. 20]^ Jq 221 ; of 
one (absent) who is not named, contemptuously (Abbott, JG, §§ 2385, 



138 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

2732), Jo 711 928; with respect, of Christ, i Jo 2« 3^, al.; referring to 
a preceding noun, Mk 16^^^\ Jo 7** ; resumption of a participial subject, 
Jo 1^^ 92^ 10\ Eo 141*, al. (on its reference in Jo 19^^, v. Westc, in 1.; 
Moffatt, Intr., 568; Sanday, Fourth Gospel, 77 flf.). 2. As adj., 
joined, like outos, to a noun with the article : Mt 7^*, Mk 3^*, Jo 18^*, 
al. ; esp. of time, past or future : iv t. r}fj€paL<i i., Mt 3^ Mk 1*, Ac 
218 (LXX)^ al. ; iv i. r. rnxipa, esp of the Parousia, Mt 7^2, Lk 623, n Th 
1", u Ti 112 ; adverbially, ckcivt^s (sc. o'SoO) = cl. ckciv^ (B1., § 36, 13), 
that way, Lk 19*. 

e'Kclac, adv., [in LXX : Jb 3929 (oifrp)*;] thither: Ac 21»; 

constr. pregn. (MM, Exp., xii ; Field, Notes, 134), tovs i. ovra?, Ac 22*.+ 
+ iK-ly]Tiia, -w, [in LXX chiefly for mil , also for 1X3 , Cr^n , etc. ;] 

1. to seek out or after, search for: c. ace. pers. (i Mac 92*'); fig., t. 
Kvpiov, e€6v (cf. Ps 13(14)2, Am 5*, al.), Ac IS^^, Eo 3^\ He 11«; 
evXoytav, He 12^^^ ; i^fCvTV^^-^ '*• ^t')P<^^vr}(rav (as in I Mac, I.e.), sought 
and searched out : i Pe l^o. 2. As in 11 Ki 4}^, Ez 3^8' 20, al. (Cril), 
to demand, require : Lk 11^^, 6i_f 

*f iK-lr\Tr\<ns, -cws, r} {<CfK^r]Tew), a questioning (EV), subject for 
dispute : i Ti 1*.+ 

**+^K-0ajip^a., -w « cK^.i/A^os), [in LXX: Si 309*;] 1. t^ jg 
amazed. 2. to amaze, terrify (Si, I.e.). Pass., to be amazed, terrified: 
Mk 91* 1433, 165. 6.+ 

**+lic-0a|ipos, -ov «^a/x^os), [in LXX : Wi lO^^, Da th 7^ (dreadful, 
terrible: ''3nO^}{) * ;] amazed (cf. Polyb., xx, 10, 9): Ac 3^^+ 

**+ U-Qainxdlui, [in LXX : Si 2723 43^8, iv Mac W^ * ;] strengthened 
form of 6avfji- ; to wonder greatly : Mk 12^'^.+ 

**Ik-0£TOS, -OV {<^€KTL6r]fXt), [lu Al. ! Ez 423*;] (.g^gl Q^l; TTOlCtV 

1. = iKTiOivai, Ac 719.+ 

^K-Ka0aipa), [in LXX for "TT^, etc ;] l.to cleanse thoroughly, cleanse 
out : c. ace., livrov, ii Ti 22^ ; of the impurity removed, ^vfirjv, i Co 5^^.+ 

iK-Kaiu), [in LXX chiefly for 1373;] 1. to burn up. 2. to kindle. 
Pass., to burn : metaph., of the passions (cf . Si 16^, Jb 3^^), Eo 12^.+ 

CKKaK^U, -to, V.S. kvKaK€W. 

iK-K€VT4(a, -u), [in LXX chiefly for Ipl;] 1. to prick out, put out 

(Arist.). 2. to pierce (Polyb., LXX) : c. ace. pers., Jo 1937 dxx)^ Re 1^.+ 

^K-KXdw, -w, [in LXX: Le l^*" (VDW pi.)*j] ^o break off: pass., 

Eo 11^7. 19. 20.t 

iK-Kktiu, [in LXX: i, Kpta-Lv, for ntt3 hi., Ex 232 (also as v.l., 
Jb 3420, Ps 67 (68)30) * .] iQ shut out : Ga 41^. Pass., Eo 32^.+ 

iKK\r\<Tia, -a?, rj « cK-zcaXew), [in LXX chiefly for bnf? , otherwise 

for one of its cogn. forms;] 1. prop., an assembly of citizens regularly 
convened (in Thuc, ii, 22, opp. to o-v'AXoyos, a concourse) : Ac 1932. 39, 41^ 

2. In LXX of the assembly, congregation, community of Israel (De 
410 232, al.) : Ac 738, He 2^2 (lxx). 3. :„ NT, esp. of an assembly or 
company of Christians, a (the) church ; (a) of gatherings for worship : 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 139 

I Co 1118 1419' 34, 35 . (5) of local communities : Ac S\ i Co 4}"^ ; with 
name added, Ac 8\ Eo IG^, i Th 1\ al. ; pi., Ac 15*S i Co 7" ; t. 
XpKTTov, Eo 16i« ; T. 'Ao-tas, I Co IG^^ ; t. dytW, I Co 14^3 ; e'nr^v t. 
iKKXrjma, Mt IS^'' (but V. Horfc, Ecclesia, 10) ; of a house-congregation 
{DB, i, '43la), Eo 165, i Co IG^^, Col i^^ Phm 2 ; (c) of the whole body 
of Christians : Mt 16^8, i Co 1228, Eph 1^2, Phi 36, al, ; t. 6€ov, Ac 2028 
{KvpLov, T, E, mg^, I Co 159, Ga 1", i Ti 3^^ ; i. tpotot6ku>v iiroyeypafx- 
fievwv €v ovpavots, He 122^. 

SVN.: (Twaywyri, q.v. (v. Tr., Syn., § i; DB, i, 42G; Hort, 
Ecclesia, esp. 4 ff., 107 ff. ; Hamilton, People of God, ii, 37 ff. ; reff. 
8.VV. "Church," "Congregation," in DB and DCG; Cremer, 332). 

^k-kXiVw, [in LXX for T^\ , ITO , etc ;] intrans., to turn aside, 

turn away : metaph., from the right path, absol., Eo 3^2 (LXX) ; from 
evil, absol., i Pe 3^1; seq. airo, c. gen. pers., Eo IG^'^.t 

* ^K-KoXujxpdu, -w, to swim out of: Ac 27^2 f 

* eK-KOfii^w, to carry out : as freq., a corpse for burial, Lk 712.+ 

** cK-Koirii, -^s, 17, [in Aq. : Is 51^ * ;] in T for ivKoinj (q.v.) : 
I Co 9i2.t 

cK-KoiTTu, [in LXX for ms , etc. ;] to C7it out, cut off, cut down : 
of a hand, foot, Mt 53o 188 • a tree, Mt 3^^ V^, Lk 3^ 13^' » ; fig., of a 
branch, Eo II22 ; seq. eV, Eo II2* ; metaph., t. A<f,opfi.-qv (cf. Jb 191°, 
cXTTi'Sa), II Co lli2.t 

EK-Kpcfiai'KVfjii, [in LXX for nwp , Ge 443" * .j iq h^ng from or 
wpon ; mid., c/c/cpe/xa/iat : fig., i^eKpifiaro avTov olkovidv (Eec. ; WH read 
elc/cpe'/xfTo, which implies a pres. €KKp€/jiOfj.ai, otherwise unknown ; cf. 
Veitch, S.V. KpefJuafxaL), Lk 19*8, t 

CK-KpEflO/Jiai, Lk 19*8 (WH, V.S. iKKp€/XaVWfJLl).f " 

** eic-XaX^w, -w, [in LXX: Jth 11^*;] to speak out, divulge: 
Ac 2322.t 

^K-Xd/xTTOj, [in LXX for mx hi., etc.;] to shine forth : Mt 13*3. t 

** iK-\avQ6.vhi, [in Sm. : Ps 12(13)2*;] to escape notice utterly; 
mid., to forget utterly : He 125.t 

€K-XeYu, [in LXX chiefly for inS ;] to pick out, choose. In NT 
always mid. (exc. Lk 93^, CKXeXey/xeVos, WH, dyaTrrjro?, E, mg.), to pick 
out for oneself, choose (cf. M, Pr., 157 f .) : c. ace. rei, Lk 10*2 247 ; 
c. ace. pers., Ac G* I522. 25 ; of Christ (v. supr.), Lk 935 . of Christ's 
choice of disciples, Lk 6^3, Jo G'" 13i8 15i«' i^, Ac I2 ; of the Divine 
choice : of persons, Mk I320, Ac I2* 13^7 15^, Eph 1*, Ja 2^ ; of things, 
I Co 127.28 (Cremer, 402, 773).t 

Ik-Xcittw, [in LXX for nbs , ms ni., Dan , etc., 47 different words 
in all ;] 1. trans., to leave otit, pass over. 2. Intrans., to leave off, cease, 
fail : p.a,jiwvas, Lk 1G9; ttiWis, Lk 2232 . |^^ He 1^2 (lxx). of the sun in 
an eclipse, Lk 23*5.t 

^K-XeKTos, -77, -ov «€KX€yw), [in LXX for ina (so prob. in Is 
28i«, Pr 173, for MT ]n2l), XnS, etc.;] 1. choice, select (cl., rarely; 
Thuc, Plat., al), hence, eminent : Eo 16^3 (cf. Ez 272*). 2. As in 



140 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Insci'. (MM, Exp., xii), chosen; esp. as in LXX, of Israel, elect, 
chosen oi God (Is 659, pg 104(105)^3 al.); so in NT; (a) of Christ: 
Lk 2335 (cf. Is 421) . fig_^ XlOc;, i Pe 2^- « (^x^) • (j) of holy angels : 

I Ti 5"; (c) of Christians: Mt 2422.24^ Mk 1320.22,27^ „ Yi 2", i Pe 1^; 
T. Btoi, Lk 187, Ro 833, Col 312, Tit 11 ; t. Xpicrroi, Mt 243i . ^ ^^^^^ 

II Jo 1 ; a8eX(f>i], ib. 13 ; yeVos, I Pe 2^ (LXX) J kXt/toi kol €. K. maroL, 
Ke 1714 ; opp. to /cAt^tos (not so in Epp. ; v. Lft. on Col 312), Mt 20i« 
(T, WH, txt., R, omit) 22'^ (Cremer, 405, 775).t 

**iK\oy^, -^?, v (<eKA£», [in Aq. : Is 22^; Sm., Th. : ib. 37^4*;] 
a choice, selection ; in NT, always of the Divine choice (EV, election) : 
(T/ceuos iKXoyrj^, gen. qual., a chosen vessel; Kar i., Eo 9^ 115.28- q 
gen. pers., i Th 1*, 11 Pe l^" ; by meton., 17 c. = oi eVXe/cTot, Ro ll'^.t 

tK-Xu'w, [in LXX for nsi , etc. ;] 1. to loose, release. 2. to tin- 
loose, as a bow-string, to relax, enfeeble; pass., to be faint, grow 
weary : Mt 1532, Mk 83 ; of mental weariness, Ga 6^ He 123. a (LXX).+ 
** iK-iLd<T<Ti^, [in LXX: Si 12^, Ep. Jei3.24*;] to wipe off: c. ace, 
Lk 738. ", Jo 112 123 135 1 

t^K-fiUKTTipiiu, [in LXX: Ps 2* 21 (22)' 34 (35)i« (jsb), i Es 
251 A * ;] to hold up the nose in derision at, scoff at : c. ace, Lk IG^* 
2335.t 

iK-ye6w, [in LXX : Jg 4^8 (-rd) 182«, iv Ki 22^ 23i« (n:E3), Mi 6^* 
(J1D hi.), Ill Mac 322*;] 1. to bend the head aside (Xen.). 2. (a) to 
shim, avoid (Diod.) ; (b) to withdraw : Jo 5^3. t 

fiK-y^^w, [in LXX: Ge 92*, Hb 2^ (yp^), Jl 16, Hb 21^ {y^p hi.), 
I Ki 253'^ (KX^), Si 34 (31)2*;] ^^ become sober after drunkenness: 
metaph., of sobriety of mind, i Co 153*. t 

^Kouaios, -ov X<^^'(<^^), [ill LXX chiefly for H^^J, as Nu 153 

(xar c.) ;] usually of actions, voluntary : Kara c., of free will (Lft,, in 1.), 
Phmi*.t 

4koo<tiws, adv., [in LXX : Ps 53 (54)« (niT^S), n Mac 143, ai. ;] 

voluntarily, willingly : He 102", i Pe 52. t 

*t 2ic-TraXai, adv. (of a class of compound adverbs common in late 
Gk. ; V. Mayor on 11 Pe, I.e.), for a long time, from of old : 11 Pe 23 
35.t 

t iK-rceipdlio, [in LXX : De 6i« 82. is, Ps 77 (78)i8 (no: pi.) * ;] = cl. 
eVTTcipao/Aai, to put to the proof or test, make trial of, tempt : c. ace, 
of God, Mt 47(i'XX)^ Lk 412 Ub.), i Co 10^; of Christ, Lk 1025 (Cremer, 
497). t 

iK-niiLTTut, [in LXX for nb»;] to send forth: Ac 13* 17io.t 
*t eK-TTcpiaaws, adv., more exceedingly : Mk 143i (cf. virfpTr€p-).f 

cK-ir€T(i»'i'uni, [in LXX chiefly for CTIB, as Is 652 (hithp.);] to 
spread out (as a sail), stretch forth : Eo IO21 (lxx) f 

^K-irrjSdo), -w, [in LXX: De 3322 {p2^), etc.;] to spring forth: eh 
T. oxA-ov (cf. Ju 1417), Ac 141* (for ex, in ir., v. MM, Exp., xii).t 

c-K-iri'TTTw, [in LXX : Is 40^ 28i. * {b^z), Jb 142 (1,i,q ^ y, Ry. mg.), 
Jb 1530 (-iiD), Jb 1533 (rjbrir hi.), etc.;] to fall out of, fall from, fall 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 141 

off: seq. Ik t. x"P<^''» Ac 12^; absol., Ac 27'2j of the withering of 
flowers (as LXX, 11. c), Ja 1", i Pe 1^* (i-xx) j of navigators falling off 
from a straight course, Ac 27^'^' 2"' 2^. Metaph., c. gen. rei : Ga 5*, 
nPe3^^; ahsol., fall from its place, fail, perish: Eo Q^.t 

* iK-iAioj, -S>, to sail away : Ac 20^ ; seq. cis, Ac 15^^ 18^^ f 
** iK-TT\r]p6io, [in LXX: ii Mac S^o, iii Mac 12.22*.] 1, to fill full, 
make up a number. 2. to fulfil (MM, Exp., xii ; Cremer, 839), Ac 13^*.+ 
**t cK-irX^puais, -€ws, 17, [in LXX : ii Mac 6^* *',] a completion, 
fulfilment : Ac 212«.t 

^K-irXr]<Tau (Attic -ttw, Ac 1312), [in LXX: (pass.) Ec 17i«t»^> 
(nanr hithp.), Wi 13*, n Mac 7^2, iv Mac 8* 11^^*;] 1. prop., to strike 
out, drive away. 2. to strike with panic or shock, to amaze, astonish : 
pass., Mt 135* 1925^ Mk 62 7^^ 10^*, Lk 2*^; seq. em', c. dat. rei, Mt 728 
2233, Mk 122 1118^ Lk 432 943^ Ac 13i2.t 

Stn. : " vTwtlv, to terrify, agitate with fear ; Tpc/tciv, to tremble, 
predominantly physical ; <f>o^€Lv, to fear, the general term," Thayer ; 
cf. also <f>p'La-g-w, to shudder, and v.s. SetXi'a. 

*iK-nveQ}, -w, to breathe out; sc. ftiov, ifrvxvv (expressed in cl., 
.^Esch., al. ; cf . LS, s.v.), to breathe one's last, expire : Mk 153''» 39, Lk 
23*'. For force of aorist, v. Swete, Mk., l.c.t 

^K-iropcuw, [in LXX chiefly for NS^ ;] to make to go out ; pass, 
and mid., to go forth: Lk 3'^, Ac 25*; of demons leaving one 
possessed, Mt 172^ (WH om.), Ac 19^2- of excrement, Mk 7^^; seq. 
dTTo, Mt 2029, Mk 10*8 . i^^ Mk 131 (of the dead rising, Jo 529) ; «cr^cv, 
Mk 611; 1^^^ Mk ll^^; c.'s, Mk lO^^, Jo 5^9; cVt', c. ace. pers., Ee 16^*; 
TT/jo's, c. acc. pers., Mt 3^, Mk 1^ ; dcnrop- (q.v.) koL I., Ac 92^ ; metaph., 
to come forth, proceed : of feelings, etc., Mk 723 . ggq ^^^ Mt 15ii» i*, 
Mk 715.20,21^ Lk 422, Bph 429; f>iffj,a, seq. Si(i, Mt 4*(i'XX); of lightning 
and flame, Ee 4^ 91^. is 115 . a river, Ee 22^ ; a sword, Ee V-^ 191* ; a 
rumour, seq. eis, Lk 43^^ ; of the Holy Spirit, seq. irapa., Jo 152*.t 

t ^K-irop»'cu«, [in LXX chiefly for rU7, freq. of spiritual un- 
faithfulness ;] strengthened form of Tropvcvco, implying excessive in- 
dulgence; mid. to give oneself up to fornication : Ju'^.t 

*cK-nTo«, 1. to spit out. 2. to spit at in disgust, to abominate, 
loathe (=3 cl. airoiTT-, KaTairr-) : Ga 4i*.t 

iiK-pil6^, -w, [in LXX: Jg 5^* {iS'p), Je l^" (trrn:), Ze 2* (fflha 
A, -ipsr BS), Da TH 78 (-ipy), Da LXX 411.23, Wi 4*, Si 3^ 49^ i Mac 

5^1, II Mac 12'' * ;] to root out, pluck up by the roots : c. acc. rei, Mt 
1329 1513 Lkl7«,Jui2.t 

lic-oraais, -ecos, ^ {i^icTTrjfii), [in LXX : Ga 2733, i Ki 1415, Ez 
2616, al. (n-JlD) ; II Ch I41* <i3' 17i« 2029 (inD), al. ;] 1. a displace- 
ment (Arist.). 2. An abnormal condition of the mind, in which the 
subject passes out of his usual self-control (Hippocr.) ; in NT 
(Kennedy, Sources, 121 f.) ; {a) a trance: Ac IQio 11^ 221^; (6) 
amazement : Mk 5*2 168, Lk 526, Ac 3i<'.t 

iK-<TTpi^o,, [in LXX: De 322<>, Am 6i3'i2), Ez 163* A (^Dn), Za 



142 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

ll^" (pne pi.), Ez 13'-'o (TIY pil.)*;] 1- io korji out of (Rom.). 2. to 
turn inside out ; metaph., to change entirely, pervert (Aristoph.) : Tit 

* £K-(rwJw, to preserve from danger, bring safe : Ac 27^® (e^wo-ai, 
WH, mg., E, txt., v.s. £^o>6»£«).t 

IK-Tapdaao,, [in LXX : Ps 17 (18)^ (nvn pi.), 87 (88)i« (nax), Wi 
173,4 181'^*;] to tliroio into great trouble, agitate: Ac 16^^. t 

iK-idv(a, [in LXX for rhw , ni33 , etc. ;] to stretch out or forth : 
T. x«pa (as often in LXX), Mt 8^ U'^ U^\ 26^\ Mk 1« S^ Lk 5^^ &^\ 
Jo 21^^ Ac 26^; seq. iirl, c. ace, pers., towards, Mt 12*^; against, 
Lk 2253 . £^5 i^^,^^ Ac 430 ; of anchors, to cast, Ac 273o.t 

iK-Te\io>, -w, [in LXX: De 32^^ (nbs), 11 Ch 45, Da th S'*"', 

II Mac 15^ * ;] to bring to an end, finish, comjylete : Lk 142^' ^o.t 

**t ^K-TeVcia, -as, 7} « tKrei/r;?), [in LXX: Jth 4^, II Mac 1438, 

III Mac 6*^*;] zeal, intentness, earnestness (cf. Deiss., BS, 262): 
Ac 26'.t 

**^KT£MT]s, -£s «£/cT€tVw), [in LXX: in Mac 310 529*;] stretched, 
strained. Metaph., earnest, zealous : i Pe 4^.t 

^KT€K(us, adv., [in LXX : Jh 3^ (n^in^), Jl 1^*, Jth 4^2, m Mac 5^ * ;] 

fervently, earnestly : Ac 12*, i Pe 1^2 ; compar., Lk 22^* (WH br., E, 
mg., omits). t 

^K-TiOrifii, [in LXX for p3 ni., etc. ;] to set out, expose : Ac 7^^ 
Metaph., to set forth, expound: Ac 11* 28^3; c. ace. rei, 182", t 

^K-TU'do-CTw, [in LXX for lyj ni., pi., etc.;] to shake off : Kovioprov, 
Mt IQi*; xow, Mk 6^\ Mid.: Kovioproy, Ac 13^1; IfidrLa, Ac 18« (cf. 
MM, Exp., iii).+ 

Iktos, -7/, -ov, </ie sixth : Mt 20*, al. 

iKr6s, adv., [in LXX: Jg 82« 20^5, iii Ki 10", al. (l3^n, 
]» 15!?), Jg 528 (lyj), Ca 41' 3 ('^ ny^n), al. ;] 1. as adv., outside, 
beyond : to i., c. poss. gen., the outside, Mt 232" . j^ \^^q q^ ^y_ Deiss., 
BS, 118), pleonastic, €kt6s €i fiy, 1 Co 14^ 152, i Ti 5^^. 2. With force 
of prep., c. gen.; (a) outside of: i Co 6^^ 11 Co 122; (6) beyond, 
besides, except : Ac 2622, j Qq 15^7 f 

€K-Tp^irw, [in LXX for ^Dn , Am 5^ * ;] to turn out of the course, 
turn aside, c. ace. Pass., with middle sense, intrans., to turn aside : 
He 12" (E, txt., for be ptd oiit of joint, E, mg., v. Thayer, s.v. Westc, 
in 1.) ; fig., seq. cis, i Ti 1" ; tVi, 11 Ti 4* ; ottio-w, i Ti 5^^ . q ^gc^ ^^ 
shun, avoid : i Ti 620. t 

iK-rpi^b), [in LXX for bl2 , etc. ;] 1. prop., of children, to nurture, 
bring tip : Eph 6*. 2. to nourish : Eph 529.t 

*f cKTpofios, -ov, = evTpofjio^, exceedingly terrified : He 122^ (for exx. 
from TT., V. Deiss., BS, 290; LAE, 254).t 

6ic-Tpw|j.a, -To^, TO {<^€KTLTpo(TK(ii, to miscarry), [in LXX: Jb 3^", 
Ec 63 (bg)3 ; also in Aq., Ps 57 (58)^), Nu 12^2 (ma) * ;] an abortion, 
an untimely birth (v. Field, Notes, 179) : i Co 158.t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 143 

iK-(^ip(a, [in LXX chiefly for K2r hi. ;] 1. to carry out, bring out : 
c. ace. rei, Lk I522, i Ti 6^ ; c. ace. pers., Mk 823, Ac 5^5 ; of the dead 
for burial (cf. Ko/At^w), Ac 5*' ^' ^^. 2. to bring forth ; {a) of women 
(Hipp., Arist., al.) ; {b) of the ground (Hdt.) : He G^.t 

^K-<|>euY&), [in LXX for D13 , etc. ;] to flee away, escape : absol., 
Ac 162^ I Th 53, He 2^ ; seq. «, Ac IQ^* ; c. ace. pers., He 1225 . q 
ace, rei, Lk 213", Eo 23; t. x«i/>a5 avTov, 11 Co 1133.t 

iK-<^o^iia, -Q), [in LXX chiefly for Tjn hi,;] to frighten away, 
terrify : c. ace. pers., 11 Co lO^.t 

lK<|)opos, -ov, [in LXX : I, cTvat for -|iP , De 9^^; also i Mac 132 ♦ -j 

affrighted, terrified : Mk 9i«, He 122i.t 

**iK-^6io, [in OT (Sm.) Ps 103(104)1*; (a1.) Is 61"*;] to cause to 
grow out, put forth (leaves) : Mt 2432, Mk 1328.t 

^K-xe'w, also HellenistiCj eKxvvoi (in Th. : ii Ki 14^**), and eK^vvvo) 
(q.v.), [in LXX chiefly for ^DttT ;] to pour out : <t>id\rjv, Ee W'*' ^' ^o- ^2, 17 ; 
Kipfxara, Jo 2^5 ; al/xa, Mt 2335 (cf . MM, Exp., xii), Lk 1150, Ac 2220, 
Eo 315 (Lxx)^ Ee 16«. Pass., alfx.a, Mt 26'^8, Mk I42*, Ac 2220; otvo?, 
Mt 9^^ Lk 537 ; (TTrXdyxva, Ac 1^\ Metaph., t, Tr^eO^ua, Ac 2^7. 18 (LXX). 33 
10*5, Tit 3« . iydTTT], Eo 55 (of. Si 33 (36)8, ^^.y^^) . pass., of persons (like 
Lat. effundor), to give oneself up to (EV, ran riotously in) : Ju ^.t 

**+cK-xu»'»'«, Hellenistic form of U^ii^, q.v. (Bl., § 17) : Mt 2335 2628, 
Mk 142*, Lk 537 1150 2220, Ac 118 10*5 2220, Eo 5^, Ju ".t 

iK-xwp^o,, -w [in LXX : Nu 16*5 (1710) (□,-, ^ly jg 73 (-,53^)^ 
Am 712 (ma), I Es 4**' 57, I Mac 9«2 * ;] to depart, withdraw : Lk 
212i.t 

^K-v|/u'xa,, [in LXX : Jg 421 A {V\^y), Ez 21^ (12) (nn^ pi.) * ;] to expire, 

breathe one's last : Ac 55>io 1223 ^qI iKwv^u); Cremer, 906).t 

iKiiv, -ova-a, -6v, [in LXX: Ex 21i3, Jb 36i»*;] willing, of one's 
own free will : Eo 820, i Co 9^7 (Cremer, 246).t 

^Xaia (Attic, e'Aaa), -as, 17, [in LXX for rr\ ;] an olive tree : Eo 
11". 24, Ee 11*; T. opo9 tQ)v €. (D^nin iri, Za 14*), the Mount of Olives: 
Mt 211 243 2630, Mk 111 133 1426^ Lk 1937 2230 ; to KoAov/tcKov i. (T, 
eXaiw, q.v.), Lk 1929 2137. 2. an olive (Aristoph.) : Ja 3i2.t 

IXaioi', -ov, TO, [in LXX chiefly for lOtP;] olive-oil: Lk 16*, 

Ee 6« 1813; for lamps, Mt 253. *.8; for healing, Mk Gi^, Lk 103*. 
Ja 51*; for anointing at feasts, Lk 7**, He 19(i'XX).+ 
Syn. : fivpov, ointment, v. Tr,, Syn., 135, 
t AaicSi', -wvos, o (<[ ikaia), [in LXX for it;! ;] olive-grove, olive- 
garden (so in FIJ and in tt, ; Deiss., BS, 209 ff, ; MM, Exp., iii; 
M, Pr., 49, 69, 235): Lk 192^ 2137 j^H, -wu; v. their App., 158; 
Field, Notes, 73 ; Bl., § 10, 5 ; 33, 1 ; Thayer, s.v.), Ac I12 (where Bl., 
11, c, proposes the conjectural emendation ikauov for -<iJvos).t 

'EXajieiTTis (Eee. -a/iiTT/s), -ov, 6 (Heb. D^iy;) [in LXX (el.) 



144 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

'EAu/Aaios, "EXa/xov : Jth 1' ; 'AiXa/iaVi^s (vv.U. 'E\-, -a/iiTTjs ; Bl., 
§ 3, 7) : Is 11^^ 212 22«) ;] an Elamite : Ac 2^t 

i\d<T(T(i}v (-TTWV, He V, WH, I Ti 5*), -ov (lormed, with superl. 
i\dxi(rTos, from the epic tXaxv's, little, and serving as compar. of 
fiiKpo^), [in LXX for layD, etc. ;] less, in age, rank or quality : Jo 2^**, 
Eo 9^2 (Lxx)^ He V ; neut., -ov, adverbially: i Ti 5».t 

fi\aTTovi(a, -to (<:^ lAaTTov), [in LXX (with -oto) chiefly for 
^p^ ;] to be less (RV, Jiad no lack) : n Co 8^^ f^^^) (a rare word ; of. 

MM, Exp., xii).t 

cXoTTiSu, -w (<^ eXaTTcov), [in LXX (where also -aa-w) chiefly for 
IDn , and very freq. in Si ;] to make less : He 2'^ (i-xx) j pass., Jo 3^°, 
He 29.t 

AauVo), [in LXX : Is 41^ (Dibn) 33^1 (t3"»er), etc. ;] to drive : of 

the wind, Ja 3*, ii Pe 2^^ ; of sailors rowing or sailing a boat, Mk 6*^ 
Jo 6^^; of demons, Lk 8^9 (cf. oltt-, cruv-eXavVco).t 
*t e\a<|>pio, -as, r], lightness, levity : ii Co l^^.t 

eXa<})p6s, -a, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for bj? , bbp^ ;] light in weight 

easy to bear : Mt ll^o ; 6Xii/^is (EV, our light affliction), u Co 4^^t 

eXdxioTos, -f}, -ov (v.s. ikdcrcrwv), smallest, least : as proper 
superlat., i Co 15®; elsewhere, as usually in late Gk., intensive (Bl., 
§ 11, 3) ; Mt 2«(LXX) 25*»»45^ Lk 122« W^ 19^7, i Co 4^ 62, Ja 3*; L h 
T. (3a<T(Xtia T. ovpavwv, Mt 5^® (v. Dalman, Words, 113). Compar., 
cXaxioTorepos (for corresp. superl., v. LS; v. also Bl., §44, 3); lesi 
than the least : Eph 3^.t 

'EXed^ap (Heb. "l7y^^^), 6, indecl., Eleazar : Mt l^^t 

t iXedw, later form of cXccoj, q.v., [in LXX as v.l. in To 132, Ps 
36 (37)2«, al. ;] in NT : Ro %^\ Ju 23, WH.t 

teXcYF^os, -oC, 6 «€X£yx<^), [in LXX: Ps 37 (38)i* 38 (39)^1 
(n03in), Si 2029 21« 41*, al.;] reproof: ii Ti S^^.t 

t^ey^s, -£o>5, ^ «A€yx«), [in LXX: Jb 21* 232 (o^nr)*;] re- 
buke : II Pe 2i«.t 

cXcyxos, -ou, o (eXe'yx*"), [in LXX: freq. in Pr, Jb (nnsin), 

Wi 5, Si 3, etc. ;] a proof, test : He 11^.+ 

cX^YXw, [in LXX chiefly for PD^ hi.;] 1. in Horn., to treat with 
contempt. 2. to convict : c. ace, Mt 18^^ (RV, show him his fault), 
Tit P; iseq. irepi, Jo 8'"' 168, Ju^^; pass., Ja 2^. 3. to reprove, re- 
buke: I Ti 52c, II Ti 42, Tit 1^3 2^5, Re 3^9; pass., seq. Trcpt', Lk 3^^; 
iir6, He 125 (LXX). 4. to expose: Eph 5^^; pass., Jo 320, i Co 142* 
(RV reprove, mg. convict), Eph 5^^ (RV, as i Co, I.e., cf. AR on Eph 
51^; MM, Exp., xii; cf. s^-, 8ta-KaT-€X€yxo/Aai).t 

Syn. : i-mTifiw, expressing simply rebuke, which may be un- 
deserved (Mt 1622) Qj. inefifectual (Lk 23**'), while eX. implies rebuke 
which brings conviction (v. Tr., Syn., § iv). 



Manual qeeek Lexicon of the new testament 145 

IXeciKiJs, -17, -ov (<^IX€os; in Ee, I.e., WH have the Attic poetic 
form, cXeii ds), pitiable, miserable : Ee 3^^ ; comparat., i Co IS^^.t 

i\€io> (in Eo 9i«, Ju22, -c^o), q.v.), -S «IA€09), [in LXX (Hex, 
Pss, Pr) chiefly for pn , also freq. in Proph. for cm , etc. ;] to have 
pity or mercy on, to show mercy : absol., Eo 9^" 12^; c. ace, Mt 9^^ 
1522 1715 1833 20^0. 31, Mk 519 10*"' *8, Lk 16^* 17^3 ^gss. 39, Eo 9^^' is 
1132, py 227, Ju22^ Pass., to havB pity or mercy shown one (BV, 
obtain mercy) : Mt 5^ Eo 113o. 3i, i Co 7^^ 11 Co 41, i Ti l^s. ^^, 
I Po 2io.t 

Syn. : oiKTctpo) (v. Tr., Syn., § xlvii ; Thayer, s.v. cAccw ; Cremer, 
249). 

t £'X£Ti|xo<rufT|, -I??, y « cA£€w), [in LXX chiefly for TpH , nj?^^ ;] 

1. mercy, pity. 2. almsgiving, alms (Uke the German Almosen, a 
corruption of the Greek word c.) : Mt 6* ; ttouZv i., Mt 62. 3, Ac 936 102 
24^7; i. StSdvat, Lk 11*1 (cf. Mt 233fi; Dalman, Words, 621.) 1233; 
aiTctv, Ac 32 ; kaftelv, Ac 33 ; Trpos (in order to ask) c., Ac 3^*^ ; pi., Ac 
10*' 31 (Cremer, 711).t 

cXcilfiui', -ov, [in LXX chiefly for pan ;] merciful : Mt 5'', He 2i7.t 
^Xeicds, V.8. cAccivds. 

'EXeiadpex (T, Eec. 'EXio-; v. WH, iljap., 155), ^, indecl. (Heb. 
yj^bs), Elizabeth: Lk l^^-.t 

IXeos, -ovs, TO (cl. -ov, 6, and so Eec, Mt 9" 12^ 2323, Tit 3^, He 
4i«; on the Hellenistic form to l, v. WH, Ajyp., 158; M, Pr., 60; 
Mayser, 277 ; Kiihner, i, 515), [in LXX chiefly for ipn ;] mercy, pity, 
compassion ; 1. of men : Mt 9^3 (lxx) x2'' 2323 . ttouIv I. (and id. seq. /xcxa, 
c. gen. ; cf. Heb. or IpH ni^V , Ge 2123, al.), Lk 103^, Ja 2^3 3^^ 2. 

Of God : Lk 150. 84, 58^ Rq 159, Eph 2*, ii Ti li«. is, Tit 35, He 4i6, i Pe 
13 ; esp. in benedictions, Ga 6^^, i Ti 12, ii Ti 12, ii Jo 3, Ju 2 ; o-kcv^ 
cXt'ous, Eo 923 ; o-TrXdyxva iXeov;, Lk 1'^ ; ttouIv I. (v. SUpr.), Lk 1^2 j ^ 
ifi€T€pw eXe'ci, Eo 1131. 3_ Of Christ : Ju2i.t 

Syn. : oiKTLpfxo^ (v.S. iXeio}). 

iXiuBepia, -as, ^, [in LXX : Le 192" (nCT^n), i Es 4*9' ^\ Si 721 

3034 (3325)^ I Mac 142", m Mac 328*;] liberty: with reference to the 
religious life, i Co 102*, 11 Co 31^, Ga 2* 51, i Pe 2i«, 11 Pe 21^; 6 vd/tos 
T^s i., Ja 125 212 ; ^ i, T^5 86$r]^, Eo 821 . ^^' ^_^ Ga 513 (on which 
formula, cf. Deiss., LAE, 327 ff. ; Cremer, 251).t 

cXeu^epos, -a, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for ^wpn ;] free ; (a) in civil 

sense, not a slave : Jo 833, i Co 721. 22 I2i3, Ga 328, Eph 68, Col 311, Ee 
gi5 1316 igis . fem., Ga 422. 23, 3o • (j^ as regards restraint and obligation 
in general : Mt 172^, i Co 9i ; seq. U, i Co 91^ ; d^rd, Eo 73 ; c. inf., 
I Co 739; from the law, Ga 426, i Pe 21^; from sin, Jo 836; ^ 
Sixaiotrvvj;, as regards righteousness, Eo 62" (Cremer, 249).+ 

^Xeo06p6a), -w, [in LXX : Pr 25io, 11 Mac 127 222 *;] to make free : 

10 



146 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

from sin, Jo 832.36; ggq. ^tto, Eo 618'22 8-21; r. iXive^pla (dat. 
commodi), Ga 5^ (on the " punctiliar " force of this verb, v. M, Pr. 
149 ; cf. also Cremer, 251).+ 

*+ JXeoais, -ew9, rj, a coming : Ac l^^.f 

iXe^dvTivos, -t], -ov {<^ iktcfia's, ivory), [in LXX for "0 ;] of ivory : 
Re 1812. t 

'EXiaKcifi (Heb. D'^jT^'N), Eliakim, an ancestor of Jesus : Mt 1^^, 

Lk 330. + 

* i'Xiyfia, -T0<;, to « eA.tWw), a roll : Jo 19^^, WH, txt, (jxly/xa, 
Rec. ; fiLyfjLa, WH, mg., E, txt.).+ 

'EXie^ep (Heb. liybN), o, indecl., Eliezer, an ancestor of Jesus : 

Lk 329.+ 

'eXiouS, 6, indecl., Eliud, an ancestor of Jesus: Mt l^^'^^.t 

'EXiadpcT, v.s. 'EXeto--. 

'EXiCTalos (Eec. 'EXio-o-aZos ; T, 'EXur-), -ov, 6 (Heb. ycrbfef), Elisha, 

the prophet : Lk 42^".+ 

i\L<T(TUi, [in LXX : Is 34* (bba ni.), Ps 101 (102)26 («!,„ ^i.), etc. ;] 
to roll, roll up : He 112(lxx)^ Rg G^^.t 

IXkos, -cos (-ous), TO [in LXX : Ex 9^-''\ Le 1318-27, iv Ki 20^, 
Jb 2'' (^''niS');] 1. a icound (Horn.). 2. a sore, an ulcer (Thuc, al.) : 

Lkl62i, Ee 162.11.+ 

*€Xk6«, -d; 1. to wound. 2. to ulcerate; pass., to suffer from 
sores : pf . ptcp., eiAicw/tcvos (Eec. 17XK-), EV, full of sores, Lk 162<>.+ 

cXkuu, v.s. eX/coj. 

IXku, (Hellenistic form eX/cvw in Jo, 11. c, Ac 16i^), [in LXX 
for ^CTD , etc. ;] to draw : c. ace. rei, Jo ISi'' 21^ ; c. ace. pers., seq. 
€^<i>, Ac 21^0; €19, Ac 161^ Ja 2^. Metaph., to draw, lead, impel: 
Jo 6**, 12^2. (For discussion of I. in Oxyrh. Log., v. Deiss., LAE, 
437 ff.)+ 

'EXXds, -aSos, V, [in LXX: Is 66i9, Ez 271^ (yr), i Mac li 8^*;] 

with varying usage as to geographical limits ; in NT = 'A;^ai'a (cf. 
Ac 1812), Greece : Ac 202.+ 

"eXXyji', -7;vos, 6, [in LXX : Jl 3 (4)^, Za 91^ (yr), etc. ; i Mac lio, 

al.*;] a Greek; opp. to /Sdp^apo^, Eo li*; usually in NT of Greek 
Gentiles, opp. to 'lovSatot : Jo V\ Ac II20 141 IGL ^ 18* I91O' i^ 2021 2128, 
Eo li« 29.10 39 1012, I Co 122. 24 1032 1213^ Qa 23 328, Col 311 ; of 
proselytes, Jo I220, Ac 17*.+ 

•eXXtji/ikcJs, -i -oV, [in LXX: Je 26 (46)i« 27 (50)i« (n31V aliter 
in Heb.), 11 Mac 410- 1^ 6^ 112* 132, iv Mac 88*;] Greek: t. 'EXArjvtKy 
(sc. yXwo-o-Tj), Ee 911. + 

**'E\\-^vis, -/80s, rj, [in LXX: 11 Mac 68 A*;] a Greek (i.e. Gentile) 
woman : Mk 726, Ac I712.+ 

*+'EXXTj»'iaTris, -ov, 6 (<; 'EXXt/vi'^w, to Hellenize, affect Greek cus- 
toms), a Hellenist (EV, Grecian Jew) : Ac 61 9^9 II20.+ 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 147 

*'E\\r]vi<ni, adv., in Greek: Jo 19^"; 'E. (so. AaAciv) yawo-Kets, 
Ac 2137 (cf. Field, Notes, 135). t 

*t AXoyaw, -w (a KOLVT] word, elsewhere usually -e'w; cf. Bl., {5 22, 2), 
to charge to one's account, impute : Phm ^^ (on parallels, cf. Deiss., 
LAE, 79 f., 335 f.; Milligan, NTD, 73; MM, Exp., xii); of sin, 
Eo 513 (Cremer, 400).t. 

*EXfiaBd(i (L, 'EA- ; Eec. -/AwSa/i), 6, indecl., Elmadam, an ancestor 
of Jesus : Lk 3^8. 

cXm^w, [in LXX chiefly for ni22, also for non, bw pi., hi., etc.;] 
to look for, expect, hope (for) : c. ace. rei, Eo S'^'**^^, i Co 13^, He 11^; 
0. dat. rei (t. rvxu, Thuc, iii, 97, 2), Mt 12^1 ; seq. Ka^ws, 11 Co 8^ ; 
c. inf., Lk 634 23«, Ac 26^, Eo 152S i Co IS^, 11 Co 5'\ Phi 2^^<^\ 

I Ti 31*, II Jo 12, III Jo"; seq. 6ti, c. pres., Lk 242i; c. fut., Ac 24^6, 

II Co 1^3 130, Phm 22. As in LXX (WM, § xxxiii, d; and esp. in the 
pf., Ellic. on I Ti 410 ; BI., § 59, 2), c. prep.; ek, Jo 5*5 (v. Ellic. I.e.), 
I Pe 35 ; seq. 5ti, ii Co l^O; ctti', c. dat., Eo 15^2 (lxx)^ i Ti 410 G^^; ^, 
I Co 15^9; c. ace, i Pe 1^3 (aor. imper. v. Bl., § 58, 2) ; r. Oeov, 1 Ti 5^ 
(cf. air-, Trpo-eXTTi^w, V. Cremer, 255). t 

Airi's, {iK-, Eo 82», WH, V. Bl., § 4, 3 ; M, Pr., 44), -I'So?, ^, [in 
LXX for ni321 and its derivatives, nipri (freq. in Jb), etc. ;] expectation 

(in cl., rarely of evil, mostly of good, and so always in NT), hope; 1. 
of hope in general: 11 Co 1<*; c. gen. obj., Ac 16^^; art. inf., Ac 272*^, 

I Co 910 ; Trap' iXir'iSa, Eo 41^ ; eV cAtti'Si, I Co 9^^ 2. Of religious hope : 
tV iX-rriSL, Ac 22« 26«, Eo 4^8 820, Tit 12; rfj i. iai^OrjfjLev, Eo 82*; ^ar' 
iXiriha ^<arj<i alojviov, Tit 3^ ; of the Messianic hope of Israel, Ac 23® 
266' 7 2820 . of Christian hope, Eo 52. ". ^ 1212 154, 13^ i Co 13^3, n Th 2i«, 
He 3« 611 719 1023^ I Pe 13, 21 315 . g gen. obj., Eo 52, Col 127, j Th P 58, 
Tit 12; c. gen. of that on which the hope is based, Ac 26^ Eph V^ 4S 
Col 123; 5 ^^^5 ^-5 >^ Eo 1513; |;^«v £. (= cl. cATTi'^eiP'), Ac 24l^ Eo 154, 

II Co 312 1015, Eph 212, I Th 413 ; seq. inl, c. dat., i Jo 33 ; ds, Ac 241^ ; 
oTi, Eo 820, Phi 120,21 Meton., (a) of the author or ground of hope 
(cl.) : I Th 21^ I Ti 11 ; c. gen. obj., Col 127 • (^) of the thing hoped 
for: Ga 5^, Col 1^, Tit 2i3, He 6I8 (Cremer, 252, 712).t 

'EXufjias, -a, 6 (<; Aram, or Arab., cf. DB, i, 246 b), Elymas : 
Ac 138.t 

i\wl i-t Eec. ; iXwt LT ; Aram, ^n^^?), Eloi : Mt 27*6, Mk 153* (Lxx).t 

efjiauToO, -rjs, -ov, reflex pron. of first pers., used only in gen., 
dat. and ace. sing., of myself: Lk 77, al. ; (Itt' L, Jo 53o 717.28 828.42 
1018 1410 ; hr' i^avTov, Mt 89, Lk 78. 

^fi-paivw, [in LXX for n^JT , etc. ;] to step into : Jo 5* (WH, EV 
omit) ; cJs TrXoIov, to embark : Mt 823 91 132 1422 1539^ Mk 41 518 6*^ 
^10.13, Lk 53 822.37^ Jo 617.24 213, Ac 216.t 

Ifi-PaXXo), [in LXX for DltZT , etc. ;] to cast into : seq. cis, Lk 12^ 
(cf. MM, Exp., vii, 93).+ 

*ilfji-3(iirT(i), to dip in : r. x«ipa Iv t. t^v/SAiw, Mt 2623 . mid., seq. 
a'c, Mk I420.+ 



148 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

cfipaTeu'w, [in LXX : c. ace, Jos 19^9 (bui), 19" (pbu pi.) ; seq. ets, 
I Mac 12" 1320 1431 15<0; metaph., 11 Mac 23o*;] {<: ifi^dTt]^ 
<; €/x/?aiVo)) ; 1. to step in or on (Soph.), hence (a) to freqrmnt, haunt, 
dwell in {M^ch., Eur.) ; metaph.. Col 2^^ {d^velling in, R, txt. ; taking, 
R, mg.) ; (b) to invade (i Mac, 11. c. ; metaph., Col, I.e.). 2. to enter 
on, come into possession of (Bur., Dem. ; LXX, Jos, 11. c.) ; on the 
difficulties of reading and interpretation in this passage, v. Lft, Col., 
194 f ., 252 ; ICC, 268 ff. ; Field, Notes, 197 ; MiUigan, NTD, 177 ; and 
for exx. from tt., MM, Exp., xii (cf. K€V€/^;8.).t 

^li-PiPct^o., [in LXX : iv Ki 92« (Ml hi.), Pr 4^ (^11 hi.)*;] 1. 
to set in, jyut in. 2. to put on board ship, embark : c. ace. pers., seq. 
€1?, Ac 27".+ 

c>-pX£'Tra), [in LXX for nsi (m Ki 8\ al.), n2D (Jb G^s A, al.) ; 
metaph., Is 51^ (CJ33 hi.), Si 2^", etc. ;] to look at : c. ace. rei, Mk 8^^ ; 
c. dat. pers. (part., seq. Xeyct, fJirev, cf. Xen., Cyr., i, 3, 2), Mt 192*', y[^ 
1021, 27 i4fi7^ Lk 201' 2261 (^„e;8X€./.cv), Jo 136. 43 . absol., to look, Ac 22^ ; 
metaph., to consider : Mt G^^.t 

c|x-ppifi(Iop,ai (T, -iofxai; Bl., §22, 1), -w/xai {<^ ^piixr], strength, 
bulk, whence (ipifxaofjiat, to snort with anger), depon., with aor. mid. 
and pass., [in LXX (Hatch, Essays, 25) : Da LXX ll^o (also Aq., Ps 
7^2; Sm., Is 17^3)*;] to snort in (of horses, ^sch.), hence, to speak 
or act with deep feeling {DCG, i, 62')) ; (a) to be moved with anger 
(cf. i,jL^ptfir]fjia, La 2"): c. dat., Mk 14^ Jo 11^3; iv iavr^o, Jo ll^S; 
(b) to admonish sternly : c. dat., Mt 9^0, Mk 1*3.+ 

c>e'«, -w, [in LXX : Is 19i* (N^p) * ;] to vomit : fig., Re S^\f 
*+ ^fji-|iaivofAat, depon., to rage against : c. dat., Ac 26^^+ 
t'Efifiacou^X, 6 (Heb. bx way, Is 71*), Immanuel : Mt 123(LXX)^t 

'EfAfxaou's, r/, Emmaus, a place 60 furlongs from Jerusalem : Lk 
2413.+ 

ifHiivio, [in LXX chiefly for mp ;] 1. to abide in : Ac 283o. 2. 
to abide by, be true to: seq. eV; r. ttCo-tu, Ac 14^"^; t. SiaOrJKr], He 
89 (LXX) J c dat., T. yeypa/A/xeVots (dat. ptcp. as in legal formula; cf. 
Deiss., BS, 248; MM, ^a;;j., xii) : Ga 3io(i'XX).t 

'E|xficjp (T, 'Efjifjiwp, Rec. -op, indecl. (Heb. Iian), Emmor (Go 

331^) : Ac 7i<'.+ 

^ficSs, -r/, -oV, poss. pron. of first pers., representing the em- 
phasized gen. ipov, mine, subjectively and objectively, i.e. belonging 
to, proceeding from or related to me : Mt IS'^*^, Mk 83^, Jo 3^^ (most 
freq. in this gospel), al.; absol., to €>oV, to. ifid, Mt W^ 25'\ Lk 153i, 
Jo 10^* 1614-1* 1710 ; = gen. obj. (cl.), ds t. e^/v avap-v-qcnv, Lk 2219, 

I Co 1124,25. c. gen. expl., t. c'/xtJ x"/>' nav'Aov, i Co 16^1, Col 418, 

II Th 31". 

*+ ^(iiraiYfiovri, -rjs, 17 « €/A7rat'{w, q.v.), mockery : 11 Pe 33.+ 

+ cjA-iratYfios, -o?, 6 « ifiirai^w, q.v.), [in LXX : Ez 22* (n^^f?), Ps 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 149 

37 (38)7 Bn^ ^-,i,p ni)^ ^^^ 1225, Si 2728, 11 Mac V, iii Mac 522*;] a 
mocking : He ll^'.t 

in-rrailu, [in LXX for b^T hithp., pniZT, etc.;] = Attic irpoa--, 
Karairai^w, to mock at, mock (Hdt.) : 0. dat., Mt 27^9' 3i, Mk I520, Lk 
1429 2263 233fl; pass., Mt 2i«, Lk 1832; absol., Mt 20i9 27", Mk 10^* 
1531, Lk 23ii.t 

t c|i-iraiKTT|s, -ov, 6 «€>7rat^w, q.v.), [in LXX: Is 3* {n^blbVT?)*;] 

a mocker : 11 Pe 3*, Ju ^^.t 

^fi-TTcpi-iraTew, -<a, V.S. ivn-. 

ifi-mTrXT)|xi (on ifi-n-LUiTr-, V. LS, S.V., Bl., § 6, 8), and ifnmrXdd) (Ac 
1417), [in LXX chiefly for sbQ , miZT ;] to fill full, fill up, satisfy : c. 
ace. pers. et gen. rei, Lk 1^^^ ^^ ^4^^ ; pass., Lk 62^, Jo 6^2 . metaph., 
c. gen. pers., to take one's fill of: Eo 15'-* (cf. Da LXX Su32).t 

^fi-TTiirpTjjii, ifiTrprjOo} (for the form, v.s. €/i7ri7rXr//At, and cf. Veitch, 
s.v. TrLfiTrprj/jii), [in LXX chiefly for P)li2?;] to set on fire: iroXcv, Mt 

22'^ ; pass., of the body, to become inflamed : Ac 28^ (T ; iriixTrprjixi, 
WH, q.v.).t 

cfA-iriirTw, [in LXX chiefly for bD3 ;] to fall into : seq. ck, Mt 
12", Lk 639 103"; metaph., ci9 Kpt>a, i Ti S"; 6v€iBLCTfi6y, ib. 3^; 
veipaa-fiov, ib. : 6^ ; CIS x«pas ^^oO (cf. II Ki 241*, I Ch 21^3, Si 2^8), 
He 103i.t 

c>-ir\^K«, [in LXX: Pr 28i8 {bB2), u Mac 15^7 ♦;] to weave in, 
entwine ; pass., metaph., to be involved, entangled in : 11 Ti 2*, 
II Pe 220.t 

*t ^fi-TrXoKi], -^s, 17 (<^ ifXTrXeKOi), a braiding : rpix'^v, 1 Pe 33,+ 

i\i-i:vi(ii, -S), V.S. evTT-. 

^fi-TTopcu'ofiai, depon. (<[ l/tt7ropos), [in LXX chiefly for inD;] 1. 
to travel, esp. for business. 2. to traffic, trade : Ja 4^3_ 3 q q^qq 
rei (a) to traffic in; (b) to import: (Ho 12S for by^ hoph.). 4. C. 
ace. pers., to make a gain of: 11 Pe 23.+ 

efiiTopia, -as, 17 (■< l/xTropos), [in LXX for iriD, b^Ti , etc.;] 
commerce, business, trade : Mt 22*.+ 

eiiTT^pioc, -ov, TO (l/ATTopos), [in LXX: De 33^^ (par), Ez 273 

{byi} ; «. c'vai, Is 23^'^ (njT) * ;] a trading-place, exchange : oTkos 
ifjLTTopiov, Jo 2i«.+ 

cji-TTopos, -OV, 6 (•<] TTo/sos, a joumey), [in LXX chiefly for "iriD , 
byi;] 1. a passenger on shipboard, one on a journey. 2. a merchant: 
Mt 13*^Ee 183,11, 15, 23,t 

ifx-jrpr\0(a, V.S. fp.Tr lit prffju. 

c|x-irpoa6cc, adv. of place (in cl. also of time), [in LXX chiefly for 
■•35b;] 1. adverbially, before,in front : Lk 192^; c^s t6 I., ib. *; opp. to 

oirurdfv, Ee 4"; opp. to ra ottlo-o), to. I., Phi 3^3 2. As prep., before; 
(a) in front of : Mt 52* 62 7« ll^o 272^, Lk 51^ 72^ I42, Jo 328 jq*, Re 
1910 228; (J) in ^he presence of: Mt 27", Ga 2i*, i Th 13 2i» 39'i3. 
6p.o\oy€~iv, 6.pvu(j6ai (Dalman, Words, 210), Mt 1032.33 26^0, Lk 128; ju 
forensic sense, Mt 2532 27", Lk 2136, Ac 18", 11 Co 510, i Th 2^9, i Jo 



150 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

3^*^ ; evBoKLa {deX-qixa) Ian I. deov (a targumic formula ; Dalman, Words, 
211), Mt 1126 18^*, Lk 10^1 ; (c) in the sight of : Mt S^" 6^ 17^ 2S^\ 
Mk 212 9^ Lk 1927, Jo 123", Ac 10* ; (d) of rank and dignity (Dem., 
Plat., al. ; LXX, Ge dS^O) : Jo V^.'io^f 

^p-irruw, [in LXX: seq. «?, Nu 12^* A, De 25« (pT)*;] = cl., 
KaraTTTvw (Euth., NPhr., 66), to spit tcpon : c. dat., Mk 10^* 14«5 IS^*; 
seq. (k, Mt 26«' 27^^ Pass., Lk 18=^2_t 

efi4)anis, -es «[ €ju.</)au/w, fo s/icw in, exhibit), [in LXX : Mi 4^, 
Is 22 (|13 ni.), Wi 622 721 W^ ; i. yCveaOai, Ex 2i* (yT ni.), Is 65^ (tzhl 
ni.)*;] manifest: Ac 10*«; metaph., Eo 1020(LXX) (y.g. ^7ri(^ai'i^9).+ 

£fji4)a>'i!^w, [in LXX for JTT hi., etc.;] 1. to manifest, exhibit: 
kavTov, c. dat pers., Jo 142i.2.i {DCG, n, 112b). Pass, and mid., to 
show oneself, appear: Mt 27^3, He 92* (cf. MM, Exp., xii). 2. to 
declare, make known: seq. on, He 11^*; c. dat. pers., Ac 23^^; c ace. 
rei, seq. Trpds, Ac 2322; ^^^^^^ ^ ggn. pers., Ac 24^ 252; irtpl, Ac 25i5,t 

Syn. : 8r]X6oi, q.v. 
** £>-<})opos, [in LXX: Si 192^ i Mac I32*;] 1. terrible. 2. in fear 
(of Godly fear. Si, I.e.), terrified: Lk 2i^'^\ Ac 10* 242^, Ee ll^^.t 

€|i-<j>ocrdw, -w « cfivo-ddi, to blow), [in LXX for nD3 , etc. ;] to breathe 
into (cf. Ge 2', Wi 15i\ al.), breathe upon : Jo 2022.t 

** e(i,-<j)UTOS, -ov {<^iiJ.(f>voi, tO iviplant), [in LXX: I. 17 Ka/c/a avrwv, 

Wi 12^'^*;] 1. innate (Wi, I.e.). 2. rooted, implanted: Ja I21 (v. 
Mayor, in l.).t 

iv, prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c, dat. ( = Heb. 3 , Lat. 

in, c. abl.). I. Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among : 
iv T. TToAei, Lk 7" ; T. 64>6aXixC>, Mt 7^ ; t. KoiXia, Mt 12"" ; t. 6pu, 
II Pe 1^8; T. ^poVo), Ee 321 ; r.Se^.a r. ^eoC, Eo S^* ; iv vfxv, Lk 1^ ; 
of books, iv T. ySi^Xt'w, Ga S^^ ; t. vo/aw, Mt 12^, al. ; ev tois t. narpos 
/xou, in my Father's house (EV ; cf. M, Pr., 103), Lk 2*^; trop., of the 
region of thought or feeling, ev t. KapSta (-ats), Mt 52^, 11 Co 4", al. ; 
T. oTJvei87;o-€o-iv, II Co 5" ; after verbs of motion, instead of cts (con- 
structio pircegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits 
observed in cl. ; ef. Bl., § 41, 1 ; M, Th., 12), ciTroo-reAAw . . . iv, 
Mt 101" . 8g'S,^Ke^ ^y r. xEipt (cf. Tt6l£Vai ev xepai, Hom., II., i, 441, al.), 
Jo 3^^ ; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), tla-rjXOt, Lk 
9*®; i$r}\6iv, Lk 7^"^. II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: 
ev ^WTj, Eo 51** ; ev T. Oavarw, I Jo 3^* ; ev 7retpao-/i,or?, I Pe I*' ; ev elpT^vrj, 
Mk 525; ^'^ g^^^ Phi 4l9;'^v TrpavTTjTi, Ja 3^3; ^ fjLvarrjpioi, I Co 2^• 
e'v T. StSax^, Mk 42 ; of a part as contained in a whole, ev t. a/xTreXw, 
Jo 15* ; ev evi o-w/Aart, Eo 12* ; of accompanying objects or persons 
(simple dat. in cl.), with, iv ai/xart. He 92^; ev 6eVa ;(tAiao-tv, Lk 14*1 
(cf. Ju 1*, Ac 71*) ; similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ev o-roXats, 
Mk 12^8 ; ev ia-OiJTL Xap-irpa, Ja 22 ; ev fiaxaiprj, Lk 22*^ ; ev pd/SSio, I Co 
421 (cf. ev t6$oi<;, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2) ; of manner (cl.), ev rdxei 
(= raxews), Lk 18^ (cf. Bl., § 41, 1) ; of spiritual influence, eV irvev/xarL, 
Eo 8® ; ev TT. cLKaOdpTu), Mk 123 . q{ ti^g mystical relation of the Christian 
life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Bo., 160 f. ; 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 151 

Mayor on Ju^; M, Pr., 103) : cV Xptorw ('It^o-ov), cv Kvpiw, Eo 3^* &^^, 
I Co 31 4i», II Co 122, Ga 2i7, Eph 6^1, Col 4^, i Th ^^\ al. ' 111. Of the 
agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ev of instr. — v. LS, 
s.v. Ill — corresponding to similar use of Heb. 2), by, with : ev vfuv 

KpivtToj. 6 KOVfiO'i (= cl. Trapd, C. dat.), I Co 6^ ; ev t. ap^ovTL t. SaL/xovcwv, 
Mt 9** ; cv atfJ-aTi, He 9'^'^ ; ev vSan, Mt 3^^, al. ; iv p.a^aLpa dwoKTeveL (cf. 
the absol. ev p.., ev pd/SSw, supr., II, which some would classify here), 
Re 13^** (cf. 6^). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the 

following: r]y6pa(ja<: . . . ev T. atp-aTL aov (cf. BDB, S.V. 5, III, 3), 

Re 59 ; op.oXoydv ev (= Aram. 2 ""TX ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.e. ; M, Pr., 
104), Mt 10=^", Lk 128; ^^^Vai Iv (= cl. ace, so Ja 5^), Mt 5^4, al. ; 
also at the rate of, amounting to, Mk 4* (WH; vv. 11., els, ev), Ac 
7U(LXX)_ IV. Of time, (a) in or during a period: ev t. rjp-ipa {wktl), 
Jo 11^, al. ; ev (Ta/3/3dTo), Mt 12^, al. ; ev tw /teTa^u, meamvhile, Jo 4^^; 
{h) at the time of an event : Iv t. irapovcria, i Co IS'^^ ; ev t. dvao-Tao-ei, 
Mt 22^8; (c) c. art. inf., (a) pres. (so sometimes in cl., but not as in 
NT = Iws; V. M, Pr., 215), whUe : Mt 13*, Mk 6*8, Ga 4}% al. ; (/?) aor., 
7vhen, after : Lk 9^", al. ; (d) within (cl.) : Mt 27*'^, V. In composition : 
(i) meaning : (a) with adjective s, it signifies usually the possession of a 
quality, as evoAios, evSo^os ; (6) with verbs, continuance in (seq. cv) or 
motion into (seq. ets), as c/x/xeVw, ip.(3aiv(o. (ii) Assimilation : ev becomes 
e/A- before y8, p., -ir, <f), ij/ ; iy- before y, k, $, x', eX- before X. But in the 
older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is some- 
times neglected, as in evypac^w, evKaivi^w, etc. 

t iy-ayKa\iioiiai « dyKaXr,), [in LXX for pnn pi., Pr G^O 24*8 '33) * .j 
to take into one's arms : Mk 93" lO^^'.t 

*c»'-dXios, -ov (also -a, -ov ; <C. a^5> ^^^ sea), 0/ the sea : to. e., marine 
creatures, Ja 3^.t 

+ ci'-ai'Ti, adv., a Koiv?/ word (MM, Exp., xii), before ; as prep., c. 
gen. : Lk l^, Ac 7^0 (WH, ivavr^ov), 8'^Kf 

iv-avrlos, -a, -ov (<^dvri'os, set against), [in LXX: c^ evavnas, for 
1J3 , etc. ; cvavTt'ov, for "^59^ , etc. ;] over against, opposite, contrary : 

aiv€fjLoi, Mt 142*, Mk 6*8, Ac 27* ; i$ havria^ (ellipse obscure, v. Bl., 
§ 44, 1 ; Mozley, Ps., 42), c. gen., Mk 15^^. Metaph., opposed, hostile : 
I Th 21*, Ac 269 2817; 5 ii ^., Tit 28. Neut., -iov, adv., as prep. c. gen., 
before, in the presence of: Lk 1« 202« 24i9, Ac 710 (eVavn, T), 832(Lxx)_t 

iv-&p\o\i.ai, [in LXX chiefly for bbu hi. ;] to begin, make a 
beginning : Ga 3^, Phi l^'.t 

cKaTos, (Rec. evi"), -7?, -ov, ninth : Re 212o ; of the ninth hour 
(3 o'clock, p.m.), Mt 20^ 27*5.*6^ Mk 1533.34, Lk 23", Ac 3^ 103.3o.t 

iv-ypd<^M (L, Tr., e'77-), [in LXX chiefly for nnS;] to inscribe, 
write in : pass., seq. ev, 11 Co 3^' 3, 2. to enter in a register, enrol : 
pass., Lk 1020 (cf. i Mac 13*0; and v. Dalman, Words, 209).t 

^kSctjs, -c's « ev8eo>, to lack), [in LXX for ngn , ]1">3Jj{ , etc. ;] in 
want, needy : Ac i^*.f 



152 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

* Ij'-Sciyfio, -Tos (^evStiKvu/Ai), a plain token, proof : ii Th 1' (cf. 
cvSti^is, which refers rather to the "act of proving"; I., with the 
passive formation, to the thing proved, v. Lft., Notes, 100; M, T7t., 
l.c.).+ 

SVN. : TCKfl'^plOV. 

iv-htiKfvp.1, [in LXX for 13^ , baa , HNI hi. ;] to mark, point out. 
Mid., 1. to show forth, prove : c. ace. rei, Eo 21^ 9"^ Eph 2^ Tit 21° 32, 
He 611; ggq ^^^ ^ ^^t. pers., Ro 9^7 (lxx)^ i Ti V^ ; seq. cis, He 610 (c. 
cogn. ace), 11 Co 8^*. 2. to manifest (by act) : c. ace. rei et dat. pers., 
II Ti 41-* (cf. Ge 501^' ^', and v. MM, Exp., xiii).t 

*e»'-8£i^is, -ews, 7] {<^ivS€LKiv/xi), a pointing out, showing forth, 
proof (v. s. IvSeiy^a) : Ro 32^,26^ „ Co8'^^ Phi l^s.t 

ci'-ScKa, 01, at, rd, indecl., eleven : of the eleven apostles, ol I., 
Mt 28i«, Mk 16 [1"!, Lk 24^33^ Ac 126 2H.t 

kv-%iKaTo%, -rj, -ov, eleventh : Mt 20"' », Re 212o.t 
^f-Se'xojxai, [in LXX: Ps 118(119)122 (3-iy), „ Mac lli^*;] 1. 
to admit, approve. 2. to be possible; impers., ivbexerai, it is possible : 
c. ace. et inf., Lk 13^3 (Cremer, 687). t 

*^c8T]fi^a), -w {<^evS7]fj.o<;, living in a place), to live in a place, be 
at home : iv t. a-wfian, II Co 5''' ^ ; Trpo? r. KvpLOv, ib. ^.t 

+ cV8i8u'aKa), [in LXX: n Ki 12* 1318, Pr 312i (izrnb), Jth 91 lO^, 
Si 5011*;] iq p^^i Q^ . Q (jupi, ace, Mk 15i^ (cVSuovo-i, Ree.). Mid,, 
to put on oneself, be clothed in : c. ace. rei, Lk 16i^ (cf. MM, Exp., 
xii).+ 

*l»'8iKos, -ov {<^SLKrj), righteous, just : Ro 3^, He 2- (Cremer, 204).t 

^i'-86|i.T]cris, -€WS, r), V.S. €v8w/a-. 

+ ^K-8o^(iia,, [in LXX forms ni., Ex 144.17, is^Ez 2822, etc.; for 
py, Ps 88(89)7; Si 336^ al.;] to glorify: pass., 11 Th lio.i2.t 

€i'8o|os, -oc(<[3o^a), [in LXX for 123, etc. ;] 1, held in honour, 
of high repute : 1 Co 41**. 2. glorious, splendid : of deeds, m I., Lk 13i7 ; 
of clothing, Lk 72^. Metaph., iKKX-qaia, Eph 527 (^f. 7rapaSofos).t 

t €i'8u|xa, -Tos, TO « ecSu'w), [in LXX chiefly for tZTIS^ ;] raiment, 
clothing, a garment : Mt 3* 625. 28 715 2211. 12 28^, Lk 1223.t 

t eV-8um|x(5(a, -S, [in LXX : Jg 6^\ i Ch 12i8 A (crnb), Ps 51 (52)7 
(7737) * ;] to make strofig, strengthen : c. ace. pers.. Phi 41^, i Ti I12, 
II Ti 417. Pass., Ac 922 ; c. dat., Ro 420 ; seq. iv, 11 Ti 2i (iv Kvpiw), 
Eph 610 (Cremer, 221).t 

e»'-8uf(i>, V.S. ivSvu). 

ey-%v<ns, -£co?, ^ « evSv'o;), [in LXX: Jb 41* <«> (tsqn^), Es 51*;] 

a putting on : IfxaTLOiv, i Pe 3^.f 

fv-Zu(a (eVSww, II Ti 3^), [in LXX chiefly for crnb ;] c ace, pers., 
Mt 2728 (WH, mg., R, mg.) ; c. dupl. ace., Mt 273i, Mk I520, Lk I522 ; 
mid., to put on oneself, be clothed with : c. ace. rei, Mt 62^, Mk 6*, 
Lk 827 1222, Ac 1221; ptcp., Mt 22ii, Mk 1^, 11 Co 53, Re li3 15" 
191*; of armour (fig.) : Ro I312, Eph 611.1*, i Th 5^; metaph., Svva^iv, 
Lk 24'*^ ; at^Oapa-Lav, dOavacriav, I Co 15^3, 54 • ^ Kaivov dvdpwvov, Eph 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 153 

42*, Col 310 ; a-n-Xdyxva olKTtpfiov, Col 3^2 ; 'Irja: XpiaTov, Eo 13^*, Ga 327. 
2. to enter, press into : 11 Ti 3^ (cf . €V-ev8va>).+ 

*+ ^K-ScSiJiTjffis (Rec. -8o/i,i;o-is), -ews, ^ « Soifxdo}, to build), a build- 
ing in : rj i. t. t€lxpv<s avrrjs lacTTTts, its wall had jasper built into it Ee 
21^8 (v. MM, Exp., xiii; Swete, Ap., l.c.).+ 

iv-ibpa, -as, f] « eSpa, a seat), [in LXX : Jos S^- 9, Ps 92^ (10^) 
(mx )* ;] a lying in wait, an ambush : Ac 23^* (Eec. eveSpov, a form 
freq. in LXX), 253.t 

^i/cSpcuu «; ivlSpa), [in LXX chiefly for niK ;] to lie in wait for : 
c. ace. pers., Lk ll^*, Ac 232i.t 

li'eSpoi', -ov, TO, V.8. iveSpa. 

iv-€i\io>, -w, [in LXX: i Ki 219 'i<" (ta^ij)*;] to roll in, wind in: 
c. ace. pers. et dat. rei, Mk IS^^.t 

lf-ei(ii, 1. to be in, within (Jb 27^, al.) : ptcp. pi., to. ivovra, Lk 
11" (R, txt., cf. MM, Exp., xii). 2. to be possible : Lk, I.e. (R, mg.).t 

iv€Ka (so Mt 195, Lk 622, Ac 1932 2621 ; elsewhere, prop, only 
before a vowel, evcKcv ; ctvcKcv, originally Ionic : Lk 4^^ 182^, Ac 282°, 
II Co 31°), prep. c. gen., on accottnt of, because of : Mt S^^^'^i 162* 192», 
Mk 835, Lk 622, Ac 2820, Eo 83^^, 11 Co 3^0; ?. tovtov, Mt 19^; To<yru,v, 
Ac 2621 ; Tivos I., Ac 19^2 ; seq. toO, c. inf., 11 Co 7^2 ; o5 h., Lk 4^8. 

ivevf\Ko\rTa. (Eec. ivvev-), ol, al, rd, indecl., ninety: Mt 18i2»i3^ 
Lkl5*.7.t 

ivi6s (Rec. iw), -ov, 6, [in LXX: Is 56io (d^n), Ep. Je*i; 

e. TToictv, Pr 1728 * ;] dumb, speechless : Ac 97.t 

**ivipy€ia, -as, 17 (< ^vcpyijs), [in LXX: Wi 717.26 134 1822^ n Mac 
329, III Mac 421 512, 28*. J operative potver (as distinct from 8wa/xts, 
potential power), working: of God, Eph l^^ 3^ 4}^, Phi 321, Col 12» 
212; of Satan, 11 Th 29.ii (cf. M, Th., I.e.; AR, Eph., 241 fif.; Cremer, 
261).t 

iy€pyiu>, -5, [in LXX : Nu 82* B (miu?3 N^y Nhy), Is 41*, Pr 
216 (ijyr))^ 3112 (i,Q2)^ I Es 220, Wi I511 16i7*;] (for full lexical 
treatment, v. AR, Eph., 243 If.) ; 1. intrans., to be at work or in 
action, to operate (opp. to dpyew) : seq. iv, e. dat. pers., Mt I42, Mk 
614, Eph 22 ; c. dat. pers., seq. cis (Lft., in 1.), Ga 28. 2. Trans., to 
work, effect, do : c. ace. rei, i Co 12ii, Eph in ; id. seq. ev, c. dat. 
pers., I Co 126, Ga 3^, Phi 2i3 ; i. cVe'pyciav, Eph li^- 20. Pass, (taken 
as mid. by Lft., Ga., 204 f.; but v. AR, Eph., I.e.; Milligan, Th., 
28 f.; Mayor, Ja., 177 ff.), in NT, " always used of some principle or 
power at work" (Meyer), to be actuated, set in operation: 11 Th 27; 
seq. eV, Ro 7*, 11 Co 1« 412, Eph 320, Col 129, ^ Th 2i3 ; seq. 8ta, c. gen. 
rei, Ga 5« ; ivepyov/xevr) (M, Pr., 156), Ja 51^ (Cremer, 262).+ 

*t ec^pytjiia, -Tos, TO (<[ evepyioj), effect, operation (Polyb.) : pi., i Co 
12«' 10 (Cremer, 262, 713).+ 

* cVcpYTJs, -€s (late form of eVepyo's, on wh. cf . AR, Eph., 241), at 
work, active, effective: 1 Co 16^, Phm®, He 412 (Cremer, 261).+ 

+ Ic-euXo-y^w, -Qt, [in LXX chiefly for "-ni ;] to bless : pass., seq. 
iv, Ac 325 (LXX), Ga 38(i'XX) (Cremer, 770).+ 



154 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

iy-ix<^, [in LXX: Ge 49^3 (Qiair), Ez 14*' ^ iii Mac G^o*;] 1. to 
hold in; pass., to be held, entangled: c. dat. rei; fig., ^uyw 8ovXeta?, 
Ga 51 (cf. MM, Exp., xii) ; eXLil/ta-iv, 11 Th 1* (cf. do-c/Jeiats', iii Mac, 
I.e.). 2. io sei oneself against, be urgent against (as Ge, I.e.; for con- 
struction, V. Swete, Mk., I.e.) : Mk 6^^, Lk ll^'.t 

**iyBd-l€, adv., [in LXX: 11 Mac 1227, m Mac G^s*;] (a) here: 
Lk 24", Ac 1018 1628 176 252*; (b) hither: Jo 4i5.i«, Ac 25i^t 

li'eeK, adv., [in LXX for n^D, HBD, etc.;] /imce; Mt I720, 

Lk 162«.t 

ivQufxiofiai, -ov/jiai (<^ 6vfj.6<;), [in LXX for iTQl pi., etc. ;] to reflect 
on, ponder : c. ace. rei, Mt I20 9*.t 

**^Keup.r]ais, -£W9, v «ivevfiiOfiai), [in Sm. : Jb 2127, Ez 1121*;] 
consideration, pondering (EV, device) : Ac 172^ ; pi., thoughts, feel- 
ings : Mt 9* 1225, He 4i2.t 

Syn. : Iwoia, the action of the reason ; while evO. is rather that 
of the affections (ef. Weste., Heb., i.e.). 

** cKi, Ionic form of iv (en), with strengthened accent ; [in LXX : 
Si 372, IV Mac 422 * ;] = tv€<ni, is in, has place, can be : 1 Co 6^, Ga 
328 <^»), Col 311, Ja 117 (cf. Lft., Ga.; Hort and Mayor, Ja., 11. c.).t 

ti'iauTos, -ou, 6, [in LXX for TMtS;'] 1. prop., a cycle of time. 
2. = Itos, a year: Jo 11*9.51 igis, Ac ipe isn, Ja 5i7, Ee 91*; pi., of 
sabbatical years, Ga 41*^ ; Trotciv e., to spend a year, Ja 41^ ; a7ra| tot) 6., 
He 97; /car e.. He 92^ IQl'^; e. Scktov, Lk 4l9(LXX).t 

iv-lavt^y.,, [in LXX : iv Ki 13« A {mv), m Ki 122*, i Es 5*7 9«, 
Es 313, i-iv Macg*;] to place in; in pf., plpf., 2 aor. and in mid., 
intrans. ; (a) to be at hand, impend, threaten : 11 Ti 31 ; (b) to be 
present : ii Th 22 (but v. Thayer, s.v.) ; pf, ptcp., present : i Co 72*', 
Ga 1*, He 9^; pi., Eo S^s, i Co 322 (Cremer, 309).t 

ci'-K^xuci), [in LXX for p7n , etc. ;] to strengthen : in spiritual 
sense, Lk 22 1*^]; pass., Ac 91^ (Eec. ivicrxvaev, became strong, as in 
LXX, Ge 1210 482, al.).t 

iyKdQiTOii (Eec. iyK-), -ov «€>a^tVO' \}^ LXX: Jb 319 {-^r^'H), 
19^2*;] suborned to lie in wait, lying in wait : as subst., Lk 202''. t 

tei'Kaii'ia (Eec. cyx-), -wv, ra (•< ev, xaivds), [in LXX for HSjrj , 

II Es 616.17^ Ne 1227, Da th 32 (and cf. £yKamo-/xo^9, Nu 710, al., -lo-t?, 
Nu 788)*;] dedication (anniversary of the cleansing of the Temple 
from the defilements of Antiochus Epiphanes) : Jo 1022.t 

\ iv-KOLivllin (Eec. iyK-, v.s. cv), [in LXX: {to renew) i Ki lli*, 
II Ch 158, Ps 50(51)10 (Br-m pi.); {to dedicate) De 20*, 11 Ch V (-^jn); 
Is 1611 411 4516 (aliter in Heb.), Si 33 (36)«, i Mac 43«. **' " 51, n Mac 
229*;] 1. to innovate (Eust.). 2. to renew (LXX ut supr.). 3. to 
initiate, inaugurate, dedicate (LXX ut supr.) : SLadr^K-qv, He 918 ; 686v, 
ib. 1020 (Cremer, 323).t 

**f iy-KaK4u>, -w (LTr., iyK-; Eec. iKK-; cf. WH, Notes, 157 f.; 
<KaKos, cowardly), [in Sm. : Ge 27*^, Nu 21^, Pr 311, Is 7i«*;] to lose 
heart : Lk I81, 11 Co 4I' i«, Ga 6^, Eph 31^, 11 Th 31^ (Cremer, 330).+ 



MANUAL QEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 155 

* ei/-KaToiKe'u, -w (Eec. iyK-, v.s. e'v), to dwell among : seq. eV, 
II Pe 28.t 

t liz-KauKdofiai (Eec. iyK-, V.S. iv), -S/iai, [in LXX : Ps 51 (52)^ 
96(97)7 {bbn hithp.); Ps 73(74)* (zsm); Ps 105(106)^7 (natzr)*;] to 
take pride in, glory in : seq. iv, ii Th I'^.t 

** €i'-ice>'Tpi^(i) (Eec. iyK; v.s. ev; ■< /ccvrpt^co, to graft), [in LXX: 
Wi 16^^*;] to ingraft, graft in: fig., c. ace. pers., Eo lli7, 19,23, 24_f 

*^ iv-KOTTf] (Eec. iyK-, v.s. iv; T, ekk-), -^s, 17 (<^ ey/coTTTw) ; 1. 
an incision, a cutting, break. 2. Metaph., an interruption, a 
hindrance : i Co 9'2.t 

* cf-KOTTTO) (Eec. cy/<-, v.s. cV; and in i Pe, I.e., iKK-); 1. to cut into 
(as in breaking up a road), hence, 2. to hinder : c. ace, Ac 24*, 

I Th 218 ; c. inf., Ga 5^ ; seq. toC, c. inf., Eo 15^2 . ^-^ ^^'^ g j^f ^^ i Pe 37 1 

* iv-Kpivii) (Eec, iyK-, v.s. iv), to reckon among : cavrous, 11 Co lO^^.t 
**ei'Kuos (Eec. iyK; V.S. iv), -ov {<^kvw, to conceive), [in LXX: 

Si 42^'^ * ;] pregnant, big with child : Lk 2^.t 

ivvia, ol, al, rd, indecl., nine: Lk 17^7. iyo'-qKovTa i., Mt 18^2,13^ 
Lkl5*.7.t 

ivvivr\KoyTa, V.S. cv€v-. 

ccfc^s, V.S. ev€09. 

^.'-I'eiJu), [in LXX: Pr 6^3 lO^o (pp). Si 27^2 A*;] to nod to, 
make a sign to : c. dat. pers., Lk l''2.t 

lK»'oia, -as, t) «voSs), [in LXX: Pr 1* 2^^ 321 4^ 52 812 I622 IB^s 
197 23*' 19 247 (ni^fp , etc.), Wi 21*, Da th Su 28 * ;] l. thifiking, considera- 
tion. 2. a thought, purpose, design: He 4^2, i Pe 41. t 

Syn. : ivdvfiTjai^, q.v. (Cremer, 439). 
** €y-yoi>.os, -ov, [in LXX: Si, prol.12*;] 1. lawful, legal (MM, 
^a:;j9., xiii) : Ac 19^^. 2. Of persons, (a) law-abiding; (b) under law : 
i. Xpi.a-Tov, in relation to Christ, i Co 921 (Cremer. 435). t 
*t eyvu-)(^a,, V.S. evi'w;(os. 

€vv{)xo<i, -ov {<C,vv$), [in LXX: iii Mac 5**;] (in cl. poet.; prose 
in late Gk. only) nightly. Neut., adverbially, evru^a (Eec. -x^v), by 
night : Mk l^^.t 

€i/-oiK€'w, -w, [in LXX chiefly (2^35) for 2.12^;] to dwell in; 
mietaph., seq. ev, c. dat. pers : 6 ^co's, 11 Co 61" ; t. TrveC/xa, Eo Bn, 

II Ti 11*; 6 Xoyos, Col 3l«; ttiVt-s, II Ti 1^; d/^apria, Eo 7i7.t 

t cV-opKi'tu, [in LXX : Ne I32'* A {'SJIXO hi.) * ;] to adjure : c. dupl. 
ace. (like opKL^w, q.v.), {-/tas t. Kvptov, i Th 527. t 

*6foTT|s, -r]To<;, f) (<^£rs), unity, unanimity : Eph 4^'i3.t 
iv-o%Kini, -u) (<; 0^X09), [in LXX for nbu ;] to trouble : c. ace, 
He 121^ Pass., seq. dwo, Lk 6i8.t 

cfoxos, -Ol' { = iv€x6fjLevos), (in LXX for jTtiyi hi., etc.;] 1. held in, 
bound by: c. gen. (cl. c. dat.), SouXeias, He 2i^. 2. In law-phrases ; 

(a) Zia6Ze to a charge or action (cl. c. dat., of crime) : c. dat., of the 
tribunal (MM, Exp., xiii), Mt 521. 22 ; geq. cis (Field, Notes, 4 f.), ib. 22 ; 

(b) 0. gen., of the punishment (Ge 26ii) : Oavirov, Mt 26««, Mk 14*'>* ; 

(c) c. gen. (cl. c. dat., rarely c. prep.; MM, Exp., xiii), of the crime 



156 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

(ii Mac 13") : Mk S^^ ; (d) c. gen., of the thing injured, guilty (absol., 
in cl.) : I Go 11^7, Ja 2^" (cf. Is 54^7 ; DB, ii, 268a).t 

t ^t'-irepi-iraTew, -w (Eec i/jiir-, v.s. €v), [in LXX : Le 26^2 Jb 17^ al. 
{"^bn hithp.), Wi 19-^ ;] to walk about in or among : seq. iy., dat. pers., 
II Co 61" (Lxx).t 

iv-^v4u>, -!L (Rec. e/xTT-, v.s. e.-), [in LXX : De 20^6, Jos W^«- ll^i' ^* 
(ptcp. neut., for 12^53 , riDl^rj), Wi 15^^ * ;] 1. to breathe on. 2. to 
breathe; (a) absol. ; (b) c. gen. part. : fig., aTreiXT}? k. cftovov, Ac 9^.+ 

tl^raXfia, -tos, to « ivriXXw), [in LXX : Jb 23ii (-nCTX) ^2, Ig 291' 

(mya), 55^ (aliter in Heb.)*;] a precept: pi., Mt IS^d^xx)^ Mk 7^ 

Col 222.+ 

fiyra^idlu), [in LXX: Ge 502 (cj3n; cf. cvra^iao-TTys, ib., for Xgh; 

V. Deiss., 5S, 120 f. ; MM, Exp., xiii)*;] a kolvyJ word (Deiss., L^^, 723), 
to prepare for burial : Mt 26^2^ Jq 19401 

*t ei'Ta<^ia(Tfi6s, -ov {<^ivTa(f)id^w), preparation for burial : Mk 14^, 
Jo 127.+ 

ei'-Te'Wu, [in LXX, as in NT (and mostly in Hdt.), always mid., 
chiefly for mS pi. ;] -o/Aai, to covimand, enjoin, instruct : seq. ircpi, 
He 1122; c inf^ Mt 197. c ^at. pers., Ac 12; ovtu><s, Ac IS''^; KaOm, 
Jo 14" (€',.ToXV tStoKcv, WH) ; seq. Xiywv, Mt 17^ ; c. inf., Jo 8 (^l ; Tva, 
Mk 1334 ; c. acc rei, Mt 282o, Mk 10^ Jo IS^*' ^^ ; seq. -n-epl, c. gen. pers., 
Mt 4" and Lk 410 (lxx). SiaO^Krjv i. Trpo's, c. acc. pers.. He 9201LXX) (cf. 
Si 453).+ 

Sl'jV. : KeXevto, to command, of verbal orders in general ; -n-apay- 
yiXXio, to charge, esp. of the transmitted orders of a military com- 
mander; hriXXw points rather to the contents of the command (v. 
Thayer, s.v. KeAei'co). 

ci/TeCGcc, adv. {<^(.v6iv), [in LXX chiefly for HTQ;] 1. of place, 

hence : Lk 4^ IS^i, Jo 2^6 73 1431 i836 ; i^ ^^i I. (for cl. hOev k. evOev), 
on this side and on that, on each side, Jo 19^^; similarly, i. koI iKcWev, 
Re 222. 2. Of time, thereupon. 3. Causal; hence, therefore: Ja 4^+ 
** ec-Tcu^is, -€0)5, 17 (■< ei'Tu^x"''<"> ^I-V-)' ^^ LXX: II Mac 4^*;] 
1. a lighting upon, meeting tvith. 2. conversation. 3. a petition (in 
this sense common in tt. ; cf. Deiss., BS, 121 f., 146; MM, Exp., 
xiii): iTi4^; pi., ib. 2^.+ 

Syn. : StT^o-ts Cq.v.). 

ei-Tiixos, -ov «;ti/at)), [in LXX for lin , etc.;] honoured, prized, 
precious: of persons, Lk 72, Phi 22^; compar., Lk 14^; of things, 
metaph., At'^os, i Pe 2*'MLXX).t 

ivToKr\, -^9, rj (<^ ivreXXo), q.v.), [in LXX chiefly for n]yQ ; in pi. 
freq. in Pss for CTIpS;] 1. generally, a cJiarge, injxLuction, order, 
command: Lk 1529, Jq iq^^ 11" 12*9.50 1431^ Ac 171^, Col 410 ; 
€. crapKivr], He 7^^' ^^. 2. Esp. of religious precepts and command- 
ments ; (a) of God's commandments : in OT, Mt 15^ 223«' ^s. i^, Mk 



MANUAL GHEEK LEXICON dF THE NEW TESTAMENT 157 

78,9 105,19 1228,81^ Eph 215, He 919; esp. of the decalogue, Mt 5i» 
19l^ Mk IQi^ Lk 1820 235«, Eo T^-^^ 139, gph 6^ ; of God's command- 
ments in general, Lk 1«, i Co 7^9, i Jo 23-8 322-24 421 52, 3^ Re 12^7 1412 ; 
collectively, rj i. (cf. t. Ipyov t. <?eoS, Jo 629), i Ti B^S 11 Pe 22^ 32; (b) 
of things commanded Christ by the Father : Jo 12*9, so 1431 1510 • (<,) 
of the precepts of Christ: Jo IS^* 1415,21 1510,12^ i Co 14^7. 3. 
Phrases : seq. Tm, Jo 13^* 15^2, i Jo 323 421^ „ Jq e • ^..^X^ (as) 
TrapaySatVeiv, Mt 153 . d^^^povv, Mt 15« Eec. ; TrjpeTv, Mt 19^^ Jo ISi", 
al. ; TTOulv, I Jo 52 ; S(SoVat, Jo 11^^ ; Xafifidveiv, Jo 10^8, II Jo * ; ^xetv, 
Jo 1421, He 75 ; e. KOL BiKano/xAXTa, Lk 1'' ; ivToXal avOpuiirtav (of Jewish 
tradition), Tit 1^*; L Kaiv-q, Jo 133", j Jq 2^, n Jo^.t 

* cVtottios, -ov {<C tottos), 0/ a place, resident : Ac 21^2. f 

€rr(5s «ev), adv., [in LXX: Jb I820, Ps 38 (39)3 108 (109)22, 
Ca 310 ; 6, TO, rk €., Ps 102 (103)^, Is 1&^\ Da th lO^^, Si 192«, i Mac 
4*^*;] within: c. gen., c. vfiwv, within you (i.e. in your hearts, 
E, txt.), or among you (E, mg.), Lk I721 (cf. Field, Notes, 71 ; Thayer, 
8.V.; ICC, Lk, I.e.; Dalman, Words, 145 ff.); rh i., Mt 232«.t 

iy-TpiiTO), [in LXX for yjs ni., D^S ni., etc.;] to turn about; 
metaph., put to shame: c. ace, i Co 4^*; pass., 11 Th 3^*, Tit 2^; 
mid., to reverence: c. ace. pers. (cl. c. gen.), Mt 213'^, Mk 12*, Lk 
182.* 2013, He 129 (cf. MM, Exp., iii, xiii).t 

* ^c-Tpe'<|>u, to train up, nurture; pass., metaph., tois Xoyots t. 
TTio-Tetos, I Ti 4''.t 

t €(/-Tpo|xos, -OV, [in LXX: Da th 10" (IV) hi.); e. yiyveo-Oai, Ps 
17 (18)7 76 (77)18 (ts^y-,)^ wi 17i9, i Mac 132*;] trembling ivith fear 
(Plut.) : Ac 732 1629, He I221 (cVp-, WH, mg.).t 

cV-TpoTrVi, -%, tJ, [in LXX: Jb 203, pg 34 (35)26 43 (44)15 68 
(69)7.19 70 (71)13 108 (109)29 (n?sb5)*;] 1. c. gen. pers., respect, 

reverence (Soph., Polyb., al.). 2. Absol., shame (Hipp.) : i Co 6* 
I534.+ 

£V-Tpu<t>(ia), -S, [in LXX : Is 552 574 (j^y hith.), Hb l^o (chp hith.), 
IV Mac 8^, etc. ;] to revel in : Iv t. dTrarais, 11 Pe 2^* (v. Mayor, in l.).t 

^►'-TUYxacw, [in LXX : Da th 6^2 as; (^-^p) , Wi 820 1628, „ Mac 
225 436 612 1539^ ni Mac 637; seq. Kard, 1 Mac 832 io6i,63,64 1125*.] 
1. to fall in with. 2. to meet xoith in order to converse. 3. to 
petition, make petition : c. dat. pers., seq. virip c. gen. pers., Ac 25"-''* 
(cf. Field, Notes, 140), He 72^, Eo 827.34 (^^jj^ not expressed); seq. 
Kara, against : Eo II2 (cf. Ivrcu^t?, V7r€p-tvri;yxava)).t 

* Ik-TuXio-aw, to wrap up (LS), roll or coil about {DCG, ii, 227*, 
507*) : c. ace. et dat., Mt 27*9 {iv, Tr. [WH], cf. similar sentence in 
TT.; MM, Exp., xiii), Lk 23*3. p^gs., Jo 207.t 

iv-TUTr6o>, -S> «TvVos), [in LXX for niDS , Ex 3639 (3930) A*;] 

to imprint, engrave : pass, ptcp., c. dat., 11 Co 37. t 

** iy-ufiplioi, [in OT (Al.), Le 24ii*;] to insult, mock at: He 1029.t 
ivutrvidloi (<^ ivvirvLov), [in LXX, as in NT, -ofmi, depon., chiefly 
for D^n ;] to dream : iwTrvLots i., Ac 2i7 (l^^) ; pres. ptcp., Ju 8,t 



158 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

ivurrfiof, -ov, to « vttvos), [in LXX chiefly for Dl^sq ;] a dream : 
pi., Ac 2i'.t 

tekwTTios, -ov «wi/'), [in LXX for nj^l , etc.;] face to face, in 
sight (Theocr. ; aproi «., Ex 25'^) : neut., cviottiov, in vernacular, with 
force of prep, c. gen. [in LXX for ^jpb , ^^^^ - etc., cf. Dalman, 

Words, 31 f., 209 f., and Deiss., BS., 213], in NT, most freq. in Lk, 
Ac, Ee, never in Mt, Mk, before, in the presence, of : Lk 1^^ 4", Ac A^^ 
6^, Ee 1* 2^'*, al. ; esp. c. KvpCov (Oeov), in the sight of God, or with 
God as witness or as judge, Eo 14^2, i Co 1^9, i Ti 2\ Ja 4io, i Pe 
S\ al. 

'Ev6% (Heb. Cyi3N), 6, Enos (Ge 426) . Lk 338.+ 

t efwTiJofiai (<^ots), depon. mid., [in LXX chiefly for ]7S hi.;] to 
give ear to, hearken to : c. ace, Ac 2^*,+ 

"E.'oJx (Heb. ^i3q), 6, Enoch (Ge 5^^) ; Lk S^^, He 11^, Ju^^.t 

ii, V.8. CK. 

il, 01, at, rd, indecl., six: Mt 17^ Lk 13^*, al. 
il-ayyiWo), [in LXX chiefly for IDD pi. ;] to tell out, 2>foclaivi . 
I Pe 29 [Mk 16, " shorter conclusion "] (Cremer, 29).+ 

+ ^l-ayopd^o), [in LXX : Kaipov vyncis efayopa^cre (]3T)i D^- LXX TH 

2^*;] 1. to redeem, ransovi (esp. of slaves): metaph., Ga 3^^ 4^. 2. 
to buy up; mid., to buy up for oneself: t. Kaipov, Eph 5^^, Col 4^ 
(Cremer, 60).+ 

c^-dyw, [in LXX chiefly for XSJ hi. ;] to lead out : c. ace, Mk 
1520, Jo 103^ Ac 519 736 1637,39. ggq. I^o), Lk 24^0; cV, Ac 7*0 12i" 13^^ 
He 89 ; €«, Ac 2138.+ 

t^-aipe'w -u, [in LXX chiefly for bxj hi. ;] to take out : c. ace, 
6^9a\fj.6v, Mt 529 18^; mid. (a) to take out for oneself, choose : Ac 26^'' 
(Thayer, s.v. ; Page, Ac, I.e., but v. infr.) ; {b) to deliver : Ac 
710, 34 (LXX) 1211 2327 2617 (EV, but V. supr.), Ga 1*.+ 

^^ai'pu), [in LXX for yD2 , tZTT hi., ms ni., IID , 1^3 pi., etc.;] 
to lift up, lift off the earth, remove : 1 Co 5i3(Lxx)_-t- 

* c^-aiWo), -w, to ask from ; mid., to ask for oneself, demand : 
aor., i^TTqaaro, c. acc. {obtained yotc by asking, E, mg.), Lk 22*1 (v. 
Field, Notes, 76 ; Cremer, 73).+ 

^^at^k-T]? (WH, i^€4>vr]<;, exc. Ac 226 . y App., p. 151, and cf. 
M, Pr., 35), adv. «a</)i'w), [in LXX chiefly for DXriQ;] suddenly: 
Mk 1336, Lk 213 939, Ac 93 226.+ 

f H-aKo\ov6i^, -w, [in LXX: Am 2*, Je 22 (inx "^bn). Is 56^^ 

(nJES), Jb 3P (nns ni.), Si 52, Da LXX th, 3'"!'*;] to follow, follow tip 
(in various senses) : metaph., 11 Pe 1^6 22' 1^.+ 

^^aK(5aioi, -ai, -a, six hundred : Ee 13^8 I420.+ 

^|-a\€i<j)u, [in LXX for TOM, Le 14-*2, al. ; metaph., nna, nnC!', 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 159 

etc. ;] 1. to plaster, wash over (LXX). 2. to wipe off, wipe out : 
SaKpvov, Ee 7^*^ 21*; metaph., y(:Lp6ypa(f>ov, Col 2^*; t. ovofia, seq. iK, 
Ee 35 (MM, Exp., xiii) ; pass., d/mprtou (£^aXt</)6^. at, WH), Ac 3^^ (of. 
Ps 50(15)" 108(109)13, Is 4326, Si 462o (i^. ATrak-), in Mac 2i«).t 

^|-d\\ojxai, [in LXX for bbp (Hb l^), etc.;] to leap up : Ac 38. t 

* e^-ai'doraais, -ews, r/ (■<[ iiavLorTrjfii), a rising again : €K T. vinpuiv, 
Phi 311 (Cremer, 308).t 

^C-am-xe'XXa), [in LXX : Ge 2^, Ps 103 (104)^4 131 (132)^7 146 (147)8 
(nns hi.) ; Ps 111 (112)* (n"l7) * ;] l. trans., to cause to spring up (LXX). 
2. Intrans. (as drnTcAXw, Ge 3^8^^ to spring up : Mt 13^, Mk 4^.+ 

cl-acttrTTjfjii, [in LXX chiefly for Dip ;] 1. trans., ^0 raise v/p: cnrepfxa 
(cf. Ge 388), Mk 12i9, Lk 20^8. 2. In 2 aor. act., intrans., to rise : 
Ac I55.+ 

€|-airaT(£(i>, -w, strengthened form of a-rraTdu), [in LXX : Ex 8^^ '2*' 
(bbn hi.),. Da TH Su56*;] to deceive: c. ace, Eo 7^^ IG^s, i Co 3i8, 
II Co 113, n Th 23; pass., i Ti 2i*.t 

t i^diTiva = iiaiTLvr}^, i$aL(f>vr]^ (<!•▼.)» [in LXX for DXriD , etc. ;] 

suddenly: Mk 98.t 

+ ii-airopioj, -Q>, [in LXX, pass., for ]1B , Ps 87 (88)1^ * ;] so in NT, 
depon. pass., to be utterly at a loss, be in despair : absol. (as Ps, I.e.), 
II Co 48; TOV (rjv, II Co 18.t 

^l-airo-oTcXXw, [in LXX freq., chiefly for nbtS' pi. ;] 1. to send 
forth : c. ace. pers., Ac V^ 12^^ Ga 4* ; t. i-n-ayyeXiav, Lk 24*^ ; t. -rrvevfAa, 
Ga 4^; [t. K-^pvy/xa, Mk 16, "shorter conclusion," WH;] seq. cis, 
Ac 22^1 ; pass., 6 Xoyos, Ac 13^". 2. to send away : c. ace. pers., seq, 
€-s, Ac 93"; seq. Ia;s, Ac 1122; q j^f,^ Ac 17^*; K€v6v, Lk 1" 20i«>".t 

tll-apTito «a/3Ttos), [in LXX: Ex 28^ (innpu.)*;] 1. to com- 
plete, finish :'t. r]p.ipa^, Ac 21*. 2. to furnish, supply : pass., 11 Ti 3^^ 
(for exx., V. MM, Exp., xiii; Cremer, 651). t 

til-atrrpdiTTw, [in LXX: Nu 33 (p-Q), Ez 1* {npb hithp.) 1' 
Da LXX 10^ (^^P)*J] io flash like lightning, gleam, be radiant: 
I/i,aTio-/Ads, Lk 92^. t 

*^|-auTf]s (a KOivr) word, = c^ auTTjs t. (Lpa's), at oncc, forthwith: 

Mk 625, Ac 1033 1111 2132 2330, Phi 223.t 

el-cyeipw, [in LXX for irW ni., hi., etc. ;] to raise up : Eo 9^'^ (cf. 
ICG, in 1.) ; from the dead, i Co 6i*.t 

l|-cifjii « ttfjii), to go forth : Ac 13*2 n^^ 20^ ; seq. cm, c. ace, 
Ac 27*3.t 

^|-€\^YX«-, [in LXX : Pr 2429 (30"), Mi 43, Is 2* (nS-" hi.), Wi 12^^, 
IV Mac 2^2 *;] io convict : Ju l^ Eec. (for Ikiyx'^, WH, q.v.).t 

^|-e\K(i>, [in LXX : Ge 3728 ("jpara), etc. ;] to draw out or away : 
metaph., imo t. itnOvixias, Ja 1^* (v. Mayor, in l.).t 

*t c^^pafia, -Tos, TO (<[ i^epdoi, to evacuute, disgorge), a vomit : 
II Pe 222 (Lxx)^t 

^l-cpauvdoj (Eec. i^epevvdo}), -w, [in LXX for "ipn , 1X3 , etc. ;] to 
search out, search carefully : seq. Trepi, i Pe l^^.t 



160 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

i^€p€uvd<i>, V.S, i^epawdw. 

^^-^pXO|Jiai, [in LXX chiefly and very freq. for NS'', also for 

Nia, nby, etc.;] depon., to go, or come out of: Mt 10^\ Mk p5, 
Jo 13«o, al. ; c. inf., Mt ll^, Mk 321, lA 726. 2e^ Ac 20\ Ee 20^; id. seq. 
cVi, Mt 26^5^ al.; tk, Mk pS; Tva, Ee 62; i. seq. « (cl. c. gen. loc), 
Mk 52, Jo 430, al.; c^w, c. gen., Mt 2117, Mk 14«8, Ac IG^a, He IS^^; 
(l7r(^, Mk 1112, Lk 9^ Phi 41*; iK€W€v, Mt I521, Mk 61, Lk 9*, al.; of 
demons expelled, seq. cV (aTrd), c. gen. pers., Mk 125,26 58^ j^^ 4.35^ ^j . 
of prisoners released, Mt 52^, Ac 16*^; ptcp., i$€\6wv, c. indie, of verb 
of departure (cf. Dalman, Wards, 20 f.), Mt 8^2 1521 24^, Mk 16\ 
Lk 2239, Ac 129>i^ al. Metaph., (a) of persons : 11 Co S^^, i Jo 2^^; of 
birth or origin, Mt 2" (^^^), He 7^ (cf . Ge S5^^) ; of escape from danger, 
CK T. xttpos avTMv, Jo 10^9 ; of public appearance, i Jo 4^ ; (b) of things : 
Mt 24'-'' ; esp. of utterances, reports, proclamations : cfiwvi^, Ee IG^'^ 19*; 
<f,^tJLrj, Mt 926, Lk 41*; dKOTj, Mk 128; x6yos, Jo 2123; 86y^a, Lk 2^ (cf. 

Si-t^epXo/JiaL) . ♦ 

€^-€o-Ti « elfjJ), impers. verb., it is permitted, lawful : Mk 2^*, 
Ac 83" (B, mg.), I Co 1023; c. inf., Mt 122.10,12 144 1526 193 2217 27«, 
Mk 34 1214, Lk 62' 9 143, Jo 510 ; seq. a4cc., Mk 226, Lk 6* 20^2; c. dat. 
pers. et inf., Mt 201*, Mk 6I8 IO2, Jo 183i, Ac I621 2137 222^ (inf. under- 
stood), I Co 612 ; ^^oV (so. iarC), Ac 229, II Co 12* ; i$ov 7,v, Mt 12*.t 

^|-€Tci^a) (<€TaCa, (rare), to examine), [in LXX : De 13i*'i5' I918, 
I Gh 289 A {•aj'\'i), Ps 10 (11)5. 6 (irra), Wi 63, Si 321, al. ;] to examine 
closely, inquire carefully {of) : seq. irepC (c. aKpi^m), Mt 2^; seq. n's, 
Mt 1011 ; c. ace. pers., Jo 21i2.t 

SYN. : avaKpiV'j), ipavvdoi (v. DCG, U, 594^). 

€^-r)Y^ofjiai, -ovfjLaL, [in LXX chiefly for ISO pi. ;] to lead, show 
the way; metaph., to unfold, narrate, declare: c. ace. rei, Lk 243^, 
Ac 2119; c. dat. pers., Ac 10^; Oeov (understood), Jo li^; seq. oo-a, 
Ac 1512 ; KaOm, Ac 15i*.t 

ii^Kovra, oi, al, ra, indecl., sixty: Mt 138.23, Mk 48.20, Lk 24i3, 
I Ti 59, Ee 113 126 1318 1 

€^^s, adv. «€xa>), in order, successively, next: tt) e. rjfi^pa, Lk 
937 ; €1' Tw c. (sc. )(p6v<D), soon after, Lk 711 ; t^ £. (sc. rjfx.epa), Ac 21i 
2517 27i8.t 

t^|-r,x^o>, -w, [in LXX: Jl 3 (4)i* (]ian). Si 40i3, iii Mac 32*;] to 

sound forth (as a trumpet, or thunder; v. M, Th., I.e.): pass., i Th 

18.t 

l^is, -€0)9, rj (^exw), [in LXX, cf. Si, prol. ^;] habit, use, ex- 
perience : He 51*. t 

€|-icrTTi|ULi (also in Hellenistic -to-Tavw, Ac 89), [in LXX for HU , 
etc. (29 words in all);] 1. causal in pres., impf., fut., 1 aor., to put 
out of its place ; metaph., e. Tim (^tpivwv (Eur.), to drive one out of his 
senses, hence, absol., to confound, amaze : c. ace. pers., Lk 2422, Ac 
89.11. 2. Intr. in pass, and mid., also in 2 aor., pf., plpf. act., seq. Ik 
or c. gen., to stand aside from, retire from; esp. t. (fyptvwv, to lose 



MANUAL GEEBK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 161 

one's senses (Eur.), hence, absol. ; (a) to be beside oneself, be mad : Mk 
32^, n Co 5^2 (opp. to crw<f)pov€tv) ; (b) to be amazed, confounded : Mt 
1223, Mk 2^2 5*2 6", Lk 2*7 S^s, Ac 2^' ^2 S^s 921 10*5 12i« (Cremer, 309).t 
**t i^-uTxua, [in LXX : Si 7" * ;] to have strength enough, to be quite 
able : c. inf., Eph S^^.t 

c|-o8os, -ov, 6 «68os), [in LXX chiefly for N^ID, also ^n, 

etc. ;] a going out, departure : He II22 ; of death, Lk 9^^ 11 Pe l^*.t 

t €^o\eep€u&) (so best MSS. and WH ; also read -o6p€V(o), [in LXX 
freq. (rare in Gk. writers) for ms ni., hi., etc. ;] to destroy utterly : 
seq. €K T. Xao?, Ac 323(i'XX).t 

t cl-ofioXoyeu, -w, and depon. mid., -co/xat, -ovfxai, [as always in 
LXX chiefly for nT hi.;] 1. act. = cl. 6/xoA.oyea), to profess or agree to 
do (Field, Notes, 75) : Lk 22". 2. Mid., to acknowledge, confess (MM, 
Exp., xiv) : T. dfjLapTta^, Mt 3", Mk l^ Ja 5^"; t. 7rpd$ei<s, Ac 19^^; seq. 
OTL, Phi 2^^ ; c. dat. pers., to make acknowledgment to one's honour, 
to praise, give praise to (as in LXX ; Kennedy, Sources, 118) : Bo 
1411 (LXX) 159 (LXX). geq. 5„, Mt 1125, Lk IO21 (Cremer, 771).t 

H-OV, V.S. €^€(JTl. 

^^opKi^u (later form of iiopKow), [in LXX : Jg I72 (nbx), Ge 24^ 
III Ki 22^" (ntZT hi.) * ;] 1. to administer an oath to (Dem., Polyb., al.). 
2. to adjure : c. ace. pers., seq. Kara, c. gen. (as freq. in magic tt. ; 
MM, Exp., xiv), Mt 26«3.t 

*t €|-opKi<TTiis, -ov, 6 (<[ c^op/ci^w), 1. One who administers an oath. 
2. an exorcist : Ac 19^^ j- 

€'^opu'(raw, [in LXX : Pr 2922 • ^^OaXfxov (-ov's), Jg I621, i Ki II2 
(Ipj) * ;] 1. to dig out, dig up : aTiyqv, Mk 2* ; metaph., 6<l>6aXixov% 

(cf. LXX, 11. c. ; Herod., viii, 116), Ga 41*.+ 

t ^l-ooScviu (Rec. -00) ; T, -divow), -w, [in LXX (with vv. 11. -ow, 

-Oeveu), -divotsi) for 712, n73 , DNQ , U[1, etc.;] to despise, set at 
nought : Mk 9^2 (cf . £^ov^ev£a>).t 

^l-ouScc^b), V.S. t^ovSevco). 
t€^ou0e^'£'w, -oi «ov^«s, q.V.), [in LXX (v.8. c^ovScvcw) : I Ki 23", 
al., and as v.l. for -Stvcw, -6w, -Oevooi*;] to set at nought, despise 
utterly, treat with contempt : c. ace. pers., Lk 18^ 23^^, Eo 143- 1*^, i Co 
16" ; c. ace. rei, Ga 4^*, i Th 520 ; pass., of persons : Mk 912 (T, -oto), 
I Co 6* ; of things : XiOost Ac 4^^ (LXX aTreSoKLfjiaa-av) ; Xoyos, 11 Co 

IQlO ; ra i^ovOeprjfxiva, I Co 128.t 

Syn. : a6€T€(j), KaTa(f>pov€(o (v. DGG, i, 453b). 
+ iioy>e€y6u>, -5, v.l. for -€o> (q.V.) : Mk 9^2 T.t 

^louaia, -as, ^ « l^co-rt), [in LXX : IV Ki 20^3, Ps 113 (114)2 

135 (136)8.9, Is 392, Je 28 (51)28 (nbcrpO), freq. in Da for Aram. 

ItJ^ljr , etc., Wi 10^*, Si 9^3^ ^j .-j i prop., liberty or power to act, 

freedom to exercise the inward force or faculty expressed by Swa/xis 
(q.V.) : I Co 912; i. ^x€tv, ii Th 3*; id. seq. inf., Jo 10^8, i Co 9*'*; c. 
gen. obj., Eo 9^^ ; seq. eVt, c. ace, Ee 22^* ; Trcpi, i Co 73'^. 2. Later 

11 



162 MANUAL GKEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

(cf. Milligan, Th., 114; MM, Exj)., xiv), of the power of right, 
authority: Mt 2P^, Mk ll^s, Lk 20'-; of Messianic authority, Mt 9«, 
Mk 2^", al. ; of apostolic authority, ii Co 10^ 13^** ; of the authority of 
government: Mt 8* 28^*, Ju''^^, Ee 12^", al. ; esp. of judicial authority, 
Lk 2020, Jo 191'^' 1^ 3. Meton., (a) jurisdiction : Lk 23^ (cf. i Mac 6^\ 
Is 39-'); (b) a ruler or magistrate : Eo 13^-^; pi., Lk U^\ Eo 13^, Tit 
3^ ; (c) of supramundane powers (syn. with apxy, Swa/xts, 6p6vos, 
KvpL6Tr,s) : I Co 1524, Eph 121 310^ Col 2i», i Pe 322, al. (Cremer. 236). 

Sl'N. : V.S. 8wa/xis. 

iioudidlu) «€^owta), [in LXX (freq. in Ec) chiefly for lablT;] 
1. to exercise authority (Arist.). 2. Trans., to exercise authority 
over: c. gen. pers., Lk 222^; c, gen. rei, i Co 7*; pass., to he held 
under authority (v. Lft., Notes, 214) : seq. viro, i Co 6^2_t 

iioxf], -^s, V «e^exoj, to stand out), [in LXX for ]B7, Jb 3928*;] 

1. a projection (i. Trerpas, Jb, I.e.). 2. Metaph., eminence, excellence : 
01 Kar (., the chief men, Ac 2523.t 

t^^u^T.ltco, [in LXX: Jg 16i4.2o^ i„ Ki 3^3 (yp^), Jb 14^2 (inr 

ni.)*;] to awaken oiit of sleep (= d<^u7ri/t^(o) : c. ace. pers., Jo 11^^. t 

**t e^-uTTV'os, -ov {<Cvirvo<i), [in LXX: I Es 3^*;] roused out of sleep: 
Ac 162 ".t 

elu), adv. (^t^), [in LXX for pn;] 1. outside, withotit ; (a) 
adverbially : Mt 12^^^ Mk 3^1 11\ Lk 820, Jo 18i«, al. ; c. art., b I, he 
tvho is ivithout; metaph., in pi., oil., of those outside the Church, 

I Co 512, 13^ Col 45 (Lft., in 1.), I Th 4^2; 6 I. S-vSpioiro^, 11 Co 4i« ; al I. 
TToAets, Ac 2611 . (^) as prep. c. gen. : Lk 13^3, Ac 21^, He 13^' 12. 2. 
After verbs of motion ; (a) adverbially, forth, out : Mt b^^ 26'''^, 
Mk 1468, Lk 22«2, Jo 6=^7 19*> i^ Ac 9*0, al. ; {h) as prep. c. gen., out of: 
Mt 2117, Mk 1119 128, Lk 42«, Ac 7^8^ He 13", al. 

elwGei/, adv. (^e^w; opp. to €(T<jiO(v), [in LXX for pn;] 1. prop, 
(in answer to the question. Whence ?), from without : Mk 718. 2. 
More often (= l|«; cf. Bl., § 25, 3), without: Mt 232'. 28, Mk 718, 

II Co 7^; TO £., Mt 2325, Lk 1139.40. ^j i i Yi 3^, Mk 411 (WH, mg.); 
6 €. KoV/ios, I Pe 33 ; iKJ3dXX€iv I, Ee II2. As prep. c. gen. : Mk V\ 
Ee 112 1420 (cf. Robertson, Gr., 548).t 

c|-w3£'w, -w, [in LXX chiefly for m3 hi. ;] 1. to thrust out : 
Ac 74^. 2. to drive out of the sea, drive on shore : Ac 27^^ (WH, txt., 

eK(Tajo"ai).T 

+ elwTepos, -a, -ov (compar., from e^w ; opp. to ia-taTepos), [in LXX 

chiefly for ]i2:^n ;] outer : o-kotos, Mt 812 22i3 253o,t 

loiKtt, pf . with pres. sense, [Jb 63. 25 ;*] Iq Jjq HJ^g .- q. dat., Ja 1"' 23.t 
loprdj^o) {<:^iopTrj), [in LXX for 33n;] to keep festival : i Co 58. t 
^opTTJ, -r}s, 17, [in LXX for an (chiefly), IITI^;] a feast, festival: 

Lk 242, Jo 51 64 737, Col 216 ; ^ L rod Trdo-xa, Lk 24i, Jo 13i ; t. A^vfjooy, 
Lk 221; ri a-K-qvoir-qyCa, Jo 72 (Deiss., LAE, 116); ev T. c., Mt 265, 
Mk 142, Jo 445 711 1220 (,7^a^ ,'^ 1.)^ ib. 223 . ,.5 ^. I, (yoy ^/^g f^^^^^ 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 163 

Jo 132»; dva^atVetv, IpxeoOai £ts t. €., Jo 4« T^' !« ll^e 1212; ^5 f 
/-t€o-ovo-r??, Jo 71*; Kari e. (ai each feast), Mt 27", Mk 15«, Lk 23^^ 
E, mg. ; T. e. TTOtciv, Ac 18^^ ; Kara TO (.6o<i T^s I., Lk 2^2 t 

^TT-aYYcXia, -as, 17 « c'TrayyeXA-to), [in LXX : Ps 55(56)8 (niSD), 

etc.;] 1. a summons (as Attic law-term, Dem., al.). 2. a promise 
(Dem., Arist., al.) : Ac 232^; esp. in NT of the divine promises, Ac 7^", 
Ro 414= i« 9^ Ga 31"' 18' 21 423, He8« liy-i", 11 Pe 3^; c. inf., He 4^; 
ytVcrat, etc., c. dat. pers., Ac 2^9, Ro 4^3, Ga 3i« ; seq. Trpos, Ac 13^2 26'' ; 

iirayyiktcrdai t^v i., I Jo 2"^ ; ^X^'*' ei'ayyeAias, He 7^, II Co 7^ ; eivat iv 
eVayyeAta, Eph 62; tj yij tJJ<; e.. He 11^ tA reKva t^s e., Ro 9^, Ga 428; 
T. TTvev/Att T^s €. T. aytov, Eph 1^^ ; ai Sm^j/Kai ti}s c., Eph 2^2 ; rj i. t. Oeov, 
Ro 420 ; pi., II Co 12*>; ai i. t. TraTcpwv, Ro 15^; c. gen. obj., t. ^co^s 
(v. Dalman, Words, 103), i Ti 4^; t. Trapoucrtas airov, 11 Pe 3"*; ^ar 
cVayyeAtav, Ac 13^^, Ga 3^^, II Ti 1^ ; 8t' €7rayy£Aias, Ga 3^^ j crv/i/xtVoxa 
ttJs £., Eph 3^ ; Ao'yos cVayyeAias, Ro 9^. By meton. (cf. cAtti's), of a 
promised blessing : Lk 24*9, Ac l^^ Ga 3^2, He 612. i5, 17 iqsg his, 33, 39 . 
c. gen. epexeg., Ac 2=^^^ Ga S^^, He 9^^ (Cremer, 27).+ 

iTr-ayy£K\<o, [in LXX : Es 4^ (llON), Pr 13^2, Wi 2^3, al. ;] 1. to 
announce, j^^oclaim. 2. (a) to inomise ; (b) to profess. Mid., also 
freq. in both these senses ; (c) to promise : c. dat. pers.. He 6^^ j q 
ace. rei, Ro 42\ Tit I2 ; c. dat pers. et ace. rei, Ja 1^2 2^, 11 Pe 21^ ; 
cVayyeAtav, I Jo 2^^ ; C. inf., Mk 1411, Ac 75 ; seq. Aeywv, He 1226 . ptcp., 
He 1023 1111 . (^^ ^0 profess : Oeoae/SeLav, I Ti 210 ; yt^c^a-ty, ib. 621. p^gs., 
Ga 319 (cf. Trpo-tTrayyeAAw ; and V. Cremer, 26).+ 

* eTT-dyyeXii.a, -to';, to «; eVayysAXw), a promise : II Pe I'* 3^3 f 

iTT-dyij}, [in LXX for Ni2 hi., etc. (29 words in all) ;] to bring upon : 
c. dat. et ace, 11 Pe 2^; eaurois i. (for cl. mid., v. Mayor, in 1.), ib. 2i; 
e. TO alfia (cf. Ge 20^), Ac 528.+ 

*+ cir-aYwi'i^o/xai, depon. ; 1. to contend with (P\ut.). 2. to contend 
for (C.I., 2335, 19) : c. dat. rei, Ju 3.t 

*+ eir-a6poi^aj, to asseinble besides (Plut.) : pass., Lk ll^^.t 

'EiraivcTos (Rec. -to'?), -ov, 6, Epcenetus, a Christian of Rome : 
Ro 16^+ 

cir-aii'e'w, -w, [in LXX for bbn pi., nZVJ pi. ;] to praise : c. ace, 
Ro 1511. I Co 1122 . seq. 5„, Lk 168, i Co II2 ; absol., seq. Sn, i Co ll^' .+ 

€ir-an'os, -ov, 6, [in LXX for H^nri , etc. ;] praise : Ro 22^ 133, 

I Co 45, II Co 818, Eph 1«. 12, 14, Phi 111 48, I Pe 1^ 2^*.+ 

eiT-aipu, [in LXX for HiD2 , Dll , etc. ;] to lift up, raise : t. 
dpT€>ova, Ac 27*"; x"pa?. Lk 2450, i Ti 28; K€<f>a\ds, Lk 2128; 6cf>0a\- 
fiov^, Mt 178, Lk 620 1623 i8i3_ Jo 435 6^ 17^ ; <^wvr?v, Lk 1127, Ac 21* 1411 
2222 . ^ TTTipvav (fig.), Jo 13^8^ Pass., Ac 1^ ; metaph., to be lifted up 
with pride : 11 Co 10^ 112o.t 

cTT-aitrxuVo^iai, [in LXX: Jb 3419 (nct:), Ps 118(119)6 (tZTia), 
Is 129 A (nun)*;] to be ashamed {of): absol., 11 Ti 1^2. q q^qq pers., 

Mk 838, Lk 926; c. ace rei, Ro l^^, 11 Ti 18. 16; cm, c. dat. rei, Eo 621 ; 
c. inf.. He 2i- ; c. ace. pers. et inf.. He 11^6, t 



164 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

e'TT-aiT^w, -i, [in LXX: Ps 108(109)io (bxcr). Si 40^8 *;] to ask 
besides. 2. to beg (as a mendicant; cf. MM, Exp., xiv) : Lk 16^ IS^^ 
(Cremer, 74). t 

^ir-aKoXooGe'w, -w, [in LXX (chiefly metaph.) for IIHH , "-[bn , etc.;] 
to folloiv after ; in NT metaph.; absol. : Mk le^^^J (illustrated by use 
in verifying accounts; v. MM, Exp., xiv; Milligan, NTD, 78); c. dat. 
pers., of sins, i Ti 52" (cf. Ellic. and CGT, in 1.); r. Ixvio-iu, i Pe 2^1; 

epyw dyo^oi, I Ti 5^^.f 

cir-aKoou, [in LXX for lf}:it27, HiV , etc.;] 1. to listen to. 2. to 
hearken to, hear with favour (one's prayer) : c. gen. pers., ii Co 6^ (t-xx^f 

* cTr-aKpodofjiai, -uyfiai, to listen attentively : Ac 16-^ (cf. Page, 
in l.).t 

teir-(£i', conj. (<^e7r€i, q.v., av), later form of eVi^v, after, when: c, 
subjc. pres., Lk ll^^; c. subjc. aor., Mt 28, Lk ll^^.t 

* CTrai'dyKYjS, -es (■<[ dvay/cr;) , only in neut.; 1. eVavayKCS (sc. cctti), it 

is compulsory, necessary. 2. As adv., of necessity : Ac IS^^f 

eTr-av-dya), [in LXX : Za 4^2 {p^^ hi.), Si 172" 2628, „ Mac 921 

12* * ;] to bring up or back (sc. i aCs) ; to ptut out to sea {DB, iii, 63^) : 

Lk 5^'*; intrans., to return: Mt 21^8_f 

* eTT-aca-fxifivriaKcj, to remind again: c. ace. pers., Eo 15^^. t 
cir-afa-irauw, [in LXX, mid., for 013 , ]VUf ni. ;] to refresh, cause to 

rest (upon); mid., to rest upon: metaph., c. dat,, Eo 2^'^; seq. iiri, c. 
ace, Lk 10" (Cremer, 827).t 

eir-ai'-^PXOjjiai, [in LXX for miS^ , etc. ;] to return : Lk 10^^ 

igis.t 

ciT-af-ioTT)ni, [in LXX chiefly for Dip;] to raise up against; 
mid., to rise up against : seq. iiri, c. ace. pers., Mt 102\ Mk 13i2_f 

** eir-ai'-6p0wo-is, -€ws, 17 (<[ iTravopOoo), to Correct, restore ; cf . 11 Mac 
222), [in LXX: i Es 8^2^ j Mac 14^4*;] correction: of life, 11 Ti 3i« 
(cf. MM, Exp., xiv).t 

cTT-dj'w, adv., [in LXX for nby© , !?jr, bjr© , etc.;] above; 

1. adverbially; (a) of place : Lk 11** ; {b) of number, more than : Mk 
14^ I Co 15". 2. As prep. 0. gen. ; (a) of place : Mt 2« 51* 21^ 23i8, 20, 21; 
2737 282, Lk 439 10^9, Ee G* 20^; (6) of pre-eminence: Lk IQi^.iy, 
Jo 38i.t 

* eir-dpaTos, -ov (<^ €7rapao/tat, io imprecate), accursed : Jo 7*^ 
(for exx. from tt., v. MM, ^a;j!J., xiv; cf. Cremer, 108). t 

**eTT-apK^w, -w, [in LXX : i Mac 82« 11^^*;] 1. to be strong enough 
for. 2. to ward off. 3. to aid, relieve : c. dat. pers., i Ti S^"' i" 
(mid., WH, mg.).t 

t^irapxeia (Eec. -x^a, V, Bl., § 3, 5), -as, 7} {<C tirapxos, a prefect), 
[in LXX: Es 4^^ (njiTp), Jth 3" A*;] the jurisdiction of a prefect, a 
province : Ac 23^* 25^t 

*t eirdpxcios, -ov, of a prefect: rj i. (sc. i$ov<Tia) = fVapveia, q.V., Ao 

251 (WH, mg.).t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 165 

cTT-auXis, -cws, v «avXi?), [in LXX for lyn, n^M, (I.e.), etc.;] 
a divelling, habitation : Ac 1^'' (LXX)^f 

t eir-aupiof, adv., [in LXX for IHI^, Ge 30^^, elsewhere, Ex 9^, 
al., for nirin ;] on the morrow : in NT, ^ c. (sc. w^pa), Mt 21^^, Mk 
11^2 Jo 129 Ac 10^ al. 

' 'ETra<t.pas, -a (Bl.,* § 7, 4), 6, Epaphras : Col 1^ 412, Phm^s.t 
*+ €Tr-a<j>pil^a), to foam up : metaph., t. aior;^wa?, Ju^^.t 

*ETra<j)p68iTos, -ov, 6 (i.e. charming) ; Epaphroditus : Phi 2* 4^^.t 

eTr-eyeipw, [in LXX for l^V hi., Dip hi., etc.;] to rouse up, excite : 
c. ace. rei, 8iwyfx6v, Ac 13^" ; i/^vx^s, ib, 142.t 

cTTci, conj. (eVt, €i), lohen, since ; 1. of time, when, after: Lk 7^ 
(Eec., WH, mg.). 2. Of cause, since, because: Mt 1832 21*6 27«, 
Mk 15*2, Lk 134, Jo 1329 1931^ Ac 1346 (Eec, WH, mg.), i Co I412, 
II Co 1118 133, He 52.11 613 917 1111 ; i. oZv, He 21* 4«. With ellipsis, 
otherwise, else: Eo 11«' 22, He 92^; i. ^^a, i Co 510 71*; intro- 
ducing a question, Eo 3«, i Co 141^ 152», He IO2 (cf. iv Mac 133 27, 19 
424.26).+ 

€iT€i-8ii, conj. ; 1. of time, when noto, after that : Lk 71 (WH, 
txt.). 2. Of cause, seeing that, for asnnich as: Lk 11^, Ac 134" (WH, 
txt., EV) 1412 1524, I Co 121.22 1410 1521^ Phi 226.+ 

*cTr6i-8ii-iT6p, con]. , forasmuch as ("a stately compound," freq. in 
cl. and suitable for the formal introduction of Lk) : Lk li.t 

tTT-eiSoi', 2 aor. without pres. in use ; [in LXX chiefly for nXT ;] 
to regard with attention, look upon (in cl., of the gods) ; 1. with a 
view to bless : c. inf., Lk 125 (cf. DB, 136i5). 2. To punish : seq. l-n-i, 

Ac 429.t 

?Tr-eifjii, [in LXX: Ex 822 ds) (tq^), Si 42i9, etc.;] 1. to come 
upon, approach. 2. Of time, to come on or after; mostly as ptcp,, 
iTTLwv, -ovo-a, 6v, next, following : rrj e. (sc. -^/xepa, as freq. in late Gk.), 
Ac 1611 201^^ 2118; yficpu (as usual 'in cl), Ac 726 ; wktl, Ac 23ii.t 

cirei-irep, conj., since indeed: Eo 33" (Eec; eiTrcp, WH).t 
*€Tr-€i<r-aywYi7, -^s, rj, a bringing in besides or in addition (Hipp., 
FIJ, al.) : He 71^ (cf. MM, Exp., xiv).t 

€-nr-€ia-^PXOfxai, [in LXX : I Mac I6I6 (c. dat.) * ;] to come in 
upon: seq. cVi, Lk 2135. + 

etrciTa, adv. of sequence, [in LXX: Nu 19i^A, Is 162, ly Mac 
63*;] thereupon, thereafter, then: Lk 16", Ga I21, Ja 4i4; seq. /lera 
rovTO, Jo 11'; /x€Ta err; Tpla, Ga 11®; Sta Se/carco-crapwv cVoiv, Ga 21 
TrpwTov . . . I., I Co 1546, I Th 41^ He 72 ; Trp6repov . . . t, He 727 
dTrapxr; . . . I., I Co 15^3; ^Ta . . . i., I Co 155.6 (WH, txt.) 
I . . . I, I Co 155-7 (WH, mg.) ; rpirov ... I. (bis), i Co 1228.+ 

iiT-iKeiva, adv. (= eTr' eVelva), [in LXX: Le 2227, Nu 32i9, 
al. (nii^n), etc.;] beyond; c. gen., Ac 7''3(l^^x).+ 

* €ir-eK-Tcii/w, to extend: mid., to stretch forward: c. dat., 
Phi 313.+ 



166 MANUAL GKEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

^TrefSuTTjs, -ov, 6 « iirevSvui), [in LXX for bijrp , Le 8'' A (Aq. 

i-n-eySvfjLa), I Ki 18^ A, II Ki 1318*;] an otiter tunic (EV, coat) : Jo 217.t 
*t ^iT-€i'-8uw = -SwVo) (Hdt.), to put on over; pass. (Plut., al.), to 
have on over, he clothed upon : ii Co 5-»*,t 

^TT-^PXCfjiai, [in LXX for NIZl, "ISJr , etc.;] 1. to come to, arrive, 
come on: seq. ano, c. gen. loc, Ac 14^^ (eTr^X^av; cf. M, Pr., 65; 
Deiss,, BS, 191) ; of tinae, Eph 2*". 2. to come upon (as in Horn.) : of 
calamities, Lk 2126, Ac 82-^ 13*«, Ja 5^ ; of an enemy, Lk 11^2 ; of the 
Holy Spirit, Lk l^s, Ac 1*, [in LXX : ytyvo/xat eVi', Jg 14^, i Ki 11«, al.].+ 
^■n-epwrdo), -w, [in LXX chiefly for bxiS' , also for cni , etc. ;] to in- 
quire of, consult, question : c. ace. pers., Mk 12^*, Lk 2^", al. ; c. dupl. 
ace, Mk 717 1129, Lk 20*«, al. ; c. ace. pers., seq. Aeyw, Mt 12^8, Mk 9^1 ; 
6/, Mk 823, Lk 236, al.; L ^€oV, Ro 102Mlxx), 2. In late Gk., to beg of, 
demand of: c. ace. pers. et inf., Mt 16^ (cf. ipwrdw; and v. Cremer, 
716). 

** iiT-€pi^Tr]iia, -ros, to, [in LXX: Da th 4^* [ubii^), Si 36(33)3*;] 

1. a questio7i, an inquiry (Hdt., Thuc). 2. a demand : 1 Pe 32^ (v. 
ICC, in l.).t 

lTr-€'xa), [in LXX for bin , etc. ; also Si 8^ 31 (34)2, „ ^ac 52^ 9^^, 
al.;] 1. to hold upon. 2. Like 7rape;^a) (as in Hom., al.), to hold out, 
offer : Xoyov C'^rjs, Phi 2^^. 3. to hold or direct towards, sc. vovv ; 
(a) absol., to intend, purpose ; (b) to observe, give attention to (v. MM, 
Exp., xiv) : seq. 7ra>s, Lk 14'^ ; c. dat. pers., Ac 3^, i Ti 4^". 4. to stay, 
wait : Ac I922 (in legal phrase, MM, Exp., l.c.).t 

*iTTripidl<a {<iiTrrjpeia, spiteful abusc), to revile: c. ace. pers., 
Lk 628; c. ace. rei (but v. ICC, in 1.), i Pe S^^.f 

cTTi (before a smooth breathing iir, before a rough breathing icfi'), 
prep. e. gen., dat., ace. (ace. most freq. in NT), with primary sense of 
superposition, on, upon. I. C. gen,, 1. of place, answering the 
question, where? (a) of the place on which, on, upon: i-n-l (t.) y^?, 
Mt 6i*>' 19, al.; t. Ke<^aA^?, i Co lli« ; r. v£<^eAwv, Mt 243o, al. ; like Iv, in 
constr. prcegn. after verbs of motion : ^dkXeiv, Mk 42" ; a-ivdpuv, ib. ^i ; 
tpxea-Oai, He 6^, al. ; fig., i-rr dXrjOeias (MM, s.v. d.) ; of the subject of 
thought or speech, Ga S^^ ; of power or authority, over, TrdiTwv, Eo 9^ : 
T. yd^rj^, Ac 82' ; i^ova-La im, Ee 22^ 20« ; (6) of vicinity, at, by : t. 
daXdaar]?, Jo 6^ ; t. oSoO, Mt 2V^ ; Tov fSdrov, Mk 1226 (v. Swete, in 1.) ; 
c. gen. pers., in the presence of, before, Mt 28i'*, Ac 233^, i Co 6\ al. 

2. Of time, (a) e. gen. pers., in the time of: iirl 'EAtcratou, Lk 42''; i-n-l 
KXav^Lov, Ac 1128; i-jrl 'Af^idOap dpxiepews, when A. was high priest, 
Mk 226; (6) c. gen. rei, at, at the time of: Mt 1", He I2, 11 Pe S^; iirl 
T. irpoo-evxwv fiov (rjfiwv), Eo l^^, Eph l^^, i Th 12, Phm *. IL C. dat., 
of place, answering the question, where? (a) lit., on, upon: Mt 9i'"', 
148, al. ; after verbs of motion (v. supr., i, 1, (a)), Mt 9^6 Ac 8^6 ; 
above, Lk 2338 ; at, by, Mk 1329, Jo 52, Ac 5^, al. ; (b) metaph., upon, 
on the ground of, Lk 44(i'XX)j ^^ the matter of, Mk 6*2 (y_ Swete, in 
1.) ; upon, of, concerning, Ac 5^^' *<* ; of the ground, reason or motive 
(Bl., § 38, 2 ; 43, 3), Mt 18^ 199, Eo 12^2, al. ; c0* c2,/or the reason that. 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 167 

because, Eo 5^^^ u Co 5* ; after verbs of motion, over, Mt IS^^^ jjq jgig^ 
al. ; of a condition (cl.), Eo S^", i Co 9^**; hrl Sval fjutprva-tv (v. Westc. 
on He 910), He lO^s ; of purpose or aim, Eph 2i«, Phi 4^0 ; of authority, 
over, Mt 24*^ Lk 12**; of hostility, c. dat. pers. (cl.), against, Lk 12^2! 
in addition to (cl.), 11 Co 7^^; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Phi 1^ 2^^. III. 
C. ace, 1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, 
whither? {a) lit., upon, over: Mt 1428.29^ Lk b'^^, al. mult.; in NT 
also, answering the question, where? (as c. gen., dat.), Mk 42^ II2, 
Lk 225, Jq ]^32 . i^i ^ ^^^^ A(j lib 21, al. ; of motion to a vicinity, to, 
Mk 162, Ac 8^®, al. ; (6) metaph. (in wh. " the ace. is more widely 
prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., § 43, 1) ; of blessings, evils, 
etc., coming upon one, c. ace. pers., Mt 10^^ 122^, Ac 2^''', Jo 18*, Eph 
5^, al. ; of addition (dat. in cl.), Xvirq hrl Xxnrqv, Phi 22"; eViKoXciv ovo/xa 
i-n-i (v.s. liriKokioi), Ac 15^''^, Ja 2^; KoXfiv cTTt, to call after, Lk 1^^; of 
number or degree: cttI rpts (cl. ek t.), thrice, Ac 10^^ 11^^ ; hrl ttXciov, 
the more, further, Ac 4^^ ii Ti 2i« 3^ (v. also infr., 2, (a)) ; ^<^' ocrov (v. 
infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mt 25*"' *5, Eo IP^; of power, authority, 
control, Lk 1^3, Ac 7^^ Eo 5^*, He 3^ al. ; of the direction of thoughts 
and feelings, unto, towards, Lk T^ 2328, Ac Q^^.**, Eo II22, Ga 49, 
Eph 2\ I Ti 5*, al. ; of purpose, for, Mt 3^ Lk 23*8 . ^y » ^^^^^ (j^gg 
€<^' <L), Mt 2650; of hostility, against, Mt 24^, Mk 32*-26 IQH 138, Lk 9*, 
Jo 13^8^ Ac 75*, I Co 7^®, II Co 123 J Qf reference, concerning, for (cl. 
usually dat.), Mk 9^2 152*, Jo I92*, Eo 49. 2. Of time, (a) during, 
for: Lk 425 (WH, txt., omits kiri), Ac 1^^^ 16^8, He ll^o, al.; e>' So-ov 
(xpovov), as long as, for so long time as, Mk 9^^^ Eq 71^ a,l. (for €<J!)' o. in 
another sense, v. supr., 1, (b)) ; e<^' t/cavdv (v.s. t.), Ac 20^^ ; iirl TrXeiov 
(v. supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, ftirther, Ac 20^ 24* ; {b) on, about, toxvards 
(cl. cts) : Lk 10^5 Ac 3^ 4^. IV. In composition, cVt signifies : up, 

liraipoi ; upon, tTTiyetos, iTnSrjfieo), eTrtxa^i'^oj ; towards, eTri^AcTro), cttc/c- 

Tetvw ; over (of superintendence) , eirLarTa.Tr]<; ; again, in addition, iiraiTew, 
CTTKrwayo) ; against, i-TnopKeu), iTTL/^ovXr]. 

itri-^aiyu, [in LXX chiefly for MT;] 1. ^0 g'ei w^ on, mount: 
seq. eTTt', c. ace, Mt 21^ (L^^) ; to embark in (a boat), go aboard : c. dat., 
Ac 272 ; seq. cts, Ac 21^ (Eec.) ; absol., Ac 212. 2. to go up to, go on 
to, enter : seq. ek, Ac 20^8 21*; c. dat., Ac 25^t 

^m-pdXXw, [in LXX for nblS', jyVff , etc.;] 1. trans., to cast, lay 

or put upon : c. ace. et dat., Mk 11'', i Co 7^^ | c. ace, seq. eVt c. ace, 
Ee 18^9, WH, mg. ; t. x"pa (-"5) cVi (Bl., § 37, 7), of seizing a prisoner, 
Mt 2650, Lk 20^9 2112, Jo 7^0, Ac 5^8 2127 . c. dat. (Polyb.), Mk 14*«, 

Ac 43 ; c. inf., Ac 12^ ; t^ X- ^'^' aporpov, Lk 9^2 • i-^ri/^Xrj/xa inl Ifxariov, 
Lk 53" ; eiri t/iaTto), Mt 9^*'. 2. Intrans., (a) to throw oneself or rush 
upon : T. Kvfxara cts t. ttXoIov, Mk 4^^^ ; metaph., to put one's mind upon 
(but V. Field, Notes, 41 ff.), iinfiaXoiv l/cXatcv, when he thought thereon 
(se T. p-qixaTi), he wept (EV, txt. ; E, mg., he began to weep ; cf. M, Pr., 
131) : Mk 14^2 (y_ aisQ Swete, in 1.) ; {b) to fall to one's share : to 
linPaXXov (se dat.; Hdt., al., a technical formula freq. in tt. ; Deiss., 
BS, 230, LAE, 152), Lk 15i2.t 



168 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

*t Im-Pap^w, -to, to put a burden on, be burdensome: fig., absol,, 
II Co 25 ; c. ace. pers., i Th 2^, ii Th S^ (cf. M, Th., i, 2»).t 

cTri-ptpdl^a), [in LXX chiefly for Ml hi. ;] to place upon : c. ace. 
pers., Lk 103* ig^^, Ac 2324.t 

ciri-pXe'irw, [in LXX for ^13 hi., n3Q , HNT , etc. ;] to look upon. 
In NT, as in LXX (i Ki l^^ 9i«, Ps 24 (25)i6, To 3^, al.), to look on 
with favour : seq. eVi, c. ace. pers., Lk 1*^ 9^^, Ja 2^.f 

£7ri-p\T]fjia, -T09, TO, [in LXX: Is 3^2*;] 1. that lohich is thrown 
over, a cover. 2. a tapestry, hanging (Is, I.e.). 3. that which is put 
on ; (a) embroidery ; {b) a patch : Mt 9^«, Mk 2-1, Lk 536,t 

cm-podw, -w, to cry out : Ac 25'^* (Eec, for ySodoj, q.v.).+ 

^m-pouXi^, -ijs, V, [in LXX : Es 2^2, i Es 5^3, n Mac 5^, al. ;] a 
plan against, a plot : Ac 9^* 20^. i9 233«.t 

t cm-yafjippeuw «ya/i/8pos, a connection by marriage), [in LXX: 
Ge 349, I Ki 1821 ff.^ n Ch IS^, 11 Es 9^* (]nn hithp.), Ge 388 r (q-j, pi,)^ 

I Mac 105*'5'5*;] 1. to enter into affinity with: c. dat. (LXX, 11. c, 
exc. Ge 38^). 2. to marry (as deceased husband's next of kin, cf. 
Ge 388) . c. ace, Mt 222*.t 

* cTri-yeios, -ov (<[ in-i, y^), of the earth, earthly : to. e., Jo 3^^^ 
Phi 2i» 319 (anarth.) ; o-wfiara, i Co 15*o ; oUm, 11 Co 5^ ; o-o<^ia, Ja 3^5 
(Cremer, 153).+ 

** ^m-YiVo/jiai (v.s. yivofiai), [in LXX: Ep. Je*siii Mac25*;] to 
arrive, arise, come on : Ac 28i3_f 

cTTi-yii'wo'Ku, [in LXX chiefly for 133 hi., also for TTV , etc.;] 
"directive" of ytvwa-Ko> (AE, Eph., 249), as in el.; 1. to observe, 
perceive, discern, recognize ; (a) absol. : Ac 251*^, i Co 13^^ | geq, ^ji^ 
Lk 122; ^^ TTve^fxaTL, seq. on, Mk 2^ ; (b) e. ace. rei: Lk 1* 522, Ac 12i* 
273^ Eo 132, II Co 113, Col 1«, I Ti 43; iy iavrCi, Mk 5^^; seq. on, 
I Co 1437; (c) e. aec. pers.: Mt 112^ 1435 1712^ Mk 633 (t^ ^^^^^'^^ but 
LTr., WH, E, omit the pron., and LTr., WH, txt., read eyvwo-av), ib. 5*, 
Lk 24i«' 31, I Co 1618, II Co li* ; seq. dTro, c. gen. rei, Mt 71"' 20 ; geq. 
oTi, Ac 310 413, II Co 135 ; pass., i Co I312 ; opp. to dyvoov>£voi, u Co 6^. 
2. to discover, ascertain, determine : Ac 93** ; seq. on, Lk 73^^ 23''', Ac 
1934 2229 2411 281 . Q ace. rei, seq. quaest., Ac 2328 ; 81 yv aWiav, Ac 
222* . Tj-apa, c. gen. pers., seq. Trept, c. gen. rei, Ac 248 . ^ ^g^^ ^^ 
BiKatocrvvT}^, II Pe 221 (gf. Lft., Col, 136; Cremer, 159; M, Pr., 113; 
AE, Eph., 248 ff.).+ 

t eiri-ykwais, -eus, 17 (<C] cTriyivwo-Ku, q.V.), [in LXX : III Ki 71* (B. 
yv-), Pr 25, Ho 4i« « 6^ «" (njri), Jth 91*, 11 Mac 911 * ;] acquaintance, 

discernment, recognition (Plut., al.) : Phi 1^, Col 31''; e. gen. rei. Col 1^ 
22, Phm « ; t. iXrjdita^, 1 Ti 2*, 11 Ti 225 37^ Yit li. He IO26 ; t. d/xaprta^, 
Eo 320 ; c. gen. pers., of God: Eph li^. Col lio, 11 Pe V'*; of Christ: 
Eph 413, n Pe 18 220; of God and Christ: 11 Pe 12; Kar i., Eo 102; 
Ixctv €v €., Eo 1^8 (y, AE, Eph., 248 ff. ; and for a somewhat difiierent 
view, Thayer, s.v. ; Lft. on Col, 1^; Tr., Syn., Ixxv; Cremer, 159 f.; 

cf. ata-Orja-Li).^ 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 169 

*^m-Ypo<|)ii, -jjs, 17 {<^€7nypa.<f>u}), an inscription: Mt 22^0, Mk 12^' 
152«, Lk 202* 2338.t 

^m-Ypti<^a), [in LXX for ans, Nu IT^i"); fig., Je 38(31)33, al.;] 
to write upon, inscribe: Mk IS^e, Ac 1723, Ee 21^2. gg^ He 8^0 (^xx) 
IQie (ib.).t 

im-UUyuixi, [in LXX : Pr 121^ (niQ hi.), Is 3726 (Nin hi.), Ep. 

Je 5^, II Mac 1532, al. ;] 1. to show, exhibit, display : c. ace. et dat., 
Mt 16^ 22^^ 24:\ Ilk 17^*. Mid., to display for oneself or as one's own 
(but cf. Bl., § 55, 1): Ac 93^, 2. to show, point out, prove: c. ace, 
He 617; c. ace. et inf., Ac 1828 (cf. MM, Exp., xiv).t 

** ^m-Se'xofiai, [in LXX : Jth 13^3 b2, i Mac 10^ 1423, gi 5126^ al. ;] 

1. in cl., of things, to allow of, admit of (Dem., Arist., al.). In late 
writers, 2. to accept besides (Polyb.), to accept (in tt. of the terms of a 
lease ; v. ICC, on iii Jo, I.e.) : ni Jo ^. 3. (a) to receive besides 
(Menand.) ; (b) to receive hospitably (i Mac, Si, 11. c.) : iii Jo ^^.t 

* ^Tri-8r]|i^«, -a» «| 8^/xos) ; 1. to be at home (Thuc., Plat., al.), 

2. to stay in a place, sojourn (Plat., Xen., al. ; and v. MM, Exp., 
xiv) : Ac 2i« 17^1 ; seq. iv, ib. 18^7 (WH, mg.).t 

*+ liTi-8io-Tdffao/iai, to add provisions to a document : Ga 3^^ (cf . 
€inhvadrjK7}, a second will, FIJ, BJ, ii, 2, 3 ; the word is used of wills 
in TT., cf. Deiss., LAE, 87).t 

^m-8i8w)jii, [in LXX for ]n3 , etc. ;] 1. to give over, to hand : c. 
ace. rei et dat. pers., Mt V^'^\ Lk II11.12 2439. *2^ Ac 1530; pass. c. dat. 
pers., Lk 4^''. 2. to give in, give way : absol., Ac 27i^.t 

*+ eiri-St-opOcSo), to set in order further : Tit 1^ (Inscr. ; Cremer, 808). t 

^m-8.Joi, [in LXX : De 24^5^ Jos 829, Je 15^ (xn) *;] to go down, 
set (of the sun) : Eph 42«.t 

ciriciKCia, V.S. iiruLKia. 

im€iKri%, -cs « ci/cos, likehj), [in LXX : Ps 85 (86)^ (n^D), Es 

8^3*;] 1. seemly, fitting (Horn.). 2. equitable, fair, moderate: i Ti 
33, Tit 32, I Pe 218, Ja 3^7 ; t6 e. (Thuc., i. 76), Phi 4^ (cf. Mayor, Ja, 
I.e., and V.S. €7rieiKia).+ 

^■mciKia (Rec. -eiK€La), -as, v « ^7rt«Kr?9), [in LXX : Wi 2^^ 1218, 
Ba 22', Da LXX 3'42) 424^ ^h 3'*2)^ „ Mae 222 10*, iii Mac 3^^ 7«*;] 
fairness, moderation, gentleness {" siveet reasonableness," Matthew 
Arnold) : Ac 24* ; c. irpavrf]-:, 11 Co lO^.t 

Syn. : irpav-n}'; (v. Tr., Syn., § xliii). 

liri-tTiWu, -w, [in LXX chiefly for tZhl , iv Ki 88, Is 62^2, al. ; 
also for mpi, I Ki 20^, Ee 72^ '28), Ho 3^; ipQ, 11 Ki 38;] "directive" 

of ^T^reoD (MM, Exp., xiv), to inquire for, seek after, wish for : c. ace. 
rei, Mt 632 1239 154^ Lk 123o, Ac 1939, Rq ht^ p^i 417^ He 11^* 13i*; 
c. ace. pers., Lk 4*2, Ac 12i9; c. inf., Ac IS^.t 

** emOai'dTios, -ov, [in LXX : Da Bel 3i ;] condemned to death : 
I Co 49.+ 

eiri-0eais, -cws, rj {<;^€inTWr]iii), [in LXX: II Ch 252^ {'^Wp)^ Ez 



170 MANUAL GKEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

23^^ (n:?;?) II Mac 4*1 5* 14^5*.] i ^ laying on: x^'P*"". ^o S^^, i Ti 

41*, II Ti 1«, He 62 (cf. Westc, He., I.e.; CGT on 1 Ti, I.e.). 2. an 
attack, assault (11 Mae, ll.c.).+ 

^mOo|x^a), -w {<^0vfi6<i), [in LXX chiefly for mx pi., hithp. ; also 
for lan , etc. ;] to set oiie's heart upon, desire, lust after, covet : 
absol., Ja 42, Eo V IS^d-xx)^ i Co lO^ (cf. iv Mac 2«); seq. Kara 
(against, in opposition to), Ga 5^'^; prop, (as in el.) c. gen., Ac 20^^, 
I Ti 3I; in late Gk. also c. ace. (M, Pr., 65), Mt 5^8 (Eec. avri}^; 
T omits; cf. Ex 20l^ Mi 2^, Wi 163, ^1.); c. inf., Mt IS^^, Lk 15i« 
1621 1722^ I pe ii2_ Re Qf- ; e. ace. et inf., He 61^ ; as in Hebrew, 

iTTidvfjua liriOvixTrjaa, Lk 22l*.t 

Syn. : 6piyw (cf. Field, Notes, 204), ^Aco {DCG. i, 453^). 

cTTiGofjiTiTiis, -oS, 6 « iTnOvfiew), [in LXX : Nu ll^* (mx hithp.) ; 
elvai. €., Pr 122 (^Q^) * ;] one longing for, lustful after : kukwv, i Co 
10«.t 

cTri0u(iia, -as, r] « i-n-tOvfxeu)), [in LXX chiefly for niNl? , niK ; also 
for Tian , etc. ;] desire, longing : Lk 22^5 (y_s_ ^^i^i^^^'o,), Phi 123, j Th 

2^", Ee 18^*; pi., Mk 4^^; esp. with ref. to forbidden things, desire, 
lust (Vg., concupiscent ia) : Eo T^^, Ja li*'i\ 11 Pe 1*; pi., Ga 52*, 
I Ti 6», II Ti 222 43, I Pe l^* 42; Tra^os iTnOvfjLia^, I Th 4^ ; i. KUKJ, Col 
3^; c. gen., fjnaa-fj-ov, 11 Pe 2^** (v. Mayor, in 1.); t. KapSiwv, Eo I2*; t. 
Koa-fiov (aroused by the world), i Jo 2^"^ ; t. crw/uaros, Eo 6^2 j ^ dTrarr;?, 
Eph 422 (v. ICC, in 1.) ; t. crap/cc^s, i Jo 2^\ 11 Pe 2i8 (without art.), Ga 
5I6 ; T. 6ct>0a\pwv, I Jo 216 ; o-ap/ct/cat e., I Pe 2^1 (cf. IV Mac 132) . 
Koa-fxtKaL, Tit 2^2; ei5 eVi^u/utas, Eo 13^*; ttoiciv ras €., Jo 8**; VTraKovtiv 
Tttis €., Eo 6^2 ; SovXeveiv, ayeaOai, eTnBvfXLai^, Tit 3^, II Ti 3^ ; Tropevea-Oat 
iv e., I Pe 43 ; Kara, Ju !«• 18, n Pe 33 ; avaaTpi^itaOai iv ral% i., Eph 23.t 
Syn. : -n-a^os (q.V.), opi$ii. 

ijn-KaQ-ilu, [in LXX for 231 , etc. ;] to sit upon : Mt 21^.+ 
cTTi-KaX^w, -w, [in LXX chiefly for Hip ;] 1. to call, name, sur- 
name: c. ace. (cl.), Mt 102^; pass., Ac 123 436 105,18,32 nis 
12i2>25, He 111^; t. 6vofj.a, seq. i-n-t (denoting possession, as Heb. 
by . .na S-^p^), Ac 1517 (lxx)^ ja 2^ (v. CB on Am 912). 2. Mid. 

(so also act. ; el., LXX), to call upon, invoke, appeal to (Oeov, Scot's, 
Hdt., Xen., al. ; ef. Deiss., LAE, 426) : KaiVapa (Se^ao-roV, Ac 252^), 
Ac 2511-12.21 2632 2819; sc. t. Kvpiov 'Irjaodv, Ac 7^^; fj^dprvpa (cl.) t. 
Otov, II Co 123 . ^arepa, I Pe 11^ ; r. Kvpcov, Eo 1012, II Ti 222 . ^ ^^q^^ 
Kvpiov (yaov, o-ov; like Heb. njT DCr^ N^i'^), Ac 22i(i-xx) 914,21 2210, Eo 
1013, u (Lxx)^ I Co 12 (Cremer, 335, 742).t 

ciri-KdXu/xfia, -tos, to (•<^ €7ri/<aAv7rTw), [in LXX : Ex 261* 
3921(34) (np5p), II Ki 1719 (^Da), Jb 1929 (aliter in Heb.)*;] a cover, 

veil : metaph., t. KaKLa<s, i Pe 2i6.t 

^iri-KaXuTTTw, [in LXX for nD3 , etc. ;] to cover over, cover up : 
metaph., Eo 4^ (i'Xi).t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 171 

t iTTi-KaT-dpaTOs, -ov {<^€TnKaTapdofjLaL, to imprecate CUrses 07l), 
[in LXX for inN , also Wi 3^2 148^ jy Mac 2^9;] accursed: Ga 
310 (Lxx) 13 (Lxx KtKarapaMyo,) (Cremer, 109). t 

lm-K6i>ai, [in LXX : Ex 36*" {39^^) (p:), Jb IQ^ (lyi hi.) 212^ 
(Dan), I Mac 6", II Mac l^i, iii Mac 1^2*;] to be placed, lie on: Jo 
21»; seq. iwi, c. dat., ib. ll^S; fig., He Q^O; dmyKT?, i Co 9i« ; x^'/^^". <o 
threaten, come on : Ac 272** ; of persons, to press upon .• 1 Lk 5^ 232^. t 

*^m-Ke\\w, of a ship, to run ashore : c. ace, Ac 27*^t 

* ^Tri-K€(t)(iXaio>', -ov, to, a poll-tax : Mk 12^* (WH, mg., for ktjvctov, 
as in D, Syrr. sin.v<^h.^ ^24, etc.).t 

** ^iriKoupia, -as, rj {<C eTTLKovpeu) tO be an iiriKOvpo^, an clly), [in 
LXX: Wi I318*;] az(i, assistance: Ac 2622.+ 

t 'EiriKou'pio9 (Eec. -cios), -ov, 6, an Epicurean, a follower of 
Epicurus : Ac 17^**.+ 

** €Tri-KpiVw, [in LXX : 11 Mac 4*^, iii Mac 42 * ;] to decree, give 
sentence : c. ace. et inf., Lk 282*.+ 

em-XafiPciKw, [in LXX for pTPI hi., THK , etc. ;] always mid. in 
LXX and NT (v. Cremer, 758), to lay hold of: c. gen. pers., Mt 143i, 
Ac 1719 2po.33; c. ace. pers. (not cl.), Lk 9*^ 14* 232^ (WH, but v. Bl., 
IOI5), Ac 927 169 181' . c gen. rei, Mk 823, Ac 23^9, He S^d-xx); c. gen. 
pers. et rei, Lk 2020' 26 ; r. alwvLov (ovtcos) ^w^s, i Ti 6^2, i9_ Metaph. 
(as in Si 4ii), He 2i« (v. Westc, in 1.).+ 

€iri-Xai'0d»'op,ai (alternative mid. form of iTrik-qOw, to cause to forget), 
[in LXX chiefly for UDW;] to forget, neglect: c. inf., Mt 16^, Mk 8^*; 
c. gen.. He 6^^ 132' i«; c. ace. (as occasionally in cl. ; MM, Exp., xiv), 
Phi 313; SttoIos ?,v, Ja 12*; pass. ptcp. (cf. Is 23i«, Si 3^* 23i*, Wi 2*), 
Lk 12".+ 

cm-Xeyci), [in LXX chiefly for IFQ;] 1. to say in addition (Hdt.). 
2. to call by name, to call : Jo 52. 3. to choose ; mid., to choose for 
oneself: Ac 15*^+ 

eiri-XeiTru, [in LXX : Ob 1* N^ R (HNtz; hi.) * ;] to fail : c. ace. 
pers., He 1132.+ 

*+ cm-Xcixw, ^0 lick over : c. ace, Lk 162^ (cf. MM, Exp., xiv).+ 
**+^m-Xr,a,ion^, -^?, ^ « eVtXT^^a)), [in LXX: ^\ IV^"^ * ■;\ forgetful- 
ness : aKpoaTrj<i i. (gen. of qual.), Ja 12^.+ 

cTTi-Xoiiros, -ov (■<Aot7ros), [in LXX for in'', INB';] still left, 
remaining : xpovos, i Pe 42.+ 

** irri-Xudi^ -€0)5,^ « cTTtAvw), [in Aq. : Ge408; Sm. : Ho 3**;] L 
release. 2. solution, interjnetation : 11 Pe I20.+ 

**^m-Xo'a), [in Aq. : Ge 40^ 418.12; Th. : Ho 3**;] 1. to loose, 
release. 2. to solve, settle, explain : Mk 43*, Ac 193^.+ 

* ^TTi-ixapTupew, -w, to bear witness to : c. ace. et. inf., i Pe 512,+ 
ImjiAeia, -as, v (< iTrLfi€kiofiat) , [in LXX : Pr 3^ (^IpBT), Wi 1313, 

I Es 6i«, I Mac 161*, g,!. ;] attention, care : Ac 27* (v. Field, Notes, 
143).+ 

^m-(i€Xeo|Aai, -ovtiai, [in LXX : Ge 4421 (Q,j,y Q,j2;)^ I Es 62^, 



.172 MANUAL GKEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Pr 2725, Si 3313 (3025), I Mac ll^'*;] to take care of: c. gen., Lk 
1034,35 I Ti35,t 

eTTifjieXws, adv., [in LXX for p"l, etc. ;] carefully : Lk 15^.t 

im-\j.ivu, [in LXX : Ex 12=*^ (.TIIQ hith.) * ;] to stay on, tarry or 
abide still: seq. iv, i Co 16^; airov, there, Ac 15^^ (WH, txt., EV, 
txt., omit) 21*; c. dat., t. aapKL, Phi 1^*; seq. -irapd, c. dat. pers., Ac 
2814; Trpds, c. ace. pers., i Co 16^, Ga l^^; c. ace. temp., Ac lO^s, 21*- 1" 
28^2,14^ J Qq i57_ Metaph., to continue in a pursuit or state: c. dat., 
T. afiapria, Eo 6^ ; t. aTncTTia, ib. ll^^ ; t. ttio-tci, Col 1^^ ; avTois (v. 
CGT, in 1.), I Ti 4i«; t. xpV^roTrjTi, Eo ll-^; c. ptcp. (cf. Bl., § 73, 4; 
76, 2), Jo 8('i, Ac 12i''.t 

c'm->'€o'a>, [in LXX : Pr 262* (-,33 ^i.), i Mac 6", n Mac 410 ll^^ 
1420 * .J ^Q jj^Q^ jjj command or approval, to nod approval, consent : 
Ac 1820.+ 

^TTiVoia, -a?, rj « iirivoiw, to contrive), [in LXX : Je 20^\ Wi 6i« 
914 1412 154^ Si 402^ II Mac 12*^ iv Mac 17^*;] a thought, design: 

Ac 822. t 

**imopK^a>, -S ««V6Vo?), [in LXX: i Es 1*8, Wi 1428*;] ^^ 
swear falsely, for siv ear oneself: Mt 5^^.t 

cm-opKos, -oy, [in LXX : Za 5^ (yaOT ni.) * ;] 1. of oaths, sworn 
falsely. 2. Of persons, ^er/'wred ; a,s suhsi., a perjurer, false swearer : 
I Ti lio.t 

cTrioucra, V.S. £7r€iyu.i. 
*t ^TTiouVios, -oi' (cf. TTipiova-io's, [in LXX for n^3p, De 7^ etc.]), 

found only in the phrase apros e., EV, daily ; E, mg., /or f/ie coming 
day : Mt 6^^ Lk 11^. (Several derivations find support, each pointing 
to a different meaning. 1. <^ eViovo-a (sc. r^fj-ipa) (or, ■<[ IttI rryv lova-av 
(sc. rjfjiipav), Zorell, S.V.), hence, /or the morroto or for the coming day 
(E, mg.). 2. (a) <^ tVi + ova-La, hence, for subsistence, needful (Am. 
E, mg.) ; {b) <C cti + cTvai in fem. ptcp. form, hence, pertaining to 
(the day).) For renderings of versions and views of various w^riters, v. 
reff. in DB, ext., 36 f. ; DCG, ii, 58 f., 62* ; ICC on Lk, I.e. The EV, 
daily, is based on the Vg. (Lk; OL, Mt, Lk, quotidianus). "It is 
difficult not to think that t6v e. rests upon misunderstanding of an 
original Aramaic phrase, or upon a Greek corruption " (ICC on Mt, 
I.e. ; cf. also Cremer, 239). t 

c-iri-iri-n-Tw, [in LXX chiefly for bB3 ;] to fall upon (Field, Notes, 
25) : c. dat. pers., Mk S^^ (v. Swete, in 1.), Ac 20^"; seq. iirl t. rpaxr/Aov 
(as Ge 4628, To 11^, 111 Mac 5*^, al.), Lk I520, Ac 20=*". Metaph., 
«^o>s, Lk 112, Ac 1917, Ee 11^1; duiiSiafioi, Eo 153(lxx). of the Holy 
Spirit: seq. eVi, e. dat., Ac 8^«; eVt, e. ace, Ac 10** 11^^; absol., 
Ac 237.t 

* cirt-irXriorau, 1. to strike at, to punish. 2. to rebuke, reprove: 
I Ti 5i.t 

ciri-iroe^w, -w, [in LXX for nx^ , ZIV , P)D3 hi., etc. ;] to long for, 
desire: c. inf., Eo V\ 11 Co 52, i Th 3^, 11 Ti 1*. Phi 226 (WH, [txt.]); 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 173 

c. acc. rei, i Pe 22; c. ace. pers., ii Co 9^*, Phi !« 2-'5 (WH, mg.); 
absol., Ja 4^ (v. Mayor, in l.).t 

♦*t ^Tri-ir<50T,<ns, -cws, rj, [in Aq. : Ez 23ii*;] longing: ii Co T''^\f 
*t ^m-iT66T)Tos, -ov, greatly desired, longed for : Phi 4^.t 
*t^-irnro0ia (WH, -Tro^eta), -as, 17 = iTTLTrodrja-is, longing: Eo IS^^.t 
t ^m-iropcu'ofiat, [in LXX : Le 26»3 (inN), Ez 391* (inr), Ep. 

Je ^^, II Mac 2^8, iii Mac 1* * ;] to travel, journey to : seq. Trpos, c. 
acc. pers., Lk 8*.t 

*t em-pdirTO) (Rec. -ppaTTTw), to setv upon: seq. iirl, c. acc, Mk 22^t 

^■jTi-piirTCD (Rec. -ppLTTTO), SbS lu cL), [in LXX chiefly for "jjbtZ? hi. ;] 
1. to cast at. 2. to cast or ^^^ace upoii : c. acc. seq. iiri, c. acc, Lk 
19^5; metaph., t. fiipipnav, i Pe 5^(1^^^),+ 

cTTioiiixos, -ov (<o-^/ia, a mark), [in LXX : Ge 30*^ (yjjp), Es 5* 
8^3, I Mac 11^~ 14*^, II Mac 15^^, iii Mac 6^ * ;] 1. hearing a mark ; of 
money, stamped, coined. 2. Metaph., (a) in good sense, notable, 
illustrious: Ro 16^; (6) in bad sense, woforiows .• Mt 27^^.t 

cTTiaiTiafids, -ov, 6 (<[ cTrio-irt^o/aat, to supply with provisions), [in 
LXX: Ge 42^5, al. (HTy), Jth 2^8 4^;] 1. a foraging. 2. provisions, 

food : Lk 9i2.t 

eTri-aKCTrrofiat (late form of tVio-KOTrc'o), q.v.), [in LXX very freq., 
chiefly for IpB;] 1. to inspect, examine. 2. (a) to visit: c. acc, Ac 
723 ]^536 (cf jg 151^ . especially, the sick and afflicted (as in MGr. and 
sometimes in cl.), Mt 2536.43, Ja 1^^ (cf. Si T^^); {b) in LXX and NT 
(as ipD in Ge 21\ Ex 43^, Ps 8^, al.), to visit with help, to care for : 
Lk 1«8'78 716^ Ac 151*, He 2«; (c) io visit with punishment (Je 925, pg 
88 (89)33, al.; cf. MM, Exp., xiv; Cremer, 863).t 

iTn-(TK€\jdl,o), [in LXX for pin pi., etc;] to equip, make ready ; 
mid., to make one's preparations : Ac 21^*. t 

*t|m-aKT]K6w, -w, to tent upon, spread a tabernacle over : metaph., 
seq. eV* ifjLe (RV, rest upon, cover), 11 Co 12^. t 

^Tri-crKidiw, [in LXX: Ex 4029 <35) (pc;), Ps 90 (91)* 139 (140)" 

(IJSD), Pr 18^^*;] to throw a shadow upion, oversJiadoiv : c. dat., Ac 
5^5; of a shining (Mt, I.e., and ef. Ex 402^ 35 ^ jj ^^c 2^) cloud, c dat., 
Mk 9^ c. acc, Mt 17*, Lk 93*; metaph. (cf. Pss, Pr, ll.c), of the 
Holy Spirit, Lk 135.+ 

cm-aKOTTcw, -co, [in LXX for IpD ni., etc;] 1. to look upon, 
observe, examine : seq. /j.t], He 12^*. 2. As cTricr/ccTrTo/xai in LXX, NT, 
to visit, care for : 1 Pe 5^ (R, txt.; WH om. ; Cremer, 527). t 

iiiti.-crKOTrf\, -rjs, 17, [in LXX chiefly for Hpp, Hlpg;] 1. a visitiiig, 

visitation (cis e. tov TraiSos, Lueian, dial, deor., 20, 6) ; as in LXX 
(after Heb.), of God's visitation in mercy, or in judgment (Le 192", jjj 
1012, Je 6l^ Wi 220, al.) : Lk 19**, i Pe 2^2 (v. Hort, in 1.). 2. office, 
charge, esp. office of an iTria-Ko-n-os (q.v.) : Ac 12" (lxx), i Yi 3^ (Cremer, 
527 f., 864 ; DCG, ii, 809b).t 



174 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

^iri-cTKoiTos, -ov, 6 (•< o-KOTTos, tt wutcher), [in LXX for IpD , its 
parts and derivatives, Nu d^" '31^\ Jg Q'-^^, iv Ki llis.ie, „ Ch 3i^'^'^\ 
Ne 119, u, -22; i,j<^ jb 20''9; iz?3i3, Is 60^^ Wi 1^, i Mac 1"*;] a 

superintendent, guardian, overseer (cl. ; for exx. v. LS, s.v.) : Ac 20^^, 
I Pe 2"'* (ICC, in 1.) ; as technical term for a religious office (Deiss., 
BS, 230 f.), in later Paul. epp. of the head of a church (Vg. episcopus), 
a bishop : Phi l^, i Ti 3^ Tit 1^ (v. relf. s.v. €7r«7Ko;r7^).t 

eirt-CTiraw, -w, [in LXX: Is 5^^ ('^C7a), etc.;] to draw on: mid., 
in peculiar sense of effacing signs of Judaism (cf. i Mac 1^^, FIJ, Ant., 
xii, 5, i ; v. Thayer, s.v.), to become as iincircumcised : i Co 7^^.t 
* cTTi-o-n-cipo), to soiv upon or besides : dva fiea-ov, Mt 132^.t 

€iriCTTa|xai (prob. an old mid. of icf)LcrTr]ixi, q.v.), [in LXX chiefly 
for JTT ;] to know, know of, U7iderstand : c. ace. pers., Ac 19^^ ; c. 
ptcp., ib. 2410; ^ ^cc. rei, Mk U^% Ac 182^ i Ti &\ Ja 4:^\ Ju^"; seq. 
TT^pi, Ac 262«; 6'n, ib. 15^ 19^5 2219 ; is, ib. lO^S; ttws, ib. 20i«; ttoS, He 
IP.t 

SVN. : ytvuxrKd} (q.v.), vT8a. 
** iiri-aTaais, -ews, rj {<C.t4>:'crTi]fxi), [in LXX: II Mac 6^*;] 1. a 
stopping, halting (as of soldiers) : oxXov, collecting a crowd (v. Eack- 
ham, Acts, I.e.) : Ac 24^2 (WH, Eec. eVicrvcrTao-is). 2. supermtendence, 
attention (but v. Thayer, s.v. ; Field, Notes, 185 f.) : 11 Co ll^s (WH, 
Eec. ut supr.).t 

^TTKTTdTTjs, -OV, b « l<i>lcTT-q ixi) , [iu LXX : IV Kl 25^^ Jc 36 (29)26 
5225 (-pp^), II Ch 31^2 (Ta3), II Mac 5^2, etc. ;] a chief, commander, 
master: Lk 5^ B^*'" g^^-" IT^^ (of. Dalman, Words, 336ff.).t 

Im-are'XXco, [in LXX: iii Ki 58'22), Ne G^^ (nbcr), Jth 15*, i Mac 
1025 12^ 1318 (in each case with v.l. dTroo-)*;] 1. to send to. 2. to 
send a message by letter, to write word (MM, Exp., xiv) : c. dat. pers., 
Ac 2125, He 1322 • geq. ^ov, c. inf., Ac 152'».t 

iTTioTTjfiwf, -OV, gen., -ovos {liricTTafjiai), [in LXX : De 1^^ 4", 
Is 521 d^n ni.), I Es 8**, Si 102^ 21^5, gtc. ;] knowing, skilled : Ja 3i3.t 

iTvi-(TT-t]pil(a, [in LXX for ^GD, etc. ;] to make stronger, confirm : 
c.acc, Acl422 1532>".t 

cTTi-aToXT], -i}s, ^ (•< eVto-Tc'XXw), [in LXX for ni|K , etc. ; freq. 

in Mac;] 1. a message. 2. a letter, an epistle: Ac 92, i Co 5^, al. ; 
pi., Ac 225, I Co 163, al.; i. a-va-TaTiKal, II Co 31 (cf. Milligan, NTD, 
254 f.). (On the NT £7rto-ToXai, cf. Milligan, Th., 121 ff.; NTD, 
85 ff. ; Deiss., BS, 3 ff. ; St. Paul, 8 ff.) 

* em-<TTOfi,i|^o) (<^(TTd/ia), to bridle; metaph., to stop the mouth, to 
silence : Tit l^i.t 

liri-CTTpe'<|>(o, [very freq. in LXX, chiefly for mis' , in its various 
senses, also for n3Q , etc. ;] 1. trans., to turn about, round or towards, 
hence metaph., to turn, cause to return (to God, virtue, etc.) : Lk 
li«'i^ (cf. Ma 324), Ja 519.20. 2. Intrans., (a) to turn, turn oneself 
around: Ac 16i^; c. inf., Ee I12; seq. Trpds, Ac 9*"; so also pass, (cl.). 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 175 

Mk 530 8^3, Jo 2120 . metaph., of turning to God (v. Field, Notes, 
216 &.), iirl T. Kvpiov (^€dv), Ac 935 1121 1415 1519 2620; Trpo? r. 6^6v, 
I Th 19, n Co 3i« ; a^ro o-Kdroi;? cJs <^ws, Ac 2618; pass., i Pe 22^; {h) to 
return (as in MGr.) : Lk 8^5, Ac 15^6 ; seq. ottio-w, c. inf., Mt 24^8 ; 
seq. eis, Mt 12**, Mk 13i«, Lk 239 IT^i; eVi, 11 Pe 222; metaph., seq. 
€m, Ga 49; Trpo'?, Lk 17*; of moral reform, Mt IS^^, Mk 4^2, Lk 2232, 
Ac 319 2827; pass., Mt 10^3 (Cremer, 531, 881).t 

4Tri-<rrpo(j>Vi, -^9, 7} {i7n<rrpi^io), [in LXX : Ez 47^ (mtZT) , Si 1821 
492, etc. ;] a ttirning about ; metaph., conversion (Field, Notes, 246) : 
Ac 153.t 

* iiri-auv-dy(i>, [in LXX for VpS , Y^p , etc. (Cremer, 65);] 1. to 
gather together : Mt 233" 2431, Mk 132^, Lk 133*; pass., Mk 133, Lk 12^ 
1737. (cf. Ps 101 (102)23 105 (106)*^ II Mac 12-, al.). 2. to gather together 
against (Mi 411, Za 123, i Mac 3^8, al.).t 

**+ ivi-(TUV-ay<i}yr\, -^9, rj (■<[ iTna-vvdyw), [in LXX : II Mac 2"^ * ;] a 
gathering togetlver, assembly : He 102^ ; seq. iiri, 11 Th 2^ (cf . u Mac, l.c.).t 
*+ em-o-uK-Tpe'xw, to run together again : Mk 92* (v. Swete, in l.).t 

t eiri-cruoTa(Tis, -ca>9, 17 (<^ i-7n(rvvLarTrj/xi), [in LXX : Nu 16*9 (niv) 

26® (nS3 hi.), I Es 5"3A*;] a gathering, a riotous throng : Eec. (for 
cViWao-c?, q.v.), Ac 24^2, n Co 1128.t 

**^Tri(7<faXTis, -es (<o-^aXXa), to cause to fall), [in LXX: Wi 9^* 
(cf. -0)9, ib. 4*)*;] 1. prone to fall (Plat.). 2. (iari^erows (Hipp., Plut., 
al.) : Ac 279.t 

** ^TT-ioxoo), [in LXX : Si 29^, i Mac 6" * ;] 1. to make stronger (Si, 
I.e.). 2. to grow stronger ; metsbiph., be more urgent : Lk 23^.t 

**t ^m-CTupcu'o), [in Sm. : Jb 14^7, Ca 2* * ;] to heap together ; metaph., 
8tSao-K(iAov9, II Ti 43.t 

t ^i-raYii, -^5, y) « cVtrao-o-w), [in LXX : Da LXX 3i« (oanp), i Es 

118, Wi 14i« 1810 19«, III Mac 720*;] = cl, i-n-LTayfxa, a command, Eo 
162«, I Co 7«'25, II Co 88, I Ti li. Tit 13 (for use in Inscr. of divine 
commands, v. MM, Exp., xiv) ; fi-era irdarj^ i., with all authority: 
Tit 2i5.t 

cm-Tdo-o-w, [in LXX for ln^H , ms , etc. ;] to command, cliarge : 
c. ace. rei, Lk 1422; g ^at. pers., Mk 127 92^, Lk 436 82^; id. c. ace. 
rei, Phm 8; id. c. inf., Mk 639, Lk 83i, Ac 232; ia. c. imperat., Mk 92^; 
c. ace. et inf., Mk 627.t 

SYN. : KeXevu). 

cTTi-TeXe'w, -w, [in LXX for rh3 , r\XDV , etc. ;] to complete 
accomplish, execute : c. ace. rei, Eo 15^*, 11 Co 71 8*' n. Phi 1^, He 8^ 
of religious services (cf. Hdt., ii, 37, al.). He 9"; art. inf., 11 Co 811 
Mid., (a) to complete for oneself, make an end (E, mg. ; pass., E, txt 
cf. Meyer, in 1.) : Ga 33 ; (6) to pay in full, pay the tax, be subject to 
c. ace. (cf. Xen., Mem., iv, 8, 8), i Pe 59 (pass., EV, etc. ; cf. Thayer, s.v. 
ICG, in l).t 

^mxViSeios, -a, -ov, [in LXX : i Ch 282, ^i 45^ j Mac 4*^, al. ;] 1 
suitable, convenient. 2. useful, necessary : to. i., necessaries, Ja 21". t 



176 Manual (Jreek lexicon op the new TestamenI' 

€iri-Ti0T)fii, [in LXX for ]T)3 , Dltz? , etc. ;] 1. to lay, set or place 
upon: c. ace. rei, seq. im, c. ace. rei, Mt 23*, Lk 15^, Jo 96(WH,txt.), is^ 
Ac 15^^ 28=5 ; eVt, c. gen. rei, Mt 27'^^; iv, ib. ; c. dat. pers., aravpov, Lk 
23'''« ; (TTi4>ai'ov, Jo 19-^ ; om/ma, Mk 3l«' 17 ; nXrjyd^, Lk lO^o, Ac 1623 ; 
fTTi, c. ace. pers., Ee 22^^; of the laying on of hands, r. x"pa ("«5). seq. 
ivC, c. ace. pers., Mt 9^^, Mk 1&^^\ Ac S^^ g^^ ; c. dat. pers., Mt IQi^. is^ 
Mk 5'" 6* 732 823, Ljj 440 1313^ Ac 6« S^^ 9^2 13^ 19« 28^, i Ti 522. Mid., 
(a) to provide : Ac 2S^^ (EV, _?j?f i on board ; cf. Field, Notes, 149) ; (6) 
<o throw oneself upon, attack : c. dat. pers., Ac IS^**. 2. to add to : 
Ee 22^^ (v. supr., and cf. Swete, in l.).t 

^m-Ti/idw, -w, [in LXX for iva, Ge ^V\ Ps 9^, Za 3^(2); Si 11^, 
al. ;] 1. to honour. 2. to raise in price. 3. to mete out dtce measure ; 
(a) to award; (b) to censure, rebuke, admonish: absol., 11 Ti 42; c. 
dat., Mt 826 1718 1913^ Mk 43^ 822 IQi^, Lk 43».4i Qii 921,42,55 173 1315 

1939, Ju9; seq. ha, Mt 12i6 I620 203i, Mk 3^2 83o lO^^, Lk 1839; seq. 
X.iyi»v, Xiyu, etc., Mt 1622, Mk 125 Q^-i 925^ l^ 435 23*o.t 

SYN. : eAcyxti), q.v. 

€mTip.ia, -as, 17 (<^ eTrtTi/Aaw), [in LXX: Wi 31"*;] 1. citizenship, 
franchise. 2. As in Inscr. (LS, s.v.), LXX, I.e. (= el. to eiriTtfitov), 
ptmishment, j)enalty : 11 Co 2^.t 

ciri-Tp^irw, [in LXX (usually with v.l. Ittkttp-) : Ge 39" (nTV), etc. ;] 
1. to turn to, commit, entrust. 2. to yield, permit : i Co 16", He 6' ; 
c. dat. pers., Mk 5^3, Jo 193S; id. e. inf. (cf. M, Pr., 205), Mt 821 198, 
Lk 832 959, 61^ Ac 213«. *o 273, I Ti 212 ; c. inf., Mk 10*. Pass., c. dat. et 
inf., Ac 261 28I6, i Co 1434.t 

* ^TriTpoireuo) (<^ eTriTpoTros, a procurator), to govern: Lk 31 (WH, 
mg., for i7ye/xw£vo»'Tos, an obvious correction for precision). t 

** i-nL-rporrr], -•»}?, 17 (<^ CTrirpcTrco), [in LXX : II Mac 131**;] ^Qi^er to 
decide, authority : Ac 26i2.t 

** €'mTpoTTos, -ov, 6 « cVtrpeVco), [in LXX : II Mae lli I32 142*;] 1. 
an administrator, a stetvard : Mt 20^, Lk 83. % a guardian (e. gen. 
pers., 11 Mac, 11. c.) : Ga 42.t 

im-TUYx<i''w, [in LXX: Ge 392 (^1,3^ ^i.), Pr 1227 (:j-in)*;] 1. to 
light upon. 2. to obtain, attain to : Ja 42, c. gen. rei (as in cl.). He 
615 1133; c. ace. (late Gk.), Eo 11^ (Eec. rovTov).i 

em-(}>aii'w, [in LXX for "iiN hi., etc. ;] 1. to show forth. 2. 
(=pass. in cl.) to appear: Ac 272"; c. dat. pers., Lk 1^9; metaph., 
Tit 3* ; e. dat., ib. 2ii (Cremer, 567). t 

eTTi4>cIi'eia, -a?, 17 « €7rt(^ai/rys), [in LXX : II Ki 723 (x-^ij), Es 51, 

Am 522, II Mac 221 32* 5* I222 141^ 1527, m Mac 2^ 5^. si *;] (in late Gk. 
and Inscr., freq. of deities, v. MM, Exp., xiv), a manifestation, appear- 
ance : II Th 28, I Ti 61*, 11 Ti li" 41. «, Tit 2i3 (cf. M, Th., 148 f.).t 

^Tri4)afiis, -£S {<C. iTTLtfyaLvo)), [in LXX (v. Thayer, s.v.) for N'^'lJ , etc., 

Jg 18«, Jl 211' 31, al; 11 Mac 623, m Mac 535, ^1.;] renowned, 
illustrious, notable: Ac 22*' (i^^^) (cf. MM, Exp., xiv).t 

t £m-<}>au<TKa> (variant form of ctti^wo-zco), q.v.), [in LXX : Jb 25* 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 177 

{bni( hi.) 3126 419(10) (1,1,-, hi.)*;] to shine forth: fig., c. dat., Bph 5^* 
(on v.l. -if/avcrei, V. ICC, Westc, AE, in l.).t 

^Tri-<|>ep&>, [in LXX chiefly for rhvj ;] 1. to bring upon or against : 
Kpidiv, Ju ^. 2. to impose, inflict : Eo 3^.t 

**c'm-4.w>'€<u, -i, [in LXX : i Es 9*"AE, ii Mac 123, m Mac 7^3*;] 
to call out, shout: c. ace. rei, Ac 21^*; c. dat. pers., ib. 222^; seq. 
Xe'yovres, Lk 2321; oj-^t. rect., Ac 1222.f 

^m-4>i5aK(a, [in LXX for bbn hi., Jb 419<i<»> A (Bx, ^TTK^avW-) * ;] 

1. to let shine. 2. to daivn (cf. MM,Exp., xiv): Lk 23^^; seq. cis, Mt 28i.t 

cmxcipe'u, -w «xetp). [in LXX for norn , Es 925; ^aa, II Ch 

20^1, al. ;] 1. to put one's hand to. 2. to take in hand, attempt : 

c. inf., Lk 11, Ac 929 1913 f 

cTTt-xc'w, [in LXX chiefly for ps^ , Ge 28i^, al. ;] to pour upon : 
Lk 1034. t 

** €Tri-xopT)Y^a), -5, [in LXX: Si 2522, ^ j^^c 4^ A*;] to supply, 
provide : c. ace. rei, 11 Pe 1^ ; id. c. dat. pers., 11 Co d^^, Ga 3^ ; pass., 
Col 219, II Pe 111 (cf_ ^oprjyew, and v. MM, Exp., xiv).t 

*+ cm-xopTjyia, -as, 17 (<[ cVt^^opr^yeoj) , a supply : Eph 41", Phi 119. t 
** cm-xpiw, [in Sm. : Ez 131'^ 22^* * ;] to spread on, anoint : c. ace, 
Jo 911 ; id. seq. eTrt, c. ace, Jo 9" (cf. MM, Exp., xiv).t 

* eTT-oiKoSofi^w, -w, in NT, always metaph., of the spiritual life 
regarded as a building (Cremer, 449) ; 1. to build upon : i Co 3i''» i2» 1* ; 
pass., Eph 220. 2. to build u,p : Col T, 1 Pe 2^ (T, otVoS- WH, Eec), 
Ju2o.t 

cir-okoiidl^u, [in LXX chiefly for N"lj5 ;] to name, call by a tmme, 
surname : pass., Eo 2i'^.t 

** iTT-oirr^iiu,, [in Sm. : Ps 93^ (IQi*) 32 (33)"*;] to watch (in Horn., 
as an overseer; cf. Ps, 11. c), look upon : i Pe 2i2 32. t 

** £'TT<5TrrT)s, -ov, 6, [in LXX (of God): Es 51, 11 Mac 3^9 735^ 
III Mac 221*;] 1. an overseer (LXX, 11. c). 2. a spectator: 11 Pe 
116 (of €. as applied to God, v. parallels in Inscr., MM, Exp., xiv; of 
the use of this term in the mysteries, v. Mayor on 11 Pe, I.e. ; Thayer, 
s.v.).t 

ciros, -cos (-ovs), TO, [in LXX : Za 7^, Si 44-'' *;] a word : ws 1. 
etTretv (cL), SO to speak : He 79. t 

Syn. : Xoyos, reasoned speech ; prjfxa, mere articulated utterance ; 
I., the articulated expression of a thought. 

eiToupdi'ios, -ov (<; ovpavosi), [in LXX : Ps 67 (68)i* (^^), Da th 
423 A (N^OBT), II Mac 339, III Mac 628 76^ ly Mae 411 AE, 113 j^*.j ^^ 

or of heaven, heavenly (in Horn., of the Gods): ol i., opp. to c7rty«ot 
and KaraxOovLoi, Phi 21'^; to xotVo's, I Co 15^8,49. o-^i^ara (v. Lft., Col., 
376), I Co 15*0; ^aatXeia, II Ti 4I8; Trarpis, He 111" ; 'UpovaaXrjfi, He 
1222; ^x^Jo-is (cf. Lft. on Phi 314), He 31 ; t^l i., He S^ 923; opp. to 
cTTiyetos, Jo 312; id., of the heavenly regions, Eph 13.20 26 310 6i2- 
71 Scopea ri c., He 6* (Cremer, 468). t 

12 



178 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

iirrd, ol, al, rd, indecl., seven : Mt 12** 18^^ (cf. eySSo/ATjKOVTaxis), 
Mk 85, al. ; oI €., Ac 218. 

^TTTdKis, adv., seven times: Mt IS^i-^^, Lk 17^t 

iiTTaKtCTxiXioi, -at, -a, seven thoiisand : Eo 11*. t 

iwrairXaaluiv, -ov, gen., -ovo«, [in LXX for U^TST^XO , Ps 78 (79)^^ 

al.;] sevenfold: Lk IS^o (WH, mg., for TroXAaTrX- WH, txt., RV; 
V. WH, Notes, 62). t 

'Epao-Tos, -ov, 6, Erastus ; 1. a companion of St. Paul, Ac 19^^, 
and prob. ii Ti 420. 2. The treasurer of Corinth, Ro 16-3.t 

^paukdu, -w, late form of ipevydu) (Rec, 11. c. ; cf. Bl., §6, 1; M, 
Pr., 46), [in LXX, ipew- (exc. i Ch 193 a), for izrsn pi., ipn, etc.;] 
to search, examine : Jo 7*^ ; c. ace. rei, Jo 5^^, Ro 8^^^, i Co 2^", Re 
223; seq. orat. obliq., I Pe l^^.t 

SYN. : V.S. i^erd^w. 

cpYd^ofiai (<£pyoi'), [in LXX for iny , bVB , HiZTr, etc.;] 1. 
intrans., (a) to work, labour: Mt 2128, Lt I31*, Jo S^^ 9*^ 
Ac 183, I Co 9^ II Th 3i«-i2 ; t. x^po-tV, i Co 4^2, i Th 4^1 ; wkt^s k. 
^^epas, I Th 29, II Th 38; of working for pay, Mt 2128; for reward, Ro 
4*' ^ ; (&) to work at a trade or business, to trade : seq. eV (Dem.), Mt 
25^". 2. Trans., (a) to worfc, work out, do, produce, perform : c. ace, 
II Co 710, Col 323, II Th 311, Ja 120, II Jo 8, seq. cis, iii Jo * ; ipyov, Ac 
1341 (LXX). id. seq. £19, Mt 26i«; iv, Mk 14«; Ipya, Jo 321 ; t^i L t. O^oi, 
Jo 628 94 . ^v I ^p^'ov, I Co 1610 ; T. dya^d;/, Ro 2i», Eph 428 (v. AR, Eph., 
190) ; id. seq. Trpo?, Ga 6^'^ ; kukov, seq. dat. pers. (more freq. dupl. 
ace. in cl.), Ro I31O; SiKatoavyrjv, Ac 103^, He 1133; avo/xtav, Mt 723; 
dfiapTiav, Ja 2^ ; crrjiJ.c'LOV, Jo 63** ; T. Upd, I Co 913 ; T. ^dXao-crav {wofk 

the sea, i.e. make one's living from it), Re 18^'' ; (6) to work for, earn 
by tvorking (cl.) : Jo 62" (of. /car-, Trcpi-, 7rpoo--epyd^o/xai ; Cremer, 258; 
on the force of the aorist of this verb, v. M, Pr., 116). t 

cpyaaia, -a?, 17 « epyov), [in LXX for n^N^O , Hlhir , etc.;] 

1. work, business: Ac 16i^'i9 192*»25; 86^ i, (Lat. da operam), Lk 
12'8. 2. working, p)erformance : Eph 4i^.t 

**€pYdTT)s, -OV, 6 «6pyd^o/xai, q.v.), [in LXX: Wi 17^^ Si 19^ 
40^8^ I Mac 3* * ;] 1. -prop., a field labourer, hiisbandman: Mt 93"' 3^ 
20^' 2> 8^ Lk 102, Ja 5* (cf. Wi, I.e.). 2. Generally, a workman, labourer : 
Mt 1010, Lk 10", Ac 192" (opp. to Tcx.iVr;?), i Ti 518; of Christian 
teachers, 11 Co lli3, Phi 32, 11 Ti 2i*. 3. a tvorker, doer : t. dSiKLat, 
Lk 1327 (cf. I Mac, l.c.).t 

epyof, -ov, TO (originally Fipyov, work), [very freq. in LXX, 

chiefly for nt^JT© , n^K^O , also for niny , bys , etc. ;] 1. work, task, 
employment : Mk 133*, Jo 43* 17*, Ac I32, Phi I22 230, ^ tj^ 513^ al. ; of 
an enterprise or undertaking (De IS^o, "Wi 2^2), Ac 538. 2. a deed, 
action : Tit ll^ Ja 125 . listing, from Aoyos, Lk 241^, Ro IS^s, n Th 21^, 
I Jo 318; iy xdyots K. I., Ac 722 ; of acts of God, Jo 93, Ac 13*1(1'^^), He 
410, Re 153; of Christ, Mt IP; esp. in Jo, e.g. 520.36 73 1038 I411.12 
152* ; in ethical sense, of human actions (AR, Eph., 190), bad or good, 



MANUAL GBEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 179 

Mt 233, Lk 11*8, Jo 320,21^ ja 2i4ff- 3^^, Ee 2^ 3^; t6 I, collectively, 
Ga 6*. Ja 1*, i Pe l^^, Ee 22i2 ; t^ |. t. . 6fjLov, Eo 2^5 ; |. d.ya06v, Eo 2\ 
Col 110, II Th 217, Tit li«, al. ; koAoV, Mt 26^^, Mk 14« ; pi. (as freq. in 
cl.), Mt 5i«, I Ti 5i«'25^ He 10^*; I. Trt'o-reo;?, I Th 1^, 11 Th lH; I 
TTOvqpd, Col 1^\ II Jo 11 ; ve/cpa, He 6^ 91* ; (XKapTra, Eph SH ; €. do-e/Sctas, 
Ju 15 ; T. o-zcdrovs, Eo 1312, Eph 511 . I ^^^o^^ Ro 320, 28_ Ga 2i« 32. s. 10. 
3. that which is wrought or made, a work : i Co 3i^"i*; t. x«'P<^»'» Ac 
7*1 ; of the works of God, He lio ; y^ k. rk iv airrj I, 11 Pe 3i** ; to I. 
T. eeov, Eo 1420. 

cpcOi^ai, [in LXX: Da LXX llio=25 (ma hithp.), i Mac 15*", 
II Mac 141^ etc;] 1. to stir up, provoke (as in cl.) : Col 321. 2. In 
good sense (cf. ipeOLa-fj.6<i, excitement, in MGr.), to stir up, stimulate : 
II Co 92.t 

cpciSo) (chiefly in poets and late prose for ipvyydvw), [in LXX 
for "^QH (Pr 4* 5^ lli", al.), etc. ;] to prop, fix firmly : act., as mid., 
cpcio-awa, of a ship driving ashore (EV, struck), Ac 27*i.t 

epcuyoftcii, [in LXX chiefly for iSUf, Ho lli^, Am 3*'8, al. ; also 
for V22 , Ps 18 (19)2, etc. ;] 1. to spit or spue out. 2. Prop., of oxen 
(Horn.), to bellow, roar; whence, as in LXX, to speak aloud, utter: 
Mt 1335 (LXX) (Yqj. other examples of softened force of words in 
late Gk., cf. cr»cvAAw, rpwyo), )(opTd^(j).) t 

cpcucdu, -w. V.S. ipavvdu). 

eprjuta, -as, 1? «e>r;/xos), [in LXX : Is 6020, Ez 35* (mri , ny\n), ib. 
359 (nip5)»), Wi 1717, Si 4717, Ba 4^3, iv Mac 18^*;] a solitude, wilder- 
ness : Mt 1533, ^k 8*, 11 Co 112«, He IV^f 

Iprifios (in older Gk. iprjfio<i), -ov, [in LXX chiefly for H^ip;] 

solitary, lonely, desolate, deserted : (a) of persons, yw-q, Ga 42'' (i-^^); (b) 
of places, Mt 14i3.i5 2338 (WH, om.), Mk 13^ 632, ljj 442 912^ al.; as 
subst., 17 €. (sc. x^P"^'' *s ill Hdt., ii, 32, al.), the desert, Mt 3i'3, 
Mk 13.*, Jo 31*, al. ; pi., al I., desert places, Lk l^o 51^ 829. 

cpr]p,6a), -w (<^ epr]p.o<;), [in LXX for i")n hi., DOST ni., etc. ;] to 

desolate, lay waste : Mt 122^, Lk lli^, Ee 17i« I8I6. i^.t 

1 4piii|iwais, -cws, 17 {<^ipr)/x6<jy), [in LXX for DUSOr, Le 263*' 35, Ps 
72(73)19, Da 92^ lisi 12ii, al. ; nain, Je 7^* 22^ al.;] a making 

desolate, laying waste : Lk 212^; ySStAvy/xa iprjfjiwa-euis (Da, 11. c, i Mac 
15*), Mt 2415 (Lxx)^ Mk 13i*"i''.t 

ipllo} (■< Ipts), [in LXX for m)D , etc. ;] to wrangle, strive : Mt 
1219 (LXX, K€KpciCeTai)A 

**ipiQia, (T, cl, -eia), -as, rj, [in Sm. : Ez 23"*;] (on the origin and 
history of the word, v. Hort, Ja., 81 ff. ; Ellic. on Ga 52"; Cremer, 
262), ambition, self-seeking, rivalry : Ja 31*' i" ; Kar Ipidtav, Phi 23 ; 
ot £f c., Eo 28, Phi 11^ pi. (Bl., § 32, 6; WM, 220; Swete, Mk., 153), 
II Co 1220, Ga 520.+ 

epiov, -ov, TO, [in LXX for iJpX , Le 13*^ Is li^, al. ;] wool : He 

919, Ee li*.t 



180 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

epis, -iSo?, acc, epiv (on the declension, v. BL, § 8, 3; WH, App., 
157), ^, [in LXX: Ps 138 (139)'''o, Si 28^ iO^'^*;] strife, wrangling, 
conte7ition: Ro l^^ IS^^, i Co 3^, ii Co 122o, Ga S^o, Phi 1^\ i Ti 6*, 
Tit 30; pi. (v.s. ipieta), Eo 13^3, WH, mg., i Co 1^\ Ga, I.e., WH, mg.t 
**t ipi^iov, -ov, TO (dim. of €>(^os, q.v.), [in LXX : To 2^3 * ;] Mt 25^3, 
Lk IS-^o (£></,ov, WH, txt.).+ 

?pi<t>os, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for nj ;] a kid : Mt 25^2, Lk 15^9, 

WH, txt.t 

'Epjxds, -a, acc, -av (Doric form of 'Epfirj^:), Hermas, a Christian : 
Ro 161*.+ 

ip\ij]V€ia, V.S. kpixrjVLa. 

ipp.r\veKjT(]<i, -ov, 6 (<^ ipp^rivevw) , [in LXX for yih hi., Ge 42^3 *jj 
an interpreter : i Co 14^8 (WH, mg.).+ 

IpfiTjKeu'o), [in LXX: ii Es 4^ (Da-jl?), Es 10^ Jb 42i8*;] 1. to 

explain. 2. to interpret : Lk 24^7 (WH, mg.), Jo V^^ « 97^ He 72.+ 

4pp,T)cia (T, cl., -ei'a), -as, r) (<^€pfjir]vevw), [in LXX (-eia). Si, prol. ^* 

471^ Da LXX 51*;] interjrretation : i Co 12i« U^^A 

'EpfiTis, -ov, acc, 'Ep/x^u, 6, Hermes; (a) the Greek god (Lat. 

Mercurius) : Ac 14^2 ; (6) a Christian : Eo IQ^'^A 

'Epfioyenfjs, -ovs, o, Hermogenes, a Christian : 11 Ti 1^^+ 

cpiTCToi', -ov, TO (<; Ipiroi, to crawl), [in LXX chiefly for iZTQI , 1^X0 ;] 

a creeping thing, reptile : Ac 10^2 \\^^ jjq l^^, Ja 3".+ 

^pu0p6s, -a, -ov, [in LXX for DIN , Is 632 ; L edkaa-aa for ;)m"Q! , 
Ex 1019, al. ;] red : y i. OdXaaaa, the Bed Sea, Ac 7^^, He 1129.+ 

epXO)iai, [in LXX very freq. for NH , also for ^bn ni., nHX , etc., 
34 words in all ;] 1. to come ; (a) of persons, either as arriving or 
returning from elsewhere : Mt S^, Mk G^i, Lk 7^ Jo 42^, Eo Q^, al. ; 
seq. dTTo', Mk 535 71, Jo 32, al. ; Ik, Lk 5i7, Jo ^^\ al. ; eis, Mk 129, al. ; 
8ta seq. €ts, Mk V^ ; ^v (Cremer, 263 f., but v.s. ev), Eo 1529, i Co 421 ; 
Ittl, c acc, Mk 6^3 11^3, Jo 1933, ^1. ; Kara, c. acc, Lk 1033 Ac 16^; 
Trapa, c gen., Lk 8*9; c. acc, Mt 1529, Mk 9^*, al. ; c dat. comm., 
incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mt 21^ Ee 25.ie; with adverbs: tto'^cv, 
Jo 38, al. ; dvwOiv, Jo 331 ; ^TTio-^cv, Mk 52^ ; S^^, Mt 829 • i^f,^ Jq iqz . 
TTov, He 11^ ; seq. Iws, Lk 4*2 ; dxpi, Ac 11^ ; with purpose expressed 
by inf., Mk 5^*, Lk 1^9, al. ; by fut. ptcp., Mt 27*9; Tva, Jo 129; ^i^ 
TovTo, ha, Ac 921 ; 8ta, c acc, Jo 129; before verbs of action, epx^rat 
Kai, 7}X0€ KaL, etc. : Mk 2^^, Jo 6^\ al. ; epxov Kal Kt, Jo 1*^ 113* • ^xOwv 
(redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mt 2^ 8^ Mk 72*, Ac 1639, ^1, ; 
similarly ipxofJievo^, Lk 152^, al. ; of coming into public view : esp. 
of the Messiah (6 ipxofxevo^, Mt 113, ^1. ; v. Cremer, 264), Lk S^^, 
Jo 425 ; hence, of Jesus, Mt 1V\ Lk 73*, Jo 5*3, al. ; of the second 
coming, Mt 1023, Ac 1^, i Co 4^ i Th 52, al. ; (b) of time : ipxovrai 
riiJLipat (pres. for fut. : Bl., ^ 56, 8), Lk 2329, He 8»(^^^); fut., Mt 91^, 
Mk 220, al. ; ^pxirai ^pa, ore, Jo 4-1. 23^ al. ; ^X^cv, iXyXvOe r, wpa, Jo 131 
1632 171 ; 17 rjpiepa r. Kvpiov, I Th 52; xaipot, Ac 319; (c) of things and 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 181 

events : KaraKXva/xo^, Lk 17^^ ; Xi/u.os, Ac 7^^ ; 7 opyrj, 1 Th l^** ; 6 Xvxvo^, 
Mk 421 (v. Swete, in 1.). Metaph., t. dyaed, Eo 3^ t. WAciov, i Co 
I310; 17 TTtoTts, Ga 323.25; ^ cVtoXt?, Eo 7«; with prejpositions : eV t. 
e\if€w<!, Ee 71'' ; €ts t. X^^P"*'. ^k 5^6 ; ets iretpaa-fiov, ib. 14"^ al. 2. 
to go: SirCaw, c. gen. (Heb. nqi< ^^ri), Mt 162^, Mk 8^\ Lk 923; ^^v, 

Jo 21^ ; 686y, Lk 2**. (Cf. dv-, eV-av-, ttTT-, 81-, CIS, in-eicr-, nap-eta--, 
(rvv-€Lcr-, i^-, Sl-€$-, iir-, Kar-, nap-, avTi-Trap-, nept-, npo-, npoa-, crvv- 
€>xo/xai.) 

Syn. : TTopevofxai, xu)piw (v, Thayer, s.v. epxo/xai.). 

cpw, V.S. Acyo), p. 496. 

ipuT&u), -u), [in LXX chiefly for ^NlZr;] 1. to ask, question (c1.) : 
absol., Lk 193i 22«8, Jo 81'^ c. ace. pers., Jo 921 le^^.so 1821; ggq. 
Xcyw, Mt 1613, Lk 233, Jo 119.21 512 919 165. c. dupl. ace. (WM, § 32, 
4a), Mt 2124, Mk 410, Lk 203, Jo 1623 (M, Pr., 66„) ; c. ace. pers., seq. 
■irepL, Lk 9*5_ Jo 1819. 2. In late Gk. (Milligan, NTD, 51; not, as 
Cremer, 716, Thayer, s.v., a "Hebraism"), = aheoj (q.v.), to ask, 
request: c. ace. pers., Jo 14^^; seq. imperat., Lk 14^^. i^, Phl 4^; 
Xeyov, Mt 1523, Jo 1221 . seq. ?va (M, Pr., 208), Mk 726, Lk 736 1627, 
Jo 447 1715 1931,38^ I Th 41^ II Jo 5 ; OTTO)?, Lk 73 1137, Ac 2320 ; c. inf., 
Lk 53 837, Jo 440^ Ac 33 lO-'s 2318, I Th 512 ; c. ace. pers., seq. ntpi, 
Lk 438, Jo 179-20, I Jo 5I6; inep, II Th 2l»2; TOi (WH, txt., om. ra) Trpos 
flprjVTfv, Lk 1432 (cf. 81-, iTT-epwTOiw). 

SVN. : V.S. atTCw. 
**€(j-6tjs, -^tos, f) {<i€vwp.i, to clothe; hence, ia-Orj^, Lk, 11. c, Elz.), 
[in LXX: i Es 87i.73^ n Mac 83^ lis*;] clothing, raiment: Lk 23ii 
244, Ac 1030 1221, Ja 22. 3.t 

**la0Tiais, -€w?, Tj, [in LXX: pi., 11 Mae 333, m Mac li«*;] 
clothing : pi., Ac lio.t 

ivQ'iu), and (poet, and late prose) eaOw, [in LXX chiefly for ^DX ;] 
to eat; (a) absol.: Mt 1420.21, Mk 63i, Jo 43i, al. ; ev t. <t>ayely (on 
this aor. form, v. M, Pr., Ill), i Co II21; gtg^^^ai <l>ay€Lv, c. dat. pers., 
Mk 5*3, al. ; c. Kal ttiWv, Mt 625. 3i, Lk 107, al.; of ordinary use of 
food and drink, i Co 9" II22 ; of partaking of food at table, Mk 2i« 
Lk 530, al. ; opp. to fasting, Mt llis, Lk 538, al. ; of revelling, Mt 24*9 
Lk 12*5 . (5) c. ace. rei : Mt 62^, Mk 1«, Jo 63i, Eo 142, al. ; Siprov (Heb 
DO^ bSN), Mt 152, Mk 320, al. ; t^ iavTov S.., 11 Th 312 ; 5. seq. nap6., 

gen. pers., 11 Th 3^; ra seq. id., Lk 107; ^^ j^dcrxa, Mt 26i7, Mk I412 
al ; T. KvptaKOv SeiTTvov, I Co 1120 . ^^ 0v(TLa<;, I Co lOi^ ; seq. Ik ( = cl 
part, gen.), Jo 626.5o,5i^ i Co 1128; ^-^^ (cf. Heb. jQ bsx), Mt 1527, Mk 

728; metaph., to devour, consume: He 1027, Ja 5^, Ee I71* (cf. /car-, 
(rvv-ecrdioi) . 

'EaXci (Eee. 'Eo-At, v. WH, Notes, 155), 6, Esli, an ancestor of 
Jesus : Lk 32 5. t 

** ia-oTTxpoi', -ov, 6, [in LXX: Wi 72«, Si 12ii*;] a mirror: i Co 
1312, Ja 123.t 

eonr^pa, -as, 17 (prop. fem. of Ij-mpos), [in LXX chiefly for n^y ;] 



182 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

(a) (sc. <2.pa), evening: Lk 2429, Ac 4^ 20^5 2823; (J) (sc. x<^pa). ^^^ 
west.i 

^(nrepik(5s, -'/, -ov ( = the more freq. to-n-eptos, -a, -ov), [in LXX for 
n")y, IV Ki 16^*, Ps 140 (141)2, al. ;] of the evening, evening: Lk 

1238 (WH, ^ujg ^)t 

'Eapcifi ('Eo-pwv, Lk, I.e. ; Rec. 'Eo-p-), 6 (Heb. lllin , Ge 46^2, Nu 

2621, I ch 25, al.), [in LXX both forms, ut supr. (cf. ICC, on Mt, 
I.e. ; WH, § 408) ;] Esrom (AV), Hezron (RV), an ancestor of Jesus : 
Mt 13, Lk 333.t 

'Eapuiv, 'Ecrp-, V.S. 'Ecr/Dcoyu,. 

eoxaTos, -q, -ov, [in LXX ehiefly for rfinx ]iin8;] last, 

utmost, extreme ; (a) of place : of the lowest or least honoured place, 
Lk liy-i"; T. eo-xarov, c. gen. part., Ac 1^ 13^"; {b) of time: Mt 
2012.14^ Mk 12«.22, opp. to TrpiLros, Mt 208, I Co 15*^ Re 2^^, al. ; ra t. 
Kal T. Trpwra, Mt 12*^ Lk ll^", II Pe 22" ; of the Eternal, 6 Trpwros Ka) 
6 €., Re 1^^ 2^ 22^3 j jj^ phrases relating to the Messianic age and the 
consummation of the Kingdom of God : iir iaxdrov {-wv) t. rj/jifpwv, 
He 12, II Pe 33 ; t. xpo'^^v, i Pe 12" ; I. wpa, i Jo 2^^ ; iir i. XP^^°^> 
Ju^s. ly I rip.ipai% Ac 2^'', Ja 53, II Ti 3^; neut., laxaTov, as adv., Mk 
1222, I Co 158 ; (c) of rank : Mk 935, i Co 4^. 

*eCTxaT(iis, adv., extremely, utterly ; i. exetv (= Lat. in extremis 
esse), only in late writers (cf. iv eVxarots £uai, FIJ, Ant., ix, 8, 6), to be 
at the jJoint of death : Mk 523. t 

€CTu, Ion. and old Att. form of cto-w « ek), adv., [in LXX for np^35 , 

etc. ;] 1. prop., after verbs of motion {to) within, into : Mt 26^^, Mk 
145*; c. gen., Mk 15^^. 2, As freq. in cl. (= el. IvSov), after verbs of 
rest, within: Jo 202^, Ac 523; ^i i (opp, to oi 4^a)), i Co 5^2; h |. 
S.vOp<oTro^, Ro 722, II Co 4i«, Eph 3i6.t 

eaa)0€K (■< ecro)), adv., [in LXX for n^33, ^55^ and cognate 

forms ;] 1. from within : Mk 72I' 23, Lk 11". 2. wi^/im .• Mt 7^* 
2325,27,28^ II Co 75, Ee 48 51 ; to I., Lk 11*0; id. c. gen., ib.39.t 

eCTCJTcpos, -a, -ov (compar. of eo-w), [in LXX chiefly for ^p^35 

and cognate forms;] inner : Ac 162*; .j.^ ^^ gg 6i9.t 

Iraipos, -ou, 6, [in LXX chiefly for JT") and cognate forms, also 

Si 11^ 372'^-, al. ;] a companion, comrade: Mt 11^^ (WH, cTepois) ; 
voc, as term of address, my friend : Mt 20^3 22^2 2650.t 

**+ ^T€p6-YXa)<Taos (Att. -TTos), -ov, [in Aq. : Ps 113 (114)\ Is 331^*;] 
of alien speech, of another tongue (v. Cremer, 681) : i Co 142^ (aliter 
in LXX).t 

*t cTepoSiSao-KaXeu, -w, to teach other or different doctrine : i Ti 13 
63 (cf. CGT, in 1. ; Milligan, NTD, 102).t 

*t iTepo-ioyeu, -w, [in LXX cf. irepoCvyo^, Le 19^9 (d;'8^3)*;] to be 
unequally yoked : metaph., c. dat. pers., 11 Co 6i*.t 



MANUAL GKEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 183 

Zrcpos, -a, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for lOJ*?;] distributive pron., 

prop, dual (BL, § 13, 5; 51, 6), denoting the second of a pair, but in 
late Gk. encroaching on aAAos (M, Pr., 79 f.); 1. of number, other; 
c. art., the other; (a) of two, Lk 5^ Q^", al. ; opp. to 6 tt/owto?, Mt 2130; 
6 cts, Mt 6", Lk 7*1, Ac 23«, al. ; I. /x€v . . . I. Se', the one . . . the 
other: i Co 15*"; the next: Lk 6^ 9^6 (sc. •^/^epa, Xen.), Ac 20^5 27^; 
= 6 irXrjaLov, one's neighbour : Eo 2^ 13^, i Co 6^, al. ; (b) of more 
than two, another : Mt 8^^ 11^, Lk 6« 22«5, Jo 19^7, Eo 8^^ al. ; pi., Ac 
2^3; oifih... 5AAot 8k ... I 84, Mt le^*; nvh ... I. 8i, Lk lli«. 
2. Of kind or quality, other, another, different (Plat., Dem., al.) : Mk 
16C12], Lk 929, Ac 2*, I Co 142i, „ Qq ^4^ q^ 16^ al. (cf. €Tepo-yXa,o-o-os, 
-8t8acr*ca\€<o, -^vycw). 

Syn. : aAAos, q.v. (v. reff. ut supr., also Eobertson, Gr., 748 ff.). 

^Tcpws, adv., differently, otherwise : Phi S^^.t 

In, adv., ^e^, as ye^, still; 1. of time; (a) of the present 
(adhuc) : Mk 535, j Co 3^ 15i7, Ga l^o, al. ; (b) of the past, mostly c. 
impf. : Mt 12*«, Lk 8*9 1520, Jq 20\ Ac 9^, Eo 5^.8, ii Th 2^, He 7i« 
98, al. ; (c) of the future : Lk ll^ ii Co l^o ; (d) with a neg. : Mt 5^3, 
Lk 162 203«, He 102, Ee 3^2 203, al. 2. Of degree, even, yet, still, 
further : c. compar., Phi 1^, He 7^^; of what remains, Mk 12®, Jo 43^ 
733, al; of what is added, Mt 18i« 26«*, He 1132 1226,27. of con- 
tinuance apart from the idea of time, Eo 3" 62 9^^^ Qa 5^^ ; en 8e, Ac 
22« (LXX)^ He 1136 ; In T€ Ka(, Lk 1426, Ac 2128. 

cToijAdj^u (<^ hoLfios), [in LXX chiefly for p3 hi. (Hatch, Essays, 
51 fif.) ;] to prepare, make ready ; (a) absol., of hospitable preparation : 
Mk 1415, Lk 9^2 1247 229.12; c. inf., Mt 26i7; Tva, Mk 14^2; (6) c. ace. 
rei : Mt 22* 26^\ Mk 14i6, Lk I220 178 228. 13 2356 241, Jo I42. 3, Phm 22, 
Ee 9'' 16^2 ; seq. ci's, 11 Ti 22^ ; of God's ordaining coming events 
(Dalman, Words, 128) ; of blessing, Mt 2023 253*, Mk 10*o, Lk 2^\ 
I Co 29, He lli«, Ee 12® ; of judgment, Mt 25*i ; of preparation for the 
Messiah, t. 680^ KvpLov, Mt 33, Mk 13, Lk 1^6 3* d-^) ; (c) c. ace. pers. : 
Lk V\ Ac 2323, Ee 19^, seq. ?va, Ee 8®; ek, 11 Ti 221, Ee 9^.15 212.t 

^Toinao-ia, -as, rj {<^ cTot/ia^w, q.v.), [in LXX for p3 hi., p , j]3lp , 

and cognate forms, 11 Es 2«8 33, Ps 938(10^7) 64(65)9 88 (89)^*, 
Na 23(*>, Za 6^\ Ez 43ii, Da th 117,2o,2i_ wi 13^2 *;] 1. = kToi,x6j-qs, 
{a) readiness (Hipp.) ; (6) preparation (LXX ; e.g. 1. t. KapStas, Ps 
938 (1017)) : Eph &-\ EV. 2. fo^mdation, firm footing (Ps 88 (89)^*) : 
Eph, I.e. (Hatch, Essays, 55 ; Exp. Times, ix, 38 ; but v. also Abbott, 
Essays, 95). t 

cToinos, -ov, also (in cl. after Thuc.) -r} (11 Co 9^ i Pe 1^), -ov, [in 

LXX chiefly for ]'ID3 , ]i3!p (cf . Hatch, Essays, 51 ff.) ;] prepared, ready ; 

(a) of things : Mt 22*. 8, Mk 14^5, 11 Co 9^ 1Q^\ i Pe 1^ ; Ipxeade 5ti 
yi8-q €TOifi<i 60-TIV (Field, Notes, 67), Lk 14^7; 6 Kaipos, Jo 7^; (b) of 
persons: Mt 24** 25^\ Lk 12*o, Ac 232i ; geq. ^^^^ Tit 3^, i Pe 3i«; 
c. inf., Lk 2223; toC, c. inf. (WM, § 44. 4a; Eobertson, Gr., 1068), 
Ac 2315; iv c. Ixw (MM, Exp., xiv), c. inf., 11 Co 10«.+ 



184 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

^Toi'/xcus, adv., [in LXX : ii Es 7^^«-, Da LXX th 3i«*;] readily : 
I Pe 4^ ; i. i)^o^, to be ready (Deiss., BS, 252 ; MM, Exp., xiv) : c. inf., 
Ac 2113, ji Co i2Uf 

£Tos, -ovs, TO, [in LXX for n:tS^;] a year : Lk 3^ He 1^^ Ee 20^, 

al. ; hrj £'x«v, Jo 55 8" ; etvai, yCveadai, irwv, Mk 5*2, Lk 2*2, Ac 422, 

I Ti 5^ ; dat. pi. of space of time, Jo 22", Ac I32** ; ace. in ans. to how 
long ? Mt 920, Mk 52^, Lk 2^6, Ac 7^ He 39, al. ; preceded by a prep. : 
dTr6, Lk 8*3, Eo 1523; ^Ld, c. gen. (v.s. Sui), Ac 241% Ga 2^; cV, Ac 24i0; 
cts, Lk 12^9; cTTi, c. ace, Ac IQ^"; /xerd, c. ace, Ga 1^^ S^"^ ; irpo, c. gen., 

II Co 122 . ^ar Itos, yearly, Lk 2*^ 

SVN. : cKtauTos, q.v. ; cf. LS, S.v. cvtauTo's. 

€u, adv. (prop, neuter of old Epic €i5s, good, noble), [in LXX, (v 

yiyyiaOai, ev irouiv (itlj^) ;] well : (.v yiv., Eph 63 (LXX) j ^j; Troicrv, C. dat. 

(cf. Si 12^' 2), to do good, Mk 14''' (where Nestle suggests evTroiciv, q.v.) ; 
€i! TrpacraeLv, to fare well, Ac 152^; in replies (= evye), good ! well done ! 
Mt 2521.23^ Lk 1917 (eJye, WH, txt.).t 

Eua (WH, E{Ja, § 408 ; Eec. E^a ; S (in I Ti), Eva), -as, rj (Heb. 
njn , Ge 320), Eve, wife of Adam : ii Co 113, ^ rp- qis f 

cuayyeXiJu), [in LXX for "lizySl pi., hith. ; for good news in 
general : i Ki 31», al. ; of God's loving kindness, Ps 39 (40)io 95 (96)2, 
and esp. of Messianic blessings. Is 40^ 60^, al. ;] to bring or announce 
glad tidings ; 1. act. (only in late writers) : c. ace. pers., Ee 30'''; seq. 
€irt, c. ace. pers., Ee 14^; pass., of things, to be proclaimea as glad 
tidings: Lk 16^^, Ga l^^, i Pe 12^; impers., i Pe 4" ; of persons, to 
Jmve glad tidings proclaimed to one: Mt 11^, Lk 722, He 42>6. 2. 
Depon. mid. (cl.), to proclaim glad tidings, in NT esp. of the Christian 
message of salvation: absol., Lk 9®, Eo 152", al. ; c. dat. pers., Lk 
4i8(LXX)^ Eo V-^, al. ; in same sense c. ace. pers. (not el.), Lk 3^^, 
Ac 1610, Ga 19, I Pe 1^2; c. ace. rei, dpr^vrjy, Ac 103«, Eo IQi^d-xx); 
T. /Saa-iXetav t. Oeo^, Lk 8^ ; c. dat. pers., Lk li^ 4*3, Eph 2^7 3^; avroi 
T. 'It^o-ow, Ac 835 1718. Q (Jupl. ace, Ac 1332; c. ace. pers. et inf., Ac 

1415 ; T. Kiafia<; (TroXeis), Ac 82^' *0 I421 ^^f Trpo-cvayyeXt^oyuai). 

cuayyAioj', -ov, to, [in LXX for nnitZT^ , HTJ;? , II Ki 410 
1822' 25*;] 1 in q\ ^ ^^^ ^ reward for good tidings (Horn.; pi., LXX, 
II Ki 410) ; (b) in pi., ev. Oveiv, to make a thank-offering for good 
tidings (Xen., al.). 2. Later (Luc, Plut., al.), good tidings, good news ; 
in NT of the good tidings of the kingdom of God and of salvation 
through Christ, the gospel : Mk li^, Ac 15^, Eo li^, Ga 22, i Th 2*, 
al. ; e. gen, obj., t. ySao-tXetas, Mt 423 . ^ Xpia-Tov, Eo 15i^, al. ; t. KvpCov 
TjfxMv 'ItjctoC, II Th 1^ ; T. vlov T. $€01), Eo 1^ ; T. So^r/s T. fiaKaptov Oeov, 
I Ti 111 . ^^ 3^5^^ ^ Xpta-Tov, II Co 4* ; of the author, t. Beov, Eo 15i«, 
al. ; of the teacher, r)piC>v, Eo 2i«, ii Co 43, i Th l^ ii Ti 28; of the 

taught, T. TrepiTOfXT]^, T. d/cpoySucTTias, Ga 2*^; rj dXr)6(ia tov cu., Ga 2^'!'*, 

Col 1*; ^ cAttis (7rto-Ti9) TOV cv., Col 123, p^ 127 (y, Cremer, 31 ff.; and 
on the later eccl. use of the word,, M, Th., 143 f.). 

*+ euayyeXianis, -ov, 6, an evangelist; (a) in NT, a preacher of 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 185 

the gospel : Ac 21^, Eph 4^^, ii Ti 4* ; (b) later, a writer of a gospel 
(eccl.).t 

eoapcaT€'u), -S, [in LXX chiefly for '^bn hith., Ge 522. 24^ pg 25 (26)3 
55 (56)13, al., Si 44i<' ;] to be well-pleasing : t. ee<2 (LXX, 11. c), He 
11*' ". Pass., to be well pleased : c. dat., He IS^^.t 

**t 6u-dpeoTos, -ov, [in LXX : Wi 4}^ 9^* * ;] well-pleasing, ac- 
ceptable : Ro 122; c dat. pers., Eo 12^ U^\ 11 Co 5^, Eph S^", 
Phi 418 ; id. seq. ev, Tit 2^ (Kvptw), Col 320 ; ivuiTnov, He I321 (for ex. in 
Inscr., V. Deiss., BS, 215).t 

* €u-apeaTws, adv., acceptably : r. OiS, He 1228.t 
Eu^ouXos, -ov, 6., Eubulus, a Christian : 11 Ti 421.+ 
eu-yc, adv., in replies, well ! good ! tuell done ! : Lk 19^'' (WH for 
Rec. ev, q.v.).t 

cfiyci^s, -es {<A ycvos), [in LXX: Jb 13 (biia), II Mac 10" E, 
IV Mac 6* 913.23,27 103,15*;] 1, ^(^ell born, of noble race : Lk 19^2, i Co 
12<5. 2. 7ioble-minded : compar., -eo-rcpos, Ac IT^^.t 

**€68ia, -as, rj, [in LXX : Si S^**;] {<^€v8lo<;, calm), fair weather : 
Mt 162 (Eec, E, txt.).t 

t€u-8oK^&», -w (on the derivation, v. Bl., § 28, 6), [in LXX chiefly 
for ns*l, also for nSN , yBU , etc.;] 1. c. inf. (Polyb., al.), to be well 
pleased, to think it good, to give consent (so freq. in tt, in legal docu- 
ments ; Milligan, Th., 22 f.) : Lk 1232, Ro 152*5. 27, i Co I21, Ga l^*, Col l^^, 
E, mg. {ICC, in 1., but v. infr.), i Th 2^ 31 ; ^SAAov €v., 11 Co 5^ ; c. ace. 
et inf. (Polyb., i, 8, 4), Col, I.e., E, txt. (Lft., in 1.). 2. to be well 
pleased or take pleasure with or in a person or thing; (a) c. dat. 
(Polyb., al. ; i Mac 1*3, i Es 439) . „ Th 2^2 ; (&) as freq. in LXX, (a) 
c. ace. : Mt 12i8, He 10«' » (i-xx) • (^) geq. ly (cf. Heb. 3 nST , Ps 149*) : 

Mt 31' 175, Mk 111, Lk 322 (on the tense, v. M, Pr., 134 f. ; DCG, i, 

308 b), I Co 105, II Co 1219, He 1038 (lxx). (g) seq. eh : u Pe li^ (Cf. 

a-w-€v8oK€iD, and v. Cremer, 213 f. ; Field, Notes, 48 f. ; DCG, i, 355*.) + 

+ €u8oKia, -as, 17 «cv8oK£w, q.v.), [in LXX : Ps 512, al. (jlSl), freq. 

in Si; in Inscr. (I.G., 5960), LXX, and NT = tiSoKrja-i^ (Diod.);] good 
pleasure, good-will, satisfaction, approval : Mt 112<5, Lk IO21, Eo IQi, 
Eph 15.9, Phi 115 213; c. gen. obj., 11 Th 1" (v. Milligan, in 1.); cV 
avOpwiroLs €v8oKLa, Eec, E, mg., WH, mg. (v. Field, Notes, 48 f.), Lk 
21* ; -as, Lk, I.e., E, txt., WH, txt. (v. ICC, in 1. ; WH, App., in l.).t 

eicpyeaia, -as, ^ « cv€pyeV>/s), [in LXX : Ps 77 (78)ii (nb^by), Wi 

1611,24^ II Mac 613 926, IV Mac 8i^*;] a good deed, kindness, benefit: 
I Ti 62; c. gen. pers. (ei. -n-oXem, Plat., leg., 805b), Ac 4^.+ 

eiepyexe'w, -w « cicpyerr^s) , [in LXX: Ps 12 (13)« (^DS), Wi S^, 
al. ;] to do good, bestow benefit : Ac 1038.t 

**€i€pY^TTis, -ov, 6, [in LXX: Es 8i3, Wi 19i*, 11 Mac 42, iii Mac 
319 624*;] ^ benefactor: Lk 222* (for contemp. usage, v. Deiss., 
LAE, 248).+ 

eo-ecTos, -ov «Tt^i;yLii), [in LXX: Ps 31 (32)« (XYD), Da th 



186 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

gui5*-j ready for use, fit: of things, c. dat., He 6'^; seq. ti's, Lk 
143*; of persons, c. dat., Lk Q"'^ (for rabbinic parallels, v. Dalman, 
Words, 119 f.).t 

cOe^ws, adv. « ivev<i), [in LXX : Jb 5^ (dSTD), Wi 5^2, i Mac 

11^2^ al. ;] straightway, at once, directly : Ga 1^^, Ja 1^^, m Jo ^* (cf. 
Dalman, Words, 28 f.), Ee 4^, and freq. in Mt, Lk, Jo, Ac (in Mk, 
evBv'i, q.v.). 

*t eoOuSpofi^o), -co, of ships, to run a straight course (Philo) : Ac 
1611 21i.t 

**€i9o^i^w, -i {<ieWvfi.o^), [in Sm.: Ps 31 (32)ii, Pr IS^^*;] 1. 
trans., to make cheerful (..Esch.). 2. Intrans. (Eur., Plut. ; so mid. 
in Xen., Plat.), to he of good cheer: Ac 27-2.25, Ja S^^.t 

**€u-9u^os, -ov, [in LXX: 11 Mac ll^"*;] 1. kind (Horn.). 2. of 
good cheer (^sch., al.) : Ac 272^.t 

*€o0ufjL&>s, adv., cheerfully : Ac 24i'^.t 
ciOu.'a) «€i^^v?), [in LXX: Nu 2223, Jq 24^3 (ni^j hi.), Jg 14^, 
I Ki 1820.26 (-ny,)_ Pr 202^ Si 22.6, al. ;] 1. to direct: Ja 3*. 2. to 
make straight : Jo 123 (LXX, erot/Aa(TaTe).t 

euflo's, -cia, -V, [in LXX chiefly for 1^;] 1. straight, direct: 

Tpifioi, Mt 33, Mk 13, Lk 3* (L^x); e,'? cu^ci'as, (sc. 68ov's), Lk 3^ ; d. 680s, 
fig., Ac ISi**, II Pe 21^; as pr. name of a street, Ac 9". 2. In moral 
sense, straightforxvard, right : Kup^ia, Ac 821 (cf. Ps T" 31 (32)ii, al.).t 

euGos, adv., [in LXX (more freq. than cv^ews) chiefly for 
-1;^;;] = tvOem, straightxvay, directly: Mt 3i« 132».2i 1427 212.3 26'^, 
Lk 6«, Jo 1330.32 1934^ Ac IQie and 42 (41) times in Mk.t 

cuOuTT)?, -77T0S, 17 «fw^u?), [in LXX chiefly for n^ , -|iur''P 
and cognate forms ;] uprightness: He l^<^^^).t 

*teuKaip€a>, -w (= cl., €v o-;(oX^? «X"*' ^ ii^®<^ ^Y Polyb. and Philo; 
cf. Eutuerford, NPhr., 205; MM, Exp., xiv), io /la-ye leistire or 
opportunity : 1 Co I612 ; c. inf., Mk 63i ; seq. cis, to devote one's 
leisure to, Ac 172i.t 

euKatpia, -as, r] «| tvKaipo-;), [in LXX : Ps 91" (v. Soph., Lex., 
s.v.) 922 (101) 144 (145)15 (ny), Si 382^ i Mac 11*2*;] fitting time, 
opport2inity : seq. tva, Mt 261'' . ^^-^ q_ jj^f_^ l]^ 22^. t 

€i(-Kaipos, -ov, [in LXX : Ps 103 (104)27 (ny), 11 Mac 1429 1520, 21^ 

III Mac 411 5** * ;] timely, seasonable, suitable (Cremer, 740) : rj/Jiepa, 
Mk 621 ^Qj. gmpty^ as in Byz. and MGr. ; v. MM, Exp., xiv) ; fioydeLa, 
He 4i6.t 

**€uKatpws, adv., [in LXX: Si 1822*;] seasonably, in season: Mk 
1411 . opp. to Slk- (Kiihner3, iv, 346 d), 11 Ti 42.t 

**t eJ-KOTTos, -ov, [in LXX: Si 22l^ i Mac 3i8*;] with easy labour, 
easy: compar., -utrepov ian, c. inf., Mt 9^, Mk 2^, Lk 523; q ace. et 
inf., Mt 192*, Mk 1025, Lk 161^ 182^ (Polyb. ; the adv. -m occurs in 
Aristoph., Fr., 615).t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 187 

euXdpeio, -as, ^ « ciAayST^s), [in LXX : Jo 222* (n^iil), Pr 281*, 

Wi 17^*;] 1. caution, discretion (Soph., Plat., al.). 2. In later Gk. 
(Diod., Plut., al.), also reverence, godly fear : He 5^ 12^8.+ 

Syn.: SciXia (q.v.), <i>6fto^ (cf. Cremer, 387 f., 759; DB, ii, 222). 

eiXap^o|iai, -oifxat, [in LXX : Pr 2428 (395), Na 1^ (non), al., for 
15 different Heb. words in all ; also Si 7^3 41^, al, ;] 1. to be cautious, 
to beware : Ac 23io (Rec. ; <f>ojSr]e€L^, WH, RV). 2. to reverence : He 
117 (cf. Cremer, 388).t 

cOXapi^s, -« « eJ, Xa^clv), [in LXX : Mi V AB2 (Tpn) ; €v. yrou2v, 

Le 15^1 (1T3 hi.), Si ll''' N^ * ;] 1. cautious, circumspect. 2. devout, 
religious, reverent : Ac 2^ 8^ 22^^ j gtVaios Kai cv., Lk 22^.t 

cuXoy^u, -to), [in LXX chiefly for ^la pi.;] 1. to speak well of, 
praise (cl. ; LXX De 8^\ al.) : t. ^eoV, Lk V^ 228 2451. 53 (aJvoCi'Tes, 
T, WH, mg.), Ja 3"; absol., to give praise, Mt 14^9 2626 (y, Swete on 
Mk 1422), Mk 6*1 1422 (v. Swete, in 1.), Lk 243o, i Co 14i«. 2. As in 
LXX (= "^13 pi.) ; (a) to bless, invoke blessings on (Ge 24«*', Nu 232», 
al.) : absol., i Co 4^2, i Pe 39; c. ace. pers., Lk 23* 628 2480.", Eo 12^^ 
He 7i'«>^ 1120,21. eiXoyT^/xcVos (= ^n^; V. Lft., Notes, 310; DCG, i, 
189), blessed, Mt 21^ 2339 (Lxx)^ Mk ll^.^o, Lk 13^5 19^8 (lxx)^ Jo 12^3; 
c. ace. rei, Mk 8^, Lk 9^\ i Co 10i« ; (b) with God as subject (Ps 443, 
al.), to bless, prosper, bestow blessings on: c. ace. pers., Ac 32", Ga 
39, Eph 13 (Lft., Notes, 311), He 6^^ (v\oyr)fjiiyo^, Lk 128 (WH, txt., 
E, txt., omit) ib.*2; iiXoyqp.ivoL T. Trarpos (cf. Is 619), Mt 253*; pagg^ 
Ac 32^ (cf. Iv-, *caT-€vXoye(i)).t 

Syn. : v.s. alviw, and cf. DCG, i, 189, 211 ; Cremer, 766. 
tcuXoyriTos, -oV (■<€vXoycto)), [in LXX chiefly for "JJTIll;] blessed; 

(a) of men (Ge 122 A, De 7^*, Jg I72 B, Eu 220, i Ki 15i3) ; (b) of God 
(Lft., Notes, 310 f.), as chiefly in LXX (Ge 92«, Ex 17^^ Ps 17 (18)*«, 
al.) : Lk 1«8, Eo 12^ 9^ {ICC, in 1.), 11 Co 13 113i, Eph 13, i Pe 13 ; 
absol., 6 €v\oyrjT6'i (Dalman, Words, 200; JThS, v, 453), Mk U^^ 
(Cremer, 769).t 

eoXoyia, -as, rj [in LXX chiefly for n^^S ;] 1. fair speaking, 

fiaitering speech : xp^o-^oXoyias koI cu., Eo 16^^. 2. praise : of God (as 
in late Inscr. ; LS, s.v.) and Christ, Ee 5^2. i3 712, 3. i^ LXX and 
NT : blessing, benediction ; [a) the act of blessing : i Co 10^", He 12^'^, 
Ja 3"; {b) concrete, a blessing: Eo 1529, „ Co 95. «, Ga 3^*, Eph 13, 
He 6^ I Pe 39 (cf. De ll^^, Si 732, al.).t 

*t eu-|ieTd-8oTos, -ov (<; ev, fx.€TaSiSwfXL), ready to impart : assoc. with 
KotvwvtKos (for the distinction bet. the two, v. Field, Notes, 213 ; GOT, in 
1.), I Ti 6i8.t 

Eui'iKt] (Eec. -veiKt]), -tjs, Eunice, Timothy's mother: ii Ti l^.t 
€i-voiut, -w «€woos, friendly), [in LXX: Es 8^3 Bx^ Da 
LXX 2*3, III Mac 7" * ;] to be favourable, kindly disposed : c. dat., 
Mt 52^+ 



188 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

coi/oia, -as, r) (<;ciVoos), [in LXX : Es 2^^, al. ;] goodwill: Eph 
6^ (of slaves; cf, MM, Exp., xiv).t 

*+eu»'ooxtt« (<;€movxos), to make a eunuch of, castrate: pass., 
Mt 19^*; metaph., ci. kavrov, ib.+ 

cucouxos, -ov, o (i.e. 6 ry]v iiv-qv (bed) «x*^'')» \}^ LXX for D^"1D 

(perhaps not of necessity an actual eunuch; DB, s.v.), Ge 39\ al., 
Wi 3^*, Si 20* 30^" ;] an emasculated man, a eunuch : Mt 19^2 j one 
such holding, as was common, high office, as of chamberlain, at court, 
Ac 8^''' ^*' ^^' 3^' 39 ; metaph., of one naturally incapacitated for or volun- 
tarily abstaining from wedlock, Mt 19^^ f 

EuoSi'a (Rec. -wSta), -as, r], Euodia (not as AV, Euodias), a 
Christian woman : Phi 4^.+ 

eo-oSoo), -w « 68os), [in LXX chiefly for n^S hi. ;] to help on 

fonesway (Soph., al.). 'Pq^^'a., to have a prosperous journey ; metaph. 
(Hdt., al.), to prosper, he prospered, he successful: iii Jo 2, Ro 1'", 
1 Co 162 (on the tense, v. M, Pr., 54 ; ICG, in l.).t 

*+ cu-irdp-cSpos, -ov {<C^v, TrapcSpos, sitting near; cf. Wi 9*), con- 
stantly attendant or waiting on : t. Kvpim, i Co 7^* (Rec. e{i7rpoo--).+ 

** eO-irci0i7s, c's « c^, Trit6ofiat), [in LXX : IV Mac 12" AR * ;] ready 
to obey, compliant : Ja 3^'^.t 

*cu-iT-€pi-o-TaTos, -ov (<C«^» TripdaTrjjjLi), of sins, readily besetting: 
He 12^ (on form and sense of the word, v. Westc, in l.).t 

t cu-iroieoj. Si, = tv iroieoi, to do good (whence ev-rroua, q.V.) : evTToi^aai, 
Mk 14" B (also Is 4123 B, al.; v. Nestle, in Exp. T., xxiii, 7).t 

*tco-Troiia (Rec. -da), -as, r]', 1. beneficence, doing good: He 13^". 
2. a benefit (FIJ, Ant., ii, 11, 2, al.).t 

cu-irope'w, -w (<| cwTropos, %uell provided for), [in LXX: Le 252*5' *9 
Zmn hi.), ib. 28 (v.l.), Wi IQi"*;] to prosper, be well off: Ac 1129.t 

eu-TT-opia, -as, rj (■< €VTropo<:), [in LXX for b^n, IV Ki 25^" A (freq. 

in Aq.) * ;] 1. facility. 2. plenty, wealth : Ac 192^.t 

cu-TrpeTreia, -as, rj {<^€VTrp€7rrj<;, comely), [in LXX for TTTI , etc.;] 
goodly appearance, comeliness : Ja l^^.t 

*t 6u-7rp6a-8eKTos, -ov (<^ tv, 7rpoo-8exo/i.at), more usual than ScKTOs, 
q.V., accejHable: Ro 15i6'3i, n Co 62 312, i Pe 2\f 

*t cu-irpoa-eSpos, -ov, Rec. for evirdpeSpo^, q.v. : I Co T'^.t 
**t €u-Trpoao>iTe(i>, -w (<[ tvTrpdo-wTros, /air 0/ face), [in Al. : Ps 140 
(141)^, v.l. for -tt,oi*;] to look well, make a fair show : metaph. (as in 
IT.; V. Deiss., LAE, 96), Ga 6i2.t 

t Eup-aKuXwi' (Rec. evpoK\v8(Dv, q.V.), -wvos (<^ Ewpos, the East tcind, 
and Ija^i. Aquilo ; Vg., Euroaguilo), the Euraquilo, a N.E. wind (i.e. 
between Eurus and Aquilo) : Ac 27^*. t 

eupiCTKw, [in LXX chiefly for NSa , also for 31273 hi., etc. ;] to find, 
with or without previous search: absol., opp. to ^jjtc'w, Mt 7"'^, Lk 
IP' 10 ; c. ace, Mt 2^, Mk l^^, Ac I322, n Ti l^^, al. ; pass., o{>x €i., of 

disappearance, He 11^, Re 162", al. ; yrj k. ra Iv airfi ipya evpeO-jaerai 

(for conjectures as to the meaning of this reading, v. Mayor, ICC, in 1.), 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 189 

11 Pe 3^**, WH, E, mg. Metaph., to find, find out by inquiry, learn, 
discover: Lk 19*8, Ac 421 ; atrtW, Jo 18^8, Ac 13-^^ al.; pass., Mt V^ 
Lk I718, Eo 710, I Co 4^ Ga 2^^, i Pe V, Ee 5*, al. ; of attaining to the 
knowledge of God, d. ^edv, Ac 17^' ; pass., Eo lO'^o (LXX). Mid., to find 
for oneself, gain, procure, obtain : c. ace. rei, Aurpwcrtv, He 9^^ j act. in 
same sense (so cl. poets, but not in Attic prose), Mt 10^'-' ll^^, Lk l^*^, 
Ac 7*«, II Ti 118, al. (cf. dv-€vpt(TKw). 

t £upo-KXuSa>f (G, evpvKX-), -wvos, 6 (<^ Evpos (v.l. <;^ evpv^, broad), 
k\v8wv), Euroclydon (prob. a sailor's corruption of Ev/aaKv'Awv, q.v.) : 
Ac 171s Eec.t 

copu-xwpos, -ov, {<^€vpv<i, broad + x'^P°^)' \y^ LX.X for am ni., and 
cognate forms (Is 30^3, al.), exc. 11 Ch 18^ (pil ;] spacious, broad : 

Mt 7i3.t 

€0-ae'Peia, -a?, ^ « eio-c/Si?'?, q.v.), [in LXX : Pr 1^, Is 33^ (nST), 

Pr 1311 (aliter in Heb.), Is II2 (njT T\i<T), i Es 123, ^i 10^2, Si 493, 

and very freq. in iv Mac ;] 1. piety, reverence (towards parents and 
others). 2. piety towards God, godliness : Ac 3^2, i Ti 22 4^« 8 6^' *> ^^, 
II Pe 13. «. 7 ;" TO T^s €v. fJLvarrjpiov, I Ti B^^ ; r) Kar cv. StSaaKoXia, I Ti 63 ; 
17 aX-^Oeta rj Kar ev., Tit 1^ ; iJ.6p<j>(^(ris £vo-ey3ct'as, II Ti 3^ ; pi. (v. Bl., § 32, 
6; Mayor on Ja 2^), 11 Pe S^^ (on the use of ei. and cognates in Past. 
Epp., V. CGT, on i Ti 22; cf. also Cremer, 524). t 

**€0-aep£'u, -w «cio-£^7?s, q.v.), [in LXX: Da LXX Su", iv Mac 
9" nE , 11^' 8. 23 132 * ;] to reverence, shotv piety towards ; c. ace. (else- 
where more freq. seq. cis, ttcoi, Trpos) : oTkov, i Ti 5* ; Oeov, Ac 17^3 
(Cremer, 525).t 

c6(r€pris, -€s « ^v, ae(3op.m), [in LXX : Pr 12^2, Is 24i« 26^ (p^iy), 

Mi 72 (Tpn), Is 328 (a-^-i:), and freq. in Si and iv Mac ;] pious, godly, 

devout : Ac 102' \ 11 Pe 2\f 

Syn.: 6€o<Ttf3^v, dprja-Ko^ (v. Tr., Syn., §xlviii; DB, ii, 221 f.; 
Cremer, 524 f., 858). 

**€uo-€pd)s, adv., [in LXX: iv Mac V^*;] piously, religiously: 
II Ti 312, Tit 2i2.t 

cuoTTjixos, -ov {<^ev + (TTJua, a sign), [in LXX for n53, Ps 

80 (81)3 (.^5^ Da LXX 2i»)*;] 1. conspicuous (cf. Ps, I.e.). 2. clear 
to the understanding, distinct : i Co 14^.t 

** eua-irXaYX>'0S> "Ov (cv, a-n-Xdyxyov, q.v.), [in Pr Ma^ {Camb. 
Mamial LXX, iii, 825) ;] 1. in Hippocr., as medical term (LS, s.v.). 
2. Metaph. (cf. €uo-7rAayx»''a, Eurip., Bhes., 192), in NT, tenderhearted, 
compassionate : Eph 432, j pg 38 f 

* euorxr]fio»'us, adv. « €V(rxvH-<^v), decorously, becomingly : 1 Co 
14*0; TTcpiTraTcIv, Eo 13^3, i Th 4l2.t 

** cu<TXT]fio(ru»'T] (<; 6uo-x>?/Awv), [in LXX: IV Mac 62*;] seemliness, 
comeliness : i Co 1223. t 

€U(Txr\fi(av, -ov (ev, (rxvM-o), [in LXX: Pr 112^*;] 1. elegant, 
graceful, comely (Eur., Plat., al.) : to. ev. rjixw (opp. to to. aa-x- W')i 



190 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

I Co 12-^ ; in moral sense, seemly, becoming, i Co 7^^. 2. Also in late 
Gk. (v. Swete, Mk., I.e. ; MM, Exp., xiv), wealthy, influential (EV, of 
honourable estate) : Mk 15", Ac 13^0 IT^^.t 

€i,T6yiJs, adv. «€?, T«Va>), [in LXX for nilp'ltrs, JosG^'^)*.] 

vigorously, vehemently : Lk 23^**, Ac IS^^.t 

* €UTpaire\ia, -as, 17 (<[ ev, Tpirru)), 1. versatility, wit, facetiousness 
(Hippocr., Plat., al.). 2. = /3w/AoAoyta, coarse jesting, ribaldry 
(Abbott, Essays, 93) : Eph 5*.t 

Syn. : fjLUipoXoyia, V. Tr., Syn., § xxxiv. 

EuTuxos, -ov, 6 (cw, Tvxv), Eutychus, a young man : Ac 20^.t 
** ei<^r]iiia, -a<;, y « £i5<^»7/xos), [in Sm. : Ps 41 (42)5 46 (47)2 99 
(100)2 125 (126)2*;] good rejjort, praise : opp. to Sva(j>r]uia, 11 Co 6^t 

€u<|>r])ios, -ov (ev, ^pijfjirj), [in Sm. : Ps 62 (63)" ;] primarily, titter- 
ing words or sotcnds of good omen, hence, 1. avoiding ill-omened 
words, religiously silent. 2. fair -sounding, auspicious (R, mg., 
gracious) : Phi 4^.t 

*eu-(})ope<o, -w, to be fruitful : Lk 12i«.t 

eoijjpatcw, [in LXX chiefly for natz? , qal, pi. ;] to cheer, gladden : 
c. ace. pers., opp. to kvwdv, 11 Co 22. Pass., to be hajypy, rejoice, 
make merry: Lk 15^2, Ac 22«(Lxx)^ Rq Ib^H^^^), Ga 427 (Lxx)^ Rq ll^o 
12^2 J geq. tV, Ac 7*^; eVt, c. dat.. Re 182"; of merry-making at a 
feast (ill Ki 420 ; cf. Kennedy, Sources, 155 ; Field, Notes, 69 f.), Lk 

1219 1523, 24, 29 (LXX) (Xa/XTTpws) 16i9.t 

Eu<t>pdTT)s, -ov, 6, the river Euphrates : Re 9^* 16^2_f 
cu<t»po(70kT], -Tjs, rj {<^ev4>p<jiv, cheerful), [in LXX chiefly for 
nnpi?? ;] rejoicing, gladness : Ac 22^ (L^X) 14^7.t 

** €ixapi<rri<^, -w, [in LXX: Jth 825 ^j 132, 11 Mac V^ 10^ A 
12^^ R, III Mac 7^"*;] to be thankful, give thanks (chiefly in late 
writers and Inscr. ; cf. Milligan, Th., 5 ; Ellic. on Col 1^2 • Lf^^ Notes, 
9) : Ro 121, I Co 1417, I Th 5^8 ; of giving thanks before meat, Mt 15^6 
2627, Mk 8" 1423, Lk 2217,19, Jo 611.23, i Co 112"; c. dat. pers., t. Oew, 
Lk 17i«, Ac 2735 2815, j^ 146 164^ i Co U^», Phi 1^, Col 13. 12, Phm * ; 
seq. 8ia 'I. XpLo-Tov, Ro 18 725, R, WH, mg.. Col 3^^; iv ovo/xan Xp., 
Eph 520 ; seq. Trept, i Th I2, 11 Th 13 ; 5tl, Ro 1^, 11 Th 2^3 ; i^rc, c. dat. 
rei, I Co 1^; iirip, i Co 103o, Eph l^* 520 ; 5rt, Lk 18^, Jo ll*i, i Co 
11*, I Th 213, Re 1117 ; pass. (Deiss., BS, 122 f.), 11 Co l^^.t 
Syn.: v.s. atve'w; and cf. Cremer, 903 f. 

**c<3xapi(rria, -as, ^ « £ Vp^^-^os), [in LXX: Es 8^3, Wi 1628, Si 
3711, II Mac 227*;] 1. thankfulness, gratitude (Polyb. ; Es, Si, 11 Mac, 
11. c.) : Ac 243. 2. giving of thanks, thanksgiving (so in tt. and 
Inscr. ; M, Th., 41 f.) : i Co 141", 11 Co 4^5, Eph 5*, Phi 4«, Col 27 42, 
I Th 39, I Ti 43.4, Re 49 712; c. dat. pers., 11 Co 9^ (cf. t. ^coC, Wi, 
I.e.) ; pi., II Co 912, I Ti 2^ (Cremer, 904).t 

€ux«ipio-Tos, -ov {<i(.v, xap'^Co/Acit)' [^"^ LXX for ]n, Pr 11^**;] 

1. = €v;^apts, winning, gracious, agreeable (Pr, I.e.). 2. grateful, 
thankful : Col S^^.f 



MANUAL GBEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 191 

eoxn, -^s, v (•< evxofxai), [in LXX chiefly for l^j ;] 1. a prayer : 

Ja 518. 2. a vow : Ac IS^s 2123.t 

Sriv^. : V.8. ScT^o-is. 

euxofxai, [in LXX chiefly for "113 , also for injr hi., etc. ;] <o 
pray : c. ace. rei, 11 Co 13^; c. dat. pars., t. dew, Ac 26^9; seq. irpo? t. 
^eoV, II Co 137 ; c. ace. et inf., Ac 272^, iii Jo 2; seq. i-n-ep, Ja 5i«; 
■qixofjLTjv ftvai. (on impf. here, v. 7CC, in 1., Lft., FhilemP), Eo 9^ 
(Cremer, 718). t 

eJ-xptjoTos, -ov {el, xpaof «0» [in LXX : Pr 31^3 (^^n), Wi 13^3 * ;] 

useful, serviceable : c. dat. pers., 11 Ti 2'^^ ; id. seq. eis, c. dat. rei, 
II Ti 4^^ ; opp. to axp^ya-Tos, Phm ^^,t 

*t cu»|/ux^oj, -o) (<< evif/vxps, courageous), to be of good courage : Phi 
2i9.t 

cuwSi'a, -a9, 17 (<^ evu)8ri<;, fragrant ; <C o^w), [in LXX for nwi , 

Ge 821, 3,1. (oo-/x^ cvwStas) ; Si 20^ 24^^, al. ;] fragrance : metaph., 
XpicTTov cv., II Co 2^* ; ocTfir] evwStas (a metaphor of sacrifice, most freq. 
in Pent, and Ez.), Eph 52, Phi 418.+ 

EiwSia, -as, rj. Phi 42, Eec. (for EuoSia, q.v.).t 

eoufujxos, -ov (cv, 6vo/xa), [in LXX chiefly for bKDij^;] 1. of good 

name or omen. 2. Euphemistic for apia-Tepo?, left : Ac 21^, Re IO2 ; i( 
ciwvvVwi', on <;ie left : Mt 2021-23 2533.41 2738, Mk lO^o 152'.t 

^4)(iXXo,jiai, [in LXX for n^y , i Ki 10^ 11" 16i3 * ;] to leap upon : 

seq. cTTt, c. ace. pers. Ac IQi^.t 

*i<^-dTTat adv., 1. once for all (Eupol.) : Eo 61", He 727 912 IQio. 

2. at once : i Co 15<'.t 

c4)eiSoi', V.8. eTreiSov. 

'E<^e<Tlyos, -rj, -ov, Ephesian : Ee 2i, Eec. (ev "E^eVw, WH, EV).t 

'E(|>^(7ios, -a, -ov, Ephesian : Ac 182' 1928, 34, 35 2i29;f 

"E(|>€o-os, -ov, rj, Ephesus, a city in Asia Minor : Ac 18i^' 2i» 2*. 27 

191,17,26 (on the gen., v. M, Pr., 73) 20i«'i7, i Co 1532 16^, Eph li, 

I Ti 13, II Ti 118 412, Ee in 2i.t 

* c«^-cupcTii]s, -OV, 6 {■<d etpevpLCTKU), to find out), an inventor, con- 
triver : KaKoiv (cf. Kaxias evpcrr;?, II Mac 731), JJq ^SO f 

t €<j>-T)/iepia, -as, 17 {<Ci<f)r]fi€po<;), [in LXX chiefly for mpi?7p, 

ripbno;] 1. a course of daily services (Ne 1330, j q\^ 25^, al.). 2. a 

class or course of priests detailed for service in the temple (i Ch 23', 
al.) : Lk l^-^ (cf. MGr., t^T^/icptos, priest).f 

* i<^-r\fi€pos, -ov {iiri, rjfxepa), 1. lasting for a day. 2. daily, for 
the day : Ja 2i*.t 

C({>l8€, V.S. CTTCtSoi'. 

** i^-iKvio\i.ai, -ov/xaL, [in LXX: Si 432". 30e (^^j^. ABn)*;] to 
come to, to reach: seq. aypi, ii Co 10i3; tis, ib. i*.t 

€(}>-i<rrtip,i, [in LXX for 2X3 ni., ri'^lS' , ]r3 , etc. ;] 1. causal in 
pres., impf., fut., 1 aor., to set upon or by, set up, etc. (-^sch., Hdt., 



192 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Arist., al). 2. Intrans. in mid. and in pf . and 2 aor. act. ; (a) to stand 
upon ; (b) to be set over ; (c) to stand by, be present, be at hand, come 
on or u2)on: Lk 2*"''^ lO^o 20i, Ac 6^2 12" 22i3.2o 23^^ ii Ti 42; c. dat. 
pers., Lk 2^ 24*, Ac 4^ 23ii ; c. dat. loc, Ac 17'^; seq. eVi, c. ace, Ac 
lO^'^ 11^^ ; of rain, Ac 282 . qI gyjig impending, c. dat. pers., i Th 5^ ; 
seq. cTTi (Wi 6«), Lk 2p4; of time, ii Ti 4« (cf. kclt-, (Tvv-e<l>i(TTr]fii).f 

i^vihios, V.S. aicjivi'Stos. 

'E<|)paifA {-ifjL, Tr,), Ephraim, a town near Jerusalem : Jo 11^*.+ 
fi^x^aQd (Aram, nnsn?*, v. Abbott, Essays, 142 ff.; DCG, i, 522), 
ephphatha, be opened: Mk 7^*.t 

^X^^s (Rec. x^«?)' ^-dv., [in LXX for blQI?!, etc.;] yesterday : Jo 
452, Ac 1^, He 138 (on the form, v. Rutherford, NPhr., 370 f.).t 

ex^pa, -as, 7} « ^x^po<;), [in LXX for nn'^K , nsjOT , etc. ;] enmity : 
Lk 2312, Eo 87, Ga 520, Eph 2i5, is, Ja 44.t 

exOpos, -a, -<^v (<^ ^x^o<s, hatred), [in LXX chiefly for S^iK , also 

foriy, etc.;] 1. hated, hateful (Horn.): opp. to aya-irrjTos, Ro 112^. 

2. Actively, hating, hostile : Ro 5^**, i Co 152^, n Th 3^^ ; c. gen. pers. 
(cl.), Ja 4^; T. SiavoM, Col 1^^; i. avOpoiTro's, Mt 132^; as subst., 6 c., an 
enemy, i Co 152» ; the devil, Mt IS^^, Lk lO^^; c. gen. pers., Mt 22"*, 
Mk 12^6, Lk 20«, Ac 2^5, i Co 152^, He l^^ 1013(lxx). Mt 5*3.44 iqz^ 
1325, Lk l"i.74 627.35 1927,43^ Ro 1220, Ga 4i«, Re 11^. 12. c. gen. rei, 
Ac 13i«, Phi 3i8.t 

**lxiSm, -77s, •^, [in OT (Aq.), Is 59^*;] a viper: Ac 283; metaph., 
ycwi^fjiwra ixiSvwv, Mt 3^ 123* 2333, Lk 37.t 

€xu, [in LXX for b?^ (e'xofiei/os), te , CT , etc., 59 words in all;] 

(on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, y. M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), 
to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. I. Trans.; 1, 
to have, hold, hold fast, etc. ; (a) to hold, as, in the hand : Re 5^ 14®, 
al. ; iv T. x«P') Re 1^^ IO2, al. ; (b) of arms and clothing, = ^e'pw, 
<f>op€w, to bear, wear : Mt %^ 22^2^ q\ • qq ixe(\. pres. ptcp. (LS, s.v., 
A, I, 6; Bl., g 74, 2), Mk 11^3, Jo 18i«. Re 91^, al.; (c) of a woman, 
eV yaa-Tpl e. (kolttjv e.), to be ivith child: Mk 13^7^ Eo 91"; {d) to hold 
fast, keep: Lk 192"; metaph., of the mind and conduct, Mk 16^ (cf. 
Jb 21«, Is 138; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44 f.), Jo I421, j^q 128^ 
I Ti 3«, II Ti 113, Re G^, al. ; {e) to involve : He 103^ (lxx)^ ja 14^ i Jq 
41s ; (/) = Lat. habere (Bl., § 34, 5 ; 73, 5), to hold, consider : c. ace. 
et predic. ptcp., Lk 14^8; c. ace, seq. ws, Mt 14*; cts (Hebraism), 
Mt 21«; on (Bl., § 70, 2), Mk 1132. 2. to have, possess; (a) in 
general, c. ace. rei : Mt I922, Mk IO22, Lk 121^, Jo lO^^, i Co II22, al. ; 
of wealth or poverty, absol., I^ftv (neg. ovk, ^rj), Mt 13^2 252^, 11 Co 
812 ; Ik t. I^civ, according to your means, 11 Co Sn ; (b) of relationship, 
association, etc. : Trartpa, Jo 8*1 ; ywalKa (MM, xiv), i Co 72 ; <f)iXov, 
Lk 11*; paaiXia, Jo 191*; Troifiiva, Mt 93« ; c. dupl. ace, Mt 3^ al.; 
(c) of parts or membeFs : wra, Mt 91* ; fitKrj, Ro 12* ; OffuXiovs, He lli^; 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 193 

(d) c. acc, as periphrasis of verb: fxvelav c. (= fiefxvrja-OaL), i Th 3^; 
ayaTTrjv, Jo 13^^ ; yvwcrti', I Co 8^ ; TreiroLOrjcnv, II Co 3* ; OXixpiv, Jo 16^^, 
etc. (Thayer, s.v., i, 2, f., g.) ; {e) of duty, necessity, etc. : avayK-qv, i Co 
7^7; vofiov, Jo 19^ iiTLTayriv, I Co 7^5; dywva, Phi l^o ; ,,pl^a, I Ti 5^2; 
if) of complaints and disputes; Kara, c. gen. pers., Mt 5^3, Mk ll^S; 
id. seq. oti, Ee 2*' 2*^; c. acc. seq. -n-po's, Ac 24^^, al. ; {g) c. inf., (a) (cl.) 
to he able (Field, J^oies, 14) : Mt 1825, Mk 14^ (sc. Trot^o-ai), Lk 12*, 
Ac 41*, al; (/3) of necessity (BL, § 69, 4): Lk 12^0, Ac 23i7-i9 281^. 
II. Intrans. (BL, § 53, 1), to he in a certain condition : crot/xws e., c. 
inf., Ac 2113, II Co 12^4; co-xaTw? (q.v.), Mk 523 . ^^^^^^ to jg m^ Mt 424^ 
al. ; KttAais, Mk IB^^^J; KOfxif/oTcpov, Jo 4^2 j ^^^^ ^q 1536. impers., aWws 
eX€t, *^ *s otherwise, i Ti 52^ ; ovtws, Ac 7^, al. ; to vw Ixov, as things 
now are (To 7^^), Ac 242^. III. Mid., -o/tat, to hold oneself fast, hold 
on or cling to, he next to : c. gen., t. i)(6fji€va <T(OTr]pia<;, He 6^ (Kendall, 
in 1.) ; ptcp., 6 ix'^fievo';, near, next : of place, Mk l^s ; of time, 
T. ixo/xivri (17/ixcpa, expressed or understood), Lk 13^3, Ac 20^^ 212^ ; 
(ra(3/3dTw, Ac 13**. (Cf. av-, Trpocr-av-, dvT-, (xtt-, ev-, ctt-, Kar-, /x£t-, Trap-, 
Trepi-, Trpo-, irpoa-, avv-, vrrcp-, vtt-cxw.) 

cus, relative particle (Lat. donee, usque), expressing the 
terminus ad quem (cf. Burton, § 321 flf.). I. As conjunction ; 1. till, 
until ; (a) of a fact in past time, c. indie. : Mt 2^, al. (Wi 10^*, al.) ; 
(b) em av, c. subjc. aor. : Mt 2i3 51^, Mk 6i«, al.; without S.v (M. Pr., 
168 f. ; Lft., Notes, 115), Mk 1432 (Burton, § 325), Lk 12^9, n Th <2J, 
al. ; (c) c. indie, pres. (Burton, §328; BL, §65, 10): Mk 6*^, Jo 
2122,23^ I Ti 413. 2. C. indie, as long as, while (Burton, § 327): Jo 
9* (Plat., Phaedo, 89 c). II. As an adverb (chiefly in late writers). 
1. Of time, until, unto ; (a) as prep. c. gen. (BL, § 40, 6 ; M, Pr., 
99) : T. ^<xipa<;, Mt 2629, Lk 1^\ Eo ll^, al. ; eSpas, Mt 27*^, al. ; riXov^, 
I Co 18, II Co 113 ; T. vw, Mt 2421, Mk 1319 (I Mac 233) . ^^-^ ^^^ (pjeld, 
Notes, 49 f.), Lk 23^ ; t. eXdw, Ac 8*** ; before names and events, Mt 
1^'^ 2^5, Lk 11^1, Ja 5'^, al. ; (6) seq. ov, 6tov, with the force of a conje. 
(Burton, § 330 ; M, Pr., 91) ; (a) I. oC (Hdt., ii, 143 ; Plut., al.) : c. 
indie, Mt 125 (WH br., o^ 1333, al. ; c. subjc. aor., Mt I422, al. ; 
(p) €. oTov. c. subjc., Lk 138; c. indie, Mt 52^ {until), Jo 9^8; (c) c. 
adv. {L 6ipi, Thuc, iii, 108) : ^pn, Mt 11^2, Jo 2io, i Co 4^3, al. ; ttoVc 
(M, Pr., 107), Mt 17l^ Mk 9^9, Jo IO2*, al. 2. Of place, as far as, 
even to, unto (Arist., al.); (a) as prep. c. gen. (v. supr.) : Mt 1123, Lk 
1015, al.; {h) c. adv. (BL, §40, 6): Sivio, Jo 2^; Icro,, Mk 14^*; Kdruy, 
Mt 2751, Mk 1538; <!iS€, Lk 23^; (c) e. prep.: i$w, Ac 21^; ,rp6s, Lk 
2450 (Field, Notes, 83). 3. Of quantity, measure, etc. : Mt I821, Mk 
623, Lk 2251, ai^ 



Z, l, JriTa, TO, zeta, the sixth letter. As a numeral, t,' = cttto, 

t^Bofios (the obsol. <r', F, vau, " digamma," representing U), ^^ = 7000. 

ZapouXcSi', o, indecl. (Heb. l^b^X , v. Ge 302^), Zehulun, Jacob's 

tenth son : the tribe of Z., Mt 4i3. i5, Ee 78. t 

13 



194 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

ZaKxalos, -ov, 6 (Heb. i3t , cf. Ne 7^*, i Es 2^ LXX ZaKxov), 
Zaccai, Zacchaeus, a publican : Lk 19^' ^> ® (cf. ii Mac 10^^). t 

Zapd, 6, indecl. (Heb. m7 , Ge 38^"), Zerah, an ancestor of 
Jesus : Mt l^.t 

];a<})0av€i (cf. Heb. ^:i15!3?), zapUhanei : Mt 27^« (WH, mg., for 

Eec. crejSaxOavci, q.v. ; "probably an attempt to reproduce the Heb. 
as disting from Aram, forms," WH, Notes, 21 ; cf. also Dalman, 
Words, 53 f.).t 

Zaxapias, -ov, 6 (Heb. HJIST , ITIST) ; 1. Zacharias, father of 
John the Baptist : Lk l^. 12, 13, is, 21, 40, 5p, 67 32^ 2. Zechariah, the son 
of Jehoiada (in txt. wrongly called son of Barachiah ; cf. 11 Ch 24^^^') : 
Mt 23=^^ Lk ll^i.t 

j^dw, -w, [in LXX chiefly for n^n (most freq. ptcp., ^wv, inf., t,7]v, 
for Tl) ;] 1- prop., to live, be alive (v. Syn., s.v. /3ios; in cl. usually of 

animal life, but sometimes of plants, as Arist., Eth. N, i, 7, 12) : Ac 
2012, Eo 71-3, I Co 739, Ee I920, al. ; iv airQ lwfi.ev, Ac 1728; if,ol t^ 
Cw Xpto-rd?, Phi 121 ; Sia 7ravT09 toC C^v (M, Pr., 215, 249), He 2'5 ; S 8e 
vvv ^oi iv a-apKL, Ga 2^*' ; ^^ eV ifioX X^tards, Ga 22*^ ; (6) ^wv, of God (""n -5N 

and cognate phrases, Jos 3^0, Ho 2^ (l^"), Is 37*, al. ; v. DCG, ii, 39*), 
Mt 16i«, Jo 6", Eo 92e, i Th 1^, He 312, Ee 72, al. ; in juristic phrase, 
^w eyw (^3N-^n , Nu 1421, ^1.), as I live, Eo 14^ ; t,^v in aprw, Mt 4^ 

al. ; €'k, I Co 914 ; of coming to life, Mk 16[ii], Eo G^o 14^, 11 Co 13* ; 
opp. to veKp6<i, Ee 118 28 ; metaph., Lk 15^2 ■ ^~^ ^^ viKpwv, Eo 6^^ ; of 
the spiritual life of Christians, Lk 10-8, Jq 5.35^ j^q ^17 qu . ^[^ ^ alwva, 
Jo 6"' 58; cTvy XptarQ, I Th 510; opofxa £X€ts on ^^s, Ee 31. 2. As 
sometimes in cl., =/3ida), to live, pass one's life: Lk 2^^, Ac 26^, Eo 
7^ Col 220; ,v 7ri'o-T«, Ga 22"; iv t. d/xap7i'a, Eo 62; eio-c/Sw?, 11 Ti 312; 
do-.oTws, Lk 1513 ; c. dat. (cl.), iavrCi (Field, Notes, 164), Eo 14^, 11 Co 
515; T. ee^, Lk 2038, Ro 610' 11, Ga 21" ; t. Xpto-raJ, 11 Co 51^; t. 
StKoioo-vvT;, I Pe 22* ; TTvcv/iaTi, Ga 525 ; Kara crdpKa, Eo 812> l^. 3. Of 
inanimate things, metaph. : v8u>p ^wv (i.e. springing water, as opp. to 
still water), in a spiritual sense, Jo 410.11 7^8 (DCG, ii, 39 f.): ikirU 
iCicra, I Pe 13; 680s ^wcra, He IO20 (cf. dva-, o-w-^d<u; Cremer, 270, 721). 
l^ivvM^i., for <7y8-, I Th 519 T (v. WH, Notes, 148).t 
ZepeSalos, -ou, 6 (Heb. iTlS? ; LXX: Za^Seid, II Es 88 1020; 

Za^aSatas, I Es 9^^ ; Za/3Satos, ib. 21), Zebedee, father of James and 
John the Apostles: Mt 421 I02 2020 26»7 27^\ Mk 11^.20 317 iqss^ lJj 
510, Jo 212.t 

**fUcTT6s, -V, -oV (C€oj), [in Aq. : Le 621 'i*'; in Al. : ib. 712*;] boiling 
hot (Strab., al.) : metaph., Ee 3i5'i''.t 

^euyos, -cos (-ous), to {<^ ^evyn;/jii, to yoke), [in LXX chiefly for 
ip^ , Jg 193, al. ;] 1. a yoke of beasts : Lk 141^. 2. a pair of any- 
thing, Lk 224 (LXX),t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 195 
*t j^euKTTjpios, -a -ov (<| ^evyvvfXL), fit for joining. As subst,, (a) 

t,€VKTr)piov, TO = t,vy6v, d yoke ; (6) ^eVKTqpia, -a?, rj = ^cvyXr], the CTOSS- 

bar of a double rudder : Ac 27*** (found nowhere else).t 

Zeus, gen., Aids, dat., Ad, ace, Ata (Ai'av, D, al.), Zeus (Lat. 
Jupiter): Ac 14^2, i3_f 

U<a, [in LXX for nn, nm, metaph., iv Mac IS^";] to boil, be 
hot; metaph., of anger, love, zeal: -ptc]^., fervent : t. Trvevfian, Ac 
1825, Eo i2ii.t 

*iT)X€u(i>, late and rare form of ^rjXow, q.v. ; 1. to envy, be jealous. 
2. to be zealous : Ee 3^^.t 

S^Xos, -ov, 6, and in late Gk,, also -cos, to' (ii Co 9^, Phi 3"), [in 
LXX for nxj/? , Nu 2511, al.;] 1. zeal : ii Co T^^ 9^; KaTcl ^^Aos, Phi 

3<5; c. gen. obj., Jo 2^7 (lxx)^ Rq 102; seq. vWp, ii Co 7^; c. gen. subj., 
Oeov, II Co 112; TTvpds, He 102" (cf. Is 26^1, Wi 5^8, and cf. Westc, in 
l). 2. jealousy : Eo 13i3, i Co 3^, ii Co 122o, Ga 520 (WH, txt, EV), 
Ja 314,10; 7rXr;o-%at C^Xov Ac 5^7 13« ; pi., ^^Xoi (v. Bl., § 32, 6), Ga 
520, WH, mg.t 

j^TjXo'w, -w, [in LXX chiefly for Hip pi. ;] 1. to burn with envy or 
jealousy, to be jealous : absol., Ac 7^ 17^, i Co 13*, Ja 42 (E, mg., cf. 
Mayor, in 1.). 2. to seek or desire eagerly : c. ace. rei, i Co 12^i 
141.39 (cf. Si 5018, Wi 112); c. ace. pers., 11 Co II2, Ga 4i7; pass., 
Ga 4i8.t 

jTiXwTiis, -oC, o « ^T/A-dco), [in LXX for N3{? (^tos C), Ex 20^ 34i*, 

De 424 5» 615; Slip., Na 12 (^eds); pi, i Es 8"2; ^. tS>v vo>(ov, ii Mac 

42 ; Tov ^. $iv€€s, IV Mac 1312 (cf. Nu 25ii) * ;] 1. in cl. an emulator, 
zealous admirer (Plat., al.). 2. eagerly desirous, zealous; (a) absol., 
as in OT, U, c. ; {b) c. gen. obj. : (zealous to acquire or to defend), 
I Co 1412, Tit 21*, I Pe 31^ ; t. vo/xoi; (11 Mac, I.e.), Ac 2120 ; ,rapaSdo-€a>v, 
Ga 11*; c. gen. pers., d^ov, Ac 22^ 3. In FIJ, NT, a Zealot, member 
of the Jewish party so called : as surname of the Apostle Simon, 
Lk 615, Ac li3.t 

JtifjfAia, -as, 17, [in LXX for WZV ni. and cognate forms ;] damage, 
loss: Ac 27iO'2i, Phi 38; opp. to Kc'pSos, ib. ^.t 

i^T|fii6tD, -w {<^^r)fxta), [in LXX chiefly for V72V,] to damage. 
Pass., to suffer loss, forfeit, lose: absol., i Co 3i5; seq. eV, 11 Co 7*; 
c. ace. rei (v. Bl., § 34, 6), t. i/^vx^/v, Mt 162^, Mk S^e ; Jaurdv, Lk 925 . 

T. iraVTa, Phi 3^.+ 

Zi]vas, -a, ace. -av (contr. from ZrjvdSwpos), Zenas : Tit B^'^.f 
l^tjT^u, -w, [in LXX chiefly for Wp2. pi., also for oni, etc. ;] 1. to 
seek, seek for : Mt 7^' «, Lk 11^ 10 ; e. ace. pers., Mk 1", Lk 2«, Jo 62*, 
al. ; id. seq. iv, Ac 911 ; c. ace. rei, Mt 13*5, Lk I910 ; seq. eV, Lk 13«' ' ; 
ij/vxriv, of plotting against one's life (Ex 41^, al.), Mt 220, Eo ll^d-xx). 
Metaph., to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into : Mk lli^, 
Lk 1228, Jq ]^gi9 • ^ 0^^^^ Ac 172'^. 2. to seek or strive after, desire : 
Mt 12*6, Mk 1212, Lk 99, Jo 518, Eo 10^, al. ; t. edvarov, Ee 9^ ; t. 
ySao-iXetav t. ^£oS, Mt 6^3 (Dalman, Words, 121 f.) ; Ta ava,, Col 31 ; 



196 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

flprjyrii', I Pe S^^i-^^). 3. to require, \ demand : c. ace. rei, Mk 8^^, 
Lk 11'^^ I Co 122, II Co 133 . geq. ^apd, Mk 8i\ al. ; Iva, i Co 42 (cf. 

ava-, fK-, fTTi-, truv-^T/Ttw). 

iTJTT)fia, -Tos, TO (<; ^r/Tfoy), [in LXX : ^. TtOtadaL (dfll ni.), Ez 
3637 A * ;] aw inquiry, qtcestion : Ac 152 igis 232a 25^^ 263.t 

* l^TiTTjais, -ews, r} (■< ^rjT€w). 1. a seeking, search. 2. a questioni7ig, 
inquiry, debate : Ac 152. 7^ „ Ti 223, Yit 3» ; seq. irepC, Jo 32^, Ac 252^ 

I Ti 6^t 

*li'(,dyioy, -ov, to (in Talmud yyil), zizanium (EV, tares), a kind 
of darnel, resembling wheat: Mt 1325-27,29,30,36,38,40 (cf. DB, s.v. 
" Tares ").t 

Zfxu'pm, -r?s, rj, Ee 111 28 T, for 2/x-, q.v. (cf. Bl., § 3, 9; Mayser, 
204).t 

ZopopcipeX (FIJ, Zopof3d/3r]Xo<:, -ov), 6, indecl. (Heb. bs^lj), 

ZertiUabel (i Ch ^^\ al.) : Mt I12. ^^, Lk 327.t 

**to<l>os, -ov, 6 (akin to yvo>os, q.v.), [in Sm. : Ex IO22, Jb 283, pg 
10(11)2 90(91)6, ig 599*.] in Hom. the gloom of the under-world; 
hence, darkness, deep gloom (poet, and late prose writers) : He 12^^, 
iiPe2*.i7, Ju^.is.t 

luy6s (in cl. more freq. to ^vyov), -ov, 6 (<^ ^evyvvixi), [in LXX for 
bif , niSJiin, etc.;] l. a yoke; metaph., of bondage or submission to 

authority : Mt 1129. so, Ac 15io, Ga 5^, i Ti 6\ 2. a balance : Ee 6^ (of. 
Is 4012, al.).t 

l^u'iiT], -7;s, ^, [in LXX for ]^!0n , Ex 12^5 133 23is 3425, Dq 163 . 
-ISBT, Ex 1215.19 137, Le 2ii, De 16**;] leaven: Mt 1333, l^ 1321. 

T. apTou, Mt 1612. Metaph., of a moral influence or tendency, always, 

exc. in the Parable of the Leaven (Mt 1333, ljj 1321)^ fo^ evil : i Co 

56-8, Ga 59; C. r. ^aptaaCwv, Mt 16"' n, Mk 81^, Lk 121 (Cremer, 723).+ 

i;u^6a), -S « t,vfxri), [in LXX for ^^ , Ex 123^.39, Le e^do) 23i7, 

Ho 7**;] to leaven : Mt 1333, Lk I321, i Co 5^, Ga 5^.+ 

I<ayp4b), -w « ^wos, alive, + aypevw), [in LXX chiefly for iTH hi. ;] 

to catch alive, take captive: metaph., Lk 51"; pass., 11 Ti 22" (on the 

meaning and construction, v. Ellic, CGT, in 1.).+ 

^wT), -^9, 17 (Caw), [in LXX chiefly for W'^JJ ;] life (in Horn., Hdt., 

= )8tos, q.v. ; later, existence, vita qud vivimus, as distinct from ^ibs, 
vita quam vivimus ; opp. to Ba.varo'i); 1. of natural life: Lk 1625, Ac 
833, I Co 15i», I Ti 48, He 73, Ja 41* ; Trvc^a ^oi^?, Ee lin ; i^vxh i<^v? 
(Ge 130), lie 163; of the life of one risen from the dead, Eo 510, He 716. 
2. Of the life of the kingdom of God, the present life of grace and the 
life of glory which is to follow (Dalman, Words, 156 ff. ; Westc, JEpp. 
Jo., 214 ff.; Cremer, 272 ff.) : Jo 651.53, Eo 710 86.10, Phi 2i«, Col 3*, 

II Pe 13; alihyLos (reff. supr.; DCG, i, 538^ ii, 30 f.), Jo 436 1250 173^ 
I Jo 12, al. ; T. <f)Q)<; rrjs C Jo 812 ; 6 Adyos t. ^., I Jo 11 ; 6 apros t. ^,, 
Jo 635. *8; giKtttWis 4<"^5, Eo 5I8; /xtTctvoia eis C-, Ac 111^; iv auToi ^. ^v, 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 197 

Jo 1*; Cv iv. X. 'I., II Ti 11 ; ra Trpos ^ui-qv, II Pe l^, al. ; (TTCi^avos TVS 
C, Ja V^ Ee 210; x^pts ^^5 (gen. expl.), i Pe 3^; ^. Kal €lpr]vr], Eo 8«; 
^ Ktti d<t>dap(rLa, II Ti l^o ; di/ao-rao-ts ^w^s, Jo 529 • ^[^Xos ^w^s, Phi 43, 
Ee 3^; ivkov ^oj^?, Ee 2''; v8wp ^w^s, Ee 22^^; meton., of that which 
has life : t. irvevfia, Eo 8^'^ ; prjfiaTa, Jo 6^3 J of one who gives life, Jo 11^^ 

14«, I Jo 12 ; r) ivToXrj, Jo 1260. 
Stn. : v.s. /3ios. 
£(5nfj, -lys, 17 {Cwwy/xi), [in LXX for tSJXlK , nnijn , etc. ;] a belt, 

girdle : Mt 3*, Mk 1^, Ac 2V^, Ee l^^ 15^ ; as a receptacle for money, 
Mt 109, Mk 68.t 

^dvyufii and ^(ovvvw, [in LXX chiefly for nan ;] ^0 gftrd ; c. ace. 
pers., Jo 2118. Mid., to gird oneself : Ac 12^ (cf. dva-, 8ia-, Trept-, un-o- 
^a)i'vv//,t).t 

j^uoyoi'eu, -w (<; ^wo's, a^ive, ycVco-^ai), [in LXX : Ex 11'^' 18' 22, 
Jg 819, I Ki 26 279. 11, III Ki 21 (20)31, jy xi 7* (rrn pi., hi.), Le 11*^ 
(njn)*;] 1. in cl., to engender, produce alive, endue with life. 2. In 

LXX and NT, to preserve alive (DCG, ii, 606^ ; Cremer, 274) : Lk 
1733, Ac 719, I Ti 613 (EV, quickeneth; E, mg., preserveth).f 

iwoK (Eec. (u)ov, V. LS, S.V.), -ou, to (•<C<^os, alive), [in LXX for 
iTH (chiefly) and cognate forms; freq. in Wi;] a living creature, 
an animal: Ee 4«-9 5«ff- 6i^- 7" 143 157 194. ^^^^ ^, ^-^^^ He 13"; 
5\oya C', II Pe 212, Ju lo.t 

Sfn, : 6-qpiov, in which the brutal, bestial element is emphasized, 
and which is never used of sacrificial animals. On the other hand, t,. 
is the more comprehensive, as expressing the vital element common 
to the whole animal creation (v. Tr., Syn., Ixxxi; Cremer, 274). 

^0)0-1701^0), w, [in LXX for n^n pi., hi., Jg 21i*, iv Ki 5^ Ne 9«, 
Jb 36«, Ps 7020, Ec 713(12)*;] 1. in cl. (= ^woyovtw), to produce alive. 
2. In LXX and NT, to make alive, cause to live, quicken {DCG, ii, 
606*; Cremer, 275) : Jo 521 6^3, Eo 41^ SH, i Co 15*^, 11 Co 3«, Ga 321. 
Pass., I Co 1522. 36, I Pe Bis.t 

H 

H, tj, TJTa, TO, indecl., eta, the seventh letter. As a numeral, 
,;' = 8 ; r?, = 8000. 

VI, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11); 
1. disjunctive, or ; (a) between single words : Mt 5i^ Mk 6^^, Lk 22*, 
Jo 619, Eo 121, al. ; (b) before a sentence expressing a variation, denial 
or refutation of a previous statement, freq. in interrog. form : Mt 7*' 9, 
Mk 121*, Lk 13*, Eo 329 63 921, i Co 69. i« 9^, 11 Co 11^ ; ^ . . . v, either 
. . . or, Mt 62*, Lk 16i3, i Co 14« ; (c) in a disjunctive question (as 
Lat. an after utrum) : Mt 9^, Mk 29, Lk 7i9, al. ; after jroTcpov, Jo 71^ ; 
fi-^, I Co 98; p.-f,TL, II Co 1"; ^ . . . ^ . . . ■^, Mk 1335. 2. Com- 
parative, than : after comparatives, Mt IQi^, Lk 9i3, Jo 3i9, Eo I311, 
al.; after hepov, Ac 17^1; OeXw (KiihnerS, iv, 303), i Co 14i9; V" i 



198 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

before, seq. ace. et inf., Mt 1^^ Mk li^O; after a positive adj. (Ge 49^^; 
cf. Robertson, Gr., 661), Mt IS^. », Mk 9«.45,47. 3. with other 
particles : dX\' ^, v.s. dAAa ; ^ yap, v.s. yap ; 17 Kai, or even, or also, Mt 
71", Lk 1111.12, Ro 215 49, al; ^roi . . . i Ro 6i« (cf. Wi lli^). 
r\ {ixriv), V.S. et, iii, 7. 

* i^yeiiok'cuw (<^ Tyycju-wv), 1. to lead the Way. 2. to lead in war, 
command (cf . Ramsay, IFas Christ horn at Bethlehem ? ; DCG, ii, 463 f .). 
3. to be governor of a province : c. gen. loc, Lk 2'-^ 31. t 

^ye^io.ia, -as, ^ « r/yc/xciv), [in LXX : Ge 36^0 {^^bii), Nu 1*» 

2^^ (^3*;?), Si 7* IQi, IV Mac 633 134*.] ^ule, sovereignty: Lk 31.+ 

■r\yf.\i.uiv, -6vo%, 6 {rj-yioixai), [in LXX for pjll^K , 112^, etc.;] 1. a 

leader, guide. 2. a commarider. 3. a governor of a province (pro- 
consul, propraetor, legate, or procurator; but cf. avOvTraros) '. Mt IQi^, 
Mk 139, Lk 2112, I Pe 21^^; of the Procurator of Judaea, Mt 
272,11,14,15,21,27 281*, Lk 2020, Ac 232*. 26, 33 241.10 2630. 4. For Heb. 

iB^S (LXX, xtA-tai) misread "^B^X , leaders : Mt 2« '°'''.t 

riyeoikai., -ov/xai, depon. mid., [in LXX (chiefly pres. ptcp.) for 

T33, CTNl, icr, etc.;] 1. to lead; (a) to guide, go before; (b) to 

rule, he leader: pres. ptcp., 7]yov/j.evos, a ruler, leader (MM, Exp., 
xiv), Mt 2« (i-^H Lk 222«, Ac 710 1412 1522, He 13^. i7. 24. 2. to suppose, 
believe, consider, think (Hdt., Soph., al. ; cf. Lat. duco) : c. dupl. ace, 
Ac 262, Phi 23.6 37^ I Ti 112 61, He 10^9 II11.26, n Pe li3 2i3 39- 1^ c. 
ace. seq. ws, c. ace., 11 Th 31^ ; c. ace. seq. adv., i Th 5i3 ; orav, Ja 1^ ; 
dvayKOLov, c. inf., II Co 9^, Phi 225 ; SiKaiov, c. inf., 11 Pe li3 ; c. ace. et 

inf.. Phi 3^ (cf. 81-, iK-Si-, c^-, Trpo-rjyeofJiaL).^ 

Syn. : v.s. hoK€w. 

^Sc'ws, adv. «ri8vs, sweet), [in LXX : Pr 32* (my), etc. ;] gladly, 
with pleasure : Mk 620 123", jj Qq lliS; superlat., rjhioTa, very gladly 
(Bl., § 11, 3), II Co 129-15.+ 

t]8tj, adv., in NT, always of time; now, already : Mt 3io, Mk 437, 
Lk 7^, Jo 436, al. ; vvv . , . ^., now already, i Jo 43 ; rf. irore, now at 
length, e. fut., Ro li" (cf. aprt). 

TjSiora, v.s. i^Sews. 

flhovr], -^?, ri « rjSoixat, to be glad), [in LXX : Nu ll^ (nyjo), Pr 

171, Wi 72 1620, and freq. in iv Mac ;] pleasure : 11 Pe 2i» ; pi., Lk 81*, 
Tit 33, Ja4i.3.+ 

* iqSu-oCTfios, -ov {<C'r]8vs, oa-fxr]), sweet-smelUng ; as subst., to ^., 
viint : Mt 2323, Lk 1142,t 

**^eos, -eos (-0V5), TO, [in LXX: Si, prol.27 20^6 <25), ly Mac 129 27.21 
524 132V* .J I ^ haunt, abode. 2. = l6o<;, custom, manner: pi., 
I Co I533.+ 

^Kcj, [in LXX chiefly for K12 ;] pf. with pres. meaning (hence 
impf. = plpf.), to have come, he -present : Mt 24*0, Mk 83 (late pf., rjKa, 
V. Swete, in 1. ; WH, App., 169), Lk 12*6 x52' , Jo 8*2, He 10^' 9- 3^, i Jo 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 199 

520, Re 225 33, 9 154 . aeq. irrS, c. gen. loc, Mt 8^\ Lk 1329 ; cV, Eo ll^* ; 
id, seq. ek, Jo 4*^; /xaKpoOtv, Mk 8^; eVi, c. ace, Re 3*. Metaph., of 
discipleship : Jo 6^"^ ; of time and events : absol., Mt 24^*, Jo 2^, u Pe 
310, Re 188; ggq. ^^^1, c ace. pers., Mt 233«, Lk 19^3 (cf. dv-, Ka^-7?»ca)).t 

t^iXci (Rec. -^Xi', L, ^A/; Heb. ^b^C), Eli, my God: Mt 27*« (cf. 

eA(i)i).t 

'HXei (Eec. 'HXi; RV, 'HXi), 6, indecl., Heli, Joseph's father: 
Lk 323.t 

'HXci'as (Eec. 'HAtas; LTr., 'HXtas; T, 'HXcias; cf. WH, App., 
155, Intr., § 408), -ov {-a, Lk l^^, WH), 6 (Heb. njbx, nrrbs), Elijah 

(ill Ki 17, al.) : Mt 11^* 16^* 173,4,10-12 27*^*9^ Mk G^' 828 94,5,11-13 
1538' 36, Lk 1^7 425.26 98, 19, 30, 33, »4^ Jo 121,25^ ja 517; ly 'H., in the 
portion concerning E., Ro 11^.+ 

iqXiKia, -as, rj (<[^Xt^, of the Same age, mature), [in LXX: 
Ez I318 (npip), Jb 2918, Wi 49, Si 26^7, freq. in ii-iv Mac;] always of 

age or maturity; "a stage of growth whether measured by age or 
stature"; 1. (a) age: Mt 627, Lk 12^5 (R, mg.), He ll^i; (b) full age, 
maturity: Jo 921.23, Eph 4". 2. stature: Lk 193 (Mt B^^, Lk 1225, 
AV, R, txt. ; but the prevailing usage in LXX and tt. favours the 
former meaning in these doubtful passages ; cf., Ellic, ICC, AR, on 
Eph, I.e.; Milligan, NTD, 74 f., and esp., MM, Exp., xv; e contra. 
Field, Notes, 6).t 

*^XiKos, -77, -ov, 1. prop., as big as, as old as. 2. As indirect 
interrog., what sized, what, how great, how small (the sense to be 
determined by the context) : Col 2^, Ja 35, Ga 6^^ (WH, mg. ; 7n;X-, 
WH, txt., RV).t 

■qXios, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for orpg;;] the sun : with art. (Bl., 
§46, 5), Mt 5*5 13*3 172 2429, Mk 132 4« 132" 162, Lk 4*0, Ac 220(i-xx) 
2613, Eph 426, Ja 111, Re li« 612 812 92 IQi 12i 168 1917 2123 ; ^A^eiv 
Tov ^., Ac 1311 ; ovSe /XT) Trea-r) tV avrous o rj., Re 7i« ; without art., Mt 
13«, Lk 2125 23*5, Ac 2720, I'Co 15*i, Re 72 I612 225.t 

^Xos, -ov, 6, [in LXX: Is 41^ (□npOO), etc.;] a nail: Jo 2025.t 

i^ficis, V.S. cyw. 

r\\i.ipa, -as, 17, [in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for DV;] day; 1. as 
distinct from night : gen. ^^lepas, by day (WM, § 30, 11), Re 2125 ; ^. k. 
vvKTos (v. K. ^.), Ac 92*, I Th 29, II Th 38, Re 48 (BL, § 36, 13) _; ^^€>as 
fiea-rj^, at mid-day, Ac 26i3; ace. durat., t. ^/xepas, Lk 213^; oXrjv ttjv 
■fj., Ro 836 ; ^v rifxepa, Jo 11®, Ro 1313 . ^^ipa<; 6Sos, a day's journey, 
Lk 2" ; fj. ytWroi, Lk 4*2 22^6 ; ^XiVci, Lk 912, al. ; metaph., Jo 9*, Ro 
1312, I Th 5*. 5> 8, II Pe 119. 2. Of a civil day of 24 hours, incl. night : 
Mt 63*, Mk 621, Lk 1314^ al; rpCrr} ^., Mt I621; ^/x€pa k. ^. (cf. 

Wr^ D'I\ Es 3*), II Co 4i«; 5\r]v r. f/.l Ro 83« IO21; pi., Jo 212, Ac 91^, 

al. ; rj. Twv a^vfioiv, Ae 123 ; t. a-a^fiarov, Lk 131*' 1^ ; 71 KvpiaKT} 7}., Re 
li**. 3. In Messianic sense, of the last day : rj rj. {iKeLvrj, r. Kvpiov, 



200 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

etc.), Mt T\ Lk 623, Ro 13i^ i Co l^, i Th 52, ii Th 2\ 11 Pe S^", al; 
by meton., as compared with the divine judgment on that day, 
1). avOfiuyTTivrj, of a human tribunal, I Co 4^ (EV, man's judgment). 
4. As in Heb. (also in Gk. writers; Bl, § 46, 9 ; M, Pr., 81), of time 
in general : Jo 8^^ 1420^ „ Qq Q-i^ ^ph Qn, „ Pe 318 • pi.^ Ac 157, gph 

516, He 10^- ; 7r5a-as ras rj. (cf. U^pTl bs , De 4*», al. ; MM, Exp., xv), 

Mt 2820; iKevaovrai ^. Srav (Sre), Mt Qi^, Mk 220, Lk 5^' 17^2; ai rj., C. 
gen. pers. (Ge 26i, al.), Mt 2\ Lk 1^, Ac 7*^ i Pe 320 ; dpxv r]fji€pwv, 
He 73. 

%eT€pos, -a, -ov (ly/Acts), poss. pron. of first pers., our : Ac 2^^ 
246 26^ Ro 15*, II Ti 415, I Jo 13 22 ; TO ^., Lk 16^2, WH, txt., R, mg. 
(to vfj.., Rec, WH, mg., R, txt.) ; ol -f)., our (people). Tit 3^*.t 

T) fi-r]v, V.S. rj. 
*n f^^iiQaur^s, -£s {<wh half + Oi^rjaKoj), [in LXX : IV Mac 4ii*;] 
half -dead : Lk 103o.t 

TJ)xiCTus, -€ia, -V, gen., -ovs (late, as in tt., for cl., -eos; BL, § 8, 4; 
Mayser, 294), n. pi., rj/iiaLa (Rec, cl, -cia), [in LXX for ^sq, n^sqo;] 
half; 1. as adj., agreeing in gender and number with the substantive 

following, Ttt ri/JLiO-ia T. v-n-ap)^6vTWV, Lk 19^. 2. As neut. subst., to y/XLO-v, 

the half; rj. (anarth.), a half: c. gen., ^. Kaipov, Re 12^*; Iw? rjfxLorov^ 
T. /SacriXetas /aou, Mk 623 . after a cardinal number, r)fi€pa<; Tpeis k. rjixurv, 
Re 119' lit 

*t i^|jiiwpo»' (Rec. -lov), -ov, TO (i7/ti, half + wpa), /iaZ/ a7t hour: Re 

^k-iKa, rel. adv. of time, at which time, when; seq. av, c. subjc, 
whensoever: iiCoS^^'^^.t 

Tjircp, V.S. rj. 
*Tjmos, -a, -ov, mild, gentle: i Th T (WH, R, mg., vi^ttio?); seq. 
Trpos, 11 Ti 22*. t 

"Hp (L, "Hp), 6, indecl. (Heb. TV), Er, an ancestor of Jesus : Lk 

328.t 

**tTip£fios, -OV, [in LXX: Es 3^^ A*;] quiet, tranquil (Luc, al.) : 
I Ti 22.t 

Syn. : ^avxi-os, q.v. 

'Hpa)8T)s (Rec. -w8r]s), -ov, 6, Herod; 1. Herod the Great: Mt 2, 
Ac 2335. ' 2. Herod Antipas (6 Terpadpxv^, Mt 14^) : Mt 14i. 3. \ Mk 6 
815, Lk 15 31, 19 83 97, 9^ 1331 23, Ac 427 131. 3. Herod Agrippa I: Ac 

121. 6, 11, 19, 21 (of. 'Aypt'TTTras (II)).t 

'HpwSiavoi (Eec 'Hpw-), -wv, ot, Herodians, partisans of Herod 
(cf. Tovs Ttt 'UpwSov ^povovvra^, FIJ, Ant., xiv, 15, 10) : Mt 22i«, Mk 
3« 12i3.t 

'HpwSids (Rec 'Hpw-), -aSos, 17, Herodias, granddaughter of Herod 
the Great : Mt 143.6, Mk 6i7'i9'22, Lk 3i9.t 

'HpwSiuK (Eec 'Hpo)-), -wvos, 6, Herodion : Ro 16ii.t 

'Ho-aias (Rec. 'Ho-aias), -ov, o (Heb. liTjnjr), Isaiah, the prophet : 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 201 
Mt 33 41* 81- 1217 131*' 35 157, Mk 7«, Lk 3* 41^, Jo 123 1238, 39, 4i^ Ac S^s 

2825, Ro 927. 29 1016. 20 1512 • iytyCvui<TK€v T. Trpocf>y]Tr]v 'H., Ac 830 . jV t. 
•H., Mk P.t 

'Haau, o, indecl. (Heb. it^rjr, Ge 2525), Esau: Eo 9^3 (Lxx)^ He 

1120 i2i«.t 

TJco-dofiai, V.8. rjTTau). 

ri(T(T<av (Rec. i]TT-, the Attic literary form), ^a-a-ov, inferior, less ; 
neut., TO 17., adverbially, Zess ; 11 Co 12^^ ; €ts to ^., /or </ie worse (opp. 
to KpuTTov) : I Co ll^^.t 

T^auxtiioj, [in LXX chiefly for IDpB? ;] to he still ; (a) to rest from 
labour : Lk 23*^ ; (b) to live quietly : i Th 4}^ ; (c) to be silent : Lk 
143, Ac 1118 211* (cf, jb 327, Ne 58).t 

SYN. : (Tiydw (q.V.), cruaTrdw. 

■f\<Tuxta, -as, 17 (-< Tjau'xios, q.v.), [in LXX for pXTVl , l^ffif , etc. ;] 

1. quietness : ii Th 312. 2. stillness, silence : Ac 222, i xi 2ii« i2.t 

iqaoxios, -a, -ov (= the more freq. ^crvxo^; cf. Wi I81*, Si 25^0), 
[in LXX : Is 662 (nn-n35) *;] quiet, tranquil : i Ti 22, i Pe 3*.t 

Syn. : ^pc)u,os, of tranquillity arising from without; rj., from 
within (v. Ellic. on i Ti, I.e. ; but also v. CGT, ib.).t 

T]Toi, disjunct, part., whether : Ro Gi'^.t 

i^TTdw, -w {rjrrcr-, II Co 1213, v.s. ^(r<TU)v), [in LXX for nnn , etc. ;] 
pass., 1. to be inferior : seq. vircf), 11 Co 12i3. 2. to be overcome : 
absol, iiPe220; c. dat., ib.i^.t 

tr^TTtifia, -Tos, TO, [in LXX for DO, Is 31^ '8)*;] defect, loss, 

defeat : Eo II12 (cf. Is, I.e.), i Co 6^ (cf. Field, Notes, 160 f., 171 f. ; 
Lft., Notes, 212).t 

tJttwk, v.s ^cra-oiv. 

f|x^w, -w (<C ^X^'), [in LXX for HDn , etc. ;] to sound : 1 Co 13i 
(cf. i$-, KaT-r/xcw)-'!' 

Tjxos, -ov, 6 (also in late and MGr., -cos, to, Lk 212^), [in LXX for 

?ian , etc. ;] 1. a noise, sound : Ac 22 ; rj. ^aXao-o-T/s, Lk 212^ ; o-aATrtyyos, 
He 121^. 2. a report : seq. nepl, Lk 437.t 





e, and ^, Otjra, to, indecl., theta, the eighth letter. As a 
numeral, ^ = 9, 0^ = 9000. 

eoSSoios, -ov, 6 (Aram. ij{"l|1 , ""in), Thaddaus : Mt 103, Mk 31^ 

(WH, mg., AeygySaros, q.v.).t 

edXaaoro, -7s, r], [in LXX chiefly for d;; ;] the sea : Mt 23i5, Mk 

1123, Lk 2125, Eo 927, He II12, Ja 1«, Ju i3, Ee 71, al. ; t6 Trc'Aayos t^s 6. 
(v. Tr., ut infr.), Mt IS** ; 6 ovpavo? k. 17 y^ k. ^ ( ., of the whole world, 



202 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Ac 42*, al. (Hg 2^) ; 6. iaXiv-q, Re 4« IS^ ; of the Mediterranean, Ao 
10«.32 17U. of the Eed Sea, Ipvdpa d., Ac 73«, i Co lO^'^ He 1129; of 

an inland lake (as Heb. DJ), 6. r. VaXiXata^, Mt 4^8 1529, Mk 1" 7"; 

T. TiySepiaSos, Jo 21^ ; T. r. T. T., Jo 6^ ; of the same, simply rj 6., Mt 
416, Mk 213, al. 

SrN. : TTcXayos, "the vast expanse of open water"; 6., "the sea 
as contrasted with the land " (Tr., Syn., xiii). 

6aXir(i>, [in LXX for pD , etc. ;] to heat, warm ; metaph., (a) to 
inflame (Trag.) ; {b) to foster, cherish : Eph 52^, i Th 2\f 

edfiap (Tr., ®aixdp), 7] (Heb. IJpin , Ge 38«), Tamar : Mt l^.t 

OajiPe'dj, -u) (^aya/?os), [in LXX for nra ni., pi., etc.;] 1. to be 
amazed. 2. In late Gk., to astonish, terrify (11 Ki 22*) : pass., Mk 12^ 
1032; seq. iwC, c. dat rei, Mk 102*.t 

edfipos, -ovs, TO, [in LXX for in© , etc. ;] amazement : Lk 4^^ 5^, 

Ac S^o.t 

*0am(Tifios, -ov (•< ^oti'ttTos), deadly : Mk IGi^^lt 

eavaTT]-<j>(5pos, -ov « ^avaros, c^epo)), [in LXX: Nu 1822 (j^:;;;;^)^ 
Jb 3323, IV Mac 818.26 1526*;] deadly, death-bringing : Ja 38.t 

Qdvaros, -ov, 6 (Bv^crKw), [in LXX chiefly for ri'D , TID , sometimes 
forn^l;] death; 1. of the death of the body, whether natural oc 

violent: Jo 11", Phi 227, He 723, al; opp. to ^o,,?, Ro 838, p^i lao. of 
the death of Christ, Ro S^o, Phi 3i», He 2^; pvi<j6ai (o-oi^av) eV 6., 
II Co 110, He 57 ; TTcpiAuTTOs €0)5 ^avarou, Mt 2638, Mk 143* ; ^i^p, {S^xpi) 
e., Phi 28, Re 210; ivXr^y^ Oai'drov, a deadly wound. Re 133; l^elv 
ddvarov, Lk 22', He 11*; y€vea-6ai Oavdrov, Mk 91; ev'o^os Oavdrov, 
Mk 14«* ; Oavdro) reXfVTav (Ex 211^, rup-^ ma), Mk 71" ; death personi- 
fied, Ro 69, I Co 1526, Re 21*; pi., of deadly perils, 11 Co 1123. 2. Of 
spiritual death : Jo 52" 8*1, Ro 7i«, Ja li*, 520, i Jo 31* 5i«, al. ; of 
eternal death, Ro 132 75^ al. ; 6 6. 6 SevVcpos, Re 2ii 218 (cf. Cremer, 
283 ff. ; DB, iii, 114 ff. ; DCG, i, 791 f.). 

6ai'aTou, -w, [in LXX chiefly for TOD hi., ho., also for 2in , etc. ;] 
to put to death: c. ace, Mt IO21 26*9 271, Mk I312 14". Lk 21i6, 11 Co 
69, I Pe 318; pass., Ro 83". Metaph. : Ro 8i3 ; pass., c. dat, (in relation 
to), Ro 7^t 

edTTTw, [in LXX chiefly for inp ;] to bury : c. ace, Mt 82I' 22 
1412, Lk 9*9. 60^ Ac 5«'9'i<»; pass., Lk I622, Ac 229. i Co 15*.t 

0apd (Rec. ®dpa), 6, indecl. (Heb. mCl), Terah (Ge 11) : Lk 33^t 

eoppc'w, -w (later form of Bapa-ew), [in LXX : Pr I21, Ba 421. 27, 
Da LXX 6i<'(i7), IV Mac 13ii 17"*;] to be of good cheer or courage, to 
be confident: 11 Co 5''»8, He 13"; t. TrcTrot^r^o-et, 11 Co 102; seq. cis, 
II Co 101 ; ev, ib. 7i«.t 

SVN. : ToXpdui. " 6. has reference more to the character, t. to 
its manifestation " (Thayer, s.v. roA/iaw). 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 203 

Bapaiu, -u) (v.s. 6appew), [in LXX chiefly for K"); , c. neg. ;] to be 

of good courage : imperat., ddptret, -elre, Mt 92. 22 1427^ -^^ gso io*9, 
Jo 1633, Ac 23ii.t 

6(ip<ros, -ovs, TO, courage : Ac 28^^. t 

0au/ia, -T09, t6, [in LXX: Jb IT^ IS^o 20* 216 (.,j^ ^tp ^ ♦ .-] ^^ 

a wonder : n Co 11^*. 2. wonder : Ee 17^.t 

Oaujidju, [in LXX for HJffZ , etc. ;] ^0 marvel, wonder, wonder at : 
absol., Mt 8i«.27 933 1531 2120 2222 271*, Mk 520 155, Lk pi (E, txt.; 
ICG, in 1., but v. infr.), ib. «3 825 ^u 24*1, Jo 520 V\ Ac T 4^3 13*1, 
Ee 17'^'^; c. ace. pers., Lk 7^; c. ace. rei, Lk 24^2 (WH, E, mg. om.), Jo 
528, Ac 731 ; Baip.a fiiya, Ee 17^ ; irpoVwTTov (LXX for D139 Nt?p , De 

10^^ al.), Ju ^^ ; seq. 8ia, c. ace, Mk 6^ Jo V^ ; seq. ev, c. dat. obj., 
Lk 121 (? E, mg., but v. supr.) ; seq. iiri, c. dat. rei, Lk 233 422 943^ 
2026, Ac 312; 7re/)t, Lk 218; 6iTi<Tw, Ee 133; 5ri, Lk 1138, Jo 3^ 427, 
Ga 1« ; €t, Mk 15**, i Jo 3^3. Pass. (Si 383, wi S^i) : seq. h, c. dat. 
pers., II Th l^o (cf. ^K-^av/^a^wj.t 

Oaufido-ios, -a, -ov (<^^av/ia), [in LXX chiefly for K^D ni. (n. pi. 
= nisbp:) ;] wonderful ; n. pi., wonders : Mt 21i*.t 

OaufAaoTcJs, -'?, -ov (<^ ^au/xa^cj), [in LXX for K^gl and cogn. forms 
(Ps 117 (118)22.23 118 (119)129, Is 251, al )^ j^^, ^i (gx I511, Ps 64 (65)5, 
al.), Tl» (Ps 81' 9 92 (93)*), etc. ;] wonderful, marvellous : Mt 21*2 (lxx)^ 

Mk 1211 ('*>•), Jo 930, I Pe 29, Ee 15i.3.t 

* 9€<1, -as, ri (fem. of 6e6<:, q.v.), a goddess : Ac 1927.t 
Qidofiai, -wfiat, [in LXX : 11 Ch 22^ (nsi), To 22 136. 1*, Jth 15^, 
II Mac 2* 336, III Mac 5*'^*;] to behold, look upon, contemplate, view 
(in early writers with a sense of wondering), in NT apparently always 
in literal, physical sense of " careful and deliberate vision which 
interprets ... its object": c. ace. rei, Mt 11^, Lk 72* 23^5, Jo li*.32 
43s 11*5, Ac 229, I Jo 11 ; c. ace. pers., Mt 22ii, Ac 2127, Eo I52*, i Jo 
412; c. ptep., Mk 16^*1, Lk 52^, Jo 138, Ac 1"; seq. 5ri, Jo 65, i Jo 41*; 
pass., Mt 61 235, Mkl6fiiU 

SyN. : v.s. Oeiopeo}. 
*t6caTpiiw {<^diaTpov), to make a spectacle of, expose to contempt 
(eccl. ; iK6-, Polyb.) : pass., He 1033.t 

*6e'aTpo»', -ou, TO (<^ ^cao/u-ai), 1. a theatre (used also as a place of 
assembly) : Ac 1929> 3i. 2. Collective for 01 Biarai, the spectators. 
3. = ^ca, Biapa, a spectacle, show : metaph., i Co 4^.1 

Oelo^ -ov, TO, [in LXX : Ge I92*, De 2923(22), Jb 18i5, Ps 10 (11)7, 
Is 3033 349^ Ez 3822 (nnsia) , m Mae 25 * ;] brimstone : Lk 1729 d-^), 

Ee 917. 18 1419 1920 2019, 218.+ 

66105, -c^, -cZov « ^£os), [in LXX : Ex 313 3531^ jj, 273 334, Pr 2" 

(^^, "iJ^^N' Q"''!^*?)' Si 635, nMaCg, iiiMaCi, ivMacjg*;] divine: 



204 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Svvafxt^, II Pe 1^; ^vo-ts (for parallel in tt., v. MM, Exp., xv), ib>; to 6.^ 
the Deity (so in cl. ; of God, in Philo and FIJ), Ac IT^^.t 

**t 0€i<5tt]s, -rjTu^, r) {<^ 6eLo<:), [in LXX : Wi 18^ * ;] divine natiire, 
divinity : Ro l^*' (for ex. from tt., v. MM, Exp., xv). t 

Sfn- : OeoTTrj':, deity, godhead, divine personality. Oei. = divine 
nature and properties, a summary term for the attributes of deity, 
differing from ^cot?/? as quality or attribute from essence. 

*t0€iw8T]s, -«s {<C6iiov), of brimstone, sulphiireous : Re 9^'^.+ 
1 6Ar]fAa, -Tos, TO (■< OeXui), [in LXX chiefly for j^gn , also for 

fi'S'^ , etc. ;] will, (a) objectively = that v^hich is vt^illed : Mt IS^* 

Lk 12*^ Jo 630, I Co 7", I Th 6'^ ii Ti 2^^, He lO^", Re 4^ ; 0. t. OeoZ. 
Ac 221^ Ro 2i« 122, gph 1^, Col 1« 4^2, i Pe 4-'; t. Kvptov, Eph 51^; pi. 
of precepts, Mk 3^-, WH, mg., Ac IS^^C^xx); ^o-rtv to 6., c. gen. pers. 
seq. Tva, Jo 639. "o^ i Qq 1612 • c. inf., i Pe 2^^ ; c. ace. et inf., i Th 4^ 
(b) subjectively = to ^e'Aeiv (cf. ^e'Xr/o-ts) : Lk 2325, Jq 113^ i Pe 317 
II Pe 121 ; TTotelv, Mt 721 12^0 21^\ Mk 3^^ (pi., WH, mg., v. supr.) 
Jo 43-1 638 7I' 931, Eph 6«, He lO^. ^> 36 1321^ j Jq 21^ ; y[ye<x6ai, Mt 6i» 
26*2, Lk 22^2^ Ac 211* . ^ ^ISoKta {(3ovX^) tov 6., Eph l^- ^ ; cV tQ 6. rov 
Beov, Ro li«; Bta e. e^ov, Ro 1532, I Co V, II Co 1^ 8^, Eph l^, Col l^, 
n Ti 11; Kar^ TO 6. r. Otov, Ga 1*. i Pe 4i9, i Jo S^*; pL, Eph 23 
(Cremer, 728).t 

tee'Xriais, -cojs, ^ (OeXw), [in LXX: II Ch W^, Pr 835 (^ix-j) , Ez 

1823 (^gn) , Da LXX 11*5 (^ny) , To 1218, Wi 1625, „ Mac 12i«, iii Mac 

22«*;] in colloq. and MGr. = to deXeiv, will : He2*.t 

QiXta (the strengthened form iOeXw is found in Horn., and is the 
more freq. in Attic; v. Rutherford, NPhr., 415 f.), [in LXX for 
HUN , ^'Sn ; c. neg., ]XD pi., etc. ;] to will, be willing, wish, desire 

(more freq. than fiovXofxai, q.v., in vernac. and late Gk., also in MGr. ; 
for various views as to its relation to /3., v. Thayer, 286 ; but v. also 
BL, § 24, s.v.) : absol., Ro 9^\ i Co 4^9 1218, Ja 4^5 ; t. Oeov ^cAovtos, 
Ac 1821; c. ace. rei, Mt 202i, Mk 1436, Jq 157^ Rq 715- le, i Co 421 736, 
Ga 51^; c. inf., Mt 5*o, Mk 10*3^ Jo 621.67, R0721, Ga 4^; c. ace. et inf., 
Mk 72*, Lk 162, Jo 2122,23, Ro iQi9^ I Co 145, Ga 6i3; oi OiXoi, Mt 183o, 
al. ; id. c. inf., Mt 2'8, Mk 626, Jo 5«, i Co 16^ ; seq. Iva, Mt 712, Mk 
625, Jo 1724. opp. to Ttoiioy, Trpda-a-fo, cVcpyeo), Ro 715.19, n Co 81"' n, Phi 
213 ; seq. ^ {ICG, in 1. ; Deiss., LAE, I7924), i Co 14i9 ; eiXtov iv TaTrttvo- 
<^poarw{j {of his own mere will, by humility, R, mg), Col 2i8; in OT 
quotations, for Heb. yBU , c. ace. pers., Mt 27'*3 ; c. ace. rei, Mt 9i3 12^ 

He 105.8; c. inf., i Pe 310 ; for -iax , c. inf., Ac 728 (v. Cremer, 726 ff.). 

0€jiAios, -ov « Tterifii), [in LXX for ]ia"lN , Tjia , etc. ;] of or 

for a foundation; as subst., 6 6. (sc. Xt^os), a foundation stone, founda- 
tion : Lk 6*8,49 1429 (but v. Deiss., BS, 123); pi., ol 6. (el). He llio. 
Re 211*' 19; ^eut., t6 6. (Arist., Phys., vi, 6, 10, LXX and later writers). 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 205 

Ac 1626 . metaph., Ko I520, i Co S^o-i^, Eph 22*, i Ti 6^9, 11 Ti 2^^, 
He 6^t 

defieXiou, -a>, [in LXX chiefly for TD^ ;] to lay the foundation of, 
to found: c. ace, t. yrjv, He 1^** (i-xx); pass., Mt 7^^, Lk 6*^; metaph., 

I Pe 510 (R, mg., settle) ; pass., Eph 3i«, Col l^^.t 

*t eco-StSaKTos, -ov, taught of God (of. SiSaKTol O^ov, Jo 6*5) : i Th 40.+ 
*6co-\6yos, -ov, 6, 1. one who treats 0^ the Divine nature (applied 
in cl. to the old poets and philosophers). 2. In eccl., a theologian, 
divine : Re, tit., Rec.t 

** 6eofiax^w, -w « ^«o/Aaxos), [in LXX : II Mac 7^^ * ;] to fight against 
God : Ac 239 (Rec.).t 

♦*t0€ojjidxos, -ov, [in Sm. : Jb 26^, Pr 9^8 21i«*;] fighting against 
God: Ac539.t 

*t 6e6irK€uoTos, -ov (•< 6e6<;, Trve'w), inspired by God : 11 Ti 3^"^ 
ee6s, -o9, o, rj (Ac 1937 only ; v. M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc, Oti 
(Mt 27*«; cf. De 32*, al.), [in LXX chiefly for D^ri^N, also for b^ and 

other cognate forms, mn^ , etc. ;] a god or deity, God. 1. In polythe- 
istic sense, a god or deity : Ac 28", i Co 8*, 11 Th 2*, al. ; pi., Ac. 
14" 1926, Ga 48, al. 2. Of the one true God; (a) anarthrous : Mt 62*, 
Lk 2038, al. ; esp. c. prep. (Kiihner 3, iii, 605), aTro 6., Jo 32 ; cV, Ac 5^\ 

II Co 5\ Phi 39; VTTO, Ro 131 ; Trapa ^eoC, Jo 1" ; -n-apa OeQ, II Th 16, 
I Pe 2* ; Kara ^eov, Ro 82^, II Co 7^' ^^ ; also when in gen. dependent 
on an anarth. noun (BL, § 46, 6), Mt 27*3, Lk 32, Ro 1^^ i Th 2^^; as 
pred., Lk 20^8, Jo 1^, and when the nature and character rather than 
the person of God is meant, AcS^^, Ga26, al. (M, Th., 14); (b) more 
freq., c. art. : Mt 123, Mk 2', al. mult. ; c. prep., Sltto t. 0., Lk 126; iK, 
Jo 8*2, al.; Trapa to5 0., Jo 8*"; TT. tQ e., Ro ^^^•,iv, Col 33; IttX tQ> $., 
Lk 1*7; tVl rhv 6., Ac 1519; ei? T. e., Ac 241^; ,rpos T. e., Jo 12; c. gen. 
pers., Mt 2232, Mk 1226-27^ Lk 203^, Jo 20^^ al. ; 6 6. /xov, Ro 18, Phi 13, 
al. ; 6 6. Kal irarrip k. t. \., Ro 15", Eph 13, Phi 42", al. ; c. gen. rei, Ro 
155,13,33^ II Co 13, I Th 523; ^i ^. ^,ov, Mt 1623, Mk 1217, I Co 211; ^^ 
irpos Tov 6., Ro 1517, He 217 51 ; t. ^ei, as a superl. (LXX, Jos 33), Ac 
720, II Co 10*; Hebraistically, of judges (Ps 81 (82)6), Jq iqs* (lxx), 35^ 

eeoa^Pcia, -as, -7 « deotre^i^s), [in LXX : Ge 20" (Q"'^■b^? H^T), 

Jb 2828 (-.jiKid.), Si I2*, Ba 5*, iv Mac 76.22 j< 1528 jj 1715*.] f^ar of 

God, godliness : 1 Ti 2i9.t 

eeoaeprfs, -e9 « ^eos, cri/Sofiai), [in LXX for D^nhj? NT , Ex 1821, 

al. ;] God-fearing, godly : Jo 93i.t 
SyI^^. : cicre/ST^s (q-V.), Bprj<TKo<;. 
* SeooTOYVis, -es (<^ ^eos, o-Tvyew), 1. passive, as freq. in cl., hateful 
to God : Ro 13o (R, txt., cf. Lft., Notes, 256). 2. Active, hating God : 
ib. (R, mg., cf. ICC, in l.).t 

*t de6TT]s, -7;tos, 17, deity, Godhead : Col 29t 
Syn- •' OtLOTT]^, q.v. 
ec6<^iXos, -ov (^€05, <^tA.os), Tfieophilus : Lk 13, Ac l^.t 



206 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

ecpaircia, -as, i] {depaTrtvui), [in LXX for 0^2? , Ge 45i« (cf. Es 5'), 

etc. ;] 1. service. 2. heali7ig : Lk 9^^ (Field, Notes, 60), Re 222. 3^ 
Collective, household attendants, servants : Lk 12*^ (LXX, 11, c.).t 

Sepaireuw, [in LXX for nOT , etc. ;] 1. to do service, serve : c. ace. 
pers., pass., Ac 17^^. 2. As medical term, to treat (MM, Exp., xv), 
cure, heal : Mt 12^0, Mk 6^, Lk 6", al. ; c. ace. pers., Mt 42*, Mk l"*, 
al. ; aeq. a7r6, Lk 51^ 6^» V^ S^- « ; e. vocrov {fxaXaKtav), Mt 423, al. 

Syn. : idofjiai (v. Field, Notes, 60 ; MM, Exp., I.e.). 

OepdiTUk', -ovTos, 6, [in LXX chiefly for Tjy;] an attendant, 
servant : He 3^ (i^xx) f 

Sl'J^. : V.S. Sia/covos. 

eepi'^w « eipos), [in LXX chiefly for ixp ;] to reap : Mt 6", Lk 
122^ Ja 5*; fig., Mt 252^-26, Lk I921.22, Jo 436-38, „ Co 9«, Ga e^'S 
Ee 14^* ; c. ace, t. a-apKiKd, 1 Co 9^^ ; <f)Oopdv, ^wrjv aiwvLov, Ga 6^ ; t. y^v, 
Re 14i«.+ 

ecpio-ixos, -ov, 6 (-< 9fpit,ui), [in LXX chiefly for TXi? ;] harvest ; 

(a) the act : Jo 43^ ; (6) the time : fig., Mt 1330.39, Mk 429 (c) the crop : 
tig., Mt 937. 38, Lk 102, Re U^^.i 

**eepi<rr^s, -oC, 6 «^6pt'^oj), [in LXX : Da LXX Bel 32, th ib.s'*;] 
a reaper: Mt 133o.39.t 

Qepiiaivu {<C0epp.6<;), [in LXX chiefly for Dan;] to warm, heat; 
mid., to warm oneself: Mk 145*. 6", Jq I8I8.25, Ja 2^^.f 

e^Pfi^, -»?s, ^, [in LXX : Jb 6^', Ps 18 (19)6, Be 4^1 (non and 
derivatives), Si 3828*;] heat: Ac 283.t 

Oe'pos, -ous, TO [dipoi, to heat), [in LXX chiefly for ]^j5;] summer: 

Mt 2432, Mk 1328, Lk 213o.t 

eeao-aXovtKcu's, -cws, o, a Thessalonian : Ac 20* 272, i Th 1^ 11 Th 
l^t 

eeaaaXoKiKT], -77s, 17, Thessalonica, a city of Macedonia : Ac 
171,11,13^ Phi 4l^ iiTi4i".+ 

ecoSas (perh. contr. from ©edSwpos, but v. MM, Exp., xv), -a, 6, 
Theudas : Ac 5^^.f 

Qeupiw, -a» (<[ ^cwpo's, a spectator, <^OedofxaL), [in LXX chiefly for 
nxi , mn ;] (pres. and impf. only, exc. Jo 73 (fut.), Mt 28\ Lk 23*8, Jq 
85\ Re 11^2 (aor.) ; BL, § 24) ; 1. (el.), to look at, gaze, behold : absol., 
Mt 275^ Mk 15*^ Lk 2335; geq. ttws, Mk 12*1; ttoS, Mk 15*7; ^ ^cc. 
pers., Jo 6*0' 62 12*5 igio-io, Ac 3i« 2038 252*, Re II11.12. [^^ ^ pt^p , 
Mk 515, Lk 1018, Jo 6i« 1012 2012.1*, i Jo 3^^ c. ace. rei, Mt 28i, Lk 
1429 216 23*8, Jo 223 62 73, Ac 4^3 8i3 ; id. c. ptcp., Jo 206, Ac 7^6 10^ ; 
seq. oTi, Ac 192*. 2. In popular lang. (Kennedy, Sources, 155; Bl., 
§ 24, s.v. opav), in pres. and impf. = opdio, to see, perceive, discern : seq. 
oTi, Mk 16*, Jo 419 1219, Ac 1926 2710 ; TroVai, Ac 2120 ; 7rr?Ai/cos, He 7* ; 
c. ace. rei, Mk 538; id. e. ptcp., Ac 17^6 286; e. ace. pers., Mk 311, Jo 
1419, Ac 9' 1722; TTviZpxi, Lk 2437; ^^ ^.^ Jq 1417. geq. Stl, Jo 98; c. 
ptcp., Lk 2439. 3. Hebraistically, to experience, partake of : t. Odvarov, 

Jo 8" (cf. Ps 88 (89)*9) ; r. 80'^av, Jo I72* (cf. dva-, 7rapa-^€<op€a>).t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 207 

eewpia, -a?, ^ (v.s. ^ewpc'o)), [in LXX : Da LXX 5^, ii Mac 5^* 
15^^*, III Mac 524*;] 1. a viewing. 2. = Oewprj/ia, a spectacle, sight: 
Lk 23*^ (both senses in cl.).t 

e-fiK-q, -7/5, ^ «Tt^77/it), [in LXX: Ex 252«<27) (jtjj), Is Qi* 

(n5^), lb. 32^ *;] a receptacle, chest, case : of the sheath of a sword, 

Jo ISii.t 

Qr\\dlia « OrjX-^, a breast), [in LXX chiefly for pr hi. ;] 1. of the 

mother, to suckle : Mt 241^, Mk 13^"^, Lk 2123. 2. Of the young, to 
suck : Mt 21^6 . ^ao-rov's, Lk ll^^ (cf. Jb 3^2, Ca 8\ al.).t 

0TjXus, -€ia, -V, [in LXX chiefly for HSpJ ;] female : as subst,, 
^ 0., a female, a woman : Eo 12«.27; ^^ 6., Mt 19*, Mk 10«, Ga 328.t 

Br\pa, -a9, 17, [in LXX for T5f , pj^^p , TWl . and cogn. forms ;] 
1. a hunting, chase (Hdt., Xen., al,). 2. prey, game (cl.). 3. As in 
Ps 34 (358) ^ J-,^r^ , a net : Eo 11^ (but v. Thayer, s.vj.t 

Oripeuw (■< ^?7pa), [in LXX for TIJT , etc. ;] to hunt, ensnare, 
catch : metaph., Lk ll^^.t 

*t 0T]piop,axc(>>, -w (■<[ Orjpiov, fjLd)^o/xai), to fight with wild beasts 
(Diod., al.) : i Co 1532.t 

OrjpioK, -ov, TO (dimin. of Oi^p), [in LXX chiefly for iTO;] a ii^iZd 

ftms^, 6eas<; Mk V\ Ac 11« 28*. ^^ Tit 1^2, He I220, Ja 3^, Ee &^; of 
Antichrist, Ee 11^ 13-20.t 

©Tjoraupi^w, [in LXX for ]D2? , etc. ;] to lay up, store up : of 
riches, Ja 5^; id. c. dat, pers., Lk 122\ 11 Co 12^*; c. ace. rei, i Co 

162; Orjo-avpovi iavriij, Mt 6^*' 20; paS8., II Pe 3^; metaph., opy^v cauTW, 

Eo 25 (cf. Pr 118, Pss. Sol 99).t 

6T]<Taup<5s, -ov, o (<^ TLOrjfxi), [in LXX chiefly for lylN ;] 1. a place 

of safe keeping ; (a) a casket : Mt 2^^ ; (b) a treasury (i Mac 3^^ and 
freq. in cl.) ; (c) a storehouse (Ne 13^2, De 28^2, al.) : Mt 13^2 . metaph., 
of the soul, Mt 1235; t. Ka^Sms, Lk G**. 2. a treasure: Mt e^^-^ii 13", 
Lk 1233.34^ He 1126; e. iv oipayQ (v. Dalman, Words, 206 ff.), Mt I921, 
Mk 1021, Lk 1822 ; of the knowledge of God through Christ, 11 Co 4^ ; 
T. (ropia<i K. yvoicrews, Col 23. t 

Qiyydvta, [in LXX for V32 , Ex 19^2 * ;] 1. to touch, handle : Col 
221, He 1220 (LXX). 2. to injure (like Heb. yjj, and as in Eur., Iph. 
Aul, 1351) : c. gen.. He 1128.t 

Syn. : v.s. aTTTci). 

eXipu, [in LXX chiefly (6 dXi^wv) for lis ;] to press : c. ace. pers., 
Mk 3^ ; 680s TeOXififievq, a narrow (compressed) way, Mt 71*. Metaph. 
(as freq. in LXX), to oppress, afflict, distress : c. ace. pers., 11 Th 1^ ; 
pass. (Vg., tribulor, tribulationem patior), 11 Co 1' 4^ 7*, i Th 3*, 11 Th 
1^, I Ti 510, He 1137 (cf. Sltto-, <rvv-e\iftw).f 

eXii|ns (LTr., eXIi/ris), -€0)5, ^ (< 0\C(3io), [in LXX for IT^y , etc. ;] 



208 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

pressure (Arist.). In LXX and NT metaph., tribulation, affliction, 
distress: Mt 24^21,29^ Mk ld^^'^\ Jo IS^i, Ac 7" ll^^, Eo 12^2, n Co 

14.8 417 6* 7^ 82.13, Phi 41^ II Th 18, Ja 127, Re 19 29' 22 714; c. ivdyKT} 

(q.v.), I Th 3'^; arevoxt^pLa (which from the order of the words would 
appear to be the stronger term), Ro 2^ S^S; Stwyyuos, Mt I321, Mk 
417, II Th 1* ; e. cV, Jo 1633, I Co 728, Re 2io ; ^px^aOai in{, Ac 7^^ ; eV 
Okiyl^et, I Th 1« ; pi., Ac 710 1422 2023, Ro 53, Eph 3i3, i Th 33, He 10^3; 
T. Xpia-Toi, Col 12* ; e. T^s KapSca^, II Co 2* : 6. iyetpeiv. Phi l^^.t 

Srx. : dvdyKr), Siwy/xos, (rT€vo\ii>pia (v. supr., and cf. Tr., Syn, 
§lv; Lft., Notes, 4:5). 

0^'1^(rKa), [in LXX chiefly for mO;] to die; pf. (M, Pr., 114), to 
be dead: Mt 22o, Mk 15*^ Lk 7^2 8«, Jo 11^* 1933, Ac 14^9 25^^; 
metaph., of spiritual death, i Ti 5^ (cf. dTro-, a-vv-aTro-6vrj(TK<D).f 

e^TcJs, -V, -o'v « eyyaKw), [in LXX : Pr 3^3 202* (qix), Jb 3023 

(•«n), Is 5112 (nna), Wi 91* 1517, n Mac 9^2, m Mac 329*;] subject to 

death, mortal : Ro 612 gn, i Co 15^3, 54 „ Co 4^ 5^t 

*t6opupd^u {<C66pvfto<:), = Tvpfid^w (q.v.), to disturb, trouble: 
pass., Lk lO^i.t 

Oopupe'w, -Sy «^o>/?o?), [in LXX: Na 23(4) (bjn ho.), Da LXX 
317 (nya ni.), Jg 326, Wi 1319, Si 40"*;] 1. to make a noise or uproar: 
mid., of loud and ostentatious lamentation, Mt 923, -^^ 539, ^c 201". 
2. Trans., to trouble, throw into confusion : t. itoX-lv, Ac 17^. t 

OopuPos, -ov, 6, [in LXX for ]ian , etc. ;] a noise, uproar, tumult, 

as of an excited mob: Mt 26^ 272*, Mk 14^, Ac 20^ 213* 3418; of 
mourners, = o;^Xos Oopvftovfjuvo^, Mk 5^^.i 

0pauw, [in LXX for I^SI (De 2833, jg 434 536) _ etc. ;] to break in 
pieces, shatter; metaph., to break down: Lk 4i8(Lxx\f 

* 0p^fi/Aa, -Tos, TO (rpe^o)) ; 1. a nurseling, esp. of animals (Eur., 
Plat., al.j. 2. cattle : Jo 4i2.t 

QpY]V€ia, -w « Oprjvos), [in LXX chiefly for bb^ hi., also for ^■'p pil., 
etc.;] 1. intrans., to lament, wail : Mt lli^, Lk V^, Jo 162'^. 2. Trans., 
to bewail: c. ace. pers., Lk 2327.t 

Syn. : KXatia, KOTrrofiaL, XviriofiaL, Trcv^eo) (v. Tr., Syn., § Ixv). 

Oprjfos, -ov, o, [in LXX chiefly for nrp ;] a lamentation : Mt 21^, 

Eec.t 

**tepTj(TK€ia (-Kta, T), -as, ^ « ^/a^cr/cos), [in LXX: Wi 1418.27, 
Si 22^ A, IV Mac 58. i3 * ;] religion in its external aspect (MM, Exp., 
xv), worship : Ac 265, j^ 126, 27 • ^, ^-^^ dyye'Awv, Col 2i8.t 
Sriv, : v.s. 6pri<TKo%. 
*0pT)aKos (-Kos, WH), -ov, o, religious, careful of the outward forms 
of divine service (see previous word)i: Ja 128. t 

Syn, : €i(rtl3r]<:, 6€ocre(3r]<:, 8u(n8aifxu)v (v. Tr., Syn., § xlviii). 
*t 0piafiP€U(i) (■< OpCafxPos, 1. a festal hymn to Bacchus. 2. The 
Roman triumphus), 1. to triumph (and rarely, c. ace, to triumph 
over ; so perh. Col 2i^, but v. infr.). 2. to lead in triumph : c. ace. 



MANUAL GBBEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 209 

pers., II Co 2^* ; hence, generally, to make a spectacle or show of: Col 
2^5 (but V. supr. ; cf. MM, Exp., xv; and esp. Field, Notes, 181).t 

0pi|, TpLx6<;, rj, [in LXX chiefly for iy^ ;] hair ; (a) of the head : 
Mt 3* 536 1030, Lk 738.44 127 2118^ Jo 112 123^ Ac 2734, I Pe 33, Ee 1^4; 
(6) of animals : Mk 1«, Ee Qs.t 

Opoe'w, -w {<C6p6o<;, a noise, tumult), [in LXX: Ca 54 (nDn)*^ 
in cl., 1. to cry aloud, make an outcry. 2. to utter aloud. 3. In NT 
(and LXX), pass., to he troubled, as by an alarm : Mt 24", Mk 13^, 
Lk 2437 (WH, mg.), II Th 22 (cf. Kennedy, Sources, 126).t 

*0p6fiPos, -ov, 6 (<^Tpe<^a), in primary sense to thicken), a lump, a 
clot of blood {DCG, ii, 685b) : at^aros, Lk 22*4 (WH, E. mg. omit 
the passage, v. WH, App., 64 ff.).t 

6p<5fos, -ov, o [in LXX chiefly for NQS , Ex 11*, al.;] in Hom., a seat, 

chair. Later, a throne, chair of state, seat of authority ; of kings : 
metaph., of God, Mt 534, Ac 7^H^^^), Ee 14, al.; by meton., for 
kingly power, sovereignty, Lk 132. 52^ Ac 23^ ; for an angelic hierarchy. 
Col 116; of Christ, Mt W-^ Ee 3^\ al.; of Satan, Ee 2^3; t. erjptov, ib. 
1610 ; of the Apostles, Mt 1928, ljj 223o, cf. Ee 204 ; of Trpeo-ySvVcpot, 
Ee 44 lli« (on e. -n}? x«P'-ro5. He 4i«, v. Westc, in 1. ; Deiss., BS, 135). 

©udreipa, -tav, to. (-a?, 17, Ee l^^ L ; cf. WH, App., 156), Thyatira, 
a city of Lydia : Ac 16^4, Ee 1" 2i8.24.t 

QvydTr]p, -Tp6<;, r) (for use of vocat., cf. M, Pr., 71 ; WH, App, 
158), [in LXX for DS (Ge 54, al.), exc. Jg 21^4 B, 11 Ch 21^7 (niJTN);] a 
daughter: Mt 9^8 1035.37 14c 1522,28^ Mk 53* 6^2 72«.29^ Lk 236 842. 4fl 
1253, Ac 217 (LXX) 721 219, He II24. In NT, as in OT, not in cl. ; (a) as 
a form of friendly address (cf. Eu 22.22, ^1.) : Mt 922, Mk 534, Lk848; 
(b) metaph. : sc. Kvptov, 11 Co 6I8 (cf. Is 43") ; (c) of posterity : 6. 'Aap<Lv, 
Lk 1* ; 'Afipadfi, ib. I316 (cf. Is I62, iv Mac 1528, ^Ij ; (d) of habita- 
tion : e. 2i^v, 'UpovaaX^fi, Mt 21MLXX), Lk 2328, Jq 1215 (cf. ig i»^ Za 
9», al.).t 

* OuyciTpioi', -ov, TO (dimin. of dvyaTrjp), a little daughter, a term of 
endearment used in late Gk. (cf. Bl., § 27, 4) : Mk 523 725^t 

0o'eXXa, -r)s, ^ {<6vo^), [in LXX. De 4" 522 (i9> (b^-T?), Ex 

1022*;] (poet, in cl.), a hurricane, cyclone, whirlwind: He 12i8.t 
SYN. : XatXai/r (q.v.). 
**t6oij'os (usually ^ulVos, as Eec), -rj, -ov {<^6via, Ova, an African 
aromatic tree, with ornamentally veined wood of varying colour, 

= Lat. citrinus), [in Sm. : iii Ki 10" (Qiao^N)*;] thyine: ^'Xov, Ee 

1812 (Diosc.).t 

6u|iia|Aa, -To<i, TO (-< Ovfudw), [in LXX chiefly for TTpp ;] fragrant 

stuff for burning, incense: rj wpa tov 9., Lk li*; dva-iaxrT-qpiov rov 6. 
(Ex 3027, al.), ib.ii; pi., Ee 58 83.4 I8i3.t 

0u|xiaTVipio^, -ov, TO {<i6vfj.idoi), [in LXX: 11 Ch 26i9, Ez 8" 

14 



210 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

(n-)t9(7P), IV Mac 7"*;] 1. as in cl. (Hdt., iv, 162; Thuc, vi, 46) and 

LXX, a censer : He 9* (but v. infr., and cf. Westc, in 1.). 2. As in 
Philo., rer. div., § 46, FIJ, Ant., iv, 2, 4, al., the altar of incense : He, 
I.e. (but V. supr. and cf. MM, Exp., xv).t 

Qufxidta, -Q) (<^ 6vo)), [in LXX (with -a^to) chiefly for HiSip pi., hi. ;] 
to burn incense : Lk l^.t 

*t 0ufiop,axew, -w {6vfx6<;, /i,a;^o/xai), to fight desperately, have a hot 
quarrel : c. dat. pars., Ac 12^''.t 

0ufi.6s, -ov, 6 (<^^ua)), [in LXX most freq. for f)^, also for 

nan , \\in , etc., 30 words in all ;] passion, hot anger, wrath : He 

112' ; ^py^ ^^i Q_^ Eo 28, of. Col 38; TTiKpia k. $., Bph 431; 7rX7;o-%ai, 
Tr\7]prj<; Bv/xov, Lk 4^^, Ac 19^8. Q^ ^X^i-v, Ee 12^2; otvos T. ^u/AOV t. 

,ropv£tas (cf. Je 28 (51)7), Re 14^ 18^ (cf. 17^); oTvo? t. 6. t. ^cov, ib. 
141"; id., T. o/>y;}s T. ^coS, ib. 16^9 19^^ 6 0. t. ^eoO, ib. 14^9 IS^'^ 16^; 
pi., impulses or outbursts of anger : tpi<:, ^^Xos, OvfLol, IpiOCai, ii Co 
122«, Ga 520 (Cremer, 287, 733).t 

SYN. : opyrj, irapopyicrp.o^. 

Oufiow, -w (^v/xds), [in LXX (chiefly in pass.) for mn, 5]N mn, 
p]3X hith., etc. ;] (no act. in Attic.) ; pass, (and mid.), to he wroth or 

very angry : Mt 21". t 

Oiipa, -as, rj, [in LXX chiefly for npgl , also for bl , D^l , etc. ;] 

a door: KXeUtv (uttok-) t^ 0., Mt 6", Lk 13^5; pass., Mt 25io, Lk 11^, 
Jo 2019' 26, Ac 2130; ii,0LyeLv, Ac 519; pass., Ac 1626. 27. ^povW, Ac 
121^; SlSl t^s 0., Jo IQi''^; Trp^s t^ ^., Mk 1^3 H* (WH om. r^v), 
Ac 32; TO. TT/aos Tr;v ^., the space by the door, Mk 22; tt/sos rrj $., Jo 
1816; im rr,6 , kc 5^ ; Trpo t^s ^., Ac 126; ^,rl T^r e., Ac 523;'^ ^. T. 
fjivr)p.€Lov, Mt 2760, Mk 15*6 163^ Metaph., of Christ, r, 6. r. irpopaToiv, 
Jo 10^' 9 ; of the Kingdom of Heaven, Lk 132* ; of opportunities, 
0. TTto-Tccos, Ac 1427; 6. fieydXr], I Co 169; ^ ^, Xoyov, Col 43; d. 

ave(jjy /xifrj (rjveioy-), II Co 212, Re 3^ 41 ; of Christ, i<TTr]KO)<; €7rt t^v d. koI 

Kpoviiiv, Ee 320 ; of his second coming, cVt 6vpaL<i ehai, Mt 2433, ^i^ 
1329; ^p^ Ovpwv k(TTT]Kivai, Ja 59.+ 

eupeos, -ov, 6 (< dvpa), [in LXX for ]3p , n|S ;] 1. in Hom., a 

door-stone. 2. In late Gk. (Polyb., Plut.), the scutum, a large oblong 
shield: 0. t. Trto-Tccos, Eph 6I6 (cf. Wi 52**, where oo-iott;? is likened to 
the do-TTts, the clypeus or small round shield of the light-armed 
soldier), + 

flopis, -tSos, 17 (dim. of dvpa), [in LXX chiefly for T^bry ;] a window : 

Ac 209, II Co 1133.+ 

Oupupos, -ov, 6, 17 (<^ ^vpa, -f ovpo^, a guardian)^ [in LXX : iv Ki 
711 (lyiiar), Ez 4411 (ni|75), n Ki 46, i Esy*;] a door-keeper, porter : 
h, Mk 133^ Jo 103 ; ^, Jo 1816. i7.+ 

6uaia, -as, 17 (^vto), [in LXX chiefly for Hllja , n3J ;] 1. actively, 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 211 

an offering, sacrifice (Hdt., al.). 2. Objectively, that which is offered, 
a sacrifice: Mt 9^3 12^(1'^), Mk 9" (WH, mg.), Eph 5^, He 10*' 26; 
pi. (as usually in cl.), Mk 1233, lj^ 131^ He 923 iqi. s (q. xal Trpoo-c^o/oa?) ; 
e. ivdyeiv, Ac 7"; dva<j>ipetv, He 72^ Trpoa^ipiiv, Ac 7^2^ Jjg 51 38 
(SSpa Tc Kal e.) 10ii»i2 114. §o-^„^^ Lk 22^1; pass., He 9^; 8ia t^s d. 
avToC, He 92«; i<T6Uiv Tcts ^. (Le 7i5^-). i Co lO^s. Metaph., Phi 41^, 
He 13^6 ; ^. irvfvixariKaL, I Pe 2^ ; ^. ^wo-a, Eo 12^ ; ^. aivecrews, He 
1315; ^. . . . T. -n-t'o-Tctos, Phi 2l'.t 

+ OucriaoT'qpioj', -ou, to (<^ Ovaid^ai, to sacrifice), [in LXX (where 
the word first appears) very freq., nearly always for nilTQ;] an altar : 

(a) generally, Ja 22^; pi., Eo 113 (lxx); metaph., He 131" (v. Westc, 
in 1., and esp. his add. note on the history of the word, 455 ff.); (b) 
of the altar of burnt-offering in the Temple, Mt 523. 24 2318-20, 35^ l^ 
11", I Co 913 10^8, He 713, Ee 11^; (c) of the altar of incense in the 
sanctuary (Ex 30^ al.), Lk 1^^ ; symbolically in Heaven, Ee 6* 83> ^ 
913 1418 167 (Cremer, 292).t 

0UU, [in LXX chiefly for n:i7 , also for tanOT , etc. ;] as in cl. ; 
1. to offer first fruits to a god. 2. to sacrifice by slaying a victim, 
offer sacrifice : Ac 14^3 ; q d^t. pers., ib.^^ ; id. c. ace. rei, i Co 102*^. 
3. to slay, kill: Jo lO^^, Ac 10^3 117; ^ ace. rei, Lk 1523.27,30. pagg., 
Mt 22* ; TO TTcio-xa (Ex I221), Mk 14^2 ; pass., Lk 22^, i Co 5^.1 

ew/ias, -a, 6 (Heb. Dixri . Cl twin ; of. SlSv/jlos), Thomas the 
Apostle : Mt 103, Mk S^\ Lk 6^\ Jo ll^o 14* 202*-28 212, Ac VKf 

dupa^, -a/co9, 6, [in LXX chiefly for ]rity and cogn. forms ;] a 

breastplate: Ee 99- ^^ 6. r. SiKaioo-uVi;s, Eph 6^* (cf. Is 59^^ Wi 
518<19'); e. TriVreo)?, I Th 58.t 



I, I, lura, TO, indecl., iota, the ninth letter. As a numeral, i = 10, 
I, = 10,000. 

Mdcipos, -ov, 6 (Heb. Iin; , Nu 32*i), Jairus : Mk 522, Lk 8".t 

'laKwP, 6, indecl. (Heb. apr:), Jacob; 1. The patriarch: Mt I2 

811, Jo 45.6, Ac 78, al.; as in Heb. (cf. Nu 23^, Is 418, Si 23^2, al), of 
his descendants, Eo 1126 d-^^). 2. The father-in-law of Mary : Mt l^^- ^^ 
(on the form as distinct from that of the next word, v. Deiss., BS, 316i). 

'idKu^os, -ov, 6 (Heb., V. previous word), James; 1. Son of 
Zebedee : Mt 421, Mk l^^. 20, Ac 1" 122, al. 2. Son of Alphaus : Mt 
103, Mk 21*, al. ; commonly identified with 'I. 6 //.iKpos, James the little, 
son of Mary (v.s. Mapta, 3 ; KAwttSs), Mt 27^6, Mk 15*0 I61 (cf. Jo 19 "S). 
3. The Lord's brother (v.s. (lSe\«^o's) : Mt 13^5, Mk 63, Ac 12i7, al, 
I Co 157 (probably), Ga li9 29'i2, Ja li, Jui. 4. The father of the 
apostle, 'lovSas 'laKco/Sou : Lk 6i«, Ac li3. 

lofia, -Tos, TO « iao/Atti), [in LXX for S^'p (ii Ch 36i«, Ec 10*, 



212 MANUAL GKEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Je 40 (33)^), etc.;] 1. most freq. in cl., a means of healing, remedy 
(Thuc, al.; Wi 11* lO*). 2. = lacrts (q.v.), a healing (Plat.; Je, I.e.) : 
pi., iCol29.28,30,t 

•la^ppTJs, 6, Jambres (cf. Ex 7^^' ^") : ii Ti SM 

*\avyai, (Rec. -vd), 6, Jaunai : Lk 3''^*.t 

'laci'Tis, 6, Jannes (cf. 'Iayu,/?/j%) : ii Ti 3*.t 

idofiai, -Q>^ai, [in LXX for NDI (Ge 20^7, al.), exc. Is 302« 6V 
(tzrnn) ;] to heal : c. ace. pers., Lk 5^7 6^^ 9''< n. *2 144 22", Jo 4*', Ac 9^* 
1038 288; pass., Mt S^. " 1528, Lk 7^ 8*^ 171^, Jo 5^^; id. seq. d7r6, Mk 
5''^ Lk 617; tig., of spiritual healing, Mt 13^5, Jo 12", Ac 28^7 (lxx). 
pass., He 121^, Ja 5^\ i Pe 22*.t 

SVN. : 6epaTrevw, q.V. 

'l(£p€T (Eec. -peS, L, 'UpeO), 6 (Heb. TT. , LXX 'lapcS, FIJ, 'lapcSos), 
Jared (Ge S^^) : Lk S^^f 

lao-is, -cw?, ^ (<;iao/Aat), [in LXX chiefly for Npno;] a healing, 

cure : Ac 422. so ; pi,^ Lk 1332.t 

SYN. : V.S. 6epaTr€ia, 2 ; tafia, 2. 

Xatrris, -iSos, V, [in LXX : Ex 2818 36i8 (SQU) (D^D!), Is 541' 

(1313), Ez 28" (ngiy;, V. BDB, Lerc., s.v.)*;] jasper, apparently 

not the modern stone of that name, but a translucent stone {DB, s.v.) : 
Re 43 21ii'i8,i9.t 

'idawK, -ovo<;, 6, Jason : Ac 17^""'®; perhaps the same, Ro 162i.t 

iaTp6s, -ov, 6 {<C Idofiai), [in LXX for K5i ;] a physician : Mt 912, 

Mk 217 526, Lk 423 531, 843 (om. WH, R, mg.), Col 41'' (on the status 
of physicians, v. MM, Exp., xv.).t 

iSc (Attic iSc'; the "later" accentuation is also found in Hom.; 
Veitch, 215), 1. prop., 2 aor. imperat. of opaw, q.v. 2. As interjection, 
apart from the construction of the sentence, and used where one or 
many are addressed, see ! behold ! lo ! : Mt 2520.22,26^ Mk 22* 33* II21 

131, 21 154, 35 156^ Jo p9, 36, 48 326 514 726 113, 36 1219 162^ 1821 19*' 1*' 26, 27^ 

Ga 52.t 

i8ea, -a?, r], V.S. elSea, 

1810s, -a., -ov (in Attic usually -os, -ov), [in LXX chiefly for pers. 
suff., also for urh , etc.; {to. t) ilT'S;] 1. one's own; (a) of that which 

is private and personal (in cl. opp. to koiv6<;, 877/100-109 ; cf. infr. 3) ; 
(6) of property, friends, home, country, etc. (in cl. opp. to dXAorptos ; in 
late writers often, like iavTov, with weakened sense, v. M, Pr., 87 ff. ; 
Deiss., BS, 123 f.) : Lk 6", Jo 1*2 5*3, Ac 2^ 2028, i Co II21, Ga 6^, 
II Ti 19, He 727, Ju^ al. ; Trpdo-a-eiv ra I, I Th 411 ; Kara ras I. eVt^v/x/as, 
II Ti 43; ol ?8tot, Jo 111 (M, Pr., 90 f.; FieU, Notes, 84) I31, Ac 423, 
I Ti 58; Ti rSia, one's home (Field, Notes, I.e.), Lk^l828, Jo 1^ 1632 
1927. 2. peculiar, distinct, appropriate, proper : to l. crwfia, i Co 1538 ; 
iv T. I. Tay/AttTi, I Co 1523; ^j^ ^ tottov t. i., Ac 12^; = avrov (v. Deiss., 
ut. supr.), Mt 22^ Jo 1*2 (cf. Wi lOi). 3. Adverbially (v. supr., 1 (a) ; 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 213 

and cf. WM, 7B%); (a) iSia, severally, separately : i Co 12^1; (6) kut 
fStW, apart, privately, in private : Mt 14". 23 gO^^, Mk 43* T^^, Lk 1023, 
Ac 2319, al. 

l8ialTT,s, -ov, 5 «?8tos), [in LXX : Pr 6^ (no Heb.)*;] 1. a pri- 
vate person, as opp. to the State or an official (/JacriXcls k. iStwrai, Pr, I.e. ; 
and cf. MM, Exp., xv). 2. one without professional knowledge, un- 
skilled, uneducated, unlearned : i Co 14^'' 23. 24 (^^ j^g^^ without gifts) ; 
dypdfXfiaTOL k. l, Ac 4^3. q ^^t. (= cl. c. gen. rei), Adyw, 11 Co ll'^.t 

180U, [in LXX chiefly for ngn,] prop, imperat. 2 aor. mid. of 

opdw, used as a demonstrative particle, with frequency much greater 
in LXX and NT than in cl. (v. M, Pr., 11), lo, behold, see : Mt lO^e 
118 133, Mk 332, Lk 2^8, I Co 15", Ja 5^, 3n^\ Ee V, al.; after gen. 
absol., Mt 120 21' 13 1246, al. ; kuI JSov', Mt 2^ (and freq.), Lk I20 1025, 
Ac 12'', al. ; in elliptical sentences, taking the place of copula or pre- 
dicate (like mn in Heb.), Mt 3l^ Lk 5^2 223i. ^\ Ac 827. 36, al. 

'iSoojiaia, -as, r) (Heb. D^^?), [in LXX: 11 Ki 8^*, al.; elsewhere, 
as Ge 2530, 'E8w/x ;] Idumaa : Mk S^f 

i8p(is (Tr. -ws), -(3tos, o, [in LXX : Ge 3i« {nvj), 11 Mac 22«, 
IV Mac 78*;] sweat : Lk 22** (WH, omit).+ 

'Uld^eX (L, 'I€^; Tr. -/SeX; Eec. -^rjk) ^, indecl. (Heb. b^rX; 

LXX as txt. ; FIJ, 'U^a/Stkr]), Jezebel (iii Ki IG^i, al.) : symbolically, 
Ee 220 (v. Swete, in l.).t 

'lepdiroXis (WH, 'Upa IIoXi?), -cws, 17, HierapoUs : a city in the 
Lycus valley in the Province of Asia : Col 4}^.f 

Upaxeia (WH, -ta), -as, -q (■< Uparevo)), [In LXX for ]n3 pi., njri? 

(Ex 29^ al.), exc. Ho 3* (liDJjl)*;] priesthood, office of priest : Lk 1», 

He75.t 

+ UpciTEUfia, -Tos, TO (<^ leparevw), [in LXX : ySao-tXciov i., Ex 

19" (D"'3n3 nS^pO) 2322, II Mac 2^'^ * ;] a priesthood, body of priests : 

I 5yiov, I Pe 2^ /Sao-. I, ib. ^ (LXX, Ex, l.c.).t 

tepuTcuu (cl. = Updofiai), [in LXX chiefly for ps pi.;] <o 6e a 
priest, officiate as a priest : Lk 1^ (the word is freq. in Inscr. ; v. LS, 
S.V.; Deiss., BS, 215; LAE, 70; Cremer, 734).t 

'lepcixw (T, 'Up-; Eec. 'lepix*^; cf. Bl., §3, 4, 4; WH, App., 
155), ri, indecl. (Heb. inn^ , IHT), Jericho : Mt 2029, Mk 10«, Lk lO^o 
1835 191^ He 1130.+ 

'kpc^ias (T, Eec. 'Up-; v. WH, §408), -ov, 6 (Heb. njpT., 
nrrpT.), Jeremiah the prophet : Mt 2^7 le^* 27^ (a ref. to Za lli3).t 

Upcu's, -€U)s, o « iepo's), [in LXX for jns ;] a ^ries^ ; I. t. Aio's, 
Ac 1413 ; of Jewish priests, Mt 8* 12*' ^ Mk 1** 22«, Lk 1^ 5^*, Jo l^o, 



214 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

He 8\ al. ; of Christ, He 5« d^^) lO^i ; of Christians, Re 1« 5^<> 20« 
(Cremer, 293 ; on the ace. pi., lepeZs, v. Thack., Or., 147 f. ; Bl., § 8, 2), 
'kpiXw, V.S. 'lepiL^^il). 
* lepoGoTos, -oy (-< Upos, Ovw), offered in sacrifice : i Co 10^^ (Rec. 
€iBui\o6-)A 

iepoy, -ov, TO, V.S. tepos. 
** UpoTTpeTTTis, -€9 « Icpos, TTpcVfi), [in LXX ! IV Mac 925 1120*;] 
suited to a sacred character, reverend (RV, reverent) : Tit 2^ (cf. Tr., 
Syn., § xcii).t 

tepos, -a, oV, [in LXX : Ez 28i8 (t2yi,7a) ; to I, i Ch 29* (ni3), Ez 
45^^ (niiy) ; very freq. in i Es, i-iv Mac;] 1. in Horn., marvellous, 

mighty, divine. 2. (Also in Horn, and later cl.) consecrated to the 
deity, sacred : pi., t. ypd/x/xaTa, ii Ti 3^^. 3. As subst., (a) (so in 
Horn.), TO. I,, sacrifices, sacred rites, sacred things: i Co 9^^; (b) 
later, to L, a consecrated or sacred place, a temple : t. 'ApTc/itSo?, Ac 
19^'^ ; cf the temple at Jerusalem, i.e. the entire precincts or some part 
thereof (as distinct from 6 vads, q.v., the Sanctuary proper) : I Co 9^^, 
and freq. in Gosp. and esp. in Ac, Mt 12^, Mk 13^, Ac 4^ al. (on the 
use of I. in Imperial Inscr., v. Deiss., LAE, 380 f.). 

'l€poo-<5\u|Jia (WH, 'le/D-, V. Intr., § 408), -wv, rd (on TrSo-a 'I., Mt 
23, V. WM, 79^; M, Pr., 48, 244; Thayer, s.v.), and 'UpovaaXrjfi (WH, 
'Up-), fj., indecl., as always in LXX exc. some parts of Apocr. CHeb. 
Q^bchT , obsnT)- the former always in FIJ, Mk, Jo *^- and Mt (exc. 

27^''), and most freq. in Lk, the latter always in He, Re, and by 
St. Paul (exc. Ga 1^'' ^^ 2^), Jerusalem : Mt 2\ Mk 3^, Jo l^^, al. ; 
its inhabitants, Mt 2^ 3^ 23", Lk 133*. Symbolically, 77 dvu> 'I., Ga 
42^, contrasted with 17 vvv 'I., ib. '''*; 'I. eVovpavios, He 12^2; rj Kaivrj 'I., 
Re 312 212.10. 

'l£pocroXup.€iTT]s (WH, lep- ; Rec. -/xiTr]<;), -ov, 6, [in LXX: Si 
5027(29)^ II Mac 422.39 (V* -/x-^tt;?) 185 *;] an inhabitant of Jerusalem: 
Mk 15, Jo 725.t 

** Upo-CTuXc'w, -w (<^ lepdo-rXo?, q.v.), [in LXX: 11 Mac 92*;] to rob 
a temple (commit sacrilege, R, mg.) : Ro 222.t 

** Upoo-uXos, -ov {<^Lep6v, (rvXaoi), [in LXX: II Mac 4*2 (cf. -XrjfjLa, 

ib.39; -Ata, 136)*;] robbiiig temjdes : Ac 19".t 

**t lepoupyeu, -d {<^Upovpy6s, a sacrificing priest), [in LXX: iv Mac 
7^ R (cf. -yta, lb. 3^'^ nR)*;] to perform sacred rites; c. ace, to 
minister in priestly service (minister in sacrifice, R, mg.), to euay- 
yikiov, Ro 15l6.t 

'icpouaaXi^p,, V.S. 'lepoo-dAv/xa. 

Upwadt/t], -7?s, ^ «upds), [in LXX: i Ch 2922 (pa), i Es 5^8, Si 
452*, I Mac 25* 3*9 79>2i, ly Mac 535 76*.] priesthood: He 7ii'i=''24_t 

'leacrai (FIJ, -o-o-aros), 6 (Heb. iCP , Ru 4}\ al.), J esse : Mt 15. «, 
Lk 332, Ac 1322 (Lxx)^ Bo 1512 (Lxx).t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 215 

'l6<t>0d€ (FIJ, -ed';, -oD), 6 (Heb. nnp^), Jephthah : He 1132.t 

'kxo»'ias, -ov, 6 (Heb. I^Djirp > Jehoiakin), Jechoniah : Mt 1^^' ^^.t 

*Itjo-ous, -ov, dat., voc. -ov, ace, -ovv (Heb. yilZTin^ yiif?iiT, 

nizr.), 1. Jesus: Mt 1^\ al.; 5 'I., ib. 3^3, al. ; *!. Xpio-roV, ib. 1\ 

Mk V, al. ; Xp. 'I., Eo 22«, al. ; Kvpto^ 'I., Ac 283\ al. ; 'It^o-ov, voc, 
Mk 12*, al. 2. Joshua: Ac 7*^, He 4^ 3. Jesws, son of Eliezer: 
Lk 328. 4. Jesus, surnamed Justus : Col 4^^. 5. v.s. Bapaftfta<;. 

iKakos, -1], -6v {<ClKisi, iKcivoj, to reach, attain), [in LXX for 
^"7 , etc. ;] 1. of persons, sufficient, competent, fit : c. inf., Mt 3^^, Mk 

V, Lk 3i«, I Co 159, II Co 35, II Ti 22 ; seq. Trpo's, 11 Co 2i« ; seq. Tva, 
Mt 8^, Lk 7^. 2. Of things, in number, quantity or size, sufficient, 
enough, much, many : absol., iKavo'i, Lk 7^^ (WH, E, omit) 8^2^ Ac 12^2 
1421 1919, I Co 1130; v^xos I, Mk 10*^, Lk 712, Ac 1124-26 1926; 
K\avefx6s, Ac 203' ; Sipyvpia, Mt 2812; XafJLTrdSe^, Ac 20^; \6yoi, Lk 239; 
<^ws, Ac 22«; I. co-Ttv (cf. asb m, LXX iKaiWo-^o, De 32«), Lk 2238; to 
I. TToteiv (Lat. satisfacere ; cf. Je 31 (48)3"), ]y[]j 1515 . ^^ j Xafi^dviLv (Lat. 
satis accipere ; v. M, Pr., 20 f.), Ac 17^; of time, rjfiepaiL, Ac 923»43 
1818 27^ I. xpovos, Lk 827, Ac 8^ 143 279; pi., Lk 20^; Ik xpoVwv [., Lk 
23«; dTT^ I h^v, Eo 1523 (WH) ; t>' iKavdv (cf. 11 Mac 82^), Ac 20ii.t 
*iKav<JTTjs, -T?T05, 17 (<;i/<avo5), sufficiency, ability (Plat.) : 11 Co 3^.t 
tiKai/oa), -w (<^iKavds), [in LXX chiefly for 21;] to make 
sufficient, render fit : c. dupl. ace, 11 Co 3" ; c. ace. pers. seq. cis, 

Col 112.t 

iKCTiipios, -a, -ov (><iK€T7/s, « suppUaut), [In LXX : Jb 4022(27), 
II Mac 918*;] of a suppliant; as subst., 17 i. (sc. pd^Sos), 1. in cl., an 
olive-branch, carried by a suppliant. 2. In late Gk. = iKecri'a, 
supplication : pi., SeT^o-eis /c. 1., He 5^. 

SyN. : v.s. Serja-is. 

iK^ds, -dSos, 17, [in LXX. Je 178 (b^V), Jb 26i* (fO«r)*;] 

moisture : Lk 8®.+ 

*Ik6»'ioi', -ov, to, Iconium, a city of the province of Galatia : Ac 
13" 141. 19' 21 162, iiTi3ii.t 

l\ap6s, -d, -6v « rXaos = ^€0)9, q.v.), [in LXX : Pr I912 (yisi) 228, 

Es 51, Jb 332«, Si 1326 26*, iii Mac 635*;] cheerful, joyous : 11 Co 9^ 
(Pr 228(9) (i'^)).t 

tlXap<5TTis, -vTos, V « iA-apo's), [in LXX: Pr I822 (jiS-^)*;] cheer- 
fulness : Eo 128.t 

IXdaKOfiai {<JXao<; = iXews), [in LXX (cf. Westc, Epp. Jo., 8^ f.) 
for nbo , IV Ki 518 24*, Ps 24 (25)ii, La 3*2, Da th 919 ; -|D3 pi., Ps 
64(65)3 77(78)38 78(79)9; Dn3 ni.. Ex 32i*, Es 4i7*;] 1. in cl., c. ace. 
pers., to conciliate, appease, propitiate (= i^iXdaKo^iai, Ge 322", Pr I61*, 
Ma 19, al.). 2. In LXX (Thackeray, Gr., 270 f.), Inscr. (Deiss., BS, 



216 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

224 f.), and NT, to be propitious, merciful (c. dat, rei, Ps 78 (79)^ al.) : 
c. dat pers. (iv Ki 5^% Lk IS^^. 3. As in Philo (= i^ikdaK-, in LXX : 
Ez 43^2, al.), to expiate, make propitiation for : t. a/xapTLa-;, He 2^'^ 
(Cremer, 301 ff., 735).t 

tlXo<r^(5s, -oC « iXacr/co/xai), [in LXX: Le 259, Nu 5^ (nncs), Ps 
129 (130)*, Da th 9^ (nn^^p), Am S^* (npl?;?*), Ez 44^^ (riN^pn), i Ch 

28'^*', Si 1820 A, II Mac 3^^*;] 1. an appeasing (Plut.). 2. a means of 
appeasing, propitiation (Philo ; Nu, Ez, 11. c.) : i Jo 2^ 4^". 3. In LXX 
&\so forgiveness (Ps, Da th, ll.c.).t 

t IXaoTiipios, -a, -ov « iA.ao-/<o/Aat), [in LXX : IV Mac 17^2 ; neut., 
Ex 25i6(i')ff. 317 3512 385(37«)ff., Le IG^-i^ff., Nu 7^9 (n^QS), Ez 

4314,17,20 (n-jTjr), Am 91 (on the original here, v. Deiss., BS, 127)*;] 

propitiatory {fivrjfia, FIJ, Ant., xvi, 7, 1 ; 6dvaTo<s, 11 Mac, I.e.) : of Christ, 
Eo 32^ ; as subst., to L (so. eirWefia, Ex 25^"' ^'^, where the word first 
occurs in LXX and where l. i. = P1J33 (q.v. in BDB, s.v.), elsewhere 
rendered simply to i. ; cf. Deiss., 124 ff. ; Westc, He., in 1.), He 9^.+ 
iXeus, -iov (Att. for tAaos), [in LXX for b-^bu , i Ki U^\ 11 Ki 20^\ 

al.; r. €Lvai, nbo, in Ki 8^*"^-, Je 38 (31)^*, al. ;] propitio7is, merciful: 
T. aSiK-'ais, He 8^2 (Je, I.e. ; cf. iii Ki, I.e.) ; ?. o-oi (sc. co-tw 6 6^6%), Mt 
1622 (cf. I Ki, l.c.).t 

'iXXuptKcJi', -OV, TO, Ulyricum, a region bordering on the Adriatic 
Sea : Ko IS^^.t 

t|xcts, -(ivTos, 6, [in LXX : Is 527 (^niy). Si 30^5 (332"), iv Mac 911, 

al ;] a thong, strap : for binding prisoners (Ma, Si, 11. c), Ac 2225 ; for 
fastening sandals, Mk 1^, Lk 3i«, Jo 127.t 

♦ttfiaxi^o) «t/i,dTtov), to clothe : Mk 5^^ Lk 8^5 (elsewhere only in 
TT.; cf. MM, ^a;j)., xv; Deiss., L.4S, 78 f.).t 

l\i.6.Tiov, -ov, TO (dim. of ei/xa, a garment), [in LXX chiefly for 
135 . also for Th'O'^ , npbiZT , etc. ;] a garment, but in usage always 

(exc. in pL, v. infr.) of an outer garment, a mantle, cloak (thrown over 
the xirwv; V. Eutherford, NPhr., 22; DCG, i, 499'*) : Mt 9i«'2o,2i^ Mk 
221 527, 28, 30^ Jo 192^ Ac 128, al. ; opp. to x'Tciv, Mt b^\ Lk 629, Ac 9^9 ; 
pi., garments, clothes (i.e. the cloak and the tunic), Mt I72 2665 27='i'35, 
Mk 530 1520.24^ Jo 1923,24^ ja 52, al. 

t l^aTi(7fi6s, -ov « i/tart'^o)), [in LXX : Ge 24^3, n Ch 1829, Ez 16^8, 
al. (13s) ; Ex 322 12^5, Eu 3^ al. (nbaur), etc. ;] clothing, apparel (usually 
of sumptuous attire; v. Tr., Syn., % I): l^ V' 929, jo 1924 (Pg 2118 
(2219), LXX for t2;n!p), Ac 2033, i Ti 29.t 

t^€i'po>, [in LXX : Jb 321 B^E (ABs, 6/x-) ;] i Th 2^ (ReO^ ^.g, 

o^eipo^at. 

Xva, I. adverb (poet., Hom., al.), 1. of place, where, whither. 2. 
of circumstance, when. II. Conjunction, 1. prop., final, denoting 



MANUAL QEBEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 217 

purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the 
clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Ac 19*, 
Eo 11^1 (?), Ga 2^", al.) ; (a) c. optat. (so in cl. after historic tenses) : 
after a pres., Eph 1^'^ (but WH, mg., subjc. ; v. Burton, § 225, Eem., 
2) ; (b) c. subjc. : after a pres., Mk 421, Lk &^\ Jo 3^5, Ac 225, Rq V\ 
al. ; after a pf., Mt 1^2, Jo 52^, i Co 9^2, al. ; after an imperat. (pres. or 
aor.), Mt 71, Mk 1125, Jq iqss, j Co 7^, al. ; after a delib. subjc, Mk 138, 
al. ; after a fut., Lk 16*, Jo 14^, i Co 152^, al. ; after historic tenses 
(where optat. in cl. ; WM, 359 f. ; M, Pr., 196 f.), Mk 6*1 (impf.), 
Jo 48 (plpf.), Mk 31* (aor.), al. ; (c) in late writers (M, Pr., 35 ; 
Burton, §§ 198, 199), c. indie, fut : Lk 20^0, i Pe d\ al.; (d) as often 
in eccl. writers (Thayer, s.v.), c. indie, pres. : i Co 4", Ga 4^^, al. (?; but 
V. Burton, § 198, Eem.) ; (e) ek (Sta) toSto, iva : Jo IS^^, i Ti l^^, 
al. ; TovTov X'°^P'-^> "^^^ 1^ ' (/) elliptical constructions : omission of the 
principal verb, Jo 1^, 11 Th 3^, i Jo 2^^, al. ; of the final verb, Eo 4^*', 
II Co 8^3, al. 2. In late writers, definitive, = inf. (WM, 420 ; Bl, 
§ 69, 1), that ; (a) after verbs of wishing, caring, striving, etc. : ^e'Aw, 
Mt 712, al. ; tvr^, I Co 42 I412 ; ^rjXow, I Co 141, al. ; (b) after verbs of 
saying, asking, exhorting: eiTrelv, Mt 4^, al. ; ipiorw, Mk 72^, al. ; 
TrapaKaXu), Mt 143^, I Co l^**, al., etc. ; (c) after words expressing 
expediency, etc.: <Tvfx(f)ip€i, Mt 18", Jo ll^o, al. ; J/cavo's, Mt 8^, Lk 7"; 
xpeiav 1x0), Jo 225, 3,1, etc. ; (d) after substantives, adding further 
definition: wpa, Jo 1223 13^; xpo^o?. ^^ 22i; (rvvrjOeia, Jo 183^; /xlo-Oo^, 
I Co 9^^. 3. In late writers, ecbatic, denoting the result, = wcttc, tJiat, 
so that (M, Pr., 206 ff. ; WM, 572 ; Bl., § 69, 3 ; Burton, § 223) : Eo 11", 
I Co 72'=', I Th 5*, al. (but v. Thayer, s.v.) ; so with the formula referring 
to the fulfilment of prophecy, tva irkrjpwerj, Mt I22 2^* 4^*, Jo 13^^, al. 

'loTTiTT] (FIJ, id., and also 'Iottt;), -tjs, t}, (Heb. IB^), Joppa : Ac 

9, 10, ll.t 

'lopSd^Tis, -ov, o (Heb. ]TT), the Jordan : Mt 35, Mk 15, al. 

l(5s, -oO, 6, [in LXX: Ez 24«.ii.i2 (nX^O), Ps 139, (140)3 (njjn), 

al. ;] 1. an arrow. 2. rust (Ez, I.e.) : Ja 53 (cf. MM, Exp., xv). 3. 
poison : fig., Eo 3^3 (p^u.)^ ja 38.t 
'louSa, V.S. 'lovSas. 
'louSaia, -as, 17, V.S. 'louSaios. 

t'looSattca (<'Iou8aros), [in LXX: Es 8" (ttP hith.)*;] to con- 
form to Jewish practice, to Judaize : Ga 2^'*.t 

tMouSaiKcJs, -rj, -ov, [in LXX: 11 Mac 8" V, I321*;] Jewish: 
Tit li*.t 

*t 'louSaiKws, adv.; in Jewish fashion : Ga 2^*.t 

MouSaios, -ata, -aiov (•<['Iou8as), Jewish: avrjp, Ac 1028 223; 

av^pwTTOS, Ac 2139 ; iJ/evSoirpocfyriTrjs, 13" ; ap)(iep€v^, 19^* ; yvi/r;, 16^ 242* . 

yrj, Jo 322 ; x<^pa, Mk 15. Substantively, (a) 'louSaios, 6, a Jew : Jo 4^ 
Ac 182*, Ro 228; pi., Ee 2^ 3^; ol X, Mt 22, Mk 73, Jo 2«, al. ; 'I. tc kuI 

*EA.A7;v€9, Ac 14^ al. ; k. Trpoa-rjXvToi, Ac 2^^; tOvr] TC K. 'I., Ac 145; 

ot Kara ra tdvrj 1., Ac 212^ ; of Jewish Christians, Ga 2^3 . Qf ^}^q ruling 



218 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

class who opposed Jesus, Jo l^^ 2^8 510 11^ IS^^, al. ; (b) 'lovBaia, -as, •;; 
(sc. 77, x<^poL, cf. Jo 3-^ Mk 1^), (Heb. nTl.T), Judcea : Mt 2\ Lk I**, 

Jo 43, al. 

t'ioo8ai(7|x(5s, -ov, 6 «'IovSat^co), [in LXX : 11 Mac 2^1 8^ 1488, 
IV Mac 4'-'^*;] Judaism, the observance of Jeivish rites : Ga l^^'^^.t 

'lou'Sas, -a, dat. -a, acc. -av (so in LXX, and also rarely, 'louSa, 
indecl. ; cf. Thack., Chr., 163), (Heb. niniT^) ; 1.' Judah, son of Jacob : 

Mt 12.3, Lk 333; ^vkri 'I., Re 55 7^ by meton., of the tribe, He 7^*; 
of its confines, yrj 'I., Mt 2" ; ttoXis 'I., Lk 13^. 2. Judah (unknown) : 
Lk 330. 3. Judas Iscariot (v.s. 'lo-KapiairT??) : Mt 10*. Mk 31^, Lk 6i«, 
Jo 671 132^ al. 4. Judas, the Lord's brother (v.s. i8e\<j>6i) : Mt IS^s, 
Mk 63 (prob.), Ju ^ 5. Judas the Apostle, son of James (v.s. ©aSSaios) : 
Lk 6i«, Jo 1422, Ac 113. 6. Judas, of Damascus : Ac 9^1. 7. Judas, 
surnamed Bapaa/3/3as (q.v.) : Ac 15—' '-"' 32, 8. Judas the Galilean : 
Ac 537. 

'louXia, -as, r), Julia : Ro 16i^.t 

'louXios, -ov, 6, Julius : Ac 27i' 3.t 

'loot'ias, -a, 6 (or 'lovvia, -as, 17, Junia ; AV, R, mg.), Junias : 
Eo 167.t 

'louoTos, -OV, 6, Justus, the surname of, 1. Joseph Barsabbas : 
Ac 123. 2. Titus, of Corinth : Ac 18^. 3. Jesus, a Christian of Rome : 
Col 4ii.t 

iirireus, -«ws (on acc. pi., -ets, v. Bl., § 8, 2 ; Thack., Gr., 148), o 
«r7r7ros), [in LXX chiefly for tZTlD;] a horseman: Ac 2323. 32.t 

**lTrmK<5s, -V, -ov «?7r7ros), [in LXX: I Mac 1538, iii Mac l^*;] 
of a horse or of horsemen, equestrian ; as subst., to L (sc. a-TpdreviJia), 
cavalry : Re 91* t 

iiriT-os, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for DID , sometimes for W^B , ^51 ;] 

a horse : Ja 33, Re 62 «■ 9^ «■ I420 18i3 1911 ^.t 

tpis, -iSos, V, [in LXX : Ex 3024 {nip)*, (nw^?^ , Ge 9^3, Ez 128, 

is rendered by to^ov) ;] 1. Iris, the messenger of the gods. 2. a rain- 
bow or halo : Re 43 IQi. 3. The plant Iris (cf. Ex., l.c.).t 

MaaciK (in MSS. sometimes -o-a/<; cf. Deiss., BS, 189; Thack., 
Gr., 100), 6, indecl. (in FIJ, "lo-aKos, -ov), (Heb. pnsi) , Isaac (Ge 17^^, 

al.) : Mt 12, Ro 910, al. 

*t i(r&yyc\os, -ov (<^ lo-os, ayycXos), like or gg-MaZ ^0 angels : Lk 203''.t 

'icaCTX^P. ^o-a^dp, v.S. 'Icrcra^^ap. 

'laKapicie, 6, indecl. (Mk 3^^ U^\ Lk 6^\ elsewhere -iw-njs ; v. 
infr.) and 'IcrKapiwTr]<s, -ov (Heb. prob. nvip tT^K; v. Swete, Mk.,S^^), 

Iscariot : surname of Judas, 11. c. supr., also Mt 10* 261*, Mk 14*3 
(WH, R, omit), Lk 223, j^ 12* 132 I422; of his father Simon, 

Jo 671 1326,t 

laos (epic lo-os, 80 sometimes Rec), -1;, -ov, [in LXX for '^ , Jb 



MANUAL QKEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 219 

51* 10^0, al. ; in^r , Ez 40^ ff. ; 11 Mac 9^^, iv Mac I320, 21, al. ;] equal, 

the same in size, number, quality, etc. : Bwped, Ac 11^'' ; /xxtprvpiai, 
Mk 1458. 59 ; I TTotelv, c. ace. et dat., Mt 20^2 ; iavroy T. OeQ, Jo 518 ; 
ra I. <l7roXa/?erv, Lk 6^*, n. pi., la-a, adverbially, Ee 211" ; t. ^e^, Phi 2«.+ 

laoTT]?, -T^Tos, 17 (<[ lo-os), [in LXX : Jb 36^^, Za 4J * ;] 1. equality : 
II Co 8^^' ^*. 2. equity, fairness : to SiKaiov k. t^v i, Col 4^ (for dis- 
tinction bet. TO 8. and 17 L, v. JC(7, in l.).t 

*t laoTifios, -ov, (<[ lo-os, Tt/i.7;), equally privileged, held in equal 
honour : TrLOTa, 11 Pe 1^ (E, mg., equally precious, but v Field, Notes, 
240 ; Mayor, in l.).t 

t<7<J»|;oxos -ov «?o-o9, il/vxv), [in LXX: Ps 54 (55)13 (la-jyg)*;] 
1. of equal spirit (.^sch., Agam., 1470). 2. like-minded : Phi 2'^'^.f 

•lapaVjX (FIJ, 'lo-paT^Xos, -ov), 6, indecl. (Heb. bxiijr , Ge 3228), 

JsraeL- 6 o?/cos 'I., Ac 7*2 (Lxx)^ al.; A.ads, Ac 410 ; vloc, ib. 521, al.; 
at <i>vXal Tov 'I., Mt 1928, al. By meton., for the Israelites, Mt 2\ Lk l^*, 
Eo 112, al. ; 6 Aao9 'I., Ac 410 ; y^ 'I., Mt 220,21 • /ja^-iXc^s 'I., Mt 27*2, 
Jo 150; ^ iXn^ ToO '!., Ac 2820; 6 'I. tou deov (of Christians), Ga 6i«; 

6 *I. Kara crdpKa, I Co 10^8. 

'lapaT]XeiTTis (Eec. -XLTrjs), ov, 6, [in LXX : Nu 258 (i,j^^jjpj^ m 

Ki 20 (21)1 (^^xy-ii-i ; Luc. 'U^pa-qXiTT}?), etc. ;] an Israelite, the name 

expressive of theocratic privilege (v.s. 'E/3patos): Eo 9* 11^, 11 Co II22; 
SlXtjOw^ 1., Jo 1*8 ; d[v8pes 'I., Ac 222 312 5^5 1316 2128.t ' 

'laaaxtlp (Eec. 'Icra;^-, 'lo-acrx- (Elz.), T, -o-xap), 6, indecl. (FU, 
'Icraxa,ot?, 'lo-ao-x-) (Heb. IDt^n^P , Ge SO^S), Issachar : Ee V.f 

i<rrT)|ii, and in late writers, also icrTavw (Veitch, s.v. ; Bl., § 23, 
2; M, Pr., 55), [in LXX chiefly for nay, mp , also for nxa ni., hi., 
as^ hith., etc.]. I. Trans, in pres., impf., fut. and 1 aor. act. and in the 
tenses of the pass. 1. to make to stand, to place, set, set tip, establish, 
appoint : c. ace. pers., Mk 7^, Ac 12^ Q^^ if^i^ He 10^ ; id. seq. eVi', c. 
ace. loc, Mt 45, Lk 4^; iv fieaw, Mt 182, Mk 9^\ Jo 8[3]; cVwttiov, Ac 
6*'; Trap" iavrQ, Lk 9*'^; €« Sefiwv, Mt 25^^; mid., to place oneself, to 
stand : Ee 18^^ ; so also pass., to be made to stand, to stand : Mt 2*, 
Lk 11^8 198, II Co 131, al. 2. to set in a balance, to weigh (cl. ; LXX 
for bpW , Is 46", al.) : Mt 26^5, H. Intrans., in pf., plpf. (vs^ith sense 
of pres. and impf. ; M, Pr., 147 f.) and 2 aor. act., to stand, stand by, 
stand still : Mt 20^2 26^3, Mk 10*^, Lk 8", Jo 1^5 32^, Ac 169, al. ; seq. 
ev, Mt 65, al. ; cVwttiov, Ac lO^o, al. ; tt/jos, c. dat. loc., Jo 181" ; tVt, c. 
gen. loc, Lk 61^, Ac 523 2510, al.; tp,irpo(T6iv, Mt 27"; kvV-Xco, Ee 7"; 
€K Se^iGv, Lk 1" ; €Vt, e. aec, Mt 13^, Ee 320 ; Traoa, Lk 52 -, IkCl, Mk 
115; s^^^ Mk 91 ; oTTov, Mk 13^*; l^w, Mt 12*«; /xa^pd^cv, Lk 18^3; 
TToppco^cv, Lk 1712. Metaph., to stand ready, stand firm, be steadfast : 
I Co 73^ 1012, Eph 611' 13, u^ Col 412 ; t. ttiotci, Eo II20 ; ev t. AXrjeua, 
Jo 8**; ev T. xP-piTi, Eo 52; ev t. euayycAiw, I Co 151 (cf. dv-, £7r-av-, 
ef-av-, dv6-, d<p-, Bl-, iv-, i$-, ctt- (-/i.ai), e^-, Kar-ecft-, (ruv-€<f>-, Ka$-, 
avTi.-Ka$-, OLTTO-Kad-, /MiO-, Trap-, Trepi-, irpo-, avv-Ca-TrjfjLi), 



220 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

** lo-Topeoj, -w {<^i(TTwp, one learned or skilled in), [in LXX : i Ea 
133, 42*. J I Q a,cc. rei, to inquire into, learn by inquiry. 2. C. ace. 
pers., to inquire of or about. 3. to narrate, record. 4. In late 
writers, to visit, become acquainted toith : Ga 1^^ (v. Ellic, in 1., and 
cf. MM, Exj)., xv).t 

laxupos, -a, -6v « la-xvw), [in LXX for bs , "liaa , msy , pjn , 

etc. ;] strong, mighty, powerful ; (a) of persons, as to body or spirit : 
Mt 1229, Mk 3-i', Lk 1121.22, I Co 4io (opp. to do-^ev^s), He ll^* (iv 
Tro\€fiio), Ee 52 IQi 1821 1918. oJ ttAovo-ioi k. oi l, ib. 61^ Tct L = ol t. (cf. 
IV Ki'2415), I Co 127; of God (cf. De IQi^), Ee IS^; compar., Mt S", 
Mk 1", Lk 1122, 1 Co 125 (^^ do-^€V€? T. Oiov) 1022 ; (6) of things : Xi/.tds, Lk 

151*; e'TTio-ToXac (^apeiat k. i.), II Co lO^" ; KpauyT/, He S''; </>a>V7;, Ee 182; 
TrapdKXr)(TL<;, He 6^^ ; ttoXi?, Ee IS^** ; fipovrac, ib. IQ^.t 

i<rx"'s, -V09, ^, [in LXX chiefly for nS , also for b";n , Tir , nnnSJI, 

etc. ;] strength, might, power, force, ability : Ee 5^2 7^2 ■ j, k. SuVa/tis, 
11 Pe 211; ^ ^p^^os T^s I. (Is 402"), Eph li^ 6i»; rj 86ia t^s i, 11 Th l^; 
€^ L, I Pe 411 ; €1/ oAt; t. t., Mk 123o. 33 (lxx), Lk 1027(Lxx),t 

Syn.: Swa/i,ts (q.v., and cf. ICC, Phi 4i3) ; Kparos (cf. M, 
27i., I, 19). 

i^Xu'w «io-X^'s), [in LXX for pin, 1123, DSy, etc.;] 1. to be 

strong in body : Mt 912, Mk 21''. 2. to be p>owerful, have power, 
prevail: Ac 192", Ee 12^; seq. Kara, c. gen. pers., Ac 191^; c. inf., to 
he able (MM, Exp., xv) : Mt 82^ 264^ Mk 5* 91^ (inf. understood) 143", 
Lk 6-ts 8*3 1324 146.29,30 153 2026, Jo 216, Ac 610 1510 25^ 27i6 ; c. ace. 
Phi 413, Ja 516 ; of things, to avail, be serviceable (MM, Exp., I.e.) : 

Mt 513, Ga 56, He 91" (cf. eV-, ef , cV-, KaT-io-xv'w).t 

ICTUS {^C^la-oq), adv., [in LXX for "b^H , "JJIS, ]7\, Ge 322", Je 5^ 

al. ;] 1. equally. 2. perhaps: Lk 20i3.t 

'IraXm, -a?, rj, Italy: ^ 'I. (v. Bl., §46, 11), Ac 182 27i'«, 
He 13i*.t 

'iraXiKos, -^) -ov (<^'lTaA.i'a), Italian: o-Trelpa 'I., Ac 101. t 

Iroupaia, V.S. Iroi^patos. 

'Ixoupaios, -ata, -aiov, [in LXX : I Ch 51^ A (ntt?) * ;] Iturcean (in 

cl. always 6t 'I., the IturcBans) • ^copa (17 'iTovpaioiv opuv-q, to. twv 'I. p.iprj, 
Strabo, xvi, ii, 16, 20), Lk 31 (cf. Exp. (1894), ix, 51 ff., 143 ff., 
288 ff.).t 

^ixOuSio^ -ov, TO (dimin. of Ix^'s), a little fish: Mt 153*, Mk Q\f 
IxOus, -V09, 6, [in LXX for yn, nai;] a y^s/i; Mt 71", Mk 638, al. 
1xvo<i, -COS (-ous), TO, [in LXX for P]3 , etc. ;] a track, footstep : 

metaph. (as freq. in el.), a-roix'^lv tois ?., Eo 412 ; irepnTaTdv Toi<; l., 11 Co 
1218; iiraKoXovOdv toIs L, I Pe 221 (cf. MM, Exp., xv).t 

'I(i)d9a|ji (WH, -6ap), 6, indecl. (Heb. UTiT), Jotham, King of 
Judah : Mt l^.t 



MANUAL QEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 221 

'lutdva (TE, -vva ; V. WH, App., 159), -17s, Tj (Aram. JOV), Joanna : 

Lk 83 24io.t 

'\(oavdv (Eec. 'Iwavvas, -a), 6, indecl. (Heb. ]2nV'), Joanan (cf. 

'Iwdvri?) : Lk 327.t 

'\<.)dvr\s (Eec. -vvr;?, q.v. ; cf. Dalman, Gr., 142; Tdf., Pr., 79; 
WH, App., 159; Bl., §3, 10; 10, 2), -ov, dat., -rj (but in Mt 11*. 
Lk 718.22, Re 11, -«), ace, -rjv, 5 (Heb. ]3ni\ LXX : 'Iwavav, 11 Ch 23i, 

al. ; -vvdv, Je 47 (40)^, al., Aq.), Hellenized form of 'Iwavav, John (i Es 
838(41)*)^ viz., 1. John the Baptist : Mt 3^, al. 2. John the Apostle, 
son of Zebedee : Mt 421, Mk l^^, Lk 510, Ac 1^3, al. 3. The father of 
St. Peter: Jo 1" 2r5-i7. 4. John surnamed Mark: Ac 12^2. 25 135,13 
15*''. 5. The writer of the Apocalypse, traditionally identified with 
2: Eeli'4,9. 

'IwdkCTjs (D, 'Iwm^as ; V. MM, Exp., XV ; Bl., § 10, 2), 6, John : 
Ac 4« 13^ Tr., WH, Ee 228 (cf. 'lwdvr]<;).f 
*loSP, 6 (Heb. nrx). Job : Ja 5^\f 

'iwp^S (WH, -/3^\, Lk, I.e. ; Eec, EV, 'fi/JiyS), 6, indecl., Jobed 
(Obed) : Mt 1^, Lk 332.t 

'Iu8d (Eec. 'louSa), Jbda ; Lk 32«.t 

'IwTiX, 6, indecl. (Heb. bNi""). Joel : Ac 2i«.t 

'lu^ddas, V.S. 'Iwawrj<;. 

*lwk(£p, (Eec. -av), Jonam : Lk 330.1 

'Iwms, -a, 6 (Heb. nai""), /owa/i, the prophet: Mt 1239-« 16*, 

Lk 112a. 30, 32 f 

'Iwpdp,, o, indecl. (Heb. WyiW) , Joram, Jehoram : Mt l^.t 
'la)pei|i, 6, indecl., Jorim : Lk 329.t 

'lwcra<t)(iT, 6, indecl. (Heb. l2EC;in"l), Jehoshaphat : Mt l^.t 
'Iwaeios (-o-tas, Eec), -ov, 6 (Heb. inj'ttyx"'), Josiah: Mt l^o.^.t 

'lucn^, V.S. 'ItDcnJs. 

'luCTTJs, -^ (Eec. -17, Lk 329; ^.V, Jose; v.s. 'iT^o-ors, 3), and -^tos 
(Mk, 11. c), 6, Joses; 1. brother of our Lord: Mk 63, Mt 13" (Eec, 
V.S. 'L..o-#). 2. Son of Mary: Mt 27^« (-o-#, WH, txt), Mk 1540.*7. 
3. V.S. BapvdySas.t 

'lu)(ni<|>, indecl. (FIJ, 'IcicnyTros, -ov), 6 (Heb. P)5i"'), Joseph; 1. the 
Son of Jacob: Jo 4^, Ac 79'i3,i4,i8^ He 1121.22^ Re 78. 2. In the 
genealogy of our Lord, (a) the son of Matthias : Lk 32* ; (b) the son 
Joram : ib. 30. 3. The husband of Mary, the Lord's mother : Mt V^ «■-, 
Lk 127, Jo 1*^, al. 4. One of the brethren of our Lord (v.s. d8€X(f>6<;) : 
Mt 13". 5. Son of Mary : Mt 27" {-a^s, WH, mg., EV). 6. Joseph 
of Arimathsea: Mt 27^7' 5», Mk 15*3. ^^ Lk 23", Jo 1938. 7. v.s. 
Bapvd/3as. 8. V.S. Bapaa^ySa?. 



222 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 
'Iwtrrjx' Josech : Lk 3'^*.t 

'lucriaS) V.S. Icocretas. 

iwTa, TO, iota (Heb. "^ , i.e. the amallest letter) : Mt 5^^t 



K 

K, K, K<iinra, to, indecl., kappa, k, the tenth letter. As a num- 
eral, K =20; K = 20,000. 
Kdyu, V.S. iyw. 
KaQd, adv. (for Kaff a), [in LXX : Ge 7^ 19^, al. (lUrj^g , 5), Is 

5811, Wi 3i«, al.;] just as, according as: Mt 27^H^^^)^ Lk 12, D 
(cf. Bl., § 78, 1 ; Phil. Gosp., 8 f.).t 

Kae-aip6CTis, -€ws, 7/ «Ka^aip€o>), [in LXX: Ex 232* (Din), I Mac 

3*^*;] a pulling doivn, destruction: fig., k. oxvpwfidToyv, 11 Co 10*; 
opp. to olKoSo/jiT^, ib. ^ ISi'^.t 

KaG-aip^w, -w, [in LXX for ynz , yiQ , T)'' , etc. ;] 1. to take 
down : c. ace. pers. (the technical term for removal after crucifixion, 
Field, Notes, 44), Mk 153«.46^ l^ 23^3, Ac 1329. 2. to put down by 
force, pull down, destroy : a.Tro6rJKa^, Lk 12^^ (opp- to oixoSo/iAerv) ; 
Swao-ras, Lk V^ ; Wvt}, Ac 1319 ; pass., Ac 192'' {diminished, Field, 
Notes, 129 f.) ; fig., to refute : XoyL(Tfjiov<s, 11 Co lO^.t 

KaOaipo) «/ca^apds), [in LXX: Is 2827 (izrn ho.), 11 Ki 4«, 
Je 28 {5iy^ K * ;] to cleanse : of pruning, Jo 152 (cf. Ka^api^a)).t 

KaGciTrcp (for KaO' airep = KaOd), adv., [in LXX for n^rx? , Ge 12*, 

Ex 7«, al. ;] jiist as, even as : Ro 3* 4^ 9^3 IQi^ ll^ 12*, i Co lO^o 12^2, 
II Co 11*, 313' 18 811, I Th 211 3"' 12 45, He 42.t 

** KaQ-dtTTOi, [in Sm. : Ca 1* * ;] 1. to fasten on, put upon, c. ace. 
2. Act. for mid. (cf. Bl., §53, 3), to lay hold of, attack: c. gen., x"po5, 
Ac 283.t 

tKaSapil^w (Hellenistic — FIJ, Inscr. — for Attic KaOaipw, q.v., on 
the vulgar -€p-, Mt 8^, Mk 1*2, v. Bl., §6, 1; Thackeray, Gr., 74), [in 
LXX chiefly for inci ;] to cleanse, make clean. 1. In physical sense : 

c. ace. rei, fig., Mt 232^' 2<5, Lk 11^9; of disease (leprosy), c. ace. pers., 
Mt 82.3 108 115, Mk l*"-*2, Lk 42" 512.13 722 1714,17. ^ xiirpa iKaeeptaOr, 
(on the spelling v. supr.), Mt 8^. 2. In ethical sense : t. Kap8ia<s, 

Ac 159 (cf . Si 381") . ^_ ^upa%, Ja 4^ ; Xaov iavTw, Tit 21* ; t. iKK\r,a-cav, 

Eph 526; c. ace. pers. (rei), seq. A-n-6 (Bl., § 36,^9; Deiss., BS, 216 f.), 
II Co 71, He 91*, I Jo V' 9. 3. In ceremonial sense : Mk 71^, Ac lOi^ 

119, He 922. 23 102 (cf. 8ia-/ca^apt^(o).t 

t Ka6apiCT(i(5s, -ov, TO (<[ Ka^api^w), [in LXX for incj , TYir^ , etc. ;] 

cleansing, purification : Jo 32* ; c. gen. subjc, t 'louSa/wv, Jo 2" ; 
c. gen. obj., of women after childbirth, Lk 222; qI lepers, Mk 1**, 
Lk 51* ; c. gen. rei, t. afxapTLtav, He 13, 11 Pe 1^ (Cremer, 319).+ 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 223 

KaOapos, -a, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for linip ;] pure, clean. 1. Phy- 
sically : Mt 2326 2759^ Jo 1310, 11 (fig)^ 153 (fig.^ as of a vine cleansed by 
pruning), He 10^2, Ee 156 198, u 2118.21. 2. Ceremonially: Lk 11", 
Eg 1420, Tit 115. 3 Ethically ; (a) of persons : Jo IS^o, Ac IS^, Tit l^^ ; 
6 K. Trj Kaphia {i<aOapos xapa^, Hdt., i, 35), Mt 5^; seq. (XTrd (cl. c. gen. 
simp.'; Bl, S 36, 11 ; Deiss., BS, 196 ; MM, Exp., xv), Ac 2026 ; (b) of 
things : KapSta, I Ti 1^, n Ti 222 ; truvctST/o-ts, I Ti 3^, 11 Ti 1^ ; $pr]a-K€ia, 
Ja 127.t 

STN. : v.S. dyvo's. 

Ka0ap6TT)S, -r?Tos, rj «Aca^a/)os), [in LXX: Bx 2410 (-,-,J3)^ wi 
724 ♦ .J purity, cleanness : c. gen., He Q^^.t 

KaO-e'Spa, -as, rj (<^ Kara, + eSpa, a seat), [in LXX for 30?iD and 

cogn. forms ;] a chair, seat : Mt 21^2, Mk ll^^ ; of teachers, Mt 232.+ 

KaQ-ilofiai, [in LXX : Le 12^, al. (nCT), Jb 3928 (p^^) ■■] ^^ 5^^ 
down, sit : Jo 20^2 ; seq. iv, Mt 26", Lk 2*6^ Jq 1120^ Ac 6^^ ; seq. 
cTTi, c. gen., Ac 20^ ; id. c. dat., Jo 46 (cf. -n-apa-KaOit,-, Kd6r)p,ai).f 

Ka0' €IS, V.S. CIS. 

*+ Ka9-€|T]s (= cl. e^^s, i<f>e^<;), adv., 1. successively, in order: 
Lk 1^, Ac 11* 18-^ ; twv k. {those that succeeded him), Ac 32*. 2. after- 
wards : iv T(j) K. (sc. xP^vw), Lk 81. t 

Ka0€u8(i>, [in L.;X' chiefly for nDCT, Ge 28i3, Ps 87 (88)5, al.; 
also for ]l?r , Ca 52, Da LXX th 122, al. ; for niZT , i Ki 19» ;] to sleep : 
Mt 8^* 924 1325 255 26*»'*3.45^ Mk 427.38 539 1437,40,41^ lj^ g^s 22*6, 
I Th 57. Metaph., (a) of death (as Ps, Da, 11. c.) : i Th 51" (cf. Mt 92*, 
Mk 5^^, Lk 852, and v. Swete, Mk., I.e.); (b) of moral and spiritual 
insensibility : Mk 13^6, Eph 5^*, i Th 56.+ 

SYN. : KOip.au). 

* KaQriyr]Tr]s, -ov, 6 [<C^ KaOrjyiofiat, to QO before, guide), 1. prop., 
a guide. 2. a master, teacher (MGr. professor) : Mt 231".+ 

Ka0-iiKw, [in LXX : impers., Le 510, Ez 2127 02)^ al. (ifl^cns); ra k., 

Ex 51^, al. (l^"!J), etc. ;] 1. to come down, come to. 2. to befit, proper : 
impers., c. ace. et inf., Ac 2222 ^qq ^j^q tense, v. Bl., § 63, 4); ra firj 

KaBrjKOVTa, Eo 128. + 

Kd0-T))yiai, [in LXX chiefly for nCT ;] in cl. pres. and impf . only 
(prop, pf . and plpf. of KaOe^ofjiai ; cf. Bl., § 24), in LXX and NT fut. 
also, to sit, be seated : Mt III6 22** d-xx), Mk 26, Jo 6^, Ac 22, Ja 2^ 
(on the vulgar imper. klL6ov, v. Kennedy, Sources, 162), Ee 4^, al. 
seq. prep. c. ace, iirC, Mt 9^ Mk 2i*, Jo 12i5 ; ^rapd, Mt 13i, Mk 10« 
ircpt', Mk 332.34. ^p^^^ Lk 2256; iTr6, Ja 2^; eis, Mk 13^; /xcra, c. gen 
pers., Mt 2658; iK Bi^Lwv, Mt 22**; i7rdvu>, c. gen., Mt 282; dTreVavn, c 
gen., Mt 2761; tVi, c. dat., Ac 310 ; id. c. gen., Ac 828; ^Vcl, Mt 1529 
pleonastic (M, Pr., 230, 241 ; Dalman, Words, 22), Mt I32, Ac 23^ 
Ee 187; metaph., Mt 416, Lk 179 (Lxx); of one's domicile (Ne 11«, Si 
5026 ; Hdt., v, 63), Lk 21^5, Ac 22, Ee 146 (gf, ^^y.^^e-qy^ai). 



224 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

♦*+ Kaer)n€piv6s, -77, -ov « xa^' vH-^pay), [in LXX : Jth 1215*;] daily 
(MGr. Ka6r}fxepv6<;) : Ac 6^t 

KaG-i^w, [in LXX chiefly for niT^ ;] 1. causal, to make to sit down, 
set, appoint : Ac 2^", i Co 6*, Eph l^**. 2. Intrans., to sit down, be 
seated, sit : Mt 5^, Mk Q^s, Lk 7^^, Jo 8^, al. ; c. inf. tel., i Co 10^ ; 
seq. £^9, II Th 2*; cVi', c. ace, Mk II2, Jo 12i*; id. c. gen., Jo W\ Ac 
1221; <L8£, Mk 14^2; airoi, Mt 2636; iv Se^id, He P; Ik Se$LQ>v, Mt 
2021,23. ^^ jje 321. Ka^t'o-as pleonastic (M, Pr., 14; Dalman, Words, 
22), Mt 13^^ Lk 53 1431 16« ; of settling in a place {h x^P^ov, Thuc, iv, 
93), seq. iv, Lk 24*^ (cf. ava-, iin-, Trapa-, ttc/ji-, crw-Ka^t^w). 

Kae-iT]fti, [in LXX : Ex IT^i (013 hi.), and v.l., i Ch 2127, Za ll^^, 

Je 39(32)1'**;] ^^ ^gj^^ or let down: seq. et's, Lk 5^^; Sid, c. gen., ib., 
Ac 925; ptcp^ seq. ^^^^ c. gen., Ac 10^ ; ck, Ac ll^.t 

Ka9-iaTT)|jii (and KaOia-TaLvw, Ac 1715), [in LXX for ipE, Dip , mtZT, 
etc., 24 words in all*;] 1. (a) io set down; (b) to bringdown to a 
place (Horn., Xen., al. ; 11 Ch 28i5, i Ki 5^) : Ac IT^s. 2. to set in 
order, appoint, make, constitute: Tit 1^, 11 Pe 1^; c. dupl. ace, Kpn-qv, 
Lk 1214; ^yov>vov, Ac 7^«; Ipxovra, ib. 27, 35 (LXX). s.pxi^nd<;, He 728; 
seq. cTTi, c. gen., Mt 24*^ 2521.23, l^ 12*2^ Ac 6^; id. c. dat., Mt 24*^ 
Lk 12«; id. c. ace. He 27(i'XX) (WH, E, mg. omit); pass. (v. Mayor, 
Ja., 115 f.), Eo 519, Ja 3« 4" ; seq. cis c. inf., He 8^ ; rk npos r. 6e6v, 
He 51 (cf. dvTi-, a.Tro-Kadl(Trriixi).\ 

KaOci (= Kaff o), adv., [in LXX : Le 95. is (-|^>^), i Es 15o, Si I620, 

Ba 1" II Mac 41*' * ;] as, according as : Eo 82", 11 Co 812, i Pe 4i3.t 

*Ka0o\iK6s, -ri, -6v {<C. xaOoXov) , catholic, gejieral: tit. Epp. Ja, Pe, 
Jo, Ju (Eec.) (v. Mayor, Ja., ccxc).t 

Ka66\ou (= Kaff oXov and SO in cl. bef. Arist.), adv., [in LXX: 
Ex 2211 'i«', Am 33."; Ez 133-22 1714 (^^ ^_ ^^ ^ ^Tb^^), Da LXX th 
350 *jj oij ^/jg whole, in general : firj k., not at all, Ac 4i^.t 

Ka9-oTrXi!;oj, [in LXX : Je 26 (46)" (iysn), Mag*;] to armfulhj: 
pass., Lk 112i.t 

KaO-opdo), -w, [in LXX : Nu 242 (-,n-|), Jb 10* 392^, iii Mac 311 *;] 
1. to look down. 2. to discern clearly : Eo 1^'^.f 

KaO^Ti {= Kae 5 Tt), adv., [in LXX: Ex I12.17 (i^h^?), To I12, 

Jth 213, al. ;] 1, in cl., according as, just as (Ex, I.e.) : Ac 2*5 435. 2. In 
late Gk. = Sidn (To, I.e.), because : Lk 1^ 19^, Ac 22* 173i.t 

KaOoJS, (i.e. «a6' ws), Hellenistic for KaOd, q.V., KaOd-Trep, KaOo, 
Ka^dri (Mayser, 485; Eutherford, NPhr., 495; Bl., § 78, 1), according 
as, even as, just as, as : Lk I2 (v.s. Ka^a), 24^9, Jo 522, Ac 7*^, i Co 82, 
Ga 3^ al. ; seq. o{^tw<:, Lk ll^o, Jo 31*, 11 Co 15, Col 3i3, i Jo 2«, al. ; 
seq. Ka[, Jo 159, I Co 15«, i Jo 2i8, al. ; o^rws . . . k., Lk 242* ; id. 
with ellipsis of ovtws, Mt 21*, Mk 16^, Eo li^, al. ; with other elliptical 
constructions, Jo 658 1721,22^ Ac 158, j Th 2i3, i Ti P, i Jo 32.3,12; 
KaOm yeypa'^^'^^i (Deiss., BS, 249), Mt 262*, Mk 9i3, Eo li^, al.; intro- 
ducing subst. clause as object of verb (as in Heb.), Mt 21*, Mk 11', 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 225 

Lk 5^*, al. ; after verbs of speaking, Ac 15^*; of proportion and 
degree, Mk i^s, i Co 12ii'i8, al.; of time (Ne 5«, n Mac l^i), Ac 1^\ 

*Ka0(u<nrep (Tr. /ca^cis irc/o), adv. (v.s. Ka^cos), even as : u Co 3' 
(WH, mg.), He 5*.t 

KOI, conj., and. I. Copulative. 1. Connecting single words; 

(a) in general : Mt 2^^ 16\ Mk 21^, Lk 8^^, He l^, al. mult. ; repeated 
before each of the terms in a series, Mt 2323, Lk I421, Eo 7^2 9*, al. ; 

(b) connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4) : Jo 22o, Ac I320 ; (c) joining 
terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole : 
Mt 833 2659, Mk 161^ Ac 529, al. 2. Connecting clauses and sentences : 
Mt 3^2^ Ac 521, al. mult. ; esp. (a) where, after the simplicity of the 
popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, § 60, 3 ; 
M, Pr., 12 ; Deiss., LAE, 128 ff.) : Mt I21 72^, Mk 9^, Jo 103, al. ; (b) 
joining affirmative to negative sentences : Lk 3^*, Jo 4^^, in Jo ^^ ; (c) 
consecutive, and so : Mt 5^^, 2332, gg 319^ ^j • after imperatives, Mt 
4i», Lk 77, al. ; (d) = /catVot, and yet : Mt 3^* 626, m^ 12^2, Lk 18^ 
(Field, Notes, 72), i Co 52, al. ; (e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. l; 

so sometimes 8e in cl.), then: Lk 22^ 7^2, Ac 1^*'; beginning a question 
(WM, § 53, 3 a) : Mk 102«, Lk 102^, Jo 936. 3, Epexegetic, and, and 
indeed, namely (WM, § 53, 3 c): Lk 3^», Jo li«, Ac 236, Eo 1*, i Co 3*, 
al. 4. In transition : Mt 423, Mk 5^' 21, Jo l^^, al. ; so, Hebraistically, 
Kal iyev€To (^n"!l; also cyevcTo Se), Mk 1» (cf. Lk 5^ ; V. Burton, §§ 357-60; 

M, Pr., 14, 16). 5. Koi . . . KOI, both . . . and (for tc . . . Kai, v.s. 
re) ; (a) connecting single words : Mt 1028, Mk 4", Eo 1133, al. ; (b) 
clauses and sentences : Mk 9^3^ Jq 728^ j Co I22, al. II. Adjunctive, 
also, even, still: Mt 539i40^ ;^j]j 228, al. mult.; esp. c. pron., adv., etc., 
Mt 20^ Jo 7^\ al; <Ls k., Ac IP^; KaBws k., Eo 15^ ovto^ k., Eo 6^^; 
810 K., Lk 135; 5 ^. (Deiss., BS, 313 ff.), Ac 13^; pleonastically, ^erk k. 
(Bl., § 77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265 f,). Phi 43; ti k., 1 Co 1529; iXKk k., Lk 
1422, Jo 518, al.; KaLy€ (M, Pr., 230; Burton, § 437), Ac 172^; KotVep, 

He 58; K. idv, v.s. idv. 

Kaiti<}>os (T, Kat-), -a o, Gaiaphas (on the name, v. Exp. Times, 
X, 185) : Mt 263. sr, Lk 32, Jo 11*9, 18i3,i4,24,28^ Ac 46.t 

KaiV (T, KAV), 6, indecl. (in FIJ, K(£is, -los), (Heb. W; Ge 4^), 

Gain: He 11*, i Jo 3^2, Ju ^i.t 

Kai»'(£|ji (T, Kat-; Eec. KalVav), 6, indecl. (Heb. I'i'^p), Cainam, 

Gainan ; 1. son of Enos (Ge 5^) : Lk S^^. 2. Son of Arphaxad 
(Ge 1024 (i'^)) : Lk 336.t 

Koikis, -77, -ov, [in LXX (Bz ll^*, al.) for ann , exc. Is 65" 

(inj<) ;] of that which is unused or unaccustomed, new in respect to 

form or quality, fresh, unused, novel : opp. to iraXaios, dpxaios, Mt 9^^ 
1352, Mk 221.22^ Lk 536.38, n Co b'^\ Eph 42*; nXrjpwfia, Mk 221 ; 
/ivrjfielov, Mt 2760, Jo 19« ; 8iady]Kr] (T, WH, E, txt., omit), Lk 2220, 
I Co 1125, II Co 3«, He 88 d-xx), is 915 ; oipavoC, y^, 11 Pe 3^\ Ee 21^ d^); 

15 



226 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

'UpovaaXrjfji, Ee 3^2 21^ , 3.r0poiTro?, Eph 21^ (cf. Ez 1831) ; Travra, Ea 
21*; yii'i'rjfjia t. Afxir^Xov, Mt 26^9^ Mk l^^^; Si8axi Mk 127, Ac IV^; 
ivToXr'f, Jo 133^ I Jo 27'8, 11 Jo 5; 5,'Ofjia, Ee 2^7 (lxx). ^^^ Rg 5^ 14^ 
(cf. Ps 143 (144)9); ^„Vis, ii Co 6^\ Ga 6^^; yXwo-o-at, Mk 16^"^ 
compar., Ac IT'^^.t 

SYN. : vcos, " the new primarily in reference to time, the young, 
recent ; k. . . . the new primarily in reference to quality, the fresh, 
unworn ". Cf. Tr., Syn., § Ix (the distinction, however, is less marked 
in late Gk. ; cf. He 12^* with He, 11. c. supr., and v. MM, Exp., xv). 

Kai.'OTris, -7;tos, v «fcatvds), [in LXX: III Ki S*^^ Ez 47^2 *;] 
1. novelty (Thuc, Isocr., LS, s.v.). 2. freshness, newness : iv k. ^w^s 
(v. Lft., Notes, 296), Eo 6''; iv k. TrvevVaros, Eo 7".+ 

KaiTrep, concessive particle, [in LXX : Pr 6^, Wi 11^, Jh l^^, 
ii-iv Mac 11*;] although: c. ptcp., Phi 3*, He 5^ 7* 12^^, u Pe li2.t 

Koipo's, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for ny , also for lyia , etc. ;] 

1. due measure, fitness, proportion (Eur., Xen., al.). 2. Of Time 
(cl. also) in the sense of a fixed and definite period, time, season 
(Kennedy, So^irces, 153) : Mt 1125, m^ l^^, Lk 218, Rq 1311^ Eph 6^8, 
He 11^*, I Pe l^'ii, Ee 1^, al. ; c. gen,, Triipaa-p-ov, Lk S^^; t. Kap-n-wv, 
Mt 213* . ^^^^^^ Mk 1113 . pi^ Mt 21" ; xpovot ^ (Ka!) k., Ac 1^, i Th 5^ ; 
iOvwv, Lk 212*; of opportune or seasonable time, Ac 242^, Ga Gi**, 
Eph 516, Col 45; c. inf.. He ll^^; 6 k. oStos, Mk lO^o, Lk IS^"; 6 vw k. 
(Dalman, Words, 148), Eo 8^^; 6 k. 6 ifjL6<;, Jo 7®; k. Scktio, ii Co 
§2 (LXX). SovXevcLV Tw K., Eo 1211, E, mg. ; t. o-r^yneta twv k., Mt 16^ ; 
adverbial usages: il k., Mt 24*5, iPe5« (cf. /caipaJ, Lk20i<*; to! k., Mt 
122) . a^pi Katpov, Lk 413 ; Trpos Kaipov, Lk 813, j Qq ys • ^^.j-a Kaipov, 
Eo 5« ; irpo Kaipov, Mt 829. 

/SFiV^. ; xpovos, time in the sense of duration. 

Kalaap, -apos, 6, G(zsar : Mt 2217, Lk 2i, Jo I912, Ac 258 ff-, al. 

Kaiaapia (Eec. -apeia), -as, t}, GcBsarea ; 1. GcBsarea Philippi, at 

the foot of Lebanon : Mt 16i3, Mk 827. 2. Ccesarea of Palestine, on 

the sea-coast: Ac 8*« 93o 10i'24 lin 12i9 I822 218' le 2323.33 ^^\,i,^,M^\ 

**KaiToi (= KOI Toi, and SO also written in cl.), concessive particle, 

[in LXX: ivMac26*;] and yet, although: Ac 14i7; c. ptcp.. He 43.t 

* KaiToiyc, strengthened form of KatVot, q.v. (and v.s. ye) : Jo 42.t 

Kai<j>as, for Kata^as, q.v. : Lk 32 (L). 

Kaiw, [in LXX for im , Ip"" , ^jltZT , etc. ;] 1. to kindle, light : 
c. ace, Xvxvov, Mt 51*; pass., to be lighted, to burn: ptcp., Lk 123*, 
Ee 45 810 1920 ; mjpi, He 12i8, Ee 8^ 218; metaph., Lk 2432, Jq 535, 

2. to burn, destroy by fire : pass., Jo 15", i Co 133.t 

KdKci (by crasis for koX ckci, and so sometimes written, v. infr.), 
and there, there also: Mt 523 (k. l, Tr., mg.) lO^i 28io {k. l, T), 
Mk 135 (^_ ^^ L) 38 (^. i^^ WH) 1415 (,c. l, WH), Jo 115*, Ac 14^ 
1713 2210 252", 276.t 

KdK€i0€c (by crasis for koL iKeiOev, and so sometimes written, v.s. 
iK€i$€v), of place, and from thence, and thence : Mk 93", Lk 11*3, 
Ac 7* 142« 1612 20^5 211 274 28is.t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF TETE NEW TESTAMENT 227 

KdKcTt'os, -uvrj, -€tvo (by crasis for Kat e/ceivos, and so sometimes 
written, v.s. c/ccivos), and he, she or it ; he, she or it also : Mt 15^^ 232*,- 
Mk 12^>5 16t">"), Lk ir.42 20" 22i2, Jo 6" 7^^ IQi'' U^^ l?^^ IQ^^, 
Ac 53' 1511 1819, Eo 1123, I Co 10«, II Ti 2^2, He 42.t 

KaKia, -as, rj (<^ Ka^co's), [in LXX chiefly for nJH ;] 1. badnessin 

quality (opp. to dperi], excellence). 2. ivickedness, depravity, malignity : 
Ac 8-2, Eo 129, I Co 5s 142«, Eph 431, Col S^, Tit 33, Ja I21, i Pe 2^' i«. 
3. In late Gk., evil, trouble, affliction (Am 3«, i Ki 6^, Ec 7l^ Si 19«, 
al.) : Mt 63* (cf. MM, Exp., xv).t 

Si'-iV. ; irovYjpLa. 
**KaKori0eia (WH, -6^), -as, rj « Ka/co's, 17^05), [in LXX: Es 8^^, 
III Mac 322 73 A, IV Mac 1* 3* * ;] malignity, malevolence : Eo 12^ 
(Cremer, 329) .t 

KaKoXoye'w, -ai (<^ /caKoAdyos, slanderous), [in LXX : Ex 21^*' 222^, 
I Ki 313, Pr 2020, Ez 22^ i^bp pi., hi.), n Mac 41*;] to speak ill of, 
revile, abuse : c. ace. pers., Mt 15*, Mk 7^^ (Lxx) 939 • q ^qq ^.^{^ Ac iga.t 

KaKoiraOeia (WH, -dCa), -as, rj (<[ KaKOTraOi]^, suffering), [in LXX : 
Ma 1^3 (nx^ri), II Mac 226' 27^ jy Mac 9^*;] distress, affliction: 

Ja 5i''.t 

KaKOTra0^(i), -w, [in LXX : Jh 4^0 (bar) * ;] to suffer evil, endure 
affliction : 11 Ti 29 4^, Ja 5i3.t 

KaKo-iroie'w, -w, [in LXX chiefly for ryi hi. ;] to do harm, to do 
evil : Mk 3*, Lk 69, i Pe 3^^ iii Jo 11 (Cremer, 329).t 

KaKOTToios, -oV (<'ca/cdv, TToUio), [in LXX: Pr 12* (tiria hi.) 24" 
fyn hi.) *;] doing evil ; as susbt., an evil-doer : 1 Pe 2^2, u 415^ 

KaKo's, -Tq, -6v, [in LXX chiefly for y^ , nVT ;] 1. in general, opp. 

to dya^ds, KaXds, in various senses, bad, mean, base, worthless (cl.). 2. 
In ethical sense, base, evil, wicked : of persons, Mt 21*^ 24*^, Phi 3^, 
Ee 22; 8taXoyto-/Aot, Mk V^; ofjuXiai, i Co 1533; iwievfiLa (Pr 12^2), 
Col 35 ; Ipyov, Eo 133 ; neut., Ka/cdv, to k., evil : Jo 1823, Ac 239, Eo 721 
1420 1619, 1 Co 135, He 51*, I Pe 3i0'ii, iii Jo "; pi., Eo 13o, i Co 10«, 
I Ti 610, Ja 113; ^ (^^^ ^^ ^•j ^oulv (7rpao-o-6iv), Mt 2723, Mk IS^*, 
Lk 2322, Jo 1830, Eo 38 719 13*, II Co 13", I Pe 3^2 ; • Karcpyti^co-^ai, 
Eo 29; of wrongs inflicted, Ac 9^3, Eo 12i7.2i 1310^ i Th 5^\ 11 Ti 4^*, 
I Pe 39. 3. pernicious, harmful, evil : Lk 162^, Ac 162^ 28^, Tit 1^2, 
Ja 38, Ee 162 (Cremer, 325, 741).+ 

SYN. : v.s. a^€o-/AOS. 

KaKoGpyos, -ov (contr. from epic KaKoepyos), [in LXX . Pr 21^^ 
(llNf byo). Es 813, Si 1133 3035(3326)*.] a malefactor, criminal : Lk 
2332,33,39^ iiTi29.+ 

ticaKooxea), -S> « xaKdv, Ix*^), [in LXX: III Ki 226 1139 (njr pi., 
hith.)*;] to ill-treat, hurt, torment: pass, ptcp., He 113^ 133.+ 

KaKou, -w «KaKos), [in LXX chiefly for jm hi., nzV pi.;] 1. to 
ill-treat, afflict, distress : c. ace. pers., Ac 7^' i9 12i I810, i Pe 3i3. 2. 
(not in cl.), to embitter (Ps 105 (106)32) : Ac I42.+ 



228 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

KaKws (<^Ka/co9), adv., [in LXX : Wi IS^'', iv Mac 6^^ al. ; k. 
cJTT^rv, ipelv (TIN, bbp pi.), Ex 22^8(27). Le ld^\ Is 82i; k. t^v (nbn), 
Ez 34*, al.;] badly, ill; (a) in physical sense: k. €Xftv, to be ill, Mt 
424 QIC 912^ 1435 1715^ Mk 132.34 217 Q55 ^ L^ S^i T^ ; -Trda-xeiv, Mt 1715 
(WH, mg.) ; SaLfjioviCicrdat, Mt 1522 ; KaKOvs k. diroXea-ei (as freq. in cl., 
V. LS, s.v. ; MM, Exp., xv), evil that they are, he will evilly, etc., 
Mt 21*^; [b) in moral sense, wrongly (i Mac 7''2, iv Mac, I.e., al.) : 
K. AaAetv, Jo 1823 ; dirdv, C. acc. pers., Ac 23^ ; aheiadat, Ja d^.t 

KciKwo-is, -€ci>s, 17 (jcaKotij), [in LXX (for ''2V , ny"1 , etc.) : Ex 3'^, 
Je 228, Wi 32, al. ;] ill-treatment : Ac 7^4 (Lxx),t 

KaXdjATj, -7/s, 17 (cf. KaAa/Aos), [in LXX chiefly for IZ?(5, Ex 5^', 
Is 52*, al. ;] a stalk of corn, stubble : i Co 3i2^t 

KdXajxos, -ou, 6, [in LXX chiefly for n?|"^ , Is 42^, Ez 403«'-, al. ;] 
a reed: Mt 11'^ 1220 (Lxx)^ jj^ 724. hence, acc. to its various uses, (a) 
a reed-jyipe, flute; (b) a reed-staff, staff (cf. iv Ki 182\ paygSos 
KaXafXLVT)) : Mt 272''' 30. 48^ Mk ISi". 36 ; (c) a measuring reed or rod 
(Ez, I.e.): Ee 11^ 21i^'i^; ((i) a xvriting reed, a pen: iii Jo ^^ (cf. 
Milligan, NTD, 9, 7).t 

KaX^w, -w, [in LXX chiefly for Nip ;] 1. to call, summon : c. acc. 
pers., Mt 208 2514^ Mk 33i, Lk 19l^ Ac 4i« ; seq. e/c, Mt 2^5 (lxx); metaph., 
I Pe 29. 2. io caZZ io one's house, invite : Lk 14i«, i Co 102^, Ee 19« ; 

€« T. ya/xov9, Mt 223.9, Lk 148.9, Jo 22; 6 KaAeVa?, Lk 739; oi K€KXr,- 

fievoi, Mt 228; metaph., of inviting to partake of the blessings of the 
kingdom of God (Dalman, Words, 118 f.) : Eo 8^^ 92^.25, i Co 7''- 18 
seq. £is, I Co 19, I Th 2^2, i Ti 6i2; 6 KaXCy, (/caAeVas), of God, Ga 1^ 58 
I Th 52*, I Pe 115, II Pe is. ^i ^^^x-rjixiyoi, He 91^; seq. iv (ctt/), i Co 71* 
Ga 513, Eph 4*, I Th 47 ; ^A^jo-tt, Eph 41, 11 Ti 19. 3. to call, name 
call by name: pass., Mt 223, u^ is-i^ ^j . Kakov/meuo';, Lk 7^^ Ac 7^8 
al. ; 6 K. (Deiss., BS, 210), Lk G^^ 223 2333, Ac lO^, Ee 129, al. ; c. pred 
nom., Mt 59, Lk 135, Rq 926^ J^ 223, i Jo 31. (Cf. dvn-, iy, da- (-/xai) 
iiTL-, fXiTa-, vapa-, avv-Trapa-, irpo-, irpo<T-, avv-KaXew.) 

* KaXXieXaios, ov, rj, the garden olive (opp. to dypuX-) : Eo 1124.t 
KaXXiuf, -ov, compar. of KaAos, v.s. KaAws. 
*t KaXo-8i8d(TKaXos, -ov, 6, a teacher of that which is good : Tit 23.t 
KaXol AifAcVcs, Fair Havens, a harbour in Crete : Ac 278.t 

t KaXo-TToiew, -u), [in LXX : Le 5* F (KaAw? tt., B) * ;] to do well, 
act honourably : 11 Th 3^^ (cf. Ga 69 t6 koKov ir.).t 

KaXo's, -17, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for 2113 , nilita , also for n©^ , etc. ;] 

1. primarily, of outward form ("related to . . . dyaOo^ as the appear- 
ance to the essence," Cremer, 339), fair, beautiful : XiOol (BV, goodly), 
Lk 21*. 2, In reference to use, of that which is well adapted to its 
ends, good, excellent : of fish, t. KaAd (opp. to crairpd), Mt 13*8 j a-Trep/xa, 

Mt 1324.27,37,38. ^ap7r09, Mt 310 71"-19 1233^ Lk 39 [WH] 6« ; 8€v8poy 

(opp. to aaTTpov), Mt 1233, Lk 6^3; yij, Mt 138.23, Mk 48.20, Lk 815; 
T. aAas, Mk 959, Lk 1434; < ^^Vos, Eo V^ i Ti 18; MacTKaXCa, I Ti 4«; 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 229 

KapSia K. Kol ayadrj, Lk 8^^; TrapaOrjKrj, II Ti 1^*; fxerpov, Lk 6^^; fiaOp-os, 
I Ti 313; ^e/ie'Atos, I Ti 619; to k., I Th 521 ; fiapyap^rai, Mt 13*5; olvo^, 
Jo 210; TToi/AT/v, Jo IQii'i*; SictKovo?, I Ti 4«; ot/covd/xos, i Pe 4}°; 
o-TpaTiwrr;?, II Ti 2^ ; a-Tpareia, 1 Ti 11^ ; dywi/, I Ti 612, jj rp^ 47 • ^fj^Xoyia, 
I Ti 612. 13 . ipyov, Mt 2610, Mk 146, Jq iq^^, i Ti 31 ; pi., Jo 10»2 ; Ka\6v 
eo-Tiv, c. inf. et dat., Mt 18^' 9, i Co 7i'26 91^ id. c. ace. et inf., Mt 17*, 
Mk 95. «, 45, 47^ Lk 933, He 139; geq. d, Mt 262*, Mk 9*2 1421 ; idu, 
I Co 7^. 3. Ethically, good, in the sense of right, fair, noble, honour- 
able : Ga 418, He 51* ; epya, Mt 5^\ 1 Ti 5io> 25 6I8, Tit 2^' 1* 3^' 1* 
(Field, Notes, 223 f.), He IO2*, i Pe 212 ; <lmo-rpo<^7;, Ja 3i3, i Pe 212 ; 
o-iT€i8>/o-ts, He 131^ ; seq. ivw-n-Lov, Eo 12i^, 11 Co 8-1, i Ti 2^ ; to k. ttoiciv 
{KaTepydC^aOai), Eo 71^.21, n Co 13^ Ga 6^, Ja 41^ KaXov eo-Tiv, c. inf., 
Mt 15^6 (T^ 4'feo-riv), Mk 727, Eo 1421, Ga 4i8; p.aprvpCa, I Ti 37; 
6vop.a, Ja 2'' ; Kavxqp.a, I Co 5^ (neg.) ; Oiov prjpa. He 6'^. k. does not 
occur in Ee.t 

SVA^. : V.S. dya^o's. 

KciXojifia, -Tos, to' (■< koXutttw), [in LXX : Nu325 48ff. (np5a), 
Ex 3433 ff. (n^5^), etc.;] a covering, veil : 11 Co 3i3-i6.t 

KaXu-irru, [in LXX almost always for nD3 pi. ;] in cl., rare in 
prose, to cover : c. ace. pers., Lk 2330; c. ace. rei et dat., Lk 81^ ; pass., 
Mt 82*; metaph., to veil, conceal: pf. ptep. pass., Mt 102^, 11 Co 43; 
of the forgiveness of sins (cf. Ps 31 (32)^ 84 (85)2 • j)^^ ij^ 55b) • j Pe 48^ 
Ja 520 ; (v.l. for Katopevr}, WH, mg., Lk 2432).t 

KaXws, adv. (<^ KaAo's), [in LXX for parts and derivatives of SM'';] 
fi7iely, rightly, well: Lk 6*8, i Co 141^, Ga 4i7 5', Ja 23; AeW, 
XaXelv, etc., Mt 15^ Mk 7^ 12-^ Lk 626 2039, Jq 417 Qis 1313 1323^ Ac 
2825; as exclamation of approval, Mk 1232, Rq 1120. ^ ^q^^-^^ -^^ 12i2, 
I Co 737.38^ Ja 28.1'-'; c. dat. pers. (cl. ace; WM, § 32, lyS), Lk 62'; 
c. ace. rei, Mk 73^; c. ptcp., Ac 1033 (M, Pr., 131), Phi 41*, 11 Pe li», 
III Jo 6; TrpoLcrrdvai {-aaOaL), I Ti 3*' 12 51^ SiaKovdv, I Ti 313; Siyarpe- 
0€o-^at, He I318; ironically, Mk 79, 11 Co 11* (but v. CGT, in 1.); k. 
€X€Lv, to be well : Mk 16[i^l Compar., KaWiov (for superl,, Bl., § 44, 3), 
very well : Ac 25io,t 

Kdjuie = Kttl cfi^, V.S. iyw. 

KafiTiXos, -ov, 6, rj, [in LXX for ^02 ;] camel : Mt 3*, Mk 1^ ; in 

proverbs, Mt 192* 3324, Mk 1025, l^ 1825 (qq the v.l. Kdp.ikos, v. WH, 
Notes, 151).t 

KdfiiXos, V.S Kap.TjXo's, and cf. Thayer; LS, s.v. 

Kd|xii/os, -ov, % [in LXX : Ge 19-^8, Ex 19i8, Is 48io, al. (]0r53 , "VIS), 

Da LXX TH 36 ff- (pnx) ;] a furnace : Mt 13*2. 50^ Re li5 92.t 

Ka)x|j,ua» (syncopated form of Karapvw, used by Ep. and koiv-q 
v^riters; Eutherford, NPhr., 426 f.), [in LXX: Is 6i« (yytzr hi.) 29i9 
3315 (DSr), La 3** AE*;] to shut the eyes: t. 6cj>ea\povs, Mt 131^, 
Ac 2827 (is^ 1,(5.).+ 

Kdfji.'a), [in LXX : Jb IQi {wp ni.) I72, Wi 416 159, jy Mac 3^ 



230 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

7^^*;] 1. to work; hence, from the effect of continued work, 2. to be 
weary : He 12^. 3. to be sick : Ja 5^^.t 

Kap,oi = KoX ifjioi, V.8. iyu). 

KdjiTTTw, [in LXX chiefly for y-|3 , iv Ki l^s, n Ch 2929, ig 
4524 (23)^ ai .J f^Q bend, bow : c. ace. rei, yoVu, to. y. ; c. dat. pers., ttj 
BaaX, Eo ll'*(i'^x)j ^p,^,5 ^ irarepa, Eph 3^*; by meton., ttSv ydi'V for 
ttSs, Eo 1411 (LXX)^ Phi 210 (cf. dva-, avy-Kdfji7rT0>).f 

kSc, by crasis for kol av {= idv; WH, App., 145b; Thayer, s.v.), 
c. subjunc, 1. and if: Mk 16[i8], Lk 1238, joSS", i Co 13^-3, Ja 51^; c. 
ellips., Lk 139. 2. Concessive, even if: Mt 212i 2635, Jo S^* lO^s 1125, 
He 1220. 3. As intensive of simple Kat (M, Pr., 167 ; WM, 730 ; 
Jannaris, Gr., 598), even, at least : Mk 528 6^^, Ac 5^^, 11 Co ll^^t 

Kavd (Eec. -v5), •^, indecl., Ca7ia, of Gahlee : Jo 2i«" 4^6 212.t 

Kacai'aros, -ou, 6 (late Heb. N3X3(?), a Gananaan or Zealot (cf. 

^TjXwTi^s) : Mt 10^ Mk 31^ (Eec. -vij-q<;)A 
Kai'ai'iTTjs, V.S. Karavaio?. 
Kai'SdKt), -77s, 17, Candace : Ac S^^.t 
Kai'wi', -oVos, 6 (cf. KOLvva, and Heb. njf? , a reed), [in LXX : Mi 

1\ Jth 13«, IV Mac 721 (and in Aq., Ps 18 (19)^, Jb 38^)*;] 1. a rod or 
bar (Jth, I.e.). 2. a measuring rule; hence, metaph, 3. a rule or 
standard : Ga 6^^. 4. a limit (EV, province) : 11 Co lO^^, 15, le (Pqj, 
the history of the word and esp. its later meanings, v. Westc, Canon, 
App. A ; cf. also MM, Exp., xv; Cremer, 744.)t 

KaiT€pi/aoup., V.S. }^a(f)apvaov/x. 
* KaTTTjXeu'o) « KaTrrjXo?, a huckster, cf. Is 122 (LXX)^ Si 2629), to make 
a trade of (EV, mg., make merchandise of), or perhaps (cf. Is, I.e.) to 
corrupt (EV, txt.) : 11 Co 2^'^.f 

Kairi'(5s, -oS, 6, [in LXX for ]I2ry;] smoke: Ee 8* 92»3.i7.i8 1411 

158 189,18 193. ^^^l^ Kairvov, Ac 2^^(^^^\i 

KairiraSoKia, -as, 17, Gappadocia, a province of Asia Minor : Ac 2^, 
I Pe li.t 

KapSi'a, -as, 17, [in LXX chiefly for 2^ , as^ ;] the heart, 1. the 

bodily organ which is regarded as the seat of life (11 Ki 18^*, iv Ki 92^, 
al.). 2. In a psychological sense, the seat of man's collective energies, 
the focus of personal life, the seat of the rational as well as the 
emotional and volitional elements in human life, hence that wherein 
lies the moral and religious condition of the man {DB, ii, 317 f. ; 
DGG, ii, 344a) ; (a) of the seat of physical life (Jg 19^, Ps 101 (102)^ 
103 (104)15) : Ac 141^, Ja 5^ ; (b) of the seat of spiritual life : Mt 58, 
Mk 719, Lk 151, Ac 53, Eo lO^. 10, Eph 65, al. ; pi., Mt 9^ Mk 2^, al. ; 
opp. to (TTGfxa, x^'Aea, Trp6ao)Trov, Mt 158, Mk 7^, Eo 108. 9, n Co 512 ; 
TreptTOM KapSms, Eo 229; i^ ^.^ Rq Q17^ j Pe 122- ^^^ ^-^ ^,^ Mt 18^5; 
€1/ oX.r) {ii oAr/s) t. k., Mt 22^''', Mk 12^^ (LXX) J yt,v(^(TK€tv (ipevvav, SoKtpidleiv) 

Tas K., Lk 1615, Ro 327^ I Th 2"; to think, etc., iv r. k., Mt 9S Mk 2«, 
Lk 12^5^ Jio 10"; (Twiivai (yoCiv) ry k., Mt 13^5, Jo 12^0; eVaxw^T? V k., 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 231 

Mt 13'5(Lxx); -^u^povv r^v k., Jo 12*0; ^. £^,ra, Ac 821; ^o»^p(£, He 3^2 ; 
a.^l€Tav6■qTO<i, Eo 2^ ; elvai (ex^tv) eV ttj k., II Co 7^, Phi 1'^ ; 68vvr] rfj k., 
Eo 92. 3. Of the central or innermost part of anything (of the pith of 
wood, Arist.) : t. y^s, Mt 12*« (Cremer, 343 ff.). 

*t KapSio-yi'wcmis, -ov, 6 «; xapSt'a, yvwcmjs), knower of hearts: Ao 
12* 158.t 

KdpTTos, -ov, 6, Carpus : 11 Ti 4}^ A 

KapTTos, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for iig ;] fruit : of trees, Mt 12" 

2119, Mk 111*, Lk 6** 13"' 7 ; of vines, Mt 21^*, Mk 12^, Lk 20io, i Co 
97 ; of fields, Mk 429, Lk 12i^ 11 Ti 2«, Ja 5^; /SAoo-ravciv, Ja 5i8; Troicrv 
(cf. Heb. 1-15 n^y), Mt 310 717-19 1326, Lk 3^ 6« 8» 13^, Ee 222; 8i8oVai, 
Mt 138, Mk 47.8; ^e'peiv, Mt 7I8, Jo 122* 152,4,5,8,16. i^o8t86vaL, 
Mt 21*1, lie 222; < ^_ ^_ ^^^Xi'as (|W3 ^5, De 28*), Lk 1*2; t. ocrt^vos 

(Ge 302, al.), Ac 2^\ Metaph., (a) of works, deeds : Mt 38 71"' 20 21*3, 
Lk 38, Jo 158> 16 ; T. irvev/xaro';, Ga 522 . ^ cfxDTO^, Eph 5^ ; t. SiKaioavvr}^, 
Phi 111; ^^payi^ecrOai tov k. (Deiss., 5S, 238 f.), Eo 15-8; ^, dya^oi', 
Ja 317; (6) of advantage, profit: Phi 122 41^; l^"", Eo li^ 621.22; 
a-vvdyuv, Jo 43". ^_ ^ SiKaLOcrvvr]^, He 1211, Jg, 318- Qf praise, KapTTOv 
X«AeW (Ho 142, al.; cf. ^sch., Eum., 830) : He 13i5.t 

KapTTo-<j>opea), -w, [in LXX: Hb 3I' (n-ID), Wi 10^*;] to bear 
fruit: x">Tov, Mk 428 (cf. Wi, I.e.). Metaph., of conduct: Mt 1323, 
Mk 420, Lk 815, Eo 7*.^ Col 110; mid.. Col V.f 

KapTro-<|>6pos, -ov « KapTru's, <^€pw), [in LXX : Je 221 (vit), Ps 106 
(107)3* 1489 (ng)*;] fruitful : Ac 14i7.t 

Kapxcpe'a,, -Hy, [in LXX : Jb 29 (pm hi.). Is 421* (nro), Si 22 121^, 
II, IV Mac 7*;] to be steadfast, patient : He 1127 (cf. 7rpoo--KapTcpcw).t 
K(ip4)os, -€os (-ous) TO, [in LXX : Ge 811 (Pj'lip) *;] a small dry 

stalk, a twig ; metaph., of a minor fault : Mt 73-^, Lk 6*i'*2.t 

Kard (bef. a vowel /car, KaO' ; on the freq. neglect of elision, v. 
Tdf., Pr., 95 ; WH, App., 146*), prep. c. gen., ace, dow7i, dowmvards. 
I. C. gen. (WM, § 47, k; Bl., § 42, 2). 1. C. gen. rei, in local sense; 
(a) down, down from : Mt 8«2, Mk 5i3, Lk 833, ^ Qo 11*; (b) through- 
out (late usage ; Bl, I.e.) : k. 5\r}^ k.t.X., Lk 41* 23^, Ac 93i 1037 ; (c) 
in a peculiar adjectival phrase : rj k. ftdOovs irrtDxeia, deep or extreme 
poverty, 11 Co 82. 2. C. gen. pers., usually in hostile sense; (a) 
against (in cl. only after verbs of speaking, witnessing, etc.) : opp. to 
wep, Mk 9*0; fi€Td, Mt 1230; after i7ri6vfi€:v, Ga 5i7; \aXelv, Ac 6i3; 
StSao-Kfiv, Ac 2128 ; if/cvBeaOai, Ja 31* ; after verbs of accusing, etc., Mt 
523, Lk 231*, Eo 833, al. ; verbs of fighting, prevailing, etc., Mt 103^, 
Ac 142, I Co 46, al. ; (&) of swearing, by : ofiw/xi k. (BL, § 34, 1), He 
613.16, cf. Mt 2663. II. c. ace. (WM, § 49d; BL, §42, 2). 1. Of 
motion or direction ; (a) through, throtighout : Lk 839 ge iq*, Ac 8i. 36, 
al. ; (b) to, towards, over against : Lk 1032 (Field, Notes, 62), Ac 2io 
157, Ga 211, Phi 31*, al.; (c) in adverbial phrases, at, in, by, of: kut 



232 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

oiKov, at home, Ac 2**^ ; Kar I8iav (v.s. i8ios) ; kuO" iavrov, Ac 28^", Eo 
1422, ja 217; c. pron. pers., Ac 1728 IS^s, Eo l^^, Eph l^^, al. 2. Of 
time, at, during, about : Ac 826 12^ 1923, Eo 9^ He l^", al. 3. Dis- 
tributive; (a) of place: k. tottod?, Mt 24^^, al. ; k. ttoXlv, Lk S^'*, al. ; 
K. iKK\rj<riav, Ac 1423 . (^) ^f time : k. eVos, Lk 2^^ ; iopTrjv, Mt 27^5, al.; 
(c) of numbers, etc. : Kaff ha iravrts, i Co 143i (on Kad' ct?, v.s. eh) ; 
K. Uarov, Mk 6'*o ; K. iiipo<i, He 9^ ; k. wo/xa, Jo 103. 4 Qf fitness, 
reference, conformity, etc. ; (a) w relation to, concerning : Eo 13> * 722 
93.5, I Co 126 1018, Phi 112; ^. ^^^^a^ Ac 1722, Col 320.22^ He 2^7 41^; 
{b) according to, after, like : Mk 7^, Lk 22^.29^ jo 72s Eo 8* 14i5, Eph 
22, Col 2^, Ja 2^, al. III. In composition, k. denotes, 1. doivn, dotvn 
from {Kara^aivu), etc.), hence, metaph. ; (a) victory or rule over 
{KaraBovkow, -Kvpuvw, etc.); {b) "perfective" action (M, Pr., Ill ff.). 
2. tinder (KaTaKoXcTTTO), etc.). 3. in succession {KaOe$rj<i). 4. after, 
behind {KaTaXeiirw). 5. Hostility, against (KaraXaXccu). 

Kara-Paifw, [in LXX chiefly for IT ;] to go or come down, 
descend. 1. Of persons: Mt 316 24i7, Lk 2" 6i7 103i 173i 195-6, 
Jo 447.*9.8i 57^ Ac 731 815 1020 2019 23i» 241.22, Eph 410 ; seq. Atvo, 
Mt 81 1429 2749. 42, Mk 322 1530, Lk 1030, Jo 638, Ac 25\ i Th 416 ; cV, 
Mt 179; iK T. oipavod, Mt 282, Mk 9^, Jo 132 313 533, 4i, 42, 50, 51, ss^ ^q iqi 
181 201 ; €i's, Mk 110, Lk 1030 181*, Jo 212, Ac 71^ 838 1425 168 I822 256, 
Eo 10^ Eph 49; cTTi, c. ace. loc, Jo 6I6 ; c. ace. pers., Lk 322, Jo 133. 52. 
iy, Jo 5W; Trpd?, c. ace pars., Ac IO21 I411, Ee 12i2. 2. Of things: 
crK€5o9, Ac 1011 115 . ^po^^^ Mt 725.27 ; XalXai};, Lk 823 . ggq. diTrd, Lk 95*, 
Ac 826, Ja 117; cVt T. yijy, Lk 22** (WH, E, mg., reject); c'k t. oipavov 
seq. dTTo, Ee 312 212. 10 ; j^ ggq ^.^^ jje 13i3; ^,ri, c. ace. pers., Ee I621. 
Fig., K. Icos aSov, Mt 1123, Lk 10^5^ ^H, txt., Tr., mg. {KaTafSifSaaerjcrr], 
T, WH, mg., EV), (cf. <xvv-Karal3aivw).f 

Kaxa-pdXXw, [in LXX chiefly for ^33 hi. ;] 1. to cast down, 
prostrate : metaph., pass., 11 Co 4^. 2. to put doion, lay down : 
metaph., mid., c. ace, OefjiiXiov, He 6i.t 

*t KaTa-Pape'«, -w, to weigh down : metaph., c. ace. pers., 11 Co 12i6.+ 
tKara-papuVo., [in LXX: II Ki 1325 1426 (^-^3), Ji 28, Si 815*;] 
= /cara/Sapew : pass., pres. ptcp., Mk 14*o_f 

Kara-pipdio), [in LXX for IT (hi., etc.) : De 21^ Ez 31i6, al. ;] 
to cause to go down, cast down : pass., Iws ai8ov, Mt 1123 (WH, E, mg.), 
Lk 1015 (WH, mg.).t 

** Kara-poXi^, -^s, ^ « KaraySciXXa)), [in LXX: II Mac 229*;] 1. a 
laying doxon : cis k. <nripfxaTo<i, He 11" (EV, to conceive seed). 2. a 
foundation (of a house, 11 Mac, I.e.) : metaph., dTrd k. Koa-fxov, Mt 
1335 (LXX) (om. K6<TfjLov WH, E, mg.), ib. 253*, Lk 1150, He 43 926, 
Ee 138 178 . ^p^ ^, KoV/xov, Jo 172^ Eph 1*, i Pe 12o.t 

* Kaxa-Ppapeuu {<^l3pafi€v<i, an umpire, cf. ySpaySetov), to give judg- 
ment against, condemn (v. Field, Notes, 196 ; Abbott, Essays, 104 f.) : 
Col 2i8.t 

*t KaraYYeXcus, -c'to?, 6, a proclaimer, herald (in Inscr., k. aywvojv, 
Deiss., LAE, 97) : c. gen. obj., Ac n^\f 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 233 

KOT-aYY^Xw, [in LXX : Pr IT^ A, ii Mac S^e 9^7*;] 1. to pro- 
claim, declare: c. ace. rei, Ac 3^* 16^1 17^^; t. avda-raa-iv, Ac 4^; 
T. Xoyov Tov ©., T. K., Ac 18* 1536 . ^^y a-uiTqpla^, Ac 16^7; </>ws, Ac 2623; 
T. fj.v(XTTjpiov TOV 0., I Co 2^ ; T. ciayycAiov, 9^* ; t. ^avarov tov K., ll'^® ; 
pass., 3<j!)C(ris, Ac 13^8; 6 Xoyo? tov 0., ib. IT^^j ^ ,rio-Tis v/iaiv, Eo 1^; 
c. ace. pers., of Christ, ov, Ac 17^, Col l^*; t. Xpia-Tov, Phi 1^^; pass., 
ib. ^^. 2. <o denounce (Xen., al.) ; (for compariaon with dyycAXw, dvay-, 
(iTray-, V. Westc. On I Jo 1^ ; and cf. 7r/)o-KaTayycXA.w).t 

KOTa-YcXdu, -w, [in LXX chiefly for pniZT , Jb 52-, Pr 29^, al. ;] 
to deride, laugh scornfully at : c. gen. pers., Mt 92*, Mk 5*^, Lk S^^.t 

icara-Yit'WCTKu (v.s. yivwo-Kw), [in LXX : De 25^ (jTCTT hi.), Pr 28^1 
(ipn), Si 142 19^*;] to blame, condemn: c. gen. pers., i Jo 32''»2i; 
pass., Kareyvwa-fiivo^ rjv (RV, he stood condemned, v. Ellic, in 1. ; but 
cf. Field, Notes, 188) : Ga 2^\f 

KOT-dY»'ufii, [in LXX for nnj pi., etc. ;] to break : c. ace. rei, 
Mt 1220 (LiX), Jo 193'-33.t 

Kara-Ypd^xo, [in LXX chiefly for UTIS;] to trace, draw in outline 
(= Att. avayp-) : Jo 8^^'i (eypac^cv, Eec.).t 

Kar-dYw, [in LXX chiefly for "TV hi. ;] to bring down : c. ace. 

pers., Ac 223o, Eo 10^; id. seq. ets, Ac g^" 23i5.2o,28. ^g nautical term, 

to bring to land : t. TrXotov i-n-l t. yrjv, Lk 5^^ ; pass., seq. cis, Ac 27^ 28^2^t 

*t KaT-aYwcil^oiJiai, depon., "perfective" compound (M, Pr., 116); 

1. to struggle against. 2. to conquer, overcome : He IP^.t 

KOTa-S^w, -<o, [in LXX for l27Zin , etc. ;] to bind up : t. Tpavfjiara 
(cf. Si 2721), Lk 103*.t 

* Kard-STjXos, -ov (SlXos), quite manifest, evident : He 7^^.+ 

Kara-SiKdiia,, [in LXX : Ps 93 (94)21 (j^-, i^i )^ ^^ 336 (my pi.), 
Wi 22<^, al. ;] to pass sentence upon, condemn; in el., c. gen. pers. 
(ace. rei) ; in late writers (so LXX), c. ace. pers. {davaxw, Wi, I.e.) : 
Mt 127, ja 56; absol. (as Plat., Legg., 958c), Lk 637; pass., Mt 1237, 
Lk 637.t 

** KaTa-8iKT), -7/s, 17, [in LXX : Wi 1227 * ;] sentence, condemnation : 
Ac 251s. t 

KaTa-SiwKO), [in LXX chiefly for OTi;] "perfective" compound 
(M, Pr., 116), to pursue closely, folloiv up ; (a) with hostile intent 
(Thuc, i, 49, Ge 3136 al.); (b) with kindly intention (Ps 22 (23)6, 
I Ki 3022, cf. Si 27^7) : Mk 136.t 

KaTa-SouXoo), -w, [in LXX chiefly for T^y ;] to enslave : 11 Co II20, 
Ga 2*.t 

KaTa-Sucaoreuu, [in LXX for n3^, pVffJI, etc. ;] to exercise power 
over, oppress : e. ace. pers. (Xen. ; LXX, Mi 22, Wi 2^*', al.) ; c. gen. 
pers., Ja 26 {ip.a<i, T) ; pass., Ac 1038 (cf. MM, Exp., xv).t 

*t Kard-Ocfia, -tos, to, a curse ("perh. somewhat stronger than 
dvd^€/ia," Swete, Be., I.e.) : Ee 223 (cf_ <ivd^eyuia).t 

*t Kara-OejiaTiJo), to curse vehemently : Mt 267* ^^f avaOip.-).i 

KaT-aioxuVu, [in LXX chiefly for izri2;] to disgrace, dishonour, 
put to shame : c. ace. rei, i Co 11*' ^ ; e. ace. pers., i Co 127 2122 . pass., 



234 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

to be anhamed : Lk 13i7, ii Co 7^* 9^, i Pe S^e ; as in LXX (Ps 21 
(22)« 24 (25)'^' 3, al.), of unfulfilled hopes: Eo 5^ pass., Eo 9^3 lO^, 
I Pe 2" (Lxx),t 

Kara-Kaiw, [in LXX chiefly for pjlir; in Ex 3^ (baS' pu.), distin- 
guished from Kaid) ;] to burn up, burn completely : c. ace. rei, Mt 13^'', 
Ac 1919 ; pass., i Co 3l^ He 13^1, ii Pe S^", Ee 8" ; seq. ^vpi, Mt 3^2 
13^«, Lk 317 (cf. Ex 29l^ al.) ; iv nvpC (De 9^1, al.) : Ee 171" IS^.t 

Kara-KaXuTTTu, [in LXX chiefly for nD3 pi.;] to cover uj) ; mid., 
to cover or veil oneself : i Co 11®; t. K(.4>a\iqv, ib. ".+ 

t KaTa-Kaux«io|jiai, -w/Aat, [in LXX: Za lO^^ (rj^l hith.), Je 27 
(50)11 (T^y), ib. 3^^ (bbn)*;] 1. to boast against, exult over: c. gen., 
Eo 111^, Ja 213 . geq_ ^f^T^^ c. gen., Ja 31* (T, om. Kara). 2, seq. Iv, to 
glory in (Za., I.e., Je 2738).t 

Kard-Keifiai, [in LXX: Pr 6^ 233" (^3^2;^^^ jth 13i\ Wi 17"*;] 
1. to lie down. 2. to lie sick: Mk l^" 2\ Jo 5^ Ac 28^ seq. ivi, c. 
gen., Ac 933 ; id. c. ace, Lk 5^^ ; eV, Jo 53. 3. to recline at meals (ef. 
avdKecfjiaL) : Mk 143, Lk 529 . seq. iy^ Mk 2l^ Lk 737, i Co 8io.t 

Kara-KXaw, -d, [in LXX: Ez 191"" {'OfDZ hoph.)*;] to break up, 
break in pieces : Mk 6*1, Lk 91®. t 

Kara-KXeia,, [in LXX: Je 39 (32)3 (jji,3)^ wi I72.16, iiMac I321, 
III Mac 32^*;] to shut top: c. aco. pers., seq. iv (f>vXaKfj (-ats), Lk 32", 
Ac 26i«.t 

t Kara-KXripoSoTe'a), w, [in LXX : De 138 211^ A {-vo^iio, B), (bn3), 
I Mac 33« XE (-vo^e'w. A)*;] Ac 131^, Eec, = -vo/xe'w, q.v.t 

t KaTa-KXTipoi-oiJiew, -w, [in LXX for bui , 12?T , etc. ;] 1. to distribute 
by lot or as an inheritance (Nu 341^, Jos 14i, al.) : Ac 131^. 2. to 
receive by inheritance (De 13^, al.).+ 

Kara-KXi^w, [in LXX: Ex 2118 (bs:), Nu 24^, Jg 52^ (y-|3), 
I Ki 1611 (2.2,0), Jth 121^, III Mac 13*;] to lay doivn, make to lie down, 
esp. for meals : c. ace. pers., Lk 91*' 1^; mid., to recline at meals : Lk 
73« 2430 ; seq. c^'s, Lk 14^ (cf. Jth, l.c.).t 

KOTa-KXi5ia>, [in LXX for ^:nw , Ps 77 (78)2o, al. ;] to inundate, 
deluge: pass., n Pe 3''.t 

Kaxa-KXuo-jjios, -ov, 6 (<^ KaraKkv^w), [in LXX chiefly for bllQ , Ge 

617, al. ; also for ^m , Ps 31 (32)«, al. ;] a flood, deluge : Mt 2438- ^^, 

Lk 1727, II Pe 25.t 

t KaT-aKoXouOt'o), -i, [in LXX : Je 17i« (nyi), i Mac 623, al. ;] to 
folloio after : Lk 23^^ ; c. dat. pers , Ac 16i7.t 

KaTa-KiSirTw, [in LXX for n33 hi., DDS pi., etc. ;] to cut up, cut in 
pieces (cf. Is 27^, Je 21s 11 Ch 34") : kavrhv Xieoa, Mk 5^t 

Kara-Kptiixt'ii^w « Kprjfivos), [in LXX : II Ch 25i2 ('jjbtzr hi.), 11 Mae 
2215 1443^ JY Mac 42^*;] to throw over a precijnce, cast down head- 
long : Lk429.t 

*t Kard-Kpifxa, -tos, to (-c^^ KaTav/ni to), penalty (RY , condemnation ; 
but ef. Deiss., BS, 264 f. ; MM, Exp., xv) : Eo 51^-18 8i.t 

naxa-icpii'w, [in LXX : Es 2i (173 ni.), Wi 41^, Da LXX th Su" 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 235 

4^*, TH Su ^^' *^' ^2 * ;] to give judgment against, condemn : Eo 8^* ; c. 
ace. pers., Mk U^\ Jo 8Cio, u] ; disting. fr. Kpivety, Eo 2^, i Co ll^^ ; seq. 
Oavdrio (cl. -ov Or -ov), Mt 2018, Mk 1033; pass., Mt 273, Mk 16M, 
Eo 14^3^ J Qo 1132, II Pe 2". Metaph., of condemning through a good 
example : Mt 1241.42, Lk 1131.32, Eo 83, He ll^.t 

*t Kard-Kpiais, -£ws, ^ (<[ Kara/cptVaj), condemnation: II Co 3* 7' 
(of. Deiss., LAE, 91 f.).t 

Kara-KUTTTw, [in LXX : IV Ki 9^2 {^p^ hi.)*;] to bend down, 
stoop : Jo 8[8^ (/cttTO) Kv^f/as, Eec, WH, mg.).t 

icaTa-Kupi€u'w, [in LXX: Ge l^s (orns), Ps 109 (110)^ (rm), 
Si 17*, al. ;] to gain or exercise dominion (over) ; (a) absol. (Arist.) ; 
(b) c. gen. (Arist., al.) : Mt 202^, Mk 10*2, Ac 19i6, i Pe 53.t 

SYN. : KaTe$ova-Ld^(D (v. Swete, Mk., I.e.). 

Kara-XaXeo), -w, [in LXX chiefly for ')2,1 ni., pi. ;] to speak evil 
of, rail at: in cl., c. ace; in LXX, (a) c. gen., (b) seq. Kara, c. gen.; 
in NT, c. gen. (M, Pr., 65) : Ja ^n, i Pe 2i2 ; pass., i Pe d^^.f 

**t Kara-XaXid, -Ss, 17 (•< KaraXaAos), [in LXX: Wi 1^*;] evil- 
speaking, railing : pL, 11 Co 12^'*, i Pe 2i.t 

*t Kord-XaXos, -ov, 6, a railer, defamer : Eo I'^.t 

Syn. : \l/i6vpi(TTr)<i, a whisjyerer (v. Tr., Syn., § cvii, 15; Lft., 
Notes, 256). 

Kara-XafiPticw, [in LXX for 2tff2 hi., 13^, etc.;] 1. to lay hold of, 
seize, appropriate : Mk 91^ ; c. ace. rei, i Co 9^*, Phi 3i^' i3. 2. to 
overtake: as correl. of StwKw (Field, Notes, 158 f.), Eo 93^; ri rj/xipa, 
I Th 54 ; of evils, Jo 1^ 123^ (cf. 6I'' T) ; hence, to surprise, discover : 
Jo 813'*]. 3. Of mental action, to apprehend, comprehend ; so mid., 
in NT (M, Pr., 158): Eph 318; seq. 5ti, Ac 413 103*; c. ace. et inf., 
Ac 25'" (MM, Exp., xv).t 

Kara-X^Y*^, [in LXX: De 191" (.13^), II Mac 73" E*;] 1. to lay 
down; mid. (in Horn.), to lie down. 2. to narrate (LXX, 11. e.). 
3. to choose out, hence, to enrol (as of soldiers, Hdt., Thuc, al., v. 
LS, s.v.) : of widows, pass., i Ti 5^ (cf. Ellie.; CGT, in l.).t 

t KaTd-XeifJifia, -tos, to (<^KaTaX€t7rw), [in LXX for IN^T (Is IC^^ 

1422), nn^iUr , etc. ;] a remnant : Eo 9", Eec. (for v-n-okeLfifxa, q.v.).t 

KaTa-Xciiru, [in LXX chiefly for INtZT , ni., hi., also for nTr , IT)"* 
etc.;] 1. to leave behind, leave: c. ace. pers. (rei), Mt 4i3, Mk 12i^»2i 
Lk 2031, Ac 2427 2514, He IP^ ; of sailing by a place, Ac 213 . pt^p^ 
KaTaXtTTwv, redundant (Dalman, Words, 21 f .), Mt 16* 211^ ; pass. 
Jo 8[9], I Th 31; metaph., eiOelav 686v, 11 Pe 2i5. 2. to forsake 
abandon: Mt 19^, Mk lO^d-^) 14^2, Lk 528 15*, Ac 6^, Eph 531 (lxx), 
3. to leave remaining, reserve: c. ace. et inf., Lk 10***; ifiavrto 

Eo 114(I'XX)j pass.. He 41 (cf. eV-KaTa-X€t7rw).t 

*t KaTa-Xi0(ii;w ( = el. -66w ; cf. -do/SoXiw, Ex 17*, Nu I410), to cast 
stones at, to stone : Lk 20^.t 

KOT-aXXay^, -77s, rj « KaraXkaaao}), [in LXX : Is 9^ <*', II Mac 
52'> * ,] 1. exchange. 2. reconciliation : Eo Sn ; k. Kwrfiov, Eo 11^* ; 
hiaKOVta t^s k., II Co 51^; Xdyos t^s k., ib.i^.t 



236 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

KaT-a\\(£<T(Tw (Att. -TTO) ; cf. JAAtto-o-w), [in LXX : Je 31 (48)39 (nnn), 
II Mac 1^ 7^" 8^9 * jj prop., to change, exchange (esp. of money) ; hence, 
of persons, to cJmnge from emnity to friendship, to reconcile (for exx. 
in cL, V. Thayer,, LS) : of the reconciliation of man to God (Lft., 
Notes, 288; ICG on Ko, I.e.; DCG, ii, 474, 797), n Co Sis-iO; pass., 
Eo 5'", II Co 5^*^ ; of a woman returning to her husband, i Co 7^^ (cf. 
aT:o-KaTaXXd(T(T(ji) . t 

Kard-Xonros, -ov, [in LXX for ISUT , Ti^yxtp , flT , etc. ;] left re- 
maining : oi K. T. dydpwTruii', Ac 15^'^ (L^^).t 

+ Kaxd-Xujia, -To^, to «KaTa\vco), [in LXX: Ex 4^* (]ib9), I Kl 
922 (p^tpb), etc. ;] 1. = cl. Karaywytov (cf. TravSoxeiov), an inn, lodging- 

place: Lk 2^ (so Ex, I.e., and MGr.). 2. a guest-room (i Ki, I.e.) : Mk 
1414, Lk 22ii.t 

Kara-Xua), [in LXX for ]ib , r\D.t2f , etc. ;] 1. to destroy, cast down : 
Mt 24'^ Mk 132, Lk 216 . ^, ^^^^^ Mt 26^1 27*^, Mk 14^8 1529^ Ac 61* ; 
oiKiav, II Co 51 ; opp. to oLKoSo/melv, Ga 2^^. Metaph., to overthrow, 
annul, abrogate : Ac 5^^' ^^ ; t. epyov t. 6iov, Ro 14"'* ; t. voixov, Mt 5^'^ 
(ii Mac 2'^-). 2. to unloose, unyoke (e.g. horses), hence intrans., of 
travellers (cf. KaraXvixa), to take %ip one's quarters, lodge (cl., Ge 19^, 
al.) : Lk 9^^ 19''.t 

KaTa-^avUvi^, [in LXX : Ge 34^ (nKl), Jb 35^(5) (-ntrr), Si g^'S, al. ;] 
to learn thoroughly, observe well, consider carefully (on distinction 
bet. K. and fiavOdvu), cf. M, Pr., 117) : Mt G^s.t 

Kaxa-jxapTupew, -w, [in LXX : Jb 15^ Pr 25^^ (nar), al. ;] to bear 
witness againt : c. ace. rei et gen. pers., Mt 26*"- 27^^, Mk 14*'**.t 

icaTa-fieVu, [in LXX for ntff^ (Nu 20\ al.), etc.;] to remain 
permanently, abide : Ac 1^^ i Co 16^ WH {-rrapa/jL-, T, RV).t 

KaTajiocas, Rec. for Kara /xdva?, V.S. fi6vo<;. 
t KaT-avd-0€|Jia, Rec. for KardOefJia, q.v. 
t KaT-afa-06|jiaTil^w, Rec. for KaraOe/jiaTi^u), q.v. 

KaT-ak-aXioTKu, [in LXX chiefly for bSK;] 1. to use up, spend. 
2. to consume : of fire, ptcp.. He 12-^(^^^).+ 

* Kara-i'apKda), -oi (<:^ vapKata, to grow numb, in LXX, in causal 
sense, for y,T, Ge 322^(26); without Heb. equiv., ib. 32(33)^ jb 3319, 

Da LXX 11^ *) ; 1. to cause to grow mimb, 2. Intrans., to grow 
numb ; hence metaph., to be inactive, be burdensome to • c. gen., ii Co 
219 1213,14. pass., to be qitite numb (Hippocr.).t 

* Kara-i'cuw, 1. to nod assent. 2. to make a sign by nodding the 
head : c. dat. pers., Lk 5''.t 

Kara-coea), -w, [in LXX for 12113 hi., HNT, etc.;] to take note of, 
perceive, consider carefully : Ac 1^^' ^2 ; c. ace. rei, Mt 7^, Lk 6^^ 
1224,27 2023, Ac 11^ 2739, Ro 419; c. ace. pers.. He 3^ 10^*, Ja 123.24 (on 
the distinction bet. k. and voew simplex, v. M, Pr., 117).t 

t KaT-awTda), -i, [in LXX: II Ki 329 (bin), ii Mac 421.24,44 e^*;] 
to come to, arrive at: seq. ets, c. ace. loc, Ac I61 18^^»2* 21'^ 25i3 (v. 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 237 

M, Pr., 132) 27^2 28i3; seq. 6.vTiKpy, c. gen., Ac 20i«. Metaph., seq. 
€1?, c. acc. pers., i Co 10^^ 14^6 ; id, c. ace. rei, to attain to : Ac 26'^, 
Eph 413, Phi 3ii.t 

t Kard-vuit,s, -cow, 17 « Karavvaa-o), q.v.), [in LXX : Ps 59 (60)' 
(nbjnp), Is 2910 (ni!pT)5)*;] l- a prickinj. 2. (Perhaps through 

resembl. of Karavucrcrw to •vva-Ta^o)), torpor of mind, stupefaction: Eo 
118 (LXX) (y_ jcc, in I.; Field, Notes, 157).t 

t icara-.'.JaCTo,, [in LXX : Ge 34^ (nsjr hith.), Le lO^, Ps 4* 29^2, 
al. (am), Da LXX th Su 10 (DTI ni.), Si 12i2 141, al. ;] 1. to strike or 
prick violently. 2. to stun. 3. Of strong emotion, pass., to be smitten : 
Ttjv Kaphiav, Ac 2^^^ (v.S. KaTavv|t9).+ 

** KaT-a^(Ja), -w, [in LXX : 11 Mac I312, m Mac 32' 4", iv Mac IS^ * ;] 
to deem worthy : c. acc. pers. et gen, rei, 11 Th 1* ; pass, seq. inf., Lk 
2035, Ac 5*i.t 

KaTa-irareu, -w, [in LXX for ^11, DD1 , PjKttT , etc.;] to tread 
down, trampile under foot: Mt 7^ Lk 12'; pass., Mt 5^3, Lk Q^. 
Metaph., t. vlov t. O^ov, He lO^^.t 

KaTci-Traoo-is, -cws, rj (<[] KaraTravo)), [in LXX chiefly for nniJO » Ps 

94(95)11, Is 661, al J i^^^'pa t^? k., ii Mac 15i;] 1. in cl., a putting to 
rest, causing to cease. 2. In LXX and NT, rest, repose : Ac 7*^<^^^\ 
He 31I' IS 41' 3. 5. 10, ii.t 

KaTo-irouw, [in LXX for TT12 , THO , etc.;] 1. trans., (a) to cause 

to cease, restrain : Ac 141^ ; (b) to cause to rest : He 4^. 2, Intrans., 
to rest : seq. Slwo, He 4* (i^^)- i^.t 

t Kara-ir^Taafia, -to<;, to (= cl. irapaTrcTao-yxa), [in LXX chiefly for 
npi? (the veil of the Holy of Holies), Ex 263i, Le 21^3, al. ; also for 
■^99 (the outer veil). Ex 35i2, Nu 32", al. (elsewhere KdXvfXfia) ;] in NT 

always the inner veil or curtain of the Temple (or Tabernacle) : Mt 
2751, Mk 1538, Lk 23«, He 6i9 93 ; fig., ^ ahp^ airov, He IO20.+ 

icaTa-iri»'w, [in LXX chiefly for vhl ;] 1. to drink down, stvallow : 
Mt 232*, Ee 12i«. 2. to devour : i Pe 5^. Metaph., to swallow up, 
consume : pass., i Co 15^* (^^^\ 11 Co 2^ 5*, He 1129.t 

KOTa-iriTTTu, [in LXX: Ps 144(145)1* (^33), etc.;] to fall down: 
Ac 28« ; seq. cts, Ac 26i* ; ctti, c. acc, Lk S^.t 

* KOTa-irX^w, -w, to sail down, sail to land, put in : els t. i;(a)pav, 
Lk 82«.t 

** KaTa-TTc^o), .£, [in LXX : 11 Mac 82 (A), iii Mac 22- is * ;] to wear 
down, oppress, treat hardly : pass., Ac 72*, 11 Pe 2^.t 

Kara-TToi'Titw, [in LXX for ynt3 pu., Ex 15* A, ybn pi., f]r3t2r , Ps 
54 (55)^ 68 (69)2, 9,1. ;] to throw into the sea, sifik or drown therein : 
Mt 1430 ; pass., 186.t 

KttT-apo, -as, 17, [in LXX chiefly for rhbp ;] a curse : Ga 31*'' i3, 

He 6^ II Pe 2" ; opp. to eiXoyta, Ja 310 ; concrete, of Christ, Ga 3i3 
(v. Lft. in l.).t 



238 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

KaT-ap(io|xat, -wfj-at, depon. (<; Karapa), [in LXX chiefly for \hp pi- ;] 
to curse: c. ace, Mk II21; opp. to evXoyew, Lk G^o, Eo 12i*, Ja 3^; 
pass. pf. ptep., accursed, under a curse (v. M, Pr., 221) : Mt 25^i.t 

Kar-apY^o), -w (<1 /cara, causative, dpyds = d-epyds), [in LXX : II Es 
4.21,23 56 58 (^^55)*;] to make idle or inactive (x^pas, Eur., Phoen., 

753) : of soil occupied by an unfruitful tree, Lk 13'^. Metaph. (Inscr.), 
to render inoperative or invalid, to abrogate, abolish : Eo 3^' ^^, i Co 
128 513 1311 1524^ Ga 317, Eph 215, „ Th 2^, 11 Ti l^\ He 2^* ; pass., 
Eo 414 66, I Co 26 138' 10 15-6, II Co 37- 11' 13. 14, Ga SH; seq. dTrd (of 
persons), to be separated, discharged or loosed from, Eo T^'", Ga 5*.t 

KOT-api6|Ae'ci>, -w, [in LXX : II Ch 31i^ {mv^ hith.), al. ;] to number 
or count among : seq. iv, Ac li^.t 

Kax-apTil^u, [in LXX chiefly in Pss (8^ al. ; ]13 , etc.) and 

II Es (b^3) ;] to render a.pTio<;, i.e. fit, complete ; (a) to mend, repair : 

Mt 421, Mk 1^^; (b) to furnish completely, complete, equip, prepare: 
pass., Lk 6*0, Eo 922, He 11^; mid., Mt 21i6 (^xx)^ He 10^ (i-^x); (c) in 
ethical sense, to prepare, co77ij)lete, jyerfect : Ga 61 (BV, restore), 
I Pe 510 ; pass., i Co lio (Field, Notes, 167), 11 Co I311, He 13^1 

(cf. TTpo-KaTapTL^O)).'^ 

*t KOT-dpTiais, -ews, 17 (<C KarapTi^w), a strengthening, making fit : 
in ethical sense, 11 Co 13^.t 

**t KaTapTiafios, -ov, 6, [in Sm. : Is 381^ * ;] = KardpTio-ts (but v. ICC, 
Eph. I.e.) : Eph 4i2.t 

**KaTa-aeiw, [in LXX: Da TH Bel 1* AE, i Mac e^s*;] 1. to shake 
down. 2. Of the hand, to shake or tvave as a signal : t. yelpa, Ac 19^^ ; 
T. x€tpt, Ac I316 ; id. c. dat. pers., ib. 21*o ; seq. inf., ib. 12i7.t 

KaTa-<TKdirTw, [in LXX for ^nj , DIH , etc. ;] to dig down : 
Ko IV (LXX).! 

Kara-CTKcudl^u, [in LXX: Is 401''' ^s (K")S), etc.;] to prepare, make 
ready: t. 6Sdv, Mt llio, Mk I2, Lk 7"; oTkov, He 33.*; crKrjv-qv,, 
He 92' 6 ; Kt/?<oTdv, He ll^ i Pe 320 ; pass. pf. ptcp., Xadv k., Lk li^.t 

KaTa-aKTjcdu, -w, [in LXX chiefly for ptZT;] ^0 jaite/i one's tent, 
lodge, dwell: seq. ev, Mt 1332, Lk 131^; wd, c. ace, Mk 432; ^^'^XttiSi, 

Ac 226 (LXX) t 

t Kara-cTK^Kcuais, €«?, ^, [in LXX : I Ch 282 (,,,35) ^ Ez 372^ (]3l?TQ), 

To 1*, Wi 9^, II Mac 143^ (E) * ;] 1 prop., an encamping, taking up 
one's quarters (Polyb., al., v. LS; and cf. LXX, 11. c). 2. a lodging, 
abode : of birds, Mt 820, Lk 9S8.t 

* Kaxa-CTKidtw, to overshadow : c. ace, He 95.t 
Kara-aKOTve'oi, -S, [in LXX : II Ki 103, I Ch 193 (1,3-1 pi.)^ I Mac 538 
(A) *;J to view closely, inspect, spy out : c. ace, Ga 2*.t 

Kord-aKOTTos, -ov, 6, [in LXX for ^31 pi. ;] a spy : He 113i.t 
t KaTa-ao4.i^o,iai, [in LXX: Ex lio (dDH hith.), Jth 5ii, lOi^ * ;] to 
deal craftily with, outwit : Ac 71^* (LXX)_t 

** KaTa-arAXu, [in LXX : II Mac 43i, in Mac 61 * ;] 1. to let down, 
lower. 2. to keep down, restrain : c. ace, Ac 1935'36.t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 239 

**t KaT(i-aTT)fAa, -tos, to {KaOia-T-q/xi), [in LXX : III Mac 5*^ (-e/Aa, A) * ;] 
1. condition, of health, etc. 2. demeanour : Tit 2^ (for exx. v. Field, 
Notes, 220).t 

KaTo-oToXii, -^s, 17 (<[ Karao-TeAXo)), [in LXX: Is 6P (nKl3TO)*J] 

1. a letting down, checking. 2. steadiness, quietness in demeanour. 
3. LXX and NT (cf. Plut,, ii, 65 D ; -t^a> = vestire), a garment, dress, 
attire : i Ti 2» (but v. Ellic, in l.).t 

KOTa-CTTpe^w, [in LXX for "jjen , etc., Ge I921, Je 20^5, al. ;] 1. to 

turn down, turn over ; as, the soil. 2. to overturn, overthrow : Mt 21^^, 
Mk 1115 . pass. pf. ptcp., Ac I516 (i'^).t 

*t KaTa-<rrpT]i'i(£(i), -w, to wax wanton against : c. gen., i Ti 5^^. 

KaTa-<rrpo<|>i1, -rj<i, rj {<^KaTa(TTpi<f)<j)), [in LXX: Jb 21^''^, Pr 1^'^ 
(T}<), al. ;] 1. overthrow : 11 Pe 2*' (WH, om.). 2. Metaph., subver- 
sion, upsetting (cf. KaOaipea-L^, II Co 13^") : 11 Ti 2^*.f 

KaTa-arpojt'fUfii, [in LXX : Nu 14i« (tanor), Jb 122^ (ntfltar), Jth ^, 
II Mac ^*;] 1. to strew or spread over. 2. io Za^/ Zow, overthrow : 
I Co IQs.t 

Kora-aupo), [in LXX: Je 29 (49)io (pjirrn). Da LXX, 1110.26 
(5)MBy) * ;] 1. to pull down. 2. to drag away : c. ace. pers., Lk 125^.t 

KaTa-a<|>d|;u), [in LXX : Za 11* (nn), Ez 16*0 (prQ pi.), n Macg;] 
io hill off, slay : c. ace, Lk 192^.t 

KaTa-a4)paYit«, [in LXX: Jb 9^ 37^ (ODn), Wi 2**;] to seal up, 
secure with a seal : Ee S^.t 

t KaT(l-ox€«ns, -ews, ^ (<C xc-Tex^)} [in LXX nearly always for 
mnx ;] 1. a holding back. 2. LXX and NT, a holding fast, possession : 

Ac75.".t 

KOTo-Tierjiii, [in LXX : i Ch 21^7 (n,o^ hi.), Ps 40 (41)8 (pj^,)^ 
I Mac 10^3, al. ;] to lay dotvn, deposit, lay by : Mk 15*^, T ; mid., to lay 
up for oneself: x«pt»' (Hdt., al., v. LS, s.v.), c. dat. pers., Ac 24^^ 25^.t 
**t KaTa-Top.li, -rj'i, rj, [in Sm. : Je 48 (31)^^ (/caTarc/Avw is used in 
LXX of forbidden mutilations : Le 21^, al.) ;] 1. incision. 2. excision, 
, concision, mutilation : in sarcasm, by paranomasia, in contrast to 
(true) TrepLTOfi-q (v ^), of Judaizing Christians, Phi 3^ (v. Lft., in 1. ; 
Cremer, 883). t 

KaTa-To^€uci>, [in LXX : Ex 19^^ (HT), al. ;] to strike down with 
an arrow, shoot dead: He 1220(i'XX) (jjec; WH, E, om.).t 

KaTa-Tpe'xu), [in LXX : Le 26^^, Jg 1« (P)Tn). al. ;] to run down : 
seq. cTTt, c. ace. pers., Ac 21^^ f 

**t KaT-auvd^o), [in LXX : Wi 17^, i Mac 6^^*;] (for aiyd^uy, L, mg., 
Tr., mg.), to shine down : 11 Co 4*.+ 

KaTa-^dyiti, V.S. KarecrOiw. 

Kara-^ipw, [in LXX for Tl^ hi., etc. ;] to bring down : ainw/iaTa, 
Ac 25''' ; \jrrj(f>ov, to cast a ballot, Ac 26i** ; pass., to be borne down : 
virv(o, airo r. v., Ac 20^.t 

KaTa-<|)euY«, [in LXX for D13 , etc. ;] to flee for refuge : seq. cis, 
Ac 14*; metaph., c. inf., He 6^*.f 



240 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

KaTa-4>0eipw, [in LXX chiefly for nntZT hi., Ge 6^^ al. ; 1 to 
destroy entirely. 2. In moral sense (as LXX), to dejyrave, corrupt : 
pass. pf. ptcp., seq. t. vow, ii Ti 3^.t 

KaTa-<t>i\^a), -co, [in LXX chiefly for pW2 ;] to kiss fervently, kiss 
affectionately : Mt 26«, Mk 14*5^ Lk V^^ "s 1520^ Ac ^O'-^'^.f 

KaTa-<t)poi'^u, -0), [in LXX for IJH , 712 , etc. ;] to think little of, 
despise : c. gen., Mt &'' IS^o, Lk 16i«, Eo 2\ i Co II22, i Ti 4^2 62, 
He 122, „ pe 2io.t 

t KaTa-<j)po./t]-nis, -oO, o, [in LXX for 1^2., Dnjil, Hb 1^ 2^, Ze 

3**;] a despiser : Ac 13*^t 

KOTa-xco), [in LXX for ps^ , ni33, HtaJT hi. ;] to pour down upon : 
c. gen. (cl.), Mk 143 . geq. cVt, c. gen., Mt 267.t 

* Kara-xOok'ios, -ov (<^ x^^"' ^^^ earth), subterranean, under the 
earth (in cl., of the infernal gods) : of the departed in Hades, opp. to 

CTOi'pavios, en-tyeios, Phi 2^'^.t 

** KaTa-xpdofjiai, -«/wit, [in LXX: Ep. Je28, iii Mac 4^ 522*;] to 
make full use of, use to the uttermost, use up : i Co 7^^ ; c. dat., ib. 9^^ 
(for other senses, v. LS, s,v.).t 

KaTa-»|/uxa), [in LXX: Ge 18^ {]vm ni.)*;] to cool: c. ace, 
Lk 1624.t 

*t KarciSwXos, -ov {<^aZu>Xov), full of idols : Ac 17^*.t 

t KaWmvTi, adv., [in LXX chiefly for IS?!'^) > ^•■'Pr' > ^*°- '1 ^^^^ 
against, opposite, before : tj k. Kwfjir], Lk IQ^*^ ; as prep., c. gen., Mt 21^ 
2724 (ciTT-, WH, mg.), Mk II2 12^i (drr-, WH, mg.) 13^; metaph., 
before, seq. O^ov, Eo 4i^ 11 Co 2^7 12i9.t 

t KaTecoSirtoi', adv. (=Hom., KarevcDTra), [in LXX: Ps 43 (44)^^, 
al. ;] over against, before: c. gen., t. So^t^s, Ju2'*; metaph. (cf. 
KarevavTL, and V. Lft., CoL, l.c), t. deod, Eph 1*, Col 122.t 

* KaT-€iou(jidt,<i), to exercise authority over : c. gen. pers., Mt 202*, 
Mk 10*2,t 

Si'N. : KaTaKvpLcvo) (v. Swete, Mk., I.e.). 

KaT-cpYd^ofjiai (emphatic form of (pyd^ofiai), [in LXX for bjTQ, 
etc. (9 exx., each for a different Heb. word) ;] to effect by labour, 
achieve, ivork out, bring about : c. ace, Eo 4^^ 5^ 7*'' ^^' ^^' ^^' 2"^, 11 Co 
7^", Eph 6^3, Ja 1^; pass., 11 Co 12^2 • ^ ace ^ei et dat. pers., Eo 7^^, 
II Co 4^'^ 7^^ 9^^; id. seq. 8td, c. gen. pers., Eo 15^^; t. anjTrjpcav, 
Phi 2^2 J Q ace. pers. seq. cis, 11 Co 5* (EV, tvrought) ; of evil deeds, 
Eo 127 29, I Co 5^ I Pe 4^.1 

** KaT-c'pxoH^ai, [in LXX : To I22 x 2\ Es 3^3, Wi II22, 11 Mac 
1129 * .] to come down, go down : seq. as, Lk 43i, Ac 8^ 13* 15^0 I91, T ; 
dTTo, Lk 9", Ac 151 185 2110; s.7r6 et ik, Ac 1127 1219; of coming to port 
by ship, Ac I822 21=* 27*; seq. tt/jo's, c. ace. pers., Ac 9^2; metaph., of 
gifts from God, Ja 3^^.+ 

KaT-eCT6t(D ("perfective" comp. of eo-^tw, q.v., and cf. M, Pr., 
Ill), [in LXX chiefly for bss ;] to eat up, devour : c. ace, of seed, 
Mt 13*, Mk 4*, Lk 8^; Wkvov, Ee 12*; ySiySXaptSiov, Ee lO^-^"; metaph., 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 241 

oiKt'a?, Mt 23^3, Mk 12*0, Lk 20*^ t. piov, Lk IS^O; c. ace. pers., 
Jo 2^7 (Lxx), II Co 1120, Ga b^\ Ee 11^ 209.t 

KaT-cuOofoj, [in LXX for ]13 ni., hi., etc. ;] to make or keep 
straight, direct, guide : metaph., t. oSoV, i Th 3^^ ; t. Tro'Sas ci's 68ov 

elprjyrj^, Lk l'^^ ; t. /capSias €ts t. dyaTTT^v, II Th 3^.+ 

**t Kax-cuXoYew, -w, [in LXX : To 11^» ^^ * ;] to bless fervently : 
Mk IQi" (v. Swete, in l.).t 

*t KaT-c<|>-io-TTjfAi, to rise up against : Ac 18^^ f 

KaT-e'xw, [in LXX for lUS , pTPI hi., etc.;] 1. perfective of c^'^ 
(M, Pr., 116 ; M, 272., 155), (a) to possess, hold fast : Lk 8^5, Jo 5[*], 
Eo 118 (Lft., Notes, 251), i Co 7^0 11^ ii Co 6io, i Th 521, He 3«' i* 102^ ; 
(b) to lay hold of, get possession of: Lk 14^. 2. to hold back, detain, 
restrain (M, Th., 156 f.) : c. ace. seq. to5 fxrj c. inf., Lk 4*2 ; seq. Tr/ads, 
c. ace, Phm^^; absol., t6 Karc^ov (6 k.), ii Th 2"'^. 3. Intrans., as 
nautical term, to put in, make for (LS, s.v.) : Ac 27*^.+ 

Ka-njYop^w, -co (<^ Kara, ayopevoi), [in LXX : Da LXX 6^ '^', I Mac 
76,25^ II Mac 4*7 10^3,21^ IV jviac 9^**;] to make accusation, accuse, (a) 
in general : absol., Eo 2^* ; c. gen. pers. (el., WM, 254), Jo 5*^ ; irreg. c. 
ace. pers., Ee 12^0 • (j^ before a judge : absol., Ac 242» i^ ; c. gen. pers., 
Mt 1210, Mk 32, Lk 6^ ll'* (WH, txt., E, om.), 232.10, Jo 8^^\ Ac 25^ 
2819; i^ (3 ace. rei (el., but v. WM, I.e.), Mk 153.* ; c. gen. rei (Dem.), 
Ac 24s 2511 ; seq. irepi, e. gen. rei (Thuc, viii, 85), Ac 241^; e. ace. rei, 
seq. Kara c. gen. pers. (WM, § 28, 1), Lk 23i*. Pass. (Bl., § 54, 3), 
seq. VTTo C. gen., Mt 2712, Ac 22^0; 5 KaTrjyopovfievo^, Ac 25i«.t 

* KaTt]yopia, -as, rj {<C KaTrjyopo^) , an accusation, charge: c. gen. 
pers., Jo 1829; seq. Kara, e. id., i Ti 51^; c. gen. rei, Tit l^.t 

Ka-niYopos, -ov, 6, [in LXX: Pr 181^ (an), 11 Mac 45*;] an 
accuser : Ac 23^0. 35 248 (WH, E, txt. om.) 25i«' i^.t 

*t Ka-riiYupi o (Aram. Iirtpf?; Dalman, Gr., 185; but v. Deiss., 

LAE, 90 f.), = Kar-qyopos, an accuser : Ee 12io.t 

* KaTTi<|>cia, -as, 7} {<^ KaTr}(f>r]<;, downcast, Wi 17* *), dejection : 
Ja 49.t 

*t KaT-T)X€'cj, -w, 1. to resound. 2. to teach by word of mouth, 
instruct, inform (v. Bl., Phil. Gosp., 20, 31) : Ga 6^ ; c. ace. pers., 
I Co 1419 ; pass. c. ace. rei, Lk 1* (iCC, in 1.), Ac 1825 2124 (^f. Lk, 
I.e.), Ga 6^; seq. «, e. gen. rei, Eo 21^; Trepi, e. gen. pers., Ac 212i.t. 

**fKar-i6(j, -d (intensive of tda>; <tds), [in LXX: Si 12"*;] to 
rust over ; pass., become rusted over : Ja 5^.t 

KaT-ioxoci), [in LXX chiefly for pTri;] to overpower, prevail 
against, prevail : absol., Lk 2323; q j^f^ ljj 2138; c. gen., Mt 16i8,t 

Kar-oiKcw, -w, [in LXX very freq. and nearly always for aia^ ;] 1. 
trans., to inhabit, dwell in: e. ace., Lk 13*, Ac li^ 29'i* 41" 932,85 
1910-17, Ee 172; of God, Mt 2321. 2. Intrans., to settle, dwell- 
Ac 2212; seq. cV (el.), Ac 120(lxx) 2^ 72,4,48 922 1129 1327 1724^ g^ 11^ 
Ee 1312; seq. cis (Bl., § 39, 3; M, Pr., 62 f., 234 f.), Mt 223 413, Ac 7*' 
cirl T. yri% (Nu 13^3, al.), Ee 310 610 813 llio 138.1* I78; eVl TTuvras 

16 



242 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

TTpoo-wTTou T. y., Ac 172«; oTTov, Ee 2^3; fKct (of demons), Mt 12^^ Lk 
11'"^. Metaph., of divine indwelling: 6 Xpia-ro's, Eph 3^'^ ; t. irvev/jia, 
Ja 45 (/carw/cio-e.', T, WH, E, txt.) ; T. TrXrycop/ta (t. ^^cott^tos), Col l^^ 2^ ; 
SiKatocrvi'T; (cf. Wi !■*), II Pe 3^-^ (cf. ei'-KaT0t^€w).+ 

KaT-oiKTjais, -ttos, 17 (<^KaToiA€(o), [in LXX for SIZ^^ , Ge lO^**, al. ;] 

dwelling : Mk 5^.+ 

t KaT-OlKtJTTlpiOC, -OV, TO (•<[ KaTOLKed)), [in LXX for SC^ID , fiy^ ' ®^^' '^ 

a habitation, dwelling-place : Eph 2^'^, Ee 18^.t 

+ KaT-oiKia, -as, ^ (■< /caTot/cew), [in LXX chiefly for I^IQ , Ex 35^, 

al. ;] 1. a dwelling : Ac 17-'^. 2. a settlement (Polyb.).t 

KaToiKil^u, [in LXX for 212?"' hi., etc. ;] to cause to dwell : metaph., 

C. ace, TO TTvevfjia, Ja 4^ (Eec, E, mg., KaTWKrjaei^^A 

*t KaTOTrxptj^a) (<^ KaToirrpov, a mirror), to show as in a mirror. 

Mid., to see oneself mirrored (v. MM, Exp., xv) ; c. ace. rei (E, txt., 

but V. mg.), to reflect as a mirror : 11 Co 3^^ (cf. Abbott, Essays, 94).t 
KaropOufxa, -to?, to, Eec. for Siop^w/xa (q.v.), Ac 243.t 
Kaxo), adv. (•< KaTo), [in LXX for ni3Q , rinrip and cogn. forms;] 

1. down, downwards (vpith verbs of motion), Mt 4^, Lk 4^, Jo St*^' ^J, 
Ac 209. 2. helow, beneath: Mk 14^6, Ac 219(lxx); ^^,,5 ^, (Ez V^\ al.), 
Mt 27^\ Mk Ib^^; ra k. (opp. to t. dvw), Jo S^^. Compar. KaTWTtpw: 
dTT^ StcToSs Kttt K. (cf. I Ch 27'"'2), Mt 2i«.t 

KaTWT€po9, -€/3a, -cpov «; /cttTto), [in LXX for linnJ? > ^rinp ;] lower ; 

TO. K. TTj? yrj<; (v. AE, Ej}h., l.c ; for rendering this lower earth, v. ICC, 
Eph, I.e.), the lower parts of the earth (cf. Ps 138(139)1^; cf. also 
MGr., ri KciTov yTj, the underivorld. Thumb, MGV, 334) : Eph 49.t 

KaXUT^pW, V.S. KOLTO). 

KauSa (TE, mg., KAaCSa; Eec. K\av8r]), rj, Cauda, Clauda, an 
island near Crete : Ac 27i^.t 

KaO/ia, -Tos, TO (<; Katw), [in LXX for dH , Hin , etc. ;] heat : Ee 

*t KaofiaTtl^o) (<^ Kavfia), to burn or scorch up : c. ace. seq. Iv irvpC, 
Ee 168. Pass., Mt 13i*, Mk 4" ; seq. Kavf.a /i€ya, Ee 16».t 

KauCTis, -€ws, 17 « Katw), [in LXX for lya pi., etc. ;] burning : 
He 68.+ 

*+Kaua6w, -co «[ Kavcros, burning heat, fever), only in pass., 1. to 
burn with fever (Galen., al.). 2. In NT, to burn toith great heat : 
II Pe 310- ^2 (v. Mayor, in 1.).+ 

*+ KauoTT)pi(il^(i> (Eec. KavTTjp-, and so usually in Gk. writers, v. Soph., 
Lex., S.V.), to mark by branding, brand (AV, scar, but v. CGT, in 1.) : 
metaph., pass. pf. ptep., i Ti 4^ (cf. Kavrripiov, iv Mac 15'^^*).+ 

+ Kai5au,^ -wvos, 6 «Kai'o>), [in LXX: Ge 31*«N {l-p), Is 49io 
(sn^), Jb 2721, Ho 121 12) 1315^ jh 48^ Je 1817, Ez l?!*^ 19^2 [W^-py, Je 

28(51)1, Da TH 3'«7), Jth 8^, Si 18^6 31 (34)i« 4322*;] 1. ^Mnim^ heat 
(Ge, Is (?), Jth, ll.c., Si I8I6) : Mt 20^2, Lk 12*^ (Ja 1", AV). 2. a hot 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 243 

wind from the east (Heb. C"!!? , v. LXX, ll.c), the modem sirocco 

(v. CGT on Am 4^) : Ja 1^^ (EV, the scorching wind; cf. K, mg., the 
hot wind, Mt, Lk, ll.c.).t 

KauTTjpid^u, Rec. for Kava-TrjpLd^o), q.v. 

KQuxdofxai, -(Lfiai, [in LXX for bbn hith., etc. ;] to boast or glory 
(in LXX, of joyous exultation, and so in the NT quotations, infr. ; cf. 
DB, ii, 790b; Hort on Ja l^) : absol.. i Co piCLXX) 47 133^ „ Co 
1013, 17 (LXX) 1116,18 121,8^ Eph 2^, Ja 4i«; c. ace. rei, 11 Co 9" IpO; 
seq. 0/ (LXX), Eo 2"^ 5^, i Co 3^1, 11 Co 5^2 IQi^ 1112 125,9^ Ga e^^.H, 
Ja 19; ^ (t.) de^, Eo 217 511. ^v Kvpt'o). i Co piCLXx), n Co 101"(lxx). 
cV X. 'Irjo-ov, Phi 3^; seq. cVt, c. dat., Eo 5^; wepi, c. gen,, 11 Co 10^; 
CIS, ib. 1"; vTrep, c. gen. pers., 11 Co 7'^ 12^; evwTrtov t. Oeov, i Co l^^ 
(cf. €v-, KaTa-*cau;(ao/i,at).t 

Kauxt]|xa, -Toq, to (<^ Kav^dofiai), [in LXX chiefly for n^HIl , 

n")N5ri ;] l. « boast (Find.) : 11 Co 5^2 93 (Thayer, s.v. ; e. contra, 2, 

Ellic, Lft., on Ga 6*; Lft., Notes, 204, 277). 2. ground or matter of 
glorying: Eo 4^, i Co 5« 9^5' i«, 11 Co 1^*, Ga 6*, Phi 126 2i«, He 3« 
(cf. Kav;(7;crt5).t 

t Kao'xr]<ns, -€ws, 17 « Kavxao/im), [in LXX for n"|?^5ri (l Ch 2913, 

Ez 16^2, al) ; a boasting, glorying : Eo 32^, n Co ll^"' ^^ Ja 41" ; seq. 
inrep, n Co 7* 82* ; ctti, c. gen., 11 Co 7^* ; exw r^v k. cV Xp. '1770-., Eo 15^7 ; 
oTcc^avos Kavxrj(T€0}^ (Ez. I.e., al.), I Th 2^9; of the cause of glorying, 
a boast (= KavxvMo), n Co li2.t 

Kacfjapj-aoofi {Kairep-, Eec, V. WH, ^p^;. 160), r/ (Heb. Dinj n53 , 

Nahum's village), Capernaum : Mt 4}^, Mk 12\ Jo 2^2, al. 
Keyxpeai, V.S. Kcvx/aeat. 

Kc'Spos, -ov, 17, [in LXX chiefly for T^^ , Nu 24", al. ; x«i/^a/jpous 

Twv Kc'Spwv, II Ki 1523, III Ki 1513 (rnii?) ;] <J cedar : x^^/J^appo^ twv K. 

(as in II Ki, iii Ki, 11. c), Jo 18^ (Eec. Tr., WH, E, mg. ; toC KeSpov, T, 
WH, mg., V.S. Ke8pii>v, andcf. Westc, in 1.; WH, ^^^., 89 f.; Abbott, 
JG, 513 ff.).t 

KcSpwt' (v.s. K^8pos), o, indecl. (in FIJ, gen. -covos ; Heb. flTlp), [in 

LXX : II Ki 1523, IV Ki 23", al. ;] Cedron (OT, Kidron) : x^^f^appos 
ToC K., Jo 181 (L, Tr., mg., E, txt. ; cf. BL, § 10, 5 ; Lft., Essays, 172 ff.).t 
Kciiiai, [in LXX : Je 24^ (liP hoph.), al. ;] used as passive of 
Tidrjfii (LS, S.V.), to be laid, to lie ; (a) of persons : an infant, Lk 2i2> is ; 
a dead body, Mt 28", Lk 235^, Jo 20^2; (b) of things, to lie, be laid or 
set, stand : Mt 5^*, Jo 2^ 1929 20^-7 21^, Ee 42 21i« ; trop., ^eyne'Aios, 
I Co 311 ; seq. prep. c. ace, Trpos, Mt 310, Lk 3^; ik, Lk 12^9; It^C, 
trop., KdXvfjiixa, II Co 31^. Metaph., 6 koct/zos €v t. irovrjpw K., I Jo 51^; 
to be laid down, appointed: of law, c. dat. pers., i Ti 1^; seq. eh 
c. ace. (of purpose), Lk 2**, Phi l^", i Th 3^ (cf. dvd-, avv-avd-, dvrt-, 
dwo-, cTTt-, Kara-, -rrapd-, irepi-, 7rpd-*c€i^ai).t 



244 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

K€ipia, -a?, ri, [in LXX : Pr 7^" (D'lin"!© * ;] a vernacular word, 

1. a bed-cord (Aristoph., Av., 816; Pr, I.e.). 2. In pi., swathings 
(cf. Field, Notes, 96 f.) : Jo ll^^.t 

K€ipw, [in LXX chiefly for T73 , Is 53'', al. ;] to cut short the hair, 
shear : a sheep, Ac S^"'^ (Is, I.e.). Mid., to have one's hair cut off, he 
shorn : absol., i Co 11*' ; t. K^^aXrjv, Ac 18^*.+ 

Keis (Rec. Kis), 6, indecl. (Heb. tZT^f?), Kish : Ac IS^i.t 

Ke7.£0(T^ia, -ros, to «/ceA€uco), [in LXX: Pr 2462 (302T)*;] a call, 
summons, shout of command : i Th 4^^ (v. M, Th., in 1.).+ 

** KcXeuu), [in LXX : i Es 9^3, To 8^^ al., and freq. in i-iv Mac ;] 
to urge on, bid by word of mouth, order, command (mostly of one in 
authority) : c. ace. et. inf.aor., Mt 1419.28 is'^s 27^4, Lk IB*", Ac 4i5 53* 
83S 2230 2310 25«.i^ with ellipse of ace., Mt 8^^ 149 2758^ Ac 12^^ 2P3; 
c. ace. et. inf. pres,, Ac 213* 222* 233-35 25^1 27*3; with ellipse of ace, 
Ac 1622 . ptcp. aor., Ac 2523.t 
STN. : v.S. evreXXw. 
*^ KCkcp-paTeuw (not elsew., but perh. = -c'w, Plut., al.), to tread on 
emptiness : Iwpa. (alwpa) k. (conjee, for a i6paK€v ifj^/i., Lft., in 1.), Col 2^^ 
(cf. also ICC, in l.).t 

**t K€^o8o|ia, -as, Tj « K€vo8o^os), [in LXX : Wi 14i*, 11 Mac 2i5 
31**;] 1. foolish fancy, vain opinion, error (LXX, 11. c). 2. vain- 
glory, groundless conceit : Phi 23.t 

*t Kci'oSo^os, -ov « Kevo's, ho^a), vain-glorious : Ga S^^.t 

Kccos, -v> -ov, [in LXX chiefly for p^T and cognate forms ;] empty 
(Ge 372*, Jg 71"). Metaph., (a) empty, vain: Xdyot, Eph 5"; aTrarr], 
Col 2^ ; K^pvyfxa, TTto-Tts, I Co 15i* ; (b) vain, fruitless : rj xapts, i Co 15^'^ ; 
KOTTos, ib. 58 ; -fj tio-oSos, I Th 2^ ; Kivd, Ac 42^ (LXX) ; ch k€p6v, in vain, to 
no purpose (Diod., LXX ; cl. 8ta ^cvf/s), 11 Co 6^, Ga 22, Phi 2i«, i Th 3* ; 
(c) of persons, empty-handed : Mk 123, l^ 1^3 20i0' ^^ ; vain, Ja 220.t 

Syn. : /xaraios, of the aim or effect of an action, k. of its quality 
(Lft. on Cl. Eom., / Co., § 7; Tr., Syn., xlix). 

*t Kci/o(|>o>i'ia, -as, r] (<^k6vos, (ftoyvio)), [cf. KcvoXoyew (P)SS), Is 81®*;] 
empty talk, babbling : pi., i Ti 620, 11 Ti 21".+ 

K€K6a>, -« «K€vds, q.v.), [in LXX: Je 142 159 (ij^^j^ pu.)*;] to 
empty. Metaph., to empty, make empty, vahi or of no effect : Kovx-qp-a., 

I Co 915 ; kavTov, of Christ, Phi 2' (v Lft. ; ICC, in 1, and esp. Gifford, 
hicarn., 54 ff.) ; pass., Trto-Tts, Ro 4^* ; 6 o-ravpds, i Co 1^^ ; Kavxqp-a, 

II Co 93.t 

Kiv-rpov, -ov, TO «; /ccvrew, to jwick), [in LXX : Pr 26^ (3^0). Ho 

131* (nipl?), 512, Si 3825, IV Mac 14i»*;] 1. a sting (iv Mac, I.e.): 

Re 910. Metaph. (as Ho 13i*) : t. Oavarov, i Co 1555 (iJtx), 66. 2. a 
goad : pl., Ac 26i*.t 

*t Kci'Tupiwv, -(Jivo-i, 6 (Lat. centurio) ; a centurion: Mk 1530,44,45 
(Mt, Lk, use iKarovTapxo^ {'V^)) q-V)-"*" 

Kci-xpeai (Rec. Keyx* ; v. WH, App., 150), -wv, ai, CenchrecB, a 
port of Corinth : Ac I8I8, Ro 16i.t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 245 

KCfws, adv., [in LXX : Is 49* ((Tl!?) *;] in vain, to no purpose : 
Ja 45.t 

* Kcpai'a (WH, Kepea, V. App., 151), -as, r) (<C Kepa<;), a little horn : 
of the point or extremity which distinguishes some Heb. letters from 
others (e.g. t from 1 ; DCG, ii, 733), Mt 5^^ Lk IG^^.t 

Kepa/icu's, -£ws, 6 «K€pavvv/i6), [in LXX for IS"', Ps 2^, Je 18^ 
al. ;] a potter : Eo 9^1 ; 6 dypos roi k., Mt 27^' ^o (lxx) t 

KcpapKcJs, -i -dv «Kepa/xos), [in LXX: Da LXX 2" (inS))*;] 

1. (cl.) of a potter (e.g. y^). 2. In LXX and NT, = cl., Kcpa/xcot}^ 
(Plut., Acep i'/x€ios, Polyb., -/Aaios, etc), earthen : Ee 2^^.t 

KcptijjiioK, -ou, TO « K€pafjLo<s), [in LXX : Je 42 (35)^ {:p^), etc. ;] 

an earthen vessel, a jar or jug : vSaros, Mk 14^^, Lk 22^**.t 

Ktpajjios, -ov, 6 « KepavvvfiL), [in LXX : II Ki 17^8 (i^jr 1^5) * ;] 1, 

potter's clay. 2. an earthen vessel. 3. a tile : Lk 5^^.f 

Kcpdfi'ufii, [in LXX for ^D^ , Is 5^2, al. ;] ^0 mix, mingle, chiefly 

of the diluting of wine : Ee 18^ ; by oxymoron, K€Kfpd(Tfitvo<s a>cparos, 
Ee 14io.t 

Syn. : fxiyvvfju. K. implies " a mixing of two things, so that they 
are blended and form a compound, as in wine and water, whereas /*. 
implies a mixing without such composition, as in two sorts of grain " 
(LS, S.V. Kpaai^). 

Kt'pas, -aro? (pi. not irreg. as in Attic), to, [in LXX chiefly for 
]1(7. ;] a horn : Ee 5« 12^ 13^' ^^ 17^' ^' ^^' ^'^ ; of the projections at the 

corners of the altar (Ex 29^^^ q}.) : Ee 9^^. Metaph., as symbol of 
strength, k. awTrjpca^ (cf. Ps 17 (18)^, al.) : Lk l«9.t 

* Kepdrioy, -ov, to (dimin. of xe/sas), 1. a little horn (Arist.). 2. In 
pi. (the fruit of the Kfparea), carob-jwds : Lk 15^". t 

♦*Kep8atVw, [in Sm. : Jb 22^*;] to gain: c. ace, Mt 25i«. i^. 20, 22 . 
T. Koa-fxov, Mt 16'^^, Mk 8^^, Lk 9^^* ; absol., to make profit, get gain : 
Ja 4}^. Metaph., c. ace. rei, to save oneself from, avoid : Ac 27^^ 
(Field, Notes, 145) ; c. ace. pers., to gain, win : Mt 18^5, i Co 919-22^ 
Phi 38; pass., iPe d\f 

**ic^p8os, -€09 (-ovs), TO, [in Aq.: Ez 27^*; Sm. : Ps 29 (30)io, al.;] 
gain : Phi pi 3^, Tit VKf 
Kcp^a, V.S. KtpaCa. 

* Kip\ia, -Tos, TO {<^ KiLpm), 1, a slice, hence, 2. a small coin : pi., 
Jo 2i5.t 

*t Kcpfiario-n^s, -ov, 6 (*<€p/i.aTi^aj, to cut small. Coin into small 
money), a money changer : Jo 2^*.t 

K£<f>dXai09, -a, -ov (•<^ KCc^aXi^), [in LXX (-atov, to) for tZTjil , 
Nu 42, al.;] of the head; metsb'ph., principal, chief; mostly as subst., 
Kc^dXaiov, to; 1. the chief point : He 8^. 2. the sum total, amount : 
Ac 22^8 (other meaning, LS, s.v.).t 

KC^aXai<S(ti, -ci>, V.S. Kc^aXido). 



246 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Ke^aKr], -ri<s, i), [in LXX nearly always for l^NT;] the head: Mt 
536, Mk 6 \ Re l^* 9", al. mult. ; fig., dydpaKt^ Im r^v k., Ro 12'^o(lxx). 
aloa, x\c 18^; metaph., of a husband, c. gen., I Co 11^, Eph 5^^; of 
Christ, I Co 118, Eph 415 5ii3^ Col l^^ 2^^>'^^; of things, k. yw.t'as, 
Mt ai-^-iLxx) 

** Ke4>aXi6w (Rec. -aidw, [so in LXX : Si 35 (32)^ *]), -w (•< Ke<^aXtov, 
dimin. of Kc^ttXr;, in late writers); 1. (-aiow) to stem up (Thuc, al.). 
2. (In NT, only) to wound on the head : Mk 12'*.t 

K64)aXis, -iSos, 7] (dimin. of K€<^aXr/), [in LXX for H^Jp , 11 , etc. ;] 

1. a little head. 2. an extremity, capital (of a column). 3. (As in 
Ez 2^ Ps 39 (40)8, II Es 6^) a roll : k. /3</3,\tW, He 10" (i'XX).t 

* KTjfiow, -to (<; Krj/j.6^, a muzzle), to muzzle : i Co 9^ (TTr., WH, 
mg.) (cf. cf)Lfji6w).f 

*t Kfji/aos, -ov, 6 (Lat. ce7isus), a poll-tax : Mt IT^^ 22^' , Mk 12^* 
(WH, mg., iniK€(f>dXaLov) ; T. v6ixL(Tixa tov k., Mt 22^'' (v. MM, Exp., xv).t 
Syn. : tAos (q.v.), <f>(jpo<;. 

KTJTTos, -OV, 6, [in LXX for ]a, ma, n33, De ll^o, Ca 4^2, al.;] 

a garden: Lk ld^\ Jo ISi'^e i94i,t 

* Kt]7r-oup6s, -ov, 6 (<^ Krj7ro<; + ovpo<;, a watcher), a gardener : 
Jo 20is.t 

KTjpi'oc, -OV, TO {<^Kr)p6^, wax), [in LXX for Ilgli, f]12r , Ps 18 

(19)i» 117 (118)12, Pi- 1624, al.;] honeycomb: k. /xcXtWtov, Lk 24^2 
(Rec; WH, txt., R, txt., omit).t 

Ki^puyfia, -Tos, TO {<^ Kypvaad)), [in LXX : II Ch 30^ (^ip)« 
Jh 32 (nxnp), Pr 9^ I Es 9^ * ;] in cl., that which is cried by a herald, 

a proclamation. In NT (v. Lft., Notes, 161), of God's heralds, 
proclamation, message, preaching (i.e. the substance as distinct from 
the act which would be expressed by t/<7/pv^is): Mt 12*1, Lk 11^2^ 
I Co 121, II Ti 41^, Tit 1^; c. gen. subjc, to k. [xov, i Co 2*; rjpMv, ib. 
151*; c. gen. obj., 'Ir;o-oC Xp., Ro 162^t 

KTJpul {k-,]p-, T), -vkos, 6, [in LXX : Da LXX th 3* (7113) , Ge 

41«, Si 20l^ IV Mac 6**;] a herald : i Ti 1\ 11 Ti l^i, 11 Pe 2^t 

KTjpuCTcrw, [in LXX chiefly for Nip ;] to be a herald, to proclaim : 
Mk 1*5 7^6, Lk 4i8.i9(Lxx) (but V. Field, Notes, 174) 8^3, Ro 221, i Co 
92'^, Ga 511, al. ; in NT, chiefly of the proclamation of the Gospel, to 
2)roclaim, jireach : to ivayyiXtov, Mt 42^ 9^5 241* 26^^ Mk li* I31" 14''' 
16C15], Ga 22, Col 123, I Th 2^ seq. eh, Mk l^^ 13l^ Lk 4**, i Th 2^; 
iVa, Mk 612 . c. inf.. Ro 221 ; k. XpicrT6v, 'Ii;o-ow, Ac 85 92^* 19i3, i Co 12^ 

1512, II Co 119 11*, Phi 115, I T- 316 (^.f Trpo-Kr)pv<T(Tw). 

KTiT09, -COS (-ovs), t6, [in LXX : Jh 2i. n (21), Ge I21 (|^3n), etc. ;] 
a huge fish, sea-monster : Mt 12*<'(LXX)_f 

KTi(}>as, -a (v. Bl., §10, 3), 6 (Aram, ND""?), Cephas, i.e. Feter : 
Jo 1*3, I Co 112 322 95 155, Ga 118 29, 11, u.t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 247 

KiPcoTos, -ov, 17, [in LXX : Ge 6-9 (n^Cl), elsewhere, very freq., as 
Ex 259 '10', for jny ;] a wooden box or chest : of Noah's ark, Mt 2438, 
Lk 172^ He 11^ I Pe 320 ; of the ark of the covenant, He 9*, Ee ll^^.t 

Kie<£pa, -as, ri, [in LXX chiefly for 1133 , freq. in Pss (32 (33)2, al.) ; 

and in Da (3', al.) for O'lri'^p , itself a transliteration of Ki^apis, the 

Homeric form of k. (cf. CB, Dn., Iviii) ;] a lyre, harp : i Co 14^, Ee 
58 142l52.t 

KiOapiJu, [in LXX : Is 231" ^^j^ pi.) * ;] to play upon the lyre or 
harp : 1 Co 14^ Ee 142.t 

* Ki0ap-a)86s, -ov, 6 {<^Ki6dpa, aoiSo's, a singer), one who plays and 
sings to the lyre, a harper : Ee 142 iQ-^^f 

KiXiKia, -as, fi, Cilicia, a province of Asia Minor : Ac 6^ 1523» *> 
2139 223 2334 27^ Ga 12i.t 

KivAjiufiov, V.8. KivydfXiDfiov. 

kikSui/co'w (<[ KivSvvos), [in LXX for 1ffp'> ni., etc. ;] 1. to be daring, 
to venture. 2. to be in danger : Lk 823, Ac 192"' *^, i Co 153o.t 

KiVSuj'os, -ov, 6, [in LXX : Ps 114 (116)3 (-,yjjj)^ gj 326^ g^i .j daiiger, 
peril : Eo 835 . pj^ „ q^ i22«.t 

Kiviu, -Q), [in LXX for yiJ hi., izrm, etc.;] to set in motion, 

move: Mt 23^; t. Ki<t>aXi^v (Ps 21 (22)^, al.), Mt 2739, Mk 1529; pass, 
(cf. Ge 721), Ac 1728. 2. to remove : Ee 2^ 6^*. 3. to excite, stir up : 
Ac 245 ; pass., 2130 (cf. fiera-, <Tvv-Kiv€u>).f 

kiVtjctis, -cws, 17 «/ct»'€a)), [in LXX: Jb 16«'5)^ (t:), al. ;] a 
moving : Jo 5 f3l.t 

Kivvd^Kji^Lov (Eec. Kivafx-), -ov, TO (from the Phoenician, v. LS, s.v., 
and cf. Heb. fiaip), cinnamon : Ee 18i3.t 

Kis, v.s. Kcis. 

Kixprjfii, v.s. XPaw. 

KXdSos, -ov, 6 « KXau)), [in LXX for Tch^ , p]3 , etc. ;] a young 

tender shoot broken off for grafting ; then, a branch : Mt 1332 21^ 2432, 
Mk 432 1328, Lk 13^9; metaph., of descendants (cf. Si 40i*), Eo 
1116-19, 21 f 

KXat'o), [in LXX chiefly for nD2 ;] of any loud expression of pain 
or sorrow, esp. for the dead, to weep, lament ; (a) intrans. : Mk 538.39 
1472 (M, Pr., 131) 16[io], Lk 7i3. 32, 38 352, Jo 113i, 33 1520 2011. i3, is^ Ac 939 ' 
2113, I Co 730, Phi 318, Ja 49 51, Ee 5^ 18i5.i9; ^roXv, Ee 5*; TroXXd, 
Ac 82* (WH, mg.) ; Trt^pSs, Mt 26^5, Lk 22«2; opp. to yeXdw, Lk 621.25; 
Xat'pca, Eo 1215; seq. ctti', c. acc, Lk 19*i 2328, Rq 189; jj^ t^ans., c. ace. 
pers., to weep or lament\for, bewail : Mt 2i8.t 

STN, : v.s. Sa/cpvw. 
*KX(l<ns, -ews, rj (<KXao>), a breaking : Lk 2435, Ac 2*2.t 

KX(iCT|xa, -Tos, TO (<^ K\do)), [in LXX for Jl^ , nbg);] a broken piece, 

fragment : Mt I420 153^, Mk 6*3 88' i9. 20, Lk 9l^ Jo 612. ".t 



248 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

KXauSa, V.S. KauSa. 
KXauSia, -as, rj, Claudia : ii Ti i^'^.f 

KXau'Sios, -ov, 6, Claudius ; 1. the Emperor : Ac 11^^ 18^. 2. A 
military tribune, C. Lysias : Ac 232". t 

KXau0fi<5s, -ov, 6 (<^ KXatw), [in LXX chiefly for "^32, ;] crying, weep- 
ing, Ac 203" . ^. ^ai sSvp^os, Mt 218 (LXX) ■ ^ ^. ^^, ^ /3pvyfi6^, Mt 8^2 13*2. bo 
22i» 24*1 2530, Lk W^f 

K\d(o, [in LXX : Je 16'' (DHD), al. ;] to break, break in pieces : of 
bread, Mt 14^^ IS^e 26'^ Mk 8« I422, Lk 22i9 M^\ Ac 2*6 20^- 1^ 2735, 

I Co 1016 ]^X24. ggq ^i^^ Q a,cc. pers., Mk 8^^ (cf. Ik-, /<aTa-»cXaw).t 

kXcis, -86s, Att. ace, KXetv, later -ctSa, pi., kXciScs, -as, contr., -cis, 
■^7, [in LXX for np50 , Is 2222, ^1. ;] a key. Fig., t. ySacrtXecas t. oipavwv, 

Mt 1619; ^. yvwo-€0)s, Lk 1152; of David (cf. LXX, I.e.), Ee 3^ t. 
Oavdrov k. r. a8ov. Re 11^; t. a/Svaa-ov, Re 201; ^^ (^piaros t^s a., ib. Ql.t 

kXciw, [in LXX chiefly for "130 ;] ^0 sMit : dvpav, Mt 6^ ; t. 
SlPwuov, Re 203 . pass., Ovpa, Mt 25i», Lk 11^ (pi.), Jo 20i9>26, Ac 2130; 
8f.(Tp.(jiTrjpiov, Ac 523; ^i;Xi,/f5^ j{e 2125. Metaph., t. oupavdv, Lk 42^, 
Re 116; .^ o-;rXayx^'a, I Jo 31^; t. ySao-iXtiW, Mt 231*; id. absol., Re 3^ 
T. dvpav, ib. 8. (Cf. (XTTO-, €K-, Kara-, orii'-KXeio).) + 

KX^^^ia, -Tos, TO «KXe7rra)), [in LXX: Ge 3139, Ex 223.* (2. 3) 

(n3|, nnsa*;] l. a thing stolen (Arist., LXX). 2. = kXottt?, theft 

(Plato, al.) : pi.. Re 92i.t 

KXediras, -a (v. Bl., § 7, 2), 6, Cleopas : Lk 24i8.t 

kX^os, -ovs, rd, [in LXX: Jb 2822 (jr^^^r) 30^ * ;] 1. a rumour, 

report. 2. good report, fame, glory : 1 Pe 22o.t 

kX^ttttis, -or, 6, [in LXX for n^a;] a ^/w/: Mt 619- 20 24*3, l^ 

1233.39^ Jo 101' 10 126, I Co 6i«, I Pe 41^. Fig., is k. eV wktC, 1 Th 52.* 
(/cXeVras, WH, txt., R, mg. ; V. Lft., Notes, 73 ; but cf. also M, Th., I.e.), 

II Pe 310, Re 33 1615. Metaph., of false teachers, Jo lO^.t 

Syn. : Xrj(TTi]<i, a robber, a brigand who plunders, openly, with 
violence ; k. is a thief who steals in secret, by fraud and cunning (Tr., 
Syn., § xliv). 

KXe'iTTw, [in LXX for 133;] to steal: absol., Mt 619.20 1918^ Mk 
1019, Lk 1820, Jo 1010, Ro 221 139, Eph 428; c. ace, Mt 27"* 28i3.t 

icXiJiJia, -TOS, TO «KXaw), [in LXX chiefly for n'iim , n^bl, Ez 

152 176, 7^ al. ;] a vine-tiuig, vine-branch : Jo I52. *"6.t 

KXi^fiTjs, -cvTos, 6, Clement : Phi 43.t 

KXripok'op.^w, -w {<C^KXrjpov6/j.o<;), [in LXX chiefly for lah"' , also for 
bn3 , etc. ;] 1. to receive by lot. 2. to inherit (in cl., usually c. gen. 
rei) : absol., Ga 430 (lxx)j jn general, to possess oneself of, receive as 
one's own, obtain (as De i^, al., cf. Ps 24 (25)3, jg 6i7^ . q ace. rei (as 
generally in late Gk., v. M, Pr., 65), of the Messianic Kingdom (cf. 
Ps 36 (37)11, gi 413 3726^ and v. Dalman, Words, 125 fif.) and its bless- 
ings and privileges, t. y^v, Mt 5^ (cf- lxx) j ^^ ygao-iXetW, ^. deov, Mt 253*, 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 249 

I Co e*.!" 15'», Ga 521 ; ^^v al^vcov, Mt 1929, Mk lO^^, Lk 1025 IS^*; 

(TU)Tr]pLav, He 1^* ; T. CTrayyeXias, He 6^2 j a(f>Oap(TLav, I Co IS*** ; ovofia, 

Heil* ; T. iiXoyCav, He 12^^, I Pe 3^ ; ravra, Re 2V (cf. Kara-KXrjpovofieoij.f 

K\i]povoyiia, -as, rj (<^ KXr]pov6/xo<i), [in LXX chiefly for n^nj , also 

for nijpn^ , etc. ;] prop., an inherited property, an inheritance : Mt 21^8, 

Mk 12'', Lk 12^^ 20^* ; in general, a possession, inheritance : Ac 7^, 
He 11^ ; of the Messianic Kingdom and its blessings, Ac 20^2^ (Ja 3^^, 
Col 32^ Bph 11*. 18 55, He 915, I Pe l^.t 

k\t]po- folios, -ov, 6 {<C K\rjpo<s, vi/io/xai, to posscss), [in LXX : 
Jg 187, II Ki 147, Mi 115, je 810 (mir), Si 2322*;] 1. (as in cl.) an 

heir : Mt 21^8, Mk 12', Lk 20i*, Ga 41 ; of those who as sons of God 
inherit the privileges of the Messianic Kingdom ; of Christ himself, 
He 12 ; of Abraham, Eo 4i3, i* ; of Christians, Eo 81^, Ga 329, Tit 3^, 
Ja 25. 2. (As in LXX : Jg, Mi, Je, 11. c.) a possessor : He 61^ 11^ 
(Cremer, 359 f.).t 

KXripos, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for rhui , blia ;] a lot ; (a) that 

which is cast or drawn : Mt 27^5, Mk 152*, Lk 23^*, Jo 192* (lxx), 
Ac 12« ; (6) that which is obtained by casting : Ac li' 821 ; of a part in 
the Kingdom of God (cf. Wi 55), Ac 26i8, Col 1^2; pi. of the "cure" 
of a presbyter, i Pe 5^ (v. ICG, in l.).t 

K\T,p(5a), -S, [in LXX : i Ki 14*i (iD^ ni.), Es 4" A (Kip ni.), 
Is 1711*;] 1. to cast lots. 2. to choose by lot. 3. to assign by lot, 
assign a portion : pass., iv w »<ai kKXiqpdiO-qixev, Eph in (on the various 
interpretations, v. ICC ; AE; Ellic, in l.).t 

kX^is, -«ws, 17 {KaXioi), [in LXX : Je 38 (31)« (Nip), Jth 12io A, 
III Mac 51**;] a calling, call; in NT, always of the Divine call to 
salvation : Eo 112^, i Co 1^6 72«, Eph lis 41. \ Phi 31*, 11 Th 1", 

II Ti 19, He 31, II Pe li« (Cremer, 332).t 

KXt]T6s, -q, -ov « Kokioi), [in LXX for Nip , XIpD , Ex 121*5, ^1. ;] 

called, invited (as to a banquet, ^sch., i Ki l*i, iii Mac 51*) ; in NT, 
always of the Divine call ; {a) to some ofi&ce : k. dTroo-roXo?, Eo 1*, 
I Co 11 ; {b) to salvation : Eo 82^, i Co I2*, Ju 1 ; k. koX iKkeKTol k. 
TTLO-TOL, Ee 171*; in gosp. (not in pi., v.s. KaXcw) disting. fr. ckX«kto?, 
Mt 20i« (WH, txt., E, omit), 22i*; k. 'Irja-oi Xp., Eo 1«; k. ayioi, 
saints by calling, Eo 1^, i Co 12.t 

KXiPacos, -ov, 6 (Att., KpC^-, but k\- in Ion., Hdt., ii, 92), [in LXX 

for 1131?, Ge 151', Ho 7*'^, al.;] 1. in cl., a clibanus, cribanus, an 

earthen vessel for baking bread. 2. In LXX and NT, a furnace 
(cf. MM, Exp., xv), an oven : Mt B^o, Lk 1228.t 

KXi'fAa, -Tos, TO «kXiVw), [in LXX : Jg 202 A (n3B)*;] 1. an in- 
clination, slope, esp. the slope from the equator to the pole (Arist). 
2. a region (Polyb., al.) : pi., Eo 1523, n Co lli", Ga 12i.t 

* tCKivApiov, -ov, TO, dimin. of kXivt], a couch : Ac 5i5 (cf. KXivtSiov).t 



250 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

kXiVt], -rys, r; (<; kXiVo)), [in LXX chiefly for HKia;] abed, couch: 

Mt 9-«, Mk 4-^1 74.30, Lk 518 816 1734^ Re 222 (cf. MM, Exp., xv).t 

* kXh'iSioi', -ov, to, dimin. of kXlvy), a couch : Lk S^^' 2* (cf. KXtvaptov).t 
KXikco, [in LXX chiefly for ni33 ;] 1. to make to bend, to bow : 
T. K€cf)a\ijv (of one dying), Jo 19^*^; t. Trpoa-wirov (of terrified persons), 
Lk 24*. 2. ^0 maA;e to lean, to rest : r. KecftaXrjv (in sleep), Mt 82^, 
Lk 9*^. 3. As in Horn., of soldiers, to turn (to flight), TrapeixftoXds, 
He 113*. 4 i^ jg^te Q]j (ag jjii^ in ci )^ ^0 decline : intrans., 17 rj/xipa, 
Lk 912 2429.t 

** KXiai'a, -as, ^ «KXtVa)), [in LXX: III Mac G^i A*;] 1. a place 
for reclining ; hence, (a) a hut ; (b) an easy chair ; (c) a couch. 

2. a company reclining : pi., Lk 9^* (cf. Fl.T, Ant., xii, 2, 12).t 

kXott^, --^s, 17 (<»cX£7rTco), [in LXX for 133;] theft: pi., Mt 15^^, 
Mk 722.t 

kXuSwi', -w: OS, o (kXv^w, of the sea, to wash over), [in LXX : 
Jh 1*- 12 (-lyo), al. ;] a billow, surge : Lk 82", Ja l«.t 

SFi\r. ; KVfia, a tuave. 
+ KXuSwf i^ofiai « kXvSwv), [in LXX : Is 572« {miS) * ;] to be tossed 
by waves ; metaph., to be tossed like waves (cf. FIJ, Ant., ix, 11, 3): 
Bph 4i*.t 

KXwiras, -a, 6 (Aram.; on the original, v. Lft., Gal., 267 f.), 
Glopas : Ja 1925.t 

* Kvf\Qu) (late form of Kvdu)), 1. to scratch. 2. to tickle; pass,, to 
itch : II Ti 43.t 

Kk-iSos, -ov, V, Cnidus, a city (and peninsula) on S.W. coast of 
Asia Minor : Ac 27".t 

*t KoSpdfTTjs, -ov, 6 (Lat. quadrans, the fourth part of an as), a 
quadrans (AV, farthing) : Mt 526, Mk 12*2.t 

KoiXta, -as, rj « koiXos, hollow), [in LXX chiefly for ^l$2 , D'^yO , 

nif? , De 713, II Ki 712, Ge 412i, al. ; also (Jb 3^ lO^s 311* 38^) for 

□n"| ;] 1. the belly (stomach or intestines or both) : Mt 12*0 1517^ 

Mk 719, Lk I516, Eo 1618, I Co 613, py 319^ Re 10^' 10. 2. (As often 
in LXX) the womb: Lk 1*1.42, 44 221 1127 2329, Jo 3*; « k. fjLrjrpo^ 
(cf. Ps 21 (22)11, Jb 121, al), Mt I912, Lk lis, Ac 32 14^, Ga li^. 

3. Metaph. (as Heb. ]03 , cf. Jb 1535, Pr 202^, Si I912), of the heart : 

Jo 738.t 

•coifidw, -w, [in LXX chiefly for MOT;] to lull to sleeky, put to 
sleep. Mid and pass., to fall asleep (M, Pr., 162 ; M, Th., 1, 4, 13) : 
Mt 2813, Lk 22«, Jo 1112, Ac 12«. Metaph., of death : Mt 27*2, Jo lin, 
Ac 7«o 1336, I Co 739 1130 156. 18, 20, 51^ j Th 413-15, II Pe 3* (cf. Is 148, 
431^ II Mac 12*5).t 

SYN. : KaOevSu). 

** KoijiTjats, -£ws, rj, [in LXX: Si 46i^ 48i3*;] a reclining, resting: 
Jo lli3.t 

KoiK<5s, -V, -6v, [in LXX : Pr li* (in^t) 21^ 252* (-,3,^)^ ^i 73^ ^1.;] 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 251 

1. common (general; = Lat. communis) : Ac 2** 4^2. ^_ Trto-Tts, Tit 1*; 
o-wTTjpia, Ju^. 2. common (ordinary; = vulgaris); hence in LXX 
(i Mac 1*''', al.) and NT, unhallowed, unclean (cl., ySe^j/Xos, q.v.) : 
Mk 72.5, Ac 101*' 28 118, Ro 141*, He lO^^, Ee 2127.t 

Koifow, -w, [in LXX: iv Mac 7^ xR*;] 1. in cl., to make 
common. 2. In LXX, I.e., and NT (as koivos, 2), to make ceremonially 
unclean, to profane (= cl., /Sekr^Xoco) : Mt 1511-18,20^ Mk 715.18,20,23^ 
Ac 21^8 J pass.. He Qi^. 2. to count unclean (cf. 8i»caiow) : Ac 
1015 119.t 

Syn. : ^e$r)X6(j}. Thayer (s.v. k.) mentions that Winer notes 
the accuracy whereby the Jews are said to use k. in addressing Jews, 
Ac 2P8^ and /?. when speaking to Felix, 24^ (Cremer, 362). 

Koivwviio, -w, [in LXX : 11 Ch 20^5, Jb 348, Ec 9* ("Qn), Pr in, 
Wi 6^3, Si 131, al. ;] to have a share of, go shares in (something) with 
(some one), take part in : c. gen. rei (as usually in cl., so Pr, I.e.), 
He 21*; c. dat. rei, Ro 121^ 15^7, i Ti 5^2, i Pe 4i3, 11 Jo"; c. dat. 
pers., seq. els, Pnl 41^; iv, Ga 6*' (cf. o-w-kou (oi/eoj).t 

Koivoivia, -as, rj «koivcu;/os), [in LXX: Le 6^ (521) (T nOllZrri), 
Wi 818, III Mac 4**;] 1. fellowship, communion: Ac 2*^^ n Qq 514^ 
Phi 1-5; T. vlov, I Co 1^; T. ai/j.aTo<;, crw/xaTos Xp., I Co IQl" ; iraOr/fxaTiav 
avToi, Phi 310 ; T. TTvevfxaTos, II Co 131^, Phi 21; Sefias Kotviovias, Ga 2^ ; 
T. TTto-Tcais crov, Phm ^ ; seq. fxera. : t. TraTpo's, I Jo 1^' "^ ; rjfi^v, aXXrjkuiv, 
ib. 2» 7. 2. contribution (as outcome of fellowship) : Ro 15^*", 11 Co 8* 
913, He 136 (cf. Art. Communion, DB, i, 460 ff. ; MM, Exp., xv).t 

*ikoi»'wi'ik6s, -rj, -6v {<^ Koivuivia) , 1. sociable. 2. ready to com- 
municate or imjyart (R, mg., ready to sympathize, v. Field, Notes, 
213 f.) : I Ti 6i8.t 

Ko,viov6s, -q, -6v « KOLvos), [m LXX : Pr 28^\ Is 1^3 {-Qn), Ma 2i* 
(rrinq), Es Si^, al. ;] l. as adj., = koivo's. 2. As subst., 6, 17 k., (a) a 

partner, associate, companion : 11 Co 8^^, Phm i'' ; c. dat. pers., Lk 5i*> ; 
c. gen. pers.. He 10^^ ; id. seq. ev, Mt 23=*'' ; (b) a partaker, sharer : c. 
gen. rei, i Co 10i8,2o^ h Co 1^, i Pe 51, 11 Pe 1* (v. Deiss., BS, 368 n2).+ 
KotTT), -i^s, rj (in Hom., koItos), [in LXX chiefly for 33l?ra , also 
forniaiy, etc.;] a bed: Lk 11^; esp. the marriage-bed: k. d/xtavros, 

He 13* ; k. exetv, of a woman conceiving, Ro 91" (cf. peculiar phrases 
in LXX, Le I518, al.) ; of illicit intercourse, pi, Ro 13i3.t 

KoiTwi', -wvos, 6 (•<[ KOLTq ', = Att., SoifxaTiov, V. Kennedy, Sources, 
40), [in LXX chiefly for -|-|p , n Ki 4^, Jl 2i«, i Es 3^, al. ;] a bed- 
chamber; o €7ri Tov K., a chamberlain : Ac 12^'*'.t 

tKOKKii'os, -rj, -ov (<[«:o'k/cos, as used of the "berry" of the i7ea; 
coccifera, y. DB, iv, 416), [in LXX for ny^lFI, rbim, ^ZUf , Ex 25*, 

Ge 3828, ig 118^ al. ;] scarlet : Mt 27^8, He 91^, Re 17^ ; neut., without 
substantive, of clothing. Re 17* I812, le.t 



252 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

k(5kkos, -ov, 6, [in LXX : La 4^ B K R (yblD), Si 45^1 *;] a grain : 
Mt 1331 1720^ Mk 431, Lk 1319 17«, Jo 1224, i Co IS^^.t 

KoXd^u « K0X09, docked), [in LXX : Da 6^2 (i3) (qq Heb.), i Es 
8^*, Wi 3'* (and freq.), i Mac T^, al.;] 1. to curtail, dock, prune. 
2. to check, restrain. 3. to chastise, correct, punish : pass., 11 Pe 2^ ; 
mid., cause to be punished (in Mac 7^) : Ac 42i.t 

^KoXaKia (Rec. -fta), -as, rj (<^ KoXaKevw, to flatter), flattery: 
I Th 25 (v. Lft., Notes, 23).t 

K<5Xaats, -ews, v «KoXa^o)), [in LXX : Ez 143-7 1830 4412 (Ijiiy^p) 
4311, Xaix/3dv€Lv T^v K. (Dbs ni.); Wi 11^3 162. 24 194^ je 1320^ 
ii-iv Mac 5*;] correction, penalty, punishment : Mt 25*^, i Jo 4^^.+ 

Syn. : TL/jioipLa, requital. Arist. distinguishes between k. as that 
which, being discipHnary, has reference to the sufferer, and t. as that 
which, being penal, has reference to the satisfaction of him who 
inflicts (v. Thayer, s.v. k., and cf. Tr., Syti., § vii). But in late Gk. 
especially, the distinction is not always maintained (v. reff. in Thayer), 

KoXao-aaeus (Eec. KoAoo--), -ews, 6, a Golossian : pi., Col., tit. (and 
subscr., Eec, Tr.).t 

KoXaaaai, V.S. KoXoo-o-at. 
*t KoXa<}>i^b) (<:^ KoA.a<^os = Att., kovSvXol, the knuckles, the closed 
fist), to strike with the fist, to buffet: Mt 26^7, Mk 14«5, 11 Co 12^; 
pass., I Co 411, I Pe 22o.t 

KoXXdw, -w (<^KoXXa, glue), [in LXX chiefly for pSl;] 1. to glue 
or cement together. 2. Generally, to unite, to join firmly. Pass., to 
cleave to, join (oneself to): c. dat. pers., Mt 195(lxx)^ l]j iq^^ IS^^, 
Ac 513 (but V. Field, Notes, 118) 926 IO28 (v. Field, I.e.) 173* ; t. Tropvr], 
I Co 616 . ^, Kvpiuy, ib. 17 ; c. dat. rei, ap/xan, Ac 829 ; t. Aya6w, Ro 12^ ; 
of sins joining together, dxpt t. oipavov, Re 18^, of dust, Lk IQH (cf. 
Trpotr-KoWano) .t 

KoXXoupioi' (TTr., KoWv-, the more usual form), -ov, to (dimin. of 
KoXXvpa = k6XXi$, a coarse bread roll), [in LXX: in Ki 122* m B*;] 
1. a small bread roll (LXX, 11. c). 2. (Usually in pi., LS, s.v.) an 
eye salve shaped like a roll : Re 31^. t 

*t KoXXoPiCTTiis, -ov, 6 {<^k6XXv(3o<;, a small coin, a rate of exchange), 
a money-changer : Mt 2I12, Mk lli-^, Jo 21^ (cf. K€p/AaT«rTrjs).t 

KoXXupiOl', V.S. KoXXovpLOV. 

KoXoj36u, -w « KoXo/36';, docked), [in LXX : 11 Ki 412 {ysp pi.) * ;] 
to cut off, ampiitate (LXX), hence, to curtail, shorten: Mt 2422, 
Mk 132o.t 

KoXocro-acus. V.S. KoXao-o-acvs. 

KoXocro-ai (so in cl. ; -ao-crat, Rec, LTr.), -wv, al, ColosscB, a city on 
the Lycus in Phrygia : Col 12.t 

koXttos, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for jTn , pin , pU ;] 1. prop., the 

bosom : Jo 1323 ; fig., of close association, iv (cis tov) toTs k. 'A^padfi, 
Lk 1622. 23 (cf. IV Mac 13i6) ; 6 Hov cis t6i/ k. t. Trarpos, Jo lis. 2. The 
bosom or fold of a loose garment falling over a girdle, used as a 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 253 

pocket, hence fig., ek tov k. (Is 65«, Je 39 (32)i8) : Lk G^s. 3. A bosom- 
like hollow, as a hay or gulf : Ac 27^^.t 

** Ko\up.p(iw, -w, [in Al. : Is 25^^*;] to dive, plunge into the sea: 

Ac 27^^ (of. e/c-KoXv/x^aiu).t 

Ko\ufipri8pa, -a?, tj « AoXv/>t/3a<o), [in LXX for nD"|5L , IV Ki 18^7, 

al. ;] a stvimming-pool, pool : Jo 5^ W' '^ 9^.t 

*tKo\w>'ia, (Eec. -ajvta), -as, 17 (■<] Lat. colonia), a colony: Ac 16^^ 
(v. Lft., Phi., 50 f.).t 

* KOjidw, -to (<; KOfirj), to wear long hair : i Co 11^*' ^^.t 
KdfiTj, -775, rj, [in LXX: Nu 6^, Ez 4420 (^-55), al.;] the hair: 

I Co llis.t 

KOfiij^a), [in LXX for NtZTJ , etc. ;] 1. to take care of. 2. to carry 
off safe. 3. to carry off as booty. 4. to bear or carr;?/ ; Lk 7^'^. 
Mid., to hear for oneself, hence, (a) to receive : He 10^" 11^^' ^^, 
I Pe 1^ 5*, II Pe 2^^ ; {h) to receive hack, recover (in cl. so also act.) : 
Mt 2527, He 11^9; metaph., of requital, 11 Co 510, Col 325; ^„^^ Kvpiov, 

Eph 6^ (cf. e*c-, arvv-KOp.lt,(Ji).^ 

*K0)x\j/6s, -77, -6v {<^ KOfx.€(i), to take care of), well-dressed, elegant, 
fine; compar. neut., Ko/xij/oTepov e^eiv (cf. ko^jj^ws fx""' Epict., and 
eolloq. Eng., "to he doing finely") : Jo 4^2 f 

Koi/Kia), -ui « Kovia, dust, lime), [in LXX : De 272' * (TBT), Pr 

21^*;] to plaster or whiten over: of tombs, Mt 232^^; fig., of a 
hypocrite, Ac 23^.t 

KOfiopTos, -ou, 6 {<C KovLs ov Kovia, dust, opvvfjLi, to stir up), [in 
LXX for pnx , etc. ;] in cl., dust stirred up (Ex 9^, Is 52*) ; in NT, 

simply d^ist : Mt IQi*, Lk 9^ IQi^, Ac 135i 2223.t 

KOTTd^o) (<K07ro9), [in LXX: Ge 8\ Es 2^ 7i« (ptZT), Eu V^, 
al. (bxi), Jh 111' 12 (pniy), al. ;] to grow weary; of the wind (Hdt., 
Jh., I.e.), to ahate, cease raging : Mt 14^2, Mk 4^9, G^i.t 

Ko-ircTiSs, -ov, o {<C KOTTTO), mid.), [in LXX chiefly for T5pp ;] = cl. 

KOfifios, a heating of the head and hreast, lamentation : seq. i-n-i, c. dat. 
pers., Ac 82,t 

KoirVi, -^s, V « KOTTTO)), [in LXX: Ge U^^ Jos IO20 (n33 hi., 
nso), De 2825 (p|33), Jth 15'''*;] 1. in cl., a stroke, a pounding (as in 

a mortar). 2. In LXX, a smiting in battle : He 7^ (i'X^).t 

Komdw, -u) (■<K07ros), [in LXX chiefly for ya^;] 1. (as in cl.) 
to grow weary : Mt 1128, Jq 46^ ^q 2^ (cf. Is 403i). 2. Hence, in 
LXX and NT, to work ivith effort, to toil : absol., Mt 628, Lk 5^ 1227, 
Jo 438, Ac 2035, I Co 412, Eph 428, u Ti 2"; c. ace. rei, Jo 4^8; freq. in 
Paul. Epp., of ministerial labour : i Co IS^o 16^^ ; seq. Iv, Eo I612, 
I Th 512 (v. M, Th., in 1.), i Ti 5^7; cis, Eo 16«, Ga 411, Phi 2i«, Col 129, 
I Ti 4io.t 

KOTTos, -OV, b (kC^ko'tttw), [in LXX chiefly for bt^ , also for 



254 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

J]X, etc.;] 1. a striking, beating {in Je 51^^ (45^) = /<o7reTos). 2. labo- 
rious toil, trouble : Jo 4^8, i Co 3^ 15^8, i Th 3^ ; k. t. iydTrrj^, i Th 1^ ; 
epya koI k., Re 2^ ; K. Kal /xox^os, II Co ll^^, i Th 29, II Th 38 ; pi., iv k., 
II Co 6^ 10^* 11^"* ; €K T. K., Re 14^^ ; kottovs {-ov) Trapex^Lv (in cl. more 
freq. tt. Trpdyfiara, ttovov), C. dat. pars., Mt 2610, MJj i^e^ l]^ ^7 ig^, 
Ga 6i7.t 

Syn. : fioxOos, lahoiir ; ttovos (q.v.), ioz7, painful effort; in cl., 
"tt. gives prominence to the eifort (work as requiring I'orce), k. to the 
fatigue, p.. (chiefly poetic) to the hardship " (Thayer, s.v. k.). 

Koirpi'a, -as, 17, [in LXX chiefly for nbiyj;? ;] a dung hill (i Ki 28, 
Ps 112 (113)" al.) : Lk 1435.t 

K6-apiov, -ov, TO, [in LXX (pi.): Je 82 (25)33 (^^r^), gi 222, 

I Mac 2^2*;] = Kon-pos, dung : pi., Lk 138 (WH, mg., ko^ivov Koirpi(x}v).f 

Ko'-n-TO), [in LXX for n")3 , IDD , 1133 hi., etc. ;] 1. to strike, smite. 
2. to cut off: c. ace. rei, seq. Atto, Mt 218; ^^^ ^\^ us Mid., to beat 
one's breast with grief, to mourn, beivail : Mt 11^'' 243*^ ; c. ace. pers., 
Lk 8^'^ 23^'^; seq. iiri, C. ace, Re l*" 18^ (cf. ava-, diro-, ««-, iv-, Kara-, 
irpo-, 7rpocr-Kd7rTco).t 

Syn. : Oprjveta, q.v. 

Kopal, -ttKos, o, [in LXX for l"]j; ;] a ra-uew ; Lk 122*.t 

KopdcTLov, -ov, TO, (dimin. of Koprj), [in LXX chiefly for n^ys , Ru 
28, al. ; in Jl 3 (4)3, Za 8^ for nTt^^l ;] a colloquial word which survives 
in MGr. (Kennedy, Sources, 154), girl, maiden: Mt 9-*'25 1411, 

Mk 5"'*^ 622.28.t 

*tKopP(i»' (Rec, T, -/3av), indecl. (Heb. I^lj?), aw offering, a gift 

offered to God : Mk V^ (cf. Kop^av5s).t 

*tKoppavas, -5, 6 (Heb. ^a"!)"?), the Temple treastiry : Mt 27" 

(cf. Kopfidv).'^ 

Kope, indecl. (in FIJ, -eou), 6 (Heb. TTp), Korah : Ju ^^.t 

** Kopivvuiii (</copos, mr/eii), [in Sm. : Ps 21 (22)^7, Al, 102 
(103)^*;] to satisfy: pass., Tpo(f>rj<;, Ac 2738; metaph., of spiritual 
things, I Co 48.t 

KopiVOios, -a, -ov, Corinthian ; as subst., 6 K., a Corhithian : Ac 
188, 27 (WH, txt., R, omit), 11 Co 611 ; i Co, 11 Co, ^i^.t 

K6pi^0os, -ov, ^, Corinth: Kq 18^' 27 191, i Co I2, 11 Co 11.23^ 

II Ti 42o.t 

KopcTiXtos, -ov, 6 (Lat.), Cornelius : Ac 10^ ^-.t 

K6pos, -ov, 6 (Heb. 13), [in LXX : Le 27^6, Nu 1132, Bz 4513 (xh) ; 

more freq., 11 Ch 27*, al. (l3) ;] a cor, a Hebrew measure (AV, RV, 
measure) : Lk 16'^.t 

Kocr\i.4u), -w (<^ KoV/xos), [in LXX for my, ]pT\, etc.;] 1. io order, 
arrange, prepare (in Horn. esp. of marshalling armies) : Mt 25" (cf. 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 255 

Si 50^, al.). 2. to adorn, furnish : oTkov, pass., Mt 12**, Lk ll^s ; 
fivtjfM€ia, Mt 2328; TO Upov, pass., Lk 21^; OefifXioi, Ee 21^^; vnjfi<f>r}Vf 
pass., Ee 21^; lavras, seq. cv, i Ti 2^ Metaph., c. ace. pers., i Pe 3*; 
c. ace. rei. Tit 2^\f 

* Ko<rfiiK6s, -1?, -ov (koo-^os), 1. pertaining to the world or universe. 
2. of this world, earthly . He 9^ 3. In ethical sense, worldly : 
CTTi^u/xiai, Tit 2i2.t 

K^o-fiios, -OV (in el. -o, -ov), « koot/aos), [in LXX : Ee 12^ (]pri)* ;] 
orderly, decent, modest : i Ti 2^ (WH, mg., -iws, q.v.) B^A 

* Kocr(ii«9, adv (<; Koo-fio^), decently, fittingly : i Ti 2^ (WH, mg.).+ 
*t KoafjioKpdTup, -opos, o (<^ K6(Tfxo<;, Kparew), 1. in Orphic hymns, 

al. (v. AE, ^^/i.. I.e.), a ruler of the whole world (and so in Eabbinic 
writings : liaipiaTlp). 2. a ruler of this world (in contrast to Travro- 

Kpdrwp) : ol K. T. (TKOTovi TovTov, the ruUrs of this dark world, Eph 6^^.+ 

K<5(rfios, -ov, b [in LXX : Ge 2^, De 4i9 IV, Is 242i 40^6 (xnx), 

Ex 335. «, Je 232 430^ Ez 720 1611 23*0 (■'1^), Is 6I10 (^^3), al, Wi 22* 

and freq.. Si 6'"^ al;] 1. order (Horn., Plat., al.). 2. ornament, adorn- 
ment, esp. of women (Hom., al.) : i Pe 3^. 3. Later, the world or 
universe, as an ordered system (Plat., al.) : Ac 17^*, Eo d^^, i Co 3^2, 
Phi 2^*, He 43, al. 4. In late writers only, the world, i.e. the earth 
(= ^ o'lKovfiivri, cf. Mt 48 with Lk 45) : Mt 48, Mk 16^^^\ Col 220, i Ti 6^, 
al. ; hence by meton., (a) of the human inhabitants of the world : Mt 
51* 1338, Mk 149, Jo 110 4*2 12*7, Eo 3(5^ I Co 4^3, II Co 5^\ 11 Pe 25, 
al. ; (6) of worldly affairs or possessions : Mt 162", j^k S^", Lk 92^, 
I Co 731, 1 Jo 2ie, al. ; (c) in ethical sense, of the ungodly : Jo 7^ 141'","^ 
I Co 121, Ja 127, J Jo 4.4^ al. ; (d) metaph. : 6 /c. r^s d8t/ctas, Ja 3*. 

SVN. : alwv, q.v. (cf . also Dalman, Words, 162 ff. ; Tr., Syn., § lix ; 
Westc., additional note on Jo l^O; DB, iv, 938 ff.). 

Kouapxos, -ov, 6 (Lat.), Quartus : Eo 1623.t 

Koo/i (Tr., txt., Kovfi, Eec. kov/xi) (Heb. imperat. masc, used as 
an interjection, Dip), koum (arise) : Mk 5*i.t 

*t KouoTwSia, -as, 17, (Lat. custodia), a guard : Mt 27^^> *' 28ii.t 

Koo<t.ita) « /covc^os, light), [in LXX : Ex I822, Jh l^, al. (bbp hi.), 
Es 51, al. ;] 1. intrans., fo 6e ii^/i^ (poetic chiefly). 2. to lighten, make 
light : c. ace, Ac 2738.t 

K^<|>i^os, -ov, 6, [in LXX : Jg 6^^ (bo), Ps 80 (81)« (Til) *;] a basket, 

probably of wicker-work, such as were carried by Jews for food : 
Mt 1420 169, Mk 6*3 819, Lk 9^7 138, Jo 6" (cf. o-<^vpt's).t 

**t Kp^Parros (Eec. KpdyS/Saros), ov, 6 (a Macedonian word, = Lat. 
grabatus, el. or/ci/tTrovs), [in Aq. : Am 3^2*;] a camp bed, pallet: Mk 
24.9,11.12 655^ Jo 58-11, Ac 515 933 (v. Swete, Mk., 2*, and cf. KXLvr,).f 

Kpdioi, [in LXX for py7 , pyS , Kip , etc. ;] in el. chiefly poet., 
1. prop, onomatop., of the raven, to croak, hence generally, of inartic. 
cries, to scream, cry out (-^sch., al.) : Mk 5* 92" 1539 (Eec, E, mg.), 
Lk 939, al. ; of crying for vengeance (cf. Ge i^°), Ja 5*. 2. to cry, call 



256 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

out with a loud voice : c. ace. rei, Ac 19^2 • geq. orat. dir., Mk 10*^, Lk 
1839, al. ; (cV) <f>m"rj fJnydXy, Mk 5^ Ee U^^ al. ; ktywv, Mt 8•■^^ al. ; of 
public teaching, Jo 1^^, Eo 9^''', al. ; of importunate prayer (cf . Jb 35^2^ 
Ps 3^ al), Eo 8l^ Ga 4^ ; pf. with pres. sense (vernac. ; M, Pr., 147), 
Jo v. 

SYN. : V.S. /Soao). 
* KpanrdXt] {KpurdXr), WH), -■>??, rj (cf. KpanraXdw for IDtZ? , Is 24^0 
29**), dru7iken nausea (EV, surfeiting) : Lk 21^*.+ 

SVN. : /cw/Aos, revelling ; fxiOrj, driinlceness ; otvo^Xvyta, a debauch ; 
TTOTos, a drinking bout (v. Tr., Syn., § Ixi). 

Kpai'toi', -ov, TO (<Ka(oa, the head), [in LXX : Jg 9^^ iv Ki 9^5 
(n^ab?) *;] a skull : Mt 27^3, Mk Id'^'-, Lk 2333, Jq 1917,+ 

Kpdairehov, -ov, to, [in LXX: Nu 1538.39 (ns^s), De 22^2, 

Za 8^3 (fj33)*;] 1, in cl., an edge, border. 2. In LXX (v. supr.) and 

NT, a tassel or corner : Mt 920 1436 23^, Mk 6^\ Lk S^^.t 

KpaTaios, -a, -6u (<^ KpctTo?), (in cl. poet. form of Kparepoi), [in LXX 
chiefly for pjn and cognates ;] strong, mighty : i Pe 5^.1 

txpaTaiocj, -w (late form of ^paTwco; <^KpaTos), [in LXX chiefly 
for pin;] to strengthen; pass., ^0 ivax strong: Lk 2*", i Co 16^3 j 
TTViVfiaTi, Lk 1^^ ; Svvd/xeL k. 8ia t. Trv€v/xaTO<;, Bph 3^^."!' 

Kparew, -w (<^ Kpdros), [in LXX chiefly for p7n hi., also for THN , 
etc.;] 1. <o be strong, mighty, hence, to rule, be master, prevail (so 
chiefly in cl. ; in LXX: Es 1^, i Es 438, Wi U^\ al.). 2. to get 
possession of, obtain, take hold of (Hdt., Thuc, al.) : c. gen. rei (M, 
Pr., 65), Ac 2713; t. x^vos, Mt 9^5, Mk 13i 5" 9^7, Lk 8^^; c. ace. rei, 
Mt 1211; e ^cc. pers., Mt 143 1328 21« 22^ 26*'''8ff-, Mk 321 61^ I212 
14i,44ff.^ Ac 311 246, He 202 (cf. 11 Ki G^). 3. to hold, holdfast 
(^sch., Polyb., al.) : c. ace. rei, iv t. Sc^ta, Ee 2i. Metaph. : c. ace. 
pers., pass., Ac 22*; c. ace. rei, Ee 2i3>25 311 ; ,., K€<f)aX-jv (i.e. Christ), 
Col 219; t. TrapdSocnv (-cts), Xoyov, SiSaxjv, Mk 73'''' 8 910, II Th 2l^ 
Ee 21*' 1^ ; c. gen. rei, He 41* 6I8 ; of sins, to retain, Jo 2023 ; of re- 
straint, seq. iva fn;, Ee 71 ; pass., seq. tou fiy, Lk 24i6.t 

KpdTioTos, -r], -ov, superl. of Kparvs (Hom.), 1. strongest, mightiest 
(Horn.). 2. noblest, best (cf. /cpctVo-wv), most excellent (Pind., Soph., 
al.) : voc, KpaTi(TT€, as title of honour and respect (DCG, ii, 727'*), 
Lk P, Ac 2326 243 2625.t 

Kpdros, -£os (-ous), TO, [in LXX chiefly for TJT , Jb 12i6, Ps 89 
(90)11, Q^i .J I strength, esp. as in Hom., of bodily strength. 2. power, 
might : He 2i* ; to k. t^s io-xuos a^ToG, Eph li9 610 (Is 4026, Da th 
42^) ; T. S6$rj<; avTov, Col ln ; Kara Kpdros, mightily, Ac 192** ; a mighty 
deed, an act of power, Lk l^i ; in doxologies, i Ti 6I6, i Pe 411 511, 
Ju25, Eel6 5i3.t 

KpaoYdJo) «K/DavyT?). [in LXX: II Es 313 (y,-, hi.)*;] = Kpd^w, 
1. of animals, to bay, to croak, etc. 2. Of men, to cry out, shout ; 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 257 

Mt 1219, Jo 1213 1915^ Ac 2223 . geq. \iy^y^ Jo 18*o 19«' 12 ; ^^l \iyu>v, 
Lk 4" (WH, Kpdi-) ; cf^wvfi fj^eydXr,, Jo 11*^ (cf. Abbott, JV, 269 f.).+ 

Kpauyii, -j}s, ^, [in LXX for nf^rv , njrnp , nrilSr , etc. ;] crying, 
outcry, clamour : Mt 25^, Lk 1*2^ Ac 239, Eph ^^\ He 5^ Ee 214.t 

Kp^as, -€ws, pi., Kpea, [in LXX for lim^ (freq.);] flesh, meat: 

Eo 1421, I Co 8i3.t 

Kpei(r<TO)v (Epic and old Att.) and KpciTTwv (later Att.), prop, 
comparat. of KpaTv<;, strong, but in sense often (as in cl., v. LS, s.v.) as 
comparat. of aya66<s, [in LXX chiefly for aitO ;] better ; (a) as to ad- 
vantage or usefulness: i Co 11^^, He 11*'^ 12^*; 7roXX<3 fxaXXov k., 
Phi 123 ; Kpcro-o-ov TToulv, I Co 738 . ^o-^,^^ seq. inf., I Co 1\ 11 Pe 221 ; 
{h) as to excellence : He 1* B^ 7^' i^. 22 36 923 iqs* nic, 35 . ^. ^o-rt, seq. 
inf., I Pe 317.+ 

Kp^p.a|Jiai, V.S. xpe/Ltawv/oit. 

Kp€p,(ift/u|xi (also Kpe/jiawvo), Kpe/xdu) ; the pres. is not found in 
NT), [in LXX (where also ^pc/aa^w, Jb 26^) chiefly for nbn ;] trans., to 
hang, suspend: c. ace. pers., seq. eVi $v\ov, Ac 53'' 1039; pass., Lk 
2339; geq, Trcpi, Mt 18^. Mid., Kpi/xafxai, intrans., to hang: seq. Ik, 
Ac 284; ,vl ^kov, Ga 3^3 (Lxx); metaph., seq. kv, Mt 22*o.t 

KpcTrdlXr], V.8. KpanrdXr]. 

KpTjfivos, -ou, 6 {<CKp€ixd.vvvfiC), [In LXX: 11 Ch 25^2 {vh'Q)*;] a 

steep hank : Mt 832, Mk 5^3, Lk 833.t 

Kpris, 6, pi., Kp^rcs, a Cretan : Ac 2^, Tit 1^2 .t 

KprjaKTjs, -ci/Tos (Bl., § 10, 4), 6 (Lat.), Crescens : 11 Ti 4i°.t 

Kp^TT), -77s, i Crefe ; Ac 27^> 12. i3, 31^ Tit l^.t 

Kpt0TJ, -^9, 17, [in LXX for rriyt^;] barley : pi. (as usually in cl.), 
Ee 6«.t 

KpiGivos, -r), -ov {<^Kpi6rj), [in LXX for TTpXffil 0/ barley: 

Jo 69. 13. 

Kpifia (Bl., §27, 2), -Tos, TO «/cp(:vw), [in LXX chiefly for 
t35)l??li;] the issue of a judicial process, hence, 1. judgment, the 

decision passed on the faults of others : Mt 72 ; in forensic sense, c. 
gen. pun., Lk 2420; esp. of the judgment of God, Eo 22 5i« 113* {ICC, 
in 1.), II Pe 23, Ju^ k. Xa/x/Sdi €a$ai, Mt 2313 (Eec, E, mg.), Mk 12*9, 
Lk 20*", Eo 132, Ja 31 ; Ix""' ^ Ti 512 ; fSaard^eiv, Ga 519 ; ia-dUiv iavrw, 
I Co 1129; els K. a-vvepxea-Oat, ib. 3* ; ctvai iv t avTw k., Lk 23*9; c. gen. 
obj., Eo 38, I Ti 3^ Ee I7I; of God's judgment through Christ, 
Jo 939; TO K. apxerai, I Pe 41'^; t. k. t. fxeXXov, Ac 242^; k. aliaviov. 
He 62 ; eKpivev 6 0€os t. k. vfjLUiv, Ee 1829 ; of the right of judgment, 
Ee 20*. 2. a matter for judgment, a law-suit, a case : i Co 6'^.t 

Kpii'oi', -ov, TO [in LXX chiefly for ]5ni2r , n|l2?inr;] a lily : Mt 628, 

Lk 1227.t 

Kplvm, [in LXX chiefly for DBirr , also for ]^1 , nn , etc. ;] 1. to 

17 



258 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

separate, select, choose (cl. ; in LXX : ii Mac 13^^). 2. to approve, 
esteem: Eo 14^. 3. to be of opinion, judge, think : Lk 7*^, i Co 11^*; 
seq. TovTo oTL, II Co 51* ; c. ace. et inf., Ac IS^^; c. ace. et pred., 
Ac 13'^^ 26^. 4. to decide, determine, decree : c. ace, Ac 16*, Eo 14^^, 
I Co V, II Co 21; c. inf. (Field, Notes, 167), Ac 20i« 2525, i Co 22 5^, 
Tit 312 (cf. I Mae 11^3, Wi 8^, al.) ; c. ace. et inf., Ac 2125 271. 5. to 
judge, adjtidge, pronounce judgment : absol., Jo 8^^' 2^ ; seq. Kara, c. 
ace, Jo 72* 815; ^p^Vi>' K., Jo 72*; T. hUaiov, Lk 1257 (Deiss., LAE, 
118) ; in forensic sense, Jo im, Ac 23^, al. ; pass., Eo 3Mlxx). of God's 
judgment, Jo 53o S^o, Eo 21^ 3^, 11 Ti 41, i Pe 45, al. 6. = Kara/cptVo), 
to condemn (cl.) : Ac 132^ ; of God's judgment, Jo 3^8 522 12*^. "s^ Ac 
V, Eo 212, I Co 1132, He 1030 (Lxx)^ ja 5^, Ee I92, al. 7. As in LXX 
(for rsDlZ?), to rule, govern (iv Ki 155, Ps 2io, al.) : Mt 1928, Lk 223o, 
I Co (?3. 8. to bring to trial (cl.) ; mid., to go to laic : c. dat. pers., 
Mt 5*0 ; seq. /xera, c. gen. pers. (of the opponent), eVi, c. gen. (of the 
judge), I Co 61'" (cf. dva-, OLTTO-, avT-airo- (-/tai), 8ta-, iv-, kin-, Kara-, aw-, 
VTTo- (-/Ltai), a-vv-xnro- (-/xai)). 

Syjv. : v.s. SiKao-n^s. 

Kpioris, -cws, T) {<^Kpivw), [in LXX chiefly for laDtjrp, also foi 
^"'l , etc. ;] 1. a separating, selection (Arist., al.). 2. a decision, 

judgment (cl.) : Jo 8^^ i Ti 52*, 11 Pe 2^\ Ju^; k. KpiVciv, Jo 72*; in 
forensic sense, Ac 8^^ (lxx) (y Page, in 1.) ; esp. of the Divine judg- 
ment, Jo 31^ 524.27,29.30 1231 igs, ii_ „ Th 15, He 1027, Ja 213 512^ II Pe 
2\ Ee 1810; pi, Ee 16^ 192; of the last judgment, Mt 10" 1122,21 

1236,41,42^ Lk 101* 1131,32^ He 927, „ Pe 29 37, I Jo 417, Ju«'15; ^ K. 

T^s yeevvr)<;, Mt 2333. 3 ^y meton. (as in LXX for laDtJTD , Is 57, al. ; 
NTT, Da 710), of the standard of judgment, right, justice : Mt 121^' 20 
(LXX, Is 42*3) 2323^ Lk 11*2 . of the tribunal (a local court), Mt 52i.22.t 

Kpio-iros, -ov, 6, Crispus : Ac 18*, i Co l^*.t 

KpiT^pioi', -ov, TO « KptTrjs), [lu LXX I III Kl 7^ (M^CTp), Da LXX 
TH 710, th26 (^iti), Su*9, Ex 21®, Jg 510*;] 1. a means of judging, 

test, criterion. 2. a tribunal : 1 Co 62' *, Ja 2''.t 

KpiTTJs, -ov, 6 (^/cptVco), [in LXX chiefly for MUiS';] a judge : Mt 

525, Lk 121*' 58 182 ; r. dStKtV, Lk 18« ; c. gen. rei (obj.), Ac 18i5, Ja 4ii ; 
(qual.), SiaXoyicr/Atov irovqpSiv , Ja 2* ; of a Eoman procurator, Ac 241'' . 
of God, He 1223, jg, 412; Christ, Ac 10*2, „ Ti 4^, Ja 5^; of those 
whose conduct is made a standard for judging, Mt 1227, Lk lli^ ; in the 
OT sense (Jg 216, r^ 11^ al), of a ruler in Israel, Ac 132o.t 

SYN. : 8iKda-Tr]<i, q.v. 
* KpiTiK(5s, -17, -ov « KpLvw), critical, able to discern or judge : c. 
gen. obj.. He 412, t 

Kpou'u, [in LXX : seq. eVi, Jg I922, Ca 5^ (psi) ;] c. ace, 
T. avXatav, Jth 141* *.j ^q strike, knock : at a door (kotttciv, in Att.), 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 259 

Mt 77.8, Lk 119.10 123«, Ac 12i«, Re 320 ; c. ace, t. evpav, Lk W\ 
Ac 12i3.t 

KpujSu, V.S. KpVTVTili. 

*tKpuiTTr] (WH, R; KpvTTTrj, LT, Tr.; -ov, Rec), -ns, «, a crvp^, 
cellar : Lk 1133.t 

KpuirT<5s, -J/, -oV (/cpvn-To)), [in LXX for DUX , "iriDQ , etc. ;] hidden, 

secret : Mt lO^e, Mk 422, Lk 8^^ 122 . 6 x. ^^5 ^apStas cEv^pcoTro?, i Pe 3* ; 
neut., £v Tc3 K., Mt 6*'«; eV /c., Jo 7*'i» 18'-0; 6 cv k. 'lovSalos, Ro 22^; 
pi., Ta K. T. o-ko'tous, I Co 45 ; T. avdpoiTTOiv, Ro 2^® ; T. KapSias, I Co 1425 ; 
r. aio-;;(w»;s, II Co 42. t 

KpoTTTw, [in LXX for N2n , pt3 , IflD , ]DY , etc, ;] to hide, con- 
ceal : c. ace, Mt 13"^* 25^^ ; seq. eV, ib. 25 (pass., Mt 13^*, Col 3=^) ; pass., 
Mt 51*, He 1123, I T- 525^ Re 2^' ; €Kpvj3r} (on the tense and its forma- 
tion, V. M, Pr., 161 ; Bl, § 19, 3) k. c^A^ev, Jo 8^9 ; seq. ek, Lk I321, 
Re 6^^; a-nro (in cl. more freq. dupl. ace), Re 6^^; pass., Jo 12^^, 
(Bl., §34, 4). Metaph.: Mt 1125 1335^ l^ 1152^ WH, mg., IS^* 19*2, 

Jo 19^8 (of. OLTTO-, ev-, ir€pL-KpvTrT(D)A 

*t KpuoraXXi^u «[ Kpuo-raXXos), to shine like crystal, be crystal-clear : 
Ee 2111 (5^_ x€y.).f 

KpuoraXXos, -ov, 6 {<CKpvo<:Jrost), [in LXX : Jb3829, Ps 147«»(")^ 
Ez 122 (nif?), etc. ;] crystal : Ee 4« 22i.t 

Kpu<|>ai09, -ai'a, -atov (<^ Kpvcfia = Kpv(firj), [in LXX for HHQD , Je 

2324, al. ;] hidden, secret : kv tw k., Mt 6i«.t 

Kpu(|)rj (prop, -ri, Rec. ; later spelling is due to assimilation to 
dat. ; cf. dKrj), adv., [in LXX chiefly for IIID;] secretly, in secret: 
Eph 5i2.t 

KTdofiai, -u)fiai, [in LXX chiefly for nip ;] in pres., impf., fut. 
and aor., to procure for oneself, get, gain, acquire (the pf. and plpf., 
to have acquired, hence to possess, do not occur in NT) : c. ace. rei, 
Mt 109, Lk 1812, Ac 820; ^ ge^, pret., Ac 2228; ,'^ ^ gen. pret., Ac lis; 
T. tjrvxo-'i v/Awv (MM, xvi), Lk 2119 ; t. iavToii cr/ccvos KTaaOai, I Th 4* 
(where if o-. = body, k. must = pf., KeKT-rj/xat; v. MM, xvi ; M, TJi., in 1. ; 
Field, Notes, 72 f. But or. is most freq. taken as = wife ; v. Thayer, 
8.V. ; Lft., Notes, 53 ff. ; ICC, in l.).t 

KTrip-a, -Tos, TO (<^ KTao/xai), [in LXX for D^J , etc. ;] a possession, 

property : Mt I922, Mk IO22, Ac 2« 5\f 

K-n\voi, -0U9, TO {■<^KTa.op.ai, hence primarily a possession), [in 
LXX chiefly for npn^ , Ge 12^, al., also for njpa , N^S , etc. ;] a beast, 

(in late Gk, esp.) a beast of burden : Lk 10^* ; pi. (as chiefly in cl.), 
Ac 232*, Re 1813 ; of quadrupeds, as opp. to fishes and birds (cf . Ge, I.e.), 
I Co 1539.t 
**t KTiiTCjp, -opo^, o (KTaofxai), [in Sm, : Jl in *;] a possessor : Ac 43*. t 
KTitw, [in LXX chiefly for N-Q, Ps 50 (51)1", al; also for 
rap, Ge 1419, Pr 822; -j^,^ jg 22" 46ii; Wi 223, gi l^.s (and freq.), 



260 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

I Es 4^^, al. ;] 1. in cl., to people or found a region or city (i Bs, I.e.). 
2. In LXX and NT, of God, to create : Mk 13i», i Co ll^, Col li« 3i», 
Eph 3«, I Ti 4^ Ee 4" 10«; o KTiVas, Mt 19* (WH, E, mg.), Eo P^; 
of the divine operation on the soul, Eph 2^"> ^^ 4^* (cf, Ps., i.c.).t 

KTiVts, -€(05, i] {<KTiCio), [in LXX: Ps 103 (104)'';'' (j;?!?) , Pr 
V^ A (]in) , To 85, Wi 2«, Si IG^^, m Mac 22, al. ;] 1. a founding, 
settling, foundation (cl.). 2. In LXX and NT, (a) i/ie aci of creating, 
creation: Mk 10« (Swete, in 1.), 131^, Eo l^o, ii Pe 3*; (6) that which 
has been created, creation : Eo 1^^ 8^^, He 4^2 ; Kaivrj k., ii Co 5"', 
Ga G^* ; Trdarj dvdpwiru'r) k. (Hort., in 1.), I Pe 2^^ ; collectively, of the 
sum of created things (Wi 196, jth 161*), Mk ISfi^], Col V^>^\ He 9^^, 
Ee 3^* ; of the irrational creation, Eo 8^^'^^A 

** KTiafiia, -Tos, TO « KTi^ui), [in LXX : Wi 9^ 13^ I411, Si 362o d?), 
38^*, III Mac 5^^*;] 1. (cl.) a colony. 2. a created thing, creature: 
I Ti 4*, Ja 1^8, Ee 51^, Q^.f 

KTiaTTis, -ov, 6 {<:ktl(u>), [in LXX : 11 Ki 22^2 (Heb., al.), Jth 912, 
Si 24^, II, IV Mac 5*;] 1. (cl.) a founder. 2. a creator: of God, 
I Pe 4i9.t 

Ku|3€ia, V.S. Kv^ia. 

Ku^^pfTjais, -ews, 17 (<^ Kv/iepvaw, Lat. guhemare, to guide), [in 
LXX: Pr 1^ ll^* 24« (nib3.ni?)*;] 1. steering, pilotage (Plat.). 
2. Metaph., government : pi., i Co 1228.t 

KU^€pyr\Ti]<s, -ov, 6 (v.S. Kvfi€pvr](rL<;), [in LXX for b^jh , Ez278'27|28^ 

Pr 232^ IV Mac 7^*;] 1. a steersman, pilot: Ac 27^^, Ee IS^^. 2. 
Metaph., a g^iide, governor (Eur., Plat.).t 

* Ku^ia (Att. -€(a, and so Eec), -as, 17 (<; kv/3o?, a cube, a die), dice- 
playing ; metaph., trickery, sleight: Eph 4^*.+ 

KoicXciJo) «kvkXos), [in LXX: iv Ki 32^ B (nSD)*;] 1. to make 
a circle, go round. 2. to encircle, surround: c. ace. pers., Jo IO2* 
(Tr., WH, mg.) ; c. ace. rei, Ee 209.t 

KUKX6961', adv., «Ku/<Xos), [in LXX chiefly for i'ln^D, ^''Sp;] 
from all sides, round about : Ee 4^' *> ^.t 

kokXos, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for Zl^2p;] a ring, circle. Dat., 
KVKkoi, as adverb., round about, around : Mk 3^* 6"' ^e, Lk 9^2^ ^q 1519 . 
c. gen., Ee 4« 5^^ 7^\f 

kukX6<d, -w (<^ kvkXos), [in LXX chiefly for 23D ;] 1. to move in a 
circle, revolve. 2. to surrottnd, encircle : c. ace. pers., Jo IO2* (WH, 
txt., cf. -€va)), Ac 1420 ; pass., Lk 2120, He ll^o (cf. 7r£pt-»cvKAo(o).t 

**tKuXiCTfAa, -TOS, to' {<^kvXlo)), [in Sm. : Ez 10^**;] 1. a roll. 
2. = kdAio-/x,o's (q-v.), a rolling, wallowing (or, as KvXiarpa, Xen., Eq., 
V. 3, a rolling-place) : 11 Pe 222 (Eec.).t 

**t KuXiafios, -ov, 6 (^KuXiw), [in Th. : Pr 2^8 *jj = d^ kuXio-is, a 
rolling, wallowing : 11 Pe 222 (cf. KvXio-/na).t 

icoXiu, late form of kv\lv8w, [in LXX: Jos 10^8, i Ki 1433, ^1. 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 261 

(bbz), IV Ki 933 (taaiaf), al.;] to roll, roll along. Pass., to be rolled; 
of persons (in Horn, as sign of grief), to roll or wallow : Mk 92'^.t 

* KuX\6s, -r?, -ov, 1. crooked, crippled : Mt 153o» ^i (WH, txt. om.) ; 
2. maimed : Mt 188, Mk 9*3.t 

KOfia, -Tos, TO « Kuw, ^0 Bc preguaut, to swell), [in LXX chiefly 
for bs ;] a wave : pL, Mt 82* I42*, Mk 437 . ^. ^oAio-oT/s, fig., Ju i^.t 

Syn. : KkvSoiv, q.v. 

Ku'/iPoXoK, -ov, TO (•< Kv fifty], tt cw^), [in LXX chiefly for n^5fO j] 
a cymbal : i Co 13^t 

Ku>iKo^, -ov, TO, [in LXX: Is 2825.27 (pg)*;] cummin: Mt 2323.t 

* KUfdpiok', -ov, TO (in Att. also KwiSiov, dim. of kvwv), a little dog : 
Mt 1526' 27^ Mk 727.28.t 

Kuirpios, -a, -ov, of Cyprus, Cyprian : Ac 4^* II20 21^''.t 

Ku'irpos, -ov, ^, Cyprus : Ac IV^ 13* 15^^ 21^ 27*.t 

Kuirrw, [in LXX chiefly for *np ;] to bow the head, stoop down : 

Mk 1''^; seq. koltu), Jo 8'^'^! (cf. dva-, irapa-, a-vv-KVTTTiJij.f 

KupTjKaios, -a, -ov (•< Ku/st^vt;), o/ Gyrene, a Cyrencean : Mt 27^2, 

Mk 1521, Lk 232«, Ac 6^ Ipo 13i.t 

Kupiinfj, -775, 17, Cyrene, a city in Libya : Ac 2^°.t 

Kuprivtos (prop. -iVios, V. BL, 13 ; -Ivos L, -elvos, Tr., WH, mg.), 

-ov, 6, Quirinus, prop. Quirinius : Lk 22. t 

Kupia (Kvpia, T, WH, mg.), -as, 17, [in LXX chiefly for ni^ ;] 

a lady : 11 Jo ^> ^ (on the interpretation, v. ICC, 167 ff.).+ 

**t KupiaKos, -»?> -ov (<^ Kvpios), [in LXX : k. <l>(i)vrj (^vpiaK^ (f)., R), 
II Mac 1536 A*;] 1. as freq. in Inscr. (LS, s.v.; Deiss., BS, 217 f.), 0/ 
the lord or master, imperial. 2. of the Lord (i.e. Christ) : Scl-n-vov, 
I Co 1120; ^^^pa^ Ee l^". (Cf. Adym k., Papias, Bus., HE, iu, 39, 1; 
ypa<f)cu K., Clem. Alex., etc; for eccl. usage, cf. Soph., Lex., s.v.)t 

Kupieuu (<^»cvptos), [in LXX chiefly for bCTD;] to be lord or 
master of, to rule (over) : c. gen. obj., Lk 22^^, Eo 14^, 11 Co I2* ; 
absol., I Ti 6^^; metaph., 6 ddvaros, Ro 6^; 17 afiaprta, ib. ^*; 6 vo/xos, 

ib. 7^ (cf. KaTa-KVpL€VO}).f 

Kupios, -a, -ov (also -09, -ov), [in LXX (subst.) chiefly for JTSV , 
also for ]nK , b?3 , etc. ;] having power (/cvpos) or authority ; as subst., 

o K., lord, master; 1. in general : c. gen. rei, Mt 938 208, Mk 129 1335, 
Lk 1933; ^. aaftftdrov, Mt 128, Mk 228, Lk 65; c. gen. pers., Sov\ov, 
etc., Mt 102*, Lk 1421, Ac 16i«, al. ; absol, opp. to ol SoSXoi, Eph 65. », 
al. ; of the Emperor (Deiss., LAE, 161), Ac 252" • q^q\ ,roAAot /cat k. 
TToXKoi, I Co 85 ; of a husband, i Pe 3® ; in voc, as a title of respect to 
masters, teachers, magistrates, etc., Mt 132^ I622 27«3, Mk 728, Lk 5^2, 
Jo 411, Ac 95, al. 2. As a divine title (freq. in tt. ; Deiss., LAE, 353 ff.) ; 
in NT, (a) of God : 6 k., Mt 533, Mk b^\ Lk 1«, Ac 733, He 82, Ja 4^5, 
al.; anarth. (Bl., § 46, 6), Mt 219, Mk I320, Lk ll^ He 721, i Pe 12*, 
al. ; K. T. oupavou KOI T. y^s, Mt 1125 ; t. Kvpuvovrtov, I Ti S^^ ; k. 6 ^cds, 



262 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Mt 4"'!*', al. ; id. seq. 6 TravTOKparwp, Ee 4^; k. <Taf3a(^6, Eo 9^9; (6) 
dyyeXos Kvpiov, Mt l^'* 2^^ Lk l^, al. ; -TTviifia Kvpiov, Lk 4.^^, Ac 8'*» ; 
{b) of the Christ : Mt 21^, Mk ll^, Lk l*^ 20**, al. ; of Jesus after his 
resurrection (Dalman, Words, 330), Ac lO^e, Eo 148, ^ Co V\ Eph 4^, 
al; 6 K. p.ov, Jo 20-8; 5 ^_ 'It/o-oSs, Ac I'^i, i Co ll^s, al.; id. seq. 
Xp'o-Tos, Eph 1'-, al. ; 6 k. rj/xSyv, I Ti l^*. He 7^*, al. ; id. seq. 'Irja-ovs, 

I Th 311, He 132^ al.; Xpio-ro's, Eo I6I8; 'I. X., i Co P, i Th P, al.; 
•I. X. (X. 'I.) 6 K. {vH.S>v), Eo 1*, Col 2«, Eph 3^, al. ; 6 k. ^cat 6 a-wr^p, 

II Pe 32; id. seq. 'I. X., ib. ^^ ; anarth., i Co 722.25, j^ 54^ al.; k. Kvpiwv, 
Ee IQ^** ; c. prep., ciTro (Kara, irpos, criii/, etc.) K., Col 32*, al. 

Sriv^. ." v.s. Seo-ttotj^s. 
*t KupioTTis, -77T0S, 17 (•< Ku'pios), lordship, dominion : Eph l^i, 
II Pe 210, Ju8; pi., Col 116 (cf, Lft^ CoZ.; Mayor, Ju., in 11.; DB, 
i, 616 f.).t 

Kupow, -w (^Kupos, 1. authority. 2. validity), [in LXX for Dip;] 
<o confirm, ratify, make valid : 11 Co 2^; pass., Ga 3^* (cf. Trpo-Kvp6o)).f 

Ku'tov', KUfos, 6, 17 (in NT masc. only), [in LXX for 2^3;] a dog : 

Lk 1621, n Pe 222; metaph., as a word of reproach, Mt 7^ Phi 3^, 
Ee 22i5.t 

KuXoi', -ov, TO, a limb, member of a body, [but in LXX (Le 
2630, Nu 1429,32,33^ j Ki 17*^ Is 6624*) for -i^g.] hence, carcase: 

KwXuoj (■< KoXos), [in LXX for N^S , jrjD , etc. ;] to hinder, re 
strain, forbid, withhold: c. ace. et inf., Mt 19i*, Lk232, Ac S^e 16« 
2423, I Th 216, He 723; i^f. om., Mk Q^s.^a iQi*, Lk 9*^.50 1152 igie 
Ac 111'^, Eo 113, III Jo 10 J ace. om., i Ti 4^; c. ace. pers. et gen. rei 
Ac 27*3 ; c. ace. rei, i Co 1439, „ pe 216 ; id. seq. toC /at?, Ac 10*^ ; id, 
seq. dTT^ (like Heb. p N^3 , Ge 23^, al.), Lk 62^ (cf. Sia-KwXvi^).f 

Ko5|i.ti, -rj<;, 7], [in LXX for ns , lyn , TV , etc. ;] a village or 

country town, prop, as opp. to a walled city : Mt 141^, Mk 6", al. ; 
TToXcis »cai K., Mt 93s, al. ; with the name added, Br^dXdp., Jo 7*2; 
Br]6avia, ib. Ill . TffiiYi the name of the district, ras k. Kaicrapias, Mk 
827; :$afjiapuTwv, Lk 9^2, Ac 825. 

*t Kw^cJivoXis, -ews, 17, a country totvn : Mk 13^ (v. Swete, in l.).t 
** KwfAos, -ov, 6, [in LXX : Wi 1423, n ]y[ac 6* * ;] a revel, carousal : 
Eo 1313, Ga 521, I Pe 43.t 

SVN. : v.s. KpaLirdXr]. 
* Kc5i'w«|/, -wTTos, 6, a gnat : Mt 232*.t 

Kws, gen. Kw, ^, Cos, an island in the ^gean Sea : ace. Kw, Ac 
211 (Kwv, Eec.).t 

Kwcrdji, 6, Cosam : Lk 328.t 

K(o<|>6s, -77, -ov (<]Kd7rTw), [in LXX chiefly (Ex 411, al.) for Q^X; 
for iar")n, Hb 218;] liiuyit, dull. Metaph., of the senses, esp. {a) of 
speech, dumb : Mt 932. 33 i<^t2 1530, 31^ l^ I22 Hi* ; (6) of hearing, dea/; 

Mt IP, Mk 732.3T 925^ Lk 722,t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 263 



A, X, Xdfi^Sa, TO, indecl., lambda, I, the eleventh letter. As a 
numeral, A' = 30 ; \= 30,000. 

\ayxdvu,, [in LXX : I Ki 14*7 (^^i,^ y, Th., Gr., 38), Wi 8^^, 
III Mac 6^*;] 1. to obtain by lot, to obtain (in cl., c. gen.) : c. inf. art. 
(BL, § 36, 3; 71, 3), Lk l^; c. ace. rei, Ac l^^, n Pe 1\ 2. to draw 
lots : seq. irepi, Jo 19^*.t 

Ad^apos, -ov, 6, colloquial abbreviation of 'EXea^dp (-a^apos), q.v.), 
Lazarus ; 1. of Bethany : Jo 11^ ^- 12i' 2, 9, 10, 17^ 2. The beggar in the 
parable: Lk 162o.23-25_t 

XtiOpa (Att. ; in Horn., -prQ, Eec. -pa), adv., [in LXX chiefly for 
-1^53;] secretly: Mt 1^9 T, Mk 5^3 (WH, mg.), Jo ll^s, Ac 1637.t 

XotXavJ/, -a7ro5, ^, [in LXX : Jb 2118 2720 X (n&ID) 381, Je 32 (25)32 
(n^yp, lyo), Wi 5"»23, Si 48^' 12*;] a hurricane, whirlwind: Mk 
427, Lk 823, „ Pe 2n.t 

Syn. : OvfXXa, q.v., and cf. avc/Aos. 

XaK^u, Dor. for XrjKio} = Xoo-kw, q.v. 
*XoKTi^a» «Xa|, with the foot), to kick: Ac 26i*.t 

XaXc'u, -w, [in LXX chiefly for im pi., also for "lax , etc. ;] 1. to 
utter : of inanimate things, Ee 4^ 10* ; metaph.. He 11* 122*. 2. to 
talk, speak, say: absol., Mt 933 12*6, Mk 535, lj^ 8*9; seq. is, i Co 
1311, Ee 1311 ; €15, 1 Co 14^; iK, Mt 123*; c. ace. rei, Mt lO^*, Mk Ipa, 
Jo 830, al. ; c. dat. pers., Mt 12*", Lk 246, jjq 7^, al. ; c. ace. rei et dat. 
pars., Mt 918, Jo 10^, al. ; e. prep., Trpo's, fxerd, wepi, Mk 6^0, Lk l^' 
233, al.; eV, €^, dTTo', Mt 133, Jo 12*^ 14io, al.; X. t. Xoyov, Mk 832, al.; 
seq. orat. dir. (not cl.), Mk 143i, He 5^ ll'^; Hebraistically (Dalman, 
Words, 25 f.), cXaXr^o-e Xe'ycov, Mt 1427, Jq 312, Ac 826, al. 

SVN. : V.S. Xcyco. 

XaXia, -a?, r], [in LXX chiefly for 1^1, HllS'T;] 1. loquacity. 
2. talk, speech, conversation : Mt 26^3 (cf. Ca 43), Jo 4*2 8*3.t 

Xafid (Heb. nij^ , v.l. Xf/wi = Aram. ND^), why : Mt 27*6 (WH, 
mg., Xc/ota TTr., WH, txt., Xc/xd L), Mk 153* q^^^^ lt^ Xaixp.a, Eec.).t 

XajA^dvu, [in LXX chiefly for npb , also for iimz , ID^, 7nx, 
etc.;] 1. to take, lay hold of: absol., Mt 2626, Mk 1422; c. ace. rei, Mt 
5*0 2652, al. mult.; c. ace. pers., Mt 2135, m^ 123, ^1.; pleonastic 
Xa^civ (M, Pr., 230; Bl., §74, 2), Mt 133i 14i9, al.; so also indie, 
Mk 727, Jo 19i» *o, Ee 8^, al. ; metaph., c. ace. rei, dcfiopfirjv, Eo 7^' 11 ; 
vTToSeiy/Aa, Ja 5^^ ; id. c. ace. pers., ^d/3o9, Lk 7^6 ; Trvevfia, Lk 939 . 
ir€ipao-/xds, I Co 10" ; aoristic pf. (M, Pr., 145, 238 ; BL, § 59, 4), Ee 5^ 
8^, al. 2. to receive : absol., opp. to atreiv, Mt 7^, al. ; StSdvai, Mt 10^, 
Ac 2035; c. ace. rei, Mt 276, Mk 103o, al. mult.; c. ace. pers., Jo 621 
1320 1927, n Joio; pamcrfiaaiv (a vulgarism; Bl., §38, 3), Mk 1465; 
metaph., t. Xoyov, Mt 132°, Mk 4^6; T. pxLpTvpiav, Jo S^^ ; T. prjixara, 



264 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Jo 12*8; TrpoaoiTTov (Heb. D"*:?) Sr^y, Dalman, Words, 30), Lk 202^, 

Ga 2« ; ^0)^;^ alwvtov (Dalman, oj). cit., 124 f.), Mk lO^o (cf. dm-, olvtl-, 
(Tvv-avTi- (-/xat), d-rro-, iiri.-, Kara-, jutcra-, irapa-, avv-Trapa-, irpo', Trpocr-, 
crvv-, avv-irepi-, VTro-Xap.Pa.vui). 

Adfxex, 6, indecl. (Heb. Tjo^), Lantech (Ge 52^) : Lk S^o.t 

Xap,fia, V.S. \ap.d. 

Xafiirds, -d8os, 17 {<^Xdp.-iro)), [in LXX for TD^ ;] a torch (freq. 

fed, like a lamp, with oil) : Mt 251^-, Jo IS^, Ac 208, Re 4^ g^^.t 

SvN. : kyxvos, lamp, q.v. ; ^aids, torch or lantern; cf. Euther- 
ford's NPhr., 131 f.; Tr., Syn., §xlvi; DCG, s.v. lamp; DB, iii, 
43 f. 

**Xa^nrp6s, -a, -ov «Ad/x7r(o), [in LXX: To 1S^\ Wi 612 1720^ Si 
2922 331^ (3025) 34 (31)23^ Ep. Je«o*;] bright, brilliant: Trora/zd?, Ee 
22^ (EV, clear) ; da-Trjp, ib. ^^ ; of clothing, brilliant, splendid : Lk 23^^ 
Ac 1030, Ja 22. 3, Ee 15« 18^* 198.t 

XafiirpoTT)?, -7]To<;, rj, [in LXX : Ps 109 (110)^ (TTTl), al. ;] bright- 
ness, brilliancy : t. tjXlov, Ac 26^^ t 

* Xafiirpois, adv., splendidly : of sumptuous fare (as freq. ; cf. 
iSecrpxiTa XapLirpd, Si 2922), ^jj IglQf 

X(£^nru, [in LXX for nOJ , etc.;] to shine : Mt 5i5.i6 172, Lk 172*, 
Ac 12^", II Co 4« (cf. Ik-, 7r«pt-Xa/[X7ru)).t 

\av6dvb), [in LXX for obiT ni., etc.;] to escape notice, be hidden 
(from): Mk 72^ Lk S*^. g ace. pers., Ac 2626, n Pe S^'^; as in 
common cl. idiom, seq. ptcp., tXaOov ^evia-avre^, entertained unawares, 
He 132 (cf. CK-, i7n-Xavedpio).f 

tXalcuTos, -rj, dv {<^ Xaievta ; <^Xd^, a stone, $eo), to scrape), [in 
LXX: De 4*9 (n3ps); in Aq. : Nu 2120; Th. : Jg T^*;] hewn (in 
stone) ; Lk 23^^ (elsewhere kolvtj writers use XaTop-ryro^y iv Ki 12^2^ ^1. ; 

cf. Xarop.iiii).'^ 

AaoSiKcia, V.S. AaoStxta. 

AaoSiK€us, -£ws, 6, a Laodicean : Col 4^^.+ 

AaoSiKia (Eec. -£ia), -a?, t], Laodicea, a city on the Lycus in 
Phrygia : Col T- 4i3. is, le^ Re 1^ 3i*.t 

Xaos, -ov, o, [in LXX very freq. for D? , Ge 14^6, al. ; occasionally 

for niib (Ge 2523, al.), etc. ;] a word rarely found in Att. prose ; 1. the 

people at large (Hom., al.), esp. of people assembled : Mt 272^, Lk l^i 
315 al. ; pi. (Hom., al., rr. ; v. MM, xvi), Ac 42'^. 2. a people, those of 
the same race and language (Pind., .^sch., al. : in LXX, Ge 26ii, 
Ex 9i«, al.) : joined with yXwaaa, 4>vXri, Wvo<;, Ee 5^ 7^ ll^, al. ; pi, 
Lk 231, jio 1511 . egp as almost always in LXX, of Israel, Mt 423, j^j^ 
1\ Lk 2i«, Jo 1150, He 21^, al.; opp. to t. lOv-q. Ac 2617.23, Eo 15i0; ol 
Trpeo-f^vrepoL [irpCiTOi, etc.) tov X., Mt 2123, LJj \^.\ Ac 4^, al. ; 6 X. p.ov 
(avTQv, T. deov), Mt 2^, Lk 1^^ He 1125, al.; of the people disting. from 
the rulers and priests (i Es lio, Jth 8^, al.), Mt 26*, Lk 201*, He 5^, 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 265 

al.; of Christians, as the people of God, Ac IS^*, Eo Q^s.ss^ He 4^; 
TrepiovVios, Tit 2^* ; cis 7rcpi7roij;c7-iv, I Pe 2^(^^^). 
Srif. : v.s. Svy/ios. 

Upvyt -yyos, 6, [in LXX chiefly for !jri, Jb S^o, al.; Ps 5» 

(]i1|) ;] the larynx, throat : metaph., of speech (cf. Si 6^), Eo 313(Lxx) f 

Aao-^a (Eec. -aia), -as, r), Lasea, a city of Crete, otherwise un- 
known : Ac 27^.t 

*Xd<rKw, 1. (in cl., poet.) to clang, crash, crack; in late prose, to 
crack or btirst noisily : Ac 1^^ {iXaK-rjcrev, perh., however, from XaK£w, 
q.v. ; Bl., in 1.). 2. (in cl., prose) to scream, shout.\ 

tXoTOfjieu, -w (<;AaTd/Aos, a stonecutter, iv Ki 12^2^ ^j • .<;;Aas, 
T€>a); cf. Aa|£urds), [in LXX: i Ch 22^, al. (nsn); Ex 2133, Nu 2II8 
(ma) ;] to hew, hetv out stones : Mt 27«^ Mk 15*«.t 

Xarpcia, -as, 17 (<^ Aarpero), q.v.), [in LXX (always of divine 
service): Ex 1225.26 135^ jog 2227, i Ch 28^"- (nih^), i Mac 1« 2^^>^\ 

III Mac 41**;] 1. hired service, service. 2. (in cl. also) divine service, 
worship : Jo 162, Rq 94 121, He Q^'^.t 

Xarpeuo* (<^AaTpis, a hired servant), [in LXX (always, as Xarpeta, 
of the service of God or of heathen divinities) chiefly for ^23f, Ex 3^2^ 
al. ; in Da LXX th (3^2^ ^1.) for nbp ;] 1. to work for hire. 2. to 

serve ; in cl., also of divine service, to serve, worship, and so always in 
NT: c. dat. pers., t. 6iS>, Mt 410, Lk 48 C^^), Ac V 24^4 2723, He 91*, 
Ee 71* 223; of idol worship (cf. Ex 20^ Ez 2032), Ac 7*2, Eo 125; 

T. ^€u> A. £V T. irv€u/xaTi /;iou, Eo 1^ ; id. €V KaOapS. cruj/ctST/aci, II Ti 13 ; 
/act' evAayScias k. Scovs, He 122^; cv octlottjtl k. StKatocrvvT/, Lk 1^* ; 
(without ^€<p) vr](TTtLaL^ K. StTJa-eart., Lk 23^ ; tti £v/xaTi ^eov. Phi 33 ; absol., 
Ac 26'' ; 6 Xarpevwy, the tvorshipper, He 9® 102 . Qf ministerial service, 
0. dat. rei, He 8^ IS^^.f 

SYN. : KcLTovpytw, q.v. 

Xdxai'oi', -ou, TO (AaxatVw, to dig), [in LXX : Ge 93, iii Ki 20 (21)2, 
Ps 36 (37)2, Pr 1517 (p-,^ ^ p-y^)*;] a garden herb, vegetable: Lkll*2; 

usually in pi., Mt 1332, Mk 432, Rq 142.t 

SVN. : poTo-vT], q.v. 

AejSpaios, -ov, 6 (on the derivation, v. Dalman, Words, 50 ; Swete, 
Mk., I.e.), LebbcBUs: Mt 103, Mk 3^8 (WH, mg.; ©aSSalo^, q.v., Eec, 
WH, txt., EV, cf. WH, App., 11, 24. In Lk 6", Ac 1^3, he is called 
^Lfxwv 6 ZrjXwTrj's.)'^ 

*tXeYiwt' (Eec. -eciv), -iovos, rj, (Lat. legio), a legion: Mt 26^3, 
Mk 58' 15, Lk 83o.t 

\4y<a, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for nax ; Ac'yei for DX; , Ge 

22^', al. ;] 1. in Horn., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. 2. In 
Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare : absol., Ac 13^5 241" . 
seq. orat. dir., Mt 93*, Mk 3ii, Jo 129, al. ; seq. 5ti recit., Mk 321, Lk I2*, 
Jo 61*, al.; ace. at. inf., Lk lli^, Jo 122^, al.; after another verb 



266 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

of speaking, Trporrf^wi'civ K. Xeyeiv, Mt 11^'^, al. ; oLTreKpiOrj (eXdXr)(Tev) 

Xeycov {Kal Ae'yci ; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mt 259, Mk 3^3 T^s, Lk 24«. \ 
al. ; of unspokrn thought, X, iv iavrw, Mt 3^, Lk 3^, al. ; of writing, 
II Co 8^, Phi 4^\ al. ; Xeya rj ypa(f>rj, Eo 4^, Ja 2^3, al. ; c. ace. rei, 
Lk 8^ 9^3, Jo 5^*, al. ; a-u Aeyets (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 
359, 369 f.), Mt 27^\ Mk 15^, Lk 23^, Jo IS^^; c. dat. pers., seq. orat. 
dir., Mt 8-^ Mk 2^\ al. mult. ; id. seq. on, Mt 3^ al. ; c. prep., Trpos, 
fierd, Trepi. etc., Mk 4*1, Jo 1156, He 95. al.; to mean (cl.), Mk W\ 
Jo 6"i, I Co 1029, al.; to call, name, Mk lO^S; pass., Mt 9^, Mk 15^ al 

(cf. dm-, 8;a- (-/xat), Trpo-, avX-Xeyw). 

Si'.v. ; A.aA.€w, which refers to the utterance, as Xeyw to the 
meaning of what is said, its coiTespondence with thought (Tr., Syn., 
Ixxvi ; Thayer, s.v. AoAe'to). 

XeifAfia (WH, Xifx/Jia, V. their .^^^^'-j 154), -ros, to (<^ XetTito), [in 
LXX: IV Ki 19* A (nn^s'Ur) * ;] a remnant: Eo 11^+ 

Xelos, -eta, -eZoi/, [in LXX : Ge 2711, I Ki 17*o E (pbu , p^bn) ', 
680s X., Is 40* A (nJTf^a); Pr 22« 12i3 2623*;] smooth: opp. to rpa^v^, 

Lk 35 (i'^x).t 

Xeiirw, [in LXX: Jb 4^1, Pr 19i(*) (lis), al. ;] 1. trans., to leave, 
leave behind; pass., to be left behind, to lack: seq. prep, (as more 
usual in cl.), cv, Ja 1* ; c. gen. rei, ib ^ 2^^. 2. Intrans., to be gone, to 
be wanting : c. dat. pers., Lk I822, Tit 3^^ j ,-0, XeiTrovra, Tit 1^ (cf . diro-, 
Sia-, £K-, eTTi-, Kara-, iv-Kara-, irtpi-, viro-XeLTrwj.f 

XeiToupyco), -ai (<^X€tTovpyds), [in LXX chiefly for mCT pi., also 
for 12,V , N;a]?, etc.;] 1. in cl., at Athens, to S2ip2}ly public offices at 
one's own cost, render public service to the State, hence, generally, 
2. to serve the State, do a service, serve (of service to the Gods, Diod., 
i, 21) : of the official service of priests and Levites (Ex 293", ]^^ iqq^ 
Si 41*, I Mac 10*2, al. ; cf. Deiss., BS, 140 f.), He lO^i ; of Christians : 
c. dat. pers. seq. iv, Eo 1527 (cf. Si 102^) ; t. Kvpi^, Ac 132.t 

Syn. : XaTpivu) (q.v.), prop., to serve for hire, LXX (as some- 
times in cl.), always of service to the deity on the part of both priests 
and people (Ex 43, De 10^2^ and similarly in NT). Xttrovpyew " is the 
fulfilment of an office : it has a definite representative character, and 
corresponds with a function to be discharged ". It is therefore used of 
serving in an office or ministry : in LXX always of priests and 
Levites, in NT, with its cognates (Eo 13^ 152^, are not really exceptions), 
of services rendered either to God or man by apostles, prophets, 
teachers, and other officers of the church (cf. Tr., Syn., § xxxv; ICG 
onEo P; Westc, He., 232 ff.). 

XetTOupyta, -as, rj (-^XeiTOD/ayew), [in LXX chiefly for Hlhy, Nu 

42*, I Ch 9^3^ al. ;] 1. in cl. (chiefly of Athens), the discharge of a 
public office at one's oivn expense (v. LS, s.v.), hence, 2. a service, 
ministry ; in ir. (Deiss., BS, 140 f .) and in LXX (though here also of 
secular service, iii Ki 1*, al.), of religious service or ministration ; and 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 267 

SO in NT : of priestly ministrations, Lk 1^3^ He 8® Q^^ ; fig., dva-ia koL \. 

rq% ma-T€w^ V^v, Phi 2^^ ; of Christian beneficence, ii Co 9^2, Phi 23o.t 

t XciToupYiK(5s, -rj, -6v, [in LXX for nia^, nittr; epya, Nu 75 ; 

(TToXai, Ex 319(10) 3913(1); o-KcvT^, Nu 412.28, n Ch 24i**;] of or for 
service, ministering : Trvevfiara, He li*.t 

XeiToupyiSs, -ov, o (<^ Aaos, epyov), [in LXX chiefly for n^BTlO , Jos 

11 A, III Ki 105, Ps 102 (103)21, Si 7^\ al. ;] 1. in cl., one who discharges 
a public office at his own expense, then, generally, 2. a public servant, 
a minister, servant : t. dyiwv X., He 82 (cf. Ne 10^^, Si, I.e.) ; 'Irja-ov 
Xpto-Tov, Eo 151" ; pi., T, deov, Eo 13", He I^CLXX) . x.. ifiwv t. xpetas fjLOv, 
Phi 225.t 

SYN. : V.S. SieiKOVos, XciTovpyeo). 

Xc|id, V.S. Xafjid. 
*tX^i'Tioi', -OV, TO (Lat. linteum), a linen cloth, towel : Jo 13*' ^.t 

XcTTi's, -180s, 17 « XcTTw, to peel), [in LXX chiefly for T\\Slp!C0p. ;] a 
tcale : Ac 9i^.t 

X^irpa, -a?, 17 « Xeirpos), [in LXX for n?l^ ;] leprosy : Mt S^, 
Mkl*2, Lk5i2.i3.t 

Xeirpos, -a, -oV « AeTrts), [in LXX for yn^ , yjSO ;] 1- (in cl.) 

scaly, rough. 2. leprous; chiefly as subst., 6 X., a leper : Mt 82 10^ 
115, Mk 1*0, Lk 427 722 1712; of Simon, formerly a leper, Mt 26«, 
Mk 143.t 

*X€irTos, -rf, -6v (XcTTw, to peel), 1. peeled. 2. fine, thin, small, 
light ; hence, in late Gk., as subst. to X., a small coin (one-eighth of 
an as, AV, mite) : Mk 12*2, -Lt 12^9 212.t 

Aeu€i (indecl.) and Aevets (Eec. -vt, -vU), gen. Atvct, ace. -uv, 6 
(Heb. il^), Levi; ]. the son of Jacob: He 1^^'^, Ee T. 2. Son of 

Melchi : Lk 32*. 3. Son of Simeon : Lk 32^. 4. Son of Alphaeus (cf. 
Ma^^atos) : Mk 21* (WH, mg., 'IaKco/3ov), Lk 527. 29.t 

Aeueinis (Eec. Acvitt/s), -ov, 6, [in LXX for ^)b ;] a Levitt : Lk 
1032, Jo 119, Ac 43«.t 

AcociTtKos (Eec. AcvtT-), -TQ, -OV, [lu LXX: Le, tit.*i] Levitical : 
He 7ii.t 

XcoKaiKu, «X€rKo's), [in LXX : Ps 50 (51)^, Is lis (pb hi.), etc.;] 
to whiten, make white : c. ace. rei, Mk 93, Ee 71*.+ 

*t XeuKo-Pu'ao-ii'os, -ov (cf . XcvkoXivt;?, a robe of white flax, C.I., 155, 
17), white linen : Ee 19i* (WH, mg.).t 

XeuK<5s, -q, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for ]1^ ;] 1. bright, brilliant : of 

clothing, Mt I72, Mk 9^ 16^, Lk 92^, Ac li», Ee 3^ 4* Gn 7^' i3 191* (cf. 
Ee 98) ; 0)5 xi<i>v, Mt 283; ^^ x. (sc. IfiaTtots), Jo 20i2, Ee 3*; ^povos, Ee 
2011. 2. white : Mt 536, Ee li* 21^ 4* 62 I41* 19" ; fig., of garments, 
Ee 318; of ripened grain, Jo 43*.+ 



268 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

\iuiv, -ovTos, o, [in LXX chiefly for i")}^ , rT!"ll< , also for TB5 , 

etc. ;J a lion : He ll^^, i Pe 5\ Ee 4^ Q^- ^^ 10^ 132 ; metaph., ii Ti 41^, 
Ee 55.t 

X^Qx], -r?s, r) {<mei^ = XavOdvi^y), [in LXX: Le S^^ (byo), Wi 

16^^ Si 14', al. ;] forgetfulness : A.. XafSelv (on the phrase, v. Mayor, in 
1.) : II Pe l».t 

Xtifid, T, for AayLi<£, q.v., in Mt 27'"'.t 

\T)p,<j/i,9 (Eec. X^i/'is, so in cl.), -cws, 17 (<^ Xafji/Sdvut), [in LXX (A^i/^-) : 
Pr 1529 (16S); A. SiLpi^v, Pr 15^7 (n:no) ; ^- '<al 800-19, Si 41^9 42^*;] re- 

ceiviiig : Sdo-i? /<ai A., Phi 4^5.t 

Xti»'<5s, -oO, y] (in some MSS., LXX and NT, 6), [in LXX chiefly for 
n|T, Nu 1827, al; also for Mm (Ge SO^s."!), n3 (Ne U^\ al.), etc.;] 

a trough or ^Ja^; esp. for the treading of grapes: Mt 21^^, Ee 142*' 
19^^; rr}v A. . . . Tov fjieyav (a solecism perhaps inadvertent), Ee 14^' 

(cf. VTToXrjvtov) .f 

**Xt]pos, -ov, 6, [in LXX: iv Mac 5^"*;] silly talk, nonsense: 
Lk 24ii.t 

Xr](TTris, -ov, 6 (<;Ep. XrjLs = Xeta, booty), [in LXX for Tn^, etc.;] 

a robber, brigand : Mt 21i3 (lxx) 26^5 2738. ", Mk ll^^ 14« 15^^, Lk 

1030, 36 1946 22^2^ Jo IQl, 8 IgiO^ „ Qo 112«.t 

Syn. : KAeTT-n/?, q.v. 
Xt](|/is, V.S. X7J/xvf/i<;. 

Xiav, adv., [in LXX chiefly for ikp , Ge l^i 4^, Je 243, al. ; To 9*, 

II Mac 11\ al. ;] very, exceedingly : Mt 2^^ 4^ 828 2?!*, Mk V^ G^i 
(Eec. X. €K Trepiacroi) 9=* 16^, Lk 238, n Ti 4^5, ii Jo *, iii Jo » (cf. wep- 
Xi'av).t 

Xl^avos, -ov, 6 (rarely 17), (from the Semitic ; cf. the Heb. equiv.), [in 
LXX for npb, Ex 303*, Is 60«; Si 24i5, al.;] 1. in cl., the frankin- 
cense-tree. 2. (Occas. in cl.) frankincense (so Le 2^ ; cf. Xi^avcords) : 
Mt 2^1, Ee 18i3.t 

Xipai/uTds, -oS, 6 «A.t^avos), [in LXX: i Ch 929 (njhV), m Mac 

52*;] 1. in cl. (and LXX), frankincense, the gum of the libanus. 
2. = Late Gk., XiySavwrpis, a censer : Ee 83'^ (the same form appears 
in Inscr. ; MM, xvi).t 

AiP«pTit'os, -ov, 6 (Lat. libertinus), a freedman : -q a-vvaytDyq -q 
Xeyofievr} AcySeprivcDv, Ac 6® (Bl. thinks the original reading was 
Ai/3ucrTivwv, Phil. Gosp., 69 f.).t 

AtPuTj, -r;s, V, Libya : Ac 2^^.f 

XiOdiw « Ai^os), [in LXX (seq. iv At'^ois) : 11 Ki 16«> ^3 (i,pQ pi.) ♦ ;] 
1. to throw stones (Arist., Polyb., al.). 2. = XidofioXeio (LXX, NT), to 
pelt with stones, to stone: c. ace. pers., Jo 8 ^^J iQsi-as ns^ Ac 14^9; 
pass., Ac 526, II Co 1125, He 1137 (v. DB, Art., "Crimes and punish- 
ments," and cf. KaTa-A6^a^o>).t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 269 

XiOiros, -r], -ov (Xidos), [in LXX for p^ ;] of stone : Jo 2®, ii Co 

33, Re 920.t 

tXteo-poX^u, 'S> «A.t^os, /SaUo)), [in LXX for bpD , Q31 , Ex 19i3, 

Le 20^, al. ;] to pelt with stones, to kill by stoning, to stone (cf. Xt^a^w) : 

c. ace. pers., Mt 2135 23^7, Lk IS^*, Ac T^s- 59 14^ ; pass., He 12^'0(Lxx).f 

Xidos, -ov, 6 (and, in Att., of precious stones, 17.), [in LXX for 

75N, Ge 113, al.; x. rt/xios, fori?, Ps 18(19)10 20(21)3, p^ 8i», al.;] a 

stone: Mt 4", al. ; pi., Mt 3^ al. ; at the entrance of a tomb, Mt 
2760,66 282, Mk 154« 163.4, Lk 24^, Jo 1138, 39,41 20^; X. /xvXikos, Lk 
172, cf. Re 1821; of building stones, Mt 21^2 [4«, 24''', Mk 12io I31.2, 
Lk 19** 20^7' 18 215. 6^ Ac 4", i Pe 2^ ; metaph., of Christ, X. d/<poya)vaIo9, 
ckXcktos, tvTifio^, I Pe 2" (i-^^) ; X. ^wv, ib. * ; Trpoa-KOfi/jiaTos, ib. 8, Ro 
933 ; of Christians, X. ^wvtcs, i Pe 25 ; of precious stones, X. ti/xlo<;. Re 
174 1812,16 2111.19; tacTTTi?, Re 43; €v8e8v/xeVoi X. KaOapov, Re 15« (\lvov, 
Rec, R, mg., v. Swete, in 1.) ; metaph., X. rifiLOL, i Co 312 ; of the 
tables of the law, n Co 3^ ; of idols, Ac 1729. 

Xie(5-<rrp&)Tos, -ov « o-Tpwwu/ii), [in LXX: II Ch 73, Es I"', Ca 
31" (npVl, P)S^)*;] paved with stones, esp. of tessallated work (Ca, 

I.e.) ; as subst., t6 X., a tessallated pavement : Jo 19i3 (cf. Tafifiadaj.f 

XiKfidu, -w (<^XiKfi6<i — Xlkvov, a winnowing -fan), [in LXX chiefly 
for n-17 ni., pi., Ru 32, iii Ki 14i5, Is 17i3, Je 38 (31)io, Da 2", al. ;] 
1. in cl., to winnow (so Ru, I.e.). 2. In LXX (11. c., exe. Ru), to 
scatter (as chaff or dust) : Lk 201^ (RV, scatter as dust, Deiss., BS, 
225 f., quotes ex. in tt. which suggests the meaning ruin, destroy ; cf. 
Vg. comminuet, AV, gririd to powder; cf. also Kennedy, Sources, 
126), Mt 21** [WH], R, txt.t 
Xijid, T '7, for Xa/i,a, q.v. 
Xi^riK, -evos, 6, [in LXX: Ps 106 (107)30 (Tina), ib.35, i Es 555, 

I, II, IV Mac 7 * ;] a harbour, haven : Ac 27^' 12 (cf. KaXol Ai/Li€V€s).t 
XifAfjia, V.S. Xci/AjLia. 
\llivr], -77s, 77, [in LXX: Ps 106 (107)35 113 (114)8 (qjj^)^ Ca 

7*'5> (npi3), I Mae 1135, n Mac 121^*;] a lake : of the Sea of Galilee 
(Mt, Mk, V.S. OdXafraa), Lk 52 822-23,33. X. Tevyr)(TapeT (q.v.), Lk 51; 
X. T. TTvpo's, Re 1920 2010. 1*. 15 ; Kaiofievrj TTvpi, Re 218.t 

Xijios, -ov, 6 (so in Att. ; in Dor. 17, and so sometimes in LXX, 
v. Th., Gr., 146; in NT: Lk 15i*, Ac IpS; cf. M, Pr., 60), [in LXX 
chiefly for sri;] hunger, famine : Lk 425 1514,17^ Ac 7^ULS.x) ips^ Rq 

835, Ee 68 188; x. Kal St^o?, n Co 1127; pi., Mt 24^, Mk 13^, Lk 21ii.t 
\ivov (Tr. klvov), -ov, TO, [in LXX : Ex 93i (n^-i^TS), al.;] 1. flax: 

Mt 1220 (LXX). 2. linen : Re 15^ (R, mg., v.s. Xt^os).t 
Aii'os (Rec. Atvos), ov, 6, Linus: 11 Ti 42i.t 
Xnrap<5s, -a, -ov (< XtVos, fat), [in LXX : Jg 329, Ne 935, jg 



270 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

30^^ (])5^)*;] oily, fatty; metaph., of living, rich, dainty : ra X. koX 

T. kafjLTrpd, Re 18^''.t 

*t\iTpa, -as, 7] (cf. Lat. libra), 1. a Sicilian coin = Rom. libra or 
as. 2. In weight, a pound : Jo 12^ IQ^'^.t 

Xii|/, Ai/?os, 6, [in LXX chiefly for 233 . also for ]pT) , n;il?0 , 

etc., Ge 1314, Nu 2io, ii Ch 323o, al. ;] ^/le STF. wind : fikiirovTa Kara X., 
Ac 2712 (v. Page, in 1. ; Deiss., BS, 141).t 

Xoyeia, V.S. Xoyia. 
*tXoYia (prop., -ei'a, V. BS, 142 ff.), -as, 7; {<^\oyev(D, to collect, a 
word found in tt., v. Deiss., BS, I.e.; LAE, 70, 103; MM, xvi), a 
collection: i Co IG^'^.t 

Xoyi^ofiai (<;Xoyos), [in LXX chiefly for SCTn ;] 1. prop., of 
numerical calculation, to count, reckon: c. ace. seq. /xera, Mk 15^8 (LXX) 
(Rec, R, mg.), Lk 22^". 2. Metaph., without reference to numbers, 
by a reckoning of characteristics or reasons ; (a) to reckon, take into 
account : c. ace. rei, i Co 13* ; id. seq. dat. pars., Ro 4^ (lxx), 4, 6, 8 (lxx)^ 

II Co 519, II Ti 4i« ; seq. cts (cf. Heb. ^ nCTHJ ; Bl, § 33, 3), Ac 19^^ Ro 
226 43,5,9-11,22-24 98^ Ga 3MLXX)^ ja 2^3 (lxx). (J) iq consider, calctdate: 
c. ace. rei. Phi 4^ ; seq. otl, Jo 11*", He 11^^ ; tovto, on, 11 Co 10^^ ; e. ace. 
pers., c. inf., Ro 6^^ ; seq. ws, Ro 8^^(^^^); (c) to suppose, judge, deem : 
I Co 13^1 ; ws, I Pe 5^^ j qutws, i Co 4^ ; c. ace. rei, 11 Co 3* ; id. seq. 
eis, II Co 12«; 6ti, Ro 8^^; roiro, on, Ro 2^ 11 Co 10'; c. inf., 11 Co 
11*; ace. et inf., Ro 32^ 14^\ Phi S^^; c. ace. pers. seq. ws, u Co 10^; 
(d) to purpose, decide: c. inf. (Eur., Or., 555), 11 Co 10"' (ef. dva-, 8ta-, 
irapa-, cn;X-Xoyt^oyu.ai).t 

*XoyiK<Ss, -rj, -oV (<^Adyos, reason), reasonable, rational: karpeia, 
Ro 121 . ^^ ^ (i e. spiritual) yaXa (v. Hort, in 1. ; MM, xvi), i Pe 2^ (in 
support of AV, milk of the word, v. ICC, in l.).t 

\6yiov, -OV, TO (dimin. of Xoyos, v. ICC, Bo., 70), [in LXX chiefly 
forn-ipx, -Dps*, Ps 17 (18)30 18 (19)i*, al.; also for ini. Is 28^3, 
al.; (cf. Xoyciov (-lov), for ]C7n , the oracular breastplate of the H.P., 

Ex 281*, al.) ;] an oracle : Ac 7^8, Ro 3^, He 512, i Pe 411 (on the eecl., 
Xoyia T. Kvptov, v. Lft., Essay on Sup. Bel., 172 ff.).t 

*X6yios, -OV «Xdyos), 1. in el., learned (Ac, I.e., R, txt.). 2. In 
late Gk., eloquent : Ac 1824 (v. Page, in 1. ; Field, Notes, 129).t 

Xoyia^ds, -OV, 6 «Xoytto/tat), [in LXX : Ps 32 (33)10-11, p^ 1921^ 
Is 66IS, al. (njtzrna) ;] a reasoning, thought : Ro 2i*, 11 Co 10*.t 

*t XoyoiJiax^w, -w (<iXdyos, jxaxoixai), to strive ivith words : II Ti 2i*.+ 
*t Xoyofiaxia, -as, 7; « Aoyo,^aY£'w), a strife of loords : pi., I Ti 6*.t 

Xoyos, -OV, 6 (^Acyco), [in LXX chiefly for ^^1, also for 
'TpM' . n^p , etc. ;] I. Of that by which the inward thought is ex- 
pressed, Lat. oratio, sermo, vox, verbum. 1. a word, not in the 
grammatical sense of a mere name (cttos, ovofia, prjfjia), but a word as 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 271 

embodying a conception or idea : Mt 8^, Lk V, i Co 14^' ^®, He 12'", 
al. 2. a saying, statement, declaration: Mt 19^2 (T om.), Mk 5'* 
V\ Lk 129, Jo 222 660, Ac 729, al.; c. gen. attrib., Ac 1Z^\ Eo 99, He 
72s, al. ; of the sayings, commands, promises, etc., of teachers, Mt 72* 
101*. Mk 838, Lk 9**, Jo 1424, al.; a. kcvoI, Eph 5«; ^\r,eLvoi, Ee 199; 
TTia-TOL, Ee 22" ; esp. of the precepts, decrees and promises of God, o 
A. T. 6(ov, the word of God : Mk 7^^, Jo lO^s, Eo 139, i Co 1436, Phi 
11*, al.; absol., 6 \., Mt I321.22, Mk 16[20], Lk P, Ac 6*, He 412, al. 
3. speech, discourse: Ac 14^2, n Co lOi", Ja 32; opp. to iirKTrokr], 
II Th 215 . listing, from <7o<f>La, i Co 2' ; avaa~rpo<f>-q, i Ti 412 ; 8wa/iis, 
I Co 419, I Th 1^; epyov, Eo IS'^; ouSevos A. Ti/iiov {not worthy of 
mention), Ac 202* ; of the faculty of speech, Lk 24^9, n Co 11" ; of the 
style of speech, Mt 5^'', i Co 1^ ; of instruction, Col 4^, i Pe 3' ; c. gen. 
pers., Jo 524 8*2, Ac 2*1, al.; 6 A., o £>os, Jo S^i; c. gen. obj. (t.) 
aX-q6ua<;, II Co 6'', Col 1*, Ja 1^^ ; T. KaraAAay^s, n Co 5^9 ; t. aravpov, 
I Co 118; of naere talk, i Co 4i9.2o^ Col 223, i Jo 318; of the talk which 
one occasions, hence, repute : Col 223. 4^ subject-matter, hence, 
teaching, doctrine : Ac 181^, 11 Ti 2i^, al. ; esp. of Christian doctrine : 
Mt 1320-23, Mk 4i*-2o 832, Lk 12, Ac 8*, Ga 6«, i Th 1«, al. ; c. gen. pers., 
T. eeov, Lk 51, Jo 17«, Ac 429, I Co 1436, i Jo lio, Ee 69, al. ; t. KvpCov, 
Ac 825, I Th 18, al. ; t. X/dio-toG, Col 3^6, Ee 38; c. gen. appos., Ac 15^; 
c. gen. attrib., He 5i3. 5. a story, tale, narrative : Mt 281^, Jo 2123, 
Ac 11 1122 ; seq. irepi, Lk 51^. 6. That which is spoken of (Plat., al. ; 
V. Kennedy, Sources, 124), matter, affair, thing: Mt 212*, j^jj in 
1129, Lk 203, Ac 821 . Qf a matter in dispute, as a case or suit at law, 
Ac 1938; pi. (i Mac 733, al), Lk 1*. II. Of the inward thought itself, 
Lat. ratio. 1. reason, (a) of the mental faculty (Hdt., Plat., al.) : 
Kara Xoyov, Ac 181* . Q^^ ^ reason, caxise : rivi Ao'yw, Ac 10^9 ; Trapcxros 
Xo'yov TTopvcta?, Mt 532 jga, WH, mg., E, mg. 2. account, (a) regard : 
Ac 202*, Eec. ; (6) reckoning : Phi 41^. i7 ; o-vvai>«v (q.v.) X., Mt 1823 
2519 ; in forensic sense, Eo I412, He 13i^ i Pe 4^ ; c. gen. rei, Lk 162 . 
seq. TTcpt, Mt 1236, Ac 19*0, i Pe 31^. 3. proportion, analogy : Phi 2i6 
(Field, Notes, 193 f.). III. 5 A., the Divine Word or Logos : Jo li' 1* ; 
T. ^w^s. I Jo 11; T. $€ov, Ee 19i3 (v. Westc, Swete, CGT, in 11.; refif. 
in Artt., Logos, DB, DCG). 

X<5yxti, -q's, y, [in LXX for nOT , etc. ;] 1. a spear-head. 2. a 

lance, spear: Mt 27*9 (|[WH]|, E, mg.), Jo 193*.t 

XoiSop^u, -u) (<^ Xot8opo9), [in LXX chiefly for S"""!;] to abuse, 

revile : c. ace. pers., Jo 928, j^q 23* ; pass., i Co 412, i Pe 223 (^i ^^,^|^_ 
XotSopea)).t 

XoiSopia, -as, 17 (<[XoiSop€a)), [in LXX chiefly for 3''T, n^"'ip;] 
abuse, railing : i Ti 5'*, i Pe 39.t 

Xo{8opos, -ov, [in LXX: Pr 252* 2621 27^^ (]^Tp), Si 238*;] 
railing, abusive ; as subst., o X., a railer : i Co 511 Bio.t 

Xoi|i<Js, -ov, 6, [in LXX for Y^b , r^iy , b^b^ , etc. ;] pestilence : 



272 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

pi., Lk 2111 . metaph. (as in cl. ; LXX : Ps l^, Pr 212*, i Mac 15^\ 
al.), of persons, a pest : Ac 24^ (also as adj., av8pt<; Xoi/xoi, i Mac lO'i, 
al.).t 

Xoi-iros, -i;, -o'v (•< XciVw), [in LXX chiefly for inn , also for 

^t<V , 6tc. ;] the remaining, the rest, 1. pi., ol X. : c. subst., Mt 25ii, 

Ac 237, Ro 113, al. ; absol., Mt 22«, Mk IGfi^J, Lk 24io, al. ; ol A., ot 
(Bl., § 47, 8), Ac 289, i Th 4i3, Re 2^^; ol \. t. dv^pwjrov (LS, s.v., ad. 
init.), Re 9^0; ra X., Mk 4i9, Re 3^, al. 2. Neut. sing. (ace. ref.), 
adverbially, to \. ; (a) for the future, henceforth : Mk 14*i, i Co 7^' 
(Lft., Notes, 232 f.). He IQi^ ; anarth. (Deiss., LAE, 176i6, I885, 20), 
Ac 272^ II Ti 48 ; ToO A. (sc. xpovov ; LS, s.v. ; M, Pr., 73 ; Bl., § 36, 13), 
Ga 61'^, Eph 61** ; (6) besides, moreover, for the rest : Phi 31 4^ ; 
anarth., i Co li« 42, i Th 41 (M, Th., in 1. ; Lft., Notes, 51). 

AouKas, -a, 6 (prob. an abbreviation of AovKavo's; v. Lft., Col., 
240; ICC, Lk., xviii; Bl., §29; ace. to Ramsay, Exp., Dec, 1912, pp. 
502 ff., a by-form of Aovkios, from Lat. Lucius), Luke : Lk, tit., 
C0I41*, iiTi4ii, Phm24.t 

AouKios, -ov, 6 (Lat. Lucius), Lucius : Ac 13i, Ro IG^i.t 
XouTp6i', -od, t6 «Xov'w), [in LXX: Ca 42, G^.W {n^n% Si 

31 (34)25 * ;] a washing, bath : t. vSaro?, Eph 52^ ; t. iroXiyycvco-tas, 

Tit 35 (v. AR, Eph., l.c.).t 

Xouw, [in LXX chiefly for ]^m (freq. of ceremonial washing; 

cf. Deiss., BS, 226 f .) ;] to bathe, wash the body : c. ace. pers., Ac 9^7 

(of a dead body) ; id. seq. dTro' (Deiss., BS, I.e.), Ac 16^3 ; pass. ptcp. 

pf., Jo I3K', He 1022 . mid., to wash oneself (Mayor, in 1. ; M. Pr., 

155 f., 238 f.), II Pe 222 ; metaph.. Re l^ Rec, R, mg. (cf. d7ro-Xovw).t 
Syn. : viTTTw, used of parts of the body — hands, feet, face ; 

ttXvvu), of things, as garments, etc. (v. Le 15ii ; cf. Tr., Syn., § xlv). 

At588a, -as (Ac 93^, -r?s Rec), 7; and Ai;'S8a, -wv, TO. (ib.^2,35. 

-av, Rec), (Heb. ib), Lydda (modern Ludd) : Ac, 11. e.t 

AuSia, -as, ?7, Lydia, a woman of Thyatira : Ac I61*' *^.f 

huKaovla, -as, 7;, Lycaonia, a region in Asia Minor : Ac 14® .t 

AuKaok'iCTTi, adv., in Lycaonian (speech) : Ac 14ii.t 

AuKia, -as, 77, Lycia, a region of Asia Minor : Ac 27^.t 

Xu'kos, -ov, 6, [in LXX for nXT ;] a wolf: Mt 10i«, Lk ID', 

Jo 1012; fig. (as Ez 222^, Ze 3^, Je 5®, al.), Mt 71*, Ac 2029.t 

XufiaiKoixai {<^\vnT], outrage), [in LXX chiefly for T\nt2i pi., hi., 
also for D013, etc.;] 1. to outrage, maltreat: c ace, Ac 8'. 2. to 

corrupt, defile (Ez 1625, p^ 288, jy Mac IS^, al.).+ 

XuWd), -w {<:^XvTrr]), [in LXX for mn, etc;] to distress, grieve, 
ca^ise pain or grief: c ace pers., 11 Co 22»5 78; pass., Mt 14^ 17^^ 
1831 1922 2622, Mk 1022 1419, Jo 1620 2117, Ro 141^, n Co 2*, i Th 41^, 

I Pe 1^ ; X. KoX a^rjfjLoveiv, Mt 2637 . opp tQ ^^aiptiv, II Co 61" ; Kara ^eoV, 

II Co 79* ^1 ; T. TTveufJia T. ayiov, Eph 43" (cf. <TW-XviTi(i>).f 

Syn. : v.s. 6pnr)vi(o. 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 273 

XuTTT), -T/s, 77, [in LXX for ay^ and cogn. forms, etc. ;] pain of 

body or mind, grief, sorrow : Jo 16^, 11 Co 2^" ; opp. to x^pa. Jo IS^**, 
He 1211; ^^^ ^-^ x., Lk 22^5 ; iK X., 11 Co 9^• rj Kara B^ov A., opp. to 
■q T. Koa/JLOV X., II Co 710 ; X. /-tot ecrrtv, Eo 9^ ; X. Ix<^. Jo IG^l' 22 • j^. seq. 
aTTo, II Co 23 ; X. eirl X. Ix<^, Phi 2^7 ; eV X. eX^elv, II Co 2^ (to come sad 
and cause sadness) ; pi. (cf. Ge S^e, Pr 15^^, al.), i Pe 2^^.f 

Auaaf las, -ov, 6, Lysanias : Lk S^.t 

Aoffias, -ou, o, Lysias {Claudius L., Ac 232«), Ac 24f],22_-|- 

Xu'cris, -£<os, -7' «Xvto), [in LXX : Ec V^ (8I) (-|^rg), Da LXX 

12^, Wi 8^ * ;] a loosing : of divorce, i Co 72^.t 

** XuCTiTeX^cj, -w (<[ XucriTeXr^s, useful, prop., ra TeXrj Xvwv), [in LXX : 
To 3", Si 201*^-1* 2911*;] 1. prop., to indemnify, pay expenses. 2. to 
be usefid, to profit ; usually impers., Xuo-iTeXci, it profits : c. dat. pers., 
seq. €t . . . -7, Lk IT^.f 

Ao'o-Tpa, -a?, 17, and (in Ac 14^ 16^, 11 Ti, I.e.) -wv, rd (cf. AvSSa), 
Lystra, a city of Lycaonia : Ac 14"' ^> 21 16^' ^, 11 Ti S^^.t 

XuTpoi', -ov, to' (<; Xuw), [in LXX (Pent, jg, Pr j, Is j) for ]rTB and 

cogn. forms, n^N5 , 15)3 , THO ;] a ransom (as for a life, Ex 218o ; 

for slaves, Le I920 ; for captives. Is 45i3) : SlvtI ttoXXwv, Mt 2028, 
Mk 10*^ (v. Sv^ete, in 1., and for discussion of X. and its cognates, 
Westc, He., 295 f.; Deiss., LAE, 331 f.; cf. also dvTi-XvTpov).t 

XuTpou, -w {<C\vTpov, q.v.), [in LXX chiefly for niB, bss;] to 
release on receipt of ransom ; mid., to release by paying ransom, to 
redeem : in spiritual sense, Tit 2^* ; pass., i Pe l^^ ; in general sense, 
to deliver (cf. Ex 6«, Ps 68 (69)i8, al.) : Lk 242i.t 

tXiJTpaxns, -€m, r} «Xvt/3o'«o), [in LXX : Le 2529. *^, Is 63* (D"'bw5, 

n^N5), Nu 18i«. Ps 48(49)8 110 (111)^ 129 (130)^ {n-^, f^, miQ), 

Jg l^^*;] a ransoming, redemption (aix/ixaXwTwj', Plut., Arat., 11) : of 
the mediatorial work of Christ, He 9^2 ; in general sense, deliverance 
(cf. Ps 48, I.e.) : Lk 1«8 238.+ 

XuTpu-nis, -ov, 6 « Xvrpo'w), [in LXX : of God, Ps 18 (19)1* 77 
(78)3^ (b^Ja) * ;] a redeemer, deliverer : Ac 7^* (not found elsewhere). + 

Xuxfta, -as, -q (vulgar form of Xv^vt'ov = Xv^voCxosJ v. Kennedy, 
Sources, 40), [in LXX for niljp (Ex 25^1 40*, al.) ;] a lampstand : Mt 

515, Mk 421, Lk 8i« 1133; of that in the Tabernacle, He 92; metaph., 
of the two witnesses, Ee 11* ; of the seven churches of Asia, Ee I12. '3, 20 
2^ ; of the removal of a church from its position, Ktvctv t. Xv^vtav k.t.X., 
ib. 5.+ 

Xo'xi'os, -ov, 6, [in LXX for 13 (Ex 253" (37)^ al.) ;] a lamp (portable, 

and usually set on a stand, Xv^ita) : Mt 5^^, Lk 113' . ^p^„fju 6 X., Mk 
421 ; X. S.7rT€iv, Lk 8i« 1133 158. ^-5 Xv'xvov, Ee 1823; id. opp. to <^. 
17X10V, ib. 225; metaph., of the eye, Mt 622, Lk 113*; of John the 

18 



274 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Baptist, Jo 535 ; of the Lamb, Ee 2128 ; of prophecy, 11 Pe l^^ ; of 
spiritual readiness, pi., kvxyoi (as always in LXX; freq. in Att. 
\vxva), Lk 1235.t 

SVN. : Xa/X7rd<;, q.V. 

Xuu, [in LXX for nriQ , 103 hi,, etc. ;] 1. to loose, unbind, 
release : of things, Mk l^, Lk 3^\ al. ; of beasts, Mt 21^, Lk 13l^ al. ; of 
persons, Jo ll'*^, Ac 22^*' ; of Satan, Re 20^' "" ; metaph., of the marriage 
tie, I Co T^'^ ; of one diseased, Lk 13^^ ; of release from sin, Ee 1^, WH, 
E, txt. (v.s. \ov<x)). 2. To resolve a whole into its parts, loosen, dissolve, 
break up, destroy : Jo 2^^, Ac 27*\ Ee 5^ ; metaph., 11 Pe 3^^ ; of an 
assembly, to dismiss : Ac 13^^ ; t, [xeaoroixov t. cfypayfAov, Eph 2^* ; t. 

(TTOi)^€ia, II Pe 3^** ; ovpavoi, ib. ^^ ; t. efyya t. Sta^dAou, I Jo 3^ ; T. (iSivas 

T. davaTov, Ac 2^* ; of laws, etc., to break, annul, cancel (MM, xvi) : 
evToXrjv, Mt 5^^ ; T. vofjLoy, Jo 7^^ ; T. adfi^arov, Jo 5^^ ; t. ypa^-qv, Jo 
10^*. (Cf. di'tt-, dno-, Sia-, ck-, (.ttl-, Kara-, Trapa-Xvu}."^ 

Awis (Eec. Aojis), -tSos, rj, Lois : ii Ti l^.t 

A(iT, 6 (Heb. laib), indecl., Lot (Ge 1127, al.) : Lk 1728.29.32, 
II Pe 2^t 

M 

M, fi, (iu, TO, indecl., mu, m, the twelfth letter. As a numeral, 
/ = 40, fji^ = 40,000. 

Made, 6, indecl., Maath : Lk 32«.t 

MayaSdi', Magadan, an unidentified place on the coast of the Sea 
of Galilee : Mt 15^9 (Eec. MaySaAd ; cf . Mk 8^^, where for AaA/xavov^d, 
D * has McA-cyaSa, D ^ MayaiSd, some cursives MayaSd, and Euseb. 
Onomast. McyatSdv; cf. DB, iii, s.v.).t 

MaySaXd (Aram. N^XO = Heb. bi^n, which in Jos IS^^B is 

rendered MayaSa), Magdala : Mt 15^9 (Eec. for MayaSdv, q.v.).t 

MaySaXifjcos, -d, 6v, Magdalene, of Magdala : Mapia (q.v.) 7; M., 
Mt 27^«'«'i 281, Mk 15*0.47 I61 [9], Lk 8^ 24io, Jo 19^5 20i'i8.t 

MayeSwc, Magedon : Ee 16^® (WH, "Ap M. for 'ApfiayeSuiv, q,v.).t 

fiayeia, V.S. /xay/a. 
*fiayeua) (Eur., Plut., al.), 1. to be a Magus, or skilled in Magian 
lore. 2. to practise magic : Ac 89.t 

*)jiayia (Eec. -eta), -a?, 77 (<^/Adyos), 1. i/ie Zore of the Magians 
(Plat.). 2. magic: ipl., magic arts, sorceries : Ac S^^t 

fidyos, -ov, 6, [in LXX for fjlSTN , Da LXX th 22. 10, al. (cf. a^'m , 

chief magian, Je 39^.^3);] 1. one of the Mdyoi, a Median tribe (Hdt.). 
2. a Magian, one of a sacred caste, originally Median, who seem 
to have conformed to the Persian religion, while retaining some of 
their old beliefs (v. DB, i vol., 665 f. ; DB, iii, 203 ff.) : Mt 21- 7. le. 3. a 
wizard, sorcerer: Ac 13". ^ (cf. Wi 17'', Ac 89'^^).t 

MayoJy, o, indecl. (Heb. Z'lJQ , Ge IO2, Ez 382, ^1.), Magog, 
associated with Gog : Ee 20^ (v. Swete, in l.).t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 275 

MaSidfi, 6, indecl. (Heb. J^ID), Midian ; 1. son of Abraham 

(Ge 252). 2. An Arabian tribe (Ge 36^5, Ps 82 (83)9, al). 3. yTj M. 

(Heb. ]^Tp }n^), the land of Midian (Ex 2^5, al.) : Ac V^.f 

*fiot<5s, -ov, o, the breast : Ee 1^^ (L for /xaa-ro^, q.v).t 
*t |ia6T)TeD'w {<C fJ^a-0-qTri<;), 1. intrans. (as prop. vb. in -cww, and so 
Plut., mor. 837 c. and elsew.), to he a discijjle : c. dat., Mt 27^*" (Rec, 
WH, mg.). 2. Trans., to make a disciple : c. ace, Mt 28^9, Ac 14P^ ; 
pass., seq. dat., t. 'l-qaov, Mt 27" (WH, E) ; t. ^ao-iAeta, Mt 1352.t 

liaeTj-nis, -ov, 6 (fxavOdvo)), [in LXX only as v.l. (A) in Je I321 20^^ 
26 (46)9 *;] a disciple : opp. to SlUo-koXos, Mt lO^*, Lk 6*0 ; 'Iwavvov, 

Mt 91*, Lk 7I8, Jo 325 ; T. ^aptmjio^v, Mt 22^6, Mk 218, Lk 533 . Mojvo-ccus, 

Jo 928; 'It/o-oC, Lk 617 711 193^ Jo 666 73 1938. esp. the twelve, Mt 10^ 
111, Mk 71^ Lk 39, Jo 22, al. ; later, of Christians generally, Ac 6i»2,7 
Qio, al. ; T. Kvpiov, Ac 9^. 

*+ /iadi^Tpia, -as, v' ( = fio-OriTpis, fem. of fiaOrj-n^s, q.v.), a female 
disciple : Ac 9^" f 

MaOOaOias, V.S. MaTTa^ias. 

MaeOalos (Eec. Mard-, V. WH, .4j9;)., 159; Bl., § 3, 11; on the 
Semitic form, v. Dalman, Words, 51; Gr., 142), -ov, 6, Matthew : Mt 
^ii., 99 103, Mk 318, Lk 615, Ac li^ (cf. Aci^c^.t 

MaeOdj' (Eec. Mar^-, V.S. Ma^^aios), o, indecl. (Heb. ]]10), Matthan: 

Mt lis.t 

Ma00dT (T, -a^; Eec. MaT^-, V.S. Ma^^aros), 6, indecl. (Heb. niJO), 

Matthat : Lk 32^ (cf. MaT^aT).t 

MaOeios (Eec. Mar^-, V.S. Ma^^aio?), -a, 6 (Heb. iTriO), Matthias : 

Ac 123,26_t 

Ma0ou<r(i\a (WH, -a\d), 6 (Heb. nb^Tinp), Methuselah : Lk S^^.t 

Ma'ivdv, V.S. Mcwd. 

^aiVofiai, [in LXX : Je 32 (25)1^ (bbn hith.) 36 (29)26 (yj^r pu.), 
Wi 14-8, al. ;] 1. to rage, be furious'. 2. to rave, be mad : Jo lO^'', Ac 

1215 262*»25^ I Co 1423 (cf. ifi-fxaCyofiaL).f 

fiaKapi'l^w {<CixaKdpio<i), [in LXX for ICTN pi., pu. ;] to bless, 
proTWunce blessed or happy : c. ace. pers., Lk 1*^, Ja 5ii.t 

fiaKcipios, -a, -ov (collat. form of poet, p-dnap, in Horn., Hes., 
chiefly of the gods and the departed), [in LXX for "'IIJ'K;] blessed, 

happy {DCG, i, 177, 213) : ^€o's (8w<£o-t7?s), i Ti in 6i5; iXn^s, Tit 2i3; 
esp. in congratulations, usually with the omission of the copula (M, 
Pr., 180; Bl., §30, 3), fi. 6, Mt 53 ff-, Lk 620 ff-, Jo 20^9, Ee V, al.; 
seq. ptcp., Lk 145, al.. ^5^ Mt 11«, Lk 723, Eo 4^^; Sn, Mt I316, al.; 
edv, Jo 131'^, I Co 7**'; compar., fi. . . . fxakkov, Ac 20'*; .(LTepo<i, 
I Co 7*0. 

Syn. : cvXoyT/To's, q.v. 
''*' fiaKapiafios, -ov, 6 (fiaKapi^o)) , a declaration of blessedness, 
felicitation : Eo 46, 9^ Qa 41^ (Plat., Arist.).t 



276 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

MaKcSo^ia, -as, -q, Macedonia: Ac IG^.i^ i Co 16^, ii Co l^', 
Phi 4l^ al. ; M. Kal 'Axa(a, Ac 19-^i, Eo 15^\ i Th V' ». 

MaKcSciK, -Ji'o?, 5, a Macedonian : Ac 169 1929 272, 11 Co 92. *.t 
*t fidKcXXoi', -ov, TO (Lat. macellttm), a meat-market : i Co lO^' 
(v. Deiss., LAE, 274 ; MM, xvi).t 

/xaKpdv (prop. fern. ace. of fmKp6<i, sc. 68w), adv., [in LXX for 

pm hi., prir^ , etc. ;] a long way, far : Lk IS'^", Ac 22^1 ; seq. airo, Mt 

S'"'", Lk 1\ Jo 218, Ac 172"; id. metaph., Mk 12^4; ol d% /*., Ac 239 (cf. 
Is 22) ; metaph., ol ttotI ovrts ju,. (opp. to lyyv%), Eph 21^ ; oi /a., ib. ^'^.t 

fiaKpoOei' (^/xafcpds), adv. (chiefly late), [in LXX for piriT , 
pinno , etc. ;] from afar, afar : Lk IS^^ 225" . --^^ ^. (pg 137 (138)6, 

II Es 313, al), Mt 26^8 27", Mk S" 8^ lli3 14^* 15*", Lk 1623 23", 
Ee 1810' IS' 17.+ 

t |iaKpo0ufie'u, -w {<^ fiaKpo-dvfj.o?, long-tcmjjered ; v.s. -la), [in 
LXX: Ec 812 ^2^ pr 1911 (rj-^x , ^K ^nNH), Jb ?!«, Si 2\ al.;] 

1. actively = Kaprtpio), to persevere (Plut., 2, 593 F). 2. Passively, 
to be patient, long-suffering : absol., i Co 13*, He 61^, Ja 5^; seq. Iws, 
c. gen., ib. ^ ; cVt, c. dat., ib. (Si 2*) ; Trpo's, c. ace, i Th 51* ; im, c. 
dat., Mt 1826.29, Lk 18^ cis, 11 Pe S^.f 
SfN. : VTrofi€V(j), q.v. 
t ^aKpoOufiia, -as, 7? {<ip.aKp6-evfjio<;), [in LXX : Pr 2515 (n";5?< IJIN), 

Je 1515 {rr^ti. "^j^N), Is 57l^ Si 5i\ I Mac 8* * ;] patience, long- 
suffering : of men, esp. in experiencing troubles and difficulties. 
Col 111, II Ti 310, He 612, Ja, 510 . of God's forbearance, Eo 2* 922, 11 Co 
6«, Ga 522, Eph 42, Col 312, i Ti lie, 11 Ti 42, i Pe 320, 11 Pe 3i*.t 

Syn. : v^o/xovy (cf. Lft., Col., 138 ; Tr., Syn., liii). 
*t fiaKpo9u)xu)s, adv., with forbearance, patiently : Ac 26^.+ 

IxQKpos, -a, -oV, [in LXX for "JJ^X, plPIT and cognate forms, etc.;] 

1. of space and time, long : yuaKpa Trpoa-evxto-Oai, Mk 12*'', Lk 20*'^. 

2. Of distance, far, far distant : x^P"^' ^^ ^^^^ 19i2,+ 

fiaKpo-xpo»'ios, -ov (/ia/cpo's, ;(po':os), [in LXX . p.. yLyveaOai, ttvat 

{W'lyi '?l"'"ixn). Ex 2012, De 4**' 516 172*'*;] of long duration, long- 
lived: Eph63(Lx^).+ 

,id\a, adv., [in LXX for b^S, m Ki 1«, Da LXX lO^i, al.; 

compar. for ^a, Nu 13^2(31)^ 9,1 . ^axXov 17 (^a), Ge 19^, al.; superlat., 
II Mac 8'', IV Mac 4^^ 12^ 15*;] I. Pos., very, very much, exceedingly 
(cl. ; LXX ut supr. ; in NT its place is taken by \iav, o-0o8pa, etc.). 
II. Compar., jxaWoi'. 1. Of increase, more; with qualifying words: 
7roX\(2, Mk 10*8, Lk 18=59, Eo 5i5' i^, Phi 212, al. ; ttoVo), Lk 122*, Eo 
1112, a,i . Too-ovrw . . . oo-o), He 102s. 2. Of comparison, the more: 
Lk 5l^ Jo 518, Ac 51*, I Th 41'!'', 11 Pe V^; hi ,1. Kal p.. Phi 19; c. 

compar., Mk 7^*, 11 Co 71^; iroWw fi. Kpelaa-ov, Phi 12^; ft, ha<f>ipiLV, 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 277 

c, gen., Mt 6^^; ft. ^, Mt 18^^; c. gen., i Co 14^^; as periphr. for 
compar., Ac 20^5, i Co 9^5, Ga 4^^ fi. 8i (EV, yea rather), Eo S^*. 
3. Of preference, rather, the rather, sooner : with qualifying words, 
TToXAa), Mt 6^0, al. : ttoXv, He 122^; iroa-w, Mt 7^\ al. ; in a question, 
ov IX.I I Co 9^2. after a neg.. Mt 10«, al; eiXm {^vhoKOi) fx., i Co 14*, 
II Co 5^ ; ^-qXu), I Co 14^ ; c. subst., t. (tk6to<; ^ r. ^ws, Jo 3^^ ; /*. 84, Ga 4®. 
III. Super!., fjidXurro, most, most of all, above all : Ac 20^® 25^^, Ga 6^^, 
Phi 422, I Ti 410 58. 17, II Ti 413, Tit 110, Phm i«, 11 Pe 2iO; /x. yv^crrrj^, 
Ac 263. 

(laXaKi'a -a?, 17 «/xaXaKos), [in LXX chiefly for •br[, De 7^* 

28", Is 38^ 533, al. ;] 1. prop., softness, effeminacy (Hdt., Thuc, al.). 
2, In NT, as in LXX, = aa-devtLa, weakness, sickness : voo-os nal fx., 
Mt 423 935 IQi.t 

/SFiV. ; V.S. d<r6€V€ia. 

ftaXaic^s, -i -oV, [in LXX: Pr 25^^^ (^n) 2622 (Q^p-ji^ppg) * .j 

soft; 1. prop., to the touch (opp. to a-KXrjpos) : of clothing, pi., Mt 11^ 
Lk 72*. 2. Of persons and their mode of living; (a) mild, gentle; 
(b) soft, effeminate : i Co 6^ (prob, in obscene sense, cf. Deiss., LAE, 
150 4; MM, xvi; Zorell, s.v.).t 

MaXeXeVjX (T, MeA-), 6 (Heb. ^UJ^^qo), Mahalaleel : Lk S^^.t 

fidXiora, V.S. fidXa. 

(iaXXoc, V.S. fidXa. 

MdXxos, -ov, 6 (Hellenistic form of Heb. "Ij^p), Malchus : Jo IS^^.t 

**fi(ifi|jiT], -r/s, ?7 (onomatop.), [in LXX: iv Mac 16^*;] 1. in cl., a 
child's name for mother. 2. In late Gk. (= cl., TrjBTJ), a grandmother : 
(LXX, I.e.), II Ti l^.t 

♦tjittfiums (Rec. fiafjifx-), -a (Bl., § 7, 4), 6 (Aram. S3ina), mammon, 
riches : Mt 62*, Lk 169. u, i3,t 

tAayariv, 6 (Heb. DUZp), Manaen : Ac 13i.t 

Mat'OCTOTis, -rj> o (Heb. HWiO), Manasseh ; 1. (a) the first-born 

son of Joseph ; (6) the tribe which bore his name : Ee 7". 2. King 
of Judah : Mt l^^.t 

ftavQdvQ>, [in LXX chiefly for mb;] 1. to learn, esp. by inquiry : 
absol, I Co 1431, iTi 2^\ ii Ti 3' ; c. ace. rei, Jo 7^^ (sc. aird), Eo le^^, 
I Co 1435, Phi 49, II Ti 3l^ Ee 14^; seq. quaes, indir., Mt 9^^; XptcrroV, 
Eph 420 {ICC, in 1.) ; seq. i-n-o, c. gen. rei, Mt 2432, Mk I328; diro, c. gen. 
pers., Mt 1129, Col V; -n-apd, c. gen. pers., 11 Ti 31*; cv, c. dat. pers., 
I Co 4''; "point" aorist (M, Pr., 117), to ascertain, seq. on, Ac 232^; 
c. ace. seq. (xtto, Ga 32, 2. to learn by use and practice, acquire the 
habit of, be accustomed to : e. inf. (Bl., § 69, 4), i Ti 5*, Tit 3^*; id. c. 
nom. in pred. (Bl., § 72, 1), Phi 4}^; c. ace. rei seq. ctTro', He 5^; dpyal 
fiav6dvov(Tiv (EV, they learn to be idle ; Bl., § 73, 5 ; Field, Notes, 210), 
I Ti 5i3.t 



278 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

H-afia, -as, y « /i,atVo/xai), [in LXX : Ho 9^' » n?^;?!^^). Wi 5*, 

al. ;] frenzy, madness : Ac 26^*.t 

fidkm, TO, (in FIJ, also ry), indecl. [in LXX : to fxav. Ex 16^^*, else- 
where T. /xavva, Nu lisff-, al. (]p, Aram. N$0) ;] manna: Jo 63i'*«, 

He 9* ; symb., Ee 2^7.+ 

^ain-euojuiai (<[ /xavri's, a seer, diviner), [in LXX for DDp , De IS^**, 
al. ;] to divine, practise divination : Ac IG^^.t 

Syn. : 7rpo(firjTev(D, q.v., in distinction from which fx. is used in 
LXX and NT only of false prophets and those who practise the 
heathen arts of divination and soothsaying (cf. i Ki 28^, and v. Tr., 
Syn., § vi). 

fjiapai^oj, [in LXX: Jb IS^o {■a;y^ pi.), 242*, wi 2^ I921*;] in cl, 

1. prop., to quench fire; pass., of fire, to die atoay, go out. 2. In 
various relations, to quench, waste, wear out (cf. Wi 19^^) ; pass., to 
waste aivay; in later writers (Plut., Luc, al.), of the withering of 
flowers and herbage (act., Jb 15^0 . pass., ib 24^*, Wi 2^) : Ja 1^^ 

(cf. a/i,apai'TOv).t 

jiapdv add (Kec. fiapavaQa. ; Aram. : on the original form v. 

Dalman, Gr., % 4:1,1; 74, 3; Words, 328). Maran atha, i.e. the Lord 

Cometh (but v. Dalman, 11. c. ; Field, Notes, 180 ; ICC, in 1.) : i Co 1622.t 

*fiapYapiTT]s, -ov, 6, a pearl: Mt 13*^.46, i Ti 2^ Ee 17* IS^^.ie 

2121 (.-^„^_ WH) ; proverbially, Mt 7«.t 

MdpGa, -as (BL, §7, 2), 7; (Aram. Urt-]^), Martha: Lk lO^s. *o, 41^ 
Jo lli.s.iaff. 122.+ 

Mapia, -as (Hellenized form), and Mapiafx, indecl., -q (Aram. 
d;1©; Heb. (MT) Q^-ia), Mary. In NT; 1. the mother of Jesus: 
Mt 116 ff. 211 i355_ Mk 63, Lk P^ff. 25.16,19,34^ Ac li*. 2. ilf. Mag- 
dalene (q.v.). 3. The wife of Clopas (Jo 19^5) and mother of James 
the little, and Joses : Mt 275«'6i 28i, Mk 15*«>*7 I61, Lk 24io. 4. The 
sister of Martha and Lazarus : Lk 10^9. 42, Jo HL 2, 19 ff. 123. 5 The 
mother of John Mark : Ac 12'2. 6. A Christian greeted by St. Paul : 
Eo 16^ (on the signification of the name, v. Zorell, s.v. ; on the use of 
the alternative forms in NT, DB, iii, 278 b„).+ 

MdpKos, -ov, 6, Mark : Mk., tit., Ac 12i2.-^5 1537, 39^ Col 4i«, 11 Ti 411, 
Phm24, I Pe 5'3 (v. Swete, Mk., Intr., xiiiff.; DB, iii, 245ff).t 

** fidpfiapos, -ov, 6 {<^ij.apixatpui, to glisten), [in LXX: Ep. Je"2*;] 
1. any crystalline stone (Hom., Eur., al.). 2. In later writers, marble : 
Ee 18i2.t 

p.dpTup, V.S. p-dpTVi. 

fiapTupe'w, -w {<^ p.dpTv<s) , [in LXX chiefly for 137 (Ge 31*"»*^, al.), 

also for Tiy hi. (Ge 43^, La 2^^), njy (Nu 353");] (a) prop., to be a 
witness, bear witness, testify: absol. (Pind., al.), Jo 15", Ac 26^; 
parenthetical (Bl., § 79, 7 ; MM, xvi), 11 Co 8^ ; c. dat. pers. (coram, 
at incomm.; Bl., § 37, 2), Ac 22«, He IQi*; id. seq. on, Mt 233i, 



MANUAL GKEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 279 

Eo 102, al.; ace. et inf., Ac lO*^; c. ace. rei (cl.), Jo 3", Ee 22^6.20; 
c. ace. eogn., seq. Trcpt, Jo 5^^, i Jo 5^<> ; c. dat. rei, Jo 5^^, Ac 14^, al. ; 
seq. TTcpt, c. gen. (pers. et rei), Jo V' 8- is 2^^ IS^s 212*, al. ; id. seq. 
oTi, Jo 536 7^ 5x1, Jo P* 4" al.; 5ti recit., Jo 439; Kara seq. on, 
I Co 151*; pass., He 78; ptcp., Eo 3^1; impers.. He 7^7; (b) in late 
Gk., to witness favourably, give a good report, approve (Bl., § 54, 3 ; 
MM, xvi ; Deiss., BS, 265) : c. dat. pers., Lk 4^2 ; seq. Ittl, e. dat. rei, 
He 11* ; pass., Ac 6^ ; seq. iv, i Ti 510, He IP ; 8id, c. gen. rei, He ll^^ ; 
vTTo, c. gen. pers., Ac IO22, al. ; impers., in Jo^ (cf. i-m-, o-w-ctti-, 
Kara-, (rw-/xapTvp€(i)). 

fkaprvpia, -a<s, ij (<^/xa/)ru/3€a)), [in LXX : Ge 31*^ E (Nlinnifr), 
Ex 20i«, De 520(17), Pr 25i8, Ps 18 (19)^ (ly, nny), Pr 12i9, Si 

34 (31)23.24^ jv Mac 6^2*;] witness, testimony, evidence: Mk 14**', 
Lk 2271, Jo 53* 1935 212*, I Ti 37, Tit li3, m Jo 12, Ee 117; q, gen. 
subj., Mk 1459, Jo 817 (i-xx auter)^ I jo 59. geq. ^a^a'^ c. gen. pers., 
Mk 14*^ ; esp. of witness concerning Christ and divine things, Jo 17 
311,32,33 532,36^ Re 69; c. gen. subj., Jo li^ 53i 8i3.i*, Ac 22i8, i Jo 59-ii, 
Ee 1211 . c gen. obj., Ee P- » 12i7 1910, 20* ; /x. Ix"". Re 6" 12i7 igio.t 

fiaprupioK, -ov, to (<^ /xdprvp), [in LXX chiefly for nyiD , also for 
rnv , Uny and cogn. forms;] a testimony, witness, proof (Hdt., 

Thuc, al.): c. gen. subj., 11 Co I12, 11 Th li»; c. gen. obj., Ac 433, 
I Co 1« 21 (WH, txt., E, txt., ^.vcTTrjpiov) ; 11 Ti 1^; ek fi., Mt 8* lOis 
241*, Mk 1** 611 139^ Lk 51* 95 2113, He 3^, Ja 53 ; to ^. Katpok iS'o s 
{GGT, in I), I Ti 2« ; 17 <rK7]v^ toC p.. (LXX for iria br}ii), Ac 7**, 

Ee 156.t 

**fjiapTo'po/itu {<CpdpTvp), [in LXX: Jth 728, i Mac 2^^ N)*;] to 
summon as witness (M, Th., 25 f . ; Hort., / Pe., 53 f. ; Lft., Notes, 29 ; 
Ga 203), hence, (a) to protest, affirm solemnly : seq. on, Ac 202*, 
Ga 53; (b) to adjure, beseech: c. dat. pers., Ac 2622; q ^00. et inf., 
Eph 417; seq. eh, I Th 212 (cf. 8ta-, 7rpo-/xapTvpo/xai).t 

fidpTus (-^olic pdpTvp), -vpos, 6 (also 77), [in LXX for IJT;] a 

witness : Ac 10*i, i Ti 612, 11 Ti 22, He 12i (Westc, in 1.) ; in forensic 
sense, Mt 18i« 26^5, Mk 1463, Ac 6i3 7^», n Co 13i, i Ti 5^\ He 1028; 
c. gen. obj., Lk 24*8, Ac I22 232 315 532 iqsq 26I6, i Pe 51 ; c. gen. poss., 
Ac 18 1331, Ee 113; ^ dat. pers., Lk 11*8, Ac 22i5; of Christ, Ee 1* 
31* ; of God, Eo 1^, 11 Co 123, p^i is^ i tj^ 2*. i« ; of those who have 
witnessed for Christ by their death (in later Xn. lit., martyr : Swete, 
Ap., 35), Ac 2220, Rg 2i3 176.t 

p,aa(iofi,ai (Eec. p-acrcr-), -wyuai (Aristoph. and late writers, but not 
in Trag. or in good Att. prose), [in LXX : Jb 30* (dD^), Si 19^ A*;] to 

bite, chew : Ee 16io.t 

fiaaO^S, V.8. p.acrT6<:. 

lia<TTiy6oi, -0} (<^ p.auTi^), [in LXX chiefly for 7\2Z hi. ;] to scourge : 



280 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON CF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

c. acc, Mt 1017 2019 233^ Mk 103*, Lk IS^s, Jo 19i ; metaph., He 12« 
(cf. Pr 312, Je 53, Jth 8^7).t 

fiaaTiJu (Ep. and late prose = Att. /lao-Ttyow), [in LXX : Nu 22^* 
(na: hi.), Wi 511, n Mac 2^1*;] to whip, scourge: c. acc, Ac 2225.t 

fido-Til, -tyos, 17, [in LXX for 13112? , etc. ;] a whip, scourge : Ac 
22^*, He 11^* ; metaph., of disease or suffering as a divine chastise- 
ment (cf. Ps 88(89)33, Pr 312^ „ Mac 9'i), Mk 310 529.3*, Lk 7^\i 

fiaoTos, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for Its';] the breast: pi., Lk ll^^^ 

2329, Ee 113 (T^ f^acreol^ ; WH, App., 149 ; L, fjiaCol^).f 

*+ fiaxaioXoyia, -as, rj (<^ /xaraioAdyos), idle OX foolish talk : I Ti l^.t 
*t fiaraioXoyos, -ov (<^ /xaratos, Acyw), talking idly : Tit ll9.t 

jjidTaios, -ov (as in Att., but -aia, -aiov, I Co 151'^, I Pe 11^; 

<^ixdTr)v), [in LXX for N1C7 , b^H , 3T3 , etc.;] vain, useless: dvox^cX'^9 

K. fi., Tit 39 ; ttiVtis, I Co 151^^ ; Oprja-KeM, Ja 1^* ; SiaXoywr/xoi', I Co 

3uo(Lxx)j ayacrTpo(f>-q, I Pe 11^; of idols and heathen gods, ra [x. (Je 2*, 
IV Ki 17l^ al.) : Ac 14i5. 
Syn. : »cevos, q.v. 
t fiaTai<5TT|s, -rjTO'i, rj (<^ yaaratos), [in LXX for b^H , Ps 30 (31)* 
38 (39)* 61 (62)9, g,]., and nearly 40 times in Ec ; for K"!2r , Ps 25*, al. ; 
P'f\ , etc. ;] vanity, emptiness, frailty, folly : Eo Q^^, ii Pe 2i^ ; t. voos, 

Eph 4I'' (elsewhere only in Pollux, 6, 134, and Eccl.).t 

t^axaiou), -w «/AdTaios), [in LXX: IV Ki 17l^ Je 2^, al. (bnn), 
etc. ;] to make vain, foolish : Eo l^i.t 

]i.&Ti]v (prop. acc. of /AaV?;, a fault, folly), adv., [in LXX for 
ban , NlCr , etc. ;] in vain, to no purpose : Mt 159, mjj 77 {LXX)_t 

MaxOaios, -av, -las, V.S. Ma^^-. 

MaredT (v.s. Maeedr), Matthat : Lk 3^* (T, Maeede).f 
MaxTaed, 6, indecl. (Heb. nnpO), Mattatha : Lk 33i.+ 

MaxxaOias, -ov, 6, Mattathias (cf. Ma^^tas) : Lk 3".26.t 

fidxaipa, -Tjs (Att. -a? ; V. WH, Aj)p., 156a . Bl., § 7, 1), 7;, [in LXX 

chiefly for niO ; also for n^SKO , etc.;] 1. (in Horn., al.) a large knife 

or dirk, for sacrificial purposes (Ge 22^' i'', Jg 19^9 A). 2. a short sword 
or dagger (as disting. from pofxcftaia, a large broad sword and ^i'</)os, a 
straight sword for thrusting) : Mt 26*7ff-, Mk 1448,47,48^ Lk 2236 »-, j^ 
18i»' 11, Ac 1627, He 1137, Ee 6* 13io. 1* ; o-To>a fiaxaipr]<: (as in Heb. 
nin ^B , Ge 3426, al.), the edge of the sword : Lk 212*, He 113* ; ^. 

SLO-TOfxa, He 412 ; dvaipeiv p.a-)(aipr}, Ac 122 . ^^^ ^ (f)opetv, Eo 13*. 

Metaph., Mt 103* (^^^ ^q tlpwv), Ro 83^ ; p.. tov 7rvivpxiTo<i, Eph 6i7.t 
jxdxt], -r}<;, -q {<^ fjLa.xop.at), [in LXX chiefly for n*"! ;] 1. a fight. 2. 

a strife, contention, qiiarrel : 11 Co 7^, 11 Ti 223, jg, 41 ; pj^ Tit 39.+ 

fidxofiai, [in LXX chiefly for 3^1 , also for nSTS ni., etc. ;] 1. to 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 281 

fight : Ac 7^^. 2. to quarrel, dispute : ii Ti 2^*, Ja 4^ ; Trpos dXX^Xovs, 
Jo 6*2 (cf. 8ia-/i,axo/Aai).t 

fiCYaX-auxeu, -w (= fieydka avxeoi), [in LXX : Ez IG^O (nns), al. ;] 
to boast great things : Ja 3* (Eec. for fjnydXa aixet, WH).t 

^J.€ya\€los, -da, -tlov «/t£yas), [in LXX : Ps 70(71)19 (bll|), al., 
freq. in Si ;] magnificent, splendid (Xen., Plut,, al.) : Ac 2ii.t 

/jicYa^6i<5Tris, -qros, tj « /xeyoXcros), [in LXX : Je 40 (33)9 (ni^fpn), 

Da LXX 727, I Es 1* 4*o* ;] splendour, magnificence : Lk 9*^ Ac 1927, 
II Pe 1^*5 (freq. in tt. as a ceremonial title, MM, xvi).t 

fieyaXoTTpcinis, cs {= fieydXta TrpeVwv), [in LXX: De 332" (nij^a), 

II Mac 8^* 15^3, III Mac 2^*;] befitting a great man, magnificent, 
majestic : 11 Pe l^^ (cf. MM, xvi).t 

^i.€ya\6v(,} «/x,€yas), [in LXX chiefly for blS pi., hi.;] 1. to make 
great : Mt 23*, Lk 1*^. 2. to declare great, exHol, magnify : Lk 1*", 
Ac 51^ 10*« 1917, II Co 1015; pass., seq. cV, Phi 12o.t 

IxcyaXus, adv., [in LXX for blia , etc. ;] greatly : Phi ^^^.t 
tfieyaXwo-oinrj, -r)<s, r; (<^/x€yas), [in LXX chiefly for n^HJ and COgn. 

forms, II Ki 72^, Ps 144 (145)^, al. ;] greatness, majesty : He 1^ 8^, Ju 25 
(elsewhere Eccl. only).t 

(i^yas, fieydXr], /xe'ya, [in LXX chiefly for ^113 , also for DT], , n^^O 

(incl. /Act^wv), ST (/i.€yto-Tos) ;] great; 1. of external form, bodily size, 
measure, extent : \i6os, Mt 27*'*>; SpdKw, Re 12^ ; lx6Zs, Jo 21^^ ; tto'Xis, 
Re 11^ ; fjLOLxaLpa, Re 6*, al. 2. Of intensity and degree : Swaynis, Ac 
433 ; (^o'ygos, Mk 4" ; aya.7rq, Jo 15^^ ; ave/ios, ib. 6^8 ; Kpavy^, Ac 23^ ; <^ws, 
Mt 416 ; TTvpcTo's, Lk 438 ; ^Xt./.is, Mt 242i. 3. Of rank ; (a) of persons : 
^eo's (MM, xvi), Tit 2^3; "Apre^t^, Ac 1927; compar. (v. infr.), Mt 18^ 
(cf. Dalman, Words, 113 f.) ; neut. for masc. (Bl., § 32, 1), Mt 12« ; (b) 
of things : dfiapTta, Jo 19^1 ; fxvanjpLov, Eph 532 . _ fi^y^a-j-rj (v. infr., 
and cf. Field, Notes, 16 f.), Mt 223« ; compar. for superl. (M, Pr., 78), 
I Co 1313. 4. (a) Compar., /xci'^w : Mt ll^i 23^7, al. ; neut. pi., /^ei^ova, 
contr. ix€L^(i), Jo 151 . double compar., fiei^orepo^ (M, Pr., 236 ; Bl., § 11, 4), 

III Jo*; (b) superl, /ttyio-Tos (Deiss., BS, 365), 11 Pe 1*. 

fi^yeOos, -ous, to (</i€yas), [in LXX chiefly for npip ;] greatness : 

Eph 119 (cf, MM, xvi, S.V. yLi£yas).t 

t ficyiordc, -avos, 6 « /Acyto-Tos), [in LXX chiefly for ijy , Je 24^, 

al.; plST, Da LXX th 523, al.; freq. in Si (sing., 4^);] usually pi., 

ol PL., the chief men, nobles (Manetho, FIJ, al.) : Mk 621, Re 6i5 1823.t 
/ic'yioTOS, V.S. /txeyas. 
**t(i60epji.Tii'euu, [in LXX : Siprol. 23*;] to translate, interpret : Mt 

123, Mk 5*1 1522.34, Jo 138,42^ Ac 436 I38 (cf. ippir]V€Vw) .f 

\iiQi\, -t;s, ^, [in LXX chiefly for "ipgr and cognate forms;] 
drunkenness : Lk 213* . pi , jjo 1313, Qa, 52i.t 

SYN. : V.S. Kuiyxos. 



282 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

p,€9-to-rr)/xi and (late form, i Co 13^) /jLeOia-Tavu}, [in LXX for 
IID hi., etc. ;] trans, in pres., impf., fut. and aor. 1, to change, remove : 
c. ace. rei, oprj, i Co 13^ (cf. Is 54^^) ; c. ace. pers. : seq. ets. Col 1^^ ; 
seq. CK, pass., Lk 16* ; of causing death (cf. similar intrans. sense, 
Eur., Ale, 21, al.), Ac 13'-^2_ Metaph. (cf. t. KapStW /x., Jos 148), c. 
ace. pers., to pervert : Ac 19-^.t 

*tjie0-o8ta (Eec. -€ta; cf. Bl., § 3, 5), -as, 17 « t /At^oScvw, 1, to treat 
by rule. 2. to employ craft : iv Ki 19'^^ *), craft, deceit : Eph 4^* 6^^ 
(not found elsewhere ; v. AE, in l.).t 

li€Q-6piov, -ov, TO (neut. of /xe^optos, -a, -ov), [in LXX : Jos 19^^ 
A"*;] Eec. for npiov (q.v.), a border, boundary : Mk 7'^*.t 

tic0o'(rKa>, [in LXX : Ps 22 (23) » (mi), Pr 4^7 (nntzr), etc. ;] causal 
of fie&voi, to make drunk, intoxicate; pass., to get drunk: Lk 12**, 
Eph 518, I Th 5<.f 

|x^0u(7os, -a, -ov (also -OS, -ov ; prop., only of women, but in late 
writers also = /xc^vo-Wko's, of men), [in LXX : Pr 23^' (xno) 26^ 
(-1132?), Si 191 268, jv Mac 2' *;] drunken: 1 Co 5^^ 6io.t 

ficGow {<^fxi6v, wine, cf. fxidrj), [in LXX chiefly forlStZT, mi;] to 
be drunken: Mt 24*9, Jq 210, Ac 2l^ i Co Ipi, i Th 5^; metaph., 
Eel72.6.t 

|i.ciYfia, -Tos, TO, v.s. /Aty/xa, and cf. Bl., § 3, 5. 

fxciyk'ufii, v.s. /xtyvu/xi, and cf. Bl., § 3, 5. 

(ieij^OTepos, V.S. /xc'yas. 

|X€il^(i)»', v.s. /xeyas. 

ficXav, TO, V.S. /ieXas. 

p,€Xas, -aiva, -av, gen., -avos, -atVv^s, -avos, [in LXX : Ca 1', Za 6* 
(ih^), etc.;] black: Ee 6^. i2; opp. to A-cwkos, Mt b^^; neut., to /x., 
4wA; ; II Co 3^, 11 Jo 12, m Jo i^.t 

MeXcd (Eec. -5s, gen., -S), indecl, 6 (Heb. nx^p), Melea : Lk S^i.t 

flAci, v.s. fieXo). 

MeXeXeYJX, V.s. MaX-. 

fjieXcTdw, -w (<^/xe\eT>/, care), [in LXX chiefly for HTI;] 1. c. 
gen., to care for (Hes.). 2. C. ace, to attend to, practise : i Ti 4^* 
(EV, be diligent in; cf. Souter in Exp., viii, vi, 429, but v. infr.). 
3. to study, ponder : Ac 42^ (lxx)^ i Ti 41* (AV, meditate on ; cf. CGT, 
in 1., but V. supr. ; cf. 7rpo-/AeX€T(xa)).t 

fiAi, -To^, TO, [in LXX freq. (Ge 43^1, al.) for ^y[; for ng)i, Pr 

53;] honey: Ee lO^'^O; dypiov (q.v.), Mt 3*, Mk l«.t 

*t jjicXio-aios, -a, -ov (elsewhere t-aios, -cios; •<^ /xc'Xto-o-a, a bee, cf. 
/xc'Xi), made by bees : Lk 24*'- (Eec, WH, E, mg.).t 

MeXiTT], (Eec, E, txt.), MeXiT-qvr] (WH, E, mg., v. WH, App., 
160), Melita, Melitene (mod. Malta) : Ac 28i.t 

fAc'XXa), [in LXX : Jb 3* (Tny) 192* {frm) ', elsewhere for fut., 

and freq. in Wi, 11, iv Mac ;] to be about to be or do ; 1. c. inf. (Bl., 
§ 62, 4; 68, 2; M, Pr., 114) ; (a) of intending or being about to do of 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 283 

one's own free will : c. inf. praes., Mt 2^3, Lk 10\ Ac 3^ 5^^, He 8*, 
n Pe 112 (j^ield, Notes, 240), al.; c. inf. aor. (Bl., § 58, 3), Ac 12«, Ee 
3^* ; (b) of compulsion, necessity or certainty : c. inf. praes., Mt 16^'', 
Lk 931, Jo 671^ Ro 42*, al.; c. inf. aor., Eo S^s, Ga 323, Ee 32 12*. 
2. Ptcp., 6 fx€k\mv: absol., Eo 838, i Co 322; ra fi., Col 2^^ ti's to fi. 
(Field, Notes, 65) ; c. subst., Mt 3^ 1232 (« ^Iwy 6 fi. ; LXX for ly), Ac 
2425, 1 Ti 48, He 25, al. 

fieXos, -ovs, TO, [in LXX chiefly for np3 ;] a member, limb of the 

body: i Go 12i*'i9.2e^ gph 41" (WH, mg.), Ja 3^; pi. (as always in 

cl.), rh IX. : Mt 529.30, Eo 613.19 75.23 124^ i Co 1212^-, Col 3^, Ja 3« 41. 

Metaph., iropvrj^, i Co 6i5 ; of Christians, /*. dXAi^Awv, Eo 12^, Eph 42^ ; 

Xpio-ToC, I Co 615 . o-tii^aros Xpio-ToC, I Co 122^, Eph 53o.t 

McXxci (Eec. -xO, indecl., 6 (Heb. ■'3^©), Melchi: Lk 324.28t 
MeXxio-eStK, indscl., 6 (Heb. pT5f "^3^0), Mekhizedek : He S^'i" 

520 71, 10 11, 15, 17_f 

^ic'Xoi, [in LXX : Jb 223 (1^50), To 105, wi 12i3, i Mac 14*2. «♦;] 

1. intrans., to be an object of care, be a care; commonly in third 
pers. : c. dat. pers., Ac ISi'^ ; very freq. impers., i Co 7*i ; seq. oti, 
Mk 438, Lk 10*0; c. gen. rei (as freq. in Att.), i Co 99; seq. Trtpt, Mt 
22i«, Mk 121*, Jo 1013 126^ i Pe 5^. 2. Trans., in act. and mid., to 
care for (not in LXX or NT).t 

*t ficjippdi^a, -as, 17 (Lat. membrana), parchment : 11 Ti 4i3.t 
**(i^^4)o^ai, [in LXX: Si 11^ 41^, 11 Mac 2^*;] to blame, find 
fault: absol., Eo 9i9; c. ace, avrovs (WH, txt. ; avrois, Eec, WH, 
mg. ; on rendering with avroh v. Westc, in 1.), He 88.t 

* jicji»|/ifi,oipos, -ov (•<[ /A6yu.<^o/xat, + fxoLpa, fate, lot), complaining of 
one' s fate, querulous : Jui^.t 

fi^c, conjunctive particle (originally a form of /at/v), usually 
related to a following Be or other adversative conjunction, and dis- 
tinguishing the word or clause with which it stands from that which 
follows. It is generally untranslatable and is not nearly so frequent 
in NT as in cl. Like 8e, it never stands first in a clause. 

1. Answered by Se or some other particle : /xev . . . Se, indeed 
. . . but, Mt 311, Lk 31", al. ; with pronouns, os i^ev . . . os Se, one 
. . . another, Mt 2135, al. ; pi., Phi li". i^ ; S /xcv . . . o 8c . . . o 8c, 
some . . . some . . . some, Mt 138; toSto /xcv . . . tovto 8c, partly 
. . . partly. He 1033; ^^ ^ ^ circira, Jo 11*; fiev . . . KOL, Lk 85. 

2. /xev solitarium, answered by no other particle : irpwrov fxiv 
(Bl., I.e.), Eo 18 32, I Co 1118; /x£v ovv in narrative, summing up what 
precedes or introducing something further (Bl,, § 78, 5), so then, rather, 
nay rather : Lk 1128 (WH, fievovv), Ac 1« 93i, al. ; fih oZv yc (Phi 38, 
WH) : V.S. /Acvowyc. 

Mei'»'<£, (L, Mcwas, -a. ; Eec. MatVav) 6, Menna : Lk 3'!.+ 
ficc-ouf = fjiev ovv, V.S. /lev. 

fL€v-ovv-y€ = fjLfv ovv fc, nay rather : Eo 920 IOI8, Phi S^.t 



284 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

fieV-Toi = fiiv TOL, yet, however : Jo 4^^, al. ; el /x., Ja 2^ (if indeed). 

liivb}, [in LXX for TiQjr , mp , etc. ;] to stay, abide, remain. 
1. Intrans. ; (i) of place : seq. iv, Lk 8^7, al. ; Trapd, c. dat. pers., Jo 1*°, 
al; <Tvv, Lk 1''*'; kuO' kavrov, Ac 28i«; c. adv., eKil, Mt lO^i; diSe, 
Mt 26=*8; metaph., i Jo 2i8; of the Holy Spirit, Jo l^^.^a 1417. of 
Christ, Jo 6^^ 15*, al. ; 6 ^€os, i Jo 4^" , conversely, of Christians, 
Jo 6''" 15*, I Jo 415, al.; 6 Aoyos t. ^eoC, i Jo 2^*; rj a^deia, 11 Jo 2, al. 
(ii) Of time ; (a) of persons : Phi l^s ; seq. et? t. aiwva Jo 12^*, He 7^*, 
I Jo 217; ^Xt'yov, Ee IT^O; ews Ipxof^ai, Jo 2122.23; (^^ of things, lasting 
or enduring: cities, Mt ll^^. He 13^*; Adyos deov, 1 Pe l^^; afiapTta, 
Jo 9*^ (iii) Of condition : c. pred., ytidvo?, Jo 12^* ; ayaywos, i Co 7^^ ; 
TTio-Tos, II Ti 2^=^; Upiv's, He 7^; c. adv., owtws, i Co 7***; ws »<dyw, ib. ^i 
seq. ev, ib. 20. 24. 2. Trans. (Bl., § 34, 1 ; Field, ^o^es, 132) : c. ace. 
pers., Ac 20^' ^^ (cf. dia-, 8ta-, iv, l-m-, Kara-, irapa-, avv-Trapa-, nepi-, 
irpocr-, VTvo-p-ivui). 

ficpij^o) {<^ixipos), [in LXX chiefly for pbu;] to divide; (a) to 
divide into parts: metaph., pass., i Co 73* (wh, b, mg.), 34 (Rec, r, txt.) (on 
reading and punctuation, v. IGG, in 1.) ; /xep-epia-TaL 6 Xpi(rT6<;, i Co 1^^ ; 
as in late authors, of factional division (cf. Polyb., viii, 23, 9), Ka6^ 
eavTov, Mt 1225 . ^^' iavTov, ib. 26, Mk 32*-26 ; (b) to distribute : c. ace. 
rei et dat. pers., Mk 6*^ ; as in later usage (cf. Polyb., xi, 28, 9), to 
bestow : Eo 12^, i Co 7^'', 11 Co 10^^, He 72; mid., c. ace. rei seq. p.€Td, 
Lk 1213 (cf. 8m-, o-u/x-//cpt'^o)).t 

liipuxva, -t;?, -f,, [in LXX : Ps 54 (55)22 (nr^), Jb ll^s, Si 302*, 

al ;] (in cl. chiefly poet.) care, anxiety : i Pe 5'^ ; pi., Lk 81*, 21^* • 
c. gen. obj., Mt I322, Mk 4i9, 11 Co 1128.t 

fiepip-^dw, -w «/^£>/Ava), [in LXX: Ps 37 (38)i8 (lUl), etc.;] 
1. to be anxious: absol., Mt 62"- 3i, Lk 122^; p.rjhlv p.., Phi 4"; c. dat. 
rei, Mt 62^, Lk 1222 . geq. ^^pi^ Mt 628, l^ 10*i 1226 ; ttw?, Mt 10^^ 
Lk 1211; €15 TT^v avpiov, Mt 6^*, 2. to care for : c. ace, to, t. Kvpov, 
1 Co 722-34 . ^^ ^_ K6(rp.ov, ib. 3* ; ra irepC vp.wv. Phi 220 ; seq. virep, 

I Co 122'^; c. gen. (a construction otherwise unknown), caur^s (WH; 

TCI e. Eec. ; V. Bl., § 35, 7), Mt 6^* (cf. ■n-po-p.epipiva.ui).^ 

(xcpts, -t'Sos, rj, [in LXX chiefly for pbn , nf^l^n;] 1. (as in cl.) a 

part, 2)ortion: Lk 10*2, Ac 821, 11 Co 61^, Col I12. 2. In later Gk 
(v. MM, xvi), as geographical term, a division, district : Ac 16i2.t 

fiepior|ji6s, -oD, 6 (< fiepi^oi), [in LXX for n|?bqO , Hi^^no , Jos 1123, 

II Es 618*";] 1. a dividing, division: if/vxrj^ k. Trv€vpaTo<; (i.e. between 
them or of the things themselves, v. Westc, in 1.), He 412. 2. a dis- 
tribution, bestowal (cf. p-epc^oi, 2) ; pi.. He 2*.t 

*+ ficpiorris, -ov, 6 (<^/x,€pt^w), a divider: Lk 12i*.t 

\iipos, -ous, TO (<^p.tipopai), [in LXX chiefly for JTSp ;] 1. a part, 

share, portion: Jo 13^, Ac 192^ (Page, in 1.)^ Re 206 22i9; hence (cl.), 
lot, destiny, Mt 24^1, Lk 12*6, Rg 21*. 2. a part as opp. to the whole : 
Lk 1136, Jo 1923, Ac 52 23«, Eph 416, Ee 161^; c. gen. (of the whole), 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 285 



Lk 15^2 24*2; r. ^apLo-aiw, Ac 239; pi,^ Jq 21«; of the divisions of a 
province, Mt 2^'\ Ac 2^** 19^ 20^; of the regions belonging to a city, 
Mt 1521 16^3^ Mk 81'' ; c. gen. appos., Eph 4^ ; in adverbial phrases, 
duo. (/cara) fxepos, I Co 142^, He 9^ ; /xepos ti, aTro fi., in part, Eo 112' 
1515.24^ I Co IP^ II Co 11*25; iK fi., 1 Co 1227, 139,12. T^ ^^ ^.^ ib.io. 
3. A class or category (in cl. usually iv fi. ridevai, XayScIv, etc.) : iv fi., in 
respect of, Col 2^^ ; iv r. /*. toutw, in this respect, 11 Co S^^ 92.t 

\Le(Tav6KT{.ov, V.S. fieaovvKTw;. 

fieoTifijSpia, -as, 17 (/^ecros, vfiepa), [in LXX chiefly for inX , Ge 
3i«, al; also for na5, Da LXX 8*- 9, al.;] 1. noon: Ac 226. 2. the 

South: Ac826.t 

*fi€aiT€o'« (<^ ^€(rtTr;s), to interpose, mediate: opKw, He 6^''' (MM, 
ii, iii).t 

tfieaiTTj?, -ov, 6 «/x€o-os), [in LXX: Jb 9^3 (7^5)*;] an arbitrator, 

mediator : Ga S^^ ; c. dupl. gen. pers., Oeov k. dvOpoiiroiv, i Ti 2^ ; c. 
gen. rei, SLaO-^K-qs, He 8^ 9^^ 122* ; 6 St /i. evbs ovk Io-tiv, Ga 320 (v. Lft., 
in 1. ; and for exx. of this word ia tt., v. MM, xvi).t 

fxeao-vuKTios (on V.l. /Accra-, V. Bl., §6, 2), -ov {<C^fxf.(TO<i, vv^), [in 
LXX chiefly for n^"^^!! ^Sn;] of or at midnight ; as subst., neut., to 

fjL., midnight (Arist. and late writers) : gen., Lk 11^; ftc'^pt fi., Ac 20^; 

Karci T^ fi., Ac 1625; ^cc. (Eec, gen. ; v. Bl, § 34, 8), Mk 1335.t 
MeaoTTOTapia, -as, 17 (sc. x'^P"). Mesopotamia : Ac 2^ 72.t 
jjieo-os, -f], -ov, [in LXX chiefly for ^iri ;] middle, in the middle or 

midst; 1. prop., as an adj. : Lk 23*^, Jo 19^^ Ac l^^; c. gen. pi., Lk 
22^5, Jo 126; gen. temp, (BL, §36, 13), piearjs wktos, Mt 256; ^, 
rjp.ipa'i, Ac 26^^. 2, In adverbial phrases, neut., fxeaov, to /x., as 
subst. : dftt fiicrov, c. gen., between (cl. ; in LXX : Ge 1*, al.), 
elliptically (but v. M, Pr., 99), i Co 6^ ; = cV p.., among, in the midst 
of (Bl, § 39, 2; 40, 8; cf. in LXX : Jos 19^, Si 272), Mt 132^, Mk V\ 
Ee 717; hih. fjiiaov, c. gen., Lk 4^0; 8ta /icVov (Eec. -ov, v. Bl, § 42, 1), 
between, Lk 17^1 {ICC, in 1.) ; ek to fi. (v.s. ek), Mk 3^, Lk 4^5 51^ 6^ 
Jo 2019.26 ; ,j5 ^., Mk 1460 . ^v T(S ya., Mt 146 ; iv p.., Jos 813. 9J, Ac 47 ; c. 
gen. loc, Mk 6*7, Lk 2121 22",' Ac 17-2, He 2^2 (lxx)^ Ee 46 56 222; c. 
gen. pi, Mt 1016 182.20, Mk 9^6, Lk 2*6 qi iqs 2227 24^6, Ac li^ 22a 
2721, I Th 27, Ee 113 21 56 66 ; »caTa piaov T. vvKTos, Ac 2727 (Bl, § 47, 
6) ; iK ToD pi. (Lft., in 1. ; Deiss., BS, 252 f.). Col 2i* ; iK p.., 11 Th 27 ; 
iK Tov p.., c. gen., Mt 13«, Ac 17^3 23i«, i Co 52, 11 Co 6i7. 3. Neut., 
piaov, adverbially, c. gen., in the midst of, Mt 142* (WH, txt., E, mg., 
aliter). Phi 21^ (8ta p^iaov—Y. supr.— also Jo 8*9, E, mg.).t 

*t p.eaoToixoi', -ov, to {<:^pi<xos, toixos), a partition ivall : Eph 2i* 
(not elsewhere, but v. LS, s.v. /t€o-oToixos).+ 

*+ fiecroopdLi'Tjfia, -tos, to (<^ /txccrovpaveo), to be in mid-heaven, of the 
sun at the meridian), the zenith, mid-heaven : Ee 81^ 146 igivf 

fieaow, -o) (<^/i,£'cros), [in LXX: p.€crovar]<; t. kvktos, Ex 122^ (^3fO)» 



286 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

etc. ;] to he in the middle, esp. of time : t. koprrfi /aco-ovo-tjs, in the 
middle of the feast, Jo 7^*.t 

Meao-ias, -ov, 6 (Aram. Nn''B'p == Heb. ITB'p = Xpiorov, q.v.), 
Messiah : Jo 1*^ 4".t 

Hie<TT6s, -i -6v, [in LXX: Na 1^', Ez 37^ (N^!p), Es 5\ Pr G^**;] 

/w/i ; c. gen. rei, Jo 192^ 2V^, Ja 3^ ; metaph., of thoughts and feelings, 
Mt 23-^s_ Ro P^ 15l^ II Pe 2'\ Ja d^^ (cf. Pr, l.c.).t 

**(ie(rroa), -w «ya€o-Tos), [in LXX: III Mac 5^'^**;] to fill : pass., 
c. gen. rei, Ac 2^^.t 

ficT<£ (before vowel /act ; on the neglect of elision in certain 
cases, V. WH, App., 146 b), prep. c. gen., ace. (in poet, also c. dat.), [in 
LXX for nx , Dy , inx , etc.]. 

I. C. gen., 1. amo7ig, amid : Mk l^^, Lk 22^7 (LXX, cv) 24^, Jo 
18^, al.; Siwy/Awv, Mk 10^". 2. Of association and companionship, 
with (in which sense it gradually superseded avv, than which it is 
much more freq. in NT ; cf. Bl., § 42, 3) : c. gen. pers., Mt 8^^ 20^\ 
Mk 129 3^ Lk 530, Jo 3^2, Ga 2i, al. mult.; elvai fxerd, Mt 5^^, Mk 3^*, 
al. ; metaph., of divine help and guidance, Jo 3^, Ac 7^, Phi 4^, al. ; 
opp. to elvai Kara, Mt 12^0^ Lk 1123 • j^ Hellenistic usage (but v. M, 
Pr., 106, 246 f.), TroXe/xeiv /xerd = cl. tt., c. dat., to wage war against 
(so LXX for Qy nnb? , i Ki 1733), Ee 2i«, al. ; c. gen. rei, x^pas, Mt 

1320, Mk 416, al. ; opy^s, Mk 3^, al. 

II. C. ace, 1. of place, behind, after : He 93. 2. Of tim^, after: 
Mt n\ Mk 141, Lk 1«4, Ac l^ Ga l^^, al.; /tcra toOto, Jo 2^2, al.; 
TaZra, Mk 16112], Lk 527, Jo 322, al; c. inf. artic. (BL, § 71, 5; 72, 3), 
Mt 2632, Mk 114, al. 

III. In composition, 1. of association or community : /xcTaSt'Sw/i,!, 
fi€T£xw, etc. 2. Exchange or transference : fieTaWdaao), /jiCTOLKL^a), etc. 
3. after : fxerafiiXofjiai. 

** ii^ra-^aivu,, [in LXX : Wi 72^ 19i9, 11 Mac 6i'9'24*.-| to pass over 
from one place to another : Mt I720, Lk IC ; with reference to the 
point of departure only, to tvithdraw, depart : Mt 83* 11^ 12^ 152^, Jo 
73, Ac 18^ ; of removal from this life, ck t. koct/jlov Trpos t. Jlarepa, 
Jo 131 ; metaph., c*c t. Bavdrov tis t. ^wt/v, Jo 52*, i Jo 3i4.t 

(lexa-PaWw, [in LXX chiefly for "SJBn;] to turn about, change. 
Pass, and mid., to turn oneself about ; metaph., to change one's mind : 
Ac 28«.t 

^eT-dyo), [in LXX: ill Ki 8*7. « n Ch 637 (nnizr) 363 (-,,5 ^i.)^ 
I Es 1*5 210 b^\ Bs 817, Si prol. i« lO^, n Mac 133*;] i_ i^ Xen., Plut., 
and later writers, to transfer, transport (so LXX). 2. In sense other- 
wise unknown (v. Hort, in 1.), to turn about, direct : Ja 33» *.t 

ficTa-S(8a,|ii, [in LXX : Pr 1126 (-QlZr hi.), Wi 7", al. ;] to give a 
share of, impart : c. dat. pers. et ace. rei (in cl. more freq., c. gen. 
part., but ace. of that which is imparted, whether part or whole, so 
here, v. Bl., § 36, 1), Ro l", i Th 2«, and (with ellipse of ace.) Lk 311 ; 
c. dat. pers., Eph 42^ ; absol., o /xcraSiSous, Ro 12* + 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 287 

** fiCT(i-6cais, -€OJS, 17 {<^/JLeTaTt6r]fj.L), [in LXX : II Mac ll^**;] 
1. change of position, removal : He 11^. 2. change, as of that which 
has been established : He 7^^ 12^'^.t 

ftcT-aipu), [in LXX : iv Ki IG^^ 25^\ Ps 79 (80)8, pj. 2228 (y^ hi., 
n^a hi., etc.)*;] 1. trans., to remove (LXX, 11. c). 2. (not cl.) to 
depart : Mt IS^s I91 (cf. Aq. : Ge 12«).t 

ficTa-KaX^u, -5i, [in LXX: Ho ll^'^ (j^-,p)^ i gg 150*.] ^^ ^aZZ 

/rom one place to another. Mid., to send for : c. ace, Ac 7^* 10^^ 
2017 2425.t 

Ii€ra-Kiv4(a, -w, [in LXX: De IQi^ (31D hi.), Is 54io (raiD), etc.;] 
trans., io move away, remove {opia, De, I.e.). Mid., to remove oneself, 
remove, shift : metaph., diro t. cAttiSos, Col l^^.t 

** (xeTa-Xa|xP(£vw, [in LXX : Es 5\ Wi 18^ ii-iv Mac ^^ * ;] to have 
or get a share of, partake of: c. gen. rei, 11 Ti 2", He 6^ 12^"; rpo<^ri<;, 
Ac 2*« 2733.34; c. ace. rei (of the whole), to get: xaipoV, Ac 2426 
(v. Bl., § 36, 1 ; MM, xvi).t 

* fjicTd-Xt]fjn|»is (Rec. -Xrjif/i^), -£ws, T) (<^ fji€TaXafjL(3dvijj), participation, 
taking, receiving : of food, i Ti 43.t 

fJlCT(£-Xlf]\J>lS, V.S. fJi€Tdkr]fnl/L<S. 

jACT-aXXdcraw, [in LXX : Es 2^ (mD), ib.20, i Es 13', 11 Mac 9*;] 
1. to exchange : t. dK-qdeiav . . . ev t. if/evSei, the truth for a lie (v. Bl., 
§ 36, 8), Ro P^. 2. to change : c. ace. seq. tis, Eo P^ (dAXao-o-w).t 

ficTa-p,Ao/iai, [in LXX chiefly for Dn3 ni. ;] depon., pass., to 
regret, repent one : Mt 2130.32 273^ n Co 7^, He V^(^^)A 

Syn. : /AETavoecu, to change one's mind, repent. On the distinc- 
tion, difficult to maintain by usage, between these words, v. Thayer, 
8.V. ; Tr., Syn., % Ixix. 

**t fi,eTa-fAop<})6(D, -w [in Sm. : Ps 33 (34)^*;] to transform, trans- 
figure : pass., of Christ's transfiguration, Mt IV, Mk 9^ (cf. Lk 92^) ; 
of Christians, Eo 122, 11 Co S^^.t 

Syn. : iJ.€Ta<JxriixaTitfii, to change in fashion or appearance, v.s. 
fxopitrj, and cf. Lft., Phi, 125 If. 

ILiTa-voiui, -w, [in LXX for Dm ni., i Ki IS^^, Je 4^8, al.;] to 
change one's mind or purpose, hence, to repent ; in NT (exc. Lk 173» *), 
of repentance from sin, involving amendment : seq. diro, Ac 8^2 ; 1^, 
Ee 221.22 920,21 1611 (cf. IP may); em', 11 Co I221; absol., Mt 32 41" 
1120 1241^ Mk 116 612^ Lk 1132 133, 5 157, 10 1630 173,4^ Ac 238 319 173« 2620, 
Ee 25.16,21 33,19. c inf^ Re 16^; Iv o-dKKO) k. o-ttoSuJ, Mt Ipi, Lk IQis.t 

Syn. : jXiTafxiXofxaL, q.v. 

ficTd^oio, -otas, 7) «/A€Tavoea)), [in LXX: Pr 1415, Wi 1123 
1210, 19^ gj 44.1c * .-] after -thought, change of mind, repentance : He 12i'^ ; 
of repentance from sin, Mt 38>ii, Lk 3^ 15^ 24*^ Ac 262o, n Co 7»'i''; 
jSaTTTLo-fia (q.v.) /xcravotas, Mk 1*, Lk 33, Ac 132^ 19*; ^ fJs e^bv fi., 
Ac 2021 ; fi. diro vtKpwv epycov. He 61 ; €ts /A. KaXciv, Lk 532 ; id. dyctv, 
Eo 2* ; dva*ca«vt'^€tv. He 6" ; cts /a. xuiprjaai, II Pe 39 ; {x. hovvat, Ac 
531 1118^ ij Yl 5^25.t 

IL^raii «^eTd + |vV = ctvv), [in LXX : Ge 31*o, Jg 527, m Ki 



288 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

158,32^ Wi4io 16^9 1823*;] 1. adv. of place and time (in NT time only) ; 
(a) between : Iv tw fx. (s.c. XP^^^)^ Jo ^^^ ' (^) ^^ ^^*® writers (FIJ, 
Plut., al.), like /actoi (adv.), after, afterwards : to /a. o-a/^ySarov, Ac 13^^ 
(cf. CI., i?o., / Co., 44, 2). 2'. Prep. c. gen., between: of place, Mt2336, 
Lk 11" 1626, Ac 12'^; of persons, as to mutual relation, Mt IS^^, 
Ac 159, Ro 2i^t 

ftcTa-rr^^nro,, [in LXX (mid.) : Ge 27*^ (npb), Nu 23^ (nn3 hi.), 
II Mac 15^\ III Mac 5^^ j^^ ly Mac 123. c * .j ^q gg^ ^j^igj. or /or .• 
pass., Ac 102y^ Chiefly in mid., to send for, summon: Ac 105»22,29b 

1113 201 2424.26 253.t 

(jicTa-(jTp£<t>w, [in LXX chiefly for "JJDn;] io ^zi-rw about, turn, 
change : pass. , Ac 22o (l^'^), Ja 4^ (WH, txt., ixeraTpe-n-w, q.y.) ; in evil 
sense, to pervert, corrupt (cf. primary sense reverse) : Ga l^.t 

** )jL€Ta-o-xTi|xaTitw, [in LXX : IV Mac 92'^ * ;] to change in fashion or 
appearance : c. ace. rei, t. o-w^a, Phi 321 ; mid., seq. ck, 11 Co ll^^. i*; 
seq. (1)5, ib. 1^ ; of a rhetorical device, to transfer by a fiction (Field, 
Notes, in 1.), seq. tU, 1 Co 46.t 

Syn. : fji€Tafiop(f>6(i}, q.v. 

,jieTa-T{0T,fii, [in LXX : Ge 52* {npb), De 271^, al. (310 hi.). Si 44i«, 
II Mac 72*, al;] 1. to transfer to another place: c. ace, pass.. He 
X15(LXX)j seq. t^?, Ac 71®. 2. to change: c. ace, pass.. He 7^2; seq. 
ei?, fig., i.e. to make one thing a pretext for another, xapiv els da-eXyeiav, 
Ju*. Mid., to change oneself, pass over: seq. airo et ets, Ga 1" 
(cf. II Mac, l.c.).t 

jxcTa-Tp^Tro), [in LXX : IV Mac 6^ 7^' 12 IS", is * ;] to turn about, 
turn (Horn., al., but not found in Att.) : c. ace, Ja 4^ (WH, txt.; 
cf. ucTa(rTpe^a)).t 

**^cT-e'TreiTa, adv., [in LXX: Jth 95, Es 31^, iii Mac 32**;] after- 
wards : He 12i7.t 

^€T-^X". [in LXX : Pr 51^ (n?<), lis, i Es 5*« 8^0, Si 5128, al. ;] 

to partake of, share in : irr cXttiSi tov ^erix'^iv, i Co 91" ; c. gen. rei, 
I Co 912 102i»3o, He 21*; in sacramental sense, Ik t. iv6<s aprov p.., 

I Co IQi^ (cf. MM, xvi) ; metaph., yaXoKTos, He 5i3 ; of belonging to 
a tribe. He 7i3.t 

fiieT-cwpi^w (■< /Lterewpos, (a) in mid air ; (b) buoyed up ; (c) in 
suspense ; Thuc. ; in ir. opp. to aiiipip.vos, v. Zorell, s.v.) : [in LXX : 

Ob 1* (nna hi.), Mi 41 (xizr: ni.), Ps 130 (I3i)i, Ez iQi^'i^.i^ (nn), 

II Mac 51^ 73*, III Mac 6^*;] to raise on high (Thuc, Xen., al. ; Ob, 
Mi, Ez, 11. c). Metaph., (a) to buoy up ; pass., to be elated, puffed 
up (Polyb., al., Ps, ii, iii Mac, 11. c.) ; {b) to be anxious, in suspense 
(Polyb., V. 70, 10; FIJ, BJ, iv, 2, 5) : Lk 1229.t 

p,eToiKcaia, -as, rj {= cl. fieroiKLa, -kt/o-is ; <^ /tcTOt/ce'w, to change one's 
abode), [in LXX chiefly for nbh and cogn. forms, Ez 12ii, Qb 1^\ 

al. ;] change of abode, migration : of the Babylonian exile, fi. Ba^u- 
ASvos, Mt'lii.i2.i^t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 289 

jji€T-oiKit« (-< /M€Toi/cos, flw emigrant), [in LXX chiefly for 
nba hi. ;] to remove to a new abode, cause to migrate : Ac 7<. ^8 (i'^^).t 

y-erox-f], -^s, v «Ai«"xa>), [in LXX: Pa 121 (122)8 NE 
{iSn pu.)*;] sharing, fellowship : n Co 6^*.t 

/icToxos, -ov (^ci^/iCTcxw), [in LXX chiefly for "TJin ;] 1. sharing 

in, partaking of: c. gen. rei, He 3^ 6* 12^; t. Xpwrrov, He 3^*. 2. As 
subst., o fi., a partner, associate : Lk 5'', He l^d-xx^ 

fieTp^u), -w «/xeTpov), [in LXX : Ex IS^s, Nu 355, r^ 315^ jg 4912, 
(TTQ), Da TH 52*5 (n30), Wi 48*;] 1. fo measure, of space, number, 

value, etc.: c. ace. rei, Ee 11^ 21i*'i7. q ^at. instr., Ee 11^ 21i«. 
Metaph., iavrov iv eavrw, II Co 10^^. 2. to measure out, give by 
measure : prov., cv S> //cVpo) k.t.X., Mt 7^, Mk 4^*, Lk 6^^ (WH, mg., 
cf. dvTi-fi€Tpe(j)).f 

(icTpTjT^s, -oS, 6 «/[i£Tp£<o), [iu LXX : III Ki 18^2 (nxp). n Ch 4^, 
(TQ), etc. ;] 1. a measurer (Plat.). 2. = d/ic^opcus, an Attic measure, 

= 1^ Eoman amphora or about 9 Eng. gallons : Jo 2'.t 

*t fieTpioiraO^w, -w (k^ fieTpioiraO-^, moderating one's passions), to 

hold one's passions or emotions in restraint; hence, to hear gently 

with, feel gently towards : He S^.t 

** fierpius, adv. {fjuirpios, moderate), [in LXX: n Mac 15^^*;] 

moderately : litotes, oi fi., exceedingly, Ac 20^2.t 

(i^Tpoi', -ov, TO, [in LXX chiefly for HTO , also for riB^JJ , etc. ;] 1. 

that which is used for measuring, a measure; (a) a vessel: fig., Mt 
2332, Lk 638; €'*c /i., hy measure, Jo 3^4; (&) a rod or rule : Ee 21i5.i7; 
fig., Mt 72, Mk 424. 2. That which is measured, measure: c. gen. 
rei, Eo 12^, 11 Co 10^3, Eph 4^. i3, i«,t 

(ieTWTToi', -ov, TO (yucTa + wi/', an Bye), [in LXX for nyp ;] the fore- 
head : Ee 73 9* 13i« 14i. » 17^ 20* 22*.t 

jjL^XPi' (bef. consonants, exc. Lk 16^", p.i'xpi. 'Iwavov) and /acxP'^ 
(bef. vowels, Mk, Ga, 11. c. He 12* ; v. BL, § 5, 4), 1. as prep., c. 
gen., as far as, even to, until ; (a) of place : Eo 15^^ ; {h) of time : Mt 
1123 1330 2815, Lk 16i«, Ac 1030 20^ Eo 51*, i Ti 6^*, He 3^. i* 910 ; 
(c) of measure or degree : Phi 28> 30^ n Ti 2^, He 12* (/i. at/taTos, cf . 
II Mac 13^*). 2. As conjunct, {as long as), until: Eph 4^3 1 ^ q* 
(Thuc, iii, 28, but more freq. /x. av, v. Bl., §65, 10), Mk 1330, Ga 4i9 
(/A. is prop, an adv., cf . Lat. usque, seq. prep, or adv. ; LS, s.v.,' and 
cf. a^pi)."^ 

(iTJ, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends 
on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from 
ov, which denies absolutely, fir} is used where one thinks a thing is 
not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, ov 
negatives the indie, /at; the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for 

19 



290 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

I. As a neg. adv., not; 1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 
318, Tit V\ II Pe 19. 2. In delib. questions, c. subjc. (M, Pr., 185) : 
Mk 12^*, Eo 3^. 3. In conditional and final sentences, after el, idv, 
av, Iva, cSttcus : Mt 1Q^\ Mk 611 l2l^ Lk 9^ Jo G^^^ Eo 11", al. 4. C. 
inf. (v. M, Pr., 234 f., 239, 255), (a) after verbs of saying, etc. : Mt 2^2 
63^ Mk 1218, Ac 15^8, Eo 2^1, al. ; {b) c. artic. inf. : after a prep., Mt 
135, Mk 45, Ac 719, I Co 10«, al. ; without a prep., Eo 14i3, 11 Co 2i. i3, 

1 Th 4*' ; (c) in sentences expressing consequence, after Siare : Mt 8^^, 
Mk 320, I Co V, II Co 37, al. 5. C. ptcp. (v. M, Pr., 231 f., 239), in 
hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description : 
Mt 10^8 1230, Lk 6*9, Jo 318, Eo 4^ i Co 7^8, i Jo 310, al. ; where the 
person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion : Jo 
6''*, I Co 1^8 4^' 18, II Co 521, al. ; where the ptcp. has a concessive, 
causal or conditional force, if, though, because not : Mt 18^^, Lk 2*^, 
Jo 7*9, Ac 926, Eo 21* 513, II Co 31*, Ga 6^, Ju ^ ; where the ptcp. has 
a descriptive force {being such as), tiot: Ac 9^, Eo 128, j Qq 10^^, Ga 
48, He 122''^, al. 6. ^rj prohibitive, in indep. sentences, (a) c. subjc. 
praes., 1 pers. pi. : Ga 52" 6^, i Th 5*, i Jo 318; [b) c. imperat. praes., 
usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun 
(cf. M, Pr., 122 ff.) : Mt 71, Mk 5^6, Lk &^\ Jo 2ie 5«, Ac IQi*, Ec 
1118, ja^ 21, Ee 5'-, al. ; (c) forbidding that which is still future: c. 
imperat. aor., 3 pers., Mt 24i8, Mk 13i^, Lk 17^1, al. ; c. subjc. aor., 

2 pers., Mt 3^ 1026, Mk 5' , Lk 629, Jo 3^, Eo 10^, al. ; {d) c. optat., in 
wishes: 11 Ti 4.^H^^^); ^^^ yeVoiro (v. M, Pr., 194; Bl., § 66, 1), Lk 
20i«, Eo 33, al. ; ix^ rts, Mk 13^ al. 

II. As a conj., 1, after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, 
perhaps (M, Pr., 192 f.) : c. subjc. praes., He 12i^ ; c. subjc. aor., Mt 24*, 
Mk 13^ Lk 218, Ac 13*0, Ga 51^, al. ; 5pa ^^ (v. M, Pr., 124, 178), 
elliptically, Ee I910 22^; c. indie, fut. (M, Pr., I.e.), Col 28. 2. in order 
that not : c. subjc. aor., Mk 133^, n Co 820 12^. 

III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where 
a negative answer is expected : Mt 79. 10, Mk 2i9, Jo 3*, Eo 3^ IOI8. i9, 
I Co 113, al. ; fx.-q Tts, Lk 22**, al ; seq. oi (Eo lOi'', al. in PI.), expecting 
an affirm, ans. ; oi fxrj, Lk 18^^, Jo I8I1. 

IV. ov /xy as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190 ff. ; Bl, 
§ 64, 5), not at all, by no means : c. indie, fut., Mt I622, Jo 6^^, He 
IQi^ al. ; c. subjc. aor., Mt 242, Mk I32, Lk e^^, J© 138, i Co 8i3, al. 

fi-qye, V.S. ye. ^ ^ 

. fJiT]Safj,u9 (= firjBafjirj, -Safid, adv. fr. firjSafio^ = /iT^Scis), [in LXX 

chiefly for nbbn , nb'hn ;] by no means, not at all : fi., Kvpu (sc. tovto . 

y^oiTo), Ac IQi* 118.t 

(jiT|8^, negative particle, related to oiSe as fx-q to oi, 1. as conjc, 
continuing a negation or prohibition, biit not, and not, nor : preceded 
by M, Mt 625 2229, Mk 122*, Lk I412, al. ; Tva fxyj, Jo 41^ ; 57r(«s fiv, Lk 
162«; firjSk . . . firiSe, neither . . . nor, Mt lOio, i Co 108.9. 2. As 
adv., strengthening a negation, not even : Mk 22, i Co 5ii, al. 

(iTjScis, -Sc/ita, -Sev (and -dev, Ac 2733, a Hellenistic form ; v. Bl., 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 291 

§ 6, 7; Thackeray, Gr., 58), related to oiSct's a8 /at/ to ov, no, none, no 
one; neut., nothing: Mt 1&\ Mk 5« 6^, Lk S^*, Ac &\ Eo 13», al.; 
c. gen., Ac 4^" 24^^; neut. ace, /xrjSev, adverbially, in no respect, Ac lO^** 
11^^; as ace. obj. after verb, ^XaTrreiv, Lk 4^^; ux^eXdadai, Mk 5^*; 
vj-Tipelv, II Co 11*; fjLtpLfivav, Phi 4" ; in double negation, strengthening 
the denial, /jltjkcti fj.., Mk 11^*, Ac 4:^'^ ; fir} . . . fjirjSiv {jx-qhiva, fxrjStfiiav), 
II Co 137, II Th 23, I Pe 3«. 

fiTjSeTTorc (/^.T/Se, Trore), adv., never : II Ti 3'',t 

p,T]8€ira) {fjirjSe, ttw), adv., 710^ yet : He ll".t 

MrjSos, -ov, 6, a Mede, Median : pi., Ac 2^.t 

ftTjOei;, V.S. )U.r/8cts. 

fiTjKCTi (<C/*^. «Tt), adv., wo more, no longer: c. 2 aor, subjc, 
Mk 92* ; ov fi., Mt 21^^; c. praes. subjc, Eo 141^ ; c. praes. imperat., Lk 
8", Jo 51* 8111], Eph 428, I Ti 523; Q optat., Mk ll^*; ha ,x., 11 Co 5^\ 
Eph 414; c. inf., Mk 1** 2^, Ac 4^7 25^*, Eo 6«, Eph 4^7, i Pe 42; c. 
ptcp., Ac 133*, Eo 1523, I Th 3I' 5.t 

jxTJKos, -COS (-ovs), TO, [in LXX chiefly for IJIK;] length: Eph 3^®, 

Ee 21i6.t 

fiTiKoVw «/x^/cos), [in LXX: Is 441* (blZ pi.), Ez 1225.28 
("tTJD ni.)*;] ^0 lengthen, extend: of causing plants to grow, Is, I.e.; 
pass, (mid., Swete, in 1.), to grow : Mk 42".t 

fjiT)XwTii, -^s, 7] {<^ixrjXov, a sheep or goat), [in LXX for 
nilN , III Ki 1913. 19, IV Ki 28' 13, !**;]« sheepskin : He ll^^.t 

\ir\v, a particle of assurance, verily, truly ; el (el) /a. ( = cl., rj fi. 
in LXX and tt.), now verily, ftdl surely : He 6i4<i^^).t 

y.y\v, gen., fx-qvos, o, [in LXX very freq. for B7in , Ge Tn, al. ; a 
few times form?.;] a month: Lk 124,26,36,56 426^ Ac 720 IS" 198 203 
2811, ja 517^ Ee g^.io.is II2 135 222; pj,^ of the festival of the new 
moon (cf. Is 6623), q^ 4io.t 

**,iY].'u(a, [in LXX : 11 Mac 3^ 611 1437, m Mac 328, iv Mac 43*;] to 
disclose, declare, make knotun : Lk 20^7, i Co 1028 ; in forensic sense, 
to inform, report : Jo ll*^ j pass., c. dat. pers., Ac 233*^.t 

fAT) OUK, V.S. firj, III. 

^L^f]^ro^€ {= fi^q ttotc, and SO written in WH, exc. Mt 25^), negative 
particle, related to ovirore as firj to ov. 1. As neg. particle, never : He 
91" (E, mg., but V. infr. ; WH, txt., fn? roVe). 2. As conjc, lest ever, 
lest haply (the idea of chance rather than of time seems to prevail in 
NT) : Mt 4«(i'^) 525 78 l3iMLxx),29 1532 2764^ Mk 412(^x2:) 142^ Lk 411 
1258 1412,29^ Ac 2827; after verbs of fearing or taking heed, Lk 213*, 
He 21 312 41 ; with ellipse of the verb or ptcp., Lk 148, Ac 53^; in later 
writers (v. M, Pr., 192 i.), perhaps, Mt 25^. 3. As interrogative; (a) 
in direct questions, like firj, expecting a negative answer : Jo 72", He 
917 (E, txt., cf. Westc, in 1. ; but v. supr.) ; {b) in indirect questions, 
whether haply, if haply : Lk 3l^ 11 Ti 225.t 

fii^Trou (WH, ixrj irov), lest anywhere, lest haply : Ac 272®.t 



292 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

^fiTJirw {fjLTi TTw, LTr., in Eo, I.e.), adv., not yet: c. ptcp., Ro 9^^; 
c. ace. et inf., He 9^.t 

/iTJTTws or ixq ■n-(M<i (so WH), negative particle, 1. as eonje., lest 
haply : in final sentences, i Co 9^", ii Co 2^" 9* ; after verbs of fearing 
or taking heed, i Co S^, ii Co 11^ 12-o, Ga 4" ; with an ellipse of 
ptcp. (sc. <^o;8ov>£vos ; cf. BL, § 65, 3; Burton, § 225), i Th 3^ (but v. 
infr.). 2. As interrogative, whether haply : Ga 2-, i Th 3^ (cf. M, 
Th., in 1., but v. supr.).t 

fiTjpos, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for "JJT ;] the thigh : Ee Id^^.f 

fiTi-T6, negative particle, differing from ovtc as /at; from ou, neither, 
nor: fx^re . . . fjuyn, neither . . . nor, Mt 11^^ Lk 7^3 9^, Ac 2312.21 
2720, He 73 ; fi.^ (fjirjSk) . . . fiTJre . . ix-qT€, Mt 534-a«, Mk 320 T, Ac 23^, 
n Th 22, I Ti 17, Ja 512, Ee 7i> ^.t 

fiilTT]p, gen,, fj.rjTpo'i, rj, [in LXX chiefly for DN ;] mother : Mt 1^^ 

2^1, al. ; fig., of one who takes the place of a mother, iSov -fj fi. fj,ov, Mt 
12" (cf. ib. 50, Mk 335, Jo 1927, Eo 16i3, i Ti 52) ; of a city, ^ns ia-rlv fi. 
■fjlJiHtv, Ga 42^ ; symbolically of Babylon, rj /a. t. Tropvwv, Ee 17^. 

p,T)-Ti, interrog. particle, expecting a negative answer : Mt 7^^ 
2622.26, Mk 421 1419, Lk 639, Jo 822 1835, Ac 10*", II Co 1218, Ja 311 ; in 
hesitant questions (v. M, Pr., 170^), /i,. oStos ianv, can this be, Mt 1223, 
Jo 429; ^^ ^p^^ II Co 117; on el fiiJTL (Lk 9i3, cf. BL, § 65, 6), v.s. d.f 

fiTj-Ti-ye (/Ai/Ti ye, Eec, L; fjirj rt yc, Tr.), strengthened form of 
fXT^Tt, let alone : i.e. according to context ; (a) much less ; {b) much 
more : 1 Co 63.t 

|i.il-Tis, Eec. for /xi^ ns (v.s. /x-^, 1, iii, and cf. Thayer, s.v. /atttis). > 

fi-f]Tpa, -as, rj {<C^fxrirr]p), [in LXX chiefly for 0111;] the womb: 

Lk 223 (LXX)^ ^Q 419,t 

*jiT)TpoXwas (Eec. -aAwas, in el., -aXot'as, V. BL, § 3, 3 ; 6, 2), -ov, 6 
(<^ fi-JT-qp + dAotaw, to smite) ; (a) a matricide : i Ti 1^ (AV, E, txt., 
but V. infr.) ; (b) a smiter of his mother : 1 Ti 19 (E, mg., cf. Ex 211^, 
and V. Ellic, CGT, in l.).t 

fir]Tp6-iroXis, -£tos, 17, [in LXX for UN , etc. ;] a metropolis, chief 

city : I Ti, subscr. (Eec.).t 
fiia, V.S. els. 
luaiva, [in LXX chiefly for NO^ ;] 1. to dye or stain. 2. to 

stain, defile, soil; (a) in physical sense; (b) in moral sense: Tit li*. 
He 1215, Ju 8 ; (c) in ritual sense (cf. La 22^, al.) : Jo 1828.t 

Syn. : fxoXvvo), to besmear, which also differs from /a. in that it is 
never used, as /a. in its primary meaning, in an honourable sense 
(cf. Tr., Syn., § xxxi). 

fAiaafjia, -tos, to (<;]/AiatVa)), chiefly in trag. and late writers; 
[in LXX: Le 7^(^^) (b^-B), Je 39 (32)3* (|^ipt?), Ez 333i (yy^), Jth 

92.* 13i«, I Mac 1350*;] a stain, defilement : pL, 11 Pe 22o.t 

**t |iiaan<5s, -oC, 6 «/AtaiVa)), [in LXX: Wi 1426^ i Mac 4*3 *.j 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 293 

1. prop., the act of defiling. 2. = fxCaa-fia (q.v.) : ii Pe 2^° (cf. Plut., 
Mor., 393c).t 

**|jiiYp.a (LT, cl., fjuyixa; on the orthogr., v. BL, § 3, 5), -tos, to 
«/xiyvu/xi), [in LXX: Si 388*;] a mixture: Jo IQ^^ (iXiy/ia, WH, 
E, mg.).t 

fiiyfofxi (on the spelUng /iety-, v. BL, § 3, 5), [in LXX for ny 
hith., etc. ;] to mix, mingle : c. ace. et dat., Ee 15^ ; c. ace. seq. iv, 
Ee 8^ seq. /.ieT<£, Mt 273*, Lk 13i.t 

SyN. : KepdvvvfXL, q.v. 

(xiKpos, -a, -dv, [in LXX chiefly for ]b(? , tsrp ;] small, little ; 

1. of persons; (a) lit., of stature : Mk 15**^ (MM, iii, xvi; on the view 
that age is meant, v. Deiss., BS, 144), Lk 19^ ; ol /x., the little ones, 
Mt IB^'i'^'iS Mk 9*2; (b) hence metaph., of rank or influence (cf. 
Dalman, Words, 113 f.) : Mt 10*^, Lk 17^, Ac S^" 2622, He S^i d-^x), 
Ee 1118 1316 195.18 2012; compar., -oVcpos, Mt 11^, Lk 72^ 9*8. 2. Of 
things; (a) of size : Mt 13^2, Mk 4^1, Ja 3^; (b) of quantity : Lk 12^2, 

I Co 5«, Ga 5«, Ee 3^; (c) of time : Jo 7^3 12^5, Ee Gn 20^. 3. Neut., 
fiiKpov, used adverbially; (a) of distance: Mt 26^9, Mk 14^^; (6) of 
quantity : 11 Co lli> i« ; (c) of time : Jo 13^3 1419 16i«-i9, He lO^^ ; /xcra /x., 
Mt 26^3^ Mk i47o,f 

MiXrjTos, -ov, rj, Miletus, a maritime city of Caria : Ac 20i^' i'^, 

II Ti 42o.t 

*t jxtXtoi', -ov, TO, a Boman mile (1680 yds.) : Mt 5*i.t 

fxip,£Ofjiai, -ov/xaL (■<] yu-i/xo?, a mimic, an actor), [in LXX: Ps 
30 (31)6, wi,42 159, IV Mac 923 139 *.j ^^ imitate: 11 Th 3''9, He 13', 

III Jo ii.t 

* fitfiTiTiis, -ov, 6 (<^fxLfjieo/j.aL), in NT always (like the verb) in 
good sense, an imitator : i Co 4i« lli, Eph 51, 1 Th 1» 21*, He 612.+ 

fii/xf^o-Ku (Bl., -rj-, § 3, 3), [in LXX chiefly for 13T;] to remind: 
mid. and pass. ; (a) reflexive, to remind oneself of, hence, to remember : 
c. gen. rei, Mt 26'^ Lk 1^*' ^2 24^, Ac lli^, 11 Pe 32, Ju i' ; c. neg., of 
sins, = to forgive. He 812 lOi'd'XX). q gen. pers., Lk 23*2; seq. oti, 
Mt 523 2763, Lk 1625, Jo 21^.22 1216; ^5^ Lk 246; pf.^ ^c>v77/ii, in pres. 
sense (cl.), c. gen. pers. (rei), i Co II2, 11 Ti 1* ; pres., fiifiv^a-KOfxat (only 
in late writers), c. gen, pers., in sense of caring for, He 26 (i-xx) 133 • 
(b) in passive sense, to be remembered, aor., i/jLv^aOrjv : seq. iyminov, 
c. gen. pers. (cf. Ez I822), Ac 103i, Ee 161^ (cf. dva-, ^7r-ava-, vtto- 
IxifjLv^a-KOi. The tenses of this verb are from the older /ivaoyLiat).t 

fiiCT^w, -w, [in LXX chiefly for N3C7 ;] to hate : c. ace. pers. 

Mt 5*3 241^ Lk 171 622, 5!T^ 19U_ Jo 77 1518,19,23-25 lyu^ Tit 33, I Jo 29.11 

313,15 420^ Re I716; pass., Mt IO22 24^, Mk 13i3, Lk 211^; c. ace. rei, 
Jo 320, Eo 715, Eph 5'-9, He 1^, Ju23, Re 26; pass., Ee 182. As the 
Heb. K3^ is sometimes found with the modified sense of indifference 

to or relative disregard for one thing in comparison with another 
(cf. Ge 29?", 31^ De 2I15. le, Ma 13) so prob. fi. in the foil. : Mt 62*, 
Lk 1426 1613^ Jo 122\ Eo 9i3 (•L-^x).t 



294 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

*t p,ia6airo8oaia, -as, 17 (<^ /aict^os, uTroSiSw/xi ; cl. jJUfrOohoa-'ia) , pdy- 
vient of wages, recomperise ; meton., (a) of reward: He 10^^ 11^"; 
(b) of punishment : He 2^.f 

*t fi,ia0-aTro-8<5TT]s, -ov, 6, (v. supr.), one who pays wages ; meton., a 
rewarder : He 11*. t 

t^iOxetos, -a, -ov (also -OS, -ov), [in LXX : Le IQ^^A 255o, Jb 7' 
(TDt;r), To 511, Si 710 31 (34)22 3711*;] hired; as subst., 5 fi., a hired 
servant: Lk IS^^, 19.21 (Anth., Plut.).t 

fiiCT06s, -ou, o, [in LXX chiefly for "IS^T,"] 1. prop., wages, hire: 

Mt 208, Lk 107, Ro 4*, I Ti 518, Ja 5*, Ju 11 ; fx. dSiKi'as, Ac l^^, n Pe 2^3 
(but V. Mayor and ICC, in 1.), ib. ^^. 2. Generally, reward : Jo 4^^, 
I Co 918; esp. of divine rewards, Mt 5^2 6i'2.5,i6 I04i,42^ Mk 9*^, 
Lk 623.35^ I Co 38.1*, II Jo 8, Ee 1118 2212; -^,^^ ^_^ Mt 5*^, i Co Qi^.t 

|xiCT06a), -w «;/i,ia6'os), [in LXX (mid.) chiefly for IDtzr;] to let 
otitfor hire. Mid., to hire : c. ace, Mt 201'''.+ 

fii(r0(u,ia, -Tos, to «/Aio-^dto), [in LXX: De 23i8(i9), Mi 1', 
Ez 1631.34,41 (^zjy^), ib33 (n-j3, |"T3), ib.32, Pr 1913*;] I. price, hire 

(cl., and LXX). 2. In sense not found elsewhere, a hired dwelling : 
Ac 2830.+ 

/xi<r0a)T<5s, -■>?, ov, «/xio-^oa)), [in LXX for TDK?, Ex 12«, al.;] 

hired; as subst., 6 /x., a hired servant, hireling : Mk P", Jo 1012. i3.t 
MiTuXTiKT), -T/s, 17 (late form — Strab., Plut. — of cl. MunA-), 

Mytilene, Mitylene, chief city of Lesbos : Ac 20i*.+ 

MixariX, 6, indecl. (Heb. bN3"'P , who like God ?), Michael, the 

Archangel (cf. Da 12i) : Ju ^ Re 12^.+ 

[iva, -as, 17 (a Semitic word ; cf. Heb. nja , Aram. X3p , a weight 

and a sum of money = 100 shekels, cf. iii Ki IQi''), a mina (Lat.), 
mna, in Attic a weight and sum of money = 100 Spax/xat (q.v.) : Lk 

2913, 16, 18,20, 24, 25_f 

\iv6.oy.ai, V.S. ixLfiVTja-Kw. 

Mcdo-wf, -wvos, 6, Mnason : Ac 21i®.+ 

ficcia, -as, r} {<^ixifx.vri(TK(M), [in LXX for IDT , its parts and deriva- 
tives;] remembrance, mention (= fLvrj^ri) : Phi 13; ^. TroulaOai, c. gen. 
pers., Eo l^, Eph V\ i Th 1^, Phm * (cf. Ps 110 (111)*) ; /x. ^x^tv, c. 
gen. pers., i Th 3^ 11 Ti 13 (on the v.l. in Eo 12i3, v. ICG, in 1.; Field, 
Notes, 163).+ 

' p,ffjfia, -TOS, TO (■<^ ju,vao/i.ai) , [in LXX for ISp. , rrniSp ;] 1. a 

memorial. 2. a sepulchral monument, a septilchre, tomb : Mk 53> ^ 
1546 102 (WH, ^vr^fxfiov), Lk 827 2353 241, Ac 229 7i«, Ee 1P.+ 

SYN. : jxvrjfjiiLov. 

fii'TjfjLetoi', -ov, TO, [in LXX for l^p. , HlOp ;] 1. a memorial, record 
(cl., cf. Wi 10^). 2. (a) (cl.) a monument : Lk 11*^ ; {b) a r^pulchre, tomb 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 295 

(Ge 23«. 9, Is 22i«, al.) : Mt 2329, Mk 52, Lk 11**, Jo 528, and freq. in 
Gospels, Ac 1329. 

SYN. : fivrjfjLa. 

(inijiT), -17s, ^ (-c^/xvaofiai), [in LXX for 15|, fn3T;] memory, 

remembrance, mention: /jl. troi.€La-dai, c. gen., to remember, 11 Pe 1^* 
(but in cl., IT., fx. TT. more freq. = to make mention, and so perh. here, cf. 
Mayor, in 1. ; and for ex. from tt., v. Zorell, 8.v.).t 

SYN. : /Avcta, q.v. 

fii'T))xoi'€uw (<^ /i.vi7/i.a)v, mindful), [in LXX for 1D7;] 1. to call to 
mind, remember: absol., Mk 8^^; q gen. pers., Lk 17^2^ CqI 4^^ 

I Th 13, He 111' (but V. infr.) 13^ ; t. Trre^x^", Ga 22o ; c. gen. rei, Jo 
1520 154,21^ ^Q 20^^; c. ace. obj. (as more freq. in cl.), of persons, 11 Ti 
28; of things, Mt 16^, i Th 29, Ee IS^; seq. ^rt, Ac 20^1, Eph 2>i, 

II Th 2"; iroOev, Ee 2^; Trws, ib. 3^. 2. to make mention of : c. gen.. 
He 1116 (but V. supr., and cf. M, Th., i, l^) ; seq. inpi. He 1122.t 

jxnfjixoorui'ov, -ov, to (<^ /xv^/acov, mindful), [in LXX freq. for 
15T , ]n37 and cogn. forms ;] a memorial : Mt 26^3, Mk 14^, Ac 10* 
(where cf. Le 29.16 512^ ^u 526, Si 45i6, al.).t 

fii'TjoTeuw, [in LXX for iyix pi., pu. ;] 1. to tvoo and win, espouse. 
2. to promise in marriage, betroth; pass., of the woman, to be be- 
trothed : c. dat. pers., Mt lis, Lk 127 2*.t 

fioyyi-XaXos, V.S. /ioyiXaXos. 
t^oYi-X(£Xos, -ov (<MoVs, XaXos), [in LXX: Is 35» (Q^N)*;] 

speaking with difficulty : Mk 7^2 (Tr., txt., /loyytXaXos, thick-voiced, 
V. Swete, in l.).t 

**ii6yLs, adv. «Atoyos, toil), [in LXX: Wi Qi^nA (^xo'Xis, B), 

III Mac 76 * ;] ivith toil or difficulty, hardly : Lk 9^^ (/xo'Xi?, WH).t 

tjAoixaXis, -t'Sos, 17 (= Att. fxoix"-^, fern, of /i.ot;(os), [in LXX: Pr 
1822 2455(3020), Ez 1638 23*5, Ho 31, Ma 3^ (ng^Ji, ng)N3p)*;] an 

adulteress : Eo 7^ ; meton., for ^loix'^La, 11 Pe 2i*. Metaph., of infidelity 
to God (cf. Ez 1615 «', 23*=^ ^•, al.), Ja 4* ; as an adj., Mt 12^9 16*, Mk 88.t 

jioixaw, -w (= cl. ixoLxivoi), [in LXX (mid., absol. and c. ace, 
with party of either sex as subj.) : Je 38 5^ 79 92 d' 23i* 36 (29)23, Ez 16^2 
2337. 43 (qx3) * ;] to commit adultery with : c. ace. fem. In NT always 
mid. in same sense; of the man : absol., Mt 532 3^99 (WH, txt., E, mg., 
om.); seq. ctt' auTJ?v, Mk lOH; of the woman : Mk 10i2.t 

fioixcta, -as, 17 «;iotxeiJw), [in LXX: Ho 22'*' (Q-'eiSXJ), 42 

(P1N3), Je 1327 (D^SS*:), Wi 142«*;] adultery: Jo 8 [3]; pi. (v. WM, 

220; Bl, § 32, 6), Mt 15i9, Mk 72i.t 

^oixeiJw (</>iotxos), [in LXX: Ex 2018, Le 20io, al. (^jXa);] to 
commit adultery : absol., Mt 527 1918, Mk 10i9, Lk I6I8 182", Eo 222 
139, Ja 211 ; c. ace. fern., Mt 528. Pass., of the woman, Mt 532 199 
WH, mg.), Jo 8t*^. Metaph., of idolatry (v.s. uoixaXi's, and cf. Je 39, al.), 
seq. ii.iT aur^s, Ee 222.+ 



296 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

fioi,x<5s, -ov, 6, [in LXX for nxj ;] an adulterer : Lk 18^^ i Co 6^ 
He 13^t 

fioXis, adv. (<^/Ao\os, toil), post-Horn, alternative for /xdyis, [in 
LXX : Pr ll^i, Wi 9^\ al. ;] with difficulty, hardly, scarcely : Lk Q^o 

(T, y^oyis), Ac 148 27^8,16^ Ro 57^ I Pe 418(LXX).t 

MoXox, 6, indecl. (Heb. '^[^b , prop. "JJ^lp , King, but vocalized to 
read nCTS , shame, cf . BaaX, and v. DB, iii, 415 f.), Moloch, the god of 
the Ammonites : Ac 7'*^ (i^x) f 

)Lo\6vu>, [in LXX : Ge ^V^ (bnia), Is 593 f^^^ ni.)^ ^a 142 ^^^^XO 
ni.), Si 21^8, al.;] to stoiw, soil, defile; in NT always symb. and fig. : 

I Co 8^ Ee 3* 144.t 

SYN. : fxtaivoi, q.v. 
t^oXua^ios, -oS, 6 «/ioXwa>), [in LXX: Je 23i5 (nSjq), i Es 883, 

II Mac 527*;] defilement : c. gen. obj., 11 Co 7^ (Plut., FlJ).t 

■* (ioficj)!], ^s, 17 (<^yu.£/u,^o/Aai), poet, form of /Ae/xt/^is, blame, com- 
plaint : Col 3i3.t 

**|xo^i^, -^s, 77 «/xevo)), [in LXX: i Mac 738*;] i [^ cl, (a) a 
staying, abiding ; (b) continuance (LXX, I.e.). 2. In late Gk., (a) a 
station (Paus.) ; (b) an abode : Jo 14^' 2=^ ; (c) a monastery (cf. MM, iii, 
xvi; so in MGr.).t 

/io^oYe»'iis, -£s «/>ioVos, ycVos), [in LXX: Jg 1134, pg 21(22)2° 
24(25)16 34 (35)17 (th;). To 31^ SiO'i* 8i7, Wi 722, Ba 416*;] only, only 

begotten {DCG, ii, 281), of sons and daughters : Lk 712 8*2 938, He lli^; 
of Christ, Jo 316'18, l Jo 4^; fi. napa. Trarpos, Jo 11*; fi. Oeos, ib. i8.t 

p.dfOC, V.S. fJLOVO?. 

jiocos, -rj, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for 13^;] 1. adj., alone, solitary, 
forsaken : c. verb., Mt 1423, jyfjj 547^ Lk 936^ ^1. ; c. pron., Mt 18i5, 
Mk 92, al. ; c. subst., Mk 98, Lk 48, al.; pleonast., ovk . . . ct /ai) /x., 
Mt U\ Lk 6\ al. ; attrib., only, (6) fx.. 6^6^, Jo 5*4 173, Eo 162^, i Ti li7, 
Ju 25. 2. As adv., (a) neut., (xovov, alone, only : referring to verb or 
predic, Mt 921, Mk 536, ja 122^ al. (v. Bl., § 44, 2) ; ov (fi^) /x., Ga 418, 
Ja 122 ; ov fi. . . . aWd (Bl, § 77, 133), Ac 192^, i Jo 5^, al. ; id. seq. 
Kat (Bl., § 81, I2), Eo 53 910, II Co 819, al. ; (b) Kara /Awas, alone (Bl., 
§ 44, 1), Mk 410, Lk 918. 

* |jiof-6<J)0a\fx.os, -ov {<C fJ'Ovo'i), Ionic and koiv^, one-eyed, having one 
eye : Mt 18^, Mk 9*7.1 

** |jio>'6u, -w (-< /xdvos), [in Aq. : Ge 49® ;] to leave alone, forsake : 
of a childless widow, pf. ptcp. pass., i Ti 5^.f 

^op<t>Ti, -^s, ^, [in LXX: Jg 8I8A (ijcn), Jb 416 (n:nar)), Is 4413 

{rr2^). Da LXX 319 (D^y), Da TH 433 56.9.10 728 (^,^)^ To 113, Wi I81, 

IV Mac 15**;] form, shape, appearance (Horn., Eur., ^sch., al. ); in 
philos. lang. the specific character or essential /orm (Arist., v. Gifford, 
Inc., 26 if.) : Mk 16ti23, Phi 26' ^.t 

Sfn. : fx6p<f>(a(Ti<;, the outline, delineation, semblance of the 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 297 

fiop(f>i^, as distinct from the /u. itself (Lft., Notes, 262) ; a-xrjfjia., shape, 
fashion, disting. from fiopffnij as the outward and accidental from the 
inward and essential (cf. Tr., Syn., §lxx; Lft., Phi., 125 ff.; Gifford., 
Inc., I.e.). 

**t (iop«|><5ti», -w {<C.iJLop<fiTi), [in Aq. : Is 44^3 *;] to form : fig., Ga 4^^ 
(cf. fiera-, <TVfx-fJiOpcf>6(i}).f 

*+ fi<5p<(>w(ns, -£0)5, 7} «i fwp4>6<D), 1. a forming, shaping (Theophr.). 
2. form, outline, semblance : Eo 2^^ ; opp. to Swa/its, u Ti 3*.t 
Syn. : p.op<firj (q.V.), (TxrjfJLa. 

*t (Aocrxo-Troi^w, -w, to make a calf (as an image) : Ac 7*^ (LXX, 

fx(i(rxos, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for "ip , also for 11127 , bjT , etc. ;] 

1. a young shoot or twig. 2. 5, 17, p.., offspring; (a) of men; {b) of 
animals; most freq. (as always in LXX), a calf, bullock, heifer : Lk 
1523,27,30^ HeQi'-i'i^, Ee4^.t 

^ouaiKiJs, -7;, -w, [in LXX : Ge SV\ Ez 26i3 (i^bt), Da LXX th 

36 ff. (i^pi), Si 22", al. ;] skilled in the arts, esp. in music; as subst., 

6 p.., a minstrel, musician : Ee IS-^.t 

fiox^os, -ov, 6 (= Horn. /Aoyos), in cl. chiefly poet., [in LXX for 
nxbpi , bnv , etc. ;] toil, laborer, hardship, distress : 11 Co ll^^, i Th 2^, 
II Th 38.t 

Syn. .' KOTTOS (q.V.), TTOfOS. 

^U6X(59, -o5, 6, [in LXX: Ge 45i8 (n>n), Jb 212* (na) 332**;] 
marrow : He 4^2 f 

**(iu^<i>, -w (•< uv(o, ^0 shut the mouth), [in LXX: iii Mac 2^*'*;] 
to initiate into the mysteries (so chiefly in cl. ; LXX, I.e.) ; hence, 
to instruct : pass.. Phi 4^2 (RV, I have learned the secret).^ 

**|uioeos, -ov, 6, [in LXX: Wi 17^ A, Si 20^9 *;] 1. speech, con- 
versation. 2. (a) a story, narrative (Hom.) ; {b) later, opp. to Xoyos 
{a true narrative) = Lat. fabula, a myth, fable, fiction : i Ti 1* 4^^, 
II Ti 4*, Tit 114, II pe iie^t 
Syn. : Xdyos, q.V. 

** p,uic(io(jiai, -dp-ai, in cl. chiefly poet., [in Sm. : Jb 6^ * ;] prop., of 
oxen (onomatop.), to low, bellow ; of a lion, to roar : Ee lO^.t 

fAUKTT]pit« {<^p.vKTrjp, the uose), [in LXX: iv Ki I921, Jb 22^9, 
Ps 79 (80)«, al. {2sh), Pr l^" (|^X3) IS^o (nTH), i Mac 7^*, al. ;] to turn 
up the nose or sneer at, mock : pass., Ga &^ (cf. iK-p.vKTrjpLCw).f 

*+ /iuXiK<5s, -T/, -ov (<[ pivXr], a mill), of a mill : \l6o<; p.., Lk I72.+ 

*tfiuXn/os, -rj, -ov {<C.pvXo<;), 1. made of mill-stone {C.I. 3371). 

2. = /tuXiKo's : Ee IS^i (jivkov, T).t 

t^jJXos, -ov, b, [in LXX for D^H!:) , Nu ll^, De 24", al. ;] 1. = pLvXy, 

a mill (Strab., Plut., LXX): Mt 24", Ee I822. 2. a mill-stone 
(Anth.) : Ee I821 (T) ; p,. ovlkos, Mt 18«, Mk 9*2 (v. Swete, in l.).t 

fiuXwj', -tovos, 6, [in LXX : Je 52^1 *;] a mill-house : Mt 24*^ 
(Eec.; fivXoi, WH, E).t 



298 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Mu'pa, Mvppa (LT, Tr., WH), -wv, rd, Myra, a city of Lvcia: 
Ac 27^+ 

fiupids, -aSos, 17 «/-iv/3tos), [in LXX chiefly for n;!^"!;] ten 

thousand, a myriad: pi., Ac 19^^, Ee 5^^ 9^^; hyperb., of vast 
numbers, Lk 12\ Ac 21^^ He 12^2, Ju i^.t 

*iLvpit,(a {<^fx,vpov), Ionic and poet, (comic), to anoint : Mk 14^.t 

Syy^. : v.s. dAci^w, and cf. fivpov. 

(iupios, -a, -ov, 1. numberless, countless, infinite : i Co 4^^ 14^^ 
2. As a definite numeral, in pi., p.vpioi, -ai, -a, ten thousand : Mt 18'^*.+ 

liu'po*', -ov, TO, [in LXX chiefly for ]p2r , Pr 27», Ps 132 (133)2, 

al.;] ointment: Mt 267.12, Mk 143-5, l^ T^^.ss.ie 23^6, Jo IP 123. ^ 
Ee 18i3.t 

SVJSr. : iXaiov, q.v. 

Mu'ppa, V.s. Mvpa. 

Muaia, -as, r/, Mysia, a province of Asia Minor : Ac 16^' ^.t 

^ocrrViptov', -ov, to {<p.vioi), [in LXX : Da LXX th 2^^^- (T^), To 
127' 11, jth 22, Wi 222 6-2 1415,23, Si 318 2222 27i«.i7.2i, II Mac I321*;] 
1. tliat which is known to the p.va-Tr]<; (initiated), a mystery or secret 
doctrine, mostly in pi., Ta p,. (^sch., Hdt., al.). 2. In later vrriters 
(Menand., Incert., 168), that which may not be revealed (not, however, 
as in the modern sense, intrinsically difficult to understand), a secret 
or mystery of any kind (To, Jth, 11 Mac, 11. c). 3. In NT, of the 
counsels of God (cf. Th. : Jb 15^ Ps 24 (25)1^ for TiD), once hidden but 
now revealed in the Gospel or some fact thereof ; (a) of the Christian 
revelation generally : Eo 162^, i Co 2\ Col 126.27, Eph 33. 9 ; t. ^ao-tWas 
T. Beov, Mk 411 ; T. e^ov, I Co 21, Ee 10" ; t. 6., Xpia-Tod, Col 22 ; t. Xpiarod, 
Col 43, Eph 3* ; t. BcXripxiTos airoi, Eph 1« ; t. emyycXt'or, Eph 61^ ; 
T. TTto-Tcws, I Ti 3^ ; T. cuo-e^eiaq, ib. 16 ; (b) of particular truths, or 
details, of the Christian revelation : Eo 1125, i Co 155i, Eph 532, „ Th 
2\ Ee 120 175.7; pi., Ta /x., I Co 132 142; eeoi, I Co 41 ; r. Paatkua-i 
T. ovpav^v (deoi), Mt 13", Lk S'^ (cf. Westc, Ej^h., 180 fif.; AE, Eph., 
234 ff. ; Lft., Col., 165 f. ; Hatch, Essays, 57 f. ; DB, iii, 465 ff. ; DOG, 
ii, 213 ff.).t 

MuTiXr^nfj, V.S. MiTvX-^vr]. 
♦+ jiu-wirdj^w (<^ /i.ucDi/', closi7ig the eyes, short-sighted; <^/xva), wi/^), 
to be short-sighted : 11 Pe P (E, mg., closing his eyes ; v. ICC, in 1.).+ 
p,w\a)\|», -wTTos, 6, [in LXX for rnmo, Ex 2125, q\.-j q, bruise, 

wound from a stripe : i Pe 2^*^^^^'> (Arist., Plut., al.).+ 

|iw(j.clo|jiai, -u)p.aL (<^/xwju,os), poet. and late prose, [in LXX: 

Pr 97 (maj, Wi IQi*, Si 31 (34)i8*;] to find fault with, blame: 

II Co 82" ; pass., ib. 63.t 

fAu|ios, -OV, 6, [in LXX, of physical blemishes : Le 21^7 ff-, De I521, 

Ca 47, al. (mD) ; of mental defect, Si 202*, ^1. ;] 1. in cl. poets and late 

prose, blame, disgrace. 2. In LXX, perh. because of resemblance to 

DID, a physical blemish (cf. a/Awptos, i Pe 1^^, and v. Hort., in 1.) ; 

metaph., of licentious persons, 11 Pe 2i3.t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT '299 

liuipaivui «yLta.po's), [in LXX : Is 19^\ Je 10" 28 (51)i7 (-lya ni.), 
II Ki 241^ Is 4425 E (^DD ni., pi.)*;] 1- cl., to be foolish, play the 
fool. 2. LXX and NT, causal, to make foolish: i Co l^*'; pass., to 
become foolish : Ro 1^^ ; of salt that has lost its flavour, become taste- 
less : Mt 513, Lk 143*.t 

**fA«pia, -as, rj {<^ix(Dp6<s), [in LXX: Si 20^^*;] foolishness: 

I Co 118,21,23 214 319,t 

* /icjpoXoyia, -as, 17, foolish talking : Eph 5*.t 
|i,(i>p6s, -a, -dv, [in LXX for ^23 , etc. ; freq. in Si. ;] 1. prop., of 

the nerves, dull, sluggish (Hipp., Arist.). 2. Of the mind, dull, 
stupid, foolish : Mt S^^ (v. Field, Notes, 3 ff.) V^ 23i7. i9 (T, WH, txt., R, 
om.) 252.3.8, I Co 318 410 ; of things, TrapdSoai^, Mk 7^^ (T, WH, txt., E, 
om.) : ^>/TT?o-cis, II Ti 22^, Tit 3® ; t6 /x. t. Oeov, i Co 1^^ ; ra fx. r. Koa-fiov, 
ib.27.t 

M<i)uo-r]s (Ma)i3o-^s, T ; Mwcr^s, Eec), -c'ws, dat. -rj (as LXX : Ex S^'^, 
al.), and -el, ace. -^v {»r LXX) and -ea (Lk 16^^ only), (Heb. nizra), 

ifoses .- Mt 8* 173. *, al. ; vd/xos Moouo-cV, Lk 222 24*^ Jo 72^, Ac 1339 
155 28^3, I Co 99, He 1028; by meton., of the books of Moses, Lk 1629 
2427, Ac 1521, II Co 31^ 

N 

N, V, No, Nu, n, the thirteenth letter. As a numeral, v = 50, 
V, = 50,000. 

NaaaacSc, 6, indecl. (Heb. |ir2rn3), Naasson : Mt 1*, Lk 332.+ 

Nayyai, 6, indecl., Naggai : Lk 32^.+ 

Naiapd (Mt 413— L, -a^— Lk 4l«), Na^ape'^ (Mt 21", Ac 1038), 
Na^apcT (so always Eec. ; WH, in foil, instances, where -id, T), >/, 
indecl. (Semitic form uncertain), Nazareth : Mt 223, Mk 1^, Lk 1^^ 

24,39,51^ Jq 145, 46 + 

Na^aprji'ds, -ov, o, (on the Semitic form, v. Dalman, Gr., 141 n.), 

a Nazarene : Mk 12* 10*^ 14«7 166, l^ 434 2419.+ 

Na^wpaios, -ov, 6 (= -prjv6<s, q.v.), a Nazarene: Mt 223 (i^X) 26^1^ 
Lk 1837, Jo 185.7 1919, Ac 222 3« 41*^ 61^ 228 24^ 26^.+ 

HaQdfi (Eec. Na^av), o, indecl. (Heb. ]ri3), Nathan : Lk 33i.+ 
Na0ai'aTi\, 6, indecl. (Heb. ^Njrij), Nathanael, prob. to be identi- 
fied with Bartholomew (q.v.) : Jo l*^-*^ 212.+ 

mt, particle of affirmation, yea, verily, even so ; in answer to a 
question : Mt 928 13^1 172^ 21i6, Jo IF^ 21i5, le, Ac 58 2227, Eo S^s 
seq. Aeyo) vfuv, Mt 11®, Lk 72^ ; repeated for emphasis, vol vol (opp 
to ov ov) : Mt 537 ; rp-bi vfiiav to val vol, Ja 512 • ^ ^^^^ q»^ jj Qq ]^18, 19 
tva •^ . . . TO vai vat, ib. ^7 ; to v., ib. ''"* ; in assent to an assertion 
Mt 1527, Mk 728, Ee 14^3 157. jq confirmation of a previous assertion 
Mt 112«, Lk 1021 1151 125, Pill 43^ Phm20; in solemn asseveration 
Ee 17 2220.+ 



300 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Naifidf (Eec. l>it€/xdv), 6, indecl. (Heb. ^V;), Naaman : Lk 4".t 
NaiV (Eec. NaiV), ^, indecl. (Heb. I'^iii), Nain, a village of Galilee : 

Lk 7".t 

meJs, -ov, 6, (Att. i/€ws; <^ vat'w, to inhabit), [in LXX (vtoi?, 

u Mac 62, al.) chiefly for ^yn ;] 1. a temple (Horn., Find., al.). 

2. The inmost part of a temple, the shrine (Hdt., Xen., al.) ; in NT, 
(a) generally : pi., Ac 17^^ ; of silver models of a heathen shrine, 
Ac 19^^ ; (b) of the temple building proper, or sanctiiary, at Jerusalem, 
as distinct from t. lepov (q.v.), the whole temple enclosure : Mt 
2316,17,35 275, 4o_ Mk 14^8 1529, Jo 21^,20^ Ee IP; {rov) 6eoi, Mt 26«i 
27^1, Mk 1538, Lk 19.21,22 23«, i Co 3^\ ii Co 6^\ ii Th 2*, Ee ll^; 
of the temple in the Apocal. visions, Ee 312 71^ ll^^ U^^' ^^ IS^. «- s 
161,17 2122a Metaph., of Christians, i Co 31" Q^\ 11 Co 6^\ Eph 2^1; 
of Christ's body, Jo 2^1 (cf. ib. i^) ; 6 ^cos v. aur^? ^o-nv, Ee 21^2^.+ 

Srjv. : Upov. 

Naou'/x, 6, indecl. (Heb. Qin3), Nahum, : Lk S^^.t 

KupSos, -ou, 17 (Heb. "TIJ , both from Sanscrit tiarda, v. Boisacq, 

S.V.), [in LXX: Ca 1^2 413, u (rng)*;] nard; (a) an Indian plant, the 

Nardostachys nardus jatamansi, used for the preparation of a fragrant 
ointment ; (b) ointment of nard : Mk 14^, Jo 123.t 
NdpKtCTCTos, -ov, 6, Narcissus : Eo 16^^. t 

*yauaye(a, -w {<:^vav<s, + ayvvfii, to break), to suffer shipwreck: 
II Co 112^ ; metaph., seq. irepl t. ttlo-tlv, i Ti l^^.t 

* mu'-KXifjpos, -ov, 6 (<^vai}s, KXrjpos), a shipowner, shipmaster: 
Ac 27ii.t 

Kaus, veto?, acc. vaDv, •7, [in LXX for "'Jh? , iV2ii ;] a ship : Ac 27*^ 

(elsewhere in NT always t. TrXorov ; v. M, Pr., 25 f. ; Bl., Gosp., 186 f.).t 
** muTTjs, -ou, 6 (<^ vaDs), [in Aq. : Ez 27^ ; Sm. : ib. 2^ *;] a seaman, 
sailor : Ac 272"' ^o, Ee IS^^.t 

Naxoip, o, indecl. (Heb. IITO), Nahor : Lk S^^.t 

I'cacias, -ou, 6 (<^ vedv = vc'os), [in LXX for "lyj , ^IPI^ ;] a yoking 
man : Ac 7^8 20^ 231^. i8.t 

keai'icTKos, -ov, 6 (dimin. of veavtas), [in LXX chiefly for "lyj , also 
for mnn, etc ;] a yoimg man, youth : Mt 1920-22, Mk 14^^ 16^ Lk 7'*, 
Ac 21- (LXX) 2318,22^ I Jo 213.14; of an attendant (cf. Ge 142^ al.) : 
Ac Sio.t 

Ned-jToXis, -€W9, 17, Eec. for Nc'a ndXts (WH), the more freq. form 
(LS, S.V.), Neajjolis, a maritime city of Macedonia : Ac 16ii.t 

NcEfJidf, V.S. Nai/xav. 

KCKpos, -a, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for nO;j dead, I. as adj., 1. 
prop. : Ac 510 209, Ja 226, jje lis, al.; (btriL v., Mt 28*, Mk 92«, Ee l^^; 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 301 

of that which is subject to death, Eo S^*'. 2. Metaph., (a) of persons : 
Lk 15^*'^^; of those immersed in worldly cares, Mt 8^^, Lk 9"°; of 
spiritual death, Jo 5^^, Eo 6^^, Eph 5^*, Ee 3^; t. ■jrapairTiofiaa-iv, Eph 
2^' ^, Col 2^^ ; of the opposite condition, v. t^ dfiapTia, Eo 6^^ ; (b) of 
things regarded as inoperative, devoid of power : afxaprCa, Eo 7^ ; 
TTto-Tis, Ja 217.26; ipya. He 6i Qi". II. As subst., vcKpo's, 6 (Hom., al.), 
chiefly in pi. {pi) v., the dead : Mt 11^, Mk 122«, Lk 20", i Co IS^s, al. ; 
di/tto-Tao-ts (t.) vc/cp^v, Mt 2231, Ac 1732, al. ; V. . . . ^Svtcs, Mt 22^2, Mk 
1227, Ac 10*2, al. ; dir^ v€Kpwy, Lk IG^o ; iK v., Mk 6", Lk 24*6, Jq 121, 
Ac 133*, Eo 107, al.; TrpcoroVoKos iK Twv v., Col 118; ^ojr] ck v., Eo 1115; 
constr. praegn., eV v. ^wvtcs, Eo 6'3. 

*t>'eKp6(D, w (<;v€Kpos), io wafee (iead, put to death; pass., ^0 be 
dead: hyperbolically, of impotent age, He lli^; aw/xa, Eo 41^. 
Trop., of carnal impulses, to. fii\rj, Col 3^.+ 

*t feKpoKTiSt -ews, r) (<^ i/eKpow), 1. a putting to death. 2. a stofe 0/ 
dmi/i, death : Eo 4l^ 11 Co 410 (v. Deiss., LAE, 94). t 

fcofiTjcia (Att. contr., vov/x-, Eec), -as, 17 {<C^^os, p-'rjv), [in LXX 
chiefly for l&"in ;] new moon : of the Jewish festival, Col 2i6.t 

vio^, -a, -ov, [in LXX for •ir3 (Ge 372, Ex 33ii, al.), min (Le 23i«, 

Nu 2826, al.), etc. ; compar. -oirepos for ]b(? , TITS , etc. ;] 1. young, 

youthful : Tit 2*. 2. ?iew (prop., in respect of time; v.s. xaivos) : otvos 
(cf. oT. /caivds. Mt 262*-'), Mt 917, Mk 222, Lk 5^^-m ■ ^{.papa (fig.), I Co 57; 
haOriKT) (cf. KdLvr] 8., He 91^), He 122*; metaph., dv^pwTro? (cf. <caivos d., 
Eph 215), Col 31*^. 3. Compar., -uyrepo<;, -a, -ov, younger: Lk 15i2'i3 
222«, Jo 2118; pi., ol v., Ac 5^ (Eackham, in 1.), iTi 511, Tit 2^; opp. to 
vpea-^vTepoi, I Ti 51, I Pe 5^; at v., I Ti 52' i*. 4. Nca HoXts, NeapoUs : 
Ac 1611 (Jtec, NcaTToXts, q.v.). 

Srw. : Katvds, q.v. 

V€0(T(t6s, v.s. vocrcros. 

i/co-njs, -ijTos, 17 (<^v€os), [in LXX chiefly for D^"liy3;] youth: 

Mk 1020, Lk 1821, Ac 26*, i Ti 4i2.t 

v6(5-4.uTos, -ov «v£'os, ^vu>), [In LXX: Jb 149, pg 143(144)12^ 

Is 57 (yius), Ps 127 (128)3 (^^r\}S) *;] newly-planted (LXX). Metaph., 

as subst., o v.,a new convert, neophyte, novice : i Ti 3®.t 

N^pwi', -wvo<;, 6, Nero : 11 Ti subscr. (Eec.).t 

viuu, [in LXX : Pr 4^ 21i * ;] to nod or beckon, as a sign : c. dat. 
pers. et inf., Jo I32*, Ac 24io (cf. 8ta-, ck-, iv, kin-, KaTa-v£ua>).t 

fctlt^XT), -T/s, T) «v€'<^os), [in LXX chiefly for ]:y, also forny, 

etc. ;] a cloud (single and specific as opp. to vee^os, a great indefinite 
mass of vapour) : Mt 17^ 243" 26^*, Mk 97 I326 14^2, Lk 93*. as 1354 
2137, Ac 19, 1 Th 417, Ju 12, Ee 17 IQi II12 14i*-i6 ; of the pillar of cloud 
in the wilderness (Ex 14i»'2o, Pg 1043^, al.) : i Co 10i'2.t 

N€4)0aX€ifi (-Xtp., WH in Ee, I.e.), 6, indecl. (Heb. '^briB3), 

Naphtali: Mt 4i3. i^ (LXi), Ee 76.t 



302 MANUAL GEEBK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

vii^os, -OV9, TO, [in LXX for ny , pOt? , 15^ ;] o, mass of clouds, 

a cloud (cf. v€(f)€\T]) ; metaph. (as in Horn., Hdt., al.), of a dense throng : 
He 12i.t 

v€^p6s, -oi, 6, [in LXX for n^^S , Ex 29^^^ al. ; metaph., Ps 7«, 

15(16)'' 25(26)2, Wi 1", al. ;] a kidney; pi, the kidneys, reins; 
metaph., of the will and affections : v. koI KapStai (thoughts), 
Ee 223.t 

* v€(a-K6pos, -ov, a temple-keeper ; as honorary title given to a city 
(v. DB, i, 722 b) : Ac ig^^.t 

**t ►'cuTcpiKOS, -rj, -6v (<] vecorepos), [in LXX : III Mac 4^*;] = veaviKo's, 

youthful, esp. of qualities: iiridvfMLaL, ii Ti 2^^ (Polyb.).t 

CCUTCpoS, V.S. V€0?. 

vr\, particle of affirmation employed in oaths, [in LXX : v. t. 
vyUiav, Ge 4215' i« (^n)*;] by: c. ace, i Co 153i.t 

v^Q<o, [in LXX for niip , "ITIZT hoph., Ex 26^1 3525, al. ;] to spin : 

Mt 628, Lk 1227.t 

* vr]iri6.l(a (■< vi^ttios), (Hippocr., = vrjviaxevtiy, Hom.), to be a babe: 
I Co 142o.t 

I'^TTios, -a, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for bbiy, also for ''lys, etc.;] 

infant; of children and minors: Mt 2116(Lxx)^ i Co 13^\ Ga 4^ (v. 
Lft., in 1.). Metaph., childish, unskilled, simple (Ps 18 (19)^, Pr l^ii', 
al.) : Mt 112 5, Lk m^\ Eo 22o, Ga 4^, Eph 4:^\ i Th 2^ (WH, for 
ijiTLOt.) ; opp. to reXetos, He 5^^ ; V. iv XpicTTW, I Co 3^.t 

NTjpei (Eec. -pC), 6, indecl. (Heb. i13), Neri : Lk 327.+ 

Ntjpeus, -e'cos, o, Nereus : Eo 16^5.+ 
*+ yy]<Tiov, -ov, to (dimin. of vrjaos), = vr/crts (Hdt., Thuc, al.), a 
small island : Ac 27i*.t 

naos, -ov, 6, [in LXX for ^K ;] an island : Ac 13« 2726 28^' 7' »» ^S ' 

Ee P 614 1620.+ 

i'T]crT6ia, -as, 17 (•< vi^orevw), [in LXX for n\'2 'i\ fasting , a fast ; 
(a) of voluntary abstinence from food : Mt I721 (WH, E, txt., om.), 
Mk 929 (WH, txt., E, txt., om.), Lk 2^7, Ac 1423; of the Day of 
Atonement, Ac 27^ ; {b) of involuntary abstinence : 11 Co 6^ 1127.+ 

Syn. : do-LTia, q.v. 

vt](TTiuu (<^v7}crTis), [lu LXX for UI'S ',] to fast (Arist., Aristoph., 
al.) : Mt 42 616-18 914, 15^ ^^ 218-20, Lk S^^-ss 1312, Ac 132' 3,+ 

I'TJoTis, -los, 6, 17 (•<[ vr]-, neg. prefix, + iadiui), in cl., chiefly poet., 

[in LXX: Da LXX 6i8<i»' (DIK))*;] not eating, fasting: Mt 15^2, 

Mk 83.+ 

* i'r]<|>dXios (-Xcos, Eec, in i Ti, 11. c), -ov (in cl., -a, -ov), «;v7;<^w), 
1. in cl., of drink, not mixed with wine. 2. In later writers (Plut., 
al.), of persons, sober, temperate: i Ti 32' n, Tit 22.+ 

* vi\^<ji, to be sober, abstain from wine ; metaph., of moral alert- 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 303 

ness, to be sober, calm, circumspect : i Th 5^' s, u Ti 4* (v. Ellic, in 
l), I Pe V^ 4^ 5* (cf. dva-, iK-urjcfxD, and v. MM, xvii).t 

SyN' •' iypyrrveu), yp-qyopita, 

Niyep, 6 (Lat. niger), Niger : Ac 13^.t 

vi'^di, V.S. vi'tttcj. 

NiKcii'wp, -0/30S, 6, Nicanor : Ac 6*.t 

wiKdo), -w «vi'k7?), [in LXX: Ps 50 (51)* (nD7), Pr 625 (y^^y^ 
freq. in iv Mac;] to conquer, prevail: absol., of Christ, Ee 3^^ 6^; c. 
inf., ib. 55; of Christians, Be 27.ii.i7,26 35,12,21 217; ggq. ^^ (Ry, come 
victorious from), Ee 15^; as law-term (cl.), Eo S^CL^X). q a,cc. pars., 
Lk 1122, Re 117 137 ([WH], E, mg., om.); of Christ, Jo IG^s (t. koct^ov), 
Ee 17^* ; of Christians, i Jo 4* ; t. -n-oinqpov, i Jo 2^^' ^* ; avrov (ref . to 6 
Karriyoip, ib. ^<^), Ee 12^^; c. ace. rei, tov Koo-ynov, Jo 16^^, i Jo 5*'5; 
TO KUKoy, Eo 122^; pass., fxr] vlkS) vtto t. KaKOv, ib. (cf. V7r€p-vi/caa)).t 

KiKt], -7?«, 17, [in LXX: i Ch 29" (nyjj.freq. ini-ivMac;] victory: 

I Jo 5*.t 

NiK68T)|ios, -ov, 6, Nicodemus : Jo S^' *• » 7^0 ig^a.t 
NiKoXaiTTis, -ov, 6, a Nicolaitan : pi., Ee 2'» ^^.t 
Niic<5\aos, -ov, 6, Nicolaus : Ac 6^.1 

NiK<5Tro\is, -cws, ^, Nicopolis, prob. the city of that name in Epirus 
{CGT, in 1.) : Tit S^^.t 

t KKos, -ovs, TO, late form of vikt], [in LXX : La 3^^ (nV3). i Es 3^, 

II Mac 1088, IV Mac 17^2; ci? v. (instead of cts tcAo?, Jb I420), n Ki 22«, 
Jb 36^, Am 1" 87, Je 3^, La 520 (nyj^, as '3 in Syr., = victory)*;] 

victory : Mt 122o (Is 423, lxX dX^^cia), i Co 15^* (Is 258, Aq., Th.), 
ib. " (Ho 13", LXX 8i'/cr?), ib. s^.t 

NiKcuciTTis (Eec. -cutVijs, L, -tTiys), -ov, 6, a Ninevite: Mt 12*\ 

Lk 1180. 32.t 

Nn'cut, 7] (Heb. nir:), Nineveh : Lk 11^2, Eec.t 

*t»'nrT^p, -rjpo<:, 6 (vhttio), a basin: Jo 135.t 

KiTTTW, late form of vt^co, [in LXX chiefly for TTIT;] to wash, 

usually of a part of the body: c. ace. pers., Jo 13^; t. iroSas, Jo 
136, 6. 8, 12, u I Ti 510 ; mid., reflexive, to wash oneself: Jo 97.11,15. 
t. X€tpas. Mt 152, Mk 73; T. TToSa?, Jo 1310 ; t. TrpoauiTTOv, Mt 6^7 (in cl. 
Att. prose, used only in compounds ; cf. d7ro-vt7rT<u).t 

Syn. : Aovw (q.v.), ttXvvu). 

voia, -w (•<vovs), [in LXX chiefly for ]^3, also for b^iff hi., 
etc ;] 1. to perceive with the mind, understand (for the phrase vowv k. 
4>povwv, in wills, V. MM, xvii) : absol., Mt 16^, Mk 8^7 ; c. ace, Eph 3*, 
I Ti 17 ; c. dat. instr., t. Kap8ia, Jo 12*^ ; pass., Eo I20 ; seq. oTt, Mt 15^7 
16", Mk 7^8; c. ace. et inf.. He IP. 2. to think, consider : absol., 
Mt 24^5^ Mk 131*, Eph 320 ; c. ace. rei, 11 Ti 27 (cf. ev-, Kara-, /xcTa-, 

TTOO-, viro-vo€(o).f 

**v6rnLa, -Tos, to (voew), [in LXX: Si 21", Ba 28, iii Mac S^^*;] a 



304 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

thought, purjwse, design : ii Co 2^^ 10^ 11^, Phi 4'^. Meton., of the 
mind, ii Co ^^^ 4*.t 

** v6Qo<i, -r], -Of, [in LXX : Wi 4^ * ;] a bastard, base born, i.e. born 
of a slave or concubine : He 12*^. t 

yo}i.r\, -rj^, T) (<^ ve/x,(o, to pasture), [in LXX chiefly for Piy^D, also 

for ni3 , etc. ;] 1. a pasture, pasturage : fig., Jo 10^. 2. a grazing, 

feeding ; metaph., of a spreading sore, ii Ti 2^'^ (Polyb.).t 

^^coixiiu) «vo/ios), [in LXX: Wi 132 IT^, Si 29*, ii Mac 4, 
IV Mac 8*;] 1. to practise, hold by custom: Ac 16^^ (Eec, but v. 
infr.). 2. to deem, consider, suppose: Mt S^^ lO^* 20io, Lk 2"* S^^, 
Ac 7" 8^0 1419 1613. --iT 1729 2129^ I Co T^^.^e, i Ti G^.t 

SyN. : r)y€Ofj.aL, q.V. 

**»'ofiiK6s, -rj, -6v (^vdyMos), [in LXX: iv Mac 5**;] 1. relating to 
law : fjLOixai, Tit 3-'. 2. learned in the law ; as subst., 6 v. (EV, lawyer) : 
Mt 2235, Lk 10'-^ Tit 313; pi^ lj^ 730 1145,46,52 143 j^f mM, xvii).t 

SyN. : ypa/iynaTev's, q.V. 

** cofii'ii.ojs, adv. (<] vo/ii/Aos, conformable to law), [in LXX: iv Mac 
618 * ;] rtghtly, lawfully : i Ti l^, 11 Ti 2^.f 

v6}ii(Tiia, -Tos, TO «voju,itw), [in LXX: 11 Es S^s (nil), Ne 
7^1 R (lilDSll), I Mac 15^*;] 1. that which is established by usage, a 

custom. 2. The current coin of a state : Mt 22i9.t 

*t i/ofio-SiSdo-KaXos, -ov, 6, a teacher of the law : Lk 51^, Ac 5^*, 
I Ti 1'^ (NT and eccl. only ; cf. vo/aoSci'ktt;?, -8i8a/cT7;s, Plut.).t 
Syn. : ypafjLfxaT€v<:, q.v. 
** i'Ofjio9ecTia, -as, 7) (■< vo/aos, Ti6r)fj.i), [in LXX: II Mac 6^3, iv Mac 
535 1716 * •] legislation, lawgiving : Ro 9*.t 

KOfioOcTe'cj, -w, [in LXX for riT hi.;] 1. intrans., to make laws; 
pass., to be furnished with laws : He 711. 2. Trans., to ordain by law, 
enact : pass., He 8^.t 

cop.o-9e'TT)s, -ov, 6 (<^vo/Aos, Ti6r]iJLi), [in LXX: Ps Q^*^*;] a laiv- 
giver : Ja 4i2.t 

v6\io%, -ov, 6 {<CyiiJnii, to deal out, distribute), [in LXX chiefly for 
min , also for npn , etc. ;] that vsrhich is assigned, hence, usage, 

custom, then law ; in NT (only in Mt, Jo, Ja, and the Lucan and 
Pauline bks.) ; 1. of law^ in general: Ro 3^" 513''; pj^ qI (jjvine laws. 
He 8i« 10i« ; 6 v. t. Xpio-rov, Ga 6^ ; (t.) ikev6epia<i, Ja l^^ 212 ; /3ao-iXiKos 
(Hort., in 1.; Deiss., LAE, 8673), Ja 2^. 2. Of a force or influence 
impelling to action : Ro 7-i' 23*. -is 8^. 3. Of the Mosaic law : Mt 5i8, 
Lk 2^7, Jo 11^ Ac 613, Ro 2l^ i Co 9^, i Ti l^ He V\ al. ; v. Mojvo-ews, 
Lk 222, Jo 723, Ac 15*, al.; Kvplov, Lk 239; ^^^^^ ^^^ j,.^ Ac 22i2, He 7^ 
922. 3. Anarthrous (Bl, §46, 8; ICC on Ro 2i2.i3), y^fios, (a) of 
law in general : Ro 2i2' i'"' 320- 21 41^, al. ; (b) of the Mosaic law in its 
quality as law : Ro 21'"^ 520 10*, Ga 2l^ al. ; oi cV v., Ro 4" ; iiro vofiov, 
I Co 920, Ga 45 ; v. Trpda-aav (7rA.7?pow), Ro 225 138, 4^ Of Christian 
teaching : v. ttiottcws, Ro 32'^ ; t. Xptarov, Ga B^. 5. By meton., of the 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 305 

books which contain the law ; (a) of the Pentateuch : Mt 12^, Jo 1**, 
al. ; 6 V. Kal ol TTpoffirJTaL, Mt 5^^, Lk 16^®, al. ; 6 v. koI Trpo^'^rat K. ij/aXfiot, 
Lk 244* . (J) of the OT Scriptures in general (as Heb. nnin) : Jo lO^* 
1234 1525, I Co 1421, al. 

I'OOS, V.S. vovs. 

**vo(jiui, -w «voo-os), [in LXX (metaph.) : Wi IT^*;] to be sick: 
metaph., of mental ailment, seq. Trepi, i Ti 6* (cf. Plat., Mor., 546d).t 
*»'6<TTjfia, -Tos, TO (<^voo-€oj), sicJcjiess .' Jo 5W.t 
f<Sao9, -ov, 6, [in LXX for "bri , etc,;] disease, sickness : Mt 423>24 
817 (Aq.) 935 iQi^ Mk V\ Lk 440 61" 721 91, Ac 19i2.t 

SYN. : V.S. aaOevcLa. 

I'oo-crid, -a5, 17 (<^ vocro-o?), late form of cl., vcocrtria, [in LXX 
chiefly for p ;] 1. a nes^ of birds. 2. a 6rood of young birds : Lk 13^4. t 

voaviov, -ov, TO, dimin. of vocraos, q.v,, [in LXX : Ps 83 (84)3 
(nne^Jt) *;] a young bird : Mt 23^'^. f 

koo-cros (vcocrcros, Eec, as in cl. Att. -ttos; Phryn. rejects the 
dissyl. form), -ov, 6 (^veos), [in LXX chiefly for p;] a young bird: 

Lk 224 (LXX),t 

voa4>ilo {<iv6(r(jii, ajyart, aside), [in LXX: Jos 7^ (i^pb), 11 Mac 
432*;] 1, in Horn., as depon., to ttirn axoay {from), abandon. 2. After 
Hom., in act., to set apart, remove. Mid., to set apart for oneself, 
peculate, purloin : absol.. Tit 2i*^ (for ex. in tt., v. MM, xvii) ; seq. dTro, 
Ac 52. 3.t 

f^Tos, -OV, 6, [in LXX chiefly for 233 , also for UHl , ]P"'P 
and D^li? ;] 1. prop., the south wind : Lk 12^^ Ac 271^ 28i3. 2. South : 
Lk 1329, Ee 2113. 3. the South, as a region (cf. n3|) : Mt 12*2, 
Lk Ipi.t 

** vouBevla, -a9 r) (^^ vovOeriw), = cl. vov6€Tr)a-i<s ', [in LXX : Wi 
16«*;] admonition: i Co 10", Eph 6*, Tit 310 (Aristoph., Diod., al.).t 

fouOcTco), -w (•<! vov<;, Tid-qfjn, hence, put in mind), [in LXX : 

I Ki 313 (nns pi.), Jbg (ID"' pi., ]^3), Wi llio 122-26*;] to admonish, 

exhort : c. ace. pers., Ac 203i, Ro 151*. i Co 4i4, Col 128 31", i Th 512. i4, 
n Th 3i5.t 

i'ou|JiY]i'ia, V.S. v€Ofir]VLa. 
*vouv€xC)<i, adv. (<[vov?, €x<^)' sensibly, discreetly: Mk 12^4.+ 
coOs (contr. from voos), 6, gen., dat., voo?, vot (late forms, = el, 
vov, v(3 ; Bl., § 9, 3), ace, vow, [in LXX chiefly for n^ , Ss!?;] 1. prop. 

of the ruling faculty, mind, understanding, reason (v. Lft., Notes, 88 f. 
Vaughan on Eo 72=*) : Lk 2445, Rq 128 723 122 145, Eph 4i'.23, Phl Al 

II Th 22, I Ti 65, II Ti 38, Tit 115, Re I318 179; v. t. o-a^Kos (ICC, in 1.) 
Col 218 . opp. to a-dpi, Eo 725 ; to TTvevfjia, I Co 1414- 15 ; to yXSxraa, ib. l^ 

20 



306 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

2. By meton., of an act of mind, a mind, tho^ight, purpose : Eo 
IP^* = 1 Co 21" (LXX), I Co li".t 

SVN. : V.S. TTViVfjia. 

Nufi(}>a (Eec, R, txt., 'Nv/x<^d<s, q.v.), -rj<;, tj, Nympha (v. M, Pr., 48) : 
Col 4l^ WH, R, mg.t 

Nu|x4>as, -a, 6 (WH, R, mg., Nvfi^a, q.v.), Nymphas: Col 4^^, 
R, txt. (cf. ICC, Lft., in l.).t 

fu'iJK})!!, -7;s, 17, [in LXX chiefly for n^"?;] 1. cl., a bride, young 
wife, young woman: Mt 25^, WH, mg., Jo S^", Re IS^^ 2P,^ 22^7. 
2. As freq. in LXX (Ge 38ii, al., for n^3 ; (a) bride ; (&) daughter- 
in-law) and in MGr. {vvfjxjir], vv<i>-q), a da^cghter-in-law : Mt 10^^, Lk 

cu|i4>ios, -ou, 6 (<^ vvfKfir)), [in LXX for ]rin ;] a bridegroom : 
Mt 915 251. S' 6. 10, Mk 219.20, ljj 534,35, Jq 2^, 329, Re IS'^^.t 

**t M0|x4.ol»', -W./OS, 6 {<^y^fjicf>7]), [in LXX: To ei^.ie*;] ^/te bride- 
chamber (Heb. nsn, LXX, Trao-Tos, Ps 18 (19)5, Jl 2i«) : Mt 22io 

(WH ; ya/AO?, RV) ; 01 viol tov v. (cf. cl. vu/A</)aya)yos, vvfi(fi€VT7]<i), the 

bridegroom's friends who have charge of the nuptial arrangements : 
Mt 915, Mk 219, Lk 534.t 

yuv, adv., [in LXX chiefly for HFiy;] 1. prop., of time, now, 

i.e. at the present time: as opp. to past, Jo 41^, Ac 7^2, Ro ISn, 
II Co 79, Col 1^4, al.; opp. to fut., Jo 12^7, Ro ll^i, al.; c. art., 
6 (rj, to) v. et subst., the present: Ro S^^, Ga 4^5, i Ti 6i^ Tit 212, al; 
dTT^ ToC V. (LXX for nny©), Lk l^s, Ac 18«, al. ; <Jxp' toD v., Ro 822, 
Phi V; eV ToS V. (LXX for nj?y ly), Mt 2421, Mk 13i9; rb. v., as 

regards the present, Ac 5^^^; c. pret., just now, b^it notv, Mt 26**, 
Jo 11^ 2110; c. fut., noiv, presently, Jo 12^i, Ac 2022; so c. praes., 
presently, forthwith, Jo 12^i 17i=* ; ml v., Jo II22 17^, al. ; hXXa v., 
Lk 22=^«; hi v., I Co 32; T6re (ttotc) ... v. (8c'), Eo 621 ll^O; y, ^Sr), 
I Jo 4^; V. ovv, Ac 10^^, al. 2. Of logical sequence (often difficult 
to disting. from the temporal sense; cf. Lft., Notes, 113 f.), now, 
therefore, fiow, hoivever, as it is: Lk ll^^j ^^t v., Ac 31", 11 Th 2", 

I Jo 2-8; id. seq. Sevpo, Ac 7^4; y. 8i, Jo 8^0 941 152^.24, igse, i Co 5" 
71^ 1220, al. (cf. WM, 579,,). 

vuvi, an Attic strengthened form of vvv (in cl. always of time, 
and most often strictly of the pres.), [in LXX . Jb 5, Pss 2, 11, iv Mac 4, 
Ep. Je*;] now; 1. of time: c. praes., Ac 241^, Ro 1523.26, i Co 131^, 

II Co 811.22, Phm9.ii; c. pf., Ro 321 ; c. pret., Ro 622 Ipo (WH, mg.) 
7«, Eph 21^ Col 121 38 ; ^ V. diroXoyia, Ac 221 2. Of logical sequence 
(not so in cl.) : Ro 71", i Co 511 (vw. WH) 121^ (vw, WH, txt.) I520, 
He 8« (vCv, WH, txt.), ib. 926 (cf. WM, 24, 579n).+ 

v6i, gen. wKTo^, rj, [in LXX chiefly for n^^^ ;] night : Mt 12*o, 
Mk 6*^, Jo 1330, al. ; gen. temp, (of the time within which something 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 307 

happens; M, Pr., 73; Bl, § 36, 13), wktos, hy night, Mt 2", Jo 32, 
I Th 5^ al. ; v. k. •^/xeW, Mk 5^ i Th 2^, al. ; ^/xepas k. v., Lk IS^, 
Ke 4^, al. ; /xcVt/s v., Mt 25^ ; dat., wktI, in ans. to the question, 
"when?" (rare in cl. ; Hdt., Soph.), rav-rrj t. v., Lk 12^'*^, al. ; Ikuviq, 
Ac 126 ; fViouo-r/, Ac 23ii ; ace. durat. (BL, § 34, 8 ; Kiihner 3, m, 314 b), 
V. K. rifiipav, Lk 2^", Ac 20^^ ; t. vvKTa^, Lk 21^" ; 8ia vuktos ( = cl. vvKTos ; 
Bl., § 42, 1 ; 46, 7), Ac b^^ 16^ I710 233i ; hC oXr,^ v., Lk 5^ ; Kara fieaov 
T^s V. (Bl., § 47, 6), Ac 27^'. Metaph. : Jo d\ Eo 13i^ i Th 55. 

** vuaabi (Att. -TTO)), [in LXX : Si 22^9, m Mac 5^* * ;] to pierce : 
T. irX^vp^v X6yxv, Jo 19^^, [Mt 27*9], WH.+ 

vuarrilb) (cf. vevw), [in LXX for n\2 , etc ;] to nod in sleep, fall 
asleep : Mt 25^. Metaph., of negligence or delay, 17 ctTrcoXcta avTwi' ov 
vvardCei (cf. Ps 120 (121)*, Is 5^7) : 11 Pe 23.+ 

*+ cuxOV^Po?' -°^' -o" «'^'^. V«P«» V. Bl., § 28, 4), lasting a night 
and a day ; as subst., (to) v., a night and a day : 11 Co IP^ (pi., Ch'. Sib., 
8, 203).+ 

Nw€ (as LXX, FIJ, who also gives Nwcos, T^(l!>xo<s), o, indecl. 

(Heb. ni), Noah: Mt 2437.38^ Lk d^^ 17^6."^ He 11", i Pe 3-^o, 11 Pe 2^+ 

KwOp^s, -a, -oV, [in LXX: Pr 2229 (^trn), gi 429 11^2*;] shiggish, 

slothful : He 5^^ 6^2 (for similar usage in tt., v. MM, xvii). 
SVN. : dpyo's (q.v.), /3pa8v<;. 
j-wTos, -ov, 6, in Att. most freq. to vwtov, and in pi. always to. vwra, 

[in LXX, 6 v., pi., 01 vwTot and to. vwto, chiefly for 5|]n3 , also for p|^jr , 
n^Srip;] the back: Eo llio(i'^).+ 



=, I, ^, TO, indecl., Xi, tc, the fourteenth letter. As a numeral, 
f = 60, $, = 60,000. 

**Uy^a, -as, ^ «^€Vos), [in LXX : Si 292" B^*;] Jwspitality, enter- 
tainment : Phm 22 (cf. ICC, in 1., but v. infr.). By meton., a place of 
entertainment, a lodging-place : Ac 282^, and so perh. Phm 22 (Lft., in 1., 
Phi., p. 9; but V. supr., and cf. MM, xvii).+ 

**Uvll^ «^€Vos), [in LXX: Es 3i3, Si 2925, „ Mac 9^, iii Mac 
73*;] 1. to receive as a guest, entertain: c. ace. pers., Ac 102^ 28'', 
He 132; pass., Ac lO^.is.sa 2II6. 2. In late writers (Polyb., al. ; 
11 Mac, I.e.), to surprise, astonish by strangeness: Ac I72"; pass., 
iPe44,i2t 

*$6»'o8ox^w, late Gk. for -»ceto (<^^€vos, 8exo/i.at), to entertain 
strangers : i Ti 5^**.+ 

|eVos, -t], -ov, [in LXX chiefly for "'ipj;] (a) foreign, alien: 

Saifjiovta, Ac 17^^ ; SiSaxai, He 139 ; (b) c. gen. rei, strange to, estranged 
from, ignorant of: Eph 2^2 ; (c) strange, unusual : i Pe 4^2_ ^.s subst., 
6 t, {a) a foreigner, stranger: Mt 2535.38.43,44 27", Ac I721, iii Jo 5; 
^ivoL K. TrdpoiKOi (opp. to (rvfnroXtTat^ oiKCtot), Eph 2^9 j ^, ^qiX Traptiri- 



308 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Srjfioiy He 11^^; (b) one of the parties bound by ties of hospitality; (a) 
the guest ; (/S) the host {— ^ci/oSokos, Horn., B., xv, 532) : Eo IG^^.t 

**t|ecrTr]9, -ov, 6 (a SlciHan corruption of Lat. sextarius), [in Al. : 
Le 14^*^ (jb, LXX kotvXt))*;] 1. a sextarius (about a pint). 2. In 
NT, a jritcher of wood or stone : Mk 7*.t 

^TjpaiVw {<C,irjp6<:), [in LXX chiefly for CT^J;] to dry up, parch, 

wither : c. ace, t. x«Pto»', Ja 1^^ ; pass., to become or be dry or withered: 
of plants, Mt IS^ 21i9.2o, Mk 4^ 1120,21^ ljj 8^, Jo 15^, i Pe P*; of 
ripened crops, Ee 14^'' ; of liquids, Mk 5'^^, Ee 16^^ ; of members of the 
body, to waste away, Mk 31 (cf. in Ki 13*) Q^^.t 

Irjpos, -a, -or, [in LXX chiefly for tZTJ^, its parts and deriva- 
tives, also for ns.'in , etc. ;] dry : metaph. (of a sinner), ^vkov $., Lk 23^^ ; 

of members of the body shrunken by disease, withered : Jo 5^ ; of the 
hand, Mt 121^ Mk 3^, Lk G^.S; of the dry land, r} ^pa (sc. y^, cf. Ge 
19' i«, Jh P, al.) : Mt 2315; 7^, He IP^.t 

luXu/os, -y], -ov {^vXov), [in LXX chiefly for j^JT;] wooden: 11 Ti 

220, Ee920(cf. Ep. Je4ff-)-+ 

luXoi', -ov, TO, [in LXX chiefly for |^y;] 1. wood: i Co 3^2, Re 

18'^. 2. a ])iece of wood, hence, anything made of wood, as, [a) a 
cudgel, staff: pi., Mt 26*"-", Mk 14*3.« Lk 22^2; {b) stocks, for con- 
fining the feet (Jb 33i\ 10) : Ac 16^* ; (c) a beam to which malefactors 

were bound (late Gk.), in LXX, of a gibbet (De 2122.23)^ in NT, of the 
Cross : Ac S^o 10^9 132^, Ga 31^, i Pe 22*. 3. In late writers (v. MM, 
xvii), a tree (Ge 129, is 148^ al.) : Lk 23^1 ; ^. rij^ ^wijs, Ee 2^ 222- 1*. i^.t 

^updu, -w, late form of ^upew (q.v.) : i Co 11** {$vpaa-6ai, Eec. and 
Edd., but v.s. ^vpw)A 

iupibi, -w (■< $vp6v, a razor), [in LXX (also -dw) chiefly for nbn 
pi., pu. ;] (no ex. of pres. -iw), to shave: pass, and mid., to shave 
oneself, have oneself shaved, aor., Ac 212*; pf^ (Att.), i Co ll^.t 

^u'po), rare form of fupco) (Veitch, s.v.), aor. mid., ^vpaa-Oat (Bl., § 24, 
S.V.; Zorell, s.v., etc.) for -ao-6'ai (Eec, Edd.) : i Co ll^t 



O 

0, o, o /jiiKpok', omlcron, short 0, the fifteenth letter. As a 
numeral, o = 70, o, = 70,000. 

6, r), TO, the prepositive article [apOpov irpoTaKTiKov), originally a 
demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the 
Eng. definite article. 

1. As demonstr. pron. 1. As freq. in Hom., absol., he {she, it), 
his (etc.) : Ac 172^ (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2. Distributive, 
6 /A£v . . . 6 8e, the one . . . the other : 1 Co 7^, Ga 422 ; pi., Ac 14* 
1732, Phi lie, al.; ol fikv . . . oEAXot 8e, Mt I61*, Jo 7^^; ol fih . . . 6 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 309 

8e, He 7^^'^^. 3. In narration (without o fiev preceding), 6 84, but he: 
Mt 21*, Mk 1«, Lk 821, Jo 938, al. mult. 

II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1. to nouns unmodified : 
6 ^eos, TO <f>Q)<;, etc. ; to abstract nouns, r/ o-o<^ta, etc., to pi. nouns which 
indicate a class, ol dXwTrcKcs, foxes, Mt S^*^, al. ; to an individual as 
representing a class, 6 ifyyaTrjs, Lk lO'^ ; c. nom. = voc. in addresses, 
Mt ll^', Jo 19^, Ja 51, al. ; to things which pertain to one, r] x^^P> ^i^ 
hand, Mk 3^ ; to names of persons well known or already mentioned ; 
usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), 17 'louSata, etc. 
2. To modified nouns : c. pers. pron. gen., /jlov, arov, etc. ; c. poss. 
pron., €/xo'?, o-ds, etc. ; c. adj. between the art. and the noun, 6 dya^os 
avOpwTTO'i, Mt 12^^; the noun foil, by adj., both c. art., 6 iroLfjbrjv 6 /caXds, 
Jo 10" (on 6 oxA-os ttoAvs, Jo 12^ v. M, Pr., 84) ; before adjectival 
phrases, 17 Kar iKXoyi^v Trpd^ecrts, Ro d^^. 3. To Other parts of speech 
used as substantives ; (a) neuter adjectives : t. dyaOov, etc. ; (b) cardinal 
numerals : 6 cts, 01 8vo, etc. ; (c) participles : 6 BaTrrt^wv ( = o 
BaTTTio-TT^s, Mt 142), Mk 61'* ; ttSs 6, c. ptcp., every one loho, etc. ; {d) 
adverbs : to vipav, to. vw, 6 lo-w avOpuyiros ; (e) infinitives : nom., to 
OiXiiv, Ro 718, al.; gen., tov, after adjectives, a^iov tov Tropeveadai, 1 Co 
16* ; verbs, lAa^cv tov Ovpnacrai, Lk 1^ ; and freq. in a final sense, 
i^XOev 6 aireipwy tov (nreLpeiv, Mt 13^ (on the artic. inf., V. Bl., § 71). 

4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a 
quotation : to 'Ei Sv^, Mk 9^3 ; to cti a-n-a^, He 12^7 ; t6 dvcySr?, Eph 4^, al. 

5. To prepositional phrases : 01 dTro 'iTaXtas, He 13^* ; 01 eV vofiov, Ro 
41* ; neut. ace. absol., in adverbial phrases, to kuO' rj/xepav, daily, Lk 
11^; TO /cttTa adpKa, as regards the flesh, Ro 9^. 6. To nouns in the 
genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc. : 6 tov, the son of (unless 
context indicates a different relationship), Mt 10^, al. ; Ta tou 6eov, the 
things that pertain to God, Mt 16^3 ; Ta t^s dprjvq^, Ro 14i^ (cf. M, 
Pr., 81 ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). 

oySoiiKovTa, eighty : Lk 2^^ IB^.t 

SySoos, -yj, -ov, the eighth: Lk 1^9, Ac l^C^^^), Re I711 21^0; one 
of eight, tvith seven others (usually, in this sense, with avrds added, 
but cf. Plat., Legg., iii, 695 c; Plut., Pelop., 13; 11 Mac 5^7): 
II Pe 25.t 

*oYKos, -ov, 6, bulk, mass ; metaph., an encumbrance: He 12i.t 

Syn.: ySdpos, a weight ; (f>opTiov, a burden, that which is borne. 

88c, ^8e, ToSc (the old demonstr. pron., 6 + the enclitic 8c), = Lat. 
hicce, this {here), referring prop, to what is present, can be seen or 
pointed out: of a person just named, rfih^ (= javTrj), Lk 10^^; neut. 
pi., TttSc (Acyct), referring to words which follow (so in Att., and v. 
MM, xvii): Ac 21ii, Re 2i'8'i2.i8 Si'^.u. ,j^ ^jg^ ^. ^o'Xiv (= Att. 
T^ Kox Ty, Plat., Legg., iv, 721 b), such and such a city, Ja 41^.+ 

68cu'(a «68ds), [in LXX : iii Ki 612 A (metaph., Ijbn), To G^, 
Wi 57 (fig.)*;] to travel, journey : Lk lO^^ (cf. 81-, a-vv-o8cv(ii).f 

oStjY^w, -w «r,8r?yds), [in LXX chiefly for nn3 , also for Till hi., 
^bn hi., etc. ;] to lead on one's way, to guide : c. ace. pers., Mt I51*, 



310 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Lk 6=^^; id. seq. eVt, Re V. Metaph., to guide, instruct, teach: Ac 
831 . geq ^i^ ^ rlX7;^etav (eV t. d., WH, mg.), Jo 1613 (cf. Ps 24 (25)5).t 
**t68TiYos, -oC, 6 «68os, y^yio^iat), [in LXX: ii Es 8i, Wi 71* IS^, 

I Mac 4-, II Mac 5i^*;] a leader on the way, a guide: Ac li^. Fig., 
6. Tv^XQ^v, Ro 21^ pi., Mt Ib^^ 23i«'-4.t 

* oSonropew, -to (<^ o8oi:rd/3o?, a traveller, Ge 37^^, al.), to travel, 
joiirney : Ac lO^.t 

**68onropi'a, -as, 77 (v. supr.), [in LXX: Wi 1318 133 195^ i Mac 
6*1*;] a journey : Jo 4", 11 Co ll^'^.t 

68o-iroi€'co, -w, [in LXX: Jb 30i2, Ps 67 (68)* (b^D) 77 (78)^" 
(obD pi.) 79 (80)9, Is 6210 (n3Q pi.) * ;] to make a road or path : Mk 2^^ 
(WH, mg.).t 

686s, -ov, yj, [in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for 1J11;] 1. a way, 

path, road: Mt 212, Mk lO^e, Lk 3^ al. ; Kara t^v 6., Lk lOS al. ; 7rap« 
T^v o., Mt 13*, al. ; c. gen. pers, (subj.), t-^v o. eroi/xa^ctv (fig.), Mt S'^, 
Mk 13, al. ; c. gen. term, (obj.), WvC^v, Mt 10^ ; t. dytW (fig.). He 9"^ ; 
ace, o^ov, with force of prep, (like Heb. ^"I'l ; Bl., § 34, 8 ; 35, 5), d. 

Oa\d(T(rr}<i, Mt 4i5(Lxx)_ g. A traveller's way, journey : iv r. 6., Mt 5-^, 
Mk 8^", al.; e'f o., Lk 11"; d^ «., Mt IQlO; T. dSov irap,v€adai, Ac 833; 
6. -^/Aepas, Lk 2**; 0801/ Troiciv (= cl., 6. TToteto-^ai; V. Field, Notes, 25), 
^0 mal'e one's wa?/, i.e. proceed on one's journey, Mk 2^3. 3. Metaph. 
(cl. ; but esp. freq. in Heb. ; v. Cremer, 442 ff.), of a course of conduct, 
a way of thinking or acting : Ac 141", i Co 4i^ 123i, Ja 1^ 5^" j ^^j} KatV, 
Juii; r. BaXadfjL, II Pe 21^ dp^vr]^, Ro 3I'; C^s, Ac 228; ^ 6. -^ 
aTrdyovaa ek t. ^wryv (Dalman, Words, 160), Mt 71* ; t. StKaioo-vvv/s, Mt 
2132; o-oiTT/pias, Ac 1617; at 6. t. O^oi (Kvptov), Ac 1310, Ro 1133, i^e 153 
(cf. Ho 14^ Ps 94 (95)1", Si 39^4, al.) ; >) 6. t. e^oi (the way approved 
by God), Mt 22i«, Mk 12i*, Lk 202i ; id., of the Christian religion, Ac 
1826; so, absol, t} 6., Ac 92 19'»'23 2422; of Christ as the means of 
approach to God, Jo 14". 4. Ellipsis of 6. : Trotas (sc. oSoC), Lk 51^ ; 
c/c€iV77s, ib. 19* (v. Bl., § 36, 13 ; 44, 1). 

68ou's, -dvTos, 6, [in LXX for ]ar ;] a tooth : Mt 538, Mk 918, 

Ac 754 ; pi.. Re 98 ; 6 ySpvy/x^s (q.v.) t. 686vTiov, Mt 812 13*2. 50 22i3 24^i 
2530, Lk 1328.t 

6hvydui, -w «dSuVv), [in LXX: Za 9^ (b^n), 12io (Tia hi.), 

La 113 (nn), Wi 142*, al. ;] to cause pain or suffering; pass, and 

mid., to suffer pain, be tormented or greatly distressed: Lk 2*8 162^. -'' 
(dSwaaai, v. M, Pr., 53 f.) ; seq. eVt', Ac 2038.t 

68u.'Tj, -q<;, 77, [in LXX for ]ir , "10, etc. (26 words in all);] 

pain, distress, of body or mind : Ro 92, i Ti 61**.+ 

d8upp,ds, -ov, 6 (•<^ oSvpofiai, to lament), [in LXX : Je 38 
(31)1^ (anno:?), n Mac 11"*;] lamentatiori, mourning: Mt 218(Lxx), 

II Co VA 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 311 

'Ojcias (Eec. 'O^i'as), -ov, 6 (Heb. njTJT), Uzziah : Mt l^'^.t 

*0(ias, V.S. '0^£tas. 

o;«, [in LXX: Ex 8i^('o) (tZTXa)*;] to smell (i.e. emit a smell): 
Jo 1138.t 

O0CK, adv., whence ; (a) of direction or source : Mt 12**, Lk ll^*, 
Ac 1426 2813; =i^^ie^ Sttov, Mt 2524.26 (cf. Thuc, i, 89, 3); 5. 

yivfoa-Ko/xev, I Jo 2^^ ; (6) of cause, whence, wherefore : Mt 14'', Ac 26^^, 
He 217 31 725 83 918 iii9,t 

* 6B6vr\, -r]<i, rj (of Semitic origin, cf. Heb. ]iMX , yarn) ; 1, fine 

linen (Hom., al,). 2,, Later, a sheet or sail : Ac lO^i ll^.t 

60OKIOC, -ov, TO (dimin. of oOovrj, q.v.), [in LXX : Jg 141^ {]'^'in), 

Ho 2*<7). 9(11) ^j^jg^p,^*.! ^ pip,ce of fine linen, a linen cloth: Lk 24^2 

(WH, E, mg., om.), Jo 19*o 205'«'7.t 

oi8a, (from same root as cThov, q.v.), [in LXX chiefly for yr ;] 
pf. with pres. meaning (plpf. as impf. ; on irregular tense-forms, 
V. App.), to have seen or perceived, hence, to know, have knowledge 
of: c. ace. rei, Mt 25l^ Mk lO^^, Jo 10*, Eo V, al. ; c. ace. pers., 
Mt 26^2, Jo 131, Ac 316, al. ; t. ^eov, i Th 4^, Tit V\ al. ; c. ace. et inf., 
Lk 4", al.; seq. on, Mt 9^, Lk 2021, Jo 32, Eo 22 IP, al.; seq. quaest. 
indir., Mt 26^0, Jo 921, Eph l^^, al.; c. inf., to know how (cl), Mt 7^\ 
Lk 1113, Phi 412, I Th 4*, al. ; in unique sense of respect, appreciate: 
I Th 512 (but V. also ICC on i Th 4*). 

SVN. : V.S. yivwtrKw. 

OiKCiaK^s, V.S. oi/cta/cos. 

oiKcios, -a, -ov (<; oiKos), [in LXX for Til , liitp , etc. ; in Is 58^, 

ol. Tov <nripixaTo<; for 11^2 ;] in or of the house (opp. to ^eVos, dXAorpios) ; 

(a) of things ; to. 01., household affairs or goods ; (&) of persons, of the 
same family or kin; as subst., 01 oL, kinsmen: i Ti 5^; c. gen. pers., 
of the family of: metaph., t. diov, Eph 2^^; t. ttio-tcws (Lft., in 1.), 
Ga 6io.t 

Syn. : (Tvyjivri^, tStos (v. Cremer, 446 ; Deiss., BS, 123). 
*+oiKCT€ia, -as, rj (<^oi»ceT77s), a household (of servants) : Mt 24**.t 

oiK^TTjs, -ov, 6 (<^oiK€'w), [in LXX for 1337;] a house-servant: 

Lk 1613, Ro 14* ; pi., Ac 10^ i Pe 21*. (In Plat., Hdt., Si 43o en, the 
pi. includes all the inmates of the house, the familia, ot/<€Tcta.)t 

Syn. : V.S. Sia*coi'OS. 

oiK^w, -w ("^oiKos), [in LXX chiefly for nCT"';] (a) trans., to 
inhabit: c. ace, i Ti 61^; (b) intrans., to dwell: seq. yu,era (of married 
life), I Co 712' 13; metaph., seq. €v : dyaOov, Eo 71^; d/xapTta, ib.20; 
Try^vfia deov, Eo 8^» H, I Co 31^ (cf. iv-, kut-, fv-Kar-, Trap-, Trepi-, crw-otK€(j)).i 

otKT),ia, -Tos, TO «oiK€'a)), [in LXX: Ez 162* (nj), To 2^ 

Wi 131^*;] a dwelling. As a euphemism for other definite terms 
(e.g. brothel : Hdt., ii, 121 ; cf. Ez, I.e.), a prison (Thuc, iv, 47 f.) : 
Ac 127.t 



312 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

**oiKT]Tiipioi', -ov, TO {<:^olKr)Tr)p = oiKrjTUip, an inhabita^it), [in LXX : 
II Mac 11^ III Mac 2^^*;] a habitation: Ju ^ ; trop., ii Co 5'-^.t 

oiKia, -as, -q (-^oi/cos), [in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for IT'S;] a 

house, divelling: Mt 2^1 7'^"^-^', Mk l^^, al; iv oUia (= cl. kut olKcav), 
at home, Lk 8-^; ci's ol, ii Jo^'*; ol, c. gen. pers., usually has the art. 
(Mt 8^^ al., but cf. olKOi and v. Bl, § 46, 9) ; ^ ol. t. Trarpos fjiov, 
Jo 14^. Metaph., (a) of the body as the dwelling of the soul : ii Co 5^ ; 

(b) of property (as JTIS, Ge i5^^, LXX, t. hrdpxovTa; in Ki 13^, 

LXX, or/cos) = oTkos (q.v.) : Mk 12''«, Lk 204^ ; (c) of the inmates of the 
dwelling, the household: Mt 12'"; c. gen. pers., Jo 4^^^ j Qq iqi5^ 

Syn. : oIkos, which in Attic law denoted the whole estate, oiKia, 
the dwelling only. In cl. poets oIkos has also the latter sense, but not 
in prose, except in metaph. usage, where it signifies both property and 
household. The foregoing distinction is not, however, consistently 
maintained in late Greek ; cf. MM, ii, xvii, and v. Thayer, s.v. olKia. 

*toiKi.aK6s (in Plut., al., -eia/cos), 77, 6v (<^oiKia), = oi/ceios, belonging 
to the household, one's own : Mt 10^^ ; opp. to oikoSco-ttott^s, ib. ^^.t 
*+ oiKo-SeoTroTew, -w (<^ otKo8eo-7roTT;s), to rule a household : I Ti 5^'*.t 
*t oiKo-SeoTTOTTjs, "OV, 6 (<^ oTk OS, Seo-TTOTTjs), the Tiiaster of a house, a 
householder: Mt 10^^ 13" 20" 24*3, Mk 14i*, Lk 1239 13^5 14^1; 
av^pwTTos ol, Mt 13^2 201 21'*3 ; pleonast., oL t. oiVtas, Lk 22" (v. Bl., 
§ 81, 4).t 

oiKo8op,ea>, -w (<;otKo8o/x,os), [in LXX chiefly for HJS;] to build a 
house, to build: absol., Lk 11^^ 143<^ 17^^; ol ot/coSo/Aowres, the builders 
(as Ps 117 (118)2^ D^Jinn), Mt 21^2^ Mk 12io, Lk 201^, i Pe 27(l^x) 

er' aWorpLov O^ixiXtov ol., proverb., Eo 152"; c. ace. rei, Ga 2^^; mpyov 
Mt 2133, mij 121, Lk 1428; ^^o6r,Ka<;, Lk 1218; ^^^^^ Mk 1458; pass. 
Jo 220; oiKta, Lk 6^8; c. ace. rei seq. dat. pers. (cf. Ge 820, Ez 162*) 
Lk 7^ Ac 7*''4''; ace. seq. Ini, Mt 724.26, Lk 6«; iroXiv cV opovs 
Lk 429; of rebuilding, or restoring, Mt 2329 26«i 27*", Mk 1529, Lk 11*^ 
Metaph., t. ckkAt^o-iW, Mt 16^8 ; of the growth of Christian character 
(cf. nan, in Ps 27 (28)^, Je 24^al.), to build up (AV, edify) : absol 
Ac 2032, I Co &i 1023 ; c. ace. pers., i Co 14*, i Th 5" ; pass., Ac 9^^ 
I Co 1417, I Pe 2^ ; of blameworthy action (AV, embolden), i Co 8 

(cf. dv-, €7r-, (TVV-OLKoSofXew).'^ 

t oiKoSofjLii, -rj<s, 7] (^otKos, + Sc/Aoj, to buHd), [in LXX : i Ch 29^ A 

(n^a), Ez 1717 402 (nsa , n5:;p), Si 2216 4019, al. ;] = cl. oiKo8o,jUa 

(q.v.), -Sd/xijo-is (Thuc, Plat.), 1. the act of building; in NT always 
metaph., building up, edifyi?ig : Eo 14^9 152, i Co 142^, n Co 108 I31**, 
Eph 429 ; c. gen. obj., i Co 14^2, n Co 12^9, Eph 412. le . XaXtlv, Xa/Selv, 
ot., I Co 143.5. 2. = olKoSofjirjtJ^a, a building: Mt 24^, Mk 13^.2; 
metaph., i Co 39, 11 Co 5^, Eph 22i.t 

*otKo8o(iia, -as, 17 (<^ otVoSo/xco)) , the act of building: metaph., 
I Ti 1* (BE for oiKovoyam, q.v.).t 

oiKo-Sofios, -ov, 6 (-cc^orxos + Sc'/Aco, to buHd), [in LXX for n32l , etc. ;] 
a builder : Ac 4ii.t 



10 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 313 

oiKot/ojxeu, -u> (<^ oLKovofjio^) , [in LXX : Ps 111 (112)^ (bl3 pilp.), 
II Mac 3^**;] to manage as house-steward, be a steward: absol., 
Lk 16^ ; hence, generally (v.s. olKovojxia), to manage, regulate, arrange 
(cl, II Mac, I.e., Ill Mac 32E).t 

oiKoi'Ofiia, -as, rj (<< oiKovoixeu>) , [in LXX : Is 22^^' ^i (nSQ , nbUfpl^)*;] 

1. prop. (Plat., Arist.), the office of olKov6fi.o<i, stewardship : Lk 16^'*. 

2. In later writers (Plut., al. ; v. AR on Eph V^^; MM, xviii), generally, 
administration, dispensation : i Co 9^'^, Eph l^" 3^' ^, Col l^^, i Ti l*.t 

oiKOfofios, -ov, o (-eC^oiKos + ve/xo), to manage), [in LXX chiefly for 
JT^.Sn'i'y;] 1. prop., the manager of a household or estate, a house- or 
land-stetvard (usually a slave or freedman) : Lk 12*^ igi, s, s^ j Qq 42^ 
Ga 42 ; 6 oi. t. TrdXeojs (RV, treasurer; cf. i Es 4*9), Ro 1623. 2. Metaph. 
(in wider sense; cf. oIkovoixlo), an administrator , a steward: of Christian 
ministers, i Co 4^, Tit V ; of Christians generally, i Pe 4i*'.t 

oiKos, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for n"]3 , also for bs^H , bns , etc. ;] 

1. prop., a house, dwelling: Ac 2^ 19^^; c. gen. poss., Mt 9^''', Mk 2^^, 
Lk 123, 3,1.; c. gen. attrib., ifxiropiov, Jo 2^"; Trpoo-evx^s, Mt 21^^^ a,l; of 
a sanctuary (Hdt., Eur.) : 61. t. Oeov, of the tabernacle, Mt 12*, al. ; 
the temple, Mt 21i3, al. ; metaph. of a city : Mt 2338, Lk 1335 ; of the 
body, Mt 12**, Lk II2*; of Christians, i Pe 2^; iv ol. (M, Pr., 81 f.), 
at home, Mk 2^, i Co 113* 1435. go Kar oIkov, Ac 2*« 5*2; d ds (= ol o^; 
v.s. €ts) T. 01., Lk T^*' 15^ ; ^ar' oikovs, from house to house, Ac 83 202'^ ; 
€is (Kar) oTkov, c. gen. (Bl., § 46, 9), Mk 83, Lk 14i, Ro 16^, al. 2. By 
meton., a hotise, household, family : Lk 10*, Ac 7^**, i Co 1^", i Ti 3*'*, 
al. ; of the Church, 6 61. t. 6eov, i Ti 3^^^ jje 32, i Pe 4^'' ; of descendants, 
oT. 'Icrpa^X (AavetS, 'Ia<c(;;/?; Bl, §47, 9), Mt 10«, Lk P'' 33, al. (cf. 
Ex 61*, I Ki 230, al.). 

SYN. : v.s. otKia. 

oiKouiieVtj, -77s, 17 (fern. pres. pass. ptcp. of oi/cecj; sc. yrj), [in 
LXX chiefly for b^ , ^1^',] the inhabited earth; (a) in cl., the 

countries occupied by Greeks, as disting. from barbarian lands (Hdt., 
Dem., al.) ; (b) in later writers, the Roman world : Lk 2^, Ac 112^ 24^ ; 
by meton., of its inhabitants: Ac 17« 192"; (c) in LXX (Ps 22 (23)i 
70 (71)8, al.) and NT, also of the whole inhabited world : Mt 24^*, 
Lk 45 2126, Ro 1018, He 1«, Re 310 16^*; by meton. (ut supr.), Ac 173i, 
Re 12^ ; (d) of the Messianic age, 17 ol. rj /xcAXovo-a = 6 atw 6 fiiXXtav : 
He 25.t 

*t oiKoupyos, -ov (<^ oTkos + root of Ipyov), working at home : Tit 2* 
(Rec. otKoupos, q.v.).t 

*oiK-oup6s, -ov (<^oTkos 4- ovpo^, a keeper); 1. watching or keeping 
the house; as subst., 17 ol., a housekeeper (Soph., Eur.; v. LS, s.v.). 

2. keeping at home : Tit 2^, Rec. (v. Field, Notes, 220 ff. ; CGT, in 1., 
and cf. oiKorpyds).+ 

oiicTeipu (<; otKTos, pity), [in LXX for Dm pi., ]:n , etc. ;] to pity, 
have compassion on : c. ace pers., Ro 9^^ (L^^).t 
Syn.: eXec'w, q.v. 



314 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

oiKTipfios, -liv, 6 {<^oiKTupM), [lu LXX, usually in pi., chiefly for 
Dm ;] compassion, pity : (nrXay^va olKTipfxov, a heart of compassion, 
Col 312; in pi_ (as LXX for Heb. D^aqi). ol. r. deov, Eo 12\ He W^; 

6 waTTjp'rwv ol., II Co 1^; a-7rXdy)(ya k. oL, Phi 21. t 
SYN. : acos, q.v. 
otKTipfiUK, -ov {<^oiKT€ip(x)), lu cl. poct. for l\(.rjfxoiv (q.v.), [ill LXX 

chiefly for mm;] merciful: Lk Q^^, Ja 5ii.+ 

otfxai, V.8. OLOfiai. 

oico-iroTT]?, -ov, 6 (•< oivos + TTOTry?, a drinker), poet, and late 
prose, [in LXX : Pr 232*^ (]^^ N^D) *',] a wine-drinker, wine-bibber : 
Mt 1119, Lk 734.+ 

otcos, -ov, o, [in LXX chiefly for l"]^ , also for CTiTri , etc. ;] ivine : 

Mt 91", Lk 115, Jo 23, al. ; otvw irpoaix^tv, i Ti 3^ ; SouAoDo-^at, Tit 2^. 
Metaph., Be 14«' 10 l&^ IV 18=^ IQi^ By meton. for .I/ATreXos, Be 6e. 

* oiko<j)XuYia, -as, 17 (<^ <^Xi;o), to bubble up, overflow), cf. -yeo>, 
De 2P^ ; drunkenness, debauchery : 1 Pe d^.t 

5riV. .• V.S. KpaiirdXr]. 

oiofiai, olfxa', [in LXX for n|n , Ge 37'', al. ;] to suppose, expect, 
imagine: c. ace. et inf., Jo 21^5; c. inf., Phi li''; seq, on, Ja l''.t 

SriV. .• V.S. r]yeop.ai. 

oios, -a, -ov, relat. pron., qualitative (related to os as qualis to 
^Mt), w/^ai sori or manner of, such as, in NT usually without its 
correl. Toioiros : Mt 24^1, Mk 9^, 11 Co 12-«, i Th l^ 11 Ti 311, Be I6I8; 
seq. TotovTos, I Co 15^^, II Co IQH; id. redundant, Mk 131^; t. airov 
. . , otov. Phi l^*^ ; ovx olov 8k oTt, elliptically, biot it is not as though 
(BV), Eo 9^t 

oicro), V.S. <^epw, p. 499. 

oKf^w, -w (<^oKvos, shrinking, hesitation), [in LXX: Nu 221" 
(y:a ni.), Jg 18^ (bsy ni.), To 12*5' 13, Jth 121^, Si V^, iv Mac 14* * ;] to 
shrink from doing, hesitate to do (Horn., Thuc, al.) ; hence, to delay: 
c. inf., Ac 9^8 (cf. Nu, I.e., and v. MM, xviii).t 

dKKTjpos, -a, -ov «6KV€aj), [in LXX for iJSJT, Pr 6^'^ al.;] 

shrinking, hesitating, timid : c. dat. (Bl,, § 38, 2), Bo 12ii ; hence, 
dothful : Mt 252". Of things, that which causes shrinking, irksome : 
Phi 3i.t 

*t oKTarifxepos, -ov (<[ oktw, rj/jitpa), of the eighth day, eight days old: 
c. dat. ref., irepiTo/ArJ 6., Phi 3^ (words of this class denote duration, 
cf. TCTapTaios:).'^ 

6ktcS, ol, 0.1, TO., indecl., eight : Lk 2-i, Jo 5^, al. 

oXeOpeuo), V.S. oXoOpexna, 

oXe'Gpios, -ov (also -a, -ov, as in Wi, I.e.), [in LXX : iii Ki 21 

(20)*2 (Dnn), Wi 1815 * ;] destructive, deadly : SUrjv, 11 Th l^, L, txt. 
(for oAe^pos, q.v.).t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 315 

o\e9pos, -ov (<[oXA.u/Ai, to destroy), [in LXX for IXHf , TW , etc. ;] 

ruin, destruction, death: i Th 5^, i Ti 6^; aiwvfos, ii Th 1^ (L, txt., 

oAc^ptos, q.v.) ; ct? 6. t^s crapKos, for physical discipline, to destroy 

carnal lusts, i Co 5^.t 

*t dXiyomaria, -as, 17, little faith OV trust: Mt IT^^.t 
*t6\iY6-maTos, -ov, of little faith or trust: Mt G^o S^e li^i 16^, 

Lk 1228.+ 

oXiyos, -7], -ov (on ovx o\., V. infr.), [in LXX chiefly for 13^0 j] of 

number, quantity, size, few, little, small, slight : Mt 9^^ 15^*, Mk 6^ 8'', 
Lk 10'^ 12^8 (sc. TrXrjyds, opp. to TroXXas), I Ti 5^^ He 1210, Ee 3* 12^2; 
ovK 6. (in the best uncials written oix 6. ; v. WH, Apj)., 143 ; M, Pr., 
44; Thackeray, Gr., 126 f.), Ac 12i8 14^8 15-' (c. gen. part.) 17*' 12 
1923,24 2720 ; pi., absol., Mt 71* 20i« (WH, txt., EV, om.) 22^\ Lk 13-3, 
I Pe 320. Neut. sing, (to) 6. : Lk 7*^ 11 Co 81^ ; irpos oXCyov, i Ti 48, 
Ja 41* ; iv 6., Ac 26'-8.29 (with little effort ; v. Page, in 1.) ; id., in brief, 
Eph 33; adverbially, oXiyov, of time, Mk 6^\ i Pe 1^ 5i«, Ee 17^^; of 
space, Mk 1^^ Lk 5=* ; pi, 6Xiya, Lk 10*^ Ee 2i* ; Itt' 6X{ya, Mt 2521.23 ; 
Bl oXiywv, in few words, briefly, i Pe 5^2 (cf. Plat., Legg., vi, 778 c).+ 

+ oXtyoiJ/uxos, -ov [in LXX: Is 35'* (ina ni.), etc.;] faint-hearted. 
I Th 5i4.t 

dXiYwpe'cj, -w (<oXtyos + wpa, care), [in LXX: Pr 311 (DXa)*;] 
<o esteem lightly, think little of: c. gen.. He 12^ (^^^^^.t 

^^oXiyws, adv. (<;6Aiyos), [in Aq. : Is IC*;] a little, almost, all 
but : II Pe 2is.t 

*t oXoGpcuTTis (Eec. oX-), -ov, 6 «; 6Ao^p€vo>), a destroyer: i Co 10^^ 
(not else where). t 

toXoOpeu'cj (<^oX€^pos), late (Alex.) form of oXc^pevw (cf. MGr., 
ioXoOptviJi), [in LXX for m3 , TPXO hi., etc.;] to destroy: He IPS 

(cf. e^-oXo^peiJCo).t 

1 6XoKauTW|i,a, -Tos, to (■<^ oXos, Kat'to), [in LXX chiefly for n?y ;] a 

whole burnt offering: Mk 12^^, He 10®» ^ (lxx) (cf _ Kennedy, Sources, 
113f.).t 

Srx. : V.S. Ova-La. 
toXoKXifjpia, -a?, Tj (-^oXoKXrjpo'i), [in LXX: Is 1® (Dlho)*;] cow- 

pleteness, soundness : Ac 3i^.t 

6X6-kXt]pos, -ov (<^ oXos, (cX^pos, i.e. with all that has fallen by 
lot), [in LXX : Le 23l^ Ez 15* (D^pn), De 27«, Jos 92 (S^i) (obCT), 

Za 111^ (nS3 ni.), Wi 15^ i Mac 4*^, iv Mac 15^^*;] complete, entire; 

in NT in ethical sense (as Wi, iv Mac, 11. c), i Th 52^; 6. koI reXeioi, 

Ja l*.t 

Syn.: oXotcXt;? (q.v.), Te'Xeios (Tr., Sy7i., § xxii), 

oXoXuJ^cj (onomatop.), [in LXX chiefly for i^iji hi.;] (in Hom., of 

women crying to the gods in prayer or thanksgiving), to cry aloud: 

Ja 5i.t 



316 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

oXos, -r}, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for bs ;] of persons and things, 
whole, entire, complete; 1. of indefinite ideas, c. subst. anarth. : Lk 5^, 
Ac 1126 2830, Tit 111; ^Xov avOpoiiTov {an entire man; v. Field, Notes, 
93), Jo 723 . -Xri 'Iepov(Ta\rjfji{= 7r5cra 'I., Mt 2^ ; V. Bl., § 47, 9), Ac 2131. 

2. Definite, c. art.; (a) preceding subst.: Mt 423,24^ l^ 8^^, i Co 12i^ 
al. ; (b) following subst. : Mk l^^, Lk 925, Jo l^s^ Ac 213o, al. ; (c) 
between art. and subst., where subst. is an abstract noun (Plat., al.). 

3. Attached to adj. or verb: Mt 1333, Lk I321, Jo 93*, al.; adverbially, 
8t' 5\ov (MM, xviii), Jo 1923. 

*t6XoTeXTJs, -is «oAos, reXo?), complete, perfect: i Th 523.t 

Syn. : oXokXtjpos (q-v.), TcXeios. " As regards meaning, oXoKXr/pos 
can hardly be distinguished from oXotcXt/s though, in accordance with 
its derivation, it draws more special attention to the several parts to 
which the wholeness spoken of extends, no part being wanting or 
lacking in completeness" (M, Th., 78). 

'oXufiiras (perh. contr. fr. 'OXu/ATrio'Swpos, Bl., § 29), -a, Ohjmpas: 
Eo 16i5.t 

oXuk-Oos, -ov, b, [in LXX : Ca 2i3 (nag)* ;] an unripe fig, which 

grows in winter and usually falls off in the spring : Re 6i3.t 

oXws, adv. (<[oXos), altogether, assuredly, actually (c. neg., at 

all) : Mt 53^ I Co 51 6^ 1529.t 

ojiPpos, -ov, 6, [in LXX : De 322 (-i^y^;), Wi 16^^, al. ;] a storm of 

rain, a shotver : Lk 125*.t 

1 6)i€ipo)j.ai (Eec. 6fx-, v. WH, Ajip., 151), = cl. l/xeipofxai (but prob. 
with different derivation, v. Bl., §6,4; Zorell, s.v.), [in LXX : Jb 321 
(nDn pi.)* ;] io desire earnestly, yearn after : i Th 2^.+ 

ofxiXe'w, -C) «o;atXos), [in LXX: Pr 51^ (mi pi.), al. ;] to be in 
company with, consort ivith ; hence, to converse with: Ac 20^i; c. dat., 
Ac 2426 . seq. Trpds, Lk 24i4. is.t 

ofiiXia, -as, 7} (<<o^iXos), [in LXX : Ex 21i*' (njjr), al. ;] company, 

association : i Co 1533. + 

**ofiiXos, -ov, 6, [inAq. : i Ki I920*;] a crowd, throng: Re IBi^ 
Eec.t 

ofii'xXT), -rjs, rj, [in LXX for bp')V , etc.;] a mist: 11 Pe 2i''.t 

Syn.: vi<f}os, v€(j>4Xrj, both thicker than o. 

ofAfia, -Tos, TO, in cl. chiefly poet.; [in LXX for yi^ (Pi's. Wig, 

IV Mac 3)* ;] an eye : pi., Mt 203*, Mk 823.t 

6|j,vu'oj (so Hdt. and some Att. writers) and o/xw/xi (so generally in 
Att. prose and always in Trag. ; Mk 14^i, -vvai), [in LXX chiefly for 
rnur ni. ;] to swear, affirm by oath : Mt '2&''*, Mk 14'''i, He 721 ; seq. el 
(q.v), He 311 43; c. dat. pers., Mk 623; [^ q inf,^ He 3i8; seq. V*?. 
Ac 230; ^ opKov irpos, c. acc. pers. (cl.), Lk 1'''3 ; c. ace. (of that by 
which one swears; cl., v. MM, xviii), Ja 512 ; seq. Kara, c. gen. (LXX; 
Bl., § 34, 1), He 613. le . geq. eV (cts), as in Heb. (Bl., § 39, 4), Mt 53*.3« 
2316. 18, 20-22^ Re 10« (Bl., § 70, 3).t 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 317 

6/xo0ujxa8ow «o/xo?, ^v/xo's), [in LXX for in\ HH: (freq. in Jb), 

Wi 10^"^ 18^' ^2, al. ;] with one mind, ivith one accord : Ac 1^* 2*" 4^* 
512 757 86 1220 1525 1812 1929^ Ro 15« (Hatch, Essays, 63 f., argues that 
the un-cl. sense together, which is found in Jb 3^^ 38^^, Nu 24^4^ Wi 
18^' 12 (but not lO^O), al., should be attached to the NT instances, but 
V. Abbott, Essays, 96 ; MM, xviii).t 

*t 6^014^0. «o^otos), to be like: Mt 23^7 (L, Tr., txt., WH, mg.) 
2673 (WH, mg.) (not found elsewhere. Cf. 7rap-oyu.oia^a>.) t 

**6^ioioTra0Vis, -« « Sfjioio?, 7r<£o-x<o), [in LXX : Wi 7\ iv Mac U^^ *;] 
of like feelings or affections: c. dat., Ac 14^^, Ja 5^'^.f 

op,oios, -Ota, -oiov, [in LXX for IDS , etc. ;] like, resembling, such 

as, the same as : c. dat., of form or appearance, Jo 9^, Ee l^^ (WH, mg., 
E, but V. infr.) ib. ^^ 2^» 4«. ^ 97, 10 (bi., § 37, 63) ib. i^ ll^ I32. ^ ; 6pda-€i, 
Ee43; of nature, condition, ability, etc., Mt 22^9, Ac IT^^, Ga 521, 
I Jo 32, Ee 13^ 1818 2111' 18; of comparison in parables, Mt 13^1 »• 20i, 
Lk 1318.19.21; of thinking, acting, etc., Mt lli^ 13^2, Lk 6*7-49731,32 
(T, c. gen. ; BL, § 36, 11) 123«, Jo 8'^, Ju ^ c. ace, Ee li^ (WH, txt.; 
Swete, Hort, in 1.) 14i*.t 

6H010TTJS, -»?Tos, V «5;bLoios), [in LXX: Ge lii>i2 (y^D), Wi 14^^ 

IV Mac 15* * ;] likeness : Kaff ofjLoioTrjra, in like manner, He 41^ ; id. c. 
gen. (MM, xviii), after the likeness (of). He 7^^.+ 

ofjioiocj, -w (<^o/Aotos), [in LXX chiefly for HDl;] 1. to make like, 
c. gen. et dat.; pass., to be made or become like: Mt 6^ 13^* 18^3 22^ 
251, Ac 1411, He 217; seq. u)? (cf. Ez 32^, Heb.), Eo 9^9. 2. to liken, 
compare: c. dat., ace, Mt lli^, Lk 7^^ I318.20; ^^5 6/Aotwo-w/iev, Mk 480; 
pass., Mt 72*' 26 (cf. d(f>-ofjiot6w).f 

ofioiwfia, -T09, TO {<Cofj.oi6w), [in LXX for niDl, ri''351?, n31Dri, 

etc. ;] that ivhich is made like something ; (a) concrete, an image, like- 
ness (Ps 105(106)20, Ez 15, I Mac 3*8, al.) : Ee 9^; {b) abstract, like- 
ness, resemblance : Eo 51* 6^ 8^, Phi 2^; Iv 6. cIkovos, Eo 123.t 

SVN. : eiKijav (q.V.), 6fjiOL0i(Ti^. 

ofjioiojs (<!! o/Aotos), adv., likeioise, in like manner, equally : Mt 222", 
Mk 4i«, Lk 10", al ; c. dat., Mt 2239, l^ e^i ; 6. W, Mt 2226, Mk 
1531, al. ; 6. Ka^ws, Lk I728 ; Ka^a)s ... 6., Lk e^i ; b. fxivToi Kai, Ju «. 

ofioiwcris, -€ws, rj {6/j.ol6w), [in LXX chiefly for TOaTI, Ps 57(58)*, 

al. ;] 1. a making like, becoming like (Plat.). 2. likeness: Ja39(i'XX).t 

Syn. : v.s. ofjiOLio/jba, and cf. Tr., Syn., § xv. 

ofioXoy^ci), -w « 6/xoXoyos, of one mind : Da LXX Su "^ *), [in 
LXX : Jb 409(1*' (-,-p ^i.), Je 51 (44)25 (-,-,3)^ ^j .j 1^ ^^ speak the same 
language (Hdt.). 2. to agree with (Hdt., Plat., al.). 3. to agree, 
confess, acknowledge (Plat., al.) : absol., Jo 12" 12*2; pass., Eo lOi** ; seq. 
oTi, ib.. He 1113; c, ace. rei, Ac 23^, i Jo 19, Ee 3^; id. c. dat. pers., 
Ac 241*; c. ace. cogn., i Ti 6i2; c. ace. pers., i Jo 223 43. j^ ggq pj-ed. 
ace. (Bl., § 34, 5 ; 73, 5), Jo 922, Eo 109, j Jq 42, 15^ n Jo 7 ; c. inf. (M, 
Pr., 229), Tit li«; c. dat. pers. seq. on, Mt 723; seq. ^v, c. dat. pers. 



318 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

(M, Pr., 104; Bl., § 41, 2), Mt 10^2, Lk 128. 4 t^ ^gree, promise: 
T. iirayyeXiav, Ac T^^ ; c. inf. obj. (Bl, § 61, 3), Mt 14^. 5. = Uo/xo- 
Aoyt'w, to praise : He 13^^ (Westc, in 1.). (Cf. avB-o^oXoyio^ai, i$- 

o/xoAoye'co.) + 

6fio\oYta, -as, 7] «6/ioXoy£'w), [in LXX : De 12«''>i', Am 4^, Ez 
4612 (nnij), Le 221^ Je 51 (44)"^ (n-j^), i Es 9^*;] 1. in cl., an agree- 
ment, assent, compact (in tt., of a contract; Deis^.., BS, 249). 2. 
confession (prob. always in an objective sense): 11 Co 9^^, i Ti 6i-»^^, 
He 31 414 1023.+ 

** oixoXoyoufi^j'ws, adv. «6)MoAoy£a)), [in LXX: iv Mac 6^^ 7^® 
16^*;] 1. as agreed, conformably with. 2. •confessedly, by common 
consent : i Ti S^^.t 

■^ofioTcxcos, -ov (<^6,uds, T€xvri), practising the same craft, of the 
same trade : Ac 18^. t 

ofioo, adv. (<^6/xds), together ; (a) prop., of place: Jo 21^, Ac 2^; 
(b) vrithout idea of place : Jo 4^*^ 20-'.t 

ofjido), V.S. Sfxvvw. 
* 6fi6<^pu)v, -ov (<^6/x.ds, <^p>/f), = 6/xdvoos, agreeing, of one mind: 
I Pe 3^.t 

ofAws, adv. (<^6/tds), yet: 5. /xevroi, but yet, nevertheless, Jo 12*2 j 
by hyperbaton, out of its proper position, i Co 14", Ga 3^^ (but v. 
Bl, § 77, 14).t 

*omp, TO, indecl, used only in nom. and ace. sing, (the other cases 
are supplied by dvetpos), a dream: Kar 6. (in later writers only), in a 
dream, Mt 12« 212.13,19,22 27i9.t 

*6i'(ipioi', -ov, TO (dimin. of ovos), a young ass: Jo 12i*.+ 

dceiSiI^w (<^oi'€iSos), [in LXX chiefly for p]nn pi.;] to reproach, 
upbraid: absol, Ja 1^; c. ace. pers. (in cl. more freq. c. dat. pers. ; 
Bl, § 34, 2; WM, 278), Mt 5", Mk 1532.34^ WH, mg., Lk 6^2, Eo 
153 (LXX). ^, ^^Xets, Mt 1P>; pass., i Ti 410, WH, mg., i Pe 41* ; c. 
ace. rei, Mk 16 H*!; c. dupl ace, Mt 27**.t 

1 6cei8i<7p,o'9, -ov, 6 (dvetSi'^tu), [in LXX chiefly for npin ;] a reproach: 
Ro 153, He 10^3 ; eJs o. ifiireaelv, I Ti 3^ ; 6 6. toS Xptcrrod, He 1126 1313 f 

oj'ciSos, -ous, to', [in LXX chiefly for nQIO , also for nisb? , etc. ;] 

1. reproach, censure, blame. 2. matter of reproach, disgrace: Lk 125.t 
'Oci^CTi/xos, -ov, 6 (i.e. profitable, <^6vr]a-i<;, profit), Onesimus : 

Col 4^, Phm !•* (a common name among slaves; v. MM, iii, xviii).t 

'0>'Tiai(j)opos, -ov, 6 (i.e. bringing advantage), Onesiphorus : 11 Ti 

\\6 419.t 

*t6viKo's, -n, -ov «6vos), of or for an ass: /xuXos 6., Mt 18«, Mk 9*2 
(elsewhere only in tt. ; v. MM, xviii).t 

**6^iVti^i, [in LXX: To 3«, Si 302*;] to profit, benefit, help; mid., 
to have profit, derive benefit: optat. (M, Pr., 195), c. gen., Phm2*>.t 

ovofia, -Tos, TO, [in LXX chiefly for Dl?;] 1. in general, the name 
by which a person or thing is called : Mt IO2, Mk 3i«, Lk V^, Jo I810, 



MANUAL GBEEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 319 

al. ; avOpum-o^ (etc.), <? (ov) 5. (t. o.), sc. ^v or cWiV (BL, § 30, 3), Mk 1432, 
Lk 126,27. ^th same ellipsis, Kal t. o. avroC (o. aurw), Lk 1*, Jo 1*, al. ; 
ovo/AttTt, seq. nom. prop., Mt 27^2^ -^-^ 522^ Ljj ;][5^ ^^ 51^ g^j . q^^q absol. 
(Bl., § 34, 7), Tovvofjia (= T, ovofLo), Mt 27^^; o. /Aot (sc. icTTLv ; cf. Horn., 
Od., ix, 366), Mk 5^ (cf. Lk S^o) ; l^^iv 5., Ee 911 ; Kokuv {iTnneivai) 5. 
(Bl, § 33, 1), Mt 121, Mk 316 ; T. 6. iv (t.) ^t^\<o ^a)i}s (cf. Deiss., iv^^, 
121), Phi 43, Ee 138, cf. Lk IO20 (^t. oipavoh) ; o. /3Xaa<f>r]fua^, Ee 131 ; 
the name as opp. to the reality, Ee 3^ (cf. Hdt., vii, 138) ; as a title : 
Eph 121, Phi 29' 10 (Lft., in 1.). 2. By a usage similar to that with 

ref. to Heb. UW (Lft., Notes, 106 f.), but also common in Hellenistic 

(M, Pr., 100; Bl., §39, 4; Deiss, £S, 146 f., 196 f.; LAE, 123J,ofall 
that the name implies, of rank, authority, character, etc. : of acting on 
one's authority or in his behalf, €v (eis) 6., c. gen. pers. (v. reff. supr.), 
Mt 10^1 219 2819, Mk 119, Lk 13^5, Jo 5*^, Ac 81^, i Co l^^ ; of the 
name Christian, i Pe 4^* ; esp. of the name of God as expressing the 
divine attributes : dyia^ctv (ayiov) to o. (t. TIaTp6<s, Kvpiov), Mt 69, Lk 1*9 
112; ij/dWfiy (oyuoXoyciv) tw 6., Eo 159, He 13^^; So^d^eiv {(l>avepovv, <jio- 

fieladai) to 5., Jo 1228 176' 2«, Ee ll^^ 15*; p\a<Tci>7)p.fiv, Eo 22*, I Ti 6^, 
Ee 13'' ; similarly, of the name of Christ : t. koXov o., Ja 2" (Deiss., 
LAE, 276) ; 7rto-Tcv«v tJ) o., i Jo 32^ ; tt. cis t. 6. (Bl., § 39, 4), Jo 1^2 
223 318. ^yofxAi^iiv to o., II Ti 2^9; xpaTcIv, Ee 213; o^^ ApvilaOaL, Ee 3s ; 
ivT. 6. (v. reff. supr.), Mk 9^^ 16[>7], Lk lO^', Jo 14^3 1623,24 203i, 
Ac 3« 412, Eph 52», I Pe 4^*, al. ; ci's t. 5. avydyeadai, Mt 1820 . ^^^^^ 
rod 6., Mt 1929; Sici TO 5., Mt 1022, Mk 13i3, al.; Sck toC 6., i Co V>; 
virkp Tov o., Ac 91^, Eo 1^, al. ; id. absol., Ac 5*^, iii Jo ^ ; Trpos t6 o., 
Ac 269. 3 cause, ground, reason (in cl., usually in bad sense, pretext) : 
Mk 9*1 (Swete, in 1.; Dalman, Words, 305 f.). 4. In late Greek 
(Deiss., BS., 196 f.), an individual, a person: Ac 1", Ee 3* 11^3. 

ovoitdiui «;ovo/xa), [in LXX for 137, np3 , Nip;] 1. to name, 
mention, or address by name: Ac 19^3; pass., Eo I520, Eph I21 53; 
of the use of the Divine name in praise and worship, 11 Ti 2^9 (LXX, 
Nu 162** ; cf. Is 5211, Am 610). 2. to name, call, give a name to : Mk 31* 
(T, E, txt. om.), Lk 6i3'i*; pass., i Co 5"; seq. €^ (cl.), Eph 31* 
(cf. €7r-ovo/Aa^a)).t 

ot'os, -ov, 6, 7], [in LXX chiefly for lian , also for ]inN , etc. ;] 
an ass: Mt 212.Mlxx)^ Lk 14^, Jo 1215(lxx). 5^ Lk 131^; ■^, Mt 217.t 

orrus, adv. {<C^v, ptcp. of ei/u, sum), [in LXX: Nu 223" (qj^jj^), 
Je 323 (px), 1019 Cjjx), III Ki 122*, wi 17U*.] really, actually, truly: 
Mk 1132, Lk 23*7 243*, Jo 83«, I Co 1425, Ga 321 ; ^ 5. ^wij, i Ti 6i9; 
17 o. xvp"^) it). 53' 5> i6.t 

S^os, -€os (-ous), TO « 0^'s), [in LXX : Nu 63, Eu 2i*, Ps 68 (69)2i, 
Pr 2520 (j^iph) * ;] sour wine (posca, vin-de-pays), the ordinary drink of 
labourers and common soldiers : Mt 27*^, Mk 1536, Lk 2336, Jo I929. 3o,t 

6|u's, -da, -v', [in LXX : Ps 56 (57)*, al. (Tn), Am 2i5 (bj?), 



320 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

Is 52s {puf), etc. ;] 1. sharp : Ee li" 2^^ 141*. i^, is 1915. 2. Of motion, 
swift: Eo 315 (LXX Taxivos).t 

6ini, ~^s, 17, [in LXX for in, 13n , etc.;] an opening, a hole: 
Ja 311 (cf. Ex 3322), He ll^s (cf. Ob 3).t 

oirnrfleK, adv. of place, [in LXX chiefly for ICIX , HnNQ ;] behind, 
after: Mt 9^o, Mk 5^7, Lk 8^*, Ee 4« 51. As prep. c. gen.: Mt 1S^\ 
Lk 23^6, Ee 110 (WH, mg.).t 

oTTiau, adv. of place and time, [in LXX chiefly for "'lOX , inx 

and cogn. forms;] 1. prop., as in cl., adv., (a) of time (not in NT); 
(6) of place, back, behind, after: Mt 24i8, LkT^S; ra 6., PhlS^^; c^s 
TO. 6., Mk I316, Lk 9«2 1731, Jo 6^6 IS^ 20i*. 2. By a usage not found in cl., 
and in LXX representing the Heb. prep. iiniS} (Bl, § 40, 8 ; Thackeray, 

Gr., 46 f.), but also prob. general in vernacular (M, Pr., 99), as prep. 
c. gen. ; (a) of time, after : Mt 3^1, Mk V Jo l^^- 27« ^o . (5) of pjace, 
behind, after: Mt4i9 lO^s 16^3.24^ Mk li'.^o m^^\ Lk 92^ I427 191* 21^, 
II Pe 21", Ju'7, Ee li** 121^; in constr. praegn. (v. Swete on Ee, I.e.), 
Jo 1219, Ac 517 2030, I Ti 515, Ee 133.t 

** oirXij^w (<^o7rXov), [in Sm. : Je 522^*;] to make ready, equip; of 
soldiers, to arm. Mid., to arm oneself ; fig., hvoiav : i Pe 4^ (cf. Bpaao^ 6., 
Soph., Elec, 995), (cf. Ka^-07rAi'^w).t 

ottXoc, -ov, to, [in LXX for ]3Q , n32 , etc. ;] 1. a tool, implement, 

instrtiment : o-n-Xa dSiKtas (opp. to o. StKaiocrvVr;?) , Eo 613. 2. Freq., in 
pi., arvis, weapons: Jo 183, 11 Co lO"*; metaph., t. c/xutos, Eo 1312; 
T. 8LKaio(Tvvr]<;, II Co 67.t 

oiroios, -Ota, -otov, [in LXX : Ca 510, 11 Mac 1137*;] of what sort: 
I Co 313, Ga 2«, I Th 1^, Ja I2*; toioSto? 6., such as, Ac 2629.t 

dTTOTc, when: Lk 63, Eec. (WH, E, 5Te).f 

oiroo, adv. of place, correlat. of irov (q.v.), where. I. Prop., of 
place, 1. where; (a) in relative sentences, c. indie: Mt 252*'2'', Mk 2* 
45, 15 540 1314^ Jo 38 662 734, 36 1132 143 1724 2019, Eo 152", Ee 213 ; after 
nouns of place, for relat. prepositional phrase (iv cS, etc.), Mt 6i9'20 135 
26" 28«, Mk 6" 9*^, Lk 1233, Jo V» 42«.*e 623 742 io4o ipo 121 181.20 
1918,20,41 2012, Ac 171, Ee 213 us 2010 ; seq. e^r, Mt 621, Lk 123* 1737, 
Jo 122« ; id. pleonast. ( = Heb. DIT . . . lerx ; Aram. IQp . . 1 ; cf . 

Ge 133), 5. . . . iK€l, Ee 12^. i* ; 2. . . . in aiVSv, ib. 17^ ; 5. av, wherever 
(M, Pr., 168), c. impf. indie, Mk 6^6- c. pres. subjc, Mt 2428; 5. liv, 
ib. 2613, Mk 610 91^ 149. i4a . (^) ^^ quaest. indir., c. aor. subjc. : Mk 
141*1', L]j 2211. 2. In late writers (sometimes also in cl. ; Bl, § 25, 2), 
with verbs of motion, = ottoi, whither : c. indie, Jo 82I' 22 1333, 36 144 2118^ 
He 620, Ja 3'i ; o. av, whithersoever, c. pres. ind., Ee 14'* ; subjc, Lk 9^" ; 
o. lav, Mt 819. n. Without strict local sense, 1. of time or condition : 
Col 311, He 9i« 1018, Ja 3i«, 11 Pe 2ii. 2. Of cause or reason (AV, 
whereas) : i Co 33.t 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 321 

+ dTrT(ika), [in LXX: iii Ki 8^ (nXI ni.), To 12"*;] late present as 
from w<j>6y]v (= op lay); mid., oTrravo/Aai, to alloxo oneself to he seen, to 
appear : c. dat., Ac P. (For exx. from tr., v. Deiss., LAE, 79, 2525; 
MM, ii, xviii.) t 

toTTraaia, -as, rj (<^ OTrra^oyxai, Nu 14^* * = OTrravoyiuxt), later form 
of 6xpis, [in LXX : Ma 3^ (nxi ni.). Da th 9^3 10i.7,8,i6 (n^-jo, nXIO; 

LXX, opafjia, -o-is), Es 4J, Si 43^'^^*;] 1. an appearing, coming into 
viexu (Ma, Es, Si, 11. c). 2. a vision : Lk 1^2, 2423, Ac 261^, ii Co 12i 
(Da, 11. c, also in MGr.).t 

Sttto's, -V, -ov, [in LXX: Ex 128-9 (""bv)*;] roasted, boiled: 
Lk 24^2,t 

OTTTCJ, V.S. opatii. 

6Tro5pa, -as, i [in LXX : Je 31 (48)32 47 (40)io« 12 (|r;,«5) * ;] l. Ute 

summer, early autumn (the time between the risings of Sirius and 
Arcturus, i.e. late July, all August and early September). 2. By 
meton. (as being fruit-time), ripe fruits: Ee 18^* (cf. <^divoir<apiva, 
Ju i2).t 

oirus. I. Eelat. adv. of manner, as, how : c. indie, Lk 242''. 
II. Conj., c. subjc. (in cl. also c. opt., indie. : so in Mt 26^^, LT, Tr.), 
in order that, to the end that, that; 1. final, denoting purpose or 
design (in which the original idea of modality has been merged) : after 
pres., Mt 62, al.; pf., Ac 91^, al; impf., Ac 9^*; aor., Ac 92, al. ; plpf., 
Jo 11"; fut., Mt 2335; imperat., Mt 28, al.; 5. ix-q (M, Pr., 185), Mt 
618, Lk 1626, Ac 20^6, I Co 1^9 ; o. TrAr^pcu^^, Mt 223 817 1335. 5, s_^ 
(BL, § 65, 2 ; WM, § 42, 5), Lk 235, Ac 3i»' 15^\ Eo 3* (cf. Ge 12^3, 
Ps 59'', I Mac 1032, al.). 2. After verbs of asking, exhorting, etc. : 
Mt 938, Lk 73, Ja 51*, al. (in late writers its place is often taken by 
the correl. ttws, q.v.). 

opajia, -Tos, TO «6paa)), [in LXX for ]i7n, n?<10 , etc.;] that 

which is seen ; (a) a sight, spectacle : Mt 17^, Ac 7*^ ; {h) an appear- 
ance, vision: Ac 9i9.i2(Rec.) iQs.ir.ig ^s 129 igg.io 139 (cf. oTn-ao-iaJ.t 

opao-is,-«<^Si V (opddi), [in LXX chiefly for nj<{"ip , ]i7n and cognate 

forms ;] 1. in Arist. and later writers, the act of seeing, the sense of 
sight, and by meton., pi., the eyes. 2. appearance (Nu 24*, Ez 1*, 
Si 4120, al.) : Ee 43. 3. = opa/xa, a vision: Ac 2^7 (lxx)^ Ee 9i7.t 

opaTos, -•7, -ov (6paa>), visible: to. 6., Col l^^.t 

opdoj, -w, [in LXX chiefly for nxi , also for n7n , etc. ;] m 
"durative" sense (hence aor. act., elSov, pass., w<j>dyjv, fut., oi^ofiai, from 
different roots; v. M, Pr., 110 f.), to see (in colloq. even the pres. is 
rare, its place being generally taken by ySAeVo), Oewpeca, v. BL, § 24). 
1. Of bodily vision, to see, perceive, behold: absol., Mk 638, g,!. ; ep^^ov 
Kal tSe, Jo 1*6, al. ; seq. on, Mk 2^\ al. ; c. ace, Mt 22, Mk l^o 16^, 
Ga 1^9, al. ; Oeov, Jo 1^8^ i jo 420, al. 2. to see with the mini, perceive, 
discern: absol, Eo I521; c. ace. rei., Mt 92 275*. Ac 823, Col 2^8, al. 

21 



322 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

3. to see, take heed, beware : opa fvq, c. aor. subjc, Mt 8* 18^*', Mk 1**, 
I Th 51s ; id., sc. ^^ ttoit^ot??, Re 19i» 22^ (Bl., § 81, 1); seq. imperat. 
Mt 9»o 16«, Mk 81^ 4. \o experience: t. edvarov, Lk 2^\ He ll^; 
^wT^v, Jo 3'*^ ; T. SLa(f>6opdv, Ac 2^''. 5. to visit : c. ace. pers., Lk 8^^, 
Jo 12-\ Ro 1^\ al.; c. ace. loc, Ac 19^^ 6. to see to, care for : Mt 

27*, Ac 18^* (cf. acf)-, Kad-, irpo-, crvv-opaw). 
SYN. : V.S. /SXeVo). 
opYT), -^s, ^, [in LXX chiefly for ^ii , also for ]nn , nJpn , ^'Sl>. , etc. ;] 

1. imjiulse, propensity, disposition. 2. anger, wrath ; (a) of men : 
Mk 3^ Eph 4^1, Col 3s, I Ti 2*, Ja l^^-ao ; (j) of God ; (a) that reaction 
of the divine nature against sin which in anthropomorphic language is 
called anger: Ro l^^ 9^^ 12i9 [ICC, in 1.), i Th li« 2i6, He 3" 43(lxx)^ 
Re 1410 1613 191^ ; OS) of the effect of God's anger : Mt 3^ Lk 3^ 2123, 
Jo 336, ijo 25,8 35 415 59 134,5 Eph 56, Col 3«, I Th 5^ Ja P^, Re e^^.^^ 

11^^; a-K^vr} opyrj^, Ro 9^^; Tc/cva 6py^s, Eph 23.t 

SyN.: V.S. ^r/AOS. 

opYil^u {<iopyrj), [in LXX chiefly for mn , also for P]Sp , etc.;] 
to make angry, provoke to anger ; in cl. most freq. in pass., and so always 
in NT, to be provoked to anger, be angry : absol., Mt 18^* 22'', Lk 14^1 
15-8, Eph 42MLXX)^ Re ll^S; c. dat., Mt 5^2; seq. liri, c. dat. (iii Ki liy, 
al.), Re 12^^ (cf. 7rap-opyt{w).t 

6pYtXos, -V, -ov {<opyri), [in LXX: Pr 22^4 2922 (p,pn)_ ^tc.;] 

inclined to anger, passionate : Tit l''.t 

*6pYuid, -as, 17 «6peyoj), the length of the outstretched arms, a 
fathom: Ac 2728.t 

** opeyw, [in Sm. : Jb 82o, Ez 16*^ * ;] to reach, stretch out ; pass, 
and mid., to stretch oneself out, reach forth ; metaph., to reach after, 
grasj) at, aspire to : c. gen. rei, i Ti 3\ He 11^* ; <^tAapyvptas (v. Ellic. 
and GGT, in 1.), i Ti 6".t 

Syn. : eVt^v/Acto, to desire (q.v.). 

opeivo's (WH, opcv-; V. MM, xviii,) -7, -6v {<^opo?), mountainous, 
hilly; rj 6. (sc. x^pa), the hill-country (LXX for in): Lk 139, csf 

**op€Cis, -im, v «op€yo/xat), [in LXX: Wi 14^ 15^ 162.3, gj igso 
23^, IV Mac 133» 35 * jj the most general word for all kinds of desire, 
longing, appetite : of lust, Ro 12'', 
Syn. : v.s. ■n-ddo's. 

*t opOoTToSco), -w (<^ op^o-TTous, goiug straight), = cl. eidviropiu), to 
walk straight: metaph., Ga 2^* (not elsewhere).t 

6p0os, -^, -oV, [in LXX chiefly for '\'l2r ;] straight ; (a) in height, 
straight, upright: Ac 141"; (b) in line, straight, direct: fig., He 

1213 (LXX) f 

+ 6p0oTo,ji€'a., -w {<6p06^, T€>a>), [in LXX: Pr S^ 11^ (it:^ pi.)*;] 
to C7U straight, as a road (t. 68ovs, fig., Pr, 11. c). Metaph., t. Xoyov 
T. aX-qO€ia%, II Ti 2^5 (v. Ellic. and GGT, in 1. ; not found elsewhere) .+ 

t6p0piia) «5p^pos), [in LXX chiefly for DSCr hi., Ge I92, al.; also 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 323 

for in27 pi., Ps 62^ (63), al., etc. ;] = cl. poet., opOpivw, to rise early : seq. 
TTpo's, c. ace. pers. (as Ps, I.e., al.), Lk 2P'* (v. Thumb, Hellen., 123).t 

topepi.'o's, -V, -Of «o>^pos), [in LXX : Ho 6^4) 133 (^2^ hi.), Hg 
215(H), Wi ll'^2*.j late form of SpOpLos (q.v.), early.- Lk 24PA 

op8pios, -a, -ov «3/j^pos), [in LXX: i Ki 2S^\ Jb 29", -i Mac 
510, 23* -J early, in the early morning : Lk 24-^, Eec. (v.s. 6p6pn6<i)A 

opOpos, -ov, o, [in LXX for inO)' , Ipi , etc. ;] daybreak, dawn : 

opOpov yga^eojs (M, Pr., 73), at early daum, Lk 24^; opOpov, Jo St^]; iTrb 
rhv 6., Ac 5^1 (cf. MM, xviii).t 

dpOois, adv. «6p^o9), ri^/iiZy.- Mk 7^^ Lk 7^^ 1028 go^i.t 

optjw «opos, a boundary), [in LXX for IDS, ^33, etc.;] 1. to 
separate, mark off by boundaries (so Nu 34^, Jo 13""). 2. to determine, 
apjwint, designate: of time, c. ace, Ac 17'^'', He 4''; c. ace. pers., Ac 
1731 ; c. inf., Ac 1129; pass., Lk 22^^^ Ac 2^3 10*'^ Ro 1* (cf. d<f>-, airo- 
8l-, 7r/oo-op6^aj).t 

6piv6s, V.S. opetvos. 

opioi', -ou, TO «opos, a boundary), [in LXX chiefly for b=isa;] a 

boundary, bo^cnd ; chiefly in pi., and so always in NT : Mt 2^" 4^^ 8^* 
1522,39 191^ Mk 51" 7=^^-31 10\ Ac 135o.t 

opKil^w «opAcos), [in LXX: Ge 243", al. (mOT hi.);] 1. to make 
one swear (Xen., Polyb., al.). 2. to adjure: c. dupl. ace, Mk 5'', Ac 

1913 (cf. iv-, £'f0pKl^C0).t 

opKos, -OV, 6, [in LXX chiefly for V^W , nyStZT and cogn. forms ;] 

an oath: Mt 14^ 26^^ Lk 1^3, Ac 2^\ He 6^^''^\ Ja 5^2; pi., Mt 
533 (LXX) 149^ Mk 62«.t 

6pK(i)p.oaia, -as, 17 (<^ opK09, o/xw/xi] by metapl. for to. opKWfiocna, 
asseverations on oath; v. MM, xviii), [in LXX : Ez IT^' ^^ (nbii), i Es 

993 * ;] affirmation on oath, an oath : He 72*^' 21. ^s^f 

6p)x<i(i>, -aj (<; opp.ri), [in LXX for 'yi'OJ , etc. ;] 1. causal, to set in 
motion, ^irge on. 2. Intrans., to hasten on, rush: seq. cis, Mt 832, Mk 
513, Lk 833, Ac 1929; i-rrl, c. ace, Ac 7".t 

6p|x^, -^s, r), [in LXX : Pr 32^ (nxiS'), etc. ;] 1. a violent move- 

ment, impulse: Ja 3*; {b) a hostile movement, onset, assault: Ac 145.t 
opfAT]pia, -Tos, TO (opfjiduy), [in LXX: Ho S^", Am 1" (nn^?), etc.;] 

a rush : Re 182i.t 

opi/coK, -ou, TO, = opvL's, [in LXX chiefly for liQS ;] a bird : Re 182 

1917.21 (Horn., al.).t 

■''■topKi^ (cf. Doric gen., opvi^os, and MGr., opvtx', v. M, Pr., 45), 
= 6pri^: Lk 1334 (T; WH, 2pm).t 

Sp.is, -t^os, 6, ^, [in LXX: 6. iKXcKTai, iii Ki 3^ 423 (53) 
(□n;i-!3)*;] a bird; specif., a cock, a hen: Mt 2337, Lk 133* (WH).t 

*t opoGeffia, -as, r/ (-< opos, a boundary, + tlOtjpll), a setting 0/ 
boundaries; in pi., bounds: Ac 172^.t 



324 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

opos, -ovs, TO, [in LXX chiefly, and very freq., for in;] a 

viountain : Mt 4^ 17\ Mk 9^ Jo 4'-*', ii Pe l^^^ ^1. ; opp. to /?ovvos, Lk 
36 (LXX) J 3, ^. iXaiCiv, Mt 211 24», al. (v.s. L); 6. ^uLv (2., prob. in gen. 
appos.), He 12'^\ Ee U^; 6. 5.iva, Ac T^o-^s, Ga 4^4' 25; to o., of the hill 
district as distinct from the lowlands, esp. the hills above the Sea of 
Galilee, Mt 5^ 8^, Mk 3^^ 6*6, al. ; ra 6., Mt IS^^, Mk 55, He ll^s, Re 
6^*, al. ; proverbially (cf. Rabbinic, □"•in Ipy), of overcoming difficulties, 
accomplishing marvels, opr] /xe^io-ravtiv, i Co 13^, cf. Mt IT^*^ 21^^, 
Mk 1123. 

opoCTo-o), [in LXX chiefly for IDn , also for ms , etc. ;] to dig : 
c. ace, A.7?vdv, Mt 2133; i^oXrjviov, Mk 12^; y^v, Mt 25^8 (cf. 8i-, 
i^-opvcr(T<a).f 

6p<|)ai'ds, -v, -oV, [in LXX for Din^ ;] 1. prop., orphan, father- 
less : Mk 12**^, WH, mg, Ja V''^. 2. In a general sense (as also in cl. ; 
V. LS, s.v. ; and cf. MM, xviii), her eft, friendless, desolate: Jo 14i^t 

opx^ofjiai, -ovfiai, [in LXX for ipi , etc. ;] to dance ; Mt 11^^ 14*', 
Mk 622, Lk 732.t 

OS, rj, o, the postpositive article {ap6pov vTroraKTiKov). 

I. As demonstr. pron. = oStos, dSe, this, that, also for aurds, 
chiefly in nom. : os 8c, but he (cf. ^ Se d?, freq. in Plat.), Mk 152^, Jo 
511 ; 8? /tev . . . S? 8e, the one . . . the other, Mt 21^5 22^ 25^5, Lk 2333, 
Ac 27*\ Ro 145, I Co 1121, II Co 2i8, Ju 22; neut., 8 /;i^ . . . 8 8i, the 
one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13^' 23^ Ro 92^; os (o) /xev . . . 
(5Uos (aAAo)) . . . £T€pos (-0), Mk 4.\ Lk 8^, i Co 128-io ; oSs/xcV, absol., 
I Co 1228 ; S5 ^^ . . . 6 8i, Ro 142. 

II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that ; 1. agreeing in gender 
with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case : Mt 2^*, Lk 9®, 
Ac 20^8, Ro 22^, al. mult. 2. In variation from the common con- 
struction ; (a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the 
antecedent : Mk 15^", Ga 3^", Eph 6^^, al. ; constr. ad sensum : Jo 6^, 
Col 2^^, I Ti 3^6, Re 13^*, al. ; (b) in number, constr. ad sensum : Ac 
153", II Pe 31 ; (c) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent 
(Bl., § 50, 2) : Jo 418, Ac 321, Ro 15i8, i Co 6^9, Eph l^, al. 3. The 
neut. d with nouns of other gender and wdth phrases, which thing, 
which term : Mk 3^7 12*2, Jq 139^ Col 3^*, al. ; with a sentence, Ac 232, 
Ga 21*^, I Jo 28, al. 4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (oSros or cxctvos), 
before or after: before, Mt 202 3, Lk 7*3, Ro lO^*, al.; after, Mt 1038, 
Mk 9***, Jo 1922, Ro 2\ al. 5. Expressing purpose, end or cause : Mt 
1110 (^/j,o ^ ij^df^ /jg may), Mk I2, He 12^ al. 6. C. prep, as peri- 
phrasis for conjc. : avff wv ( = dvri TovTOiv wv), because, Lk I2*, al. ; 
wherefore, Lk 123 ; e<^' w, since, for that, Ro 5^2 ; d^' ov, since (tem- 
poral), Lk 1325 ; l^ oZ, whence, Phi 320 ; etc. 7. With particles : 8s av 
{lav), v.s. S.V, lav ; OS Kai, Mk 3^9, Jo 2120, JJq 52^ al. ; 8s Kal airo^, Mt 
27^'^. 8. Gen., ov, absol., as adv. (v.s. 01!). 

oCTdKis «]dcros), relat. adv., as often as: seq. idv (q.v.), i Co 
1125,26, Relie.t 



MANUAL GKEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 325 

3<rye = os ye, V.S. ye. 

oaios, -ov (so sometimes in cl., but most freq. -a, -ov), [in LXX 
chiefly for TDn , also for lini^ , "IBP , D'^ari ;] religiously right, right- 
eous, pious, holy : of men, Tit 1^. He 7^^ ; by meton., 6. x^P^?. i Ti 2' 
(cf. De 32*); of God, Ee 15* IG^; as subst., 6 5., of the Messiah, 
Ac 227 1335 (LXX); rk 5. AavelS t. Tnard (Field, Notes, 121), Ac 

1334 {LXX)_t 

SVN. : V.S. ayios (cf. also DB, ii, 399^ ; iv, 352'', and ref. s.v. -ii^). 

6<noTT]s, -r/Tos, 17 «oo-to?), [in LXX: De 9^ (l^T') , i Ki 14", 

III Ki 9* (on, D^aPl), Pr 1432, Wi 222 S^^ 93 1430*.] ^^^^^^ holiness: 

asSOC. with hiKaioa-uvq, Lk V^, Eph 42*.t 
SYN. : V.S. aytos. 

oCTi'us « 00-109), adv., [in LXX: iii Ki 8^^ Wi 6^"*;] piously, 
holily : 6. koI StKattos k. d/AeyaTrTws (on the distinction here between these 
synonyms, v. M, Th., 24 f.), i Th 2io.t 

6aft.r\, -rj<s, rj (^o^to), [in LXX chiefly for H"^"!;] a smell, odour : 
Jo 123; metaph. (EV, savour), 11 Co 2^*'^"; of the effect of sacrifice 
(cf. ryrisy 0"'T , Ge 821, al., V.S. fitoSta), o. €i;a)Sias, Eph 52, Phi 4i8.t 

OCToi', V.S. ocros. 

oaos, -t], -ov, correlat. of too-oiitos, how much, how many, how 
great, how far, how long, as much as, etc. (= Lat. quantus); (a) of 
number and quantity: m. pi, Mt 1436, Mk 3^^ Eo 2^2, al.; n. pi. 
Mt 1712, Mk 1021, Lk 118, al. ; 7ran-es (Travra) o., Mt 13*6, Lk 4*°, al. 
seq. ovTot (ravTa), Eo 8^*, Phi 48; c. indie, Mk Q^^, Ee 3^^; c. subjc. 
Mk 328, al. ; 5. 6.v, Mt 1&^, Jo II22, al. ; {h) of measure and degree 
Mk 38, Lk 839, Ac 9^3; in compar. sent., oo-ov seq. fxaKKov, Mk V^ 
Kaff ocrov, c. compar.. He 33; seq. to(tovto, He T^^; ovtws, He 92^ 
roaovTia, c. compar. seq. oa-m, c. compar., He 1*; k<i> ocrov, inasmuch 
as, Mt 25*«>*^ Eo 11^3; (c) of space and time: Ee 21^^; «>' oo-ov, as 
long as, Mt 9^5, 11 Pe li3; ^</,' 5. xpoVov, Eo 7^ i Co 739, Ga 4^; In 
fUKpov oa-ov oaov, yet how very short a time, He 103^ (^^^^). 

OOTTCp, V.S. OS. 

ooT^oi' (Att. contr. oo-ToCr, -ov, and so Jo, I.e.), -ov, to, [in LXX 
chiefly for Oyy;] a bone: contr., Sarovv (v. supr.), Jo 1936(Lxx)j 

uncontr. (as in Horn., Hdt.), oo-rea, Lk 2439; Sareiov, Mt 232^, He 1122.t 
oCTTis, ^TLs, o Ti (also written o, ti and oTt ; v. LS, s.v. ; WH, 
§ 411 ; Tdf., Pr., Ill), in NT scarcely ever except in nom. (M, Pr., 91), 
the only instance of the oblique cases being found in Iws otov (v.s. Iws), 
relative of indef. reference (related to simple os as Lat. quisquis 
to qui), whoever, anyone who ; (a) of an indef. person or thing : in 
general statements, Mt 539. *i 13^2, and freq., Lk 142^, Ga 5*. al. ; in 
relative sentences, Mt 72^, Lk 157, Phi 3^, al.; ttSs o., c. indie, 
Mt 72* 1032 . - S.V (eav), c. subjc, Mt 1250 1312^ Jo 1413^ I Co 162, Ga 51'', 
al.; (6) of a definite person or thing, indicating quality, "either 



326 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

generic, ivhich, as other like things, or essential, ivhich by its very 
nature " (Hort on i Pe 2^^), who is such as : Mt 2^ 7^^^ Lk 2i» 7" 
Jo 8^3, Ac 7'\ Ro 62, I Co 3^^ Ga 42^, Eph P^, al. ; (c) where the 
relative sentence expresses a reason, consequence, etc. (M, Pr., 92), 
seeing that he {it, therj), and he {it, they) : Lk 8^ 10*2, Ac lO^^ 1128, 
Phi 4^ al.; {d) as in Ionic and late Greek (Bl., § 50, 1 ; M, Pr., I.e.), 
differing but little from o"s : Lk 2^ 9=*^ Ac 17i«, Re 121^. 

oo-TpdKii'os -r), -01/ (<^ odTpaKov, an earthen vessel or potsherd), 
[in LXX chiefly for izriH ;] made of clay, earthen : ii Co 4J, ii Ti 22o.t 

* ocr(f)pT)(ns, -€OJs, rj (ocr<^paiVo/i,at, to smell), the sense of smell, smell- 
ing : I Co 121' .t 

6(t4>us, -vos, 7], [in LXX chiefly for D'^JIID , also for ]^bn , etc. ;] 

the loin: Mt 3*, Mk 1^; metaph., Trepi^wvwa-dai (dva^-) t. oo-^vas, 
Lk 12^^, Eph 6^^, I Pe 1^^; regarded, as by the Hebrews, as the seat 
of generative power. He 7^'!"; metaph., Kapiro'i t. 6o-<^vos, Ac 2^''. 

oxai' (for 6t av = ore av), temporal particle, with a conditional 
sense, usually of things expected to occur in an indefinite future ; 
1. prop., xvhenever ; (a) c. subjc. praes. : Mt 62'^, Mk 14''', Lk 11^^, 
Jo 727, Ac 2335, I Co 34, al. ; eV r. 77/xepas c'/cciVt,?, ?,., Mt 2629, Mk 1425; 
seq. TOTc, I Th 53 ; {h) c. subjc. aor. (M, Pr., 185) : Mt 5", Mk 4l^ 
Lk 622, Jo 210 828 (Field, Notes, 94), 10*, al. 2. As in Hom. (LS, s.v.), 
but not in el. prose, c. indie, when (M, Pr., 167 f. ; Bl., § 65, 9) : 
c. impf., Mk 3" (cf. Ge 38«, al.) ; c. praes., Mk 112^ ; e. fut.. Re 4^ 
(Swete, in 1.); c. aor., Mk ll^^, Re 8^ (Swete, in 11.; M, Pr., 168, 248; 
Field, Notes, 35). 

0T6, temporal particle (correlat. of TroVe, roVe), when; c. indie, 
(so generally in cl., but also c. optat., subjc. ; LS, s.v.), most freq. 
c. aor., Mt 925, Mk 132, l^ 4^5, Jo V^, Ac l^^, Ro 13", Ga li^, Ee l^', 
al. ; c. impf., Mk 14^2, Jo 211^, Ro 620, i Th 3*, al. ; c. pf., si7ice, now 
that, I Co 13" (B, kyiv^ijirjv); c. praes., Mk ll^, Jo 9*, He 9^^ c. fut. 
(Hom. ; of a def. fut. as opp. to the indef. fut. of orav c. subjc), Lk I722, 
Jo 421, 23 525 1625^ Eo 2i« (T, txt., WH, mg.), 11 Ti 4^ (in all which 
instances, and c. pres., Jo, I.e., o. follows a subst. of time, and is 
equiv. to a rel. phrase, eV w or 17). 

OTOU, V.S. OCTTIS. 

oTi, conjc. (prop. neut. of ocms). 

I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; 1. after verbs 
of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling : Mt S'^ 6^2 1125, Mk 328, 
Lk 2*9, Jo 222, Ac 413, Eo 113 838 109, Phi 415, Ja 22*, al. ; elliptically, Jo 
6*®, Phi 312, al. 2. After c'l/at {yivio-Oai) : defining a demonstr. or pers. 
pron., Jo 319 1619, Ro 9^, i Jo S^\ al. ; c. pron.'interrog., Mt 82^, Mk 
4*1, Lk 436, Jo 422^ al.; id. elliptically, Lk 2*9, Ac 5*. 9, al.; 3. 
Untranslatable, before direct discourse (on recitantis) : Mt 723, mJj 216, 
Lk l^i, Jo 12", Ac 151, He lli*, al. (on the pleonastic ws oVt, v.s. 0)9). 

II. As causal particle, /or that, becatise : Mt 5*- 12, Lk 620.21, Jq iso 
527, Ac 15, I Jo 4i«, Re 3i«, al. mult.; 8ta tovto Sn, Jo 8*' IQi^ al.; 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 327 
answering a question (8ta ti), Bo 9^2, al. ; ovy on . . . dAA' on, Jo 

626 126. 

oS (prop, gen, of os), adv. of place, where, whither ; (a) in answer 
to the question "where?" (= ubi) : Mt 2^ 182«, Lk 4i«,i7 2353^ Ac V^ 
22 729 1212 1613 206.8 2510 281*, Ro 926 (Lxx)^ Col S\ He Sm^^^\ Ee 
171^ ; of condition, Eo 4^^ 52**, 11 Co 3^^ ; (b) in answer to the question 
"whither?" (=quo): Mt 28i6, Lk lO^ 2428; geq. idv, c. subic, 

1 Co 166.t 

oil, before a vowel with smooth breathing ovk, before one with 
rough breathing ovx (but improperly ovx l8ov, Ac 2"^, WH, mg. ; cf. 
WH, Intr., § 409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for ify , J^ii , •ps;] neg. 

particle, not, no, used generally c. indie, and for a denial of fact (cf . /xr/) ; 

1. absol. (accented), oiJ, no : Mt IS^^ Jo l^i 2V; oi oZ, Mt 5=^^ Ja 5^2. 

2. Most freq. negativing a verb or other word, Mt l^^ 1026. ^^, Mk 32* 
937, Jo 829, Ac 75, Eo 1^6, Phi 33, al. ; in litotes, o^k 6\iyoL (i.e. very 
many), Ac 17*, al. ; ovk aar)iJio<;, Ac 21^^; ttus . . . ov, c. verb, (like 
Heb. xb . . . b2), no, none, Mt 2422, Mk 132«, Lk 1^7, Eph 5^, al.; in 
disjunctive statements, ovk . . . aX\d, Lk 8^2^ Jq 133^ jjq g2o^ ^d. ; c. 

2 pers. fut. (like Heb. iib , c. impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mt 4J, 
Lk 4}^, Eo 77, al. 3. With another negative, (a) strengthening the 
negation : Mk 5^\ Jo 8^^ 12^9, Ac 839, al. ; (b) making an affirmative : 
Ac 420, I Co 12^^. 4. With other particles : oi /xr} (v.s. /jirj) ; ov fi-qKin, 
Mt 21^9 ; with ix-q interrog., Eo W^, i Co 9*' ^ 11^2. 5. Interrogative, 
expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne) : Mt 626, Mk 421, Lk 11*", 
Jo 43s, Eo 921, al. 

*tou(£, interj. of wonder or irony, ah ! ha ! : Mk 1529.t 
+ ouai, interj. of grief or denunciation, [in LXX for ^in , ^iX , etc. ;] 
alas ! woe ! most freq. c. dat. pers., Mt II21 23^*, Mk 13^^ 1421^ Uj- 
62*-26, Ju 11, al. ; c. vocat. (nom.), Ee 18i«' 16, i9 (cf. Is 12*, al.) ; c. ace, 
Ee 1212, seq. U, 8^3; c. dat. seq. diro (v. M, Pr., 246), Mt 18^. As 
subst., I Co 9i« (cf. Je 6*); ^ oi., Ee 9^2 11^; pi., Ee 9^2; oi., oi., oi., 
Ee 813. 

**ou8afAa)s «ouSa/ics, not even one), adv., [in LXX : ii-iv MaCg*;] 
in no wise, by no means : Mt 26 (OT).t 

ouSe, negative particle, related to ijnqhi as oi to ix-rj. 

I. As conjc, and not, also not, neither, nor : Mt 6i^, Lk 163i, Eo 
415, a\.; oi . . . ov8l Mt 51^ IO2*, Mk 422, Lk 6*3,44^ Jq 62*, Ac 227, Eo 
228, al. (v. Bl., § 77, 10). 

II. As adv., not even: Mt 629, Mk 63i, Lk 79, i Co 5^; oiSk cTs, 
Ac 432, Eo 310 (i-^x). 

ouSeis, -Sefita, -Sev (also in WH, txt., the Hellenistic forms -^cis, 
-94v, Lk 2235 2314, Ac 159 1927 2626, j Co 132, 11 Co IP; cf. BL, § 6, 7; 
M, Pr., 56a', Thackeray, Gr., 58), related to fx-qBei's as oi to /xy, no, no 
one, none : with nouns, Lk 424, Jq io41^ Eo 8i, al. ; absol., Mt 62*, Mk 
327, Lk 161, Jo 118^ Ac 18i«, Eo 147, al. mult. ; c. gen. partit., Lk 426, 
Jo 1328, al.; neut., oi8«/, Mt IO26, al.; id. c. gen. partit., Lk 936, Ac 18i7, 



328 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

al. ; ot'Stv el fxrj, Mt 5^^, Mk 9-^ al. ; c. neg., strengthening the negation, 
Mk 15*. 5, Lk 42, Jo 327, al. ; adverbially, Ac 251", Ga 4^2, al. 

ouSc'-TTojc, adv., [in LXX : Ex 10« (sh), etc.;] never: Mt T^^ Q^s 
2G»^ Mk 212, Lk 152^ Jo 7^«, Ac IQi* 11« 148, i Co 138, He lO^' ^\ 
Interrog., Mt 211^' "2, Mk 2'-''.f 

oiSe'TTw, adv., [in LXX : Ex 9^^ (D^W) * ;] not yet : Lk 23^3^ Jo 7^9 
19*1 20'-», Ac 816. t 

OU061S, V.S. oiSeis. 

ouKCTt, neg. adv. of time, [in LXX chiefly for Tiy c. neg., iib , etc. ;] 
710 longer, no more : Mt 19«, Mk lO^, Lk lb'^\ Jo 4*2, Eo 6^ Ga 32^ 
Eph 21^ He 10^8, al. ; c. neg. (to strengthen the negation), Mt 22*«, 
Mk 53, Ac 839, al. 

ouKouf, adv. {<^ovKovv, not therefore), vrith the negative element 
lost, therefore, so theti : Jo 18^'^. f 

ouy, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never 
standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then : Mt S^*^, Lk 3^, 
Jo 838, Ac 121, Eo 59, al. ; in exhortations, Mt S^, Lk ll^s, Ac 31^, 
Eo 612, al. ; in questions, Mt 13-8, Mk I512, Jo 8 1^], Eo &\ al. ; con- 
tinuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mt l^^, Lk 3^8, 
Jo 122 218 (and very freq. in this Gospel), Ac 2622, al. ; apa ovv (v.s. apa) ; 
€7r€i ovv, He 21*; ovv c. ptcp. (= eWi ovv), Ac 230, Eo 51, al.; iav ovv 
(where ovv rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mt 523, Lk 4'', 
Jo 6«2, Eo 226, al. ; <l,s oZv, Jo 41, al. 

ouTTu, neg. adv. of time, not yet : Mt 24«, Mk 13^ Jo 2* 32* 6I', al. ; 
c. neg., Mk II2, Lk 23^3; interrog., Mt 16», Mk 4*o 8i''2i. 

o6pd, -as, V, [in LXX for 137 ;] a tail : Ee 91O' i^ 12*.t 

oipdyio<5, -ov (cl. usually -a, -ov), [in LXX : De 28i2 A (Q-lOCr), etc. ;] 
of or in heaven, heavenly : Mt 5*8 61*' 20, 32 1513 1835 239, Lk 2i3, Ac 26i9.t 
** oupaco'eeK « oupavos), adv., [in LXX : IV Mac 4"* * ;] from heaven : 
Ac 1417 26i3.t 

oupai/o's, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for U^iytS (hence, often pi., 61 ov., 

v. infr.);] heaven; 1. of the vault or firmament of heaven, the sky 
and the aerial regions above the earth : opp. to rj yrj. He li**, 11 Pe 3^» i^ ; 
6 ov. Kttl ^ y^, i.e. the world, the universe, Mt 518, Mk 133i, Lk IO21, 
Ac 42*, Ee lO", al. ; oltt a/cpwv ov. Iws a. avrwv (on the absence of art. aft. 
prep., V. BL, §46, 5), Mt 243i; virh t6v ov., Ac 2^, Col 123; ^^e^ivai 

C'WS ToD ov., fig., Mt 1123, Lk 1015 ; O-T^/Xelov €»C TOV OV., Mt 161, Mk 811, al. ; 
at vc<^iXai ToO ov., Mt 2430, al. ; ra TreTfiva tov ol., Mt 626, Mk 432, al. ; 
ol 6.cTripes ToS oh., Ee 613, al.; pi. {ol) ov. (Bl., § 32, 5), Mt 3i6, Mk lio, 
Jo 132, II Pe 37,13^ al. 2. Of the abode of God and other blessed 
beings: of angels, Mt 2436, Mk 1225, Ga 18, Ee IQi, al.; of Christ 
glorified, Mk 16n9], Lk 245i, Ac 321, Eo 106, al. ; of God, Mt 53*, Eo lis, 
al.; 6 HarV o Iv roh ou. (Dalman, Words, 184 ff.), Mt 516 61, al. ; 
e-qa-avpos iv ov., Mt 62«, Mk 1021, al. 3. By meton., (a) of the inhabit- 
ants of heaven : Ee I820 (cf. ib. I212, Jb ISi^, Is 4423) • (j) as an evasive 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 329 

reference to God, characteristic of later Judaism (Dalman, Words, 
204 ff.) : Mt 2125, Mk 1V\ Lk IS^^, Jo 3^7 al. ; ^ ySoo-iActa riv oi. (= tov 

0£o£); V.S. ySacriXcta), 

OopPofo's, -ov, 6 (Lat. Urhanus), Urban : Eo 16^.+ 

Oupias, -ou, 6 (Heb. nj'TIX), fJrm/i ; Mt l^.t 

ous, gen., tiro's, TO, [in LXX chiefly for ]|N ;] the ear : Mt 13^*', 

Mk 733, Lk 2250, I Co 29 12^\ i Pe 3^2 ; h t. <io-i', Lk 421 ; eh t. S>Ta 
aKovecrOai, Ac 7^^ ; ycvecrOai, Lk 1*^ ; eicrip^^ta-Bat, Ja 5* ; €ts t. ov<i Olkovuv, 
Mt 102"; Trpos T. oJs XaAe^v, Lk 12^; ra w. o-we'xciv (MM, xviii), Ac 7"'. 
Metaph., of understanding, perceiving, knowing: Mt 13^^; 6 Ix^v 
(et Tts Ix*') °^^ iiKOva-arui, Re 2^» ^^» ^"' 29 3®' ^3> 22 ^^39 • ^ It^^v (os £x^'> " ''"'•^ 
Ixct) olira (dKOuW) d/coveVco, Mt 11^5 139' ^^ Mk 49-23 7I6 (Jj^ jj^g)^ Lk S^ 
1435 ; Tols (i. ySapcws <lKou€tv, Mt 1315, Ac 282^ (LXX) ; 5. Ixoi'tcs ovk 
ttKOuctv, Mk 8^^; w. TOV fxr] oiKomLV, Eo 11^; BiaOf. £ts to, w,, Lk 9"**; 
iTrepLTfjLr]TO<i rots w., Ac 75^.+ 

**ouaia, -as, 17 {<^ova-a, fem. part, of «/i,t), [in LXX: To 14^^^ 
II Mac 32s*;] substance, property : Lk 15^2, 13 f 

ouTe, negative particle, related to fjb^e as ov to ^^, and not, 
neither, nor : ov8tls . . . ovre, Ee 5* ; oiSk . . . ovre, Ga 1^2 ; q^t^ , , , 
Ktti, Jo 4^1; after a question with //.r; interrog., Ja 3^2; o{;^j ^ _ , o*^^^ 
neii/ier . . . nor, Mt 620, Mk 1225, Jo 421, Ac 15^0, Eo S^s.^s, Ga 5«, al. 

oijTos, avTT;, tovto, gen., TOirrou, ravrr^s, toi^ou, [in LXX chiefly for 
nj, nxt;] demonstr. pron. (related to iKetvo's as /lie to ille), this; 

1. as subst., this one, he ; (a) absol. : Mt ^^\ Mk 9^ Lk 7^*> "5, Jo 1^5, 
Ac 215, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mt 1355.56^ Mk 62.3, Jq 6*2, al.; 
eis TOVTO, Mk V^^, Eo 149; /i,€Ta tovto (Tavra ; V. Westc. on Jo S^), 
Jo 2^2 W, al. ; (6) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes) : Mt 5^9, 
Mk 335, Lk 9*8, Jo 6*«, Eo 710, al.; (c) proleptic (referring to what 
follows) : seq. ha (Bl., § 69, 6), Lk 1*3, Jo 3^9 (and freq.) 15«, Eo 149, 
al. ; seq. Sti, Lk 10", Jo 93o, Ac 241*, Rq 23, al. ; otto)?, Eo 9^7 ; liv, 
Jo 1335 ; (d) special idioms : tovto /xev . . . t. Se (cl), partly . . . 
partly. He 103^; kol tovto (tovtov, TavTa), and that (him) too, Eo 13ii, 
I Co 22, He 1112 . ^o5^' ^^^^^ ^J^(^l ^g ^^ ^^^^ Mt 27*^. 2. As adj., c. 
subst.; {a) c. art. (a) before the art. : Mt 1232, Mk 92 9, Lk 7*^ Jo 4i5, 
Eo 112*, Re 199, al. ; (y8) after the noun : Mt 39, Mk 12i«, Lk 113i, 
Jo 413, Ac 613, Ro 1528^ I Co po^ Re 22*, al. ; {b) c. subst. anarth. (with 
predicative force ; Bl., § 49, 4) : Lk 136 22 2421, Jo 2" 45* 21i*, 11 Co 13i. 
ouTws, rarely (Bl., § 5, 4; WH, App., 146 f.) ovTuy, adv. «olto9), 
[in LXX chiefly for ]5;] in this way, so, thus; 1. referring to 
what precedes: Mt 516 63o, Mk 10*3 1459, l^ 125 2^8 157, Jq 38, 
Eo 115, I Co 812, al. ; o{;tu)s /cat, Mt 1712, Mk 1329, al. ; pleonastically, 
resuming a ptcp. (cl. ; v. Bl., § 74, 6), Ac 20" 271^. 2. Eeferring 
to what follows : Mt lis 69, Lk 193i, Jo 21i, i Pe 2i5 ; bef. quotations 
from OT, Mt 25, Ac 7«, i Co 15*5, He 4*. 3. C. adj. (marking 
intensity): He 122i, Ee 16i^; similarly c. adv., Ga 1® (cl.). 4. As 
nredicate (Bl., §76, 1): Mt lis 933, Mk 2i«2 4?\ Eo 418 920, i Pe 



330 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

2^*; ov. €)^€Lv (Lat. sic or ita se habere), Ac 7\ al. ; eKaOi^tro ov. (as 
he was, without delay or preparation), Jo 4^. 5. In comparison, 
with correlative adv. : KaOd-rrep . . . ov., Eo 12*' ^, al. ; Ka6w<; . . . 
ov., Lk 113«, al. ; ov. . . . KaOm, Lk 24^*, al. ; is . . . ov., Eo S^^, al. ; 
ov. . . . u)s, Mk 42«, al; wcnrep . . . ov., Mt 1240, al.; ov. . . . ov., 

I Co 77. 

oox, V.S. ov. 

ooxi, strengthened form of ov, not ; (a) in neg. sentences, not, 
not at all : Lk l*"" 12''\ Jo 13^", al. ; {h) more freq. in questions where 
an affirm, ans. is expected (Lat. nonne) : Mt S***'*^, Lk 6^^, Jo 11^, al. 
* 6(|)ei\e'Tiis, -ov, 6 « 6<^6tAw), a debtor : c. gen. (of the amount), 
Mt 18''*. Metaph., of obligation or duty in general, with reference to 
favours received or injury done, etc. : Mt 6^^, Eo l^'* 8^^ 15^"^, Ga 5^ ; of 
sinners, in relation to God (= Heb. 2.-TI; cf. Si (Heb) B^^^ Lk IS^.t 

*t6<}>€iXTi, -rjs, 7] (<;o<^€tA.a>), a debt: Mt 18^^; metaph., one's due: 
Eo 13', I Co 73 (found also in tt. ; v. Deiss., BS, 221 ; MM, xviii).t 

6<t)eiXTj/ia, -Tos, t6 « 6<^etA.a)), [in LXX : De 24i» (nxizro), i Es 

S^**, I Mac 15^ * ;] that which is owed, a debt : Eo 4* ; metaph. (as 

Aram, nin , Xnin), of sin as a debt, Mt B^^.t 

6<j)ca«, [in LXX : De 152, ig 242 (ntzr: , X2?3), Ez 18' (mn), Wi 
1215.20^ al.;] to owe, be a debtor: c. ace. rei, Mt 1828, Lk 7"! 16^, 
Phm^^j i^_ Q ^at. pers., Mt 18^^, Lk 16^. Pass., to be owed, to be 
due: T. oe^eiXo/i-evov, Mt 1830-34. Metaph.: absol. (= Eabbinic n^n; 

V. McNeile, in 1.), Mt 23i*''i8; c. ace. rei et dat. pers., Eo 13*; c. inf., 
to be bound or obliged to do (cf. Westc, Epp. Jo., 50), Lk IT^, Jo 13^* 
19^ Ac 1729, Eo 15i'27, I Co 510 736 9i« 11-' 10, 11 Co 121*, Eph 528, 11 Th 
13 2^3, He 2^7 53. 12, I Jo 2" S^e 4i\ in Jo « ; (u<^€iAov o-Wcrrao-^at, I ought 
to Imve been commended, 11 Co 12". In peculiar Aram, sense of 
having wronged one (v.s. 6(j}eLXr)ixa ; but cf. also Inscr. afiapriav oi^etAw, 
Deiss., BS, 225), c. dat. pers., Lk ll'* (cf. 7rpoa--o^etAto).+ 

o<j>cXok', 2 aor. of o^ciAw, without the augment (v. M, Pr., 201„), 
used to express a fruitless wish ; [in LXX (with aor. indie.) : Ex 163 
(]ri^-^p), Nu 143(2) 203 (,^)^ pg 118 (119)^ (•'i?nx), etc.;] in cl. with an 

infin. (chiefly poet.), would that: with indie, aor., i Co 4^ ; impf., 

II Co 11\ Ee 31^ fut., Ga 5^2 (a practicable wish, v. Bl., 206 f., 220. 
The construction with indie, is only found in late writers. )+ 

o(^eXos, -ovs, to (<^ o^e'AAw, to increase), [in LXX : Jb 15^ 
(bm hi.)* ;] advantage, help : i Co 1532, Ja 2^^' i«.+ 

*t 64>0aX(io-8ooXio (Eec. -eia), -a?, r/ {<^6(p6a\iJ.6<;, SovAos), eye-service : 
Eph 6«, Col 322 (not found elsewhere). t 

64»0aX(j,o's, -ov, 6, [in LXX chiefly for yv ;] the eye (as in cl., 

chiefly pi.) : Mt 538, Mk 9*^ Lk 6^\ Jo 9«, al. ; tous 6. i^opvaa-eiv (fig.), 
Ga 4^^; eVdpai, Lk 62", Jo 6^; droi^a-, Ac 9'*0; id., of restoring sight, 
Mt 2033, Jo 91*', al. ; iw pLirfi 6(f>6akfiov, 1 Co 15*2 . ^y anthropom., of 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 331 

God, He 413, I Pe 3^2 ; pleonastically (cf. Thackeray, Gr., 42 f.), etSoi/ 
OL 6. iwv, Lk 230 (similarly, ib. 42« lO^^, Jo 12*0, i Co 2^, i Jo 1^ Ee 1^). 
Metaph. (as otherwise in cl. ; v. LS, s.v.) ; (a) of ethical qualities : 
o. 7rov7?/jos (meton., for envy; cf. Heb. n ]"]5r, Pr 28^2; cf. Si Id^" 

34"), Mt 622.23, Mk 722, Lk 11«4; dTrAors, Mt 622, Lk 113*; ^Tri^v/ti'a 
(q.v.) 6(f>daXfiS>v (cf. Ec 4^, Si 149), i Jq 2^6 ; 6. /xeo-rot fxoLxaXiSo?, II Pe 
214; (6) of mental vision : Mt 13i5, Mk 8^^, Lk 19*2, Jo 12*«, Eo ll^, 
Ga 3\ Eph 1^^, al, ; if o^^aA/Aois seq. gen. (on the absence of the art., 
v.Bl, § 46, 9„; M, Pr., 81), Mt 21*2, Mk 12^\ 

o<}>is, -€0js, 6, [in LXX chiefly for UfUl ;] a serpent, symke : Mt 7^", 

Mk 1618, Lk 1019 1111, Jo 314, I Co 10^, Ee Qi^; as typical of wisdom 
and cunning, Mt IQi^ 23^3, 11 Co ll^ (cf. Ge 3i) ; of Satan (cf. Ge 31, 
Wi 223.24, IV Mac 18^), Ee 129.14.1^ 202.t 

6<|>pus, -W9, ri, [in LXX : Le 14" {j^V na) * ;] an eyebrow, the 

brow of a hill : Lk 429.t 

**6x"os, -o5, 6 (<6x€o>, to carry), [in Sm. : Jb 222*, Ps 64 (65)10, 
al. ;] 1. a water-pipe, channel. 2. the intestinal canal : Mk 71®, 
WH, mg. (for d<^68/3wv).t 

**6xXe'«, -w «5x'^os), [in LXX: To 6^, m Mac 5«*;] to move, 
disturb ; hence, generally, to trouble, vex : pass., Ac 51" (act. absoL, 
= pass., to be in a tumult, iii Mac, I.e. ; cf. iv-, -irap-ev-oxXiu), and v. 
MM, xviii).t 

*t oxXo-iroicu, -S, to gather a crowd, make a riot : Ac 17^ (not else- 
where) .t 

oxXos, -ov, 6, [in LXX for ]inn (chiefly in Da th), b''j:i, bnp^, 

etc. ;] 1. a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng : Mt 923, 
Mk 2\ Lk 51, Jo 513, al. ; pi., Mt 51, Mk IQi, Lk 3^, and freq. ; 5. 
ifcavos, Mk 10*«, al.; roo-oiVros, Mt 1533; ov /xer ox^ov, Ac 241^; ^rep 
SxXov, Lk 22« ; ttSs 6 o., Mt I32, Mk 2i3, al. ; 6. ttoAv's (tt. o.), Mt 2029, 
Mk 521, al. ; 6 ttoAvs 6. {6. tt.), the popiilace, the common people, Mk 123^ 
(Swete, in 1. ; Field, Notes, 37), Jo 129 (Westc, in 1.). 2. (As also cl, 
opp. to S^/xos, q.v., and cf. Tr., Syn., § xcviii), the populace, the 
common people (cf. 6 iroXU 6., supr.), Mt 14^ 2126, Mk I212, Jo 712*'; so 
with contempt (cl.), Jo 7*9^ Jn ^ more general sense, a multitude : 
c. gen., ovo/ActTwj' (v.s. o.), Ac li^ ; p,ady]Twv, Lk 6i^, al. 

oxopwfia, -Tos, TO {<C6xvp6<a, to fortify, make firm), [in LXX for 
"IS^a , etc. ;] a strongJwld, fortress (Ps 88 (89)*o, Na 312. i* al.) ; in 

LXX and NT, also metaph. of that in which confidence is placed 
(Pr 1029 2122, al.) : 11 Co 10*.t 

**6^6.piov, -ov, TO (dimin. of oif/ov, (1) cooked meat; (2) a relish or 
dainty, esp. fish, cf. MGr. to ij/dpL, fish ; in comic poets and late prose 
writers only), [in LXX: To 22 x (B, 2i/.o./)*;] fish: Jo 69." 219.io.i».+ 

Q^fi, adv. of time, [in LXX : Ge 24ii, Ex 30^ (niy , n^S")yn ]^5), 

Je223; T^ ^.^ ig 511 (pj^3)*;] 1. long after, late. 2. late in the day, 



332 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

at evening (opp. to TrpwC) ; in late writers used almost as an indecl. 
noun (v. MM, xviii) : Mk ll^.i^ 13=*^ 3. C. gen., late in or on; and, 
in late writers also after (M, Pr., 72 f.), a sense which seems to be 
required in Mt 28i.t 

** 6\|/ia, -as, 7], v.s. 6ij/io<s. 

54/ipos, -ov «6ipi), [in LXX: De 1V\ Pr W, Ho 6M3), Jl 2^3, 
Za IQi, Je 524 (ryipi?)^), Ex 9^2 (b^EX)*;] poet, and late for o./.ios, 

Zaie; v€t6s o., i/ie Zaiier ram (v. DB, s.v. "rain"), with ellipsis of 
{-6T0S (v. WM, 740), Ja S^.t 

**o«|/ios, -a, -oy «o.//€), Za^e ; ^ alpa, Mk Ipi (Eec, WH, mg.). 
In late writers, 17 dij/M (sc. wpa), as subst., evening [in LXX : Jth 13^ *] : 
Mt 816 1415. 23 162 208 2620 27", Mk 1^2 4^5 6*' 141^ 15*2, Jo G^^, 20i9.t 

o\|/is, -€ws, 7], [in LXX chiefly for n?«flO;] 1. the act of seeing, 

the sense of sight. 2. face, countenance : Jo 11**, Ee 1^^. 3. apjjear- 
ance : Kar 6. KpLvav (v. MM, xviii), Jo 72*.t 

■**t oi)/(oi'ioi', -ov, TO (<^oi//ov — v.s. ovi/dptov — and (iieo/i-ai), [in LXX: 
I Es 4^6, I Mac 32*^ 14^2 *j] i provisions, provision-money, soldiers' 
pay: Lk 3^*, i Co 9". 2. Generally, wages, hire: 11 Co 11*; o. t^s 
d/iapr/as, Eo 623 (y. Deigg, £S, 148, 266) .t 

n 

n, TT, m, pi, p, the sixteenth letter. As a numeral, •tt' = 80, 
TT = 80,000. 

tTraviSeuw «7rayt's), [in LXX: I Ki 28^ (iyp3 hith.), Ec 912 
(tZTiT pu.) * ;] to ensnare: metaph., c. ace, Iv \6y(j^, Mt 22^^ (not 
elsewhere) .t 

Trayis, -tSos, rj « 70771/^/11) , [in LXX for TVO , 'a:0'Ci , IWl, etc.;] 

poet. (Aristoph., al.) and late for Tray?/, a trap, snare; metaph. (as 
also in cl.) : Lk 21^5, Eo lisd-xx)^ i Ti 3' 6^, 11 Ti 226.t 
flayos, V.S. "Apetos. 
* Tra'9T)|jia, -tos, to {^iracrx*^), like ird.6o<i, 1. that which befalls one, 
a suffering, affliction : pi., Eo 8i«, 11 Co 1«' ", Col I2*, 11 Ti 3", He 2io 
1032, I Pe 5»; of Christ's sufferings: ra cts X., i Pe l^^; t. Xpto-roC, 
I Pe 51; id. as shared by Christians, 11 Co 1^, Phi 310, i Pe 412. 2. a 
passive emotion, affection, passion : Ga 52* ; t. dp.apriaJi', Eo 7^. 3. = to 
Trdo-xciv, aw enduring or suffering : c. gen. obj., He 2^.t 

SJW. .- v.s. TTtt^OS. 

*Tra0riTo's, ->?, -ov (-^Trdo-xw), 1. one w/io has suffered. 2. subject 
to suffering (E, mg., v. M, Pr., 222) or destined to suffer (AV, E, txt.) : 
Ac 2623.t 

TTaOos, -ov?, Td «7r({o-xa)), [in LXX: Jb 30^1 (b^X), Pr 252o, and 

very freq. in iv Mac (1^^-, al.)*;] like TrdOrjixa; 1. that which befalls 
one, that which one suffers. 2. a passive emotion or affection (esp. of 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 333 

violent emotion), a passion, passionate desire; in NT always in bad 
sense : Col 3^ ; tt. dn/xtas, Eo 12« ; tt. lTrLdvfxia<;, I Th i^.t 

Syn, : TT. = irdOrj/jia, exc, that irddrj/jia is the more concrete and 
particular. In NT usage, tt. represents the passive, ungoverned 
aspect of evil desire, as opp. to iTnOvfj-ta, which is the active and also 
the more comprehensive term (v. Tr., Syn., Ixxxvii) ; cf. also 6pe$is. 

* iraiSaywyo's, -ov, 6 (-eC^Trats, ayw), a guide, guardian, trainer of 
boys, a tutor (disting. from BiSdaKaXos, Xen., Lac, 3, 1), usually a 

trusty slave : opp. to iraTrjp, I Co 4}^ ; fig., of the Law, tt. eis Xpurrov, 

Ga324.25_t 

iraiSa'pioi', -ov, to, dimin. of Trais, [in LXX chiefly for "1^3 ;] a little 

boy, a lad (in late and colloq. Gk. the word seems to be used with 
greater latitude and even to lose its dimin. force entirely ; cf. To 6'^' *, 
and V. MM, xviii) : Jo G^.t 

Syn. : v.S. Trats. 

iraiScia (-tct, T), -as, rj {<^TraiS€vo}), [in LXX chiefly for 1D1D;] 

1. the rearing of a child (^sch.). 2. training, learning, instruction 
(Plat., al.) : Eph 6^ ii Ti S^\ 3. As in LXX (Pr 3^1 15^, al.), chasten- 
ing, discipline : He 12^ (i^x), 7, s, n f 

iraiScoTiis, -ov, 6 «7rai8ei;'w), [in LXX: Ho 52 (iKa), Si 37^^ 

IV Mac 5^* 9®*;] 1. prop., a teacher, instructor: Eo 2^'^. 2. a 
corrector, one who disciplines (cf. Ho, I.e.) : He 12^.t 

TTaiScuu {<^7raLs), [in LXX chiefly for ID"^;] 1. as in cl., to train 
children, hence, generally, to teach, instruct : Ac 7^^, 22^, i Ti 1^*, 
Tit 212. 2. As in LXX (Ps 62, Pr 1^, Wi 3^, al., and for prob. ex. 
from TT., V. MM, xviii), to chasten, correct, chastise: Lk 23^^' 2^, 11 Ti 
225, He 127>i0; of divine chastening, i Co 11=^2^ ^ Co 6^ He 12«, 
Ee 3i9.t 

Syn, : StSda-KO), q.v. 

iraiSia, V.S. TraiSet'a. 

iraiSioOei' (<^ TraiSiW), adv., [in LXX : Ge 47^*;] = cl. ck irai86s, 
iraiSiov, from childhood : Mk 92^,t 

TraiSioc, -ou, to, dimin. of Trais, [in LXX chiefly for lb;; , also for 
i;?3 , p , etc., freq. in To in ref. to full-grown youth ;] a young child, 
a little one: Mt 28- ^'^^^ Lk 159,66,76,80 217,27,40^ Jq I621, He IpS; of 
older children, Mt 182- "- s, Mk S^a-^i 730 924, 36^ Lk 9*^' *» IS^^, Jo 4*9 ; 
in pi., Mt lli« 1421 1538 183 1913,14^ Mk 72^ IQi^^-, Lk 722 11^ is^e, 
He 213' 1*. Metaph., i Co I420. Colloq. in familiar address (as Eng. 
colloq., "lads"— V. M, Pr., 170^— and Irish use of "boys") : Jo 21^, 
I Jo 2^3. 18 37,t 

Syn. : v.S. rrais. 

iraiSiaKT], -r/s, r}, dimin. of Trais, [in LXX for nUSit^ , nipK , etc. ;] 
1. a young girl, a maiden (pn'StZ , Eu 4^2). 2. Colloq., a young female 
slave, a maid-servant (v. Kennedy, Sources, 40 f. ; Deiss., LAE, 186, 



334 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

3322) : Mt 2669, Mk 146«' ^\ Lk 12*^ 22^6, Jo IS^^, Ac 12^3 igie . of 
Hagar, Ga i^^--^'' 30(LXX). la., metaph., ib. ^Kf 

SVN. : V.S. Trais. 

TTai^o) «7rar?), [in LXX : Ge 2P 268, Ex 32^ (pnx pi.); and 
more freq. (Jg 16", al.) for pnuf pi. ;] prop., to play as a child, hence, 
generally, to play (as with singing and dancing) : i Co 10'' (lxx) ^^f^ 
€^-7rai^o)).t 

irois, gen., iraiSos, 6, rj, [in LXX chiefly for 1337 , also for lyj , n'iy3 , 

etc.;] 1. a child, boy, youth, viaiden : 6 ir., Mt 17^^, Lk 2'** 9*'^, Ac 
2012 ; ^ TT., Lk 8^1' 5* (on the artic. nom. of address, v. M, Pr., 70 f., 
235 ; Bl., § 33, 4) ; pi., Mt 2^*^ 2V^ ; of parentage, c. gen., Jo 4^1, 2. 
Like Heb. 13^, Lat. puer, Fr. gargon, Eng. boy (.^sch., Aristoph., 

Xen., al.), servant, slave, attendant: Mt S^'^'^*, Lk 7" 12*^ 1526. j^ 
late writers (Diod., LXX : Ge dl^*", al.), of a king's attendant or 
minister : Mt 14^ ; so ( = Heb. njT; l^y) tt. t. e^oi (Ps 68 (69)^^ 

Is 418, wi 213, al.), of Israel, Lk l^*; of David, Lk l^^, Ac 4'"; of 
Jesus (but V. Dalman, Words, 277 f.), Mt 1218(Lxx)^ Ac 312.26 427,30.t 

Syn. : 1. T€Kvoy, child, with emphasis on parentage and the 
consequent community of nature ; mos, son, with emphasis on the 
privileged position of heirship ; ir. refers both to age and parentage, 
but with emphasis on the former. Cf. also iraiSapLoi', TraiStW, irai^Lo-K-q, 
and V. Westc. on i Jo 31. 2. v.s. Oepd-n-wv, and cf. Thackeray, Gr., 7 f. 

iraiw, [in LXX chiefly for HDJ hi. ;] to strike, smite : with the 
hand or fist, Mt 26^\ Lk 22"*; with a sword, Mk 14*^ Jo 18i»; of a 
reptile, to sting : Re 9^.t 

naxaTiai'ii, -rj<;, 17, Pacatiana, the western part of the Province of 
Phrygia, as constituted in iv/A.D. : i Ti subscr. (Eec.).t 

■nrdXai, adv. of time, [in LXX: Is 48^''' (7S10), etc.;] long ago, 

of old, in time past (denoting past time absolutely, as -n-poTepov 
relatively): Mt 1P\ Lk lOi^, He 1^, Ju^; as adj., cart., ii Pe l^; 
of time just past, Mk 6*7 (WH, mg.), IS-^* (WH, mg., E, txt.); c. 
durat. praes. (RV, all this time), 11 Co 12i^.+ 

TTa\o.i6s, -a, -oV «7rc{Xat), [in LXX: Le 2522 261", Ca 7i3(i4) (72^), 
Jos 9*'*, Je 45(38)11 (nba), etc.;] old, ancient; opp. to vcos, xaivo?: 

oTvos, Lk 539 ; BLaOTJKr), II Co 3^* ; evToXrj, I Jo 2^ Cvfir], I Co 5^- 8 ; 6 TT. 
av6po)iros (for similar phrases, v. Westc, E'ph., 68), Eo 6", Eph 4.^'\ 
Col 39 ; neut. pi., Katva koI it., Mt 13^^; of things not merely old, but 
worn by use (as Jo, I.e., LXX), Mt 916.17, Mk 2^1.22, Lk 5^6.37 t 

Syn. : v.s. a.p^aio<;. 
*iraXat6TT]S, -rjro'i, rj (<^7raXatos), oldneSS .' ypa/x/Aaros, Ro 7*'.t 

-iraXaiou, -w (<[ TraXaids) , [in LXX chiefly for rhi pi., in pass, for 
'2 qal. ,] to make or declare old : He 81^ ; pass., to become old : of 
things worn out by time and use (cf. Jo 91^, Is 50^, al., and v.s. 
TraXaio's), Lk 12*^, He 111 (LXX) J ^^ -n-akaiovfievov, He 81^ (where this 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 335 

and the act., v. supr., may have the sense of abrogate, v. LS, Zorell, 
s.v.).t 

SYN. : yijpdcrKO). 
*irdXt], -77s, ^ (<^iraX\a), to sway), wrestling, hence, g&xxQXdXly, fight, 
contest : fig., of the spiritual combat of Christians, Eph 6^.t 

iraXiYyevco'ia, V.S. irakivyev^a-ia. 

voXiv, adv., [in LXX for 31127, etc. ;] 1. of place, hack, backwards 
(LS, S.V.). 2. Of time, again, once more: Mt 4.^, Mk 2^3, Lk 232o, 
Jo 135 (and freq.), Ac IV^, Eo ll^^, Ga 1^, He l^, al; pleonastically, 

TT. dvaKa/XTTTCtl', Ac 18^^; VTrO(TTpe(f>€lV, Ga l^'^ ; CIS TO TT., II Co 13^; TT. CK 

rpirov (Bl., § 81, 4), Mt 26*4; U htvripov, Mt 26^^ Ac 1015; TT. 8iVT€pov, 
Jo 45* 2116; TT. dvw^t,/ (Wi 19«), Ga 4^. 3. Ehetorically, again; (a) 
further, moreover : Mt 5**, Lk 13^*^, Jo 12^^, al. ; (b) in turn, on the 
other hand (Soph.; LXX : Wi 138 1523^ ^i) . ljj 6«, i Co 122i, 11 Co 
10^ I Jo 28. 

*+ iraXiryei'eo'ia (Rec. TroAtyy-), -as, rj (<^7rdXtv, ycv€(ns), new birth, 
renewal, restoration, regeneration ; (a) of persons (Plut., Phil., al.), of 
spiritual regeneration, 8ta Xovrpov TraXiKvevccrtas (gen. attr., v. Ellic, in 
1.), Tit 35 ; {b) of the world, as in Stoics, Jewish Apocal., al. (v. 
Dalman, Words, 177 ff.), Mt IQ^s.t 

ira(i,irXi]0ei, V.S. iravirX-qOeC. 
** irdfiTToXus, -iroXXr), -ttoXv (<[ Tras, ttoXus), [in Sm. : Jb 36^1, Ps 39 
(40)« 88 (89)51*;] ^^^y ^^ch, very great: Mk 81, Rec. (RV, Edd., 
TToAtv 7roXXoi)).t 

nafi<|)uXia, -as, y, Paniphylia, a province of Asia Minor : Ac 21" 
1313 1424 1538 275.t 

iracSoKcus, V.S. TravSo)(^ev<s, 

irafSoKiof, V.S. TravSoxeiov. 

* irak'-8o)(eio»' (Soklov, T), -ov, to (•<^7ra»'So;(€Vs), late form of Att. 
Trai/SoKeiov, an inn {khdn, caravanserai) : Lk lO^^.t 

* ira»'-8ox€US, -c'ws, 6 (<^7ras, Sc^^oyttai), late form of the Att. TravSoKcvs 
(T, in 1.), an innkeeper, host : Lk lO^^.t 

iraKiiYupis, -€a)s, 17 (<^ ttSs + dyupas = ayopd), [in LXX: Ho211(*3) 
95, Ez 46" (nyia). Am 5^1 (n";!2ry) *;] prop., a national festal assembly 

in honour of a god ; hence, generally, any festal assembly : He 12^^ 
(for exx. in tt., v. MM, xviii).t 

SyN. : iKKX-qaria. (q.V.), o-waywy>;. 

TracotKei (Rec, LTr., -*ci), adv. (•<[7ras, oT/cos), a word rejected by 
strict Atticists, though found once in Plat. [Eryx., 392 c) ; [in LXX : 
Ex 11 (rr^S), III Mac 3^^ (where A in each case reads -/cia, the Attic 
form, cf. Ge 50^, al.)*;] with all the household: Ac IS^^.t 

irai'OTrXia, -as, rj (<7r5s, ottXov), [in LXX: II Ki 2^1 (n^f^q), Jb 

3920, Jth 143, Wi 517, Si 46«, I, II, IV Macg*;] full armour: Lk II22; 
metaph. (cf. Wi, I.e.), t. O^ov, Eph G"' i^.t 

irat'oupyia, -as, rj (<^ Travoupyos), [in LXX : J08 9*, Pr 1* 8^ 

(nip-ir), Nu 2422, Si 1925 2122 31 (34)10 (in all cases in good or 



336 MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

indifferent sense) * ;] cleverness, in cl. nearly always in bad sense, 
craftiness, cunning, knavery : Lk 20"^, i Co 3^^ (LXX, <j>p6vr]cn^, for 

nij-iy), II Co 42 113, Eph 4}\f 

iraf oupyos, -ov, [in LXX chiefly for DTir ;] ready to do anything ; 

(a) in cl., chiefly in bad sense, knavish, crafty : 11 Co 12^^ ; (b) in 
good sense, skilful, clever (Pr 13^ 28''^).+ 

*t TTa»'ir\Y)0ei (Eec. TrafiirX-, V. WH, App., 150), adv. (^Tras, irXrjdos:), 
= cl. irafjiTrXrjOi';, with the whole multitude, all together : Lk 23^*.t 

ira.'Taxfi (Eec. -x^), adv., [in LXX : Is 24" (niSinS), Wi 29, 

II Mac 8" * ;] everywhere : Ac 212^.t 

irai'TaxoOe*', adv., [in LXX: IV Mac 13^ 15^2*;] from all sides: 
Mk 145, Rec.t 

iracTaxou, adv., [in LXX: Is 42^^ (d^3)*;] everywhere: Mk p8 
16[20], Lk 96, Ac 1730 243 2822, i Co 4i7.t 

**Tra^T€XVis, -€? «7rSs, rcAos), [in LXX: III Mac T^^ A*;] all- 
complete, entire, perfect ; ek t. TravreAe's, completely, utterly : Lk 13^^, 
He 72^ (where perhaps in temp, sense, finally ; v. MM, xviii).t 

**TT(£^TT) (Eec. -T-q), adv. «7r5s), [in LXX: Si 5022, m Mac 4^*;] 
every way, entirely : Ac 243.t 

TTdyroQiv, adv. «7ras), [in LXX: Je 31 (48)3i (n^^), al.;] from 

all sides : Mk l*^ Lk 19^3, He 9^.1 

t Trata"OKpdTa)p, -o/aos, 6 (<[[7ras, Kparcto), [in LXX: freq. in Jb 
58.17, al. (''H3;), and for DlXny , in the phrase ^co's (ku/dios) it., ii Ki 5^^, 

al., and freq. in Am, Za, Ma ; also in Wi 72^, Si 42^7 50^^' i^, and freq. 
in Jth, II, III Mac;] almighty : 11 Co G^s, Ee l^ 4^ 11^7 153 iq7,u 96,15 
2122.t 

**TTd^TOT€, adv. of time «7r5s), [in LXX : Wi II21 19^^*;] in late 
writers (once in Arist.) for StaTravrds, iKdarore, at all times, always : 
Mt 26^1, Mk 147, Lk IS^i, Jo 63*, Eo li«, and freq. in Paul. Epp. 

■ndvT(as, adv. «7r5s), [in LXX: iv Ki 5" (v. Thackeray, Gr., 
47), To 14^, al. ;] altogether, by all means; (a) without neg. (from 
Hdt. on) : i Co 16^2 j esp. in strong affirmations, surely, at all events : 
Lk 423, Ac 2122 28*, I Co 9^^; (b) c. neg. (so always in Hom.), in a 
complete negation: Eo 3^; in a partial negation (Bl., §75, 7), 
iCo5io.t 

irapd, prep. c. gen., dat., ace, with radical sense, beside. 

I. C. gen. pers., from the side of, from beside, from, indicating 

source or origin, [in LXX for ''Jplpp , Tp , by^fft ;] after verbs of motion, 

Mk 14*3, L]j 8*9, Jo 152", al ; after verbs of seeking, receiving, hearing, 
etc., Mk 811 122^ Jo 49' 62 lOis, Phi i^\ 11 Ti l^s, Ja 1^, al.; after 
passive verbs, of the agent (like vw6), Mt 21*2, Mk 12", Lk 137; absol., 
ol Trap avTov, his family, his kinsfolk, Mk 321 (cf. M, Pr., 106 f. ; 
Field, Notes, 25 f. ; Swete, in 1.) ; ra Trap' avr^s (avrwv, v/awv), one's 
means, wealth, Mk 52^, Lk 107, phi 418. 



MANUAL GEEEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 337 

II. C. dat. pers. (exc. Jo 19^^, tt, t. a-ravpiS), by the side of, beside, 
by, with, [in LXX for b^^, T^, ^ry3;] Lk ll^^ 197, Jo 1*° 4*o, 
Ac 28^*, al. ; Trap' iavrtZ, at home, i Co 16^ ; c. dat. pi., among, Mt 22^^, 
Col 416, al. ; metaph., Mt 192«, Mk lO^^, Lk l^o, Eo 2i3, Ja 127, al. 

III. C. ace, of motion by or towards, [in LXX for b'S^ • T ^7 . 

"13^3;] 1. of place, by the side of, beside, by, along : Ac 10^^^ He ll^^j 

after verbs of motion, Mt 4^^ Mk 4^, Lk 8^, Ac 4'*, al. ; after verbs of 
rest, Mt 13^ Mk 5^\ Lk 8^5, al. 2. beside, beyond, metaph. ; (a) be- 
yond, against, contrary to : Ac 18^^, Ro 1^^ 4^^ 11^^, al. ; except, 
II Co 11^* ; (b) beyond, above, in comparison with : Lk 3^^, Eo 12^ 14^, 
He 1*'9 33, al.; (c) on account of: 1 Co 12i5'". 

IV. In composition : beside, to {trapaXaixjBdviii, irapayw), at hand 
{Trdpeifxi), from (Trapappim) , amiss (Trapa/covw), past {irapipxopxj.i), compared 
with {irapopxnaS^oi) , above measure {■n-apopyLL.w). 

■napa-^alvw, [in LXX for IID , "inr, "nO hi., JTOizr, etc.;] 1. in 
Hom. (twice), to go by the side of, stand beside. 2. In iEsch., Herod., 
Thuc, al., to go past or pass over, chiefly metaph., to overstep, violate, 
transgress (Jos 7", Ez 16^9, Si 40^*, al.) : t. TrapdSoaiv, Mt 15^ ; t. cvtoXtJv, 

ib. ^; seq. avo (as ]p 1TD, De 17'^**, al.), to turn aside, fall away {cLtt. 

T^s a\ri6eLa<s, Arist., Gael., i, 5, 2) : Ac l^^.t 

Trapa-P(iX\(u, [in LXX: Pr 2^ 420 5^'^^ 22^7 (.1133 hi.), Eu 2^6 
(^buf), 11 Mac 14^^ (elsewhere as v.l.J*;] 1. to throw to or beside, as 
fodder to horses (Horn., al.). 2. to lay beside, compare (Hdt., Plat., 
al.) : Mk i^^, Eec. 3. Eeflexive, to betake oneself, come near ; of 
seamen, to cross over : cis Sa/tov, Ac 20^^. 4. In mid. = Trapa- 
/SoXcwo/xat, q.v.t 

irapd-paffis, -ews, 17 «7rapa^aivu)), [in LXX: Ps 100 (lOl)^ 

(D^Bp), IV Ki 224 A, Wi 143i, 11 Mac IS^"*;] 1. a going aside, a devia- 
tion (Arist.). 2. In later writers, aii overstepping ; metaph., trans- 
gression (Plut., al.): Eo 41^ 51*, He 22 Q^^; t. vo/xov, Eo 2^3; Iv tt., 
I Ti 2^* ; T. 7rapa/3d(T€wv x^ptv, Ga 319. 

SYN. : v.S. dfiapria. 
**^rapa-^dTTls, -ov, 6 «7rapa/?a/va)), [in Sm. : Ps 16 (17)* 138 (139)19, 
je628*;] 1, one who stands beside, the warrior who stands by the 
charioteer (cf. 7rapa/3aiVw, 1). 2. a transgressor (.^sch., irapfta.Tr]<;) : 
Ga 218, Ja 29; tt. vd/xov, Eo 225.27^ ja 2^\f 

f ■napa-pidioy.ai, [in LXX: Ge 199, iv Ki 217 (^31^9), De 1*3 

(117 hi.), I Ki 2823 ^r^ yiS), V.I.4*;] 1. prop., to force against nature 

or law. 2. to compel by force (Polyb.). 3. to constrain by entreaty 
(Ge, I Ki, 11. c.) : Lk 2429, Ac IG^^.t 

*t irapo-PoXeuojiai = cl. 7rapay8aAAop,at (ii Mac 14^8), to expose oneself 
to danger, hazard one's life : c. dat. ref., t. ^vxxi (v. M, Pr., 64), 
Phi 230 (Rec. irapa/SovA.-). Cited by Deiss., LAE, 84, 120.t 

22 



338 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

irapaPoXi^, -^s, -7 « TrapaySaXXw), [in LXX (cf. McNeile, Mt., 185) : 
Nu 23", De 2837, Ps 43 {Uy^, Pr 1«, Ez I222, al. (b^p), Si 47^7 (nyn), 

al. mult, in Si, Wi 5^;] 1. a placing beside, juxtaposition (Polyb., al.). 
2. a comparing, comparison (Plat., Arist., al.). 3. a comparison, 
illustration, amilogy, figure (Arist., al.) : Mt M^'\ Mk 3^3, He 9" ll^^; 
specif, of the pictures and narratives drawn from nature and human 
life which are characteristic of the synoptic teaching of our Lord, 
a parable: Mt 133.i", Mk 42.10, ljj g^.s-u^ al.; c. gen. ref., Mt 13i8'36. 

4. Like Heb. bmr> (i Ki 10^2, Pr l^, Si 32^, al.), = Trapoifiia, a proverb 

or gnomic saying : Lk 42^ 5^^ 6^9. 

SVN. : ■n-apoLfjLia (v. Abbott, Essays, 82 ff.). 
*+ Trapa-PooXcoo/jiai, to consult amiss, or perh. (v. LS, s.v.), a vulg. 
form of irapa-fSoX- (q.v.) : Phi 23o, Rec.t 

* Trap-ayyeXia, -a?, rj {<^ irapayyeXXoi) , an instruction, charge, com- 
mand : Ac 528 1624, I Th 42, i Ti l^- is. (In Xen., Polyb., of a military 
order.) t 

irap-ayyeXXw (<^7rapa, dyye'AAw), [in LXX for JTlQCr pi., hi., etc.;] 
1. to transmit a message (^sch., Eur.). 2. to order, command (Hdt., 
Xen., al.) : c. inf., Ac 15^ ; c. ace. rei, i Co ll^^, 11 Th 3^ i Ti 411, 5^ ; 
seq. Iva (M, Pr., 207; Bl., §69, 4), Mk 6s, 11 Th 3^2; c. dat. pers., 
Ac 1730 E, txt., I Th 411 ; seq. kiyo^v, Mt 10^ ; c. inf. aor., Mt lb^\ Mk 8«, 
Lk 829, Ac 10*2 1618 (aoristic pres. ; v. M, Pr., 119) ; id. c. neg., /-i^, 
Lk 51* 856, Ac 2322, I Co 710 ; c. inf. pres., Ac 1623, „ Th 3^ ; id. c. neg., 
/X77, Lk 921, Ac 1* 418 528.40, I Ti 13 617; c. ace, toDto, seq. Ztl (Bl., 
§ 70, 3), II Th 310 ; c. ace. et inf., Ac 233o, n Th 3«, i Ti 6i3 (Bl., § 72, 5).t 

SYN. : V.S. iirekXio. 

irapa-yii'op.ai (Ion. and late for -yt'yv-), [in LXX chiefly for Ni3;] 
1. to be beside or at hand (Horn., Hdt., al.), hence, to stand by, sup- 
port (^sch., Thuc, al.) : c. dat. pers., 11 Ti 41^. 2. to come, come up, 
arrive (Hdt., Xen., al., and freq. in later writers; v. MM, xviii; 
Thackeray, Gr., 267.2): absoL, Lk I421 1916, Jo 323, Ac 521.22,25 939 

1032.33 1123 142- 1710 1827 2118 231*'' 35 2417.24 25^ 2821, I Co 163; geq. £J5, 

Jo 82, Ac 926 154 ; ^TTi', c. ace, Lk 22^2 ; 7rpo9, c. ace, Lk 7*' 20 319, Ac 20i8 ; 
id. seq. CK, Lk IP ; Trapa, c. gen., Mk 14*3 ; dTro . . . cts, Mt 2i, Ac 131*; 
a,7ro . . . iirl . . . Trpo's, Mt 313 ; of a teacher coming forward in public : 
Mt 31, Lk 1251, He 911.+ 

Trap-ayo), [in LXX chiefly for Hliy;] 1. trans., to lead by, lead 
aside, lead into, lead foricard, etc. 2. Intrans., {a) to pass by : Mt 
99, 27 2030, Mk 214 1521^ Jo 859 E, txt., 91 ; seq. irapd, c. ace, Mk li^ ; (b) to 
go away, depart ; metaph., to pass away : i Co 73i ; mid., i Jo 28>i7.t 

tirapa-Sciy^aril^a, «8£i'/<.'v/it), [in LXX: Nu 25* (y,T hi.), Je 1322 
(Dan ni.), Ez 2817 (mh?"5), Es 4i7, Da LXX 25*;] to set forth as an 

example; in bad sense, to put to open shame: He 6^ (Polyb., Plut., 
al.).t 

-irapdSciaos, -ov, 6 (an Oriental word, first used by Xen. of the 
parks of Persian kings and nobles), [in LXX chiefly for ]3, Ge l^"-, 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 339 

al.; also for ]iy, Is 51^; D^IS, Ne 2^, Ec 2^;] 1. a park, pleasure- 
ground, garden (LXX), an orchard (in tt., v. MM, ii, xviii ; Deiss., BS, 
148). 2. Paradise, the abode of the blessed dead : Lk 23*3 ii Co 12*. 
Ee 27.t 

irapo-S^XOF^ai. \}^ LXX : Ex 23^ {HVJZ), Pr 3^2 (nsi), ii Mac 422 E, 
HI Mac 712 * j] to receive, admit ; (a) of things : Mk 42", Ac 15* I621 
2218, I xi 519 ; (6) of persons : He 12^ (i'XX),t 

*tiTapa-8ia-TpiPii, -tJs, 17, useless wrangling : v.l. in Eec. for SiaTra- 
parpi^Tf (q.v.), I Ti B^.t 

irapa-SiSwfii, [in LXX chiefly for ]n3 ;] correl. to irapa^ixpixai, 1. 
<o ^ive or hand over to another : c. ace. et dat., Mt II2" 25^*, Lk 4®, 
al. ; of being delivered up to a course of teaching, pass. seq. eis, Eo 6^''. 
2. to commit, commend : Ac 142^ IS^o^ j Pe 223. 3. to give or deliver 
up to prison or judgment : c. ace. pers., Mt 4^2^ ]y[]j ^h^ jjq 425^ jj pg 2* • 
id. seq. iwip, Eo 8^2; c. dat., Mt 525, Mk 15\ Lk 1258, Jq ign^ ^1.; id. 
seq. Iva, Jo I916 ; c. inf., Ac 12*; seq. ci's, Mt lO^^ 1722 24^, Lk 21^2, Ac 
83, II Co 411, al. ; t. Saram, I Ti 120; j^ ggq ^.^ oXiOpov aapKOS, I Co 5* ; 
with the coUat. idea of treachery (= irpo8t8w/xt), c. ace. pers., Mt 26^^, 
Mk 1411, Jo 66*, al. ; id. c. dat., Mt 26i5, al. ; pres. ptcp., 6 TrapaSiSovs 
avTov, Mt 2625, Mk 14*2, Jq 2311. 4. to hand down, hand on or deliver 
verbally (traditions, commands, etc.) : Mk 7^3, Lk I2, Ac 6^*, i Co 11^ 
15* ; pass., 11 Pe 221, Ju ^. 5. to permit (for exx. in cl., v. LS, s.v.) : 
Mk 429. ' 

**Trap<i8o|os, -ov «7rapd, 86$a), [in LXX: Jth 13^3^ Wi 52 16^7 195, 
Si 4325, ii-iv Mac 3 * ;] contrary to received opinion, incredible, marvel- 
lous : pi., Lk 526.t 

Syn. : v.s. Swa/iis. 

-irapd-Soo-is, -ccos, 17 (•< irapaStSto/At), [in LXX : II Es 7^* (T-1D^?), Je 
39(32)* (]n3 ni.), 41(34)2*;] 1, a handing down or over, transfer, 
transmission (Arist., Polyb., al., LXX). 2. tradition of doctrine 
(Plat., Epict., al.) ; by meton., of the doctrine itself : Mt 152' a, c^ 
Mk V-, I Co 112, Ga lu, Col 28, 11 Th 2^5 3«.t 

+ irapa-);T,X6u, -w, [in LXX : De 322i, iii Ki I422, Ps 77 (78)58 (K:p 
pi., hi.), Ps 36(37)1-7.8 (-,-,„ hith.). Si 30^*;] to provoke to jealousy: 
Eo 1019(I^X) 11"'!*, I Co 1022.t 

irapa-OaXdaaios, -a, -ov (<^7rapa, OaXacrcra), [in LXX: Je 29(47)^ 
(D^n J^in) , etc. ;] by the sea : Mt 4i3.t 

* irapa-Ocup^o), -5, 1. to examine side by side, compare. 2. to over- 
look, neglect : pass., Ac 6^.f 

irapo-GiiicTj, -T/s, r/ (•<7rapaTt^77/xt), [in LXX : Le 62'* (52^' 23) (j^^j5B)^ 

and in To 10^', n Mac 3^'^' ^5, v.l. for wapaKarad-^Kr] (q.v.) *;] a deposit or 
trust: I Ti 520, 11 Ti 112,14 (for exx. of this form, v. MM, Exp., iii, 
xviii) .+ 

**Trop-oii'^«, -5, [in LXX: 11 Mac 725.26, m Mac S^^ 712*;] to 



340 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 

exhort, advise: c. ace. pers. et inf. (v. Bl., § 72, 5; M, Pr., 205), Ac 
27-; absol., seq. Aeyw, Ac 279.t 

irap-aiWofjiai, -ov/tai, [in LXX for CTpS pi., etc. ;] 1. to beg of or 
from another : Mk 15^ (Rec. ov-rrep tjtovvto, v. Field, Notes, 43). 2. to 
deprecate ; (a) prop., c. neg., to entreat that not (Thuc, al.) : He 12^*; 
(b) to refuse, declme, avoid : c. ace, i Ti 4^ S^i, ii Ti 2^3, Tit 3'o, He 
12" (EV ; but V. Field, Notes, 234). 3. to beg off, ask to be excused, 
excuse (Polyb., al.) : Lk 14i8.i9 (He 122^, Field, l.c.).t 

*t Trapa-KaOe'i^onai, to sit down beside : seq. irpos, Lk 10^^ (Plut.),t 

irapa-Kaeilu, [in LXX : Jb 2'=^ (ntzr) * ;] to set beside ; act. for 
mid., to sit down beside : Lk 10^^, Rec. (for -i^ofjiai, q.v.).t 

irapa-KaXeo), -w, [in LXX chiefly for 0113 ni., pi. ;] 1. to call to 
one, call for, summon : Ac 28^*^ (R, mg. ; R, txt., entreat) ; hence (of 
the gods : Dem., Xen., al.), to invoke, call on, beseech, e^itreat : t. 
■n-aripa pxtv, Mt 26^^; t. Kvpiov, II Co 12^; in late writers (Polyb., 
Diod., al. ; rarely in LXX ; in tt., v. Deiss., LAE, I7614), also of men : 
absol., Phm^; c. ace, Mt 8^, Mk l^o, Ac 16^ al.; e. inf., Mk 5^7, Lk 
8", Ac 831, al.; seq. Iva (v. M, Pr., 205, 208), Mt 1^^\ Mk 5^8, Lk m, 
al. 2. to admonish, exhort : absol., Lk 3^^, Ro 12^, 11 Ti 4^, al. ; c. 
ace, Ac 1532, 1 Th 2^1, He 3", al. ; id. seq. inf., Ac IF^, Ro U\ Phi 42, 

I Th 4i», al.; seq. Iva (v. M, Pr., I.e.), i Co T", 11 Co 8^ i Th 4^, a-l. 
3. to cheer, encourage, comfort (Plut., LXX : Jb 4^, Is 35^, Si 432*, 
al.) : c. ace, 11 Co 1«, Eph 622, Col 22, al.; id. seq. Iv, i Th 4^8; 8i<£, 

II Co 1* ; pass., Mt 5*, Lk 162^, Ac 20^2. 

SYN. : irapaixveiw (cf. M, Th., 25). 

Trapa-KaXoTTTw, [in LXX: Is 44^ (ins), Ez 222« (nbr hi.) * ;] to 
cover by hanging something beside, to hide : metaph. (as Plat., al.), 
Lk 9*^.t 

liapa-Kara-eiiKTi, -7??, rj « TrapaKararL6-np.i), [in LXX : Ex 2280. "(10) 
(npN^5)), and elsewhere as v.l. for irapaOyKT}, q.v. ;] more usual than its 

variant in Gk. writers for a trtist or deposit : i Ti 620, 11 Ti 1^*, Rec.t 
**Trap(i-K€i|jLai, [in LXX: Jth S^'\ Si dO^^ 34 (31)1^, Da LXX 
BeP*, II, III Mac 5*;] to lie beside, be near, be present : Ro 7i^'2i.t 

Trap<i-K\T]o-ts, -€0)5, tj {<^TrapaKaXew), [in LXX: Jb 212, pg 
93 (94)19, Ho 131*, Na 3^, Is 5V» 66^\ Je 16^ {um , its parts and 
derivatives), ib. 38 (31)^ d^zm). Is 282^ 30^ i Mac IO2* 12^, 11 Mac 72* 

1511*;] 1. a calling to ones aid, summons (Thuc), hence, appeal, 
entreaty (Strab., Plut., al, i Mac 102* ; cf. Lft., Notes, 20) : 11 Co 8*. 
2. exhortation, encouragement : Ac 15^1, Ro 12^, i Co 14^, 11 Co &~ , 
Phi 21, I Th 23, I Ti 413, He 12^ ; A.o'yos (tt» tt., Ac 131*, He 1322; vlh^ 
TT., Ac 436. 3. consolation, comfort (Phalar., LXX) : Lk &\ Ac 9^1, 
II Co l*-7 7'''7»i3, II Th 2i«, Phm"; t. ypac^wv, Ro 15*; ^cos -n)s tt., 
Ro 155, 11 Co 13; TT. ToC 'lapa-qX (v. Dalman, Words, 109 f.), Lk 225.t 

** TTapd-KXrjTos, -ov « TrapaKaXew) , [in Aq., Th. : Jb 162*;] called to 
ones aid in a judicial cause (Dion. Cass.) ; hence, most freq. as 
subst., 6 TT., an advocate, pleader, intercessor (Dem., al. ; so in Rabbinic 



MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 341 

lit., KlJI^bp^B), " a friend of the accused person, called to speak to his 

character, or otherwise enlist sympathy in his favour" (Field, Notes, 
102). In NT, specif., 6 ir., (a) of Christ, i Jo 2^ (v. ICC, Jo. Epp., 
23 fif.); (b) of the Holy Spirit (AV, comforter; but v. opp. c), Jo 
1416,26 1526 167 (cf. also Abbott, Essays, 86, 97; Deiss., LAE, 339 f.; 
MM, xviii; Westc, Jo., ii, 188ff.).t 

*irap-aKoii, -^s, rj, 1. a hearing amiss (Plat.). 2. Later, as 
following inattention, disobedience : Eo 5^®, ii Co 10®, He 2^ (cf. 
TrapaKovd), and V. Tr., Syn., § lxvi).t 

**Trap-aKoXouec'w, -S), [in LXX : ii Mae 8" 9^7 E*;] c. dat., to 
follow closely, accompany. Metaph., in various senses, (a) to result : 
Mk 16t''J ; (b) to follow up, trace, investigate : Lk 1^ (so freq. in cl.) ; 
(c) to follow as a standard of conduct: i Ti 4", ii Ti 3^*^. (For exx. 
from TT., V. MM, xviii.) t 

irap-aKou'u, [in LXX: Es 33.8 (^^j; , ntrr, c. neg.) 4^* 7* 
(WTl hi.). Is 65^2 (yacr, c. neg.), i Es 4^1, To 3**;] 1. to overhear. 
2. to hear amiss or imperfectly. 3. Later (as in LXX, Polyb., Plut. ; 
also in ir., v. MM, xviii), to hear ivitho^it heeding, take no heed : Mk 
53«; c. gen., Mt 18i7.t 

irapa-KOTTTw, [in LXX chiefly for C]pt2? ni., hi.;] 1. to stoop side- 
ways. 2. to stoop to look: Lk 24^2 (E, txt.), Jo 20^'". Metaph. (v. 
Hort, Ja., in 1.), to look into : seq. eis, Ja 1^**, i Pe 1^.+ 

■napa-Xaii^dvoi, [in LXX chiefly for Upb , also for tPT , etc. ;] 

1. c. ace. rei, like irapahixopxii, correl. to TrapaStSw/At, to receive from 
another: Col 41^, He 1228; of the mind, i Co ll^^ IS^.s, Ga 1^, Phi 
49; c. inf., Mk 7*; seq. Trapd, c. gen., Ga P^, i Th 2^^ 4t\ ii Th 3«; 
T. Xpto-ToV (Lft., in 1.), Col 2*. 2. C. ace. pers., to take to or with 
oneself: Mt 2^3,u,2o,2i 171 2637, Mk 43« 5^0 9^ lO^^, Lk 9i0'28 1126 igsi^ 
Jo 19l«, Ac 153» 23I8; yvvalKa, Mt l^o.^*; fj,iff iavrov, Mt 12*5 181«, Mk 
1433; seq. jj5^ Mt 45.8 27^7; kut iScav, Mt 20^7; mid., seq.Trpos ifJiavrov, 
Jo 143; pass., Mt 24^"' ^^ Lk 1734-36. ptcp., prefixed to other verbs 
(Bl, § 74, 2), Ac 1633 2p4,26,32. metaph., Jo l".t 

* irapa-X^Y"' ^^ lay beside ; mid., (a) to lie beside (Horn.) ; (b) later, 
of sailors, to sail past : c. ace, Ac 278' ^3 f 

irap-dXios, -ov (in cl., chiefly -a, -ov), [in LXX for D^ , D^H i ?)in , 

etc., c. prep. ;] by the sea ; rj tt. (sc. x<^P«> i^^ LXX 7] irapaXia, De 1^, 
Jos 9^ Jth 17, al.), the sea coast : Lk 6^7_t 

Trap-aX\aY»i, -^s, 17 « TrapaXXdaraw) , [in LXX : IV Ki 92° (]iy|B7)*;] 

in various senses (LS, s.v.), change : Ja 1^7 1 

irapa-Xoyi^onai, [in LXX chiefly for noi pi.;] 1. to miscalculate. 

2. to reason falsely, hence, to mislead : Col 2*, Ja 122.t 
*tirapa-XuTiK<5s, -■>], -ov {<^irapakvw), paralytic : Mt 42* 8« 921 «^ Mk 

23-5,9,10^ Lk 524 (Eec, WH, mg.).t 

irapa-Xu'u, [in LXX: Je 62* 27*3^ Ez 21'(12) (nfil), etc.;] 1. to 
loose from the side, set free. 2. to weaken, enfeeble ; pass., to be en- 
feebled, esp. by a paralytic stroke : Lk 518.24, Ac 87 933, He 12i2(LXX).t 



342 MANUAL GREEK LEXICON OP THE NEW TESTAMENT 

TTapa-ii4v(a, [in LXX : Pr 12^, Da TH 11^^ (TJSy), etc. ;] to remain 
beside or near : He 7'-^, Ja l^^ ; of remaining alive, i Co 16' (WH, 
Kara-), Phi 1^* (cf. crvfj.-Trapafji€y<i})A 

** Trapa-/iu0^ofiai, -ov/xm, [in LXX : ii Mac 15** (Sm.g)*;] 1. to en- 
cotirage, exhort. 2. to comfort, console : c. ace, pers., Jo 1V\ i Th 2^^ 
51''; id. seq. Trcpt', Jo IV^.f 

SyN. : TTapaKaAeo). 
**Trapafjiu0i'a, -as, v {<-rrapa,i.veiois.ai), [in LXX: Es S^^, Wi 19^2*;] 
1. encouragement, exhortation. 2. comfort, consolation : i Co 14^.t 

SyN. : irapaK\r](TL<;. 
** Trapafiu'Oiof, -ov, to (<^7rapa/i,r^€0/x.at), [in LXX: Wi 3^^*;] 1. an 
exhortation, -persuasion, eiicouragement : Phi 2^ (cf. Plat., Legg., vi, 
773 E, al. ; v. Lft. and ICC, Phi., I.e.). 2. assuagement, abatement, 
hence, consolation (Wi, I.e., and freq. in cl.).t 

Trapa-j'ofieoj, -w, [in LXX for bbu , etc., chiefly in Pss and ii Mac;] 
to be a Trapai'o fjLo<;, to transgress the law : Ac 23^.t 

irapakofiia, -as, 17, [in LXX : Ps 36 (37)'^ (n?57p)i etc. ;] law-break- 
ing, transgression : 11 Pe 2^^.f 

t TTapa-TTiKpaiVw, [in LXX chiefly for niD qal., hi., i^p , most freq. 

in Pss and Ez ;] to embitter, provoke : absol. (yet so. t. 6e6y, cf . 
Ps 105 (106)7, Ez 25-8, al., and with t6v 0. added, Ps 5*, Ez 20-^\ al.), 
He 31' (cf. TrapaTrLKpa(r/x6<s) .f 

t irapa-iriKpacrp.os, -ov, 6 (-C^TrapainKpaivw), [in LXX: Ps 94 (95)^ 
(n2^"ip, elsewhere rendered AoiSdpT/o-is, Ex 17^; dvTiXoyta, De338, al.; 
koiSopLa, Nu 20^*)*;] provoc